Applied Biology - McGraw-Hill Books

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Applied Biology........................................................................... 11 

Cellullar Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics.......................... 55 

Chemistry....................................................................................71 

Forestry/Agriculture.................................................................. 87 

General & Human Biology........................................................ 93 

Geography..................................................................................111 

Geology...................................................................................... 119 

Integrative Biology (PAE)......................................................... 129 

Nutrition.................................................................................... 145 

Physics & Astronomy................................................................ 151 

Dushkin/McGraw-Hill Titles Listing...................................... 168 

Title Index................................................................................. 171 

Author Index............................................................................. 176 

 

Main content & new title page.in1 1 

9/29/2006 11:44:21 AM


Applied Biology..............11 

ALLIED HEALTH 

Advanced First Aid.......................................................... 14 

Biology of Aging............................................................. 29 

BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer.............................. 14 

Computers in the Medical Office..................................... 15 

CPR and AED.................................................................. 16 

EKG / ECG / Electrocardiology......................................... 17 

First Aid.......................................................................... 19 

Math for Health Professions............................................ 20 

Massage Therapy............................................................. 19 

Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical............... 21 

Medical Billing and Coding............................................. 22 

Medical Insurance........................................................... 22 

Medical Law & Ethics...................................................... 24 

Medical Office Procedures.............................................. 24 

Medical Terminology...................................................... 25 

Pathophysiology.............................................................. 29 

Pediatric First Aid, CPR & AED........................................ 29 

Reproductive Biology...................................................... 30 

ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 

Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements............................. 48 

Histology........................................................................ 50 

Human Anatomy - Lab.................................................... 31 

PUBLIC SAFETY 

ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support.............................. 53 

EMT Paramedic............................................................... 52 

Firefighting...................................................................... 54 

First Responder............................................................... 51 

Homeland Security......................................................... 50 

Cellular Molecular, Microbiology 

& Genetics...........55 

Biotechnology................................................................. 69 

Developmental Biology/Embryology............................... 57 

General Genetics............................................................ 58 

Human Genetics............................................................. 57 

Immunology.................................................................... 57 

Introductory Microbiology Laboratory............................. 65 

Introductory Microbiology-Majors Text........................... 61 

Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Multimedia........ 65 

Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Text 

Allied Health Emphasis............................................... 62 

Microbiology Printed-Supplements.................................. 69 

Molecular Biology........................................................... 56 

STDs/AIDS...................................................................... 70 

Virology.......................................................................... 57 

Human Anatomy - Multimedia........................................ 33 

Human Anatomy - Textbooks.......................................... 30 

Human Physiology - Lab................................................. 35 

Human Physiology - Multimedia..................................... 37 

Human Physiology - Textbooks....................................... 34 

One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 39 

One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks.......... 37 

Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 43 

Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Multimedia........ 47 

Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks.......... 41 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:21 AM


Chemistry......................71 

Allied Health/Nursing Chemistry (General, Organic 

and Biochemistry) 

- Lab Manuals.............................................................. 76 

- Supplements ............................................................ 77 

- Textbooks................................................................. 75 

Analytical Chemistry....................................................... 85 

Biochemistry - 1 Semester 

- Textbooks................................................................. 81 

General Chemistry 

- Lab............................................................................ 80 

- Multimedia............................................................... 81 

- Supplements............................................................. 80 

- Textbooks................................................................. 77 

Kinetics and Reaction Mechanics.................................... 86 

Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) 

- Textbooks................................................................. 72 

Organic Chemistry - 1 Semester 

- Textbooks................................................................. 82 


- Lab Manual............................................................... 84 

- Supplements............................................................. 84 

- Textbooks................................................................. 83 

Physics Chemistry 

- Lab............................................................................ 85 

- Supplements............................................................. 85 

- Textbooks................................................................. 85 

Prep/Basic Chemistry 

- Supplements............................................................ 74 

- Textbooks............................................................... 73 

Forestry/Agriculture........87 

FORESTRY 

Dendrology..................................................................... 88 

Forest Resources............................................................. 88 

Mensuration Measurement.............................................. 88 

Silviculture...................................................................... 88 

AGRICULTURE 

Agricultural Business...................................................... 89 

Agricultural Economics................................................... 89 

Agricultural Education..................................................... 90 

Animal Science............................................................... 91 

Soil Science.................................................................... 91 

General & Human 

Biology.......................93 

Biology 

Multimedia............................................................... 109 

Supplements............................................................. 110 

General Biology Majors 

Laboratory................................................................. 106 

Textbook................................................................... 104 

General Biology - Non Majors 

Laboratory................................................................. 100 

Textbook..................................................................... 95 

General Biology - Non Majors & Majors Combined 

Laboratory................................................................. 103 

Textbook................................................................... 101 

Human Biology 

Laboratory................................................................. 108 

Textbook................................................................... 107 

Geography........................111 

GIS................................................................................ 112 

Human / Cultural Geography........................................ 113 

Intro to Geography........................................................ 114 

Latin America................................................................ 117 

Map Use / Cartography................................................. 115 

Meteorology.................................................................. 116 

US & Canada................................................................ 117 

World Regional Geography........................................... 116 

Geology...................... 119 

Dinosaurs...................................................................... 120 

Earth Science................................................................. 120 

Environmental Geology................................................. 121 

General Geology........................................................... 121 

Geomorphology............................................................ 121 

Hazards / Natural Disasters........................................... 122 

Historical Geology........................................................ 122 

Hydrogeology............................................................... 123 

Meteorology.................................................................. 123 

Oceanography.............................................................. 124 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM


Paleontology................................................................. 125 

Petrology....................................................................... 125 

Physical Geology 

Laboratory................................................................. 128 

Textbook................................................................... 126 

Integrative Biology 

(PAE)...................... 129 

Animal Behavior........................................................... 130 

Biostatistics................................................................... 130 

Botany (Economic)........................................................ 131 

Botany - Non Majors 

Lab Manuals.............................................................. 131 

Textbook................................................................... 130 

Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy.................................. 140 

Conservation Biology.................................................... 132 

Ecology......................................................................... 132 

Laboratory................................................................. 133 

Environmental Science 

Introductory Texts..................................................... 133 

Media....................................................................... 137 

Evolution....................................................................... 137 

Invertebrate Biology...................................................... 138 

Limnology..................................................................... 138 

Mammalogy.................................................................. 138 

Marine Biology............................................................. 139 

Parasitology.................................................................. 139 

Vertebrate Biology 

Laboratory................................................................. 140 

Textbook................................................................... 140 

Zoology 

Laboratory - Majors................................................... 142 

Supplements............................................................. 142 

Textbook................................................................... 141 

Nutrition.........................145 

Introduction to Nutrition 

Multimedia............................................................... 147 

Supplements............................................................. 147 

Textbook................................................................... 146 

Nutritional Assessment.................................................. 149 

Nutrition and Sport....................................................... 148 

Nutrition Through The Life Cycle 

Nutrition & Human Development............................. 148 

Physics & Astronomy......151 

College Physics............................................................. 156 

Conceptual Physics....................................................... 156 

Electricity and Magnetism............................................. 162 

Integrated Sciences........................................................ 155 

Introduction to Astronomy............................................ 165 

Intro to Physical Science............................................... 152 

Mathematical Physics.................................................... 162 

Medical Physics............................................................ 163 

Modern Physics............................................................. 163 

Optics........................................................................... 165 

Quantum Mechanics..................................................... 164 

Stars and Galaxies......................................................... 167 

Technical Physics.......................................................... 164 

University Physics......................................................... 161 

Dushkin/McGraw-Hill 

Titles Listing................169 

Indexes................................... 

Title Index........................................................................... 

Author Index....................................................................... 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM

2007-2008 NEW TITLES 

Applied Biology 

2007 New Titles 

• AEHLERT 

Emergency Medical Responder................................51 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302260-4 / MHID: 0-07-302260-8 

• BOOTH 

Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical 

Careers with Student CD-ROM, 2e..........................20 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302262-8 / MHID: 0-07-302262-4 

• EDER 

Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy and Physiology, 

5e.............................................................................48 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282733-1 / MHID: 0-07-282733-5 

• GUNSTREAM 

Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory 

Textbook: Essentials Version, 4e..............................39 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246470-2 / MHID: 0-07-246470-4 

• KIDD 

Safe Firefighting - First Things First with 

Student DVD............................................................54 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312397-4 / MHID: 0-07-312397-8 

• MARTIN 

Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory 

Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e..............................43 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282734-7 / MHID: 0-07-282734-3 

• MARTIN 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s 

Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e.....................44 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282957-0 / MHID: 0-07-282957-5 

• MEDICAL COLLEGE OF OHIO 

Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CDs 1-4 

Complete Series.......................................................33 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321553-2 / MHID: 0-07-321553-8 


Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD #4 - 

Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive and 

Endocrine Systems...................................................34 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321551-8 / MHID: 0-07-321551-1 

• NSC 

Basic Life Support: Healthcare and 

Professional Rescuers..............................................14 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329690-6 / MHID: 0-07-329690-2 

• NSC 

Standard First Aid, CPR and AED with 

Pocket Guide, 2e.................................................... 17 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329693-7 / MHID: 0-07-329693-7 

• PATTON 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials 

of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................................40 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294594-2 / MHID: 0-07-294594-X 

• PFLANZER 

Experimental and Applied Physiology 

Laboratory Manual, 8e.............................................36 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250077-6 / MHID: 0-07-250077-8 

• REEDER 

Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology Crossword 

Puzzles Specially Prepared for Anatomy & 

Physiology, 4e by Ken Saladin..................................48 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340359-5 / MHID: 0-07-340359-8 

• SALADIN 

Anatomy and Physiology, 4e....................................41 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322804-4 / MHID: 0-07-322804-4 

• SANDERSON 

Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e....................15 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325480-7 / MHID: 0-07-325480-0 

• SANDERSON 

Computers in the Medical Office with 

Student Data CD-ROM, 5e.......................................15 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311213-8 / MHID: 0-07-311213-5 

• SEELEY 

Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................38 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322805-1 / MHID: 0-07-322805-2 

• SHADE 

Fast & Easy ECGs with DVD.....................................18 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297409-6 / MHID: 0-07-297409-5 

• SHIER 

Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e.............42 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321364-4 / MHID: 0-07-321364-0 

• THIERER 

Medical Terminology Essentials...............................27 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325644-3 / MHID: 0-07-325644-7 

• WISE 

Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Manual, 

4e.............................................................................44 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287509-6 / MHID: 0-07-287509-7 

• NSC 

CPR & AED, 2e ......................................................16 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329698-2 / MHID: 0-07-329698-8 

• NSC 

First Aid Taking Action............................................ 14 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322068-0 / MHID: 0-07-322068-X 

• NSC 

First Aid with Pocket Guide, 2e...............................19 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329695-1 / MHID: 0-07-329695-3 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM




• ABBOTT 

Massage Therapy Review: Passing the 

NCETM and NCETM with Student CD-ROM............19 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320929-6 / MHID: 0-07-320929-5 

• ALLEN 

Medical Language for Modern Health with 

Student CD-ROM.....................................................25 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327294-8 / MHID: 0-07-327294-9 

• BOOTH 

Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology 

for Allied Health......................................................21 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337393-5 / MHID: 0-07-337393-1 

• BOOTH 

Electrocardiography For Health Care 

Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e.......................17 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330209-6 / MHID: 0-07-330209-0 

• BOOTH 

Intravenous Therapy for Allied Care 

Personnel with Student CD-ROM............................21 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328112-4 / MHID: 0-07-328112-3 

• BOSTWICK 

Medical Terminology: A Programmed 

Approach.................................................................26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340194-2 / MHID: 0-07-340194-3 

• BROYLES 

Workbook to accompany Anatomy & 

Physiology Revealed................................................39 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340354-0 / MHID: 0-07-340354-7 

• CAMPBELL 

Homeland Security and Emergency Medical 

Response..............................................................50, 52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 

• CHAPLEAU 

The Paramedic.........................................................52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352071-1 / MHID: 0-07-352071-3 

• CHAPLEAU 

The Paramedic Workbook with Student CD............52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320532-8 / MHID: 0-07-320532-X 

• DELVE PRODUCTIONS INC 

Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM....................53 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322069-7 / MHID: 0-07-322069-8 

• DUMITH 

McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary.......26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351096-5 / MHID: 0-07-351096-3 

• FOX 

Human Physiology, 10e...........................................34 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294613-0 / MHID: 0-07-294613-X 

• FOX 

Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology, 12e..........35 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294617-8 / MHID: 0-07-294617-2 

• GRINE 

Regional Human Anatomy, 3e.................................31 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305128-4 / MHID: 0-07-305128-4 

• LONGENBAKER 

Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy 

& Physiology, 6e......................................................37 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328886-4 / MHID: 0-07-328886-1 

• LUTTERSCHMIDT 

Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical 

& Experiemental Approach with PhILS 2.0..............36 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330539-4 / MHID: 0-07-330539-1 

• McKENNA 

ACLS Basics and More with Student CD 

& DVD.....................................................................53 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301971-0 / MHID: 0-07-301971-2 


Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Online..................47 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319620-6 / MHID: 0-07-319620-7 

• NSC 

Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e.......................29 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329701-9 / MHID: 0-07-329701-1 

• NEWBY 

Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 

2007-2008................................................................22 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352205-0 / MHID: 0-07-352205-8 

• PALIN 

Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law 

Enforcement Professionals with Student CD............51 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331774-8 / MHID: 0-07-331774-8 

• SALADIN 

Human Anatomy, 2e................................................30 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329369-1 / MHID: 0-07-329369-5 

• SHADE 

Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide...............18 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351976-0 / MHID: 0-07-351976-6 

• SHADE 

Practicing ECGs.......................................................18 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331418-1 / MHID: 0-07-331418-8 

• SAEGER 

New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage 

and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM.....................20 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302582-7 / MHID: 0-07-302582-8 

• SEELEY 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329368-4 / MHID: 0-07-329368-7 

• THIERER 

Medical Terminology Word Builder and 

Communications Workbook with Flashcards...........27 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331544-7 / MHID: 0-07-331544-3 

• VALERIUS 

Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims 

Process Approach Workbook, 3e.............................23 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340210-9 / MHID: 0-07-340210-9 

• WISE 

Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e.................32 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294602-4 / MHID: 0-07-294602-4 

• WISE 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy 

and Physiology, 8e...................................................43 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296561-2 / MHID: 0-07-296561-4 

 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM



& Genetics 


• BROWN 

Benson’s Microbiological Applications: 

Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology, 

Complete Version, 10e ...........................................65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299273-1 / MHID: 0-07-299273-5 

• BROWN 



Short Version, 10e...................................................66 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299272-4 / MHID: 0-07-299272-7 

• HYDE 

Introduction to Genetics..........................................59 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110803-4 / MHID: 0-07-110803-3 

• KLEYN 

Microbiology Experiments, 5e..................................67 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299949-5 / MHID: 0-07-299949-7 

• LEWIS 

Human Genetics, 7e................................................57 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310143-9 / MHID: 0-07-310143-5 

• NESTER 

Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e...................63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321152-7 / MHID: 0-07-321152-4 


& Genetics 


• HARLEY 

Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e..................................65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299293-9 / MHID: 0-07-299293-X 

• HARTWELL 

Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e....................58 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322738-2 / MHID: 0-07-322738-2 

• STINE 

AIDS Update 2007...................................................70 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340234-5 / MHID: 0-07-340234-6 

• TALARO 

Foundations in Microbiology, 6e..............................62 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330540-0 / MHID: 0-07-330540-5 

• TALARO 

Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 

6e.............................................................................63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330947-7 / MHID: 0-07-330947-8 

• WEAVER 

Molecular Biology, 4e..............................................56 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331994-0 / MHID: 0-07-331994-5 

Chemistry 


• BAUER 

Conceptual Introduction Chemistry.........................73 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322106-9 / MHID: 0-07-322106-6 

• CHANG 

Chemistry, 9e...........................................................77 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322103-8 / MHID: 0-07-322103-1 

• DENNISTON 

General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e...................75 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322107-6 / MHID: 0-07-322107-4 

• GOLDBERG 

Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e................................73 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322104-5 / MHID: 0-07-322104-X 

• HENDRICKSON 

Laboratory Manual by Hendrickson to accompany 

General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e......................76 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282848-1 / MHID: 0-07-282848-X 

• SILBERBERG 

Principles of General Chemistry..............................78 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322105-2 / MHID: 0-07-322105-8 

Chemistry 


• CAREY 

Organic Chemistry, 7e.............................................83 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331184-5 / MHID: 0-07-331184-7 

• CHANG 

General Chemistry, 5e.............................................77 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331185-2 / MHID: 0-07-331185-5 

• DENNISTON 

Foundations of General, Organic and 

Biochemistry............................................................75 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331183-8 / MHID: 0-07-331183-9 

• SMITH 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304986-1 / MHID: 0-07-304986-7 

Forestry / Agriculture 


• KAY 

Farm Management, 6e.........................................89, 90 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 

• WILLEY 

Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e..................61 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330208-9 / MHID: 0-07-330208-2 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:22 AM


General & Human Biology 


• ENGER 

Concepts in Biology, 12e.........................................98 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322737-5 / MHID: 0-07-322737-4 

• ENGER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Concepts 

In Biology, 12e.........................................................100 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298663-1 / MHID: 0-07-298663-8 

• LEWIS 

Life, 6e.....................................................................101 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322480-0 / MHID: 0-07-322480-4 

• MADER 

Biology, 9e...............................................................102 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320928-9 / MHID: 0-07-320928-7 

• MADER 

Lab Manual to Accompany Biology, 9e....................103 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298955-7 / MHID: 0-07-298955-6 

• MADER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Essentials 

of Biology.................................................................101 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340341-0 / MHID: 0-07-340341-5 

• MADER 

Essentials of Biology.................................................98 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322479-4 / MHID: 0-07-322479-0 

• STRETE 

Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e.........................110 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284610-2 / MHID: 0-07-284610-0 



• BROOKER 

Biology.....................................................................104 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326807-1 / MHID: 0-07-326807-0 

• DOLPHIN 

Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e.................106 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299287-8 / MHID: 0-07-299287-5 

• JOHNSON 

Essentials of the Living World, 2e............................95 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330935-4 / MHID: 0-07-330935-4 

• JOHNSON 

The Living World, 5e................................................95 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325653-5 / MHID: 0-07-325653-6 

• MADER 

Human Biology, 10e................................................107 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298686-0 / MHID: 0-07-298686-7 

• MADER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Human 

Biology, 10e.............................................................108 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298690-7 / MHID: 0-07-298690-5 

• MADER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Inquiry 

Into Life, 12e............................................................100 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298682-2 / MHID: 0-07-298682-4 

• PRESSON 

Biology: Dimensions of Life.....................................97 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322736-8 / MHID: 0-07-322736-6 

• RAVEN 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322739-9 / MHID: 0-07-322739-0 

• VODOPICH 

Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e................................106 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299522-0 / MHID: 0-07-299522-X 

Geography 


• BRADSHAW 

Contemporary World Regional Geography 

2e.............................................................................116 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322272-1 / MHID: 0-07-322272-0 

• FELLMANN 

Human Geography, 9e.............................................113 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322271-4 / MHID: 0-07-322271-2 

• Klett International 

Perthes World Atlas ................................113, 115, 117 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 

Geography 


• CHANG 

Introduction to Geographic Information 

Systems, 4e..............................................................112 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305115-4 / MHID: 0-07-305115-2 

• GETIS 

Introduction to Geography, 12e..............................114 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305126-0 / MHID: 0-07-305126-8 

• PRICE 

Mastering ARCGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM 

3e.............................................................................112 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331280-4 / MHID: 0-07-331280-0 

• MADER 

Inquiry Into Life, 12e...............................................96 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330933-0 / MHID: 0-07-330933-8 

 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:23 AM


Geology 


• LUCAS 

Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e....................................120 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282695-1 / MHID: 0-07-282695-9 

• PLUMMER 

Physical Geology, 11e..............................................127 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321821-2 / MHID: 0-07-321821-9 

• ZUMBERGE 

Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 

13e............................................................................128 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298861-4 / MHID: 0-07-298861-4 

Geology 


• ABBOTT 

Natural Disasters, 6e...............................................122 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329232-8 / MHID: 0-07-329232-X 

• CARLSON 

Physical Geology, 7e................................................126 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325648-1 / MHID: 0-07-325648-X 

• CHAMBERLIN 

Exploring the World Ocean.....................................124 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331276-7 / MHID: 0-07-331276-2 

• JONES 

Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 

6e.............................................................................128 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305091-1 / MHID: 0-07-305091-1 

• McCONNELL 

The Good Earth: Introduction to Earth 

Sciences...................................................................120 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325650-4 / MHID: 0-07-325650-1 

• SVERDRUP 

Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e...................124 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325483-8 / MHID: 0-07-325483-5 

Integrative Biology (PAE) 


• CASTRO 

Marine Biology, 6e...................................................139 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321577-8 / MHID: 0-07-321577-5 

• CUNNINGHAM 

Environmental Science, 9e.......................................136 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321881-6 / MHID: 0-07-321881-2 

• HICKMAN 

Animal Diversity, 4e................................................141 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252844-2 / MHID: 0-07-252844-3 

• HICKMAN 

Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e..............142 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326098-3 / MHID: 0-07-326098-3 

• MILLER 

Zoology, 7e..............................................................141 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322807-5 / MHID: 0-07-322807-9 




Principles of Environmental Science, 4e..................133 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330446-5 / MHID: 0-07-330446-8 

• ENGER 

Environmental Science, 11e.....................................134 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330447-2 / MHID: 0-07-330447-6 

• KARDONG 

Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e..................137 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305077-5 / MHID: 0-07-305077-6 

• KAULFMANN 

Environmental Science.............................................135 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331186-9 / MHID: 0-07-331186-3 

• MOLLES 

Ecology, 4e...............................................................132 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330976-7 / MHID: 0-07-330976-1 

• STERN 

Introductory Plant Biology, 11e...............................130 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331421-1 / MHID: 0-07-331421-8 

• STERN 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory 

Plant Biology, 11e....................................................131 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283068-2 / MHID: 0-07-283068-9 

 


9/29/2006 11:44:23 AM


Nutrition 


• LEE 

Nutritional Assessment, 4e.......................................149 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244106-2 / MHID: 0-07-244106-2 

• WARDLAW 

Contemporary Nutrition, 6e....................................146 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325652-8 / MHID: 0-07-325652-8 

• WARDLAW 

Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e....................................146 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322806-8 / MHID: 0-07-322806-0 

• WILLIAMS 

Nutrition For Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e..............148 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327058-6 / MHID: 0-07-327058-X 

Physics & Astronomy 


• GIAMBATTISTA 

College Physics, 2e..................................................157 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322274-5 / MHID: 0-07-322274-7 

• GRIFFITH 

Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e........................156 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325315-2 / MHID: 0-07-325315-4 

• TILLERY 

Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 

3e.............................................................................155 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299682-1 / MHID: 0-07-299682-X 

• TILLERY 

Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 

7e.............................................................................153 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304993-9 / MHID: 0-07-304993-X 

• TILLERY 

Physical Science, 7e.................................................153 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325647-4 / MHID: 0-07-325647-1 

• TILLERY 

Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e........................................154 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329817-7 / MHID: 0-07-329817-4 

• TIPPENS 

Physics, 7e...............................................................164 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322270-7 / MHID: 0-07-322270-4 




Physics.....................................................................156 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332750-1 / MHID: 0-07-332750-6 

• KRAUSKOPF 

The Physical Universe, 12e......................................152 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331275-0 / MHID: 0-07-331275-4 

• SCHNEIDER 

Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies (Vol 2) 

with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM..............................166 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327966-4 / MHID: 0-07-327966-8 

• SCHNEIDER 

Pathways to Astronomy with Solar System (Vol 1) 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327968-8 / MHID: 0-07-327968-4 

• SCHNEIDER 

Pathways to Astronomy with Starry Nights 

Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1)......................................165 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292208-0 / MHID: 0-07-292208-7 

• TILLERY 

Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e..............................152 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329818-4 / MHID: 0-07-329818-2 

• TILLERY 

Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e..................153 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329850-4 / MHID: 0-07-329850-6 

• TILLERY 

Integrated Science, 3e..............................................155 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322273-8 / MHID: 0-07-322273-9 

10 

10 


9/29/2006 11:44:23 AM

2007-2008 NEW Applied Biology Titles 

Applied Biology ~ Contents 

ALLIED HEALTH 

Advanced First Aid.......................................................... 14 

Biology of Aging............................................................. 29 

BLS/CPR for the Professional Rescuer.............................. 14 

PUBLIC SAFETY 

ACLS/Advanced Cardiac Life Support.............................. 53 

EMT Paramedic............................................................... 52 

Firefighting...................................................................... 54 

First Responder............................................................... 51 

Homeland Security......................................................... 50 

Computers in the Medical Office..................................... 15 

CPR and AED.................................................................. 16 

EKG / ECG / Electrocardiology......................................... 17 

First Aid.......................................................................... 19 

Math for Health Professions............................................ 20 

Massage Therapy............................................................. 19 

Medical Assisting - Administrative and Clinical............... 21 

Medical Billing and Coding............................................. 22 

Medical Insurance........................................................... 22 

Medical Law & Ethics...................................................... 24 

Medical Office Procedures.............................................. 24 

Medical Terminology...................................................... 25 

Pathophysiology.............................................................. 29 

Pediatric First Aid, CPR & AED........................................ 29 

Reproductive Biology...................................................... 30 


Anatomy & Physiology - Supplements............................. 48 

Histology........................................................................ 50 

Human Anatomy - Lab.................................................... 31 

Human Anatomy - Multimedia........................................ 33 

Human Anatomy - Textbooks.......................................... 30 

Human Physiology - Lab................................................. 35 

Human Physiology - Multimedia..................................... 37 

Human Physiology - Textbooks....................................... 34 

One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 39 

One-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks.......... 37 

Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Lab..................... 43 

Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Multimedia........ 47 

Two-Semester Anatomy & Physiology - Textbooks.......... 41 

11 

HED 2007 Applied Biology.indd 11 

9/29/2006 11:54:15 AM



• AEHLERT 

Emergency Medical Responder................................51 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302260-4 / MHID: 0-07-302260-8 

• BOOTH 

Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical 

Careers with Student CD-ROM, 2e..........................20 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302262-8 / MHID: 0-07-302262-4 

• EDER 

Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy and Physiology, 

5e.............................................................................48 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282733-1 / MHID: 0-07-282733-5 

• GUNSTREAM 

Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory 

Textbook: Essentials Version, 4e..............................39 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246470-2 / MHID: 0-07-246470-4 

• KIDD 

Safe Firefighting - First Things First with 

Student DVD............................................................54 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312397-4 / MHID: 0-07-312397-8 

• MARTIN 

Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory 

Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e..............................43 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282734-7 / MHID: 0-07-282734-3 

• MARTIN 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s 

Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e.....................44 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282957-0 / MHID: 0-07-282957-5 


Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CDs 1-4 

Complete Series.......................................................33 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321553-2 / MHID: 0-07-321553-8 


Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD #4 - 

Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive and 

Endocrine Systems...................................................34 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321551-8 / MHID: 0-07-321551-1 

• NSC 

Basic Life Support: Healthcare and 

Professional Rescuers..............................................14 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329690-6 / MHID: 0-07-329690-2 

• NSC 

CPR & AED, 2e ......................................................16 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329698-2 / MHID: 0-07-329698-8 

• NSC 

First Aid Taking Action............................................ 14 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322068-0 / MHID: 0-07-322068-X 

• NSC 

First Aid with Pocket Guide, 2e...............................19 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329695-1 / MHID: 0-07-329695-3 

• NSC 

Standard First Aid, CPR and AED with 

Pocket Guide, 2e.................................................... 17 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329693-7 / MHID: 0-07-329693-7 

• PATTON 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials 

of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................................40 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294594-2 / MHID: 0-07-294594-X 

• PFLANZER 

Experimental and Applied Physiology 

Laboratory Manual, 8e.............................................36 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250077-6 / MHID: 0-07-250077-8 

• REEDER 

Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology Crossword 

Puzzles Specially Prepared for Anatomy & 

Physiology, 4e by Ken Saladin..................................48 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340359-5 / MHID: 0-07-340359-8 

• SALADIN 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322804-4 / MHID: 0-07-322804-4 

• SANDERSON 

Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e....................15 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325480-7 / MHID: 0-07-325480-0 

• SANDERSON 

Computers in the Medical Office with 

Student Data CD-ROM, 5e.......................................15 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311213-8 / MHID: 0-07-311213-5 

• SEELEY 

Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...................38 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322805-1 / MHID: 0-07-322805-2 

• SHADE 

Fast & Easy ECGs with DVD.....................................18 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297409-6 / MHID: 0-07-297409-5 

• SHIER 

Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e.............42 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321364-4 / MHID: 0-07-321364-0 

• THIERER 

Medical Terminology Essentials...............................27 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325644-3 / MHID: 0-07-325644-7 

• WISE 

Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Manual, 

4e.............................................................................44 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287509-6 / MHID: 0-07-287509-7 


• ABBOTT 

Massage Therapy Review: Passing the 

NCETM and NCETM with Student CD-ROM............19 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320929-6 / MHID: 0-07-320929-5 

• ALLEN 

Medical Language for Modern Health with 

Student CD-ROM.....................................................25 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327294-8 / MHID: 0-07-327294-9 

• BOOTH 

Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology 

for Allied Health......................................................21 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337393-5 / MHID: 0-07-337393-1 

12 

12 


9/29/2006 11:54:15 AM



• BOOTH 

Electrocardiography For Health Care 

Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e.......................17 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330209-6 / MHID: 0-07-330209-0 

• BOOTH 

Intravenous Therapy for Allied Care 

Personnel with Student CD-ROM............................21 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328112-4 / MHID: 0-07-328112-3 

• BOSTWICK 

Medical Terminology: A Programmed 

Approach.................................................................26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340194-2 / MHID: 0-07-340194-3 

• BROYLES 

Workbook to accompany Anatomy & 

Physiology Revealed................................................39 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340354-0 / MHID: 0-07-340354-7 

• CAMPBELL 


Response..............................................................50, 52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 

• CHAPLEAU 

The Paramedic.........................................................52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352071-1 / MHID: 0-07-352071-3 

• CHAPLEAU 

The Paramedic Workbook with Student CD............52 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320532-8 / MHID: 0-07-320532-X 

• DELVE PRODUCTIONS INC 

Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM....................53 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322069-7 / MHID: 0-07-322069-8 

• DUMITH 

McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary.......26 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351096-5 / MHID: 0-07-351096-3 

• FOX 

Human Physiology, 10e...........................................34 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294613-0 / MHID: 0-07-294613-X 

• FOX 

Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology, 12e..........35 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294617-8 / MHID: 0-07-294617-2 

• GRINE 

Regional Human Anatomy, 3e.................................31 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305128-4 / MHID: 0-07-305128-4 

• LONGENBAKER 

Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy 

& Physiology, 6e......................................................37 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328886-4 / MHID: 0-07-328886-1 


Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Online..................47 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319620-6 / MHID: 0-07-319620-7 

• NSC 

Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e.......................29 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329701-9 / MHID: 0-07-329701-1 

• NEWBY 

Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 

2007-2008................................................................22 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352205-0 / MHID: 0-07-352205-8 

• PALIN 


Enforcement Professionals with Student CD............51 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331774-8 / MHID: 0-07-331774-8 

• SALADIN 

Human Anatomy, 2e................................................30 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329369-1 / MHID: 0-07-329369-5 

• SHADE 

Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide...............18 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351976-0 / MHID: 0-07-351976-6 

• SHADE 

Practicing ECGs.......................................................18 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331418-1 / MHID: 0-07-331418-8 

• SAEGER 

New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage 

and Bodywork with Student CD-ROM.....................20 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302582-7 / MHID: 0-07-302582-8 

• SEELEY 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329368-4 / MHID: 0-07-329368-7 

• THIERER 

Medical Terminology Word Builder and 

Communications Workbook with Flashcards...........27 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331544-7 / MHID: 0-07-331544-3 

• VALERIUS 

Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims 

Process Approach Workbook, 3e.............................23 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340210-9 / MHID: 0-07-340210-9 

• WISE 

Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e.................32 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294602-4 / MHID: 0-07-294602-4 

• WISE 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy 

and Physiology, 8e...................................................43 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296561-2 / MHID: 0-07-296561-4 

• LUTTERSCHMIDT 

Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical 

& Experiemental Approach with PhILS 2.0..............36 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330539-4 / MHID: 0-07-330539-1 

• McKENNA 

ACLS Basics and More with Student CD 

& DVD.....................................................................53 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301971-0 / MHID: 0-07-301971-2 

13 


9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM


New 

Allied Health 

Advanced First Aid 

FIRST AID TAKING ACTION 

By National Safety Council NSC 

2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322068-0 / MHID: 0-07-322068-X 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/FATA 

First Aid: Taking Action covers the material required for a 

semester long First Aid course. The focus is teaching how to 

recognize and act in any emergency and to sustain life until 

professional help can arrive. Quality content will feature information 

based on the 2005 national guidelines for breathing and 

cardiac emergencies, including CPR, choking care and using 

an automated external defibrillator (AED). Other information 

includes bleeding control, first aid for sudden illnesses and injuries, 

and remote first aid. Information is presented in a concise 

easy-to-read manner that works as a handy reference after the 

course. A National Safety Council completion card for CPR and 

First Aid are available with the course. 

Features 

• Instructor Productivity Center includes an instructor manual, 

PowerPoint slides, and an instructor DVD with video clips of skill 

demonstrations. 

• Review! Review questions are located throughout each Chapter and 

at the end of each Chapter to help assess understanding. 

• Flexible! Appendix on Advanced Resuscitation Techniques provides 

information required for a Healthcare Provider/Professional CPR 

completion card. 

• Disaster preparation! Appendices include information on how to 

prepare for a natural disaster such as a hurricane or tornado. 

• Skills are laid out in an easy-to-follow design with step by step 

information and full color illustrations. 

BLS/CPR 

for the Professional Rescuer 

New 

BASIC LIFE SUPPORT 

Healthcare and Professional Rescuers 


2007 (August 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329690-6 / MHID: 0-07-329690-2 

National Safety Council’s-Basic Life Support: Healthcare and 

Professional Rescuers presents core content needed to meet the 

credentials for the professional rescuer CPR course. Included in 

this 100 page manual is material on rescue breathing, AED in 

cardiac emergencies, and airway obstruction. In this manual, 

technical information is presented in a way to enhance effective 

learning. Included are end of Chapter scenarios that ask students 

questions to stimulate learning. With products from the NSC you 

are getting content that meets the 2005 Emergency Cardiac Care 

Guidelines and techniques, nationally recognized completion 

cards, and superior instructors support material. 

Features 

• Coverage on the role of the professional rescuer is included. 

• Relevant end of Chapter scenarios help students prioritize threats 

and learn how to deal with the unexpected. 

• This text covers basic life support, including rescue breathing, cardiac 

emergencies and CPR, airway obstruction, and AED. 

• This text meets federal guidelines from the CDC, OSHA, and 

NFPA. 

Contents 

1. Role of the Professional Rescuer 2. Preventing Infectious Disease 

3. Victim Assessment and Basic Life Support 4. Basic Life Support 1: 

Rescue Breathing 5. Basic Life Support 2: Cardiac Emergencies and CPR 

6. Basic Life Support 3: Airway Obstruction 7. Basic Life Support 4: AED 

in Cardiac Emergencies 8. Special Resuscitation Situations 9. Advanced 

Resuscitation / Appendix A Review Questions Appendix B Answers to 

Case Scenarios and Review Questions Glossary Index 

• Controversy boxes give more information about controversial areas 

in first aid. 

• True Story boxes give real life true stories that involve the specific 

Chapter content. 

Contents 

1 Preparing to Act 2 Acting in an Emergency 3 The Human Body 4 Assessing 

the Victim 5 Basic Life Support 1: Rescue Breaths 6 Basic Life 

Support 2: CPR 7 Basic Life Support 3: Choking Care 8 Basic Life Support 

4: Automated External Defibrillator (AED) 9 Controlling Bleeding 10 

Shock 11 Wounds and Soft Tissue Injuries 12 Burns 13 Head and Spinal 

Injuries 14 Chest, Abdominal, and Pelvic Injuries 15 Bone, Joint, and 

Muscle Injuries 16 Extremity Injuries and Splinting 17 Sudden Illness 

18 Poisoning 19 Substance Misuse and Abuse 20 Bites and Stings 21 

Cold and Heat Emergencies 22 Behavioral Emergencies 23 Pregnancy 

and Childbirth 24 Remote Location First Aid 25 Rescuing and Moving 

Victims 26 Are You Prepared 27 Moving Forward 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 

Complimentary desk copies are available 

for course adoption only. Kindly contact your 

local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the 

Examination Copy Request Form available 

on the back pages of this catalog. 

Visit McGraw-Hill Education 

Website: www.mheducation.com 

14 


9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM

Computers in the Medical Office 

New 

CASE STUDIES FOR THE MEDICAL OFFICE 

4th Edition 

By Susan Sanderson 

2007 (July 2006) / 224 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325480-7 / MHID: 0-07-325480-0 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/capstone4e 

This capstone simulation using Medisoft Advanced Billing 

Software, Version 11, gives students enhanced training that 

fosters superior qualifications for a variety of medical office 

jobs. Extensive hands-on practice with realistic source documents 

teaches students to input information, schedule appointments, 

and handle billing, reports, and other essential tasks. The 

simulation is recommended for students who have completed 

the study of Medisoft Advanced Version 11 using Computers 

in the Medical Office or Patient Billing. 

New to this edition 

• Medisoft Advanced Student-at-home software (Optional Package 

Item), a full-featured software option for distance education or students 

who want to practice with the software at home. The only limitation is 

the number of patients a student can enter into the software. Otherwise, 

this is a full working version. 

Features 

• Capstone Billing Simulation teaches transferable skills. Through 

studying how to use Medisoft patient billing software in a simulated 

job environment, students develop the skills and knowledge to quickly 

learn to use any medical billing software they encounter during employment 

in medical offices. 

• Provides hands-on applications for medical assisting externship 

practice. 

• The organization of the book¿the introductory part setting the stage 

for the work experience and the On the Job section covering two 

weeks’ billing tasks--extends student billing skill. In the Introduction, 

students learn about the job environment¿the physicians in the practice, 

the work rules, and their role as patient services specialist¿and study 

the practice’s Policy and Procedures Manual, which offers a realistic 

exposure to actual work setting. In the On the Job section, each day’s 

work is clearly presented, and additional Medisoft skills are taught in 

context. 

• Medisoft Advanced patient billing software, a full-feature software 

program, is available to adopters of CAPSTONE BILLING SIMULATION- 

-it can be requested through your McGraw-Hill sales representative. 

• Capstone fits the curriculum requirements for a culminating work 

experience that permits students to integrate acquired billing skills in 

a realistic manner. 

• The billing tasks represent a realistic mix of HMO, PPO, and feefor-service 

cases. 

• The simulation format fits the curricular requirement for a culminating 

work experience that permits students to integrate acquired billing 

skills in a realistic manner. 

• Instructors can easily check student progress by utilizing a removable 

short-answer Daily Worksheet which follows each day’s task listing. 

• The print Instructor’s Manual provides all of the resources necessary 

to successfully use Capstone Billing Simulation in your classroom. It 

includes instructions for installation and troubleshooting the software, 

teaching suggestions, and answers to the quizzes, daily worksheets, and 

jobs, including hundreds of Medisoft V11 screenshots for solutions. The 

Instructor’s Productivity CD-ROM included in the Instructor’s Manual 

provides PowerPoint presentations and end-of-week solution files for 

the Medisoft applications. 

Contents 

Part 1 Introduction to Polaris Medical Group Part 2 Polaris Medical 

Group Policy and Procedure Manual Part 3 On the Job Part 4 Source 

Documents / Glossary / Index 

New 


COMPUTERS IN THE MEDICAL OFFICE WITH 

STUDENT DATA CD-ROM 

5th Edition 


2007 (July 2006) / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311213-8 / MHID: 0-07-311213-5 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cimo5e 

Computers in the Medical Office, Fifth Edition offers medical 

office training using full-featured, state-of-the-art software and 

current, realistic medical office cases while building transferable 

computerized medical billing and scheduling skills. Students 

who complete this course will learn the appropriate terminology 

and skills to use any patient billing software program with 

minimal additional training. This text/workbook introduces 

and simulates medical office billing situations using Medisoft 

Advanced Version 11, the widely used medical office software 

program. As students progress through Medisoft, they learn to 

gather patient information, schedule appointments, and enter 

transactions. Information in the text contains updated HIPAA 

standards for privacy, security, transactions, and code sets. This 

text/workbook is written for those enrolled in community colleges, 

technical institutes, and career colleges seeking jobs in 

health information management, medical billing, and medical 

office assisting. Its practical, systematic approach is based on 

real-world medical office activities. The text and software work 

together to give the student a solid background to work in the 

medical office industry. 

• Updated Government Regulations: The Fifth Edition teaches 

the most recent HIPAA standards for privacy, security, transaction 

and code sets. 

• Use of MediSoft Advanced v.11: This software is widely used 

in medical offices. Skills learned through use of this program 

in conjunction with Computers in the Medical Office provide 

students with readily transferable skills for other similar software 

programs. This software is available to adopters of the book 

through McGraw-Hill. 

• New Material: Chapter 10, “Managing Collections”, reflects 

a new feature in MediSoft Advanced. Hands-on case studies 

with realistic mix of HMO, PPO, and fee-for-service included 

earlier in the text. New--”On Your Own” hands-on exercises 

Exercise(s) in each Chapter offer guided instruction, and proceed 

from simple to complex. At the end of each Chapter, new “On 

Your Own” exercises provide students with the opportunity 

to practice applying what they learned in the Chapter without 

guided instruction. 

• Student books include a CD-ROM that contains the database 

students need to complete exercises. Students must have access 

to Medisoft Version 11, either in the classroom or lab or the At- 

Home version. Access to the Online Learning Center provides 

additional learning resources for the student. 

15 


9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM


• The Instructor’s Manual comes with an Instructor Productivity 

Center in CD-ROM format that provides test banks and PowerPoint 

TM slides. The Classroom Performance System in-class 

quizzing and classroom management system is also available. 

The Online Learning Center also has resources for the instructor. 

Additionally, instructors can use Capstone Billing Simulation, 

Fourth Edition, a detailed medical practice simulation, as a follow-up 

to Computers in the Medical Office. Capstone also uses 

Medisoft Version 11 throughout, and comes with a CD-ROM. 


• The sequence of the text has been changed to match a patient’s visit 

to a doctor’s office. 

• Outstanding New Design, using full-color graphics in screen captures 

and other book features. 

• Billing Cycle Overview in Chapter 1 gives students the “big picture” 

needed to put computing procedures in context. 

• On Your Own Exercises, a new feature, allow students to set up and 

work problems themselves. 

• Collections are covered in the new Chapter 10, allowing students 

to explore this important part of the billing cycle. 

• Posting EOBs (Explanation of Benefits) is emphasized, with numerous 

examples now provided. 

• Medisoft version 11 is used in the new edition, providing an up-todate 

approach to medical office computing and software use. 

Features 

• Office Simulation is presented in Chapters 12--15, so students can 

apply their skills to realistic situations, using reports and documents 

provided. 

• HIPAA Coverage is included in Chapter 2, providing students with 

important information on the latest guidelines. 

• For additional practice with claims case studies, an excellent follow-up 

text to Computers in the Medical Office is Sanderson/Capstone 

Billing Simulation 4e (ISBN 0-07-325480-0). 

Contents 

PART 1 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS IN THE MEDICAL OFFICE 

Chapter 1 The Medical Office Billing Process Chapter 2 Information 

Technology and HIPAA PART 2 MEDISOFT ADVANCED PATIENT 

ACCOUNTING TRAINING Chapter 3 Introduction to Medisoft Chapter 

4 Entering Patient Information Chapter 5 Entering Insurance, Account, 

and Condition Information Chapter 6 Entering Charge Transactions and 

Patient Payments Chapter 7 Creating Claims Chapter 8 Posting Insurance 

Payments and Creating Patient Statements Chapter 9 Printing Reports 

Chapter 10: Collections in the Medical Office Chapter 11 Scheduling 

PART 3 APPLYING YOUR KNOWLEDGE Chapter 12 Handling Patient 

Records and Transactions Chapter 13 Setting Up Appointments Chapter 

14 Printing Lists and Reports Chapter 15 Putting it all Together PART 

4 SOURCE DOCUMENTS Glossary Index 

New 

CPR and AED 

CPR & AED 

2nd Edition 


2007 (July 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329698-2 / MHID: 0-07-329698-8 

Nearly every two minutes, someone dies of sudden cardiac 

arrest. Automated external defibrillation (AED) could save a 

quarter of these lives. AED devices are showing up everywhere 

from industrial settings to shopping malls, and the demand for 

training is rising. And fortunately, the number of people trained 

in CPR grows every year too. National Safety Council programs 

offer the very latest techniques and AHA guidelines for CPR 

and meet OSHA standards for emergency care training in the 

workplace. And now we use Video Self Instruction to increase 

retention of the techniques. Our CPR and AED program teaches 

the average person the basics of emergency life support, and 

takes the fear out of AED use. We give you all the background 

information and skill testing you need to feel confident in the 

event of an emergency-and help save a life. 


• NEW! Video Skill Instruction: With VSI, students practice CPR at 

the same time it’s demonstrated on the video, taking their cues from 

the rescuer on the screen. VSI is shown to result in better CPR skills 

acquisition and retention than traditional teaching methods. And, it 

helps you provide consistent instruction to all students and stick to a 

tight teaching schedule. 

Features 

• Emphasis on the use of the Automated External Defibrillator (AED) 

by the layperson. 

• Contains need-to-know information and has a clear and easy-tounderstand 

presentation. 

• The Emergency Cardiovascular Care Guidelines for the layperson 

are followed in the manual. 

Contents 

Course Lessons / Basic Life Support / Acting in an Emergency / Check 

the Victim / Recovery Position / Choking (Responsive Victim) / Heart 

Attack and Chest Pain / Preventing Disease Transmission / Quick Guide 

/ CPR / Using an AED / Choking-Responsive Adult or Child / Choking-Responsive 

Infant / Recovery Position-Adult or Child / Recovery 

Position-Infant 

INVITATION TO PUBLISH 

McGraw-Hill is interested 

in reviewing manuscript 

for publication. Please 

contact your local 

McGraw-Hill office or email to 

asiapub@mcgraw-hill.com 

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 

Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg 

16 


9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM

New 

STANDARD FIRST AID, CPR AND AED WITH 

POCKET GUIDE 

2nd Edition 


2007 (June 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329693-7 / MHID: 0-07-329693-7 

Standard First Aid, CPR & AED includes content covered in a 

8 hour course. This 96 page full-color manual combines the 

content of First Aid and CPR & AED into one easy-to-use reference. 

The focus is teaching the layperson to recognize and act 

in any emergency and to sustain life until professional help can 

arrive. This manual includes Step-by-step photo sequences that 

reinforce skill development and retention. This edition includes 

the latest CPR and Emergency Cardiac Care Guidelines. 


• Standard First Aid, CPR, and AED has updated the training to incorporate 

Video Self Instruction(VSI)for CPR skills. With VSI, students 

practice CPR along with the video, taking their cues from the rescuer 

on the screen. 

• As an added bonus, all NSC instructors get exclusive access to our 

web-based Emergency Care Instructor Portal, which contains downloadable 

promotions, administrative documents, course 

• outlines, state-by-state approvals, product previews, trade show listings, 

and more. Plus, you get free student recordkeeping!Visit www. 

emergencycare.nsc.org. 

Features 

• The CPR segment teaches the principles of basic life support. You 

will also learn how to perform rescue breathing and manage a choking 

victim. 

• The AED portion of the program details key operating characteristics 

of AEDs, and shows you proper precautions and maintenance techniques. 

It also includes guidelines for meeting the state Public Access 

Defibrillation (PAD) laws. 

• The First Aid training covers all the basics: breathing emergencies, 

sudden illness and injury, bleeding, and preventing disease transmission. 

Contents 

Lesson 1-basic life support Lesson 2-acting in an emergency Lesson 

3-check the victim Lesson 4-recovery position Lesson 5-choking (responsive 

victim) Lesson 6-heart attack and chest pain Lesson 7-preventing 

disease transmission Lesson 8-bleeding and wound care Lesson 9-shock 

Lesson 10-burns Lesson 11-serious injuries Lesson 12-bone, joint, and 

muscle injuries Lesson 13-sudden illness Lesson 14-poisoning Lesson 15- 

cold and heat emergencies Lesson 16-rescuing and moving victims 

EKG/ECG/Electrocardiology 

New 


ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY FOR HEALTH CARE 

PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 

2nd Edition 

By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming, Patricia DeiTos, N. 

Virginia CC-Springfield and Thomas Edward O’Brien, Central Florida 

Institute 

2008 (April 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330209-6 / MHID: 0-07-330209-0 

Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel provides ECG 

skills training for health care students as well as health care 

personnel who are interested in mastering additional skills. The 

text includes the essential skills needed to perform an ECG, including 

anatomy of the heart, basic characteristics, equipment, 

appropriate intervention, and other technical applications, such 

as Holter monitoring and stress testing. Emphasis throughout 

the text is placed on troubleshooting. 


• NEW! Text is now 4-color. 

• Increased number of exercises including new, more realistic ECG 

strips. Many questions have been added to the troubleshooting feature. 

• The updated Student CD-ROM provides video, audio, and illustrations 

with interactive exercises to bring the competencies presented 

in the text to life. Key terms are defined and pronounced correctly. 

Practicing Law & Ethics, Providing Safety and Infection Control, Patient 

Education and Communication, and Troubleshooting Activities include 

critical-thinking questions. There are also drag-and-drop exercises in 

each Chapter to reinforce the student’s knowledge of anatomy, supplies, 

and equipment discussed in the text. Interactive Questions provide additional 

review and suggest areas for improvement. The CD-ROM can 

be used for traditional, hybrid, and distance learning classes. 

Features 

• Troubleshooting features identify problems which may arise when 

performing an ECG and provide suggested solutions. These help promote 

critical thinking and prepare students for real life situations. 

• Safety and Infection Control features provide tips and techniques to 

provide safe care to patients and prevent the spread of infection. 

• Patient Education and Communication provides suggestions for 

communicating effectively, both orally and in writing, and provides 

for patient education related to the ECG. 

• Law and Ethics features provide information about HIPAA, legal 

responsibilities, limitations, and implications, as well as performing 

duties with established ethical practices. 

• Critical Thinking and Interactive Questions provide review and suggest 

areas for improvement. 

• The print Instructor’s Manual provides an overview of the student text, 

suggestions for implementing the Interactive Drill, Practice, and Review 

CD-ROM included with the student text, teaching suggestions, correlation 

charts, and answer keys. The Instructor’s Manual also includes an 

Instructor’s Productivity Center CD-ROM which includes PowerPoint 

presentations and EZ Test test generator. 

17 


9/29/2006 11:54:16 AM


Contents 

Chapter 1-Role of the Electrocardiographer Chapter 2-The Cardiovascular 

System Chapter 3-The Electrocardiograph Chapter 4-Performing 

a 12-Lead ECG Chapter 5-ECG Interpretation and Clinical Significance 

Chapter 6-Exercise Electrocardiography Chapter 7-Ambulatory Monitoring 

/ Appendix A-Competency Checklist Appendix B-Common Cardiac 

Medications Appendix C-Abbreviations/Symbols / Glossary 

New 

POCKET ECGS 

A Quick Information Guide 

By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus 

2008 (September 2006) / 160 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351976-0 / MHID: 0-07-351976-6 

This book is a portable, easy to view, quick reference pocket 

guide. It puts the key points about how to recognize the various 

dysrhythmias and cardiac conditions at the fingertips of the 

practitioner allowing them to quickly identify what they see 

in the field and/or clinical setting. It is also a useful tool in the 

classroom for the student to quickly look up key information. 

There is a short introduction that talks about the location of the 

heart, lead placement and the nine step process for interpreting 

the various wave forms and characteristics. It briefly describes 

the normal and abnormal features found on ECG tracings. It 

visually demonstrates how to calculate the heart rate, identify 

irregularities and identify and measure the various waveforms, 

intervals and segments. The introductory information is followed 

by Chapters, broken out by where the dysrhythmias originate 

(i.e., sinus, atrial, junctional, ventricular, AV heart block), on the 

key characteristics of various dysrhythmias and conditions that 

can be detected through the use of the electrocardiogram. 

Features 

• It is small enough to be tucked away in a pocket so it can be conveniently 

viewed by the student or practitioner at any time. 

• Its visually simplistic and colorful design makes it easy to find 

information quickly, even under the pressures of the field or clinical 

environment. 

• Key information is bulleted, “to the point” and easy to understand 

making it useful while actively working to interpret an ECG tracing. 

• Sample tracings include figures of the heart that illustrate where 

each dysrhythmia originates and how it occurs. This helps the student 

understand the ECG dysrhythmia rather than just memorizing strips. 

• Each Chapter has a different color margin to allow the student to 

quickly find information. 

• The Chapter openers give characteristics common to each days 

thus summarizing the key points for students to remember. This is a 

helpful tool for students to quickly reference when analyzing ECGs in 

the field. 

• Key values for each waveform, interval and segment are listed. 

• Characteristics for each dysrhythmia are listed in simple to view 

tables. 

Contents 

Ch 1. The Electrocardiogram Ch 2. Analyzing the ECG Ch 3. Sinus 

Dysrhythmias Ch 4. Atrial Dysrhythmias Ch 5. Junctional Dysrhythmias 

Ch 6. Ventricular Dysrhythmias Ch 7. AV Heart Blocks Ch 8. Electrical 

Axis Ch 9. Hypertrophy, Bundle Branch Block, and Preexcitation Ch 10. 

Myocardial Ischemia and Infarction Ch 11. Other Cardiac Conditions 

New 

PRACTICING ECGs 

By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus 

2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331418-1 / MHID: 0-07-331418-8 

Practicing ECG’s, by Bruce Shade, is a practice workbook to 

help refine a student’s skill in reading ECG tracings. There will 

be approximately 500 rhythm strips which will include both 

3 and 12 lead. The strips will be a compilation of both simple 

and complex in order to test the student’s knowledge and to 

give them a variety of different scenarios. 

Features 

• The use of 9 second tracings rather than just 6 second tracings will 

allow for a more accurate interpretation and more realistic image. 

• The use of 500 different strips gives students a variety of scenarios 

to interpret 

• This workbook includes both 3-lead dysrhythmia interpretation and 

12 lead analysis to attract beginning and advanced students. 

• A DVD will be included with each copy of the student text. There 

will be numerous practice strips showing both 3 and 12 lead. Other 

features of the DVD include a virtual caliper, and an “eProfessor”, to 

assist students in identifying strips correctly. 

Contents 

Chapter 1: ecg assessment and interpretation review Chapter 2: sinus 

node dysrhythmias Chapter 3: atrial dysrhythmias Chapter 4: junctional 

dysrhythmias Chapter 5: ventricular dysrhythmias Chapter 6: 

av heart blocks Chapter 7: other conditions Chapter 8: assess your 

knowledge-pretest Chapter 9: 12 lead ecgs Chapter 10: assess your 

knowledge-final exam 

New 

FAST & EASY ECGS WITH DVD 

By Bruce Shade, Cuyahoga CC-Metro Campus and Keith Wesley 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297409-6 / MHID: 0-07-297409-5 

Fast and Easy ECGs: A Self-Paced Learning Program brings the 

classroom to the student! Organized using the 5-step interpretation 

approach, concepts are taught with a combination of 

repetition, anatomical and physiological understanding of the 

dysrhythmias and practice. Stimulating sidebars highlight key 

concepts and provide instructor notes, critical thinking questions, 

and clinical tidbits. The ECG Mentor Companion DVD 

brings an ECG instructor (co-author Dr. Keith Wesley) to the 

reader with presentations, demonstrations and animations of 

difficult-to-grasp and key concepts. Fast and Easy ECGs covers 

basic ECG interpretation and introduces the reader to concepts 

in 12-lead ECG interpretation. 

Features 

• The ECG Mentor DVD! The companion DVD provides approximately 

100 minutes of presentations on key ECG topics, demonstrations of 

basic techniques and animated concepts of heart anatomy and electrophysiology. 

• Practice Makes Perfect Exercises! Approximately 200 Practice Makes 

Perfect Exercises are located throughout the textbook. 

18 


9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM

• 

Massage Therapy 

Outstanding Art Package! The text and The ECG Mentor are highly 

visual. Approximately 500 pieces of full-color art uniquely illustrate important 

concepts, anatomical and physiological causes of dysrhythmias 

and lots of practice ECG strips 

Contents 

1 Anatomy and Electrophysiology of the Heart 2 The Electrocardiogram 

3 Heart Rate 4 Regularity 5 P Waves 6 QRS Complexes 7 PR Intervals 

8 Origin and Clinical Aspects of Sinus Node Dysrhythmias 9 Origin 

and Clinical Aspects of Atrial Dysrhythmias 10 Origin and Clinical 

Aspects of Junctional Dysrhythmias 11 Origin and Clinical Aspects of 

Ventricular Dysrhythmias 12 Origin and Clinical Aspects of AV Heart 

Blocks 13 Electrical Axis 14 Hypertrophy, Bundle Branch Block, and 

Preexcitation 15 Myocardial Ischemia and Infarction 16 Other Cardiac 

Conditions and the ECG 

New 

First Aid 

FIRST AID WITH POCKET GUIDE 

2nd Edition 


2007 (July 2006) 

ISBN-13: 0-07-329695-1 / MHID: 0-07-329695-3 

First Aid is a 64-page full-color manual that covers the material 

necessary for a 3.5 to 4 hour Basic First Aid course. The layperson 

(not a health care provider) is the audience for the manual 

and course. The focus is teaching a layperson to recognize an 

emergency and take action in an emergency until professional 

help arrives. Guidelines of care are derived from the national 

guidelines such as Emergency Cardiovascular Care and the 

American Burn Association. The manual focuses on needto-know 

information and has a clear and easy to understand 

presentation. 

Contents 

Acting in an Emergency / Check the Victim / Recovery Position / Choking 

(Responsive Victim) / Heart Attack and Chest Pain / Preventing Disease 

Transmission / Bleeding and Wound Care / Shock / Burns / Serious 

Injuries / Bone, Joint, and Muscle Injuries / Sudden Illness / Poisoning 

/ Cold and Heat Emergencies / Rescuing and Moving Victims 

New 


MASSAGE THERAPY REVIEW 

Passing the NCETMB and NCETM with Student 

CD-ROM 

By Laura Abbott, Georgia State University 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320929-6 / MHID: 0-07-320929-5 

Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and NCETM 

Exams is designed to help massage therapists prepare for the National 

Certification Exam for Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork 

(NCETMB) AND the National Certification Exam for Therapeutic 

Massage (NCETM). The certifying exam, National Certification 

Board for Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork (NCBTMB), 

broke into two separate sections last year, with the former being 

more robust, including additional oriental modalities. The exam 

reviews are a thorough study of a broad range of material; new 

graduates find it stressful, as they must pass in order to practice 

as a licensed professional in most states. This is the only review 

text that offers questions, answers, and explanations in the same 

form and organization as the exam itself. A high first time fail 

rate combined with the fact that graduates must pass this exam 

in order work as a professional, makes Massage Therapy Review: 

Passing the NCETMB and NCETM Exams an excellent choice. 

A richly illustrated text, a Prep Course Outline, a 200-page 

Anatomy and Physiology Outline, and a CD containing 980 

test questions provides a comprehensive review presented in 

a clearly written style. 

Features 

• The only exam review program that offers questions and answers and 

explanations in the same form and organization as the exam itself. 

• This text provides a highly clinical and practical perspective. 

• The text and Student CD-ROM offer the most complete exam review 

and testing to enhance student success on the NCBTMB and NCETM 

Exams. 

• Review questions with an answer key highlight the most important 

features of a Chapter. 

• Boxed Study Tips give the student bits of advice to remember when 

taking the exam. 

• Mnemonic devices, always useful to the student absorbing large 

amounts of information, are used throughout the book. 

• The text lists conditions and makes clear what is indicated and 

contraindicated to aid students in their client assessments. The same 

purpose is served with the inclusion of pathological conditions within 

the anatomy review. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








• Review materials at the end of Chapters are detailed and pose wellwritten, 

accurate questions with their answers readily available. 

• Questions are set up in a multiple-choice format, which is the same 

used on the exam. Correct answers as well as the answer explanations 

are provided, giving a more beneficial review and understanding of the 

information to the student. 

Contents 

Chapter 1 General Knowledge of Body Systems Chapter 2 Detailed 

Knowledge of Anatomy, Physiology, and Kinesiology Chapter 3 Pathology 

Chapter 4 Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork Assessment 

Chapter 5 Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork Application Chapter 6 

Professional Standards, Ethics, Business and Legal Practices Chapter 7 

Eastern Modalities (NCETMB Only) Appendix A: Prep Course Outline 

19 


9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM


New 

NEW FOUNDATIONS IN THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE 

AND BODYWORK WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 

By Jan Saeger, Keiser College and Donna Kyle-Brown, Blue Cliff 

College 

2008 (February 2007) / 736 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302582-7 / MHID: 0-07-302582-8 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/saegermassage 

New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork offers 

a core curriculum of fundamental principles and practical 

applications for beginning students as well as practitioners in 

the field who seek a desk reference and review for continuing 

education. This text also goes beyond the core curriculum by 

addressing such topics as massage for hospice patients and 

survivors of abuse as well as massage routines for common 

pathologies (including carpal tunnel syndrome, thoracic outlet 

syndrome, and fibromyalgia). With Exam Points highlighted 

throughout the text as well as a student CD offering additional 

test questions and study materials, New Foundations is designed 

to help students reach two important goals: to succeed in passing 

their National Certification Exam and to ultimately succeed in 

their careers. Practice expectations and realities are emphasized 

through case studies and author/contributor anecdotes. Fullcolor 

photographs and line art give the student a detailed view 

of the application or points being studied. Workbook pages, 

titled Applying Your Knowledge, are incorporated within the 

Chapters for easy access and review. 

Features 

• Emphasizes a scientific perspective while retaining the spiritual, 

artistic foundations of massage therapy. 

• Clear organization and supportive pedagogical features, including 

Chapter reviews and test preparation. 

• Attractive and helpful design with integrated exam points designed 

to help you study and review for the National Certification Exam. 

• Detailed content on topics such as Common Pathologies Massage 

Therapists Encounter and the Physiologic Benefits of Massage (including 

expanded examples on CD. 

• Full-color photographs and line art throughout the text give the student 

a realistic and step-by-step view of the application or points being 

studied. Full-color photos with anatomy overlays provide a detailed 

view of the human body systems and structures. 

• A complete Instructor’s Manual, entitled Massage Educator’s Guide 

to Effective Performance, is available. This helpful supplement contains 

curriculum guidelines for a 500-hour program as well as a 1000-hour 

program. Included are syllabi, calendars, and Lesson plans for effective 

delivery of information to students, and tools for designing and developing 

a program of study that supports diverse student learning styles. 

• Supportive of the move to a standardized (500-1000 hour) curriculum. 

• Emphasizes the client/massage therapist connection. 

• Practice expectations and realities will be emphasized via case studies, 

author/contributor anecdotes. 

• Detailed modalities written by the developer themselves not found in 

any other text currently on the market...beyond the curriculum line. 

Contents 

PART ONE: BASIC CONCEPTS OF THERAPEUTIC MASSAGE AND 

BODYWORK Chapter 1 History of Therapeutic Massage Chapter 2 

Equipment, Environment, and Safety Practices Chapter 3 The Massage 

Therapy Session: Preparations for Before, During, and After Chapter 

4 Therapeutic Massage Techniques Chapter 5 Physiological Effects of 

Therapeutic Massage PART TWO: KINESIOLOGY, ANATOMY, AND 

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY Chapter 6 Biomechanics of Movement Chapter 

7 Skeletal System Chapter 8 Muscular System Chapter 9 Other Body 

Systems PART THREE: BEYOND THE BASIC CURRICULUM Chapter 

10 Maternity, Infant, and Pediatric Massage Chapter 11 Massage for 

Special Populations (Children with Special Needs, Geriatric, Hospice, 

& Palliative Care Chapter 12 Massage for Survivors of Abuse Chapter 13 

Sports Massage: For Amateur and Professional Athletes Chapter 14 Spa 

Therapy: Peace, Beauty, and Massage PART FOUR: COMPLEMENTARY 

MASSAGE & BODYWORK MODALITIES Chapter 15 Oriental Practices 

and Energy Work Chapter 16 Introduction to Other Modalities PART 

FIVE: WELLNESS FOR BODY AND MIND Chapter 17 Body-Mind Connection 

Chapter 18 Diet and Wellness Chapter 19 Eastern and Western 

Principles of Movement PART SIX: ETHICS AND PROFESSIONAL 

BUSINESS PRACTICES Chapter 20 Law, Ethics, and Professionalism 

Chapter 21 Business Development, Marketing Success, and Community 

Education PART SEVEN: PHARMACOLOGY AND SPECIFIC PATHOL- 

OGY ROUTINES Chapter 22 Common Medications and Effects in 

Clients Chapter 23 Special Massage Routines for Common Pathologies 

(Carpal Tunnel, Thoracic Outlet, Torticollis, Temporomandibular Joint 

Dysfunction, and Fibromyalgia) / Quick Guide A: Resource List Quick 

Guide B: Aromatherapy, Herbal Preparations, and Supplements Quick 

Guide C: Medical Terminology Quick Guide D: Diseases Common to 

Body Systems Quick Guide E: Skin Pathologies Quick Guide F: Common 

Medications Quick Guide G: State-by-State Requirements Quick 

Guide H: State-by-State Guide to Massage Practice Laws 

Math for Health Professions 

New 

MATH AND DOSAGE CALCULATIONS FOR 

MEDICAL CAREERS WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 

2nd Edition 

By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and James Whaley, Baker 

College-Owosso 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302262-8 / MHID: 0-07-302262-4 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mathdosage2e 

Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers teaches 

the skills and techniques medical assistants, nurses, pharmacy 

technicians, and paramedics need to calculate the amount of 

medication they should administer to patients. Students learn to 

calculate dosages based on ratio proportions, fraction proportions, 

the formula method, and dimensional analysis. 


• Four methods of dosage calculations: Fraction-proportion; Ratioproportion; 

Dimensional analysis; and Formula method are introduced 

together and used throughout the book. Each method is identified by 

a different color for easy reference 

• Includes over 250 full-color, up-to-date drug actual drugs labels currently 

used by the health care profession to provide realistic learning. 

• CD-ROM references throughout that direct the student to exercises 

and provide for independent review, reinforcement, and evaluation. 

• Link feature refers the student to an earlier Chapters for a quick review 

when concepts are repeated. 

• Added Pocket size dosage calculation reference cards 

20 


9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM


Features 

• Instructor Manual provides detailed answer key, additional exercises 

for each Chapter, and an image bank for classroom use. Accompanying 

CD-ROM contains the EZTest testing software and Instructor PowerPoint 

Presentations. 

• Interactive CD-ROM, packaged free with every book, corresponds to 

text Chapters and helps students learn, review, and test their skills. 

Contents 

1 Fractions and Decimals 2 Percents, Ratios, and Proportions 3 Systems 

of Weights and Measures 4 Equipment for Dosage Measurement 5 Drug 

Orders 6 Drug Labels and Package Inserts 7 Methods of Dosage Calculations 

8 Oral Dosages 9 Parenteral Dosages 10 Intravenous Dosages 

11 Calculations for Special Populations 12 Specialized Calculations 

Appendices A. Comprehensive Evaluation B. Answer Key Glossary 

Credits Index Reference Cards 

Medical Assisting 

- Administrative and Clinical 

New 

ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND 

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY FOR ALLIED HEALTH 

By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming and Terri Wyman, Sanford 

Brown Institute 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337393-5 / MHID: 0-07-337393-1 

Features 

• 4-Color photos and illustrations 

• Case Study Boxes at the beginning of each Chapter 

• Case Study Questions in the end-of-Chapter review 

• Educating the Patient Boxes 

• Pathophysiology feature at the end of each Chapter 

• End-of-Chapter review elements 

» 

» 

» 

» 

» 

Case Study Questions 

Discussion Questions 

Critical Thinking Questions 

Application Activities 

Internet Activities 

• Instructor’s manual 

• Instructor Resource CD-ROM 

• Access to the Medical Assisting Online Learning Center 

New 

INTRAVENOUS THERAPY FOR HEALTH CARE 

PERSONNEL WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 

By Kathryn Booth, Total Care Programming 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328112-4 / MHID: 0-07-328112-3 

Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel is a one of a 

kind book for entry-level health care practitioners to learn the 

basics of IV therapy. This eight-Chapter text/workbook covers 

the essential topics for IV therapy for entry-level practitioners, 

including coverage within the scope of practice for Medical Assistants. 

The book and accompanying CD is highly visual and 

focus on application and understanding, as well as presenting 

real-life situations that can occur during IV therapy and their 

necessary solutions. 

Features 

• New 4-color text 

• The Student CD-ROM provides video, audio, and illustrations with 

interactive exercises to bring the competencies presented in the text to 

life. Key terms are defined and pronounced correctly. Practicing Law 

& Ethics, Providing Safety and Infection Control, Patient Education and 

Communication, and Troubleshooting Activities include critical-thinking 

questions. There are also drag-and-drop exercises in each Chapter to 

reinforce the student’s knowledge of anatomy, supplies, and equipment 

discussed in the text. Interactive Questions provide additional review 

and suggest areas for improvement. The CD-ROM can be used for 

traditional, hybrid, and distance learning classes. 

• Troubleshooting feature identifies problems and provides suggested 

solutions. These help promote critical thinking and prepare students 

for real life situations. 

• Safety and Infection Control features tips and techniques to provide 

safe care to patients and prevent the spread of infection. 

• Patient Education and Communication feature provides suggestions 

for communicating effectively, both orally and in writing, and provides 

patient education related to IV Therapy. 

• HIPAA, Law, and Ethics: includes tips for practicing within the HIPAA 

regulations and legal and ethical standards. 

• Check Questions throughout the text ensure learning and understanding. 

• Complete End of Chapter Review Section including a variety 

question types to accommodate various learning styles and ensure 

comprehension. 

• The print Instructor’s Manual provides an overview of the student text, 

suggestions for implementing the Interactive Drill, Practice, and Review 

CD-ROM included with the student text, teaching suggestions, correlation 

charts, and answer keys. The Instructor’s Manual also includes an 

Instructor’s Productivity Center CD-ROM which includes PowerPoint 

presentations and EZ Test test generator. 

Contents 

Chapter 1: Introduction to Intravenous Therapy Chapter 2: Safety and Infection 

Control Chapter 3: Intravenous Therapy Supplies and Equipment 

Chapter 4: Intravenous Fluids, Components, and Compatibility Chapter 

5: Preparation and Patient Communication Chapter 6: Monitoring and 

Maintaining IV Therapy Chapter 7: Documenting and Discontinuation 

Chapter 8: Intravenous Therapy Calculations / Appendix A: IV Solutions 

and Concentrations Chart Appendix B: IV Compatibility Chart Appendix 

C: Common IV Medications Appendix D: IV Formulas and Conversions 

Appendix E: Answer Key Glossary Index 

21 


9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM


Medical Billing and Coding 

Medical Insurance 

PATIENT BILLING WITH STUDENT CD-ROM & 

FLOPPY DISK 

5th Edition 


2006 (December 2004) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310150-7 / MHID: 0-07-310150-8 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/patientbilling5e 

Instruction in the fifth edition of this seven-Chapter text-workbook 

tutorial is based on NDCMediSoft Advanced, version 9. 

Students will systematically learn how to use the patient billing 

features of this popular software, which is used in thousands 

of medical offices. A four-day simulation of patient billing in 

a Family Care System provides hands-on practice in all billing 

tasks. 


• Patient Billing teaches transferable skills. Through studying how to 

use MediSoft, students develop the skills, terminology and knowledge 

to quickly learn to use any medical billing software they encounter 

during their career. 

• The organization of the book builds student skill and confidence. 

The instructional pattern in part 2--brief concept coverage followed by 

immediate exercises--is highly effective in skill building and reinforcement. 

Part 3 test knowledge in application mode. 

• Examples in the text represent a realistic mix of HMO, PPO, and 

fee-for-service billing cases. 

• Includes HIPAA tips and concepts. 

• NDCMedisoft Advanced Version 9 patient billing software, a fullfeatured 

software program, is available to adopters. Contact your 

McGraw-Hill representative to request software. 

• Instructor’s Manual has NDCMedisoft example solutions by Chapter. 

Instructor Productivity CD-ROM includes EZTest test generating software 

and Chapter-by-Chapter PowerPoint lecture outlines. 

Contents 

1 Introduction to Patient Billing 2 Using The Computer For Patient 

Billing 3 Managing Data With A Computerized System 4 Entering 

Patient and Case Information 5 Processing Transactions 6 Processing 

Claims and Creating Statements 7 Producing Reports / Family Care 

Center—A Patient Billing Simulation Appendix—Office Hours Source 

Documents Index 

New 

MEDICAL INSURANCE CODING WORKBOOK 

2007-2008 

By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises 

2008 (January 2007) / 160 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352205-0 / MHID: 0-07-352205-8 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/medinsurance3e 

The Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician Practices 

builds coding expertise by providing thorough practice, 

tips, and reinforcement in code selection and linkage. This 

supplementary workbook offers extensive opportunities for 

students to practice ICD-9-CM (diagnoses) and CPT/HCPCS 

(procedures) coding using the standard code reference manuals. 

Unique coding linkage coverage reviews and practices reporting 

diagnosis and procedures codes correctly together for compliant 

coding. The exercises build from one-line diagnostic/procedural 

statements to case studies. The Workbook also contains three 

comprehensive examinations covering ICD-9-CM, CPT/HCPCS, 

and Code Linkage topics. The Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 

for Physician Practices is designed to help users master the 

information needed to pass the coding certification exams and 

become employable. The precise and tightly focused nature of 

the workbook helps instructors to readily gauge students’ levels 

of coding proficiency. 


• Updated Information: The workbook includes the latest ICD and 

CPT codes. 

• Case Studies: Each section contains case studies to provide practice 

coding from medical documentation. 

• Review and Practice: Updated Coding Compliance Coverage 

provides review and practice so students learn to link diagnosis and 

procedure codes correctly. Coding Quizzes test students’ understanding 

of guidelines and prepare students for the coding certification exams. 

• Answers to workbook exercises are available on the password-protected 

Instructor’s site on the Valerius/Medical Insurance 3e Online 

Learning Center. 

Features 

Tips: Coding Tips reinforce coding guidelines. 

Contents 

Part 1 ICD-9-CM Part 2 CPT and HCPCS Part 3 Coding Linkage and 

Compliance Appendix A ICD-9-CM Guidelines for Coding and Reporting 

Outpatient Services Appendix B CPT Modifiers: Description and 

Common use in Main Text Sections 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








22 


9/29/2006 11:54:17 AM


New 

MEDICAL INSURANCE 

An Integrated Claims Process Approach Workbook 

3rd Edition 

By Joanne Valerius, Nenna Bayes, Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill 

Enterprises and Janet Seggern, Lehigh Carbon Coll College 

2008 (January 2007) / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340210-9 / MHID: 0-07-340210-9 


• New for this edition is a text-specific workbook which provides 

both review and application learned in the textbook. The workbook is 

learning outcomes-based. In addition to claim completion case studies, 

applications include math and communication skill development. 

(Details unavailable at press time) 

MEDICAL INSURANCE CODING WORKBOOK FOR 

PHYSICIAN PRACTICES 2005 EDITION 

By Cynthia Newby, Chestnut Hill Enterprises Inc 

2006 (June 2005) / 160 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301470-8 / MHID: 0-07-301470-2 

Medical Insurance Coding Workbook offers numerous exercises 

for students to practice ICD and CPT coding. This workbook 

can be used with Valerius’ Medical Insurance or any other 

medical insurance text. 

Features 

• ICD and CPT coding practice reinforces proper coding procedure. 

• Coding Compliance coverage provides review and practice in linking 

diagnosis and procedures codes correctly. 

• Coding tips reinforce essential coding guidelines. 

• Coding Quizzes test students’ understanding of guidelines and 

prepare students for the coding certification exams. 

Contents 

Part 1 ICD-9-CM Part 2 CPT and HCPCS Part 3 Coding Linkage and 

Compliance Appendix A ICD-9-CM Guidelines for Coding and Reporting 

Outpatient Services Appendix B CPT Modifiers: Description and 

Common use in Main Text Sections 

INSURANCE CODING AND ELECTRONIC CLAIMS 

FOR THE MEDICAL OFFICE 

By Shelley Safian 

2006 (July 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305307-3 / MHID: 0-07-305307-4 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/icec-safian 

This text is structured to reflect a day in the life of an insurance 

codding and billing specialist. Using a “layered learning” 

concept, the student will move through the book in a logical 

progression, building upon each element learned at each stage 

of the reimbursement process. Students will learn to carefully 

glean pertinent data to code accurately from review and analysis 

of: a.) Superbills, b.) Provider’s notes, c.) Referral authorization 

forms, and d.) New patient information forms. 

Features 

• Understanding medical necessity. Examples are provided to help 

students appreciate their responsibility of assuring the relativity between 

diagnosis codes and procedure codes. 

• Computer program troubleshooting for students. Learning how to fix 

minor problems that can occur within the two software applications. 

For example, when claim forms won’t print, making corrections to erroneous 

data entry, etc. In other textbooks, this information is usually 

reserved for the instructor. However, students do need to learn how 

to fix certain basic problems that could easily occur in the workplace 

(where the student will be on their own). 

• Realistic scenarios help students identify with learning 

• Student-friendly, conversational writing style makes new concepts 

understandable. 

• Instructor’s Manual includes additional forms for extra credit and/or 

practice assignments, guidelines for helping students understand each 

component, and the answers to the Chapter review questions. Instructor 

Productivity CD-ROM provides a PowerPoint presentation for each 

Chapter, additional test questions using EZTest with answer key for 

in-class practice, review, and additional grading opportunities. 

• Medisoft Advanced, Version 9 is presented as “one” example of 

patient accounting software. Students practice entering patient information 

and coding data. 

Contents 

1 Insurance Overview 2 HIPPA’s Privacy Rule Overview 3 Source 

Documents 4 Introduction to Coding-Guidelines Overview 5 Coding 

Diagnoses: ICD-9-CM 6 Coding Diagnoses: ICD-10-CM 7 Coding 

Procedures: CPT 8 Coding Procedures: ICD-9-CM Volume 3 and ICD- 

10-PCS 9 Complete Coding Practice: ICD-9-CM and CPT 10 Health 

Claims Form CMS-1500 11 Electronic Claims Management: Using 

Patient Accounting Software 12 Working with Insurance Companies 

13 Receiving Revenues 14 Complete Coding and Claims PracticeAppendix 

A-Abbreviations Appendix B-ICD-9-CM Offical Guidelines for 

Coding and Reporting Appendix C-1997 Documentation Guidelines for 

Evaluation and Management Services Appendix D-Medisoft Advanced, 

Version 9-Issues and Answers 










23 


9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM


Medical Law & Ethics 

Medical Office Procedures 

LAW & ETHICS FOR MEDICAL CAREERS 

4th Edition 

By Karen Judson, Carlene Harrison, International College and Sharon 

Blesie Hicks 

2006 (April 2005) / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302263-5 / MHID: 0-07-302263-2 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/judson4e 

Law and Ethics for Medical Careers, 4th edition, provides an 

overview of the laws and ethics you should know to help you 

give competent, compassionate care to patients that is within 

acceptable legal and ethical boundaries. The text can also serve 

as a guide to help you resolve the many legal and ethical questions 

you may reasonably expect to face as a student and, later, 

as a health care practitioner. The text features pertinent legal 

cases, anecdotes, and sidebars related to health-related careers. 

Content has been updated and special attention has been paid 

to legislation affecting health care. 


• An Ethics Guide has been added to each Chapter. The Guides contain 

ethical principles and discussion questions relevant to the material 

covered in each Chapter. 

• New Chapter--Chapter 7, “Privacy Law and HIPAA.” This Chapter 

can inform all allied health personnel as to the relevance and mandates 

of HIPAA. 

• Examples and cases cover many different medical careers. This 

means students with the same or various medical career goals can be 

in one class. 

• About Your Job provides practical job-related facts. 

• Case studies (formerly You Be the Judge) and questions foster critical-thinking 

skills. 

• FYI sidebars enhance and extend content. 

• The Instructor’s Manual includes teaching strategies, answer keys, 

and CMA and RMA correlation tables. The accompanying IPC CD- 

ROM contains Chapter-by-Chapter PowerPoint slides, case studies, 

and EZTest test generator. 

Contents 

Part 1 The Foundations of Law and Ethics 1 Introduction to Law and 

Ethics 2 Working in Health Care 3 Law, the Courts, and Contracts 

Part 2 Legal Issues for Working Health Care Practitioners 4 Professional 

Liability and Medical Malpractice 5 Defenses to Liability Suits 

6 Medical Records and Informed Consent 7 Privacy Law and HIPAA 

Part 3 Professional, Social, and Interpersonal Health Care Issues 8 

Physicians’ Public Duties and Responsibilities 9 Workplace Legalities 

10 The Beginning of Life and Childhood 11 Death and Dying 12 Ethics 

for Health Care Practitioners 

MEDICAL OFFICE PROCEDURES WITH DATA DISKS 

AND PROJECTS CD-ROM 

6th Edition 

By Karonne Becklin 

2006 (January 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320108-5 / MHID: 0-07-320108-1 

Medical Office Procedures is a text-workbook that introduces 

and teaches medical assisting administrative tasks; teaches 

records management, medical communications, and scheduling 

skills; and describes procedures for preparing patients’ 

charts and bills. Practice management and finances are also 

addressed. Multi-day simulations provide real-world experience 

with physician dictation. 


• Medisoft Advanced Version 9 patient billing software, a full-featured 

software program, is available to adopters. Contact your McGraw-Hill 

representative to request software. 

• Working Papers at the end of the text include medical histories, 

handwritten drafts, correspondence, and other forms needed to complete 

projects and simulations. 

• Correspondence, scheduling, financial, and records projects in each 

Chapter provide hands-on practice with concepts and skills. 

• Student CD-ROM, included in the text, contains files for letterheads 

and patient information forms and statements for Chapter projects and 

simulations. 

• Data Disks, provided with every text in CD-ROM and floppy disk 

format, provide the patient database to complete NDCMedisoft simulation 

exercises. 

• Instructor’s Manual contains teaching notes and resources, AAMA/ 

AMT/NHCSSP correlation charts, and answer keys. IPC contains ExamViewPro 

test generator, PowerPoint presentations and CPS capability. 

Simulation recordings contain recordings for the 3 simulations of 

medical office conversations, instructions from the doctor, incoming 

and outgoing phone calls, interruptions, and the doctor’s dictation for 

transcription. 

Contents 

Part 1 The Administrative Medical Assistant’s Career 1 The Administrative 

Medical Assistant 2 Medical Ethics, Law, and Compliance 3 Computer 

Usage in the Medical Office Part 2 Administrative Responsibilities 4 

Telephone Procedures and Scheduling 5 Records Management 6 Written 

Communications Part 3 Patient Records 7 Patient Medical Records 8 

Insurance and Coding 9 Billing, Reimbursement, and Collections Part 

4 Practice Finances and Management 10 Practice Finances 11 Office 

Management / Appendix A Introduction to MediSoft 

24 


9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM

New 

Medical Terminology 

• Terms presented within the context of anatomy and physiology. 

Chapters are organized by body systems, and terms are introduced 

within the context of the body’s anatomical structures and/or 

physiological processes. 

• Frequent, innovative exercises. 


MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH 

WITH STUDENT CD-ROM 

By David Allen, Michelle Buchman, Everest College and Karen 

Lockyer 

2008 (March 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327294-8 / MHID: 0-07-327294-9 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/allanmedlanguage 

MEDICAL LANGUAGE FOR MODERN HEALTH CARE Combining 

the Time-Tested A & P Approach with a New Contextual 

Approach Promotes Active Learning Chapters in the textbook 

are organized by body system in accordance with an overall 

anatomy and physiology (A & P) approach. Lessons introduce 

and define terminology through the context of A & P, pathology, 

and clinical and diagnostic procedures/tests. The organization 

of the body systems into Chapters is based on an “outside to 

inside” sequence that reflects a physician’s differential diagnosis 

method used during an examination. To provide students with 

an authentic context, the medical specialty associated with each 

body area or system is introduced along with the anatomy and 

physiology. Students actually step into the role of an allied health 

professional associated with each specialty. Patient cases and 

documentation are used to illustrate the real-life application of 

medical terminology in modern health care: to care for and communicating 

with patients, and to interact with other members of 

the health care team. The A & P organizational approach, used 

in conjunction an authentic medical setting and patient cases, 

encourages student motivation and facilitates active, engaged 

learning. Each Chapter is structured around a consistent and 

unique framework of pedagogic devices. No matter what the 

subject matter of a Chapter, the structure enables students to develop 

a consistent learning strategy, making Medical Language 

for Modern Health Care a superior learning tool. 

Features 

• Focus on “modern” medicine 

Includes Chapters such as genetics and CAM that are not found 

in other books. 

• Lesson-based approach. 

Chapters are divided into Lessons, coverage of which can be 

taught in a 50-minute installment. 

Each is supported by a 50-minute Lesson plan in the Instructor’s 

Manual that pulls all teaching information and materials together into 

a scripted, times presentation. 

• Self-contained spreads. 

Variety of exercises appear on each spread, at the end of each 

Chapter, on the CD-ROM, and on the Online Center. 

Some exercises simulate documentation in the medical 

record. 

End of Chapter exercises include all taxonomy levels and meet 

all Chapter objectives. 

• Strong supplements package. 

To include: 

Student CD-ROM with interactive, applied spread exercises 

and term pronunciations; 

Online Learning Center for students with exercises and web 

research activities, and instructor resources; 

Instructor’s Manual (PRINT) with 50-minute Lesson plans, assignment 

masters, and testbank masters; 

Instructor Productivity CD-ROM with customizable Lesson 

plans, PPT slides, electronic image collection, testbank in an EZ test 

generator program; 

Online medical terminology curriculum; online medical terminology 

train-the-trainer course. 

Contents 

Chapter 1: welcome Chapter 2: anatomy of word building Chapter 3: 

the body as a whole:the language of primary care Chapter 4: integumentary 

system:the language of dermatology Chapter 5: special senses: 

seeing and hearing-the language of opthalmology an otology Chapter 6: 

musculoskeletal system: the language of orthopedics Chapter 7: digestive 

system: the language of gastroenterology Chapter 8: cardiovascular 

system: the language of cardiology and hematology Chapter 9: respiratory 

system: the language of pulmonology Chapter 10: nervous system: 

the language of neurology Chapter 11: urinary system: the language of 

urology Chapter 12: male reproductive system: more language of urology 

Chapter 13: female reproductive system and breast: the language of 

gynecology and obstetrics Chapter 14: endocrine system: the language 

of endocrinology Chapter 15: lymphatic and immune systems: the 

language of immunology Chapter 16: growth and development: the 

language of pediatrics Chapter 17: aging: the language of gerontology 

Chapter 18: rehabilitation medicine: the language of rehabilitation 

Chapter 19: mental health: the language of psychology and psychiatry 

Chapter 20: infection: the language of infectious diseases Chapter 21: 

genetics: the language of dna Chapter 22: nutrition: the language of 

nutrition Chapter 23: complementary and alternative medicine: the 

language of cam 

Each spread covers one topic only, each spread a complete unit 

that includes text, work analyses/definitions, and exercises. 

• Contextualized, real-world approach. 

A virtual medical facility, complete with medical practices, 

practitioners and patients, provides the contextual framework for 

presenting terms. 

Each Chapter represents the language of whichever specialty 

is covered by that Chapter, for example “Respiratory System: The Language 

of Pulmonology.” 

Real-world scenarios throughout Chapters provide immediate 

application of and context for terms. 

25 


9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM


New 

MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY 

A Programmed Approach 

By Paula Bostwick 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340194-2 / MHID: 0-07-340194-3 

Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach is the ideal 

resource for instructors and students wanting a concise and 

systematic approach to learning the language of health care. 

Recognizing that students learn medical terminology by constructing 

and deconstructing words into their parts, the authors 

have built this process into the text and the numerous exercises. 

The approach builds and constantly reinforces skills needed 

to deal with increasingly complicated terms. A body systems 

organization is used, providing a clear content framework for 

the text. Each body system Chapter separates words into easily 

learnable groups: major parts of each system; word parts 

related to each system; and diagnostic, pathological, surgical 

and pharmacological terms. Carefully chosen Chapter features 

help bring the subject to life, and add an on-the-job perspective. 

Case-study information is built into examples, and real medical 

documents are used whenever appropriate. Internet references 

are included throughout, to emphasize the importance of online 

resources and tools. While most activities are straight-forward 

practice exercises, word-building and critical thinking skills are 

also built in. Wherever possible, material on Complementary 

and Alternative Medicine (“CAM”) is included to highlight this 

growing area of medicine. In addition to the text, students will 

be able to access a wealth of electronic resources to aid their 

studies: The Student CD-ROM will include a suite of activitybased 

learning tools: crossword puzzles, “Hangman” game, 

“Concentration”, term to definition matching, audio feedback, 

and “That’s Epidemic”, an activity focusing on pathology terms. 

Exercises are gradable online, or can be used for self-paced 

review. The Online Learning Center website (“OLC”) will 

provide a set of additional self-test questions; Chapter study 

outlines; web links of interest; and additional word-building 

activities. An optional Spanish/English audio CD ROM is available, 

which includes pronunciations of key medical terms in 

both languages. English-language audio CD ROMs (2) are also 

available as an optional package item; these include pronunciation 

of all terms included in the text. Instructors will also finds 

a wealth of teaching & learning resources for their classes: The 

Instructor’s Manual (“IM”) will contain answers to all exercises, 

teaching strategy suggestions, and discussion of word-building 

techniques. The Instructor Productivity Center CD ROM (“IPC”) 

will contain the IM in electronic form; PowerPoint presentations 

for each Chapter; and electronic test generator and test banks 

(with 300 questions). 

Features 

• Programmed methodology provides a streamlined, time-effective 

way to learn basic terminology. 

• Word-building skills are presented in the opening Chapters, then 

used extensively with each Body System Chapter. 

• Body systems organization is used to structure the text. 

• Real-life case studies and medical records are used throughout the 

text, to provide a career context for the terminology being learned. 

• Bound-in Student CD ROM provides readers with a wealth of motivating 

medical terminology games and activities. 

• OLC website contains study resources, self-tests and additional 

activities for students; and resources for instructors under password 

protection. 

• Complementary and Alternative Medicine (CAM) terms are included 

in the text. 

• Internet Chapter features provide practical tips on how to use the 

web. 

Contents 

Chapter 1 Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in 

Medical Terms Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary 

System Chapter 5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The 

Cardiovascular System Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 

The Nervous System Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The 

Female Reproductive System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System 

Chapter 12 The Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune 

Systems Chapter 14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine 

System Chapter 16 The Sensory System 

New 

McGRAW-HILL ALLIED HEALTH MEDICAL 

DICTIONARY 

By Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 

2008 (January 2007) / 1408 pages 

ISBN-13: 978--07-351096-5 / MHID: 0-07-351096-3 

Kevin Dumith has teamed up with Myrna Breskin to compile 

the McGraw Hill Allied Health Dictionary. With Kevin’s long 

experience working as a medical terminology instructor in a 

career college and with Myrna’s background as a lexicographer, 

the dictionary has the combined experience of these two people 

directing a staff that has written a truly useful reference book. 

This dictionary will be the only one on the market specifically 

aimed at the allied health level. This important distinction makes 

it a very salable product for a student population that has traditionally 

found the learning of medical terminology one of the 

most challenging in the allied health curriculum. It is written 

for the student who finds the higher level dictionaries written 

for the health care practitioner too difficult to understand and 

to navigate. the definitions are clear and concise. The only 

etymologies given are useful word-building breakdowns that 

reinforce this skill necessary to understanding medical terms. 

The appendices make this reference a tool that will follow the 

allied health student into the workplace as a “keeper” for a long 

time to come. There is a 32-page insert of anatomy plates that 

cover the body systems with beautiful illustrations as well as 

instructive and helpful text. 

Features 

• Simple straightforward definitions in understandable language with 

cross-referencing done meticulously. Cross-referencing is a very important 

part of dictionaries. In many Stedman’s dictionaries, for example, 

you are sent to entries that don’t exist or words are defined with medical 

terms not in the dictionary. Our dictionary uses common language as 

much as possible or uses medical terms that appear in the dictionary 

or are explained where they are used. 

• Extensive coverage of anatomy groups (such as tables of muscles, 

bones, and nerves at those entries) and an overview 32-page 4-color 

insert of anatomy art and text. 

• Warnings are put at all abbreviations that are no longer allowed to 

be handwritten in medical documents so as to avoid medical errors. 

An appendix of these abbreviations is also included. 

• A straightforward comprehensive pronunciation system with as few 

symbols as possible enables the user to clearly pronounce medical 

terms-a skill that is essential in allied health careers. 

• Optional audio CD sets--English-language, and Spanish/English--are 

available for packaging with the text. 

26 


9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM


• Appendices of essential allied health reference material such as 

lab values, combining forms, abbreviations, and so on round out this 

comprehensive book. 

• Four-color illustrations appear throughout the book and illustrate 

medical concepts appropriate to the allied health level. 

• Student CD-ROM to accompany the McGraw-Hill Allied Health 

Dictionary. It will contain searchable list and audio pronunciations for 

all terms in the Dictionary. 

Contents 

Introduction / How to use this dictionary / Letters a-z / Anatomical 

plates 1-32 / Appendices / Combining forms, prefixes, and suffixes / 

Abbreviations and medical errors / Normal laboratory values / Spanish 

terms / Weights and measures / Dietary guidelines 

to start the job search. 

• Reference appendices will make this a valuable reference tool for 

use in medical terminology and related courses. 

Contents 

Unit 1 Communication Using Medical Terms, How Medical Terms 

Are Formed, Legal and Ethical Issues, Communication in Healthcare 

Unit 2 Prefixes Unit 3 Suffixes Unit 4 Terms in the Integumentary System 

Unit 5 Terms in the Musculoskeletal System Unit 6 Terms in the 

Cardiovascular System Unit 7 Terms in the Respiratory System Unit 8 

Terms in the Nervous System Unit 9 Terms in the Urinary System Unit 

10 Terms in the Female Reproductive System Unit 11 Terms in the 

Male Reproductive System Unit 12 Terms in the Blood System Unit 

13 Terms in the Lymphatic and Immune Systems Unit 14 Terms in 

the Digestive System Unit 15 Terms in the Endocrine System Unit 16 

Terms in the Sensory System Appendix A Combining Forms, Prefixes, 

and Suffixes Appendix B Normal Laboratory Values Appendix C Sample 

Medical Documents 

New 

MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY WORD BUILDER 

AND COMMUNICATIONS WORKBOOK WITH 

FLASHCARDS 

By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and 

Kevin Dumith, Sanford Brown Institute 

2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331544-7 / MHID: 0-07-331544-3 

Nina Thierer has teamed with Kevin Dumith to bring to market 

a workbook that will complement a number of allied health 

products, especially the Allied Health Dictionary and the 

medical terminology textbooks published by McGraw-Hill. 

The Medical Terminology WordBuilder and Communications 

Workbook emphasizes the dual tasks of word building and 

communication--the prime learning difficulties for most students 

in medical terminology and related courses. Particularly in the 

private career colleges, these two areas are where schools are 

putting the bulk of their emphasis in an attempt to make their 

students valuable employees in their allied health careers. The 

workbook is chock-full of exercises, case studies, and verbal and 

written communication work that will guide the student through 

realistic simulations of job activities and job search tasks. 

Features 

• The organization of the workbook by body systems makes it usable 

with McGraw-Hill products as well as with most medical terminology 

texts on the market. This free-standing item will sell into markets that 

use everything from Chabner to programmed texts to no text at all, just 

resource materials. 

• The workbook’s design is usable as a write-in, self-study guide or 

as a companion to various texts and resources. The workbook is also 

usable for students working primarily on computer. Each unit begins 

with a review of the word parts used to build words in a particular body 

system. This is immediately followed by a number of activities aimed 

both at word building and basic body system knowledge. 

• Word games such as word finds, crosswords, or word jumbles are 

featured in every unit to provide fun learning activities for each body 

system. These word games require and reinforce body system knowledge 

at all learner levels. 

• Each of the body system units has a realistic case study that emphasizes 

the ability to communicate with coworkers, clients, supervisors, 

job interviewers, and so on. The communication exercises require basic 

telephone and writing skills with an emphasis on polite, accurate communications. 

These case studies include many letters and forms similar 

to ones used in most health care facilities. The way the case studies are 

structured, they can be used by everyone from the most inexperienced 

beginning student to students in the final stages of their courses about 

New 

MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY ESSENTIALS 

With Student & Audio CD’s and Flashcards 

By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne and 

Lisa Breitbard, Sunrise Senior Living 

2007 (January 2006) / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325644-3 / MHID: 0-07-325644-7 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/medtermess 

Essentials of Medical Terminology is a precise, completely upto-date, 

student-oriented text that is ideal for the one-semester 

course in Medical Terminology. The text emphasizes real world 

applications of the vocabulary of medicine, and students will 

see current medical events reflected in this book. The main text 

is accompanied by an outstanding selection of supplementary 

learning resources. Essentials of Medical Terminology concentrates 

on just the key terms and concepts that can be taught in 

a half-year course. Its clean, uncluttered design keeps readers’ 

attention focused on learning these basic terms, and definitions 

are kept concise. The interactive Essentials of Medical Terminology 

Student CD-ROM, and Audio Program CD-ROMs (2-disk 

audio CD set), linked directly to the text and its selection of 

terms, are included with each copy of the text. They provide a 

powerful suite of learning tools geared to the diverse learning 

styles of today’s students. A Spanish-English Audio CD-ROM 

is also available for student purchase. The Student CD-ROM 

is set up by text Chapter, and includes a variety of games and 

skill-building activities such as key terms with audio, flash cards, 

word building, multiple choice and true/false questions, matching, 

crossword puzzles, and a game called “That’s Epidemic”. A 

progress review component records and prints student progress 

reports. The CD-ROM is ideal for reviewing terms, for group 

activities, and for courses that have a self-study component. 

Features 

• Medical Terminology Essentials provides accurate, concise instruction 

on the basics of medical terminology, presenting what’s appropriate 

for a 1-semester course. Both clinical and office situations are included 

throughout the text, to provide a realistic context for understanding 

medical terms. 

• Meets Instructor/Student Goals: The text is closely matched with 

the typical 1-semester syllabus. It is tightly focused on the “need to 

know” concepts and definitions. Coverage of underlying word structure 

and word building prepares students to think critically about medical 

terminology encountered in subsequent courses, and in their allied 

health careers. 

27 


9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM


• Extensive Review Activities: Critical thinking case studies follow 

every major section and give immediate reinforcement of key concepts 

presented. End-of-Chapter activities include review questions, case 

studies, and optional Internet exercises that expand student familiarity 

with the subject of each Chapter. 

• HIPAA Information: Examples, and exercises are included throughout 

the text, providing important up-to-date information on important 

HIPAA guidelines. 

• Case Studies: Brief cases in each Chapter present realistic medical 

situations related to that particular topic and its key terms. 

• Online Learning Center web site: This site provides students and 

instructors with extensive teaching, learning and Internet reference 

resources. The Instructor side is password protected for security. 

• Instructor’s Manual with Instructor Productivity CD-ROM: This supplement 

has answers, teaching suggestions, instructional PowerPoint 

slides, electronic test banks and EZ Test electronic testing software, 

and the Classroom Performance System (CPS) in-class quizzing and 

management tool. 

Contents 

To the Student / Getting the Most Out of Your Textbook / Chapter 1 

Learning Terminology Chapter 2 Prefixes and Suffixes in Medical Terms 

Chapter 3 Body Structure Chapter 4 The Integumentary System Chapter 

5 The Musculoskeletal System Chapter 6 The Cardiovascular system 

Chapter 7 The Respiratory System Chapter 8 The Nervous System 

Chapter 9 The Urinary System Chapter 10 The Female Reproductive 

System Chapter 11 The Male Reproductive System Chapter 12 The 

Blood System Chapter 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems Chapter 

14 The Digestive System Chapter 15 The Endocrine System Chapter 

16 The Sensory System Chapter 17 Terms Pharmacology / Appendix 

A—Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B—Abbreviations- 

Ones to Use and Ones to Avoid Appendix C—Normal Laboratory 

Values Appendix D—Medical Terminology Style / Index 

INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY 

WITH STUDENT AUDIO CD-ROM 

By Pam Besser, KCTCS Jefferson Comm and Tech College and J 

Patrick Fisher 

2006 (May 2005) / 543 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302261-1 / MHID: 0-07-302261-6 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/besser 

This text-workbook gives students a firm foundation in medical 

terminology meanings and pronunciations. It provides a concise 

presentation of terms reinforced by practice exercises. It can be 

used in a short course or a review course of medical terminology 

or as a self-paced text. 

Features 

• Introductory Chapters (Suffixes and Prefixes) provide a foundation 

for the terminology presented in the textbook. 

• Online component provides instructors another means of allowing 

students access to the course. 

• Flash cards included free with every student text. 

• Case studies and labeling exercises to all the systems Chapters. 

• Instructor Manual includes teaching strategies, course syllabi and 

answer keys. Instructor Productivity Center CD-ROM contains Chapterby-Chapter 

PowerPoint presentations and EZTest test generator. Classroom 

Lab CDs provide pronunciation of the Lessons for classroom use. 

Test Lab CDs are provided for instructors to test students’ pronunciation 

and comprehension. 

Contents 

Part 1 Learning About Medical Words 1 Suffixes 2 Prefixes 3 Numbers, 

Amounts, Colors and Positions Part 2 Systems of the Body 4 Integumentary 

System 5 Respiratory System 6 Digestive System 7 Cardiovascular 

System 8 Hematic and Lymphatic Systems 9 Urinary System 10 Male 

Reproductive System 11 Female Reproductive System 12 Nervous 

System 13 Endocrine System 14 Musculoskeletal Systems 15 Special 

Senses Part 3 Medical Specialties 16 Medical Specialties 17 Psychiatric 

Terminology / Appendices A. Selected Medical and Chemical Abbreviations 

B. Selected Abbreviations used in Pharmacy and Prescription 

Writing C. Common Latin and Greek Singular and Plural Endings D. 

Common Prefixes E. Common Suffixes F. Common STDs for Male and 

Female / Glossary / Index 

MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY 

Language for Health Care with Student and Audio 

CD’s and Flashcards, 2nd Edition 

By Nina Thierer, Ivy Tech Comm College of Indiana-Ft Wayne 

2006 (December 2005) / 802 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327295-5 / MHID: 0-07-327295-7 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/medterm2e 

Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care provides the 

comprehensive coverage needed for a 2-term or intensive 1- 

term Medical Terminology course. It provides clear instruction 

on the basics of anatomy and physiology, using a body systems 

approach, and making use of extensive new line art figures 

and photos. The text includes both clinical and administrative 

office examples and cases that provide a realistic context for 

introducing terms and definitions. The up-to-date coverage 

includes a new Chapter on Alternative Medicine, and information 

on HIPAA guidelines. The student textbook comes with a 

free Student CD-ROM with interactive exercises and activities, 

and a 2-CD Audio Program for building pronunciation skills. 

Wordbuilding exercises are included in every body system 

Chapter. 


• Enhanced Art Program: A wealth of new photos, illustrations and 

charts increase the visual appeal of the book, and aid in the teaching 

of anatomy and physiology topics. 

• Med Term Audio Program: 2 English-language audio CD-ROMs 

are included free with the text, to provide help with pronunciation 

of terms 

• HIPAA Coverage: Information, examples, and exercises are incorporated 

to help build student awareness of these important guidelines. 

• Spanish-English glossary and Spanish Audio Program CD (available 

separately) help students work in our increasingly bilingual health care 

environment. 

• Online Learning Center: This web site offers a range of learning 

and review activities for students, plus password-protected Instructor 

resources; these can be used with the leading Classroom Management 

systems. 

Features 

• Clear and Comprehensive Coverage: the basics of anatomy & physiology 

are covered by body system, along with medical terms from all 

areas of health care and medicine. 

• Extensive Review Activities: Critical thinking case studies follow 

every major section, providing immediate learning reinforcement reinforcement. 

End-of-Chapter activities include review questions, case 

studies and optional Internet and Challenge sections that expand student 

familiarity with Chapter concepts and terms. 

28 


9/29/2006 11:54:18 AM

Updated Student CD-ROM: This highly acclaimed CD-ROM includes 

a wealth of student activities (such as Flashcards, Crosswords, 

Concentration, Hangman, and “That’s Epidemic”), and a new built-in 

grading feature. 

• 

Biology of Aging 

Contents 

How to Use This Program / 1 Learning Terminology 2 Prefixes and Suffixes 

in Medical Terms 3 Body Structure 4 The Integumentary System 

5 The Musculoskeletal System 6 The Cardiovascular system 7 The 

Respiratory System 8 The Nervous System 9 The Urinary System 10 

The Female Reproductive System 11 The Male Reproductive System 

12 The Blood System 13 The Lymphatic and Immune Systems 14 The 

Digestive System 15 The Endocrine System 16 The Sensory System 17 

Human Development 18 Terms in Oncology—Cancer and Its Causes 

19 Diagnostic Imaging, Radiation Oncology, and Surgery 20 Terms 

in Psychiatry 21 Terms in Dental Practice 22 Terms in Pharmacology 

23 Terms in Complementary and Alternative Medicine / Appendix 

A—Combining Forms, Prefixes, and Suffixes Appendix B—Abbreviations—Ones 

to Use and Ones to Avoid Appendix C—English Glossary 

Appendix D—Spanish Glossary Appendix E—Normal Laboratory Values 

Appendix F-Medical Terminology Style / Index 


HUMAN AGING 

Biological Perspectives, 2nd Edition 

By Augustine G Digiovanna, Salisbury State University 

2000 / 408 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292691-0 / MHID: 0-07-292691-0 

Website: www.biologyofhumanaging.com 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Molecules, Cells, and Theories of Aging 

Chapter 3 The Integumentary System Chapter 4 Circulatory System 

Chapter 5 Respiratory System Chapter 6 Nervous System Chapter 7 Eyes 

and Ears Chapter 8 Muscle System Chapter 9 Skeletal System Chapter 

10 Digestive System Chapter 11 Diet and Nutrition Chapter 12 Urinary 

System Chapter 13 Reproductive Systems Chapter 14 Endocrine System 

Chapter 15 Immune System Chapter 16 About the Future 

Pediatric First Aid, CPR, AED 

New 

PEDIATRIC FIRST AID, CPR AND AED 

2nd Edition 


2008 (September 2006) 

ISBN-13; 978-0-07-329701-9 / MHID: 0-07-329701-1 

The Pediatric First Aid, CPR & AED manual is 153 pages and 

full-color. It covers the material included in a 6.5 to 8.5 hour 

course. This book is for anyone who takes care of children, including 

parents, daycare and other childcare workers, teachers 

and others. The focus is on preventing childhood injury where 

possible, how to recognize and act in a pediatric emergency 

and sustain life until professional help can arrive. Along with 

basic first aid components such as bleeding control and shock, 

the book covers child abuse and common childhood illnesses. 

Comprehensive information about preventing infection and 

illness, preventing injuries, and making places safe for children 

have been added. This text has been updated to include the 

new 2005 guideline changes. 

Contents 

Introduction: Why Learn Injury Prevention and First Aid PART ONE: 

FIRST AID Chapter 1- Take Action in an Emergency Chapter 2- Basic 

Life Support Chapter 3--Bleeding and Wound Care Chapter 4--Shock 

Chapter 5 – Burns Chapter 6--Serious Injuries Chapter 7--Bone, Joint, 

and Muscle Injuries Chapter 8--Sudden Illness Chapter 9 – Poisoning 

Chapter 10--Heat and Cold Emergencies Chapter 11 – Common Minor 

Childhood Problems and Injuries Chapter 12 – Child Abuse and Neglect 

PART TWO: CHILDHOOD ILLNESSES Chapter 13 – Common 

Childhood Illnesses PART THREE: PREVENTING ILLNESS AND INJURY 

Chapter 14 – Preventing Illness and Infection Chapter 15 – Preventing 

Injuries Chapter 16 – Making Places Safe for Children / Index 

Pathophysiology 

International Edition 

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 

Concepts and Applications for Health Care 

Professionals, 3rd Edition 

By Thomas J Nowak and A Gordon Handford of British Columbia 

Institute of Tech. 

2004 / 752 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-027255-2 / MHID: 0-07-027255-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121497-1 / MHID: 0-07-121497-6 [IE] 

The traditional pathophysiology book is written for the medical 

student. Nursing and allied health students (usually at the 

sophomore level) have simply had to make-do with cumbersome 

(1500 to 1600 page) books, that assume considerably more 

science background than the typical allied health student has 

acquired. The Nowak book is not only briefer (at 700 pages) 

but is organized in a manner that brings the principles of pathophysiology 

to the forefront. The authors focus on the relatively 

few patterns of disease, rather than asking students to memorize 

extensive catalogs of specific diseases. This conceptual approach 

is more suited to the allied health student than the disease centered 

approach featured in the major competitors. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Foundation Concepts of Pathophysiology Chapter 1 Cell Injury 

Chapter 2 Inflammation Chapter 3 Fever Chapter 4 Healing Chapter 5 

Disease of Immunity Chapter 6 Neoplasis Part 2 Systemic Pathophysiology 

Chapter 7 Blood Disorders Chapter 8 Hemodynamic Disorders 

Chapter 9 Vascular Disorders Chapter 10 Cardiac Pathophysiology 

Chapter 11 Circulatory Shock Chapter 12 Respiratory Pathophysiology 

Chapter 13 Gastrointestinal Pathophysiology Chapter 14 Hepatobiliary 

and Pancreatic Pathophysiology Chapter 15 Renal Pathophysiology 

Chapter 16 Fluid and Electrolyte Imbalances Chapter 17 Endocrine 

Pathophysiology Chapter 18 Skeletal and Muscular Pathophysiology 

Chapter 19 Reproductive Pathophysiology Chapter 20 Disorders of 

Central ervous System Development, Vascular Support, and Protection 

Chapter 21 Disorders of Movement, Sensation, and Mental Function 

Chapter 22 Seizures and Epilepsy Chapter 23 Pain and Pain Management 

Chapter 24 Trauma 

29 


9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM


Reproductive Biology 

Anatomy & Physiology 

HUMAN REPRODUCTIVE BIOLOGY 

3rd Edition 

By Sylvia S Mader 

2005 (April 2004) / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287234-7 / MHID: 0-07-287234-9 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/maderrepro3 

This text presents human reproduction from the biological point 

of view. It is most appropriate for use by non-science students 

who would like a biological understanding of human reproduction. 

The three parts of the book may be studied in whatever 

sequences the instructor desires. Part I contains topics on human 

inheritance and biotechnology. Part II has in depth coverage of 

fertilization, and the major biological events of embryonic and 

fetal development. In Part III, the evolution of sexual reproduction 

is presumed to have increased biological fitness. 

CONTENTS 

Part I- Human Inheritance 1 Chromosomes and Chromosomal Inheritance 

2 Genes and Medical Inheritance 3 DNA and Molecular Genetics 

4 Genetic Counseling Part II- Human Reproduction 5 Reproductive 

Hormones and Sexual Maturation 6 Human Reproductive Systems 7 

Human Sexual Response 8 Fertilization, Development, and Birth 9 

Birth Control and Infertility 10 Sexually Transmitted Diseases AIDS 

SUPPLEMENT Part III- Evolution, Behavior, and Population Concerns 

11 Evolution 12 Behavior 13 Population Concerns 










COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








Human Anatomy - Textbooks 


New 

HUMAN ANATOMY 

2nd Edition 

By Kenneth S Saladin, Georgia College and State University 

2008 (January 2007) / 864 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329369-1 / MHID: 0-07-329369-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110209-4 / MHID: 0-07-110209-4 [IE] 

From the most pedagogically sound organization to the exceptional 

art, to the complete integration of the text with technology, 

Saladin has formed a teaching system that will both motivate 

and enable students to understand and appreciate the wonders 

of human anatomy. This distinctive text was developed to stand 

apart from all other anatomy texts with an approach borne out 

of 25 years of teaching, unparalleled art, and a writing style that 

has been acclaimed by reviewers. Designed for a one-semester 

college anatomy course, Saladin requires no prior knowledge 

of college chemistry or cell biology. 

NEW TO THIS EDITION 

• Revamped Art Program--We’ve made this unparalleled, completely 

digitized from the groundwork up, art program even better with the use 

of a more colorful and 3-dimensional style; and many of the figures will 

be larger than in previous editions. 

• Anatomy & Physiology Revealed!--Anatomy & Physiology Revealed! 

is a unique multimedia tool designed to help students learn and review 

using a virtual human cadaver! Detailed cadaver photos layered upon 

one another provide an interactive dissection experience! The program 

includes 5 major areas: dissections, animations, imaging, anatomy terms 

and an incredible self testing program. All sections combine to make 

study time efficient and lectures unforgettable. 

• Correlations to Anatomy & Physiology Revealed! multimedia tool- 

-The new edition will feature basic Anatomy & Physiology Revealed! 

correlations throughout the book, as well as specific correlations offered 

on the website. 

• A.R.I.S.--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS (Assessment, Review, and Instruction 

System) is an electronic homework and course management system 

which is designed for greater flexibility, power, and ease of use than 

any other system. Homework is easy-to-assign, automatically graded, 

and recorded in a robust grade book. Instructors can even share their 

course materials and assignments with colleagues. Whether you are 

looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of-the-box” system or one you 

can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is your solution. 

Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more 

information on getting started with ARIS. 

• More Critical Thinking Questions--These new critical thinking questions 

are found near Figure Legends throughout the text. 

FEATURES 

• Exceptional Writing!--This is the main Saladin advantage! His text is 

VERY accurate, straightforward and conversational. Based on 23 years 

of teaching, and written to the typical anatomy student, Saladin avoids 

confusing side issues and extraneous material in his text. He frequently 

uses analogies to help students understand difficult concepts. 

• Pedagogy as a Teaching Tool--Human Anatomy was created with one 

goal in mind – to offer students a superior learning tool with which to 

master anatomy. His approach conveys the necessary information, but 

is structured around a consistent and unique framework of pedagogical 

aids.s.s. 

30 


9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM


• Objectives--Each Chapter is divided into five or six digestible sections. 

Each section begins with a short list of objectives, making it easier to 

break down the subject matter as well as Before You Go On questions at 

the beginning and end of each section. These features enable students to 

set manageable learning goals and to evaluate their own comprehension 

and progress in digestible segments before moving ahead. 

• Macroscopic to Microscopic--Complex structures provide macro and 

micro views of images so students can learn to connect the levels of 

reality with each other. 

• Atlas Quality Cadaver Images Full-color photographs of dissected 

human cadavers provide detailed views of human anatomy that allow 

students concrete visualization of anatomical students and their position 

relative to other parts of the body. 

CONTENTS 

Part One: Organization of the Human Body 1 The Study of Human 

Anatomy Atlas A Survey of the Human Body 2 Cytology—The Study of 

Cells 3 Histology—The Study of Tissues 4 Human Development Part 

Two: Support and Movement 5 The Integumentary System 6 Bone 

Tissue 7 The Axial Skeleton 8 The Appendicular Skeleton 9 Joints 10 

The Muscular System—Introduction 11 The Axial Musculature 12 The 

Appendicular Musculature Atlas B Surface Anatomy Part Three: Integration 

and Control 13 Nervous Tissue 14 The Spinal Cord and Spinal 

Nerves 15 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 16 The Autonomic Nervous 

System and Visceral Reflexes 17 Sense Organs 18 The Endocrine System 

Part Four: Maintenance 19 The Circulatory System I—Blood 20 The 

Circulatory System II—The Heart 21 The Circulatory System III—Blood 

Vessels 22 The Lymphatic System and Immunity 23 The Respiratory 

System 24 The Digestive System 25 The Urinary System Part Five: 

Reproduction 26 The Reproductive System 


HUMAN ANATOMY 

By Michael McKinley, Glendale Community College and Valerie 

O’Loughlin, Indiana University --Bloomington 

2006 (Feb 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310941-1 / MHID: 0-07-310941-X 

(with OLC Bind-In Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111722-7 / MHID: 0-07-111722-9 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mckinley1 

From the most pedagogically sound organization to the exceptional 

art, to the complete integration of the text with embryology, 

McKinley has formed a teaching system that will both 

motivate and enable students to understand and appreciate the 

wonders of human anatomy. This distinctive text was developed 

to stand apart from all other anatomy texts with an unrivaled, 

brilliantly rendered art program and a student friendly, accessible 

writing style that has been acclaimed by reviewers. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 A First Look at Anatomy Chapter 2 The Cell: Basic Unit of 

Structure and Function Chapter 3 Embryology Chapter 4 The Tissue 

Level of Organization Chapter 5 Integumentary System SKELETAL SYS- 

TEM Chapter 6 Cartilage and Bone Connective Tissue Chapter 7 Axial 

Skeleton Chapter 8 Appendicular Skeleton Chapter 9 Joints (Articulations) 

MUSCULAR SYSTEM Chapter 10 Muscle Tissue and Organization 

Chapter 11 Axial Musculature Chapter 12 Appendicular Musculature 

Chapter 13 Surface Anatomy NERVOUS SYSTEM Chapter 14 Nervous 

Tissue Chapter 15 Brain and Cranial Nerves Chapter 16 Spinal Cord and 

Spinal Nerves Chapter 17 Pathways and Tracts Chapter 18 Autonomic 

Division Chapter 19 Senses—General and Special Chapter 20 Endocrine 

System CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM Chapter 21 Blood Chapter 22 

Heart Chapter 23 Vessels and Circulation Chapter 24 Lymphatic System 

Chapter 25 Respiratory System Chapter 26 Digestive System Chapter 

27 Urinary System Chapter 28 Reproductive System 


HUMAN ANATOMY 

6th Edition 

By Kent Van De Graaf, Weber State University 

2002 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248665-0 / MHID: 0-07-248665-1 

(Mandatory Package) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112284-9 / MHID: 0-07-112284-2 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/vdg 

CONTENTS 

Historical Perspective: 1 History of Anatomy Terminology, Organization, 

and the Human Organism: 2 Body Organization and Anatomical 

Nomenclature Microscopic Structure of the Body: 3 Cytology 4 Histology 

Support and Movement: 5 Integumentary System 6 Skeletal System: 

Introduction and the Axial Skeleton 7 Skeletal System: The Appendicular 

Skeleton 8 Articulations 9 Muscular System 10 Surface and Regional 

Anatomy Integration and Coordination: 11 Nervous Tissue and the 

Central Nervous System 12 Peripheral Nervous System 13 Autonomic 

Nervous System 14 Endocrine System 15 Sensory Organs Maintenance 

of the Body: 16 Circulatory System 17 Respiratory System 18 Digestive 

System 19 Urinary System Reproduction and Development: 20 Male 

Reproductive System 21 Female Reproductive System 22 Developmental 

Anatomy, Postnatal Growth, and Inheritance Appendix A Answers 

to Objective Questions with Explanations 

New 

Human Anatomy Lab 

REGIONAL HUMAN ANATOMY 

A Laboratory Workbook for use with Models and 

Prosections, 3rd Edition 

By Frederick Edward Grine, Stony Brook University 

2008 (January 2007) / 416 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305128-4 / MHID: 0-07-305128-4 

The Grine Lab Workbook is designed for the Human Anatomy 

Lab course and takes a REGIONAL approach as opposed to a 

systems approach. This approach is becoming more and more 

popular as a way to teach Human Anatomy. Instructors who 

use a lab book with a “regional approach” and combine it 

with a text that takes a “systems” approach offer their students 

a combination that serves to reinforce anatomical knowledge 

since it forces the student to see each anatomical structure from 

two perspectives. Grine can be used effectively in conjunction 

with a lab course that uses human cadavers since the content 

is presented in the regional sequence typically practiced in 

dissection. 


• Currently, there is no other manual on the market that takes this 

approach that is NOT a dissection guide. This approach mimics the 

dissection of a human cadaver, and the order of the Chapters is such 

that most cadaveric dissections follow the same sequence. 

• The regional perspective allows students to think about anatomical 

structures (the heart for example) not only in terms of their relationship 

within a body system (cardiovascular), but also in terms of their relationship 

to organs located in the immediate vicinity (thoracic structures 

for example). 

• Exquisite collection of precisely rendered black and white illustrations 

intended for students to color them in and add labels. 

31 


9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM


Labels are keyed to text explanations, so student reads text and then 

matches structure numbers to fill in the labels. 

• Boxed activities including critical thinking questions, prompts to 

examine lab specimens or models, palpation exercises, etc. 

• Boxed clinical asides note important clinical connections. 

CONTENTS 

Laboratory 1: Anatomical Terminology, General Osteology, and General 

Arthrology1.1 Anatomical Terminology 1.2 General Osteology 1.3 

General Arthrology Laboratory 2: The Back 2.1 The Integument 2.2 

The Vertebral Column 2.3 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 2.4 Muscles 

of the Back Laboratory 3: The Upper Limb 3.1 Bones of the Upper 

Limb 3.2 Joints of the Upper Limb 3.3 Innervation of the Upper Limb 

3.4 Muscles of the Upper Limb 3.5 Blood Vessels of the Upper Limb 

Laboratory 4: The Lower Limb 4.1 Bones of the Lower Limb 4.2 Joints 

of the Lower Limb 4.3 Innervation of the Lower Limb 4.4 Muscles of 

the Lower Limb 4.5 Blood Vessels of the Lower Limb Laboratory 5: 

The Neck 5.1 Bones and Cartilages of the Neck 5.2 Nerves of the Neck 

5.3 Muscles of the Neck 5.4 Blood Vessels of the Neck 5.5 Thyroid 

and Parathyroid Glands Laboratory 6: The Head 6.1 The Skull 6.2 

The Dentition 6.3 Muscles of the Head 6.4 Nasal and Oral Cavities 

6.5 Blood Vessels of the Head Laboratory 7: The Brain and Cranial 

Nerves 7.1 The Brain 7.2 Cranial Nerves Laboratory 8: The Eye and The 

Ear 8.1 The Eye 8.2 The Ear Laboratory 9: The Thorax 9.1 The Breast 

9.2 The Thoracic Skeleton 9.3 Skeletal Muscles of the Thorax 9.4 The 

Thoracic Cavity 9.5 The Mediastinum 9.6 The Respiratory Apparatus 

9.7 The Heart 9.8 Lymphatics in the Thorax 9.9 Blood Vessels of the 

Thorax 9.10 Nerves of the Thorax Laboratory 10: The Abdomen 10.1 

The Abdominal Skeleton 10.2 Skeletal Muscles of the Abdomen 10.3 

Abdominal Cavity and peritoneum 10.4 Digestive Canal and Organs 

10.5 Blood Vessels of the Gut 10.6 Lymphatic Organs and Lymph Drainage 

10.7 The Kidneys and Adrenal Glands 10.8 Gonadal Blood Vessels 

10.9 Nerves in the Abdomen Laboratory 11: The Pelvis 11.1 The Pelvic 

Skeleton 11.2 Muscles of the Pelvis 11.3 Peritoneum in the Pelvic Cavity 

11.4 Common Pelvic Viscera 11.5 Male Genitalia 11.6 Female Genitalia 

11.7 Blood Vessels of the Pelvis 11.8 Nerves of the Pelvis 

New 

HUMAN ANATOMY LABORATORY MANUAL 

2nd Edition 

By Eric Wise 

2008 (June 2007) / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294602-4 / MHID: 0-07-294602-4 

This laboratory manual is expressly written to coincide with the 

Chapters of Human Anatomy, 2/e by Kenneth Saladin. This lab 

manual has clear explanations of anatomy experiments. Other 

features include a set of review questions at the end of each lab, 

plus numerous outstanding color photographs and artwork. 

FEATURES 

• The cat is the main dissection specimen in this laboratory manual, 

however, it is integrated with material on human anatomy, so that animals 

do not have to be relied upon as dissection specimens. 

• Collection of data is imbedded within each exercise as opposed to 

a separate table in the back of the manual. 

• Study Hints are located in selected exercises where additional information 

is provided to help students comprehend and retain difficult 

material presented. 

CONTENTS 

1 Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 2 Microscopy 3 Cell 

Structure 4 Tissues 5 Integumentary System 6 Introduction to the Skeletal 

System 7 Appendicular Skeleton 8 Axial Skeleton: Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, 

Hyoid 9 Axial Skeleton--Skull 10 Articulations 11 Introduction to 

the Study of Muscles and Muscles of the Shoulder and Upper Extremity 

12 Muscles of the Hip, Thigh, Leg and Foot 13 Muscles of the Head and 

Neck 14 Muscles of the Torso 15 Introduction to the Nervous System 

16 Brain and Cranial Nerves 17 Spinal Cord and Somatic Nerves 18 

Introduction to Sensory Receptors 19 Endocrine System 20 Blood Cells 

21 The Heart 22 Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper 

Body 23 Arteries of the Lower Body 24 Veins, Fetal Circulation, and 

the Lymphatic System 25 Respiratory System 26 Digestive System 27 

Urinary System 28 Male Reproductive System 29 Female Reproductive 

System / Appendix Preparation of Materials 

HUMAN ANATOMY LABORATORY TEXTBOOK 

7th Edition 

By Harold Benson and Kathleen Talaro of Pasadena City College 

2005 (May 2004) / 416 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247579-1 / MHID: 0-07-247579-X 

This stand-alone manual, featuring complete explanations of 

essential information, is ideal for the one-semester, introductory 

human anatomy course. The main dissection specimen is the cat, 

with additional exercises for the cow, rat, and sheep organs. 

CONTENTS 

1 Some Fundamentals 1 Anatomical Terminology 2 Body Cavities 

and Membranes 3 Organ Systems: Rat Dissection 2 Cells and Tissues 

4 Microscopy 5 Basic Cell Structure 6 Mitosis 7 Epithelial Tissues 8 

Connective Tissues 9 The Integument 3 The Skeletal System 10 The 

Skeletal Plan 11 The Skull 12 The Vertebral Column and Thorax 13 

The Appendicular Skeleton 14 Articulations 4 The Skeletal Muscles 

15 Muscle Tissue 16 Muscle Structure 17 Body Movements 18 Cat 

Dissection: Skin Removal 19 Head and Neck Muscles 20 Trunk and 

Shoulder Muscles 21 Upper Extremity Muscles 22 Abdominal and 

Pelvic Muscles 23 Lower Extremity Muscles 5 The Nervous System 

24 Nerve Tissue 25 The Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and Reflex Arcs 

26 The Neuromuscular Junction 27 Brain Anatomy: External 28 Brain 

Anatomy: Internal 29 The Eye 30 The Ear The Histology Atlas 6 Metabolic 

Support 31 The Blood 32 The Heart 33 The Arteries and Veins 34 

Fetal Circulation 35 The Lymphatic System and the Immune Response 

36 The Respiratory System 37 The Digestive System 38 The Urinary 

System 7 The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems 39 The Endocrine 

System 40 The Reproductive System Histology Self-Quizzes Laboratory 

Reports / Appendix A Answer Keys to Histology Self-Quizzes / Appendix 

B Slice of Life Videodisc Directory 

• Instructors can down load Instructors Manual’s and other materials 

at: www.mhhe.com/labcentral 

• Review sections at the end of each exercise assist students in assessing 

thier understanding. This lab manual includes about 20 review 

questions per exercise! 

• Review questions include short answer exercises as well as application 

questions and labeling activities. 

• All experiments presented in numbered list format making it easier 

for students to follow the steps required to set up and complete each 

experiment. 

32 


9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM


LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN 

ANATOMY 

6th Edition 

By Kent Van De Graaf, Weber State University 

2002 / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290794-0 / MHID: 0-07-290794-0 

Website: www.mhhe.com/vdg 

CONTENTS 

1 Body Organization and Anatomical Nomenclature 2 Cytology 3 

Histology 4 Integumentary System 5 Skeletal System: Introduction and 

the Axial Skeleton 6 Skeletal System: The Appendicular Skeleton 7 

Articulations 8 Muscular System: Muscles of the Upper Body 9 Muscular 

System: Muscles of the Lower Body 10 Nervous Tissue and the 

Central Nervous System 11 Peripheral Nervous System 12 Endocrine 

System 13 Sensory Organs 14 Circulatory System: Blood, Heart, and 

Arteries 15 Circulatory System: Veins, Fetal Circulation, and Lymphatic 

System 16 Respiratory System 17 Digestive System 18 Urinary System 

19 Reproductive System 20 Anatomy of the Cat 

Human Anatomy - Multimedia 

New 

ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CDS 1-4 

COMPLETE SERIES 

By Medical College of Ohio 

2007 (May 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321553-2 / MHID: 0-07-321553-8 

Anatomy & Physiology Revealed is the ultimate interactive 

cadaver dissection experience. This state-of-the-art tutorial uses 

cadaver photos combined with a layering technique that allows 

the student to peel away layers of the human body to reveal 

structures beneath the surface. Anatomy & Physiology Revealed 

offers animations, radiologic imaging, audio pronunciations, 

and a comprehensive quizzing tool. This tutorial can be used 

as part of any one or two semester undergraduate Anatomy & 

Physiology course; it is available as a stand-alone or can be 

combined with any of McGraw-Hill’s Anatomy & Physiology 

textbooks. 

FEATURES 

• DISSECTION: Using actual cadaver photographs blended together 

with a state of the art layering technique, Anatomy Revealed allows 

students to partake in an interactive dissection of a human cadaver. 

Students can literally peel away layers of the human body to reveal 

structures beneath the surface. 

• ANIMATION: Compelling animations demonstrate muscle actions, 

clarify anatomical relationships, or explain difficult concepts. 

ANATOMY REVEALED: VOLUME 1, SKELETAL AND 

MUSCULAR SYSTEMS 

By Medical College of Ohio and McGraw-Hill 

2006 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312323-3 / MHID: 0-07-312323-4 (CD#1) 

CD 1: Muscular and Skeletal Systems CD 2: Nervous System 

CD 3: Cardiovascular and Respiratory Systems CD 4: Digestive, 

Urinary, Reproductive, and Endocrine Systems 

CONTENTS 

CD 1: Muscular and Skeletal Systems CD 2: Cardiovascular and Respiratory 

Systems CD 3: Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive, and Endocrine 

Systems CD 4: Nervous System 

ANATOMY & pHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CD#2 - 

NERVOUS 

By Medical College of Ohio and McGraw-Hill 

2006 (April 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312321-9 / MHID: 0-07-312321-8 











textbooks. 

ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CD 

#3 - CARDIOVASCULAR, RESPIRATORY AND 

LYMPHATIC SYSTEMS 


2006 (December 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321550-1 / MHID: 0-07-321550-3 











textbooks. 

• IMAGING: Labeled x-ray, MRI, and CAT scan images are available 

by system. 

• SELF-TEST: Challenging quizzes allow students to test their ability to 

identify anatomical structures in a timed practical exam format. 

33 


9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM


New 

ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED CD #4 

– DIGESTIVE, URINARY, REPRODUCTIVE AND 

ENDOCRINE SYSTEMS 


2007 (May 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321551-8 / MHID: 0-07-321551-1 











textbooks. 

FEATURES 

• DISSECTION: Using actual cadaver photographs blended together 

with a state of the art layering technique, Anatomy Revealed allows 

students to partake in an interactive dissection of a human cadaver. 

Students can literally peel away layers of the human body to reveal 

structures beneath the surface. 

• ANIMATION: Compelling animations demonstrate muscle actions, 

clarify anatomical relationships, or explain difficult concepts. 

• IMAGING: Labeled x-ray, MRI, and CAT scan images are available 

by system. 

• SELF-TEST: Challenging quizzes allow students to test their ability to 

identify anatomical structures in a timed practical exam format. 

VIRTUAL ANATOMY DISSECTION REVIEW CD-ROM 

Version 2.0 

By John R. Waters, Pennsylvania State University – University Park 

2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297431-7 / MHID: 0-07-297431-1 

(Stand-Alone Version) 

Nationwide, a majority of teaching laboratories use cats as their 

primary dissection specimens. Carolina Biological, for example, 

provides 120,000 cat specimens per year to the college market. 

However, students often have a difficult time making the correlations 

between the cat dissection and the human body. This 

new CD-ROM dissection program identifies approximately 600 

different anatomical structures. Sound profiles provide pronunciations 

for each of these 600 terms. Also featured on the CD, 

are 100 high-resolution photographs. By clicking anywhere on 

the structures of the cat, an information frame will then provide 

the name of the structure, as well as a smaller image that highlights 

and puts the structure in its human anatomical context. 

In addition, approximately 30 QuickTime movies demonstrate 

joint movements. 

CONTENTS 

Skeletal System (Axial Skeleton) Skull, anterior view / Skull, lateral view / 

Skull, inferior view / Skull, interior view / Atlas / Axis / Cervical vertebra 

/ Thoracic vertebra / Lumbar vertebra / Sacrum / Sternum / Rib (Appendicular 

Skeleton) Clavicle / Scapula / Humeus / Ulna / Radius / Wrist 

and Hand / Os coxa / Femur / Tibia / Fibula / Ankle and Foot Muscular 

System Chest / Chest, deep / Neck / Shoulder/back / Shoulder/back, 

deep / Abdomen / Arm, flexors / Arm, flexors, deep / Arm, extensors / 

Antebrachium, extensors / Hind region, lateral / Hind region, lateral, 

deep / Leg, medial / Leg, medial, deep / Shank, lateral / Shank, medial 

Gastrointestinal System Mouth and Throat / Abdominal cavity, general 

view / Liver / Small intestines / Large intestines Respiratory System Larynx 

and Trachea / Lungs Cardiovascular System Cranial vessels, general 

view / Cranial vessels, shoulder and arm / Caudal vessels, general view 

/ Caudal vessels, hip and leg / Sheep heart, external view / Sheep heart, 

interior, right side / Sheep heart, interior, left side Urogenital System 

Reproductive system, male / Reproductive system, female / Sheep kidney 

Nervous System Sheep brain, lateral view / Sheep brain, inferior view / 

Sheep brain, posterior view / Sheep brain, sagital section / Sheep eye, 

external view / Sheep eye, internal view / Inner ear (model) 

Human Physiology - Textbooks 


New 

HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 

10th Edition 

By Stuart Ira Fox 

2008 (January 2007) / 800 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294613-0 / MHID: 0-07-294613-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110207-0 / MHID: 0-07-110207-8 [IE] 

Human Physiology, Tenth Edition, is intended for the one-semester 

Human Physiology course often taken by allied health and 

other biology students. The beginning Chapters introduce basic 

chemical and biological concepts to provide students with the 

framework they need to comprehend physiological principles. 

The Chapters that follow promote conceptual understanding 

rather than rote memorization of facts. Health applications 

are included throughout the book to heighten interest, deepen 

understanding of physiological concepts, and help students 

relate the material to their individual career goals. Every effort 

has been made to help students integrate related concepts and 

understand the relationships between anatomical structures 

and their functions. 


• Inovative Clinical Pedagogical Techniques--The innovative pedagogical 

techniques utilized in Human Physiology helps students to make the 

most of the information in the text. Each Chapter includes the following 

clinical learning aids: 

1) “Clinical Investigations” are brief case studies presented at the beginning 

of the Chapters to present a fascinating puzzle. Clues to solving 

the case are given along the way, as each relevant piece of information 

is presented. 

2) “Clinical and Fitness Applications” boxes help students understand 

physiological concepts through medical and exercise applications. 

• A new and updated art program helps clarify difficult concepts. 18 

new figures and 3 new tables are indcluded in the text. The new figures 

are: 1.6, 1.24, 5.1, 6.18, 6.27, 6.29, 6.30, 7.15, 7.16, 7.25, 8.24, 10.11, 

10.22, 11.12, 12.17, 12.23, 14.13, 16.36, 16.43 

• Revisions and content updates have been made in every Chapter, 

keeping the text current with the latest research, and incorporating new 

and recently modified physiological concepts. 

• New Text Specific Website!--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS (Assessment, Review, 

and Instruction System) is an electronic homework and course 

management system which is designed for greater flexibility, power, and 

ease of use than any other system. Homework is easy-to-assign, automatically 

graded, and recorded in a robust grade book. Instructors can even 

share their course materials and assignments with colleagues. Whether 

you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of-the-box” system or 

34 


9/29/2006 11:54:19 AM

one you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is your 

solution. Contact your local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for 

more information on getting started with ARIS. 

FEATURES 

• A revised and improved Instructor Manual is now available with Fox 

10e. The manual includes Chapter scope, lecture outlines and answers 

to text questions. 

CONTENTS 

1 The Study of Body Function 2 Chemical Composition of the Body 3 

Cell Structure and Genetic Control 4 Enzymes and Energy 5 Cell Respiration 

and Metabolism 6 Interactions Between Cells and the Extracellular 

Environment 7 The Nervous System: Neurons and Synapses 8 The 

Central Nervous System 9 The Autonomic Nervous System 10 Sensory 

Physiology 11 Endocrine Glands: Secretion and Action of Hormones 

12 Muscle: Mechanisms of Contraction and Neural Control 13 Blood, 

Heart and Circulation 14 Cardio Output, Blood Flow, and Blood Pressure 

15 The Immune System 16 Respiratory Physiology 17 Physiology 

of the Kidneys 18 The Digestive System 19 Regulation of Metabolism 20 

Reproduction Appendix A Solutions to Clinical Investigations Appendix 

B Answers to Test Your Knowledge of Terms and Facts Questions 


VANDER’S HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 

10th Edition 

By Eric P. Widmaier, Boston University, Hershel Raff, Medical 

College of Wisconsin and Kevin T. Strang, University of Wisconsin 

— Madison 

2006 (January 2005) / 864 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312286-1 / MHID: 0-07-312286-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111678-7 / MHID: 0-07-111678-8 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/widmaier10e 

The tenth edition of this classic text has been entrusted into the 

capable hands for the 2nd time to a dynamic author team. Eric 

Widmaier, Hershel Raff, and Kevin Strang have taken on the 

challenge of maintaining the strengths and reputation that have 

long been the hallmark of Human Physiology: The Mechanisms 

of Body Function. The fundamental purpose of this textbook 

has remained undeniably the same: to present the principles 

and facts of human physiology in a format that is suitable for 

undergraduates regardless of academic background or field of 

study. Human Physiology, tenth edition, carries on the tradition 

of clarity and accuracy, while refining and updating the content 

to meet the needs of today’s instructors and students. The tenth 

edition features a streamlined, clinically oriented focus to the 

study of human body systems. 

contents 

1 Homeostasis: A Framework for Human Physiology 2 Chemical Composition 

of the Body 3 Cell Structure and Protein Function 4 Movement 

of Molecules Across Cell Membranes 5 Control of Cells by Chemical 

Messengers 6 Neuronal Signaling and the Structure of the Nervous 

System 7 Sensory Physiology 8 Consciousness, the Brain, and Behavior 

9 Muscle 10 Control of Body Movement 11 The Endocrine System 12 

Cardiovascular Physiology 13 Respiratory Physiology 14 The Kidneys 

and Regulation of Water and Inorganic Ions 15 The Digestion and 

Absorption of Food 16 Regulation of Organic Metabolism and Energy 

Balance 17 Reproduction 18 Defense Mechanisms of the Body 

New 

Human Physiology Lab 

LABORATORY GUIDE TO HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 

Concepts and Clinical Applications, 12th Edition 

By Stuart Ira Fox 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294617-8 / MHID: 0-07-294617-2 

A Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology, Twelfth Edition, is 

a stand-alone human physiology manual that can be used in 

conjunction with any human physiology textbook. It includes 

a wide variety of exercises that support most areas covered in 

a human physiology course, allowing instructors the flexibility 

to choose those exercises best suited to meet their particular 

instructional goals. Background information that is needed to 

understand the principles and significance of each exercise is 

presented in a concise manner, so that little or no support is 

needed from the lecture text. 


• Procedures Revised--Many of the exercises have updated explanations 

of basic physiology and clinical applications, as well as procedures 

that have been updated for newer equipment. 

• 15 NEW EXERCISES IN Ph.I.L.S.! The Physiology Interactive Lab 

Simulations (Ph.I.L.S.) 2.0 CD-ROM now contains 26 simulated lab 

exercises that can be performed in addition to, or instead of, the noted 

exercises in the Fox laboratory guide. This easy to use software offers 

students the flexibility to change the parameters of every lab experiment, 

with no limit to the amount of times a student can repeat experiments 

or modify the variables. 

• Revised Review Activities--The review activities have been revised for 

almost all of the exercises in order to improve clarity and coverage. 

Features 

• A “Caution” Icon--This special Caution icon is used throughout 

the guide to alert the student that special attention is necessary when 

preparing for or performing the laboratory exercises. 

• Review Activities Throughout--The review activities in the laboratory 

reports provide the same 3-level review question format as found in the 

textbook. Questions fall into 3 levels: a.) Test Your Knowledge of Terms 

and Facts, b.) Test Your Understanding of Concepts and Principles, and 

c.) Test Your Ability to Analyze and Apply Your Knowledge. 

• Correlations to Human Physiology, by Stuart Fox--Each exercise 

includes a “Textbook Correlations” box that enables students to integrate 

the Fox: Human Physiology text and lab material. However, 

this is still a stand alone lab manual and can be used with any Human 

Physiology text. 

• Intelitool laboratory exercises are included. 


• Alternative procedures for users of BIOPAC are provided for several 

exercises pertaining to recording the EEG, cardiovascular measurements 

(blood pressure, pulse, etc.), skeletal muscle recordings (EMG, contractions, 

fatigue), and respiratory measurements. 

• Instructors can download the Instructor’s Manual and other materials 


Contents 

1 Introduction: Structure and Physiological Control Systems 2 Cell 

Function and Biochemical Measurements 3 The Nervous System and 

Sensory Physiology 4 The Endocrine System 5 Skeletal Muscles 6 Blood: 

Gas Transport, Immunity, and Clotting Functions 7 The Cardiovascular 

System 8 Respiration and Metabolism 9 Renal Function and Homeostasis 

10 Digestion and Nutrition 11 Reproductive System / Appendix 1 Basic 

Chemistry Appendix 2 Sources of Equipment and Solutions Appendix 

35 


9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM


3 Multimedia Correlations to the Laboratory Exercises 

New 

LAB EXERCISES IN HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 

A Clinical & Experimental Approach with PhILS 2.0 

By William Lutterschmidt and Deborah Lutterschmidt, Oregon State 

University 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330539-4 / MHID: 0-07-330539-1 

This stand-alone laboratory text has been developed as an 

introduction to fundamental concepts in physiology. The text 

has been designed to emphasize an experimental approach to 

teaching physiology and is therefore designed for a particular 

type of student and curriculum. Many of the exercises will help 

students develop their clinical knowledge of physiology, plus 

help them gain an appreciation for the clinical techniques as 

would be needed by students studying nursing, physical therapy, 

and other health-oriented fields. Although this laboratory text 

may be used independently, its presentation and formal of material 

will closely follow that of Vander’s Human Physiology, 

10th Edition. 

FEATURES 

• Exercise on Scientific Investigation--A Laboratory exercise on Scientific 

Investigation is included to introduce basic data analyses used in 

physiology. Each laboratory exercise is also organized in a format of a 

scientific publication having An Introduction, Materials and Methods, 

Results, and Discussion sections. 

• Pre-Lab Exercises--Each laboratory presents an introduction and a 

series of pre-lab exercises that students should complete before each 

laboratory session. These pre-lab exercises may be collected by the 

instructor at the beginning of the laboratory session in addition to or in 

lieu of a pre-lab quiz. A brief introduction to the exercise presents the 

essential information for understanding the physiological significance 

of each laboratory. 

• Offering “Comparative Notes”--The study of physiology is most intriguing 

to both students and instructors when particular physiological 

processes are placed in the broader context of physiological adaptation. 

Each lab exercises offers a “Comparative Note” to introduce the 

student to a variety of physiological solutions to the unique challenges 

of a species’ environment. 

• Expectations Clearly Defined--Each laboratory has a clear and consistent 

organization: A concise statement of Purpose, Learning Objectives, 

Materials List, and a brief Introduction. 

• Physiology Interactive Lab Simulations (Ph.I.L.S.) 2.0--This laboratory 

text utilizes Ph.I.L.S. where no appropriate alternative to classical 

animal-based experiments are available. 

• Lab Reports--A laboratory report follows each exercise to examine 

a student’s understanding of the physiological concepts investigated 

in the laboratory. 

• Instructor’s Manual--An instructor’s manual is provided online at 

www.mhhe.com/lutterschmidt1. Simply contact your local McGraw- 

Hill sales representative to obtain the appropriate user name and 

password. 

CONTENTS 

1 Scientific Investigation 2 Homeostasis 3 Diffusion, Osmosis, and 

Tonicity 4 Enzyme Activity 5 Action Potentials 6 Reflexes 7 Sensory 

Physiology 8 Functional Anatomy of Muscle and Mechanics of Contraction 

9 Physiology of Muscle Contraction 10 Endocrine Physiology 

11 Cardiovascular Physiology 12 Physiology of Blood 13 Respiratory 

Physiology 14 Renal Physiology 15 Metabolic Rate 

New 

experimental and applied physiology 

laboratory manual 

8th Edition 

By Richard G Pflanzer, Iupui - Indianapolis 

2007 (Sept 2005) / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250077-6 / MHID: 0-07-250077-8 

Experimental and Applied Physiology Laboratory Manual, Eighth 

Edition, is a comprehensive, stand-alone laboratory manual for 

the one-semester physiology course taught at the undergraduate 

level. It can accompany any physiology textbook on the 

market, and reinforces those principles that are fundamental to 

all courses on physiology. The strengths of this lab manual are 

its emphasis on hands-on experiments, a practical balance of 

background information, and clear procedural instructions. 


• Laboratory exercises have been updated throughout to reflect latest 

technology and current procedures. 

• The lab manual has been shortened in length through the elimination 

of experiments which used older equipment such as the Harvard 

Modular Recording System, the Lafayette Datagraph, and the Narco 

Bio-Systems Physiograph. 

features 

• One of the great strengths of this lab manual is the emphasis on handson 

experiments and activities. In order to perform these experiments, 

students must rely on recording, collecting and analyzing data. 

• The excellent illustration program continues to provide students with 

realistic, dimensional, and anatomical renderings. 

• The outstanding pedagogical program includes Review Concepts 

and Chapter Objectives to guide students through the experimental 

process. 

• The manual’s unique organization arranges experiments according 

to the equipment used. 

• All BioPac computer experiments have been removed from the text, 

but are available as an optional package. 

CONTENTS 

1 Metrics, Measurements, Computations 2 Bioinstrumentation 3 Compound 

Light Microscopy 4 Physical Processes of Biological Importance 

5 Neural Control of Skeletal Muscle 6 Contractility of Skeletal Muscle 

I: The Twitch and Motor Unit Summation 7 Contractility of Skeletal 

Muscle II: Mechanical Summation, Contracture, Tetanus, and Fatigue 

8 Contractility of Skeletal Muscle III: Isotonic Contraction and Initial 

Length versus Work 9 Electromyography and Dynamometry 10 Neuromuscular 

Reflexes of the Spinal Cord and Brain Stem 11 Somatic 

Sensation 12 Cranial Nerves: Assessment of Functions 13 Visual Acuity, 

Accommodation, Peripheral Vision, Color Vision, and Ophthalmoscopy 

14 Hearing and Equilibrium 15 Electroencephalography I: Relaxation 

and Brain Rhythms 16 Electroencephalography II: Occipital Lobe Alpha 

Rhythms 17 Blood Cells and Blood Types 18 Red Blood Cell Count 19 

Hemoglobin Content, Hematocrit, and Red Cell Indices 20 Hemostasis: 

The Platelet Count, Bleeding Time, and Coagulation 21 White Blood 

Cell Count 22 Microcirculation 23 The Cardiac Cycle 24 Heart Sounds, 

Pulse Rate, and Systemic Blood Pressure 25 Plethysmography and the 

Peripheral Pressure Pulse 26 Electrical Activity of the Heart: The Electrocardiogram 

27 Electrical Activity of the Heart: Vectorcardiography 

28 The Respiratory Cycle 29 Pulmonary Function Tests: Volumes and 

Capacities 30 Pulmonary Function Tests: Forced Expiratory Volume 

and Maximal Voluntary Ventilation 31 Analysis of Urine 32 Digestion 

33 Metabolic Rates: Indirect Calorimetry 34 Maintenance and 

Regulation of Body Temperature 35 Glucose Tolerance Appendix A 

Preparation of Agar Plates and Pipettes Appendix B Preparation of the 

Egg Osmometer Appendix C Pithing the Frog Appendix D Preparing the 

Freshwater Turtle for Heart Experiments Appendix E Jones Pulmonor 

Disinfectant Procedure 

36 


9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM


Human Physiology - Multimedia 

MEDIAPHYS VERSION 3.0 

An Introduction to Human Physiology, 3rd Edition 

By Tom Stavraky, University of Western Ontario 

2006 (June 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294582-9 / MHID: 0-07-294582-6 (Stand-Alone) 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mediacentral 

McGraw-Hill is proud to introduce MediaPhys 3.0, the most 

comprehensive physiology study tool available. MediaPhys is 

a multimedia educational CD-ROM that offers cross-platform 

compatibility (Windows or Macintosh systems). This dynamic 

program offers 16 complete modules featuring detailed explanations, 

high-quality illustrations, and animations to provide 

students with a thorough introduction into the world of physiology. 

MediaPhys is filled with interactive activities and quizzes 

to help reinforce physiology concepts that are often difficult to 

understand. Now students can learn and study on their own 

while using a powerful tool that challenges them to succeed! 

CONTENTS 

1. Introduction to Physiology 2. Body Fluids 3. Human Cell 4. Nerve 

Cells 5. Muscles 6. Nervous System 7. Sensory Systems 8. Cardiovascular 

System I- The Heart 9. Cardiovascular System II- Blood Vessels 10. 

Respiratory System 11. Renal System, Water and Electrolyte Balance 

12. Acid-Base Balance 13. Endocrine System 14. Reproductive System 

15. Digestive System 16. Metabolism 

PHYSIOLOGY INTERACTIVE LABORATORY 

SIMULATIONS 2.0 

2nd Edition 

By Phillip J Stephens, Villanova University 

2006 (June 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297009-8 / MHID: 0-07-297009-X (CD-ROM) 


Created by Dr. Phil Stephens at Villanova University, the 

Ph.I.L.S (physiology interactive lab simulations) CD-ROM offers 

23 laboratory simulations. This revolutionary learning tool 

may be used to supplement or substitute for wet labs. Students 

can use Ph.I.L.S. to adjust variables, view outcomes, make 

predictions, and draw conclusions. This easy-to-use software 

offers each student the flexibility to change the parameters of 

the lab experiment. There is no limit to the amount of times a 

student can repeat the experiment or change variables within 

the experiments. The Ph.I.L.S. CD-ROM allows students to 

perform experiments without having to use expensive lab 

equipment (like Biopac, IWORX or Intellitool). Students can 

work individually to perform the experiments on their own 

time without harming themselves or live animals. The Ph.I.L.S. 

CD-ROM is the perfect way reinforce key Physiology concepts 

with powerful lab experiments. 

CONTENTS 

Skeletal Muscle Function: 1) Stimulus-Dependent Force Generation; 2) 

The Length-Tension Relationship; 3) Principles of Summation and Tetanus 

Electrocardiogram and Heart Function: 4) ECG and Exercise; 5) The 

Meaning of Heart Sounds; 6) Electrical Axis of the Heart Respiration: 7) 

Altering Body Position; 8) Altering Airway Volume; 9) Exercise-Induced 

Changes; 10) Deep Breathing and Cardiac Function Basal Metabolic 

Rate and Body Size: 11) Size and Metabolism Crayfish Muscle: 12) 

Membrane potentials and K+; 13) Membrane potentials and Na+; 

14)Spatial summation of EPSPs Frog Sciatic Nerve: 15) Stimulus-response 

relationships; 16) Conduction velocity and temperature; 17) Refractory 

Periods Endocrine: 18) Thyroid Function and Metabolic Rate Frog Heart: 

19) Imposed Conditions and Heart Function; 20) Refractory Period of 

the Heart Blood: 21) pH and the Oxygen Dissociation Curve; 22) DPG 

and the Oxygen Dissociation Curve Blood Pressure: 23) Blood Pressure 

and Gravity Blood: 16) pH and the oxygen dissociation curve 

One-Semester 


- Textbooks 


New 

MADER’S UNDERSTANDING HUMAN ANATOMY 

& PHYSIOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By Susannah Longenbaker, Columbus State Community College 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328886-4 / MHID: 0-07-328886-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110208-7 / MHID: 0-07-110208-6 [IE] 

Renowned for her effective learning systems, respected author 

Sylvia Mader has helped thousands of entry-level students 

understand and enjoy the principles of human anatomy and 

physiology. Now, Susannah Longenbaker is building on Dr. 

Mader’s format and engaging writing style while adding her own 

personal touch to this successful title. The writing is still clear, 

direct and user-friendly, but is now enriched with new clinical 

information, terminology and classroom-tested features such as 

“Focus on Forensics” readings and in-text “Content Check-Up” 

questions. Drawing on over twenty years of teaching experience, 

Sue Longenbaker writes for the next generation of students that 

will learn anatomy and physiology from this classic textbook. 


• Logical, accessible writing style (without being overly “chatty”) for 

the one-semester course that includes lots of relevant examples, artwork 

and analogies. 

• Excellent pedagogy written to capture the interest of the student and 

expand upon the Chapter concepts. Examples include; Focus on Forensics, 

Medical Focus, Visual Focus and What’s New boxed readings. 

• Direct Application to Careers in Health-Related Fields. 

• Anatomy and Physiology Revealed (APR)--This text has the opportunity 

to be packaged with the most unique and popular student tutorial CD 

in the anatomy & physiology market today. 

CONTENTS 

Part I Human Organization 1 Organization of the Body 2 Chemistry of 

Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Body Tissues and Membranes Part 

II Support and Movement 5 The Integumentary System 6 The Skeletal 

System 7 The Muscular System Part III Integration and Coordination 

8 The Nervous System 9 The Sensory System 10 The Endocrine System 

Part IV Maintenance of the Body 11 Blood 12 The Circulatory System 

13 The Lymphatic System and Body Defense 14 The Respiratory 

System 15 The Digestive System 16 The Urinary System and Excretion 

Part V Reproduction and Development 17 The Reproductive System 

18 Human Development and Birth 19 Human Genetics / Appendix A 

Reference Figures: The Human Organism / Appendix B Understanding 

Medical Terminology 

37 


9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM



New 

ESSENTIALS OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By Rod R Seeley and Trent D Stephens of Idaho State University and 

Philip Tate, Phoenix College 

2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322805-1 / MHID: 0-07-322805-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125782-4 / MHID: 0-07-125782-9 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/seeleyess5 

Designed for the one-semester course, Seeley/Stephens/Tate’s 

Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology is written to allow instructors 

the ability to accomplish one overall goal: to teach 

the basics of A&P while fostering the skill of problem solving. 

Through learning how to solve problems and think critically, 

students learn A&P based on two themes: the relationship between 

structure and function, and homeostasis. 


• Updated Art- In addition to art updates based on new data, and new 

scanning electron micrograph’s, all of the homeostasis art pieces will 

be improved to better explain flow patterns and be easier to comprehend. 

• “Case in Point” Readings- Certain manifestations or symptoms are 

described to the reader based on the material in the text that they have 

just read. This is then followed by a physiological and/or anatomical 

explanation. These sections reinforce and present immediate real-life 

applications to what the student is reading, thereby increasing comprehension. 

In some instances they will build on the Clinical Aside 

boxes and Predict Questions (current features of the text) to offer an 

even more thorough example of the topic(s) being discussed in the 

surrounding textual material. 

• Anatomy & Physiology Revealed A unique 4 CD multimedia tool 

designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human 

cadaver! Detailed cadaver photos layered upon one another provide 

an interactive dissection experience! Anatomy & Physiology Revealed 



study time efficient and lectures unforgettable 

• Homework Manager Homework Manager--McGraw-Hill’s Homework 

Manager is a complete electronic homework and course management 

system. Free on adoption, instructors can create and share 

course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of 

the mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, 

and create announcements and due dates for assignments. Homework 

Manager has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, 

quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, 

all student activity within Homework Manager is automatically recorded 

and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that 

can be downloaded to Excel. 

features 

• Process figures. These self-contained art pieces break down physiological 

processes into a series of smaller steps, allowing students to 

track the key occurrences and learn them as they navigate through 

the figure. 

• Homeostasis figures. These specialized flowcharts provide a summary 

of homeostatic mechanisms by outlining the functions of a system and 

the means by which that system regulates a parameter within a narrow 

range of values. 

• Clinical Focus boxes. These boxed essays are expanded versions of 

the clinical notes that permit more detailed coverage of a topic. Subjects 

covered include pathologies, current research, sports medicine, 

exercise physiology, pharmacology and clinical applications. They are 

designed to not only illustrate the Chapter content but also to stimulate 

interest. 

• Predict questions. These critical thinking questions, embedded 

throughout each Chapter, convert the passive learner into an active 

learner by requiring students to use new information to solve a problem. 

The answer to this kind of question is not a mere restatement of a 

fact, but rather a prediction and analysis of the data, the synthesis of an 

experiment, or the evaluation and weighing of important variables of a 

problem. Answers for the Predict questions are explained at the end of 

each Chapter to demonstrate the process of problem-solving. 

CONTENTS 

1 Human Organism 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cell Structures and Their 

Functions 4 Tissues, Glands, and Membranes 5 Integumentary System 6 

Skeletal System: Bones and Joints 7 Muscular System 8 Nervous System 

9 Senses 10 Endocrine System 11 Blood 12 Heart 13 Blood Vessels and 

Circulation 14 Lymphatic System and Immunity 15 Respiratory System 

16 Digestive System 17 Nutrition, Metabolism, and Body Temperature 

Regulation 18 Urinary System and Fluid Balance 19 Reproductive 

System 20 Development, Heredity, and Aging / Appendixes A Table 

of Measurements B Some Reference Laboratory Values C Solution 

Concentrations D Answers to Critical Thinking Questions 


ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY WITH INTEGRATED 

STUDY GUIDE 

3rd Edition 

By Stanley E. Gunstream, Emeritus, Pasadena City College 

2006 (Jan 2005) / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235111-8 / MHID: 0-07-235111-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111703-6 / MHID: 0-07-111703-2 [IE] 

Designed for an introductory, one-semester course, the scope, 

organization, writing style, depth of presentation, and pedagogical 

aspects of this text have been tailored to meet the needs of 

students preparing for a career in allied health. This text does 

not assume any prior science knowledge on the part of the 

student and effectively presents students with the fundamentals 

of anatomy and physiology. It’s the only one-semester text available 

with a built-in study guide/workbook. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Organization of the Body 1 Introduction to the Human Body 2 

Chemical Aspects of Life 3 The Cell 4 Tissues and Membranes Part 2 

Covering, Support, and Movement of the Body 5 The Integumentary 

System 6 The Skeletal System 7 The Muscular System Part 3 Integration 

and Control 8 The Nervous System 9 The Senses 10 The Endocrine 

System Part 4 Maintenance of the Body 11 Blood 12 Heart and Blood 

Vessels 13 The Lymphatic System and Defenses Against Disease 14 

The Respiratory System 15 The Digestive System 16 Urinary System 

Part 5 Reproduction 17 The Reproductive Systems 18 Pregnancy, 

Prenatal Development, and Genetics Part 6 Study Guides Appendix 

A Keys to Medical Terminology Appendix B Answers to Check Your 

Understanding Questions 

• System Pathology boxes. These boxes, found in each system Chapter, 

represent a modified case study. Their goal is to show how each body 

system is influenced by the condition described in the case study. A 

System Interactions table explains how the pathology described impacts 

each body system, and a Predict question is included to stimulate application 

of the concepts utilized in the case. 

38 


9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM



HOLE’S ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN A&P 

9th Edition 

By David N. Shier, Washtenaw Community College, Jackie l. Butler, 

Grayson County College and Ricki Lewis, Contributing Editor, “The 

Scientist” 

2006 (January 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310938-1 / MHID: 0-07-310938-X 

(with Online Learning Center Bind-In Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111656-5 / MHID: 0-07-111656-7 [IE] 

Designed for the one-semester anatomy and physiology course, 

Hole’s Essentials of Human Anatomy and Physiology assumes 

no prior science knowledge and supports core topics with clinical 

applications, making difficult concepts relevant to students 

pursuing careers in the allied health field. The unparalleled 

teaching system is highly effective in providing students with 

a solid understanding of the important concepts in anatomy 

and physiology. 

CONTENTS 

Unit 1 Levels of Organization 1 Introduction to Human Anatomy and 

Physiology 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cells 4 Cellular Metabolism 5 

Tissues Unit 2 Support and Movement 6 Skin and the Integumentary 

System 7 Skeletal System 8 Muscular System Unit 3 Integration and 

Coordination 9 Nervous System 10 Somatic and Special Senses 11 

Endocrine System Unit 4 Transport 12 Blood 13 Cardiovascular System 

14 Lymphatic System and Immunity Unit 5 Absorption and Excretion 

15 Digestion and Nutrition 16 Respiratory System 17 Urinary System 18 

Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Unit 6 The Human Life Cycle 

19 Reproductive Systems 20 Pregnancy, Growth, and Development 

One-Semester 

Anatomy & Physiology - Lab 

New 

WORKBOOK TO ACCOMPANY ANATOMY & 

PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED 

By Robert Broyles, Butler County Community College 

2008 (January 2007) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340354-0 / MHID: 0-07-340354-7 

The Workbook to Accompany Anatomy and Physiology Revealed 

by Robert Broyles is a workbook/study guide designed 

to help students get the most they can out of the Anatomy and 

Physiology Revealed (APR) CD, and out of their anatomy and 

physiology course. The Table of Contents closely follows the 4- 

CD APR set and is organized along the lines of a typical Anatomy 

and Physiology course. The individual exercises include art from 

APR and also have review questions, tables, terminology quiz 

questions, and reminders on key content. 

FEATURES 

• The inside front cover includes a step-by-step quick reference chart 

covering the initial steps needed to access main sections of APR. The 

author refers students back to this chart when appropriate at different 

points in the workbook. 

• Each Chapter is numbered; exercises reflect the Chapter number, 

followed by the sequential exercise number (e.g. Exercise 4.1, Exercise 

4.2, etc.), making it easy for instructors to assign portions of the 

workbook. 

• The introductory Chapter includes an overview of tools, views, etc., 

to help students navigate within APR. 

• “Check Point” questions within many of the exercises help students 

make the connection between content in APR and lecture/lab. 

• “Heads-Up” notes let students know that the content is important and 

related to information or exercises to come. 

• Many exercises include tables to help students visually comprehend 

various anatomical groupings. A “Bonus Question” on root words and/or 

terminology is included at the end of the tables. 

• The workbook includes coloring figures to identify bony landmarks. 

• “What Have I Learned” questions summarize each exercise and may 

be assigned as a quiz or homework activity. 

CONTENTS 

Volume One: Skeletal and Muscular Systems / Skeletal System / 

Muscular System / Volume Two: Nervous System /Volume Three: 

Cardiovascular, Lymphatic and Respiratory Systems: Cardiovascular 

System / Lymphatic System / Respiratory System / Volume Four: Digestive, 

Urinary, Reproductive and Endocrine Systems: Digestive System / 

Urinary System / Reproductive System / Endocrine System 

New 

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY 

TEXTBOOK 

Essentials Version, 4th Edition 

By Stanley E Gunstream, Pasadena City College 

2007 (Feb 2006) / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246470-2 / MHID: 0-07-246470-4 

Gunstream’s manual presents the fundamentals of human 

anatomy and physiology in an easy-to-read manner appropriate 

for allied health students. Designed especially for a one-semester 

course, the Essentials Version features a concise writing style, 

37 self-directing exercises, full-color photomicrographs in the 

Histology Atlas, and numerous illustrations in each exercise. 


• Numerous illustrations have been revised to improve understanding 

FEATURES 

• The back inside cover features a description of the relative positions 

of anatomical parts that require the use of directional terms. Also, to 

observe some anatomical structures, it is necessary to view them in 

sections that have been cut along specific planes through the body or 

a body part. Common directional terms and the planes are described, 

and most of them are illustrated in an accompanying figure. 

• Each exercise topic is covered at an appropriate level of difficulty 

for the intended student audience and presented in a direct, concise 

manner to facilitate student learning. 

• The necessary key terms are in bold print to aid students in building 

a vocabulary of anatomical and physiological terms. 

• Activities consist of (1) labeling illustrations, (2) dissections, (3) 

study of specimens and models, (4) physiological experiments, and 

(5) microscopic studies. These activities allow students to develop an 

understanding of each exercise topic by (1) labeling the illustrations using 

information presented in the text and (2) completing corresponding 

portions of the laboratory report. 

39 


9/29/2006 11:54:20 AM


• Each exercise begins with a short list of objectives that outline the 

learning responsibilities for students. The exercises are basically selfdirecting, 

which minimizes the need for lengthy introductions by the 

instructor. 

• A major dissection specimen is not included. Instead, a rat dissection 

is used in a single exercise to acquaint students with the basic organization 

of organ systems in mammals. 

• Instructors will find that the listing of required equipment and materials 

on the first page of each exercise facilitates laboratory preparation. 

The exercises use standard equipment and materials that are usually 

available in most biology departments. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1, Fundamentals Exercise 1, Introduction to Human Anatomy 

Exercise 2, Body Organization Exercise 3, The Microscope Exercise 4, 

Cell Anatomy Exercise 5, Mitotic Cell Division Exercise 6, Diffusion and 

Osmosis Exercise 7, Epithelial and Connective Tissues Exercise 8, The 

Integument Part 2, The Skeletal System Exercise 9, The Skeletal Plan 

Exercise 10, The Skull Exercise 11, The Vertebral Column and Thorax 

Exercise 12, The Appendicular Skeleton Exercise 13, Articulations Part 

3, The Muscle System Exercise 14, Muscle Organization and Body 

Movements Exercise 15, Head and Trunk Muscles Exercise 16, Muscles 

of the Upper Limb Exercise 17, Muscles of the Lower Limb Exercise 

18, Muscle and Nerve Tissues Exercise 19, The Nature of Muscle Contraction 

Exercise 20, The Physiology of Muscle Contraction: Using the 

Narco Bio-Systems Physiograph Exercise 21, The Physiology of Muscle 

Contraction: Using the Intelitool Physiograph Part 4, The Nervous 

System Exercise 22, The Spinal Cord and Reflex Arcs Exercise 23, Brain 

Anatomy: External Exercise 24, Brain Anatomy: Internal Exercise 25, 

The Eye Exercise 26, The Ear Part 5, The Circulatory System Exercise 

27, Blood Tests Exercise 28, The Heart Exercise 29, Blood Vessels, 

Fetal Circulation, and Lymphatic System Exercise 30, Cardiovascular 

Phenomena Part 6, The Respiratory System Exercise 31, The Respiratory 

Organs Exercise 32, Respiratory Physiology Part 7, The Digestive 

System Exercise 33, The Digestive Organs Exercise 34, Digestio Part 

8, The Urinary System Exercise 35, The Urinary System Exercise 36, 

Urine and Urinalysis Part 9, The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems 

Exercise 37, The Endocrine Glands Exercise 38, The Reproductive 

Organs Histology Atlas Laboratory Reports Appendix A: Caliberating 

the Physiograph Appendix B: Sample Physiograph Records Appendix 

C: Vital Capacities Appendix D: Microorganisms 

New 

LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY 

ESSENTIALS OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By Kevin T Patton, St Charles Community College 

2007 (July 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294594-2 / MHID: 0-07-294594-X 

Kevin Patton divides the lab activities typically covered in A&P 

lab into 42 subunits, allowing instructors the flexibility to choose 

the units and sequence that integrates with lecture material. 

Basic content is introduced first, and gradually more complex 

activities are developed. Features include procedure check 

lists, coloring exercises, boxed hints, safety alerts, separate lab 

reports, and a full-color histology mini-reference. 

FEATURES 

• Written in an easy-to-understand step-by-step format that allows 

students to focus on lab activities, not on reading. 

• Includes clinical examples and other practical applications that help 

improve critical thinking skills. 

• Emphasizes a multisensory approach to learning. 

• Flexible activities can be adapted for different types and availability 

of equipment and specimens. 

• IM includes alternate activities and demonstrations, individual and 

global supply lists, supply sources, specific teaching hints, answers to 

questions, and more 

CONTENTS 

Welcome to Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory / Histology Minireference 

/ The Basics 1 The Microscope 2 Cell Anatomy 3 Transport through 

Cell Membranes 4 The Cell’s Life Cycle 5 Epithelial Tissue 6 Connective 

Tissue 7 Muscle and Nerve Tissue 8 Organization of the Body Support 

and Movement 9 The Skin 10 Overview of the Skeleton 11 The Skull 

12 The Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 13 The Appendicular 

Skeleton 14 Joints15 Organization of the Muscular System 16 Muscle 

Identification 17 Muscular Contractions Integration and Control 18 

Nerves and Reflexes 19 The Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 20 The 

Brain and Cranial Nerves 21 The Eye and Vision 22 The Ear, Hearing, 

and Equilibrium 23 Endocrine Glands 24 Hormones Regulation and 

Maintenance 25 Blood 26 Structure of the Heart 27 Electrical Activity of 

the Heart 28 The Pulse and Blood Pressure 29 The Circulatory Pathway 

30 The Lymphatic System and Immunity 31 Respiratory Structures 32 

Pulmonary Volumes and Capacities 33 Digestive Structures 34 Enzymes 

and Digestion 35 Urinary Structures 36 Urinalysis Reproduction 37 

The Male Reproductive System 38 The Female Reproductive System 

39 Development 40 Genetics and Heredity Major Dissection 41 The 

Laboratory Rat 42 The Fetal Pig 43 The Human Appendix 


HOLE’S ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND 

PHYSIOLOGY 

9th Edition 

By Terry R. Martin, Kishwaukee College 

2006 (Jan 2005) / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285287-5 / MHID: 0-07-285287-9 

This full-color manual is designed for students with minimal 

backgrounds in science who are pursuing careers in allied health 

fields. Designed to support the ninth edition of Hole’s Essentials 

of Human A&P by Shier, Butler, and Lewis, this manual contains 

49 laboratory exercises and reports, which are integrated 

closely to the textbook. Exercises are planned to illustrate and 

review the anatomical and physiological facts and principles 

presented in the text and to help students investigate some of 

these ideas in greater detail. 

CONTENTS 

Fundamentals of Human Anatomy and Physiology 1 Scientific Method 

and Measurements 2 Body Organization and Terminology 3 Chemistry 

of Life 4 Care and Use of the Microscope Cells 5 Cell Structure and 

Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 

8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues 

Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 

Bone Structure 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 Skull 15 Vertebral 

Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic 

Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joints Muscular System 19 Skeletal Muscle 

Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head, and Neck 21 Muscles of the 

Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the Abdominal Wall and 

Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip and Lower Limb Nervous System 

24 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 25 Reflex Arc and Reflexes 26 Meninges 

and Spinal Cord 27 Brain and Cranial Nerves 28 Dissection of the Sheep 

Brain Special Senses 29 Ear and Hearing 30 Eye 31 Visual Tests and 

Demonstrations Endocrine System 32 Endocrine System Cardiovascular 

System 33 Blood Cells 34 Blood Testing--A Demonstration 35 Blood 

Typing 36 Heart Structure 37 Cardiac Cycle 38 Blood Vessels 39 Pulse 

Rate and Blood Pressure 40 Arteries and Veins Lymphatic System 41 

Lymphatic System Digestive System 42 Digestive Organs 43 Action 

of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 44 Respiratory Organs 45 

Breathing and Respiratory Volumes and Capacities Urinary System 46 

Kidney Structure 47 Urinalysis Reproductive System 48 Male Reproductive 

System 49 Female Reproductive System Appendix 1 Preparation of 

Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports 

40 


9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM

Two-Semester 


- Textbooks 


New 

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 

8th Edition 

By Rod Seeley and Trent Stephens of Idaho State University and 

Philip Tate, Phoenix College 

2008 (March 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329368-4 / MHID: 0-07-329368-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110210-0 / MHID: 0-07-110210-8 [IE] 

Anatomy and Physiology is designed to help students develop a 

solid, basic understanding of anatomy and physiology without 

an encyclopedic presentation of detail. Great care has been 

taken to select important concepts and to perfectly describe 

the anatomy of cells, organs, and organ systems. The plan that 

has been followed for eight editions of this text is to combine 

clear and accurate descriptions of anatomy with precise explanations 

of how structures function and examples of how they 

work together to maintain life. To emphasize the concepts of 

anatomy and physiology, the authors provide explanations of 

how the systems respond to aging, changes in physical activity, 

and disease, with a special focus on homeostasis and the 

regulatory mechanisms that maintain it. Timely and interesting 

examples demonstrate the application of knowledge in a clinical 

context. 


• Comprehensive coverage without encyclopedic detail. Examples 

include: Homeostasis Summaries-summarize entire process explained 

in susurrounding text. Tables with Illustrative Art. Process Art. 

• More Clinical Coverage--In direct response to reviewer feedback 

case studies have been added to the eighth edition. These will be an 

excellent addition to the clinical material also found in the Homeostasis 

Summaries, Systems Pathology boxed readings, Clinical Asides, Clinical 

Focuses, NEW Clinical Genetics and/or Process Figures. 

• New Genetic Material -Chapter 3 & 29 have been completely rewritten 

to include new findings in this exciting and relevant field. -New 

Genetics boxed readings address some of the most significant discoveries 

and how they affect diseases. 

• Resource Reference Guide directs instructors to all relevant A& P 

resources for each Chapter of the text. -Bound into instructor’s copies, 

this foldout chart is indispensable for instructors planning their class 

lectures. 

• Online Prep Center includes Digital Content Manager content. The 

digital assets formerly on this cross-platform CD-ROM are now organized 

online and can be easily searched and downloaded. -Art Library: 

Full-color digital files of all illustrations in the book (745 images), plus 

the same art saved in gray scale (745 images). These images are also 

pre-inserted into blank PowerPoint slides for ease of use. Unlabeled 

versions of 164 figures are included in both color and grayscale formats. 

-Photo Library: Digital files of 160 instructionally significant photographs 

from the text- including cadaver, bone, histology, and surface anatomy 

images. Also includes 34 photos saved in unlabeled versions. -Table 

Library: Every table that appears in the text is provided in electronic form 

(195 tables). -PowerPoint Lecture Outlines: Ready-made presentations 

that combine art and lecture notes are provided for each of the 29 Chapters 

of the text. -Active Art Library: 41 pieces included (30 new, book 

specific/11 repurposed pieces from other texts) -Animations Library: 45 

full-color animations illustrating physiological processes are provided 

(30 new, book specific/15 repurposed animations from 6th edition). 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Organization of the Human Body 1 The Human Organism 2 

The Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cell Biology and Genetics 4 Histology: 

The Study of Tissues Part 2 Support and Movement 5 Integumentary 

System 6 Skeletal System: Bones and Bone Tissue 7 Skeletal System: 

Gross Anatomy 8 Articulations and Movement 9 Muscular System: 

Histology and Physiology 10 Muscular System: Gross Anatomy Part 3 

Integration and Control Systems 11 Functional Organization of Nervous 

Tissue 12 Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves 13 Brain and Cranial Nerves 14 

Integration of Nervous System Functions 15 The Special Senses 16 Autonomic 

Nervous System 17 Functional Organization of the Endocrine 

System 18 Endocrine Glands Part 4 Regulations and Maintenance 19 

Cardiovascular System: Blood 20 Cardiovascular System: The Heart 21 

Cardiovascular System: Peripheral Circulation and Regulation 22 Lymphatic 

System and Immunity 23 Respiratory System 24 Digestive System 

25 Nutrition, Metabolism, and Temperature Regulation 26 Urinary 

System 27 Water, Electrolytes, and Acid-Base Balance Part 5 Reproduction 

and Development 28 Reproductive System 29 Development, 

Growth, and Aging / Appendix A Table of Measurements Appendix B 

Scientific Notation Appendix C Solution Concentrations Appendix D 

pH Appendix E Reference Laboratory Values Appendix F Answers to 

Review and Comprehension Questions Appendix G Answers to Critical 

Thinking Questions Appendix H Answers to Predict Questions 



New 


4th Edition 

By Kenneth S Saladin, Georgia College and State University 

2007 (Jan 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322804-4 / MHID: 0-07-322804-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110804-1 / MHID: 0-07-110804-1 [IE] 

From the completely new, exceptional art program, to the 

complete integration of the text with technology, Saladin has 

formed a teaching solution that will both motivate and enable 

your students to understand and appreciate the wonders of 

anatomy and physiology. This distinctive text was developed 

to stand apart from all other A&P texts with unparalleled art, a 

writing style that has been acclaimed by both users and reviewers 

and clinical coverage that offers the perfect balance without 

being too much. Saladin’s well-accepted organization of topics 

is based upon the most logical physiological ties between 

body systems. The text requires no prior knowledge of college 

chemistry or cell biology, and is designed for a two-semester 

A&P college course. 


• Entirely new art program! Saladin is raising the bar on art programs 

in A&P! The new art program features the highest quality of realism, 

3D appeal, accuracy and clarity. The entire new art program is also 

available for use digitally by intructors. 

• Anatomy and Physiology Revealed! A unique 4 CD multimedia 

tool designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human 






• McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for “Anatomy & Physiology” is a complete 

electronic homework and course management system, designed for 

greater ease of use than any other system available. Free on adoption 

of “Anatomy & Physiology”, instructors can create and share course 

materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the 

mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms [if applicable], 

import their own content, and create announcements and due dates for 

assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign 

algorithmically generated [if applicable] homework, quizzing, and 

41 


9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM


testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity 

within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available 

to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be 

downloaded to Excel. 

• Tables have been reorganized to allow for even greater effectiveness. 

All figures and tables are positioned nearby their description within the 

narrative helping students make the connections. 

FEATURES 

• Exceptional writing. Saladin offers the perfect balance between accurate, 

sufficient, detail and text description. Students are able to better 

understand the difficult information provided without being overloaded 

with excessive content and wordiness. 

• Clinical coverage and thought-provoking questions widely used. 

Saladin repeatedly uses clinical examples and thought-provoking questions 

to lead the student to more complete understanding of difficult 

topics and the relevance of material presented in their future career. 

Some topics Saladin addresses include: medical imaging techniques, 

gene therapy, carpal tunnel syndrome, Alzheimer disease, AIDS, Viagra 

and hypertension. 

• Each Chapter is divided into five or six digestible sections with Objectives 

and Before You Go On questions at the beginning and end of each 

section. These features enable students to set manageable learning goals 

and to evaluate their own comprehension and progress in digestible 

segments before moving ahead. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Organization of the Body 1 Major Themes of Anatomy and 

Physiology 2 The Chemistry of Life 3 Cellular Form and Function 4 

Genetics and Cellular Function 5 Histology Part 2 Support and Movement 

6 The Integumentary System 7 Bone Tissue 8 The Skeletal System 

9 Joints 10 The Muscular System 11 Muscular Tissue Part 3 Integration 

and Control 12 Nervous Tissue 13 The Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and 

Somatic Reflexes 14 The Brain and Cranial Nerves 15 The Autonomic 

Nervous System and Visceral Reflexes 16 Sense Organs 17 The Endocrine 

System Part 4 Regulation and Maintenance 18 The Circulatory 

System: Blood 19 The Circulatory System: The Heart 20 The Circulatory 

System: Blood Vessels and Circulation 21 The Lymphatic and Immune 

Systems 22 The Respiratory System 23 The Urinary System 24 Water, 

Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance 25 The Digestive System 26 Nutrition 

and Metabolism Part 5 Reproduction and Development 27 The 

Male Reproductive System 28 The Female Reproductive System 29 

Human Development 


New 

HOLE’S HUMAN ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 

11th Edition 

By David N Shier, Washtenaw Community College, Jackie L Butler, 

Grayson County College and Ricki Lewis, SUNY-at Albany 

2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321364-4 / MHID: 0-07-321364-0 (with ARIS) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110785-3 / MHID: 0-07-110785-1 [IE] 

Shier et al., continue the unparalleled tradition of Hole in the 

11th edition. Hole was created for the introductory level student 

and assumes no prior science knowledge by placing emphasis 

on the fundamentals. This new edition updates a great A&P 

classic while offering greater efficiencies to the user. The 11th 

edition of Hole also offers never before technology that combined 

with the text offer users an incredible Course Solution! 

Technology like Anatomy and Physiology Revealed and the new 

online Homework Manager bring unprecedented opportunities 

to the classroom whether on campus or at home! 


• Anatomy and Physiology Revealed! A unique 4 CD multimedia 

tool designed to help students learn and review using a virtual human 






• McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for “Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology” 

is a complete electronic homework and course management system, 

designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Free 

on adoption of “Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology”, instructors can 

create and share course materials and assignments with colleagues with 

a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms 

[if applicable], import their own content, and create announcements and 

due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading and reporting 

of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated [if applicable] homework, 

quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all 

student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded 

and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book 

that can be downloaded to Excel. 

• A new section called “Foundations for Success” has been added to 

the beginning of the text. This section was specifically designed to help 

students LEARN how to study at the collegiate level and efficiently use 

the tools available to them. 

• References to Appendices now appear in a different color to make 

them stand out for quick student reference to the outstanding appendices. 

• Membrane potential substantially revised--The entire section on 

the establishment of the resting membrane potential in neurons, and 

how graded potentials can lead to action potentials, has been revised, 

including many new supporting figures. 

• Cadaver Atlas Reference Plates have been integrated into the appropriate 

Chapters, rather than being covered at the end of Chapter 24. This 

allows students to effectively and efficiently view the plates as content 

is covered within the Chapters. 

• Font sizes within tables have been increased for greater clarity and 

ease of use. 

FEATURES 

• Outstanding pedagogical program key tools include: 

- InnerConnections multipurpose illustrations, found at the ends of 

systems Chapters, conceptually link the highlighted body system to 

every other system, reinforcing the dynamic interactions of groups of 

organs. These graphic representations review Chapter concepts, make 

connections, and stress the “big picture” in learning and applying the 

concepts and facts of anatomy and physiology. 

- Summary Material: Hole places emphasis on tables which are consistent 

with the narrative, keeping them clear and succinct, and avoiding 

excessive detail. 

- From Science to Technology sections preview the technological applications 

of knowledge in anatomy and physiology that students are likely 

to encounter in the future, and explain how and why the technology 

was developed. 

• Clinical Coverage – Hole uses the appropriate amount of clinical coverage 

to draw students into the material by showing readers relevance 

of information presented. Often clinical coverage can help a student 

better understand a concept from a new perspective 

CONTENTS 

Unit One Levels of Organization 1 Introduction to Human Anatomy 

and Physiology 2 Chemical Basis of Life 3 Cells 4 Cellular Metabolism 5 

Tissues Unit Two Support and Movement 6 Skin and the Integumentary 

System 7 Skeletal System 8 Joints of the Skeletal System 9 Muscular 

System Unit Three Integration and Coordination 10 Nervous System 

I: Basic Structure and Function 11 Nervous System II: Divisions of the 

Nervous System 12 Somatic and Special Senses 13 Endocrine System 

Unit Four Transport 14 Blood 15 Cardiovascular System 16 Lymphatic 

System and Immunity Unit Five Absorption and Excretion 17 Digestive 

System 18 Nutrition and Metabolism 19 Respiratory System 20 Urinary 

System 21 Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Unit Six The Human 

Life Cycle 22 Reproductive System 23 Pregnancy, Growth, and 

Development 24 Genetics and Genomics 

42 


9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM


DICTIONARY OF BIOSCIENCE 

2nd Edition 

By McGraw-Hill 

2003 / 662 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141043-4 / MHID: 0-07-141043-0 

[A Professional Publication] 

CONTENTS 

Preface / Staff / How to Use the Dictionary / Fields and Their Scope / 

Pronunciation Key / A-Z Terms / Appendix 


CONCEPTS OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND 

PHYSIOLOGY 

5th Edition 

By Kent M Van De Graaf, Weber State University and Stuart Ira Fox, 

Los Angeles Pierce College 

1999 / 1088 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115865-7 / MHID: 0-07-115865-0 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction to Anatomy & Physiology Chapter 2 Chemical 

Composition of the Body Chapter 3 Cell Structure and Genetic Regulation 

Chapter 4 Enzymes, Energy and Metabolism Chapter 5 Membrane 

Transport and the Membrane Potential Chapter 6 Histology Chapter 

7 Integumentary System Chapter 8 Skeletal System: Bone Tissue and 

Bone Development Chapter 9 Skeletal System: Axial Skeleton Chapter 

10 Skeletal System: Appendicular Skeleton Chapter 11 Articulations 

Chapter 12 Muscle Tissue and Muscle Physiology Chapter 13 Musclar 

System Chapter 14 Functional Organization of the Nervous System 

Chapter 15 Central Nervous System Chapter 16 Peripheral Nervous 

System Chapter 17 Autonomic Nervous System Chapter 18 Sensory 

Organs Chapter 19 Endocrine System Chapter 20 Circulatory System: 

Blood Chapter 21 Circulatory System Chapter 22 Circulatory System: 

Cardiac Output and Blood Flow Chapter 23 Lymphatic System and 

Immunity Chapter 24 Respiratory System Chapter 25 Urinary System: 

Fluid, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance Chapter 26 Digestive System 

Chapter 27 Regulation of Metabolism Chapter 28 Reproduction: 

Development and the Male Reproductive System Chapter 29 Female 

Reproduction Chapter 30 Developmental Anatomy and Inheritance 

Two-Semester 

Anatomy & Physiology - Lab 

New 



8th Edition 

By Eric Wise, Santa Barbara City College 

2008 (March 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296561-2 / MHID: 0-07-296561-4 


New 

human anatomy & physiology laboratory 

manual 

Fetal Pig Dissection, 3rd Edition 

By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 

2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282734-7 / MHID: 0-07-282734-3 

Human Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory Manual: Fetal 

Pig Dissection is designed for one- or two-semester A&P lab 

courses that utilize the pig as the primary dissection specimen. 

This lab manual offers excellent, full color dissection photos 

of the fetal pig with matching, corresponding labeled art. Web 

site activities found in numerous labs give students additional 

resources for learning. This laboratory manual contains sixtytwo 

laboratory exercises and reports. The exercises illustrate 

and review anatomical and physiological facts and principles 

presented in an A&P textbook and help students investigate 

these ideas in greater detail. 


• All new Exercise 3: The Chemistry of Life has been added, as well 

as an all new exercise on Genetics, based upon feedback from current 

users and reviewers. 

• The following exercises have been moved to the Online Learning 

Center, giving instructors the option of continuing to use live specimens 

in these experiments if desired: Skeletal Muscle Contraction, Nerve 

Impulse Stimulation, and Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle. 

Features 

• Additional pedagogical features include: safety guidelines found on 

the inside front cover, learning objectives included for each exercise 

and laboratory reports that follow each exercise for ease of use. 

• Often the laboratory exercises are short or are divided into several 

separate procedures. This allows an instructor to select those exercises or 

parts of exercises that will best meet the needs of a particular program. 

Also, exercises requiring a minimal amount of laboratory equipment 

have been included. 

• A section entitled “Study Skills for Anatomy and Physiology” is located 

in the front material, and was written by students in a human anatomy 

and physiology course. 

• Critical thinking applications are included within most of the laboratory 

exercises to enhance valuable critical thinking skills that students 

need throughout their lives. 

• A metric measurement and conversion table is included inside the 

back cover of the laboratory manual for easy reference. 

• Additional Web Activities can be found at the accompanying website 

at: http://www.mhhe.com/martinlm 

• Instructors can download Instructors Manual’s and other materials 


• Full-color fetal pig dissection photos are enhanced with corresponding 

illustrations. 

• A “Materials Needed” list can be found at the beginning of each 

exercise. 

Contents 




Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 8 

Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues 

Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 12 

Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 14 

43 


9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM


Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle and 

Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joints Muscular System 

19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head, and Neck 

21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles of the 

Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the Hip 

and Lower Limb 24 Fetal Pig Dissection: Musculature Nervous System 

25 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 26 Meninges and Spinal Cord 27 Reflex 

Arc and Reflexes 28 Brain and Cranial Nerves 29 Dissection of the Sheep 

Brain Somatic and Special Senses 30 Receptors and Somatic Senses 31 

Smell and Taste 32 Ear and Hearing 33 Equilibrium 34 Eye Structure 

35 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 36 Endocrine 

Histology and Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 37 Blood 

Cells 38 Blood Testing – A Demonstration 39 Blood Typing 40 Heart 

Structure 41 Cardiac Cycle 42 Blood Vessels 43 Pulse Rate and Blood 

Pressure 44 Arteries and Veins 45 Fetal Pig Dissection: Cardiovascular 

System Lymphatic System 46 Lymphatic System Digestive System 47 

Digestive Organs 48 Fetal Pig Dissection: Digestive System 49 Action 

of a Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 50 Respiratory Organs 51 

Fetal Pig Dissection: Respiratory System 52 Breathing and Respiratory 

Volumes and Capacities 53 Control of Breathing Urinary System 54 

Kidney Structure 55 Urinalysis 56 Fetal Pig Dissection: Urinary System 

Reproductive Systems and Development 57 Male Reproductive System 

58 Female Reproductive System 59 Fetal Pig Dissection: Reproductive 

Systems 60 Fertilization and Early Development 61 Genetics Online 

Laboratory Exercises 62 Skeletal Muscle Contractions 63 Nerve Impulse 

Stimulation 64 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle Appendix 1 Preparation 

of Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports 

New 

LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HOLE’S 

HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 

11th Edition 

By Terry R Martin, Kishwaukee College 

2007 (March 2006) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282957-0 / MHID: 0-07-282957-5 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/shier10 

This best-selling Laboratory Manual, written by Terry R. Martin, 

has been updated throughout. The new 11th edition of this 

effective manual is organized into units that correlate directly 

with the text and include new and updated art to match Hole’s 

Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e. 


• All new Exercise 3: The Chemistry of Life has been added, as well 

as an all new exercise on Genetics, based upon feedback from current 

users and reviewers. 

• The following exercises have been moved to the Online Learning 

Center, giving instructors the option of continuing to use live specimens 

in these experiments if desired: Skeletal Muscle Contraction, Nerve 

Impulse Stimulation, and Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle. 

Features 

• Critical Thinking applications are included within most of the laboratory 

exercises to enhance valuable critical thinking skills. 

• The cat reference plates are incorporated within the appropriate 

system of dissection. All cat dissection figures are in full color. 

• The laboratory manual begins with a lab on the Scientific Method 

and Measurements. 

• The tissue micrographs are named and have labels added on the 

micrographs. 

• Many color photographs and line art of the skull, muscles, sheep 

brain, eye dissection, and reflexes enhance learning for the student. 

• A “Materials Needed” section is located at the beginning of each 

laboratory exercise for greater ease in laboratory preparations. 

• A section entitled “Study Skills for Anatomy and Physiology” is located 

in the front material, and was written by students in a human anatomy 

and physiology course. 

• Instructors can download Instructor’s Manual and other materials at: 

www.mhhe.com/labcentral 

Contents 




Function 6 Movements Through Cell Membranes 7 Cell Cycle Tissues 

8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 Muscle and Nervous Tissues 

Integumentary System 11 Integumentary System Skeletal System 

12 Bone Structure and Classification 13 Organization of the Skeleton 

14 Skull 15 Vertebral Column and Thoracic Cage 16 Pectoral Girdle 

and Upper Limb 17 Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limb 18 Joints Muscular 

System 19 Skeletal Muscle Structure 20 Muscles of the Face, Head, and 

Neck 21 Muscles of the Chest, Shoulder, and Upper Limb 22 Muscles 

of the Deep Back, Abdominal Wall, and Pelvic Outlet 23 Muscles of the 

Hip and Lower Limb 24 Cat Dissection: Musculature Nervous System 

25 Nervous Tissue and Nerves 26 The Meninges and Spinal Cord 27 

Reflex Arc and Reflexes 28 Brain and Cranial Nerves 29 Dissection of 

the Sheep Brain Somatic and Special Senses 30 Receptors and Somatic 

Senses 31 Smell and Taste 32 Ear and Hearing 33 Equilibrium 34 Eye 

Structure 35 Visual Tests and Demonstrations Endocrine System 36 

Endocrine Histology and Diabetic Physiology Cardiovascular System 

37 Blood Cells 38 Blood Testing – A Demonstration 39 Blood Typing 

40 Heart Structure 41 Cardiac Cycle 42 Blood Vessels 43 Pulse Rate and 

Blood Pressure 44 Arteries and Veins 45 Cat Dissection: Cardiovascular 

System Lymphatic System 46 Lymphatic System Digestive System 47 

Digestive Organs 48 Cat Dissection: Digestive System 49 Action of a 

Digestive Enzyme Respiratory System 50 Respiratory Organs 51 Cat 

Dissection: Respiratory System 52 Breathing and Respiratory Volumes 

and Capacities 53 Control of Breathing Urinary System 54 Kidney 

Structure 55 Urinalysis 56 Cat Dissection: Urinary System Reproductive 

Systems and Development 57 Male Reproductive System 58 Female 

Reproductive System 59 Cat Dissection: Reproductive Systems 60 

Fertilization and Early Development 61 Genetics Online Laboratory 

Exercises 62 Skeletal Muscle Contractions 63 Nerve Impulse Stimulation 

64 Factors Affecting the Cardiac Cycle Appendix 1 Preparation of 

Solutions Appendix 2 Assessments of Laboratory Reports 

New 

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY 

MANUAL 

4th Edition 


2007 (March 2006) / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287509-6 / MHID: 0-07-287509-7 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/saladin3 

This manual (utilizing the cat as the primary dissection specimen) 

uses the same four-color art program as the fourth edition 

of Saladin’s Anatomy & Physiology and follows the same order 

of presentation. The 47 exercises provide a comprehensive 

overview of the human body and present the core elements of 

the subject matter. 


• The third edition includes many new and revised illustrations and 

photographs. There are many new photographs in the skeletal section as 

well as the muscular, cardiovascular and reproductive exercises. Several 

photographs in the manual have been enlarged to show better detail. 

This is particularly true regarding the photographs of cat dissections. The 

artwork and the photographs in the third edition were carefully matched 

not only for visual comparisons but also for terminology as well. 

44 


9/29/2006 11:54:21 AM


• Expanded review sections at the end of each exercise assist students 

in assessing their understanding. Previous edition generally included 

5 review questions per exercise. This new edition of the Lab Manual 

includes about 20 review questions per exercise! 

• Review questions include short answer exercises as well as application 

questions and labeling activities. 

• All experiments presented in numbered list format making it easier 

for students to follow the steps required to set up and complete each 

experiment. 

• Utilizes computer simulations as alternatives to frog experimentation 

for selected exercises. 

• Instructors can download Instructors Manual’s and other materials 


Features 

• The cat is the main dissection specimen in this laboratory manual, 

however, it is integrated with material on human anatomy, so that animals 

do not have to be relied upon as dissection specimens. 

• Collection of data is imbedded within each exercise as opposed to 

a separate table in the back of the manual. 

• Study Hints are located in selected exercises where additional information 

is provided to help students comprehend and retain difficult 

material presented. 

Contents 

Laboratory Exercises 1 Measurement in Science 2 Organs, Systems, and 

Organization of the Body 3 Microscopy 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 

Some Functions of Cell Membranes 6 Tissues 7 Integumentary System 

8 Introduction to the Skeletal System 9 Appendicular Skeleton 10 Axial 

Skeleton, Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 11 Axial Skeleton--Skull 12 

Articulations 13 Introduction to the Study of Muscles and Muscles of 

the Shoulder and Arm 14 Muscles of the Forearm and Hand 15 Muscles 

of the Hip and Thigh 16 Muscles of the Leg and Foot 17 Muscles of 

the Head and Neck 18 Muscles of the Trunk 19 Muscle Physiology 20 

Introduction to the Nervous System 21 Structure and Function of the 

Brain and Cranial Nerves 22 Structure and Function of the Spinal Cord 

and Nerves 23 Nervous System Physiology-Stimuli and Reflexes 24 

Introduction to Sensory Receptors 25 Taste and Smell 26 Eye and Vision 

27 Ear, Hearing, and Balance 28 Endocrine System 29 Blood Cells 30 

Blood Tests and Typing 31 Structure of the Heart 32 Electrical Conductivity 

of the Heart 33 Functions of the Heart 34 Introduction to Blood 

Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 35 Arteries of the Lower Body 36 

Veins and Fetal Circulation 37 Functions of Vessels, Lymphatic System 

38 Blood Vessels and Blood Pressure 39 Structure of the Respiratory 

System 40 Respiratory Function, Breathing, Respiration 41 Physiology 

of Exercise 42 Anatomy of the Digestive System 43 Digestive Physiology 

44 Urinary System 45 Urinalysis 46 Male Reproductive System 47 

Female Reproductive System Appendix A Measurement Conversions 

Appendix B Periodic Table of the Elements Appendix C Preparation of 

Materials and Solutions Appendix D Lab Reports 

LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY SEELEY: 


7th Edition 


2006 (Jan 2005) / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255330-7 / MHID: 0-07-255330-8 

The outstanding illustrations and a balanced combination of line 

art and photographs make this lab manual an invaluable tool 

for teaching the undergraduate anatomy and physiology course. 

Using the cat as the primary specimen, this manual contains 42 

exercises that provide a comprehensive overview of the human 

body and present the core elements of the subject matter. 

CONTENTS 

1 Organs, Systems, and Organization of the Body 2 Microscopy 3 Cell 

Structure and Function 4 Tissues 5 Integumentary System 6 Introduction 

to the Skeletal System 7 Appendicular Skeleton 8 Axial Skeleton: 

Vertebrae, Ribs, Sternum, Hyoid 9 Axial Skeleton: Skull 10 Articulations 

11 Muscles Physiology 12 Introduction to the Study of Muscles and 

Muscles of the Shoulder and Upper Extremity 13 Muscles of the Hip, 

Thigh, Leg and Foot 14 Muscles of the Head and Neck 15 Muscles of 

the Torso 16 Introduction to the Nervous System 17 Brain and Cranial 

Nerves 18 Spinal Cord and Somatic Nerves 19 Nervous System Physiology: 

Stimuli and Reflexes 20 Introduction to Sensory Receptors 21 Taste 

and Smell 22 Eye and Vision 23 Ear, Hearing, and Balance 24 Endocrine 

System 25 Blood Cells 26 Blood Tests and Typing 27 Structure of the 

Heart 28 Electrical Conductivity of the Heart 29 Functions of the Heart 

30 Introduction to Blood Vessels and Arteries of the Upper Body 31 

Arteries of the Lower Body 32 Veins and Fetal Circulation 33 Function 

of Vessels, Lymphatic System 34 Blood Vessels and Blood Pressure 35 

Structure of the Respiratory System 36 Respiratory Function, Breathing, 

Respiration 37 Physiology of Exercise 38 Anatomy of the Digestive 

System 39 Digestive Physiology 40 Urinary System 41 Urinalysis 42 

Male Reproductive System 43 Female Reproductive System Appendix A 

Measurement Conversions Appendix B Periodic Table of the Elements 

Appendix C Preparation of Materials Appendix D Lab Reports 

ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY 

TEXTBOOK 

Complete Version, 8th Edition 

By Harold Benson, Stanley Gunstream, Arthur Talaro and Kathleen 

Talaro of Pasadena City College 

2005 (Jan 2004) / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235107-1 / MHID: 0-07-235107-1 

Benson’s COMPLETE is designed for a 2-semester A&P course. 

In addition to the dozens of effective exercises, this lab manual 

is unique in that students are asked to label many of the figures 

to reinforce concepts. The cat is the primary dissection specimen 

in this manual. It is self-contained, detailed, and very logical in 

its approach. Because of its detailed content (textual material, 

line art, photos, and histology micrographs), it is generally not 

necessary to take the course textbook to the lab. The atlas of 

quality histology micrographs has always been a strong feature 

and makes it unnecessary to purchase an additional histology 

atlas. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Some Fundamentals Part 2 Cells and Tissues Part 3 The Skeletal 

System Part 4 The Nerve-Muscle Relationship Part 5 Instrumentation 

Part 6 Skeletal Muscle Physiology Part 7 The Major Skeletal Muscles 

Part 8 The Nervous System Part 9 The Sense Organs: The Histology 

Atlas Part 10 Hematology Part 11 The Cardiovascular System Part 12 

The Respiratory System Part 13 Autonomic Responses to Physical and 

Psychological Factors Part 14 The Digestive System Part 15 The Excretory 

System Part 16 The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems Histology 

Self-Quizzes / Answer Keys to Self-Quizzes 

45 


9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM



TEXTBOOK 

Intermediate Version, CAT, 6th Edition 



2005 (Feb 2004) / 560 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247663-7 / MHID: 0-07-247663-X 

This laboratory manual is ideal for introductory, two-semester 

anatomy and physiology students. This new edition works 

well with any textbook and includes complete explanations of 

essential information. Clear, step-by-step procedures for each 

exercise are accompanied by detailed illustrations and labeling 

exercises. The main dissection specimen is the cat. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Some Fundamentals Part 2 Cells and Tissues Part 3 The Skeletal 

System Part 4 Skeletal Muscle Physiology Part 5 The Major Skeletal 

Muscles Part 6 The Nervous System Part 7 The Sense Organs / The 

Histology Atlas / Part 8 Hematology Part 9 The Cardiovascular System 

Part 10 Respiratory System Part 11 The Digestive System Part 12 The 

Excretory System Part 13 The Endocrine and Reproductive Systems / 

Histology Self-Quizzes / Answer Keys to Self-Quizzes 


TEXTBOOK 

Short Version, 8th Edition 



2005 (March 2004) / 528 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235109-5 / MHID: 0-07-235109-8 

Benson’s SHORT is designed for a 1 or 2-semester A&P course 

where no single dissection specimen is used. In addition to 

the dozens of effective exercises, this lab manual is unique in 

that students are asked to label many of the figures to reinforce 

concepts. It is self-contained, detailed, and very logical in its 

approach. Because of its detailed content (textual material, 

line art, photos, and histology micrographs), it is generally not 

necessary to take the course textbook to the lab. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Some Fundamentals 1 Anatomical Terminology 2 Body Cavities 

& Membranes 3 Organ Systems: Rat Dissection Part 2 Cells & Tissues 4 

Microscopy 5 Basic Cell Structure 6 Mitosis 7 Osmosis & Cell Membrane 

Integrity 8 Epithelial Tissues 9 Connective Tissues 10 The Integument 

Part 3 The Skeletal System 11 The Skeletal Plan 12 The Skull 13 The 

Vertebral Column & Thorax 14 The Appendicular Skeleton 15 Articulation 

Part 4 Skeletal Muscle Physiology 16 Electronic Instrumentation 17 

Muscle Structure 18 Body Movements 19 Nerve and Muscle Tissues 20 

The Neuromuscular Junction 21 The Physicochemical Nature of Muscle 

Contraction 22 Muscle Contraction Experiments: Using Chart Recorders 

23 Muscle Contraction Experiments 24 Electromyography Part 5 

The Major Skeletal Muscles 25 Head and Neck Muscles 26 Trunk and 

Shoulder Muscles 27 Upper Extremity Muscles 28 Abdominal and Pelvic 

Muscles 29 Lower Extremity Muscles Part 6 The Nervous System 30 The 

Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and Reflex Arcs 31 Somatic Reflexes 32 The 

Patellar Reflex: A Computerized Evaluation 33 Brain Anatomy: External 

34 Brain Anatomy: Internal Part 7 The Sense Organs 35 Anatomy of 

the Eye 36 Visual Tests 37 The Ear: Its Role in Hearing 38 The Ear: Its 

Role in Equilibrium / The Histology Atlas / Part 8 Hematology 39 A 

White Blood Cell Study: The Differential WBC Count 40 Total Blood 

Cell Counts 41 Hemoglobin Percentage Measurement 42 Packed Red 

Cell Volume Blood Typing 43 Coagulation Time Part 9 The Circulatory 

System 44 Anatomy of the Heart 45 Cardiovasular sounds 46 Electrocardiogram 

Monitoring: Using Chart Recorders 47 Electrocardiogram 

Monitoring: Using Computerized Hardware 48 Pulse Monitoring 49 

Blood Pressure Monitoring 50 Peripheral Circulation Control (Frog) 51 

The Arteries and Veins 52 Fetal Circulation 53 The Lymphatic System 

and the Immune Response Part 10 The Respiratory System 54 The 

Respiratory Organs 55 Hyperventilation and Rebreathing 56 The Diving 

Reflex 57 the Valsalva Maneuver 58 Spirometry: Lung Capacities 

59 Spirometry: The FEVt Test 60 Spirometry: Using Computerized 

Hardware Part 11 The Digestive System 61 Anatomy of the Digestive 

System 62 The Chemistry of Hydrolysis 63 Factors Affecting Hydrolysis 

Part 12 The Excretory System 64 Anatomy of the Urinary System 65 

Urine: Composition and Tests Part 13 The Endocrine and Reproductive 

System 66 The Endocrine Glands 67 The Reproductive System / 

Laboratory Reports / Appendixes A Tables B Solutions and Reagents C 

Tests and Methods D Physiograph Sample Records E Microorganisms 

F “Slife of Life” Bar Codes 

BIOLOGY DEMYSTIFIED 

By Dale Layman 

2003 / 401 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141040-3 / MHID: 0-07-141040-6 


CONTENTS 

PREFACE / PART 1: GETTING READY FOR BIOLOGY Chapter 1. The 

Coming of Biology Chapter 2. Patterns of Life Chapter 3. Evolution: 

From Dawn to Darwin Test: Part 1 PART 2: THE UNIVERSAL BUILDING 

BLOCKS OF LIFE Chapter 4. Chemicals: The Tiniest Blocks Chapter 5. 

Cells: The “Little Chambers” in Plants and Animals Test: Part 2 PART 3: 

THE FIVE KINGDOMS OF LIFE, PLUS VIRUSES Chapter 6. Bacteria and 

the “Homeless” Viruses Chapter 7. The Protists: “First of All” Chapter 

8. The Fungi: Not Just Mushrooms! Chapter 9. The Plants: “Kings and 

Queens” of the World of Green Chapter 10. Invertebrates As Special 

Animals: “Have You No Spine” Chapter 11. The Arthropods: No 

Jointed Backbone, but “Jointed Feet” Chapter 12. The Chordata: Animals 

with a “Chord” In Their “Back” Test: Part 3 PART 4: ANATOMY 

AND PHYSIOLOGY OF ANIMALS Chapter 13. Skins and Skeletons 

Chapter 14. The Neuromuscular (Nerve-Muscle) Connection Chapter 

15. Glands and Their Hormone Messengers Chapter 16. Blood and the 

Circulatory System Chapter 17. Immune and Lymphatic Systems: “The 

Best Survival Offense Is a Good Defense!” Chapter 18. The Respiratory 

System: Breath of Life Chapter 19. “Getting the Goodies”: Nutrition and 

the Digestive System Chapter 20. Urine and (Gulp!) Sex in Animals 

Test: Part 4 / Final Exam / Appendix: Answers to Quiz, Test, and Final 

Exam Questions / Index 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








46 


9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM

New 

Two-Semester 


- Multimedia 

ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY REVEALED ONLINE 


2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319620-6 / MHID: 0-07-319620-7 











textbooks. 

FEATURES 

• New Organ System Added--The Integumentary System has been 

added to the list of organ systems included in this program. All layers 

of the skin will be included and this new section will also feature 

histology images and full coverage of the dermis, epidermis, hair shaft, 

specific glands, etc. 

• Expanded Skeletal and Joint Coverage--The Skeletal System and 

Muscular System have been separated into each their own system allowing 

for substantially expanded information to be provided in each. 

The Skeletal System will now include full coverage of joint dissections. 

75 NEW photos of disarticulated bones have been added. 

• NEW Histology Section!--The online version of Anatomy & Physiology 

Revealed includes a new button for histology views to support every 

body system. Students can access this information by clicking on the 

microscope icon located on the navigation bar. 

• NEW! Expanded Quizzing Types and Options --Physiology animation 

quizzes have been added to Skeletal, Muscular and Nervous Systems. 

In addition, the user can now select the number of questions he/she 

wants included in each quiz (10, 25 or ALL). 

• NEW! Navigation and Interface changes! 

• A new “Smart” (google-like) search button has been added and integrated 

across all systems. 

• Tags are now color coded. All tags pertaining to the given system 

one color and reference structures not part of that system are another 

color. 

CONTENTS 

Integumary System / Skeletal System / Muscular System / Nervous System 

/ Cardiovascular System / Lymphatic System / Respiratory System / 

Urinary System / Digestive System / Endocrine System / Reproductive 

System 


CARDIOLOGY ATLAS CD-ROM 

2nd Edition 

By Blausen Medical Communications 

2005 (Jan 205) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304272-5 / MHID: 0-07-304272-2 


HUMAN ATLAS (FORMERLY INTERACTIVE CLINICAL 

RESOURCE CD-ROM) 

2nd Edition 


2005 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294580-5 / MHID: 0-07-294580-X 

Created by Blausen Communications Inc., the Interactive Clinical 

Resource CD-ROM offers NEW animations, one hundred 

and fifty 3D animations and 3D models of human disease and 

disorders. It also contains 13 sections of clinical content (and 

nearly every body system) including Urinary, Skeletal, Reproductive, 

Nervous, Muscular, Immune, Digestive, Circulatory 

and Endocrine. The Interactive Clinical Resource CD ROM may 

be used as a classroom lecture tool or study guide for students 

post lecture. Students can use the Interactive Clinical Resource 

CD-ROM to play the 3D animations, explore the 3D models, 

print the associated text and view the slides with labels and 

definitions of key structures related to the disease/disorder. 

Students will learn how the various diseases/disorders affect 

the human body system along with possible treatments. The 

Interactive Clinical Resource CD-ROM is the perfect way to 

reinforce and relate the physiological concepts taught in the 

classroom to real life. 

ORTHOPEDIC ATLAS CD-ROM 

2nd Edition 


2005 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304271-8 / MHID: 0-07-304271-4 


REPRODUCTION ATLAS CD-ROM 

2nd Edition 


2005 (Jan 205) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304273-2 / MHID: 0-07-304273-0 


A&P ANIMATIONS COLLECTION 


2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288990-1 / MHID: 0-07-288990-X 

Enables instructors to demonstrate physiological processes in 

motion by importing full-color animation files into classroom 

presentations or online course materials. 

47 


9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM



- Supplements 


New 

LABORATORY ATLAS OF ANATOMY AND 

PHYSIOLOGY 

5th Edition 

By Douglas J Eder, Southern Illinois University, John W Bertram and 

Shari Lewis Kaminsky 

2007 (Nov 2005) / 192 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282733-1 / MHID: 0-07-282733-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110648-0 / MHID: 0-07-110648-0 [IE] 

This full-color atlas is intended to effectively supplement the 

A&P laboratory course and aid students in their studies. Eder’s 

high-quality visuals, in combination with its unique tables, make 

it a valuable supplement in any lab course. Tables include terms 

and definitions as well as descriptions of the origin, insertion, 

action, and innervation of muscles. This atlas illustrates the 

dissection structures as they actually exist, so students will be 

able to easily recognize the parts when they are dissecting or 

taking an exam. 


• This 5th edition will have a Chapter 6 entitled “Specialized: Heart, 

Kidney, & Brain”. There are 10 new photos of sheep brain, heart and 

kidney. 

• Numbered structured lists are now listed in order of appearance 

instead of alphabetically, in response to review feedback. 

Features 

• Human muscular anatomy section features full-color, large illustrations 

and clear labeling. 

• Eder also includes a variety of useful and clear dissection photos of 

the cat, fetal pig, and rat. 

• Extensive reference tables include tables of origin, insertion, action, 

and innervation of a variety of muscles. 

• Full-Page, Full-Color Dissections. The dissection photos are crucial 

as they illustrate to the student just how the various stages of dissection 

should look as they do it themselves. These fantastic full-color photos 

will be as large as a full page and truly be the best on the market. 

• The Eder atlas provides students with vivid, full-color, real-life images 

that are often not included in their laboratory manual. Many instructors 

comment that students have a lot of trouble learning to use a microscope. 

The full-color histology images (featuring descriptions and labels) help 

students interpret what they are seeing through their microscopes. 

• Features more than 100 common histology images with labeling 

and descriptions. 

• Human Anatomy line art has been updated throughout the manual. 

• Highlights human skeletal anatomy using a combination of full color 

photographs and complementary color illustrations, with extensive 

labeling. 

Contents 

1 Histology 2 Human Skeletal Anatomy 3 Human Muscular Anatomy 

4 Dissections 5 Reference Tables Table 5.1 Structure and Function of 

Some Cellular Components Table 5.2 Some Membrane Transport Processes 

Table 5.3 Formed Elements of Blood Table 5.4 Terms for Bone 

Structure Table 5.5 Bones of the Human Skeleton Table 5.6 Compari- 

son of Female and Male Skeletons Table 5.7 Extrinsic Muscles of the 

Eye Table 5.8 Facial Muscles Table 5.9 Chewing Muscles Table 5.10 

Muscles of the Throat Table 5.11 Muscles of the Tongue Table 5.12 

Muscles of the Pharynx and Palate Table 5.13 Muscles That Move the 

Head able 5.14 Muscles That Move the Shoulder Table 5.15 Muscles 

That Move the Upper Arm Table 5.16 Muscles That Move the Lower 

Arm Table 5.17 Muscles That Move the Wrist and Hand Table 5.18 

Muscles That Move the Chest Wall: Breathing Table 5.19 Muscles That 

Move the Abdominal Wall Table 5.20 Muscles of the Pelvic Floor: The 

Pelvic Diaphragm Table 5.21 Muscles of the Vertebral Column: Muscles 

of Erect Posture Table 5.22 Muscles Located in the Lateral Hip Table 

5.23 Muscles Located in the Anterior Hip Table 5.24 Muscles Located 

in the Posterior Hip Table 5.25 Muscles Located in the Anterior Thigh 

Table 5.26 Muscles Located in the Medial Thigh Table 5.27 Muscles 

Located in the Posterior Thigh Table 5.28 Muscles Located in the Lower 

Leg Table 5.29 The Cranial Nerves Table 5.30 Spinal Nerves and Their 

Branches Table 5.31 Events of the Cardiac Cycle Table 5.32 Major 

Blood Vessels and Their Branches Table 5.33 Major Hormones of the 

Pituitary Gland 6 Specialized Heart, Kidney, and Brain 

New 

SOLVE SALADIN: ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 

CROSSWORD PUZZLES SPECIALLY PREPARED FOR 


The Unity of Form and Function, 4th Edition By Ken 

Saladin 

By Greg Reeder, Broward Community College 

2007 (May 2006) / 200 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340359-5 / MHID: 0-07-340359-8 



ATLAS OF SKELETAL MUSCLES 

5th Edition 

By Robert J. Stone and Judith A. Stone of Suffolk Community College 

- Selden 

2006 (Jan 2005) / 240 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250178-0 / MHID: 0-07-250178-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124479-4 / MHID: 0-07-124479-4 [IE] 

This unique atlas is a study guide to the anatomy and actions 

of human skeletal muscles. It is designed for use by students 

of anatomy and physiology, physical therapy, chiropractic, 

medicine, nursing, physical education, and other health-related 

fields. This concise, compact reference shows the origin, insertion, 

action, and innervation of all human skeletal muscles. 

Students and instructors appreciate this atlas for the simplicity 

of the line art which helps students learn the main structures 

without overwhelming them with detail. 

CONTENTS 

1 The Skeleton 2 Movements of the Body 3 Muscles of the Face and 

Head 4 Muscles of the Neck 5 Muscles of the Trunk 6 Muscles of the 

Shoulder and Arm 7 Muscles of the Forearm and Hand 8 Muscles of 

the Hip and Thigh 9 Muscles of the Leg and Foot 

48 


9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM


A VISUAL ATLAS FOR ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 

TO ACCOMPANY HOLE’S HUMAN A&P 

10th Edition 


2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294643-7 / MHID: 0-07-294643-1 

This collection of images was assembled to provide students 

with a comprehensive resource for studying anatomical structures 

and a convenient place to write notes during lecture or 

lab. 

CONTENTS 

Unit 1 Axial Skeleton Unit 2 Appendicular Skeleton Unit 3 Articulations 

Unit 4 Muscular System Unit 5 Nervous System Unit 6 Eye and 

Ear Unit 7 Heart and Lungs 

A VISUAL ATLAS FOR ANATOMY & PHYSIOLOGY 

TO ACCOMPANY SALADIN’S A&P 

3rd Edition 


2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294394-8 / MHID: 0-07-294394-7 

This collection of images was assembled to provide students 

with a comprehensive resource for studying anatomical structures 

and a convenient place to write notes during lecture or 

lab. 

CONTENTS 

Unit 1 Axial Skeleton Unit 2 Appendicular Skeleton Unit 3 Articulations 

Unit 4 Muscular System Unit 5 Nervous System Unit 6 Eye and 

Ear Unit 7 Heart and Lungs 

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF HUMAN ANATOMY 

AND PHYSIOLOGY 

By Kent M. Van De Graaff, Weber State University and R. Ward 

Rhees, Brigham Young University—Provo 

2001 / 160 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136976-3 / MHID: 0-07-136976-7 

[A Schaum Professional Publication] 

Website: http://doi.contentdirections.com 

What could be better than the bestselling Schaum’s Outline 

series For students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, 

it would have to be Schaum’s Easy Outline series. Every book 

in this series is a pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused 

version of its predecessor. With an emphasis on clarity and 

brevity, each new title features a streamlined and updated 

format and the absolute essence of the subject, presented in 

a concise and readily understandable form. Graphic elements 

such as sidebars, reader-alert icons, and boxed highlights stress 

selected points from the text, illuminate keys to learning, and 

give students quick pointers to the essentials. 

• Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers 

turned off by dense text 

• Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the 

material across fast 

• Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject 

• Delivers expert help from teachers who are authorities in 

their fields 

• So small and light that they fit in a backpack! 


AN ATLAS TO HUMAN ANATOMY 

By Dennis Strete, McLennan Community College 

2000 / 208 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-697-38793-6 / MHID: 0-697-38793-3 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115591-5 / MHID: 0-07-115591-0 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/abio 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Cells and Tissues Chapter 1 Anatomy at the Cellular Level Chapter 

2 Tissue Organization: Epithelial, Connective, Muscle, and Nervous 

Tissue Part 2 Organ Systems Chapter 3 Integumentary System Chapter 

4 Skeletal System Chapter 5 Muscular System Chapter 6 Nervous System 

Chapter 7 Special Senses: Olfactory, Gustation, Auditory, Visual 

Chapter 8 Endocrine System Chapter 9 Cardiovascular System Chapter 

10 Lymphatic System Chapter 11 Respiratory System Chapter 12 Digestive 

System Chapter 13 Urinary System Chapter 14 Male Reproductive 

System Chapter 15 Female Reproductive System 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF HUMAN ANATOMY AND 

PHYSIOLOGY 

2nd Edition 

By Kent Van De Graaf, Brigham Young University 

1997 / 453 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-066887-4 / MHID: 0-07-066887-6 


Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.pl=007066887 

6&adkey=W02003 

CONTENTS 

Introduction to the Human Body. / Cellular Chemistry. / Cell Structure 

and Function. / Tissues. / Integumentary System. / Skeletal System. / 

Muscle Tissue and Mode of Contraction. / Muscular System. / Nervous 

Tissue. / Central Nervous System. / Peripheral and Autonomic Nervous 

Systems. / Sensory Organs. / Endocrine System. / Cardiovascular 

System: Blood. / Cardiovascular System: The Heart. / Cardiovascular 

System: Vessels and Blood Circulation. / Lymphatic System and Body 

Immunity. / Respiratory System. / Digestive System. / Metabolism, 

Nutrition, and Temperature Regulation. / Urinary System. / Water and 

Electrolyte Balance. / Reproductive System. 










• Perfect for last-minute test preparation 

49 


9/29/2006 11:54:22 AM



Histology 

basic histology 

text & Atlas, 11th Edition 

By Luiz Carlos Junqueira and Jose Carneiro of University of San 

Paulo, Brazil 

2005 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144091-2 / MHID: 0-07-144091-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111888-0 / MHID: 0-07-111888-8 [IE with CD] 

The leading text of medical histology and microscopic anatomy! 

With a full-color design and OVER 600 photomicrographs and 

illustrations, this book continues to be the most authoritative 

histology text on the market. Revised to reflect the latest research 

in the field, this book emphasizes the relationships and concepts 

that link cell and tissue structures with their functions. A bonus 

image library CD-ROM featuring all the photos and illustrations 

from the text with “zoom in” and “zoom out” capability is also 

included. 

Contents 

1. Histology & Its Methods of Study 2. The Cytoplasm 3. The Cell 

Nucleus 4. Epithelial Tissue 5. Connective Tissue 6. Adipose Tissue 7. 

Cartilage 8. Bone 9. Nerve Tissue & the Nervous System 10. Muscle 

Tissue 11. The Circulatory System 12. Blood Cells 13. Hematopoiesis 

14. The Immune System & Lymphoid Organs 15. Digestive Tract 16. 

Organs Associated with the Digestive Tract 17. The Respiratory System 

18. Skin 19. The Urinary System 20. Hypophysis 21. Adrenals, Islets of 

Langerhans, Thyroid, Parathyroids, & Pineal Gland 22. The Male Reproductive 

System 23. The Female Reproductive System 24. Photoreceptor 

& Audioreceptor Systems 

New 

Public Safety 

Homeland Security 

HOMELAND SECURITY AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL 

RESPONSE 

By John Campbell 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 

Homeland Security and Emergency Response is a first edition 

product for McGraw-Hill Higher Education. The book and 

its ancillaries are being developed and designed to meet the 

needs of a 16 hour course by the same name. If focuses on 

providing information on recognizing threats, acting on threats, 

and providing patient care as well as the communication that 

must occur when a threat to homeland security occurs. Threats 

covered include Biological, Nuclear, Chemical, Incendiary and 

Explosive threats. Additional information on Clandestine Drug 

Laboratories is also covered. The information is easy-to-read 

and step-by-step procedures for using related equipment and 

skills are included. The primary market for this product suite and 

course include those in emergency medical services (paramedics, 

EMT-Basics, First Responders), police, and those in fire. 

Features 

• This text is divided into two distinct sections –The first 8 Chapters 

cover concepts. The remaining 7 Chapters are a compilation of skills 

(personal protective equipment, decontamination, use of nerve agent 

antidote kit, use of anthrax test kit, use of chemical agent detectors, 

use of radiation detectors, practical response situations) which outline 

the steps involved in performing each skill. The student will be taught 

these skills using the same equipment he/she would use in real life 

situations. 

• Each of the first 8 Chapters begin with a Case Study to grab the 

student’s attention. There are “It Happens” boxes that contain “real 

world” information about content. 

• There are several end of Chapter elements that highlight important 

areas for the student to retain: 

1. Pearls – this is a list of key summary points for the Chapter. These 

are “tips to remember” in the field. 

2. Case Study Conclusion – this is a continuation of the case study at 

the beginning of the Chapter. 

3. Case Study Discussion – this leads the class through a discussion of 

the preceding case. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








4. Want to Know More – this section will be a list of bibliographical 

references and suggested learning sources. 

Contents 

Introduction / Chapter 1. Recognition and Emergency Medical Response 

Chapter 2. Chemical Agents used in Terrorist Attacks Chapter 3. Biological 

Weapons I Chapter 4. Biological Weapons II Chapter 5. Radiological 

or Nuclear Incidents Chapter 6. Incendiaries and Explosives Chapter 7. 

Clandestine Drug Laboratories Chapter 8. Putting it All Together / Practical 

Skills / Skills Chapter 1. Selection and Use of Personal Protective 

Equipment Skills Chapter 2. Decontamination of Patients Skills Chapter 

3. Use of Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) Skills Chapter 4. Use of 

the Anthrax Test Kit Skills Chapter 5. Use of Chemical Agent Detectors 

Skills Chapter 6. Use of Radiation Detection Equipment Skills Chapter 

7. Scenario Review / Appendix: Acronyms 

50 


9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM

New 

CATASTROPHE PREPARATION AND PREVENTION 

FOR LAW ENFORCEMENT PROFESSIONALS WITH 

STUDENT CD 

By Phil Palin, Teleologic Learning Company 

2008 (October 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331774-8 / MHID: 0-07-331774-8 

Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for Law Enforcement is 

a multi-media product for Homeland Security designed for law 

enforcement personnel. This spiral-bound worktext contains a 

link to an online simulation game called “San Luis Rey” and 

a CD-ROM containing selected government documents and 

excerpts from McGraw-Hill reference texts. Instructors can use 

the wealth of material in the CD-ROM to adjust the length of 

the course. It can be taught in a single day or two-day course 

or expanded into a full semester. The worktext guides the 

student through the material and links the learning experience 

from the different formats. The simulation-based program is 

sponsored by the Office for Domestic Preparedness and Department 

of Homeland Security to build a common, minimum 

level of preparedness among the nation’s first responders and 

related homeland security professions in fulfilling the National 

Homeland Security Strategy. Its goal is to support the ability of 

every jurisdiction in the United States to 1) develop capacity in 

preventing terrorism, 2) demonstrate coherence with a common 

standard of practice in prevention of terrorism; and 3) ensure 

that every jurisdiction has a basic ability to recognize crucial 

links between prevention, response, and recovery. 

Features 

• The flexibility of this program allows instructors to teach it in a 1 2, 

or semester long course. 

• During the course, learners participate in an online simulation game 

where they will have to detect and prevent a terrorist attack. Failure has 

dire consequences for them and the fictional jurisdiction of San Luis 

Rey. The game challenges learners to move beyond response-oriented 

training and think about what it takes to prevent a terrorist attack. 

Contents 

Orientation / Chapter 1--Introduction Chapter 2 – Recognize Threats 

Chapter 3 – Share Information Chapter 4--Collaborate Chapter 5 – Manage 

Risk Chapter 6 – Decide to Intervene / Chapter Review / Apply 

What You Have Learned Acknowledgments Works Cited Appendix 

– San Luis Rey General Index 

New 


First Responder 

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONDER 

First Responder in Action with Student CD-ROM, 

Student DVD and Pocket Guide 

By Barbara Aehlert 

2007 (March 2006) / 604 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302260-4 / MHID: 0-07-302260-8 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/aehlertemr 

Emergency Medical Responder: First Responder in Action, 1st 

edition by Barbara Aehlert, RN, provides the first responder 

student with must-know information. This product is the only 

product that integrates the didactic and skills information. First 

Responder training is the entry level of emergency medical 

services. This full-color, well-illustrated textbook/workbook 

combo is the only first responder product written by an EMS 

educator who is an experienced author. It includes information 

on the medical management of the results of current national 

security threats. 

Features 

• Content that follows the U.S. Dept of Transportation (DOT) curriculum. 

This text includes both didactic and skills-based information that 

meets and sometime exceeds DOT curriculum objectives. Over 600 

Illustrations are in the text that are key to learning-and straight forward. 

In addition the text includes skill drills that contain both step-by-step 

explanations as well as figures that depict the skills. 

• This text is the only title to include a DVD with the textbook that 

contains every DOT and National registry skill in video format for 

students and instructors. 

• Additional Material: First Responder contains material that exceeds 

the DOT curriculum and reflects adjustments made after the Sept.11 

attacks. New appendices are: Weapons of Mass Destruction: Awareness 

and Response, Rural and Frontier EMS, and Special Populations. 

• Instructor Support Materials: These include PowerPoint slides with 

Lesson plans that correspond to each slide. The Lesson plans include the 

following: recommended minimum time to complete each Lesson for 

both initial and refresher courses, qualifications for primary and assistant 

instructors, key terms and definitions, quiz questions with answers, 

“twists” on textbook case studies with answers to case study “twists”, appropriate 

activities for students to perform in class, instructor scenarios, 

skill sheets for each Chapter, and knowledge testing games. 

Contents 

Module 1: Preparatory 1 Introduction to the EMS System 2 The Well- 

Being of the Emergency Medical Responder 3 Legal and Ethical Issues 

4 The Human Body 5 Lifting and Moving Patients Module 2: Airway 

6 Airway and Breathing Module 3: Circulation 7 Circulation Module 

4: Patient Assessment 8 Patient Assessment Module 5: Illness and 

Injury 9 Medical Emergencies 10 Bleeding and Soft-Tissue Injuries 11 

Injuries to Muscles and Bones Module 6: Childbirth and Children 12 

Childbirth 13 Infants and Children Module 7: EMS Operations 14 EMS 

Operations / Appendices Appendix 1: Weapons of Mass Destruction: 

Awareness and Response Appendix 2: Rural and Frontier EMS Appendix 

3: Special Populations 

51 


9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM


New 

EMT Paramedic 

HOMELAND SECURITY AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL 

RESPONSE 

By John Campbell 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304437-8 / MHID: 0-07-304437-7 

Homeland Security and Emergency Response is a first edition 

product for McGraw-Hill Higher Education. The book and 

its ancillaries are being developed and designed to meet the 

needs of a 16 hour course by the same name. If focuses on 

providing information on recognizing threats, acting on threats, 

and providing patient care as well as the communication that 

must occur when a threat to homeland security occurs. Threats 

covered include Biological, Nuclear, Chemical, Incendiary and 

Explosive threats. Additional information on Clandestine Drug 

Laboratories is also covered. The information is easy-to-read 

and step-by-step procedures for using related equipment and 

skills are included. The primary market for this product suite and 

course include those in emergency medical services (paramedics, 

EMT-Basics, First Responders), police, and those in fire. 

Features 

• This text is divided into two distinct sections –The first 8 Chapters 

cover concepts. The remaining 7 Chapters are a compilation of skills 

(personal protective equipment, decontamination, use of nerve agent 

antidote kit, use of anthrax test kit, use of chemical agent detectors, 

use of radiation detectors, practical response situations) which outline 

the steps involved in performing each skill. The student will be taught 

these skills using the same equipment he/she would use in real life 

situations. 

• Each of the first 8 Chapters begin with a Case Study to grab the 

student’s attention. There are “It Happens” boxes that contain “real 

world” information about content. 

• There are several end of Chapter elements that highlight important 

areas for the student to retain: 

1. Pearls – this is a list of key summary points for the Chapter. These 

are “tips to remember” in the field. 

2. Case Study Conclusion – this is a continuation of the case study at 

the beginning of the Chapter. 

3. Case Study Discussion – this leads the class through a discussion of 

the preceding case. 

4. Want to Know More – this section will be a list of bibliographical 

references and suggested learning sources. 

Contents 

Introduction / Chapter 1. Recognition and Emergency Medical Response 

Chapter 2. Chemical Agents used in Terrorist Attacks Chapter 3. Biological 

Weapons I Chapter 4. Biological Weapons II Chapter 5. Radiological 

or Nuclear Incidents Chapter 6. Incendiaries and Explosives Chapter 7. 

Clandestine Drug Laboratories Chapter 8. Putting it All Together / Practical 

Skills / Skills Chapter 1. Selection and Use of Personal Protective 

Equipment Skills Chapter 2. Decontamination of Patients Skills Chapter 

3. Use of Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) Skills Chapter 4. Use of 

the Anthrax Test Kit Skills Chapter 5. Use of Chemical Agent Detectors 

Skills Chapter 6. Use of Radiation Detection Equipment Skills Chapter 

7. Scenario Review / Appendix: Acronyms 

New 

THE PARAMEDIC 

By Will Chapleau, Angel Burba, Peter Pons, David Page, Inver Hills 

Community College 

2008 (April 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352071-1 / MHID: 0-07-352071-3 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/chapleau1e 

CONTENTS 

Part 1-Foundations 1. The ems profession 2. The well-being of the paramedic 

3. Professional ethics 4. Legal issues 5. Clinical decision making 

6. Medical terminology 7. Anatomy overview 8. Physiology overview 

9. Safety and scene size-up Part 2-Foundations of communication 

and assessment 10. Therapeutic communications and history taking 

11. The normal physical examination Part 3-Foundations of critical 

care: caring for the sick patient 12. Airway management, ventilation, 

and oxygenation 13. Shock overview 14. Patient assessment 15. Pharmacology 

16. Medication administration and iv 17. Documentation & 

communication Part 4-Trauma 18. Mechanism of injury 19. Hemostasis 

and hermorrhagic shock 20. Head, face, and neck trauma 21. Thoracic 

trauma 22. Abdominal trauma 23. Spinal trauma 24. Skeletal trauma 

25. Soft tissue and muscle trauma 26. Burn trauma 27. Trauma patients 

and trauma systems Part 5-Medical Issues 28. Pulmonary 29. Cardiology 

30. Neurology 31. Endocrinology, electrolytes, and acid/base 32. 

Allergies and anaphylaxis 33. Infectious and communicable diseases 

34. Gastroenterology 35. Toxicology 36. Urology 37. Hematology 38. 

Environmental conditions 39. Eyes, ears, nose, and throat 40. Behavioral 

and psychiatric disorders 41. Obstetrics and gynecology Part 6-Special 

Populations 42. Neonatology 43. Pediatric patients 44. Geriatric patients 

45. The abused and neglected 46. Patients with special challenges 47. 

Patients with chronic illnesses 48. Patients from diverse cultures Part 

7-Operations 49. Ambulance operations 50. Medical incident command 

51. Rescue awareness 52. Teamwork and operational interface 53. 

Hazardous materials incidents 54. Special events and mass gatherings 

55. Responding to wmd events / Glossary / Index 

New 

THE PARAMEDIC WORKBOOK WITH STUDENT CD 

By Will Chapleau and Arthur Hsieh 

2008 (June 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320532-8 / MHID: 0-07-320532-X 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/chapleau1e 

The Paramedic Manual is not a traditional workbook in that 

it goes beyond the simple “review and test” approach of most 

workbooks. Instead, this manual supports the students’ exploration 

of the art and science of prehospital medicine by providing 

a rich palette of learning tools, images, and even video to better 

explain concepts and techniques. The Paramedic Manual speaks 

clearly and directly to the paramedic student. The material in 

each chapter revolves around “Need To Know” (NTK) objectives; 

those that the authors of both the Textbook and Manual 

felt were absolutely necessary for the paramedic student to 

master before moving on to the next section or chapter. All 

features in the Manual were designed to ensure that learners 

can successfully master these NTK objectives. Multimedia tools 

on the accompanying DVD create an educational space that is 

rich with information. 

Features 

• Skills--This section presents Step-by-Steps, illustrated instructions for 

performing key skills. Accompany skill sheets for these and additional 

skills are provided in the back of the book. 

52 


9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM


• Ample vignettes and progressive case studies, followed by critical 

thinking questions (answers at the end of each chapter), effectively 

review basic concepts, encourage students to build on and apply new 

information, and require the learner integrate what he or she has been 

learning into real-world practice. 

• Problem-Based Learning (PBL) cases – These unique cases are designed 

to be challenging and open-ended--just like many EMS patients. 

The learner must work his or her way through the case, using not just 

the manual and textbook, but often other resources that must be found 

and researched. In the process, the student will learn about the process 

of learning itself. 

• Activities--Self-directed, student-centered activities provide alternative 

methods for mastering the chapters’ main concepts. Many are 

designed for use with partners and small groups. 

• The student CD that accompanies the manual provides skills 

– Step-by-Steps in a PowerPoint format that show skills being correctly 

performed using Quicktime video. Text “bubbles” and arrows point to 

key aspects of skill performance 

Contents 

Part 1-Foundations Chapter 1-the ems profession Chapter 2-The wellbeing 

of the paramedic Chapter 3-Professional ethics Chapter 4-Legal 

issues Chapter 5-Clinical decision making Chapter 6-Medical terminology 

Chapter 7-Anatomy overview Chapter 8-Physiology overview 

Chapter 9-Safety and scene size-up Part 1 problem-based learning case 

Part 2-Foundations of communication and assessment Chapter 10- 

Therapeutic communications and history taking Chapter 11-The normal 

physical examination Chapter 12-Airway management, ventilation, and 

oxygenation Part 2 problem-based learning case Part 3-Foundations 

of critical care: caring for the sick patient Chapter 13Shock overview 

Chapter 14-Patient assessment Chapter 15-Pharmacology Chapter 16- 

Medication administration and iv Chapter 17-Documentation Part 3 

Problem-based learning case Part 4-Trauma Chapter 18-Mechanism 

of injury Chapter 19-hemorrhage and hemorrhagic shock Chapter 

20-Head, face, and neck trauma Chapter 21-Thoracic trauma Chapter 

22-Abdominal trauma Chapter 23-Spinal trauma Chapter 24-Skeletal 

trauma Chapter 25-Soft tissue and muscle trauma Chapter 26-Burn 

trauma Chapter 27-Trauma patients and trauma systems Part 4 Problembased 

learning case Part 5-Medical Chapter 28-Pulmonary Chapter 29- 

Cardiology Chapter 30-Neurology Chapter 31-Endocrinology Chapter 

32-Allergies and anaphylaxis Chapter 33-Infectious and communicable 

diseases Chapter 34-Gastroenterology Chapter 35-Toxicology Chapter 

36-Urology Chapter 37-Hematology Chapter 38-Environmental conditions 

Chapter 39-Eyes, ears, nose, and throat Chapter 40-Behavioral 

and psychiatric disorders Chapter 41-Obstetrics/gynecology Part 5 

Problem-based learning case Part 6-Special populations Chapter 42- 

Neonatology Chapter 43-Pediatric patients Chapter 44-Geriatric patients 

Chapter 45-The abused and neglected Chapter 46-Patients with special 

challenges Chapter 47-Patients with chronic illnesses Chapter 48-Patients 

from diverse cultures Part 6 Problem-based learning case Part 

7-Operations Chapter 49-Ambulance operations Chapter 50-Medical 

incident command Chapter 51-Rescue awareness Chapter 52-Teamwork 

and operational interface Chapter 53-Hazardous materials incidents 

Chapter 54-Special events and mass gatherings Chapter 55-Responding 

to the wmd events Chapter 56-Military paramedicine Part 7 Problembased 

learning case / Appendices / Skill sheets / Answers and rationale 

/ Answers to problem-based learning cases / Resources 

New 

PARAMEDIC REVIEW DVD AND CD-ROM 

By Delve Productions, Inc 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322069-7 / MHID: 0-07-322069-8 

A paramedic student needs a review product that contains both 

all testable certification skills and the ability to test and assess 

the didactic course material. Paramedic Plus Review combines 

both skills (all ALS skills) and a didactic review of all paramedic 

material in a DVD and CD-ROM format. It can be used by a 

student studying for their written and practical exam or by an 

instructor for classroom teaching of the skills. 

Features 

• The DVD includes videos which provide review of steps and procedures 

of each testable skill plus a didactic review. 

• Passing the paramedic course and National Registry written and 

practical skills examinations will be stressed. 

• : DVD skills performed according to national standards. 

• Well-known and proven development team. 

Contents 

Well-Being / Lifting and Moving Patients / Airway / Patient Assessment / 

Bleeding and Soft Tissue Injuries / Injuries to Muscles and Bones / Child 

Birth / Neonatology / Infants and Children / Geriatrics / Abuse & Assault 

/ Pharmacology/Venous Access/Meds / Advanced Airway Techniques / 

EMS Operations / Assessment Based Management 

New 

ACLS/Advanced 

Cardiac Life Support 

ACLS BASICS AND MORE WITH STUDENT CD & 

DVD 

By Kim McKenna 

2008 (February 20070 / 224 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301971-0 / MHID: 0-07-301971-2 

ACLS-Basics and More contains the “Cliff Notes” of the ACLS 

Provider Course, as well as essential info from the advanced 

resuscitation course. The textbook provide 60 illustrations, 

including approximately 20 rhythm strips for essential review. 

It also features 19 essential treatment algorithms. Appendices 

include a comprehensive medications table and a listing of 

common ACLS abbreviations. For each medication within the 

appendix, the following information is provided: action, uses, 

adult dose, common side-effects, and notes. In addition, within 

the medications table, ACLS medications and medication details 

for the experienced provider are italicized. The textbook is packaged 

with a DVD that provides the most common scenarios the 

end-user may encounter in the field. It is also packaged with a 

CD that contains multiple-choice, self-test questions with answer 

key and rationales. Authored by a knowledgeable ACLS 

provider and DVD experts. 

53 


9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM


Features 

• The textbook contains a streamlined or “Cliff Notes” approach of 

the ACLS Provider Course, as well as essential information from the 

advanced resuscitation course. 

• The textbook will provide rhythm strips and numerous drug tables 

for essential review. 

New 

Firefighting 

• Textbook will be packaged with a DVD. The accompanying DVD 

will contain the following information in a video format: 10 scenarios 

reflecting the “core” ACLS cases and 4 scenarios reflecting topics covered 

in the advanced ACLS course. Additionally, the DVD will include 

skills that are not part of the scenarios (e.g., CPR). 

Contents 

Section I – Introduction to ACLS Chapter 1 – Passing ACLS Chapter 

2 – ACLS Fundamentals Chapter 3 – Respiratory Distress and Arrest 

Chapter 4 – Public Access Defibrillation Chapter 5 – ECG Rhythms 

and ACLS Algorithms Chapter 6 – Acute Coronary Syndromes Chapter 

7 – Acute Ischemic Stroke Section II – ACLS for Experienced Providers 

Chapter 8 – Advanced Acute Coronary Syndromes Chapter 9 

– Toxicology in ACLS Chapter 10 – Special Resuscitation Situations / 

Appendices Appendix A: ACLS Medication Table Appendix B: Common 

ACLS Abbreviations 

SAFE FIREFIGHTING - FIRST THINGS FIRST WITH 

STUDENT DVD 

By Steve Kidd and John Czajkowski of Delve Productions, Inc and 

Garry Briese, International Association of Fire Chiefs 

2007 (July 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312397-4 / MHID: 0-07-312397-8 

Safe Firefighting: First Things First, is the initial orientation and 

training for beginning firefighters who will not be going inside 

to fight a structure fire. It will empower the beginning firefighter 

with the ability to assist on most exterior firefighting and emergency 

rescue operations. At this level, the firefighter will need 

tight supervision and will only have the capabilities to assist 

the next two levels of firefighters trained in this program. By 

providing condensed entry-level training to the newest firefighter 

recruit, the fire department can get personnel safely involved 

in some fire department emergency operations sooner, while 

you complete your more advanced training. This approach is a 

great help for fire departments that are in dire need of personnel, 

particularly volunteer departments. 

Features 

• This text/workbook introduces the volunteer firefighter to the testable 

skills required by the National Fire Protection Association. 

• Written for the Volunteer: The is the first text to deal only with the 

volunteer firefighter, which is about three quarters of all firefighters. 

• The primary and consistent focus of this text is on the Firefighter’s 

safety. Personal and crew safety is emphasized consistently in both the 

knowledge and skills content. 

• This a new approach to initial training for volunteer firefighters. Presently 

there are no textbooks, nor a nationally recognized curriculum, 

that focus on the exterior firefighter working in a volunteer or combination 

fire department. 

• Each book includes a free Student DVD that demonstrates all of the 

essential skills in the text, and digital flash cards for self-study. 

• The material is featured in context using scenario based training, so 

the student will not only learn the skills, but will know when to apply 

them in the field. The result is a safer, “thinking” firefighter. 










• Each chapter features a section called “Reality”. This section provides 

a real-world example of where the skills in the chapter will apply, keeping 

with the training in context model. 

Contents 

Chapter 1--Welcome to the Fire Service Chapter 2--First Aid and CPR 

Chapter 3--Protective Equipment Chapter 4--Pre-Connected Attack 

Lines Chapter 5--Response Safety and Vehicle Crashes (No Entrapment) 

Chapter 6--Extinguishing Small Fires Chapter 7--Ground Cover 

Fires Chapter 8--Passenger Vehicle Fires Chapter 9--Supply Hose Lines 

Chapter 10--Large Attack Lines Chapter 11--Single Family Dwelling 

Fires (Two Story, Exterior Attack) 

54 


9/29/2006 11:54:23 AM

2007-2008 NEW Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics Titles 

Cellular Molecular, 

Microbiology & Genetics 

~ Contents 

Biotechnology................................................................. 69 

Developmental Biology/Embryology............................... 57 

General Genetics............................................................ 58 

Human Genetics............................................................. 57 

Immunology.................................................................... 57 

Introductory Microbiology Laboratory............................. 65 

Introductory Microbiology-Majors Text........................... 61 

Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Multimedia........ 65 

Introductory Microbiology-Non Majors Text 

Allied Health Emphasis............................................... 62 

Microbiology Printed-Supplements.................................. 69 

Molecular Biology........................................................... 56 

STDs/AIDS...................................................................... 70 

Virology.......................................................................... 57 


• BROWN 



Complete Version, 10e.............................................65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299273-1 / MHID: 0-07-299273-5 

• BROWN 



Short Version, 10e...................................................66 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299272-4 / MHID: 0-07-299272-7 

• HYDE 

Introduction to Genetics..........................................59 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110803-4 / MHID: 0-07-110803-3 

• KLEYN 

Microbiology Experiments, 5e..................................67 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299949-5 / MHID: 0-07-299949-7 

• LEWIS 

Human Genetics, 7e................................................57 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310143-9 / MHID: 0-07-310143-5 

• NESTER 

Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e..................63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321152-7 / MHID: 0-07-321152-4 


• HARLEY 

Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e..................................65 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299293-9 / MHID: 0-07-299293-X 

• HARTWELL 

Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e....................58 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322738-2 / MHID: 0-07-322738-2 

• STINE 

AIDS Update 2007...................................................70 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340234-5 / MHID: 0-07-340234-6 

• TALARO 

Foundations in Microbiology, 6e..............................62 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330540-0 / MHID: 0-07-330540-5 

• TALARO 

Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 

6e.............................................................................63 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330947-7 / MHID: 0-07-330947-8 

• WEAVER 

Molecular Biology, 4e..............................................56 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331994-0 / MHID: 0-07-331994-5 

• WILLEY 

Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e.................61 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330208-9 / MHID: 0-07-330208-2 

55 

HED 2007 Cellular Molecular, Mic55 55 

9/29/2006 12:02:14 PM

Cellular Molecular, Microbiology & Genetics 

Molecular Biology 

FEATURES 

• Guide to Experimental Techniques--A summary guide to more than 

75 experimental techniques, referenced to the pages on which the 

techniques are discussed, is found in the front matter. 


New 

MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 

4th Edition 

By Robert Weaver, University of Kansas-Lawrence 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331994-0 / MHID: 0-07-331994-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110216-2 / MHID: 0-07-110216-7 [IE] 

Molecular Biology, 4/e by Robert Weaver, is designed for an 

introductory course in molecular biology. The text is geared 

not only toward presenting concepts of molecular biology, but 

also the experiments that led to those concepts. Guided by this 

experimental approach, Dr. Weaver has been published by 

National Institutes as well as National Geographic. 


• Information on Affinity Chromatography--Chapter 5 (Molecular 

Tools for Studying Genes and Gene Activity) now includes information 

on Affinity Chromatography, one of the most powerful separation 

techniques, and also touches on Forensic Uses of DNA Fingerprinting 

and DNA Typing. 

• Thoroughly Revised Website--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS--Assessment, Review, 

and Instruction System for Molecular Biology, 4/e is a complete 

electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can 


a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, 



algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a 

student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw- 

Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor 

through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. 



• New material on Eukaryotic RNA--Chapter 10 (Eukaryotic RNA 

Polymerases and Their Promotors) includes lots of new material, 

inlcuding Three Dimensional Structure of RNA Polymermase II in 

the Post-Translocation State and info on Rpbl’s interaction with the 

DNA-RNA hybrid. 

• New Information on Structure and Function of eIF3--Chapter 17 (The 

Mechanism of Translation I:Initiation) includes new information on the 

Structure and Function of eIF3 as well as Shifts in mRNA Secondary 

Structure. 

• New Informaton on the X Chromosome and more!--Chapter 24 

(Genomics, Proteomics, and Bioinformatics) includes new information 

on the X Chromosome and its role in sex-linked diseases. Also 

discussed in this chapter is the “Barcode of Life”, a section connecting 

DNA to how taxonomists now classify organisms. A few other new 

topics touched upon is Whole Chromosome Transcriptional Mapping, 

Genomic Functional Profiling, Tissue-Specific Functional Profiling, 

and RNAi Analysis. 

• New End-of-Chapter Material--Along with the revision of End-of- 

Chapter Review Questions and Analytical Questions, new References 

and Suggested Readings have been added throughout the text. 

• Revised Art Program!--Many of the illustrations in this edition have 

been redrawn to further clarify details, make content current, and to 

create a consistent appearance. 

• Material from Original Publications--Significant data and autoradiographs 

from original publications are included to support the narrative 

and to help students analyze data. 

• Analytical Questions--As part of the End-Of-Chapter material, these 

questions encourage students to use outside tools to further their 

understanding of that particular chapter’s concepts. (Answers will be 

provided on the new Fourth Edition website.) 

• Text-Specific Website--The text-specific website includes updated 

references, downloadable line art and tables from the text, and links 

to relevant instructive sites on the web. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 1 A Brief History 2 The Molecular Nature of Genes 3 

An Introduction to Gene Function 2 Methods of Molecular Biology 

4 Molecular Cloning Methods 5 Molecular Tools for Studying Genes 

and Gene Activity 3 Transcription in Prokaryotes 6 The Mechanism 

of Transcription in Prokaryotes 7 Operons: Fine Control of Prokaryotic 

Transcription 8 Major Shifts in Prokaryotic Transcription 9 DNA-Protein 

Interactions in Prokaryotes 4 Transcription in Eukaryotes 10 Eukaryotic 

RNA Polymerases and Their Promoters 11 General Transcription Factors 

in Eukaryotes 12 Transcription Activators in Eukaryotes 13 Chromatin 

Structure and Its Effects on Transcription 5 Posttranscriptional Events 

14 Messenger RNA Processing I: Splicing 15 Messenger RNA Processing 

II: Capping and Polyadenylation 16 Other RNA Processing Events 

6 Translation 17 The Mechanism of Translation I: Initiation 18 The 

Mechanism of Translation II: Elongation and Termination 19 Ribosomes 

and Transfer RNA 7 DNA Replication, Recombination, and Transposition 

20 DNA Replication I: Basic Mechanism and Enzymology 21 DNA 

Replication II: Detailed Mechanism 22 Homologous Recombination 23 

Transposition 8 Genomes 24 Genomics and Proteomics 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 

By William Stansfield, California State Polytechnic University 

1996 / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-060898-6 / MHID: 0-07-060898-9 


CONTENTS 

1. Cells / 2. Biomacromolecules / 3. Chromosomes / 4. Transcription 

and Gene Regulation / 5. Translation / 6. Mutations / 7. The Genetics 

of Bacteria and Their Viruses / 8. Genetic Engineering / Recombinant 

DNA Technology / 9. Nucleic Acid Manipulations / 10. Eukaryotic Cells 

and Their Viruses / 11. Cellular Communication / 12. Development 

in Multicellular Organisms / 13. The Immune System / 14. Molecular 

Evolution. 










56 


9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM


Developmental Biology / 

Embryology 

Virology 


ANALYSIS OF BIOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT 

2nd Edition 

By Klaud Kalthoff, University of Texas at Austin 

2001 /816 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118078- 8 / MHID: 0-07-118078-8 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/kalthoff 

CONTENTS 

Part I From Gametogenesis to Histogenesis 1 Analysis of Development 

2 The Role of Cells in Development 3 Gametogenesis 4 Fertilization 5 

Cleavage 6 Cell Fate, Potency and Determination 7 Genomic Equivalence 

and the Cytoplasmic Environment 8 Localized Cytoplasmic Determinants 

9 Axis Formation and Mesoderm Induction 10 Gastrulation 

11 Cell Adhesion and Morphogenesis 12 Organogenesis 13 Ectodermal 

Organs 14 Endodermal and Mesodermal Organs Part II Control of 

Gene Expression in Development 15 The Use of Mutants and Transgenic 

Organisms in the Analysis of Development 16 Transcriptional 

Control 17 RNA Processing 18 Translational Control and Post-translational 

Modifications 19 Genetic and Paragenetic Information Part III 

Current Topics in Developmental Biology 20 Cell Differentiation 21 

Pattern Formation and Embryonic Fields 22 Genetic and Molecular 

Analysis of Pattern Formation in the Drosophila Embryo 23 Genetic 

and Molecular Analysis of Vertebrate Development 24 Genetic and 

Molecular Analysis of Pattern Formation in Plants 25 Experimental 

and Genetic Analysis of Caenorhabditis elegans Development 26 Sex 

Determination 27 Hormonal Control of Development 28 Organismic 

Growth and Oncogenes 

Immunology 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF IMMUNOLOGY 

By George Pinchuk 

2002 / 304 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-137366-1 / MHID: 0-07-137366-7 


CONTENTS 

1. Overview of Immunity and the Immune System / 2. Cells, Tissues, 

and Organs of the Immune System / 3. Antibodies and Antigens / 4. 

Maturation of B Lympocytes and Expression of Immunoglobullin Genes 

/ 5. The Major Histocompatibility Complex / 6. Antigen Processing and 

Presentation / 7. T-Lymphocyte Antigen Recognition and Activation / 8. 

B-Lymphocyte Activation and Antibody Production / 9. Immunologic 

Tolerance / 10. Cytokines / 11. Innate Immunity / 12. Effector Mechanisms 

of Cell-Mediated Immunity / 13. Effector Mechanisms of Humoral 

Immunity / 14. Immunity to Microbes / 15. Transplantation Immunology 

/ 16. Immunity to Tumors / 17. Autoimmunity and Autoimmune 

Diseases / 18. Immunodeficiencies. 


THE BIOLOGY OF VIRUSES 

2nd Edition 

By Bruce Voyles, Grinnell College 

2002 /432 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120477- 4 / MHID: 0-07-120477-6 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1 Viruses and Host Cells 2 Getting In: Attachment, Penetration, and 

Uncoating 3 Expression and Replication of the Viral Genome in 

Prokaryotic Hosts 4 Expression and Replication of the Viral Genome 

in Eukaryotic Hosts: The RNA Viruses 5 Expression and Replication of 

the Viral Genome in Eukaryotic Hosts: The DNA Viruses 6 Assembly, 

Maturation, and Release of Virions 7 Effects of Viral Infection on Host 

Cells: Cytological and Inductive Effects 8 Effects of Viral Infection on 

Host Cells: Integrated Viruses and Persistent Infections 9 Subviral Entities, 

Viral Evolution, and Viral Emergence 


Human Genetics 

New 

HUMAN GENETICS 

7th Edition 

By Ricki Lewis, SUNY at Albany 

2007 (Nov 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310143-9 / MHID: 0-07-310143-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110779-2 / MHID: 0-07-110779-7 [IE] 

Human Genetics, Seventh Edition, is a non-science majors 

human genetics text that clearly explains what genes are, how 

they function, how they interact with the environment, and how 

our understanding of genetics has changed since completion of 

the human genome project. It is a clear, modern, and exciting 

book for citizens who will be responsible for evaluating new 

medical options, new foods, and new technologies in the age 

of genomics. 


• Chapter openings have been reworked to include a Case Study at 

the beginning of each chapter. These Case Studies provide students with 

real-life applications of the concepts to be discussed in the chapter. 

• Relating the Concept sections are incorporated throughout 

every chapter, relating content back to the real-life Case Study in the 

chapter opener. 

Features 

• Problems requiring the use of web resources have been included 

within the Applied Questions at the end of each chapter. 

• On-page references to specific topics on the Online Learning 

Center have been added to provide additional information to the 

student. 

• Figure references in the text have been highlighted so that it is 

easier for students to locate references within the narrative. 

57 


9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM


• Cutting-edge scientific coverage is incorporated throughout the 

book. The author’s experience as a scientific journalist enables her to 

keep current with breaking topics in genetics, giving students the most 

up-to-date human genetics text on the market. 

General Genetics 

• Case Studies. Human Genetics has always been full of cases studies, 

from the end-of-chapter pedagogy, to the “In Their Own Words” 

boxes, to the case workbook, to the narrative itself. These cases allow 

students to see that the research today deals with populations and 

common ills and traits. 

• Over 50 pieces of color-coded art present basic concepts of 

single-gene inheritance, chromosome structure, and DNA structure and 

function, helping students visualize the material they have just read. 

• Compelling, human interest examples from the author’s extensive 

experience as a genetic counselor and science journalist keep the 

students interested in the textual material. 

• This text weaves relevance throughout by including stories 

about real people dealing with real genetic issues. Through In Their 

Own Words Essays, individuals tell of their experience with genetic 

conditions. In addition, Bioethics: Choices for the Future Boxes, found 

at the ends of appropriate chapters, encourage students to ask difficult 

questions of themselves, and to predict how the new science of genetics 

might impact their lives. 

• Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself 

website. The Primis Content Center features more than one million 

items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill 

textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, 

along with others including your own notes, can be customized into a 

black and white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis 

eBook that saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our 

website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. www. 

primiscontentcenter.com 

• In the Online Learning Center, instructors will find the instructor’s 

manual, answer key to the case study workbook, additional case studies, 

and links to additional resources. 

• In appropriate locations in the text, step-by-step problem-solving 

strategies have been included to give students a complete understanding 

of how to work out specific problems. 

Contents 

Part One Introduction Chapter 1 Overview of Genetics Chapter 2 Cells 

Chapter 3 Development Part Two Transmission Genetics Chapter 4 

Mendelian Inheritance Chapter 5 Extensions and Exceptions to Mendel’s 

Laws Chapter 6 Matters of Sex Chapter 7 Multifactorial Traits Chapter 8 

The Genetics of Behavior Part Three DNA and Chromosomes Chapter 

9 DNA Structure and Replication Chapter 10 Gene Action: From DNA 

to Protein Chapter 11 Control of Gene Expression Chapter 12 Gene 

Mutation Chapter 13 Chromosomes Part Four Population Genetics 

Chapter 14 When Allele Frequencies Stay Constant Chapter 15 Changing 

Allele Frequencies Chapter 16 Human Origins and Evolution Part Five 

Immunity and Cancer Chapter 17 Genetics of Immunity Chapter 18 The 

Genetics of Cancer Part Six Genetic Technology Chapter 19 Genetic 

Technologies: Amplifying, Modifying, and Monitoring DNA Chapter 

20 Genetic Testing, Genetic Counseling, and Gene Therapy Chapter 21 

Reproductive Technologies Chapter 22 The Age of Genomics 


New 

GENETICS 

From Genes to Genomes, 

3rd Edition 

By Leland Hartwell, University of Washington 

2008 (October 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322738-2 / MHID: 0-07-322738-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110215-5 / MHID: 0-07-110215-9 [IE] 

Genetics: From Genes to Genomes is a cutting-edge, introductory 

genetics text authored by an unparalleled author team, 

including Nobel Prize winner, Leland Hartwell. The Third Edition 

continues to build upon the integration of Mendelian and 

molecular principles, providing students with the links between 

early genetics understanding and the new molecular discoveries 

that have changed the way the field of genetics is viewed. 


• Additional problems have been added throughout each chapter, 

providing students and teachers with more variety in the level of problems. 

At the end of each chapter, the level of difficulty is indicated for 

each problem, giving instructors the ability the select problems to assign 

based upon the level of difficulty. 

• New “On Our Website” feature, at the end of each chapter, directs 

students and teachers to additional, more detailed information on 

specialized topics not found in the textbook. This information is in the 

form of content, references, or links, for easy access. 

• New Chapter 12: Systems Biology is included in the new edition, 

giving students information on a new way of studying genetics by looking 

at every system of biology as a whole. 

• New “Internet Assignments and Exercises” offer students an interactive 

way to read and complete additional exercises beyond those 

offered in the textbook. 

FEATURES 

• Model Organism Portrait chapters--These additional chapters, 

located at the text-specific website, are written by contributing experts 

in the field to reflect the most current information on each organism. 

Students concentrate on the most widely used model organisms--yeast, 

arabadopsis (plant), C. elegans (worm), fruit fly, and mouse--to understand 

how the developmental mechanisms of the model organisms gives 

insight into human development and genomics. 

• Fast Forward Boxes are one of the mechanisms used to implement 

the integration of Mendelian and molecular genetics. 

• Genetics & Society Boxes require students to critically think about 

the ethical and social questions arising from the application of modern 

genetic knowledge to issues like privacy and reproduction. 

• End-of-Chapter Problems have been revised and expanded! Social & 

Ethical Issues--these questions prompt the student to apply problem-solving 

skills to the type of real-world situations that scientific breakthroughs 

have forced us to face as a society. Solved Problems--sample problems 

covering topical material with complete answers to aid the student in 

understanding the problem solving process. Problems & Questions-- 

exercises that allow the student to develop their own problem solving 

skills. Answers to selected questions are in the back of the book. 

• An Unparalleled Author Team--Included in this winning team are 

Nobel prize-winning yeast specialist, Leland Hartwell; pioneer geneticist 

and physician, Leroy Hood; a leading Drosophila expert, Michael 

Goldberg; a leading mouse expert, Lee Silver; and a distinguished science 

writer, Ruth Veres. This team continues to incorporate the most 

up-to-date, cutting-edge research throughout the breadth of the book. 

58 


9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM


• The text’s detailed, accurate and instructive art program also includes 

“Feature Figures,” which combine art and text in special two-page 

and four-page spreads that summarize the central genetic processes for 

students who appreciate a visual synopsis of the core ideas. 

• The Digital Content Manager is an instructor-based presentation 

CD-ROM that contains all the illustrations, tables, and photos found in 

the text in jpeg format. In addition, professors have access to numerous 

genetics animations, active art, and chapter-specific PowerPoint 

lecture presentations. 

• Part 3 (Genomes) has been extensively revised! Completely restructured 

and updated, Chapters 9, 10, and 11 (formerly 8-10) focus on the 

dramatic explosion of information that is the result of the completion 

of the Human Genome Project, as well as continuing genome research 

on a wide variety of organisms. Students will have the opportunity to 

read the most current coverage available of this critical topic and have a 

complete understanding of the “hows and whys” of genetic research. 

• Professors have the option of creating a customized version of the 

text by selecting only the chapters they cover in lecture, allowing students 

savings in book costs. Customization can occur in two ways: 

• Chapter-by-chapter color customization (printed book). 

• Primis Online--choose the appropriate chapters and mix and match 

with other items on Primis Online, allowing maximum choice and flexibility. 

Choose between two delivery formats: custom printed books (in 

black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). 

CONTENTS 

1 Genetics: The Study of Biological Information 2 Mendel’s Breakthrough: 

Patterns, Particles, and Principles of Heredity 3 Extensions 

to Mendel: Complexities in Relating Genotype to Phenotype 4 The 

Chromosome Theory of Inheritance 5 Linkage, Recombination, and 

the Mapping of Genes on Chromosomes 6 DNA: How the Molecule of 

Heredity Carries, Replicates, and Recombines Information 7 Anatomy 

and Function of a Gene: Dissection Through Mutation 8 Gene Expression: 

The Flow of Genetic Information from DNA to RNA to Protein 9 

Deconstructing the Genome: DNA at High Resolution 10 Reconstructing 

the Genome Through Genetic and Molecular Analysis 11 The Direct 

Detection of Genotype Distinguishes Individual Genomes 12 Systems 

Biology and Proteomics 13 The Eukaryotic Chromosome: An Organelle 

for Packaging and Managing DNA 14 Chromosomal Rearrangements 

and Changes in Chromosome Number Reshape Eukaryotic Genomes 

15 The Prokaryotic Chromosome: Genetic Analysis in Bacteria 16 

The Chromosomes of Organelles Outside the Nucleus Exhibit Non- 

Mendelian Patterns of Inheritance 17 Gene Regulation in Prokaryotes 

18 Gene Regulation in Eukaryotes 19 Cell-Cycle Regulation and the 

Genetics of Cancer 20 Using Genetics to Study Development 21 The 

Genetic Analysis of Populations and How They Evolve 22 Evolution 

at the Molecular Level 


New 

INTRODUCTION TO GENETICS 

By David Hyde, University of Notre Dame 

2007 (March 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110803-4 / MHID: 0-07-110803-3 [IE] 

Hyde’s Introduction to Genetics teaches the principles of genetics 

with an innovative approach that emphasizes the basic 

concepts involved in solving problems as well as teaching 

students how to manipulate genetic data. While most genetics 

textbooks provide some examples and several problems for the 

student to work, the texts primarily stress facts and historical 

information. It is often left to the student to make the connection 

from what is in the text to elucidating the approaches to solve 

problems. Dr. David Hyde presents these skills to the students 

throughout the narrative in a stepped-out fashion, making an 

explicit tie between the facts and their application. This text 

maintains the rigor that faculty require in a genetics book, while 

incorporating a student-friendly presentation style that helps 

the reader comprehend the material. The four key features of 

Hyde’s Introduction to Genetics include: 

1. Innovative, problem-solving-based approach maintains the 

connection between basic genetic principles and their application 

to problems using a stepped-out system. The text also 

links specific portions of the text with selected end-of-chapter 

problems to direct the student to problems that will test their 

comprehension of the material they just studied. 

2. Strong and accessible molecular genetics coverage discusses 

in a clear and basic manner the new information on molecular 

processes and new techniques. This is achieved without sacrificing 

either the content or depth of material. 

3. Dynamic illustration and photo program incorporates vibrant 

colors and three-dimensional effects with pedagogically sound 

layouts that greatly assist students in visualizing and understanding 

difficult genetic processes. 

4. Superior media package offers instructors full access to textbook 

art, photos and tables, as well as high-quality animations 

and customizable PowerPoint lecture presentations. The Online 

Learning Center provides students with additional study tools 

and problem-solving exercises. 

Features 

• Up to date and accurate content 

• Organization that matches the current trends in genetics 

• Key concepts are easier to identify 

• Genetics Lab activities are in each chapter and are linked to the 

OLC 

• Genetics Studente resource CD-ROM 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








59 


9/29/2006 12:02:15 PM


GENETICS DEMYSTIFIED 

By Edward Willet 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145930-3 / MHID: 0-07-145930-8 

[A Professional Reference Title] 

Genetics Demystified offers an up-to-date, highly readable 

explanation of the basic principles of genetics, covering key 

topics such as human genetics, DNA, heredity, mutations, traits, 

chromosomes, and much more. This self-teaching guide comes 

complete with key points, background information, quizzes at 

the end of each chapter, and even a final exam. Simple enough 

for beginners but challenging enough for advanced students, 

this is a lively and entertaining brush-up, introductory text, or 

classroom supplement. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Mendelism and Classical Genetics Chapter 2: The Cell--The 

Basic Unit of Life Chapter 3: DNA--The Chemical Basis of Heredity 

Chapter 4: Chromosomes--Organized DNA Chapter 5: Traits--How 

Genes Are Expressed Chapter 6: Genomes--Reading the Genetic Code 

Chapter 7: Mutations--Misreading the Code Chapter 8: Cancer--Genetics 

Gone Awry Chapter 9: Bacteria--A Different Way of Doing Things 

Chapter 10: Organelles--Genetics Outside the Nucleus Chapter 11: 

Viruses--Hijacking Heredity Chapter 12: Genetic Engineering--Sculpting 

the Code Chapter 13: Evolution--Change Driven by Genetics Chapter 

14: Humans--How Genetics Affect Us / Final Exam / Answers to Quiz 

and Final Exam Questions / Suggested Additonal References / Glossary 

/ Index 


GENETICS 

Analysis and Principles, 2nd Edition 

By Robert J Brooker, University of Minnesota — Minneapolis 

2005 (Jan 2004) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296597-1 / MHID: 0-07-296597-5 

(with OLC Bind-In Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111099-0 / MHID: 0-07-111099-2 

[IE with OLC Bind-In Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/brooker 

Genetics: Analysis and Principles is a one-semester, introductory 

genetics textbook that takes an experimental approach to understanding 

genetics. By weaving one or two experiments into the 

narrative of each chapter, students can simultaneously explore 

the scientific method and understand the genetic principles that 

have been learned from these experiments. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Introduction 1 Overview of Genetics Part 2 Patterns of Inheritance 

2 Mendelian Inheritance 3 Reproduction and Chromosome 

Transmission 4 Extensions of Mendelian Inheritance 5 Linkage and 

Genetic Mapping in Eukaryotes 6 Genetic Transfer and Mapping in 

Bacteria and Bacteriophages 7 Non-Mendelian Inheritance 8 Variation 

in Chromosome Structure and Number Part 3 Molecular Structure and 

Replication of The Genetic Material 9 Molecular Structure of DNA and 

RNA 10 Chromosome Organization and Molecular Structure 11 DNA 

Replication Part 4 Molecular Properties of Genes 12 Gene Transcription 

and RNA Modification 13 Translation of mRNA 14 Gene Regulation 

in Bacteria and Bacteriophages 15 Gene Regulation in Eukaryotes 16 

Gene Mutation and DNA Repair 17 Recombination and Transposition 

at the Molecular Level Part 5 Genetic Technologies 18 Recombinant 

DNA Technology 19 Genome Analysis 20 Molecular Genetics and 

Biotechnology 21 Computer Analysis of Genetic Sequences Part 6 

Genetic Analysis of Individuals and Populations 22 Genetics of Cancer 

and other Human Diseases 23 Developmental Genetics 24 Quantitative 

Genetics 25 Population Genetics 26 Evolutionary Genetics 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF GENETICS 

4th Edition 

By Susan Elrod, California Polytechnic State University - San Luis 

Obispo 

2002 / 500 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136206-1 / MHID: 0-07-136206-1 


CONTENTS 

1. The Physical Basis of Heredity / 2. Patterns of Inheritance / 3. The 

Biochemical Basis of Heredity / 4. Genetic Interactions / 5. The Genetics 

of Sex / 6. Linkage and Chromosome Mapping / 7. Cytogenetics / 

8. Quantitative Genetics / 9. Population Genetics and Evolution / 10. 

Genetics of Bacteria / 11. Viruses, Transposable Elements, and Cancer 

/ 12. Molecular Genetics and Biotechnology / 13. The Molecular Biology 

of Eukaryotes. 


PRINCIPLES OF GENETICS 

7th Edition 

By Robert Tamarin, University of Massachusetts 

2002 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124320-9 / MHID: 0-07-124320-8 

[IE with OLC&CD] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/tamarin7 

CONTENTS 

I Genetics and the Scientific Method 1 Introduction II Mendelism and 

the Chromosomal Theory 2 Mendel’s Principles 3 Mitosis and Meiosis 

4 Probability and Statistics 5 Sex Determination, Sex Linkage, and 

Pedigree Analysis 6 Linkage and Mapping in Eukaryotes 7 Linkage 

and Mapping in Prokaryotes and Bacterial Viruses 8 Cytogenetics III 

Molecular Genetics 9 Chemistry of the Gene 10 Gene Expression: 

Transcription 11 Gene Expression: Translation 12 DNA: Its Mutation, 

Repair, and Recombination 13 Genomics, Biotechnology, and 

Recombinant DNA 14 Gene Expression: Control in Prokaryotes and 

Phages 15 The Eukaryotic Chromosome 16 Gene Expression: Control 

in Eukaryotes 17 Non-Mendelian Inheritance IV Quantitative and Evolutionary 

Genetics 18 Quantitative Inheritance 19 Population Genetics: 

The Hardy-Weinberg Equilibrium and Mating Systems 20 Population 

Genetics: Processes That Change Allelic Frequencies / Appendix A 

Brief Answers to Selected Exercises, Problems, and Critical Thinking 

Questions / Appendix B Suggestions for Further Reading 










60 


9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM

Introductory Microbiology 

– Majors Text 


- In addition to every term being page-referenced, the updated glossary 

now also includes 200 new and revised entries. 

• New instructor and student technology resources available with the 

7th edition! 


New 

PRESCOTT/HARLEY/KLEIN’S MICROBIOLOGY 

7th Edition 

By Joanne Willey, Hofstra University, Linda Sherwood, Montana 

State University-Bozeman and Chris Woolverton, Kent State University-Kent 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330208-9 / MHID: 0-07-330208-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110231-5 / MHID: 0-07-110231-0 [IE] 

The brand new author team of Prescott, Harley and Klein’s 

Microbiology continues the tradition of past editions by providing 

a balanced, comprehensive introduction to all major areas 

of microbiology. Because of this balance, the Seventh Edition of 

Microbiology is appropriate for microbiology majors and mixed 

majors courses. The new authors have focused on readability, 

artwork, and the integration of several key themes (including 

evolution, ecology and diversity) throughout the text, making 

an already superior text even better. 


• The Seventh Edition introduces a brand new author team with over 

40 years of combined research and teaching experience. Joanne Willey, 

Linda Sherwood, and Christopher Woolverton focused on readability, 

artwork, and the integration of several key themes throughout the text, 

making an already superior text even better. 

• Increased emphasis on microbial evolution and diversity. The themes 

of microbial evolution, ecology, and diversity are now more than ever 

integrated throughout the Seventh Edition. Several chapters have been 

revised and reorganized to reflect this integration, including Chapter 

19, which now covers microbial evolution in greater depth than other 

texts. The chapters that are specifically devoted to ecology (27-29) have 

also undergone significant revisions. 

• The most up-to-date information to maintain accurate descriptions of 

structures and processes, as well as provide exciting recent discoveries 

to illustrate essential points, has been added. A few specific examples 

include: 

- a current description of the structure and function of DNA polymerase 

III 

- the role of viruses in marine ecosystems 

- the ubiquitous nature of type III secretion systems 

- an updated coverage of the inflammatory response 

- the current understanding of HIV origins 

- the avian influenza epidemiology 

• Nearly 200 new and 300 revised illustrations and photos featuring 

three-dimensional renditions and bright, attractive colors are part of 

the extensively revised art program! The art program also includes 

new pedagogical features such as concept maps and annotation of key 

pathways and processes. 

- The 50 high-quality animations that were available with the 6th edition 

are even more improved with the 7th edition! With an additional 25 new 

animations available (75 total), students can now quiz themselves over 

each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, 

and then submit their answers to their instructors for grading. 

- McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and 

course management system, designed for greater ease of use than any 

other system available. Instructors can create and share course materials 

and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the mouse. 

Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and create announcements 

and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic grading 

and reporting of homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is 

registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS 

is automatically recorded and available to the instructor through a fully 

integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. 

FEATURES 

• The Seventh Edition continues to present material in short chapters 

organized thematically into eleven separate sections. Shorter chapters 

are less daunting and more “digestible” for most students. Furthermore, 

they offer the professor a greater degree of flexibility so that the order 

in which chapters are covered can be tailored to meet the needs of an 

individual class. 

CONTENTS 

Part I Introduction to Microbiology 1 The History and Scope of Microbiology 

2 The Study of Microbial Structure: Microscopy and Specimen 

Preparation 3 Procaryotic Cell Structure and Function 4 Eucaryotic 

Cell Structure and Function Part II Microbial Nutrition, Growth, and 

Control 5 Microbial Nutrition 6 Microbial Growth 7 Control of Microorganisms 

by Physical and Chemical Agents Part III Microbial Metabolism 

8 Metabolism: Energy, Enzymes, and Regulation 9 Metabolism: 

Energy Release and Conservation 10 Metabolism: The Use of Energy 

in Biosynthesis Part IV Microbial Molecular Biology and Genetics 11 

Microbial Genetics: Gene Structure, Replication, and Expression 12 

Microbial Genetics of Gene Expression 13 Microbial Genetics: Mechanisms 

of Genetic Variation Part V DNA Technology and Genomics 14 

Recombinant DNA Technology 15 Microbial Genomics Part VI The 

Viruses 16 The Viruses: Introduction and General Characteristics 17 

The Viruses: Viruses of Bacteria and Archaea 18 The Viruses: Eucaryotic 

Viruses and Other Acellular Infectious Agents Part VII The Diversity of 

the Microbial World 19 Microbial Evolution, Taxonomy, and Diversity 

20 The Archaea 21 Bacteria: The Deinococci and Nonproteobacteria 

Gram Negatives 22 Bacteria: The Proteobacteria 23 Bacteria: The Low 

G + C Gram Positives 24 Bacteria: The High G + C Gram Positives 25 

The Protists 26 The Fungi (Eumycota) Part VIII Ecology and Symbiosis 

27 Biogeochemical Cycling and Introductory Microbial Ecology 28 

Microorganism in Marine and Freshwater Environments 29 Microorganisms 

in Terrestrial Environments Part IX Nonspecific (Innate) 

Resistance and the Immune Response 30 Microbial Interactions 31 

Nonspecific (Innate) Host Resistance 32 Specific (Adaptive) Immunity 33 

Pathogenecity of Microorganisms Part X Microbial Diseases and Their 

Control 34 Antimicrobial Chemotherapy 35 Clinical Microbiology 36 

The Epidemiology of Infectious Disease 37 Human Diseases Caused by 

Viruses 38 Human Diseases Caused by Bacteria 39 Human Diseases 

Caused by Fungi and Protists Part XI Food and Industrial Microbiology 

40 Microbiology of Food 41 Applied and Industrial Microbiology Appendix 

I A Review of the Chemistry of Biological Molecules Appendix 

II Common Metabolic Pathways 

• New study aids have been developed to help students better understand 

the vast array of microbiology concepts: 

- New questions that require critical thinking skills have been added 

throughout. 

- Important names of scientists, techniques, and microbes are now called 

out to students by being highligted in red font. 

61 


9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM



- Non Majors Text 

Allied Health Emphasis 


New 

FOUNDATIONS IN MICROBIOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By Kathleen Park Talaro, Pasadena City College 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330540-0 / MHID: 0-07-330540-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110229-2 / MHID: 0-07-110229-9 [IE] 

Written with the non-major/allied health student in mind, 

Foundations in Microbiology offers an engaging and accessible 

writing style through the use of tools such as case studies and 

analogies to thoroughly explain difficult microbiology concepts. 

A taxonomic approach is used for the study of pathogens. 


• The immunology chapters have been extensively reorganized and 

updated: 

- Chapter 14, now titled “Nonspecific Host Defenses”, only includes 

material on nonspecific immunity. 

- Chapter 15, now titled “Specific Immunity and Immunization”, includes 

material on specific immunity and immunization. 

- The previous edition’s Chapter 16 material on immunization is now 

placed in Chapter 15, and previous material on immune assays can 

now be found in the new Chapter 17 on diagnosing infections. The new 

Chapter 16 is “Disorders in Immunity” (old Chapter 17). 

• Chapter 17, Diagnosing Infections, is brand new to this edition! 

Bringing together in one place the methods used to diagnose infectious 

diseases, the chapter starts with collecting samples from the patient and 

details the biochemical, serological and molecular methods used to 

identify causative microbes. 

• Each chapter now begins with a “Real Case Study in Microbiology”, 

giving students an opportunity to appreciate and understand how microbiology 

impacts their lives on a daily basis. The solutions appear at the 

end of the chapter, after the necessary elements have been presented. 

• Over 200 new and revised illustrations add to the existing art program’s 

display of realistic views of microbiology. 











FEATURES 

• Talaro’s text takes a taxonomic (organism) approach to the disease 

coverage(Ch. 18-25). Students are introduced to each pathogen by a description 

of the class it belongs to, the diseases (and characteristic symptoms) 

it causes, and the diagnosis and treatment of those diseases. 

• A Basic Principles version (Chapters 1-17 of this text) is also available. 

• Excellent learning aids such as bulleted Chapter Overview sections, 

Chapter Checkpoint reviews, footnoted word origins, and pronunciation 

guides help students better comprehend difficult material. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology Chapter 2 The Chemistry 

of Biology Chapter 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying 

Microorganisms Chapter 4 An Introduction to Cells and Procaryotic 

Cell Structure and Function Chapter 5 Eucaryotic Cells and Microorganisms 

Chapter 6 An Introduction to the Viruses Chapter 7 Elements 

of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth Chapter 8 Microbial 

Metabolism: The Chemical Crossroads of Life Chapter 9 Microbial 

Genetics Chapter 10 Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular 

Biology Chapter 11 Physical and Chemical Control of Microbes Chapter 

12 Drugs, Microbes, Host--The Elements of Chemotherapy Chapter 13 

Microbe-Human Interactions Chapter 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses 

Chapter 15 Adaptive, Specific Immunity and Immunization Chapter 

16 Disorders in Immunity Chapter 17 Diagnosing Infections Chapter 

18 The Cocci of Medical Importance Chapter 19 The Gram-Positive 

Bacilli of Medical Importance Chapter 20 The Gram-Negative Bacilli 

of Medical Importance Chapter 21 Miscellaneous Bacterial Agents of 

Disease Chapter 22 The Fungi of Medical Importance Chapter 23 The 

Parasites of Medical Importance Chapter 24 Introduction to Viruses: The 

DNA Viruses Chapter 25 The RNA Viruses that Infect Humans Chapter 

26 Environmental and Applied Microbiology 

• The boxed readings in previous editions have been updated to 

“Insight Boxes” in the 6th edition. These interesting boxed readings 

found throughout each chapter include Historical, Medical, Discovery, 

and Cultural spotlights on microbiology. Questions at the end of each 

reading reinforce for students the important material they have just read 

(answers can be found on the ARIS website). 

• Concept Questions found at the ends of chapters now include page 

references, allowing students to easily page back and review the information 

they are looking for. 


6th edition! 

- 100+ animations available with the Sixth Edition! Students can quiz 

themselves over each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect 

answers, and then submit their answers to their instructors 

for grading. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








62 


9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM



New 

FOUNDATIONS IN MICROBIOLOGY 

Basic Principles, 6th Edition 

By Kathleen Park Talaro, Pasadena City College 

2008 (September 20060 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330947-7 / MHID: 0-07-330947-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330655-1 / MHID: 0-07-330655-X 

(with ARIS QuickStart Guide) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110230-8 / MHID: 0-07-110230-2 [IE] 

Written with the non-major/allied health student in mind, Foundations 

in Microbiology: Basic Principles offers an engaging and 

accessible writing style through the use of tools such as case 

studies and analogies to thoroughly explain difficult microbiology 

concepts. This version includes chapters 1 through 17 of 

the full Foundations in Microbiology text, teaching only the 

basic principles of microbiology and not covering the clinical 

aspects. 


• The metabolism (8) and immunology chapters have been extensively 

revised. The reorganized and updated immunology chapters include: 

- Chapter 14, now titled “Nonspecific Host Defenses”, only includes 

material on nonspecific immunity. 











FEATURES 

• The full version of this text, Foundations in Microbiology, has additional 

chapters 18-26, which include material on diseases (organized 

by pathogen) and environmenatal and applied microbiology. 

• Excellent learning aids such as bulleted Chapter Overview sections, 

Chapter Checkpoint reviews, footnoted word origins, and pronunciation 

guides help students better comprehend difficult material. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 The Main Themes of Microbiology Chapter 2 The Chemistry 

of Biology Chapter 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying 

Microorganisms Chapter 4 An Introduction to Cells and Procaryotic Cell 

Structure and Function Chapter 5 Eucaryotic Cells and Microorganisms 

Chapter 6 An Introduction to the Viruses Chapter 7 Elements of Microbial 

Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth Chapter 8 Microbial Metabolism: The 

Chemical Crossroads of Life Chapter 9 Microbial Genetics Chapter 10 

Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular Biology Chapter 11 

Physical and Chemical Control of Microbes Chapter 12 Drugs, Microbes, 

Host—The Elements of Chemotherapy Chapter 13 Microbe—Human 

Interactions Chapter 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses Chapter 15 Adaptive, 

Specific Immunity and Immunization Chapter 16 Disorders in Immunity 

Chapter 17 Diagnosing Infections 

- Chapter 15, now titled “Specific Immunity and Immunization”, includes 

material on specific immunity and immunization. 

- The previous edition’s Chapter 16 material on immunization is now 

placed in Chapter 15, and previous material on immune assays can 

now be found in the new Chapter 17 on diagnosing infections. The new 

Chapter 16 is “Disorders in Immunity” (old Chapter 17). 

• Chapter 17, Diagnosing Infections, is brand new to this edition! 

Bringing together in one place the methods used to diagnose infectious 

diseases, the chapter starts with collecting samples from the patient and 

details the biochemical, serological and molecular methods used to 

identify causative microbes. 

• Each chapter now begins with a “Real Case Study in Microbiology”, 

giving students an opportunity to appreciate and understand how microbiology 

impacts their lives on a daily basis. The solutions appear at the 

end of the chapter, after the necessary elements have been presented. 

• Over 200 new and revised illustrations add to the existing art program’s 

display of realistic views of microbiology. 

• The boxed readings in previous have been updated to “Insight Boxes” 

in the 6th edition. These interesting boxed readings found throughout 

each chapter include historical, medical, and cultural spotlights on 

microbiology. Questions at the end of each reading reinforce for students 

the important material they have just read (answers can be found 

on the ARIS website). 

• Concept Questions found at the ends of chapters now include page 

references, allowing students to easily page back and review the information 

they are looking for. 


6th edition! 

- The 50 high-quality animations that were available with the 5th edition 

are even more improved with the 6th edition! With an additional 25 new 

animations available (75 total), students can now quiz themselves over 

each animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, 



New 

MICROBIOLOGY 

A Human Perspective, 5th Edition 

By Eugene W Nester, Denise G Anderson and C Evans Roberts Jr of 

University of Washington, Martha T Nester 

2007 (Nov 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321152-7 / MHID: 0-07-321152-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110781-5 / MHID: 0-07-110781-9 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/nester4 

Appropriate for the non-major/allied health student, this authoritative 

text carefully explains the fundamentals of microbiology, 

providing a general overview of the principles followed by more 

detailed explanations. With its clear and concise writing style, 

Microbiology: A Human Perspective offers modern coverage on 

such topics as genomics, biofilms, and quorum sensing. A body 

systems approach is used in the coverage of diseases. 


• The Digital Content Manager and Text Website now include 75 

animations (25 are brand new to this edition!) for students and instructors 

to view in and out of class. Students can quiz themselves over each 

animation, receive automatic feedback on correct/incorrect answers, 


• Several chapters have been thoroughly revised, restructured, and 

updated to provide students with the most modern coverage available 

in a concise, easy-to-read presentation. Examples include: 

--Chapter 4: Dynamics of Prokaryotic Growth – reorganized to increase 

emphasis on biofilms 

-- Chapter 5: Control of Microbial Growth--reorganized so that the 

methods of physical control are covered adjacent sections; new section 

that describes the use of high pressure to pasteurize foods such as 

guacamole; new section describes the role of water treatment facilities 

in providing pathogen-free drinking water; mentions amended regulations 

that require water treatment facilities to minimize the level of 

disinfection by-products and Cryptosporidium oocysts. 

63 


9/29/2006 12:02:16 PM


-- Chapter 9: Biotechnology and Recombinant DNA--chapter now 

begins with a section that describes the fundamental tools used in 

biotechnology (restriction enzymes, gel electrophoresis, nucleic acid 

probes and primers) 

-- Chapter 17: Applications of Immune Responses – extensive revision 

of the section on immunological testing 

• Over 75 new and revised pieces of art! Knowing that the art 

program is a key element of the learning process, each figure in the text 

was developed as the narrative was written, providing students with a 

concrete, visual reinforcement of the topics discussed throughout the 

text. Colors and symbols are used consistently throughout the text. 

Legends are short, clear, and descriptive. 

• A list of key terms and their definitions has been added at the 

beginning of each chapter to help students understand the terms to 

be covered. 

• Each section now begins with a list of “Focus Points” learning 

objectives, helping students focus on key areas as they proceed through 

each section. 

• Science cartoons have been added throughout various chapters, 

relating microbiology to everyday life. 

Features 

• Expert Approach to Writing. Because of their individual specializations 

and their research and educational backgrounds, the authors 

remain in the hub of the scientific community and can provide accurate 

and modern coverage spanning the breadth of microbiology. More 

importantly, the authors write in a clear and concise manner, striving 

to present material that easily speaks to the students reading it. 

• Excellent Disease Coverage. The chapters on infectious diseases 

are organized by body system and contain exceptional student learning 

tools: 

--Consistent coverage of all diseases including symptoms, pathogenesis, 

epidemiology, prevention and treatment. 

--Case studies are included that relate basic science to actual clinical 

situations; the case studies are accompanied by several questions with 

answers provided. 

--”Disease Summaries” have been designed for each major disease. 

These include 1) a summary table 2) a drawing showing human 

symptoms, portals of entry and exit and location of pathology, and 3) 

a step-by-step description of infection process. These are presented in 

the book for selected diseases and on the web page for all diseases 

discussed in the book. 

• Major sections end with a short “Microcheck” that summarizes 

the major concepts in that section and offers both review questions 

and critical thinking questions (in blue) to assess understanding of the 

preceding section. 

• Applications to Promote Further Interest. Applications throughout 

the text not only help students understand microbiology’s history but 

also how microbiology influences their daily lives and futures. 

--”Glimpse of History” stories about the men and women who pioneered 

the field of microbiology open each chapter. 

--”Perspective” boxes introduce a human perspective by showing how 

microorganisms and their products influence our lives in a myriad of 

different ways. 

Contents 

1 Life and Death of Microorganisms 1 Humans and the Microbial World 

2 The Molecules of Life 3 Microscopy and Cell Structure 4 Dynamics 

of Prokaryotic Growth 5 Control of Microbial Growth 6 Metabolism: 

Fueling Cell Growth 7 The Blueprint of Life, from DNA to Protein 8 

Bacterial Genetics 9 Biotechnology and Recombinant DNA 2 The Microbial 

World 10 Identification and Classification of Prokaryotes 11 The 

Diversity of Prokaryotic Organisms 12 The Eukaryotic Members of the 

Microbial World 13 Viruses of Bacteria 14 Viruses, Prions and Viroids: 

Infectious Agents of Animals and Plants 3 Microorganisms and Humans 

15 The Innate Immune Response 16 The Adaptive Immune Response 

17 Applications of Immune Responses 18 Immunologic Disorders 19 

Host-Microbe Interactions 20 Epidemiology 21 Antimicrobial Medications 

4 Infectious Diseases 22 Skin Infections 23 Wound Infections 

24 Respiratory System Infections 25 Alimentary System Infections 26 

Genitourinary Infections 27 Nervous System Infections 28 Blood and 

Lymphatic Infections 29 HIV Disease and Complications of Immunodeficiency 

5 Applied Microbiology 30 Microbes and the Environment 

31 Applications of Environmental Microbiology: Water and Waste 

Treatment 32 Food Microbiology 


MICROBIOLOGY 

An Organ Systems Approach 

By Marjorie Kelly Cowan, Miami University –Oxford and Kathleen 

Park Talaro, Pasadena City College 

2006 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304838-3 / MHID: 0-07-304838-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111572-8 / MHID: 0-07-111572-2 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cowan1 

Up-to-date and extensively reviewed, Microbiology is written 

with the non-major/allied health student in mind. Offering both 

an engaging writing style through the use of case studies and 

analogies and a vivid art program, the text thoroughly explains 

difficult microbiology concepts in an accessible manner. Utilizing 

an organ systems approach, the unique in-chapter organization 

of the disease/clinical chapters provides students a realistic 

viewpoint of the clinical experiences they will encounter in 

the future. 

CONTENTS 

1 The Main Themes of Microbiology. 2 From Atoms to Cells: A Chemical 

Connection. 3 Tools of the Laboratory: The Methods for Studying 

Microorganisms. 4 Procaryotic Profiles: The Bacteria and Archaea. 5 

Eucaryotic Cells and Microorganisms. 6 An Introduction to the Viruses. 

7 Elements of Microbial Nutrition, Ecology, and Growth. 8 Microbial 

Metabolism: The Chemical Crossroads of Life. 9 Microbial Genetics. 

10 Genetic Engineering: A Revolution in Molecular Biology. 11 Physical 

and Chemical Control of Microbes. 12 Drugs, Microbes, Host--The 

Elements of Chemotherapy. 13 Microbe-Human Interactions: Infection 

and Disease. 14 Nonspecific Host Defenses. 15 Specific Immunity and 

Immunization. 16 Disorders in Immunity. 17 Diagnosing Infections. 18 

Infectious Diseases Affecting the Skin and Eyes. 19 Infectious Diseases 

Affecting the Nervous System. 20 Infectious Diseases Affecting the 

Cardiovascular and Lymphatic Systems. 21 Infectious Diseases Affecting 

the Respiratory System. 22 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Gastrointestinal 

Tract. 23 Infectious Diseases Affecting the Genitourinary System. 

24 Environmental and Applied Microbiology. Appendix A Answers to 

Multiple-Choice Questions and Selected Matching. 

--”Future Challenges” essays conclude each chapter to inform students 

of a pending challenge facing current and future microbiologists. 

64 


9/29/2006 12:02:17 PM



MICROBIOLOGY 

Essentials and Applications, 

2nd Edition 

By Larry McKane, California State Polytechnic and Judy Kandel, 

California State – Fullerton 

1996 / 880 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-045154-4 / MHID: 0-07-045154-0 

(Out of Print) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-117933-1 / MHID: 0-07-117933-X 

[IE with Microbes in Motion II, Mandatory Package] 


- Non Majors Multimedia 

HYPERCLINIC 2 CD-ROM FOR WINDOWS 

2nd Edition 

By Lewis L Tomalty and Gloria J Delisle of Queen’s University 

2001 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232312- 2 / MHID: 0-07-232312-4 

HyperClinic is an interactive multimedia program appropriate 

for undergraduate microbiology students majoring in the health 

sciences or for medical students studying clinical microbiology. 

It is used very differently in the two modes. Allied health students 

are asked to evaluate a realistic case study that includes 

a patient history and description of signs and symptoms and to 

analyze the results of physician-ordered clinical tests to reach a 

diagnosis. Medical students will evaluate a case study scenario 

and then decide which clinical samples should be taken and 

which diagnostic tests run. Immediate feedback and prompts 

help the students evaluate their decisions. Animations and 

movies provide detailed information on how the clinical tests 

are conducted, providing the undergraduate with an excellent 

introduction to a clinical lab and providing a solid review for 

the more experienced student. 

New 


Laboratory 

MICROBIOLOGY LAB MANUAL 

7th Edition 

By John Harley, Eastern Kentucky University 

2008 (March 2007) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299293-9 / MHID: 0-07-299293-X 

Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 7/e has been prepared 

to accompany Prescott, Harley and Klein’s Microbiology, 7e, 

written by new authors Joanne Willey, Linda Sherwood, and 

Christopher Woolverton. Like the text, the laboratory manual 

provides a balanced introduction to laboratory techniques and 

principles that are important in each area of microbiology. 

New 

BENSON’S MICROBIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS 


Complete Version, 10th Edition 

By Alfred E Brown, Auburn University-Auburn 

2007 (April 2006) / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299273-1 / MHID: 0-07-299273-5 

The classic resource for undergraduate microbiology laboratory 

courses just keeps getting better. The self-contained, clearly illustrated 

exercises and full-color format make Microbiological 

Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology the 

ideal lab manual. Appropriate for either a majors or non-majors 

lab course, this manual assumes no prior organic chemistry 

course has been taken. 


• Content has been updated throughout, especially in Part 8: Identification 

of Unknown Bacteria, and in Part 13: Medical Microbiology and 

Immunology, to include the latest research. Also updated was Exercise 

78: A Synthetic Epidemic, in keeping with lab safety requirements. 

Features 

• Benson’s Complete Version (78 experiments) provides the largest 

variety of laboratory exercises to accommodate all laboratory curricula-- 

from a medical emphasis to an environmental emphasis and everything 

between. (A Short Version with 60 experiments is also available.) 

• Full-color examples of lab test results appear in the lab exercises so 

students have an immediate reference against which they can compare 

their results. 

• Because you may prefer or require a different way to stage a lab exercise, 

this lab manual includes suggestions for alternative approaches 

and procedures in the appendixes and in the Instructor’s Manual. 

• The Instructor’s Manual provides a materials list and guidelines for 

conducting all the experiments, as well as answers to the lab exercises. 

It can be found at www.mhhe.com/labcentral 

• Customize this book through Primis Online! This title is part of the 

Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/primis/online. You can customize 

this book to meet your exact needs and mix and match with 

other items on Primis Online--allowing you maximum choice and flexibility. 

Instructors can also choose between two delivery formats: custom 

printed books (in black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). 

Contents 

Part 1 Microscopy Exercise 1 Brightfield Microscopy Exercise 2 Darkfield 

Microscopy Exercise 3 Phase-Contrast Microscopy Exercise 4 

Fluorescence Microscopy Exercise 5 Microscopic Measurements Part 

2 Survey of Microorganisms Exercise 6 Protozoans, Algae, and Cyanobacteria 

Exercise 7 Ubiquity of Bacteria Exercise 8 The Fungi: Yeasts 

and Molds Part 3 Manipulation of Microorganisms Exercise 9 Aseptic 

Technique Exercise 10 Pure Culture Techniques Part 4 Staining and 

Observation of Microorganisms Exercise 11 Smear Preparation Exercise 

12 Simple Staining Exercise 13 Negative Staining Exercise 14 Capsular 

Staining Exercise 15 Gram Staining Exercise 16 Spore Staining: Two 

Methods Exercise 17 Acid-Fast Staining: Ziehl-Neelsen Method Exercise 

18 Motility Determination Part 5 Culture Methods Exercise 19 Culture 

Media Preparation Exercise 20 Preparation of Stock Cultures Exercise 

21 Cultivation of Anaerobes Exercise 22 Enumeration of Bacteria: The 

Standard Plate Count Exercise 23 Slime Mold Culture Exercise 24 Slide 

Culture: Molds Part 6 Bacterial Viruses Exercise 25 Determination of a 

Bacteriophage Titer Exercise 26 Burst Size Determination: A One-Step 

Growth Curve Exercise 27 Isolation of Phage from Flies Exercise 28 

Phage Typing Part 7 Enviornmental Influences and Control of Microbial 

Growth Exercise 29 Temperature: Effects on Growth Exercise 30 Temperature: 

Lethal Effects Exercise 31 pH and Microbial Growth Exercise 

32 Water Activity and Osmotic Pressure Exercise 33 Ultraviolet Light: 

Lethal Effects Exercise 34 Oligodynamic Action Exercise 35 Evaluation 

of Alcohol: Its Effectiveness As an Antiseptic Exercise 36 Antimicrobic 

Sensitivity Testing: The Kirby-Bauer Method Exercise 37 Evaluation of 

65 


9/29/2006 12:02:17 PM


Antiseptics: The Filter Paper Disk Method Exercise 38 Effectiveness of 

Hand Scrubbing Part 8 Identification of Unknown Bacteria Exercise 

39 Morphological Study of Unknown Bacterium Exercise 40 Cultural 

Characteristics Exercise 41 Physiological Characteristics: Oxidation and 

Fermentation Tests Exercise 42 Physiological Characteristics: Hydrolytic 

Reactions Exercise 43 Physiological Characteristics: Biochemical Tests 

Exercise 44 Use of Bergey’s Manual Part 9 Miniaturized Multitest Systems 

Exercise 45 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The API 20E System 

Exercise 46 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The Enterotube II System 

Exercise 47 O/F Gram-Negative Rods Identification: The Oxi/Ferm Tube 

II System Exercise 48 Staphyococcus Identification: The API Staph-Ident 

System Part 10 Diversity and Environmental Microbiology Exercise 

49 Isolation of an Antibiotic Producer: The Actinomyces Exercise 50 

Nitrogen Cycle: Ammonification Exercise 51 Symbiotic Nitrogen Fixation: 

Rhizobium Exercise 52 Free-Living Nitrogen Fixation: Azotobacter 

Exercise 53 Denitrification: Paracoccus Denitrificans Exercise 54 The 

Winogradsky Column Exercise 55 Purple Nonsulfer Photosynthetic 

Bacteria Exercise 56 Sulfate Reducing Bacteria: Desulfovibrio Exercise 

57 Bacterial Commensalism Exercise 58 Bacterial Synergism Exercise 

59 Microbial Antagonism Part 11 Applied Microbiology Exercise 60 

Bacterial Counts of Foods Exercise 61 Bacteriological Examination of 

Water: Qualitative Tests Exercise 62 The Membrane Filter Method Exercise 

63 Reductase Test Exercise 64 Microbial Spoilage of Canned Food 

Exercise 65 Microbiology of Alcohol Fermentation Part 12 Bacterial 

Genetics and Biotechnology Exercise 66 Mutant Isolation by Replica 

Plating Exercise 67 Bacterial Transformation Exercise 68 Polymerase 

Chain Reaction for Amplifying DNA Exercise 69 Plasmid Isolation Part 

13 Medical Microbiology and Immunology Exercise 70 The Staphylococci: 

Isolation and Identification Exercise 71 The Streptococci: Isolation 

and Identification Exercise 72 Gram-Negative Intestinal Pathogens 

Exercise 73 Slide Agglutination Test: Serological Typing Exercise 74 

Slide Agglutination (Latex) Test: For S. aureus Identification Exercise 

75 Tube Agglutination Test: The Heterophile Antibody Test Exercise 

76 White Blood Cell Study: The Differential WBC Count Exercise 77 

Blood Grouping Exercise 78 A Synthetic Epidemic / Appendix A: Tables 

Appendix B: Indicators, Stains, Reagents Appendix C: Media Appendix 

D: Identification Charts Appendix E: The Streptococci: Classification, 

Habitat, Pathology, and Biochemical Characteristics 

New 

BENSON’S MICROBIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS 


Short Version, 10th Edition 

By Alfred E Brown, Auburn University-Auburn 

2007 (April 2006) / 432 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299272-4 / MHID: 0-07-299272-7 

The classic resource for undergraduate microbiology laboratory 

courses just keeps getting better. The self-contained, clearly illustrated 

exercises and four-color format make Microbiological 

Applications: Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology the 

ideal lab manual. Appropriate for either a majors or non-majors 

lab course, this lab manual assumes no prior organic chemistry 

course has been taken. 


• Content has been updated throughout, especially in Part 8: Identification 

of Unknown Bacteria, and in Part 11: Medical Microbiology and 

Immunology, to include the latest research. Also updated was Exercise 

60: A Synthetic Epidemic, in keeping with lab safety requirements. 

Features 

• Benson’s Short Version (60 experiments) provides a large variety of 

laboratory exercises to accommodate all laboratory curricula--from a 

medical emphasis to an environmental emphasis and everything between. 

(A Complete Version with 78 experiments is also available.) 

• Because you may prefer or require a different way to stage a lab exercise, 

this lab manual includes suggestions for alternative approaches 

and procedures in the appendixes and in the Instructor’s Manual. 

• The Instructor’s Manual provides a materials list and guidelines for 

conducting all the experiments, as well as answers to the lab exercises. 

It can be found at www.mhhe.com/labcentral 

• Customize this book through Primis Online! This title will be part 

of the Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/primis/online. You 

can customize this book to meet your exact needs and mix and match 

with other items on Primis Online--allowing you maximum choice and 

flexibility. You can also choose between two delivery formats: custom 

printed books (in black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). 

Contents 

Part 1 Microscopy Exercise 1 Brightfield Microscopy Exercise 2 

Darkfield Microscopy Exercise 3 Phase-Contrast Microscopy Exercise 

4 Microscopic Measurements Part 2 Survey of Microorganisms Exercise 

5 Protozoans, Algae, and Cyanobacteria Exercise 6 Ubiquity of 

Bacteria Exercise 7 The Fungi: Yeasts and Molds Part 3 Manipulation 

of Microorganisms Exercise 8 Aseptic Technique Exercise 9 Pure Culture 

Techniques Part 4 Staining and Observation of Microorganisms 

Exercise 10 Smear Preparation Exercise 11 Simple Staining Exercise 

12 Negative Staining Exercise 13 Capsular Staining Exercise 14 Gram 

Staining Exercise 15 Spore Staining: Two Methods Exercise 16 Acid-Fast 

Staining: Ziehl-Neelsen Method Exercise 17 Motility Determination Part 

5 Culture Methods Exercise 18 Culture Media Preparation Exercise 

19 Cultivation of Anaerobes Exercise 20 Enumeration of Bacteria: The 

Standard Plate Count Exercise 21 Slime Mold Culture Exercise 22 Slide 

Culture: Molds Part 6 Bacterial Viruses Exercise 23 Determination of a 

Bacteriophage Titer Exercise 24 Isolation of Phage from Flies Exercise 25 

Phage Typing Part 7 Enviornmental Influences and Control of Microbial 

Growth Exercise 26 Temperature: Effects on Growth Exercise 27 Temperature: 

Lethal Effects Exercise 28 pH and Microbial Growth Exercise 

29 Water Activity and Osmotic Pressure Exercise 30 Ultraviolet Light: 

Lethal Effects Exercise 31 Oligodynamic Action Exercise 32 Evaluation 

of Alcohol: Its Effectiveness As an Antiseptic Exercise 33 Antimicrobic 

Sensitivity Testing: The Kirby-Bauer Method Exercise 34 Evaluation of 

Antiseptics: The Filter Paper Disk Method Exercise 35 Effectiveness of 

Hand Scrubbing Part 8 Identification of Unknown Bacteria Exercise 

36 Morphological Study of Unknown Bacterium Exercise 37 Cultural 

Characteristics Exercise 38 Physiological Characteristics: Oxidation and 

Fermentation Tests Exercise 39 Physiological Characteristics: Hydrolytic 

Reactions Exercise 40 Physiological Characteristics: Biochemical Tests 

Exercise 41 Use of Bergey’s Manual Part 9 Miniaturized Multitest 

Systems Exercise 42 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The API 20E 

System Exercise 43 Enterobacteriaceae Identification: The Enterotube 

II System Exercise 44 O/F Gram-Negative Rods Identification: The 

Oxi/Ferm Tube II System Exercise 45 Staphyococcus Identification: 

The API Staph-Ident System Part 10 Applied Microbiology Exercise 

46 Bacterial Counts of Foods Exercise 47 Bacteriological Examination 

of Water: Qualitative Tests Exercise 48 The Membrane Filter Method 

Exercise 49 Reductase Test Exercise 50 Microbial Spoilage of Canned 

Food Exercise 51 Microbiology of Alcohol Fermentation Part 11 Medical 

Microbiology and Immunology Exercise 52 The Staphylococci: Isolation 

and Identification Exercise 53 The Streptococci: Isolation and Identification 

Exercise 54 Gram-Negative Intestinal Pathogens Exercise 55 Slide 

Agglutination Test: Serological Typing Exercise 56 Slide Agglutination 

(Latex) Test: For S. aureus Identification Exercise 57 Tube Agglutination 

Test: The Heterophile Antibody Test Exercise 58 White Blood Cell Study: 

The Differential WBC Count Exercise 59 Blood Grouping Exercise 60 

A Synthetic Epidemic / Appendix A: Tables Appendix B: Indicators, 

Stains, Reagents Appendix C: Media Appendix D: Identification Charts 

Appendix E: The Streptococci: Classification, Habitat, Pathology, and 

Biochemical Characteristics 

• Full-color examples of lab test results appear in the lab exercises so 

students have an immediate reference against which they can compare 

their results. 

66 


9/29/2006 12:02:17 PM


New 

microbiology experiments 

A Health Science Perspective, 5th Edition 

By John Kleyn and Mary Bicknell of University of Washington 

2007 (Nov 2005) / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299949-5 / MHID: 0-07-299949-7 

All experiments are correlated to Nester’s Microbiology: A Human 

Perspective, 5/e, but can be used with any non-majors/allied 

health microbiology textbook. 


• Changes made to the 5th edition: 

» The exercise involving the identification of Gram negative organisms 

(Exercise 24) has been expanded . 

» The controls in the transformation experiment (Exercise 16) are 

no longer explained, forcing the student to analyze them more carefully 

. 

» The Ribosomal Data Project directions (Exercise 35) have been 

updated to reflect the changes of the web site (Michigan State online 

analysis--http://rdp.cme.msu.edu). 

» Alternate procedures: Some instructors requested other procedures 

for making plate counts, calculating dilutions, and increased data collecting 

opportunities for graphing. These procedures were included, but 

in such a way that they were optional for an instructor who preferred 

the original methods. 

» The safety of certain organisms was carefully considered and some 

organisms were removed that might pose a potential hazard even though 

there have not been problems in the past. 

» A bibliography of books related to microbiology was added to 

the appendix which should be interesting to students that now have a 

background in microbiology. 

» Questions have been added to the Prep Manual that do not appear 

in the Lab Manual. Answers are also provided in the Prep Manual. 

» The lab manual is correlated to the new edition of Nester’s Microbiology: 

A Human Perspective, 5/e. Nester page references are given 

in each chapter of the manual. 

» The instructor’s manual to the lab can be found online at Lab Central!, 

a password protected site for instructor resources. www.mhhe. 

com/labcentral 

Features 

• Experiments follow the spirit of the ASM guidelines for laboratory 

content. 

• Kleyn features health-oriented experiments covering topics that are 

included in a lecture course for non-majors going into an allied health 

field. The manual also includes: 

• Experiments are basic, easy to follow, inexpensive, and time-efficient, 

and are, therefore, ideal for instructors who have little time, 

expertise, or money. 

Contents 

Part One: Basic Microbiology Introduction to Microbiology 

Exercise: 1 Ubiquity of Microorganisms Exercise: 2 Bright-field Light 

Microscopy, Including History and Working Principles Exercise: 3 Microscopic 

(Bright-field and Dark-field) Determination of Cell Motility, 

Form, and Viability Using Wet Mount and Hanging Drop Preparations 

Introduction to Staining of Microorganisms Exercise: 4 Simple Stains: 

Positive and Negative Stains Exercise: 5 Differential and Special Stains 

Introduction to Microbial Growth Exercise: 6 Pure Culture and Aseptic 

Technique Exercise: 7 Chemically Defined, Complex, Selective 

and Differential Media Exercise: 8 Quantification of Microorganisms 

Introduction to the Environment and Microbial Growth Exercise: 9 

Aerobic and Anaerobic Growth Exercise: 10 The Effect of Incubation 

Temperature on Generation Time Introduction to Control of Microbial 

Growth Exercise: 11 Moist and Dry Heat Sterilization: Thermal Death 

Point and Thermal Death Time Exercise: 12 Control of Microbial Growth 

with Ultraviolet Light Exercise: 13 Osmotic Pressure, and Its Effect on 

Rate and Amount of Microbial Growth Exercise: 14 Antiseptics and 

Antibiotics Introduction to Microbial Genetics Exercise: 15 Selection 

of Bacterial Mutants Resistant to Antibiotics Exercise: 16 Transformation: 

A Form of Genetic Recombination Exercise: 17 Bacterial Conjugation 

Exercise: 18 Gene Regulation: Induction and Catabolite Repression 

Part Two: The Other Microbial World Introduction to the 

Other Microbial World Exercise: 19 Microscopic Identification of Fungi 

Exercise: 20 Parasitology: Protozoa and Helminths Exercise: 21 Titering 

Prokaryotic Viruses Part Three: Microbes and Humans Introduction 

to Medical Microbiology Exercise: 22 Normal Skin Flora Exercise: 

23 Respiratory Microorganisms Exercise: 24 Identification of Enteric 

Gram-Negative Rods Exercise: 25 Clinical Unknown Identification 

Part Four: Immunology Introduction to Some Immunological 

Principles and Techniques Exercise: 26 Differential White Blood Cell 

Stains Exercise: 27 Lysozyme, an Enzymatic Form of Natural Resistance 

Exercise: 28 Lancefield Grouping of Pathogenic Streptococci with a 

Latex Slide Agglutination Test Exercise: 29 Use of an Enzyme-Linked 

Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA) Test for Coccidioides immitis Identification 

Exercise: 30 An Ouchterlony Double Immunodiffusion Test for 

Coccidioides immitis Identification Part Five: Public Health Introduction 

to the Prevention and Control of Communicable Diseases 

Exercise: 31 Epidemiology: A Staphylococcus Carrier Study Exercise: 32 

Bacteriological Examination of Water: Multiple-Tube Fermentation and 

Membrane Filter Techniques Part Six: Applications of Biotechnology 

Introduction to Biotechnology Exercise: 33 Identifying DNA 

with Restriction Enzymes Exercise: 34 Identification of Bacteria Using 

the Ribosomal Data Project Part Seven: Projects Introduction to 

the Individual Projects Exercise: 35 Hydrocarbon-Degrading Bacteria, 

Cleaning Up After Oil Spills Exercise: 36 Luminescent Bacteria: Bacteria 

That Produce Light Exercise: 37 Methylotrophs, Organisms That Grow 

on One-Carbon Compounds Exercise: 38 Deinococcus, Bacteria with 

Out-Of-This-World Capabilities Appendices 1. Living Microorganisms 

(Bacteria, Fungi, Protozoa, and Helminths) Chosen for Study in this 

Manual 2. Dilution Practice Problems 3. Metric System, Use of with 

Conversions to the English System of Measurement 4. Alternative Procedures 

5. Use of the Ocular Micrometer for Measurement of Relative 

and Absolute Cell Size 6. Use of the Hemocytometer for Determining 

Total Cell Number in a Liquid Suspension 7. Preparation of Covered 

Slide Cultures for Study of Intact Structure of a Mold Thallus 8. Additional 

Reading 

--Two experiments in which students apply some of the techniques used 

in biotechnology to identify DNA. 

--Four individual projects provide flexibility in teaching and also expand 

the breadth of the manual beyond health-related topics and into the 

diversity of nonpathogenic microorganisms. Students will isolate and 

culture bacteria that degrade oil spills, that glow in the dark, that consume 

1-carbon compounds, and that are resistant to UV light. 

--Seven appendices provide basic technique and practice problems in 

using the metric system, making pH adjustments measuring cell size, 

counting cells, and preparing slide cultures. 

67 


9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM


LABORATORY MANUAL AND WORKBOOK IN 

MICROBIOLOGY 

8th Edition 

By Josephine A. Morello, University of Chicago, Paul A. Granato, 

SUNY Health Science Center, Helen Eckel Mizer, Western Connecticut 

State University 

2006 (Jan 2005) / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282718-7 / MHID: 0-07-282718-1 

This laboratory manual and workbook, now in its Eighth Edition, 

maintains its original emphasis on the basic principles of 

diagnostic microbiology for students preparing to enter the allied 

health professions. It remains oriented primarily toward meeting 

the interests and needs of those who will be directly involved in 

patient care and who wish to learn how microbiological principles 

should be applied in the practice of their professions. 

CONTENTS 

1 Basic Techniques of Microbiology 1 Orientation to the 

Microbiology Laboratory 1 The Microscope 2 Handling and Examining 

Cultures 2 Microsopic Morphology of Microorganisms 3 Hanging-Drop 

and Wet-Mount Preparations 4 Simple Stains 3 Differential Stains 5 Gram 

Stain 6 Acid-Fast Stain 7 Special Stains 4 Cultivation of Mircroorganisms 

8 Culture Media 9 Streaking Technique to Obtain Pure Cultures 10 Pour- 

Plate and Subculture Techniques 11 Culturing Microorganisms from 

the Environment 2 Destruction of Microorganisms 5 Physical 

Antimicrobial Agents 12 Moist and Dry Heat 13 The Autoclave 6 

Chemical Antimicrobial Agents 14 Disinfectants 15 Antimicrobial Agent 

Susceptibility Testing and Resistance 3 Diagnostic Microbiology 

in Action 7 Principles of Diagnostic Microbiology: Culture of Clinical 

Specimens, Identifying Isolated Microorganisms, Antigen Detection and 

Nucleic Acid Assays 16 Primary Media for Isolation of Microorganisms 

17 Some Metabolic Activities of Bacteria 18 Activities of Bacterial 

Enzymes 19 Principles of Antigen Detection and Nucleic Acid Assays 

for Detection and Identification of Microorganisms 8 Microbiology of 

the Respiratory Tract 20 Staphylococci 21 Streptococci, Pneumococci, 

and Enterococci 22 Haemophilus, Corynebacteria, and Bordetella 

23 Clinical Specimens from the Respiratory Tract 9 Microbiology of 

the Intestinal Tract 24 The Enterobacteriaceae 25 Clinical Specimens 

from the Intestinal Tract 10 Microbiology of the Urinary and Genital 

tracts 26 Urine Culture Techniques 27 Neisseria and Spirochetes 11 

Microbial Pathogens Requiring Special Laboratory Techniques; Serological 

Identification of Patients’ Antibodies 28 Anaerobic Bacteria 29 

Mycobacteria 30 Mycoplasmas, Rickettsiae, Chlamydiae, Viruses, and 

Prions 31 Fungi: Yeasts and Molds 32 Protozoa and Animal Parasites 33 

Serological Identification of Patients’ Antibodies 4 Applied (Sanitary) 

Microbiology 34 Bacteriologic Analysis of Water 35 Bacteriologic 

Analysis of Milk 

Media Preparation and Sterilization 14 Culture Transfer Instruments, 

Techniques, and Isolation of Pure Cultures and Their Maintenance 15 

Spread-Plate Technique 16 Streak-Plate Technique and Differential 

Media 17 Pour-Plate Technique 18 Cultivation of Anaerobic Bacteria 

19 Determination of Bacterial Numbers 4 Biochemical Activities of 

Bacteria 20 Carbohydrates I: Fermentation and beta-Galactosidase 

Activity 21 Carbohydrates II: Triple Sugar Iron Tests 22 Carbohydrates 

III: Starch Hydrolysis 23 Lipids: Lipid Hydrolysis 24 Proteins, Amino 

Acids, and Enzymes I: Hydrogen Sulfide Production and Motility 25 

Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes II: The IMViC Tests 26 Proteins, 

Amino Acids, and Enzymes III: Casein Hydrolysis 27 Proteins, Amino 

Acids, and Enzymes IV: Gelatin Hydrolysis 28 Proteins, Amino Acids, 

and Enzymes V: Catalase Activity 29 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes 

VI: Coagulase and DNA Activity 30 Proteins, Amino Acids, and 

Enzymes VII: Oxidase Test 31 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes VIII: 

Urease Activity 32 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes IX: Lysine and 

Ornithine Decarboxylase Test 33 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes 

X: Phenylalanine Deamination 34 Proteins, Amino Acids, and Enzymes 

XI: Nitrate Reduction 5 Rapid Multitest Systems 35 The API 20E System 

36 The Enterotube II System 6 Unknown Identification 37 Using the 

First Edition of Bergey’s Manual of Systematic Bacteriology to Identify 

Bacteria 38 General Unknown 7 Environmental Factors Affecting 

Growth of Microorganisms 39 Temperature 40 pH 41 Osmotic Pressure 

42 The Effects of Chemical Agents on Bacteria I: Disinfectants 43 

The Effects of Chemical Agents on Bacteria II: Antimicrobial Agents 

(Kirby-Bauer Method) 44 Hand Washing, Environmental Sampling, 

and Microbiological Monitoring 45 Determination of a Bacterial 

Growth Curve: Classical and Two-Hour Methods 8 Environmental 

and Food Microbiology 46 Standard Coliform Most Probably Number 

(MPN)Test and Presence-Absence Coliform Test 47 Membrane Filter 

Technique for Coliform and Fecal Streptococci; KONFIRM Test for 

Fecal Coliforms 48 Isolation of Escherichia coli Bacteriophages from 

Sewage and Determining Bacteriophage Titers 49 Enumeration of Soil 

Microorganisms 50 Bacterial Count of a Food Product 51 Examination 

of Milk for Bacteria 9 Medical Microbiology 52 Agglutination 

Reactions: Blood Groups 53 Isolation of Normal Microbiota from the 

Human Body 54 Staphylococci 55 Pneumococci 56 Streptococci 57 

Neisseriae 58 Aerobic and Anaerobic Endospore-Forming Bacteria 10 

Survey of Selected Eucaryotic Microorganisms 59 Fungi I: Yeasts 60 

Fungi II: Phycomycetes, Ascomycetes, and Basidiomycetes 11 Microbial 

Genetics and Genomics 61 Bacterial Mutation 62 Bacterial Transformation 

63 Bacterial Conjugation: The Transfer of Antibiotic-Resistant 

Plasmids 64 Isolation of Genomic DNA from Saccharomyces cerevisiae 

65 Isolation and Purification of Genomic DNA from Escherichia coli 

66 Identifying Archaea and Bacteria Using the Internet and Computer- 

Assisted Gene Analysis / Appendix A Dilutions with Sample Problems 

Appendix B Metric and English Measurement Equivalents Appendix C 

Transmission-Absorbance Table for Spectrophotometry Appendix D 

Logarithms Appendix E pH and pH Indicators Appendix F Scientific 

Notation Appendix G Identification Charts Appendix H Reagents, Solutions, 

Stains, and Tests Appendix I Culture Media Appendix J Sources 

and Maintenance of Microbiological Stock Cultures 

LABORATORY EXERCISES IN MICROBIOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By John Harley, Eastern Kentucky University 

2005 (Feb 2004) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255680-3 / MHID: 0-07-255680-3 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/prescott6 

Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 6/e has been prepared to 

accompany Prescott et al’s Microbiology, 6/e. Like the text, the 

laboratory manual provides a balanced introduction to laboratory 

techniques and principles that are important in each area 

of microbiology. 

CONTENTS 

1 Microscopic Techniques 1 Bright-Field Light Microscope, the Hanging 

Drop Slide, and Bacterial Motility 2 Dark-Field Light Microscope 3 

Phase-Contrast Light Microscope 4 Fluorescence Microscope 5 Microscopic 

Measurement of Microorganisms 2 Bacterial Morphology and 

Staining 6 Negative Staining 7 Smear Preparation and Simple Staining 8 

Gram Stain 9 Acid-Fast Staining (Ziehl-Neelsen and Kinyoun) Procedures 

10 Endospore Staining (Schaeffer-Fulton or Wirtz-Conklin) 11 Capsule 

Staining 12 Flagella Staining: West and Difco’s SpotTest Methods 3 

Basic Laboratory and Culture Techniques 13 Microbiological Culture 


LABORATORY EXERCISES IN ORGANISMAL AND 

MOLECULAR MICROBIOLOGY 

By Steve K. Alexander, University of Mary Hardin Baylor, Dennis 

Strete, McLennan Community College and Mary Jane Niles, University 

of San Francisco 

2004 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248744-2 / MHID: 0-07-248744-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115124-5 / MHID: 0-07-115124-9 [IE] 

A modern general microbiology laboratory manual that combines 

the procedural details of a laboratory manual with the 

photographic support of a laboratory atlas. The 46 class-tested 

laboratory experiments are divided into 9 specialty areas, and 

the extensive four-color illustration program includes 220 photos 

and micrographs plus 150 line drawings. 

68 


9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM


CONTENTS 

Laboratory Safety in the Microbiology Laboratory. Section I Survey of 

Microscopic Organisms Part A The Microscope: 1 Structure, Function, 

and Use of the Microscope 2 Microscopic Comparisons of Microorganisms, 

Parasites, and Small Invertebrates / Part B Microorganisms: 

3 Microbial Prokaryotes: Bacteria and Cyanobacteria 4 Microbial 

Eucaryotes: Fungi 5 Microbial Eucaryotes : Protozoa and Algae / Part 

C Multicellulart Parasites: 6 Flatworms and Roundworms / Part D Microscopic 

Invertebrates: 7 Zooplankton 8 Disease Vectors Section II 

Staining Techniques Part A Morphological Stains: 9 Negative Staining 

10 Smear Preparation and the Simple Stain / Part B Differential Stains: 

11 Gram Stain 12 Acid-fast Stain / Part C Structural Stains: 13 Spore 

Stain 14 Capsule and Flagella Stain / Part D Application: 15 The Staining 

Characterization of a Bacterial Unknown Section III Bacterial Cultivation 

Part A Aseptic Technique: 16 Bacteria and Fungi in the Laboratory 

Environment: The Necessity of Aseptic Technique / Part B The Culture 

of Bacteria: 17 The Preparation and Inoculation of Growth Media 18 

Culture Characterization Using Agar and Broth Media Section IV Bacterial 

Identification 19 Biochemical Tests Used to Identify Bacteria / 20 

Application: The Identification of a Non-clinical Bacterial Unknown 

Section V Medical Microbiology Part A Bacteria of the Human Body: 

21 Isolation and Identification of Staphylococci from the Skin 22 Isolation 

and Identification of Streptococci from the Throat 23A Identification 

of Enteric Bacteria Including the Intestinal pathogens Salmonella 

and Shigella 23B Enterotubes, a Rapid Test System to Identify Enteric 

Bacteria 24 Isolation and Identification of a Bacteria from the Urinary 

Tract / Part B Treatment of Bacterial Infections: 25 Assessing Antibiotic 

Effectiveness: The Kirby-Bauer Method / Part C Application: 26 The 

Identification of a Clinical Bacterial Unknown Section VI Controlling 

the Risk and Spread of Bacterial Infections Part A Food Handling: 27 

Killing Bacteria Using High Temperatures / Part B Disinfecting Skin and 

Countertops: 28 Skin Disinfection: Evaluating Antiseptics and Hand 

Sanitizers 29 Cleaning Countertops with Disinfectants / Part C Testing 

Drinking Water Safety: 30 Bacteriological Examination of Drinking 

Water Using the MPN Method Section VII Bacterial Genetics Part A 

Bacterial Genomic DNA: 31 Bacterial DNA Fingerprinting 32 Mutagenesis 

in Bacteria: The Ames Test / Part B Plasmid DNA: 33 Plasmid 

Isolation and Restriction Mapping / Part C The Transfer of Drug Resistance: 

34 Transformation / 35 Conjugation Section VIII Viruses Part 

A The Nature and Characterization of Viruses: 36 Structural Analysis 

of an Insect Virus, NPV / Part B Virus Propagation: 37 Detection and 

Quantification of Viruses of Bacteria 38 The Virus Infection Cycle 39 

Virus Infection in Plants Section IX Hematology and Serology Part A 

Hematology: 40 Identification and Enumeration of White Blood Cells 

/ Part B Serology: 41 Antigen-Antibody Reactions and Determination 

of Antibody Titer / Part C Serological Techniques: 42 Agglutination 

Reactions: ABO Blood Typing 43 Immunodiffusion: Antigen-Antibody 

Reactions in Gels 44 ELISA (Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay) 45 

Bacterial Protein Fingerprinting and Western Blotting 46 Neutralization 

of Viruses by Antibodies 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








Microbiology Printed 

- Supplements 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MICROBIOLOGY 

By Edward Alcamo, SUNY-Farmingdale 

1998 / 409 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-000967-7 / MHID: 0-07-000967-8 


CONTENTS 

Introduction to Microbiology. / The Chemical Basis of Microbiology. / 

Microbial Size and Microscopy. / Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes. / Microbial 

Growth and Cultivation. / Metabolism of Microorganisms. / DNA 

and Gene Expression. / Microbial Genetics. / Control of Microorganisms. 

/ The Major Groups of Bacteria. / The Fungi. / The Protozoa. / 

The Unicellular Algae. / The Viruses. / The Host-Parasite Relationship. 

/ Host Resistance and the Immune System. / Immune Tests and Disorders. 

/ Microbial Diseases of the Skin and Eyes. / Microbial Diseases of 

the Nervous System. / Microbial Diseases of the Respiratory System. 

/ Microbial Diseases of the Digestive System. / Microbial Diseases of 

the Blood and Viscera. / Microbial Diseases of the Urogenital System. 

/ Food and Industrial Microbiology. / Environmental Microbiology. 

Biotechnology 

BIOTECHNOLOGY DEMYSTIFIED 

By Sharon Walker 

2007 (Sept 2006) / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144812-3 / MHID: 0-07-144812-8 


This self-teaching guide explains the basic concepts and fundamentals 

in all the major subtopics of biotechnology. The content 

advances logically from the basics of molecular and cellular 

biology to more complex topics such as DNA, reproductive 

cloning, experimental procedures, infectious diseases, immunology, 

the Human Genome Project, new drug discoveries, 

and genetic disorders. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Fundamental Topics in Molecular and Cellular Biology Chapter 

1: The Molecules of Life: The stuff you are made of Chapter 2: The 

Cellular Basis of Life: What cells look like and what they do Chapter 3: 

Information Flow within the Cell: Going from gene to protein Chapter 

4: DNA Replication and Cell Division: How life continues Chapter 

5: Regulation of gene expression: cells don’t express every gene they 

have Chapter 6: Signal Transduction: How cells interact with what is 

outside Part 2: Essential Experimental Techniques in Biotechnology 

Chapter 7: Genetic Engineering: How you do something with DNA 

Chapter 8: Assays for Gene Function: I made this DNA, now what Part 

3: Advanced Topics in Biotechnology Chapter 9: Cancer and the Cell 

Cycle: When good cells go bad Chapter 10: Infectious Disease: Bacteria 

and viruses and prions, oh my! Chapter 11: Immunology: How the 

body protects itself from invasion Chapter 12: Genetic Disease: When 

good genes go bad Part 4: Applications of Biotechnology Chapter 13: 

The Human Genome Project: What it is and what it’s used for Chapter 

14: Reproductive Cloning: Understanding the controversy Chapter 

15: Genetically Modified (GM) Crops: The new way to make a better 

tomato Chapter 16: Drug Discovery: The accelerated pace of finding 

new drugs Chapter 17: Future Prospects for Biotechnology: Is it bright 

or a lack of foresight 

69 


9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM



BIOTECHNOLOGY 

DNA to Protein: A Laboratory Project in Molecular 


By Teressa Thiel and Shirley Bissen of University of Missouri-St Louis 

and Eilene Lyons, St. Louis Community College at Florissant Valley 

2002 /192 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-241664-0 / MHID: 0-07-241664-5 (Out of Print) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112279-5 / MHID: 0-07-112279-6 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/thiel 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Examine Enzyme Activity of alpha-Amylase 1 Starch Plate Assay 

2 Quantitative Enzyme Assay 3 Factors Affecting Enzyme Function Part 

2: Examine alpha-Amylase Proteins 4 Analysis of Protein Structure 

Using RasMol 5 Analysis of alpha-Amylase Proteins Part 3: Examine 

DNA Structure 6 Analysis of DNA Structure Using RasMol 7 Isolation 

of Chromosomal DNA from Bacillus licheniformis Part 4 Find the 

alpha-Amylase Gene 8 PCR Amplification and Labeling of Probe DNA 

9 Southern Hybridization Part 5 Clone the alpha-Amylase Gene 10 

Cloning the alpha-Amylase Gene Part 6 Analyze alpha-Amylase Clones 

11 Verification and Mapping of alpha-Amylase Clones 12 Enzyme 

Activity of alpha-Amylase Clones 

New 

STDs / AIDS 

* An explanation of why HIV/AIDS is a unique and exceptional disease 

among all other diseases. 

* What the impact of a global HIV vaccine will be if one becomes 

available. 

• A variety of boxed essays provide supplemental information on 

chapter topics and illustrate important events and information about 

HIV/AIDS. 

• Discussion Questions encourage students to think critically about 

difficult and controversial issues associated with HIV and provide a 

starting point for lively class discussions. 

• Each chapter begins with a Chapter Concepts section that allows 

students to preview the material and stay focused on key topics. Chapter 

Summary and Review Questions provide students with a quick review 

of the key concepts of the chapter and help students test their understanding 

of the chapter’s material. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 – AIDS, Defining the Disease and Finding Its Cause Chapter 

2 – What Causes AIDS: Origin of the AIDS Virus Chapter 3 – Biological 

Characteristics of the AIDS Virus Chapter 4 – Anti-HIV Therapy Chapter 

5 – The Immunology of HIV Disease/AIDS Chapter 6 – Opportunistic 

Infections and Cancers Associated with HIV Disease/AIDS Chapter 7 

– A Profile of Biological Indicators for HIV Disease and Progression to 

AIDS Chapter 8 – Epidemiology and Transmission of the Human Immunodeficiency 

Virus Chapter 9 – Preventing the Transmission of HIV 

Chapter 10 – Prevalence of HIV Infections, AIDS Cases, and Deaths 

Among Select Groups in the United States and AIDS in Other Countries 

Chapter 11 – Prevalence of HIV Infection and AIDS Cases Among 

Women and Children in the United States Chapter 12 – Prevalence of 

HIV Infection and AIDS Among Young Adults, Ages 13 to 24 Chapter 

13 – Testing for Human Immunodeficiency Virus Chapter 14 – AIDS 

and Society: Knowledge, Attitudes, and Behavior 

AIDS UPDATE 2007 

By Gerald J Stine, University of North Florida 

2008 (January 2007) / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340234-5 / MHID: 0-07-340234-6 

AIDS Update 2007 presents a balanced review of current research 

and information on HIV infection, HIV disease, and AIDS. 

AIDS Update 2007 places this discussion within a biological, 

medical, social, economic and legal framework, helping readers 

to more fully understand this modern-day pandemic. 

FEATURES 

• The new edition now has 14 chapters. Chapter 11 deals only with 

women and children. A new Chapter 12 deals with HIV/AIDS among 

young adults, ages 13 to 24. 

• Almost half of the photographs, figures and line drawings are new 

to this edition. 

• AIDS Update 2007 has been updated with the most current data and 

emerging studies and research involving this devastating disease. 

FEATURES 

• Further Information sources, including Internet addresses and national 

hotline numbers, give students additional resources to contact. A list of 

References also allows students to see the sources of all scientific and 

social data within the book involving this devastating disease, including 

the following information: 

* Estimated data and information out to years 2035 and 2060 are 

provided. 










* New information on the first 25 years of HIV/AIDS. 

70 


9/29/2006 12:02:18 PM

2007-2008 NEW Chemistry Titles 

Chemistry ~ Contents 

Allied Health/Nursing Chemistry (General, Organic 


- Lab Manuals.............................................................. 76 

- Supplements ............................................................ 77 

- Textbooks................................................................. 75 

Analytical Chemistry....................................................... 85 


- Textbooks................................................................. 81 


- Lab............................................................................ 80 

- Multimedia............................................................... 81 

- Supplements............................................................. 80 

- Textbooks................................................................. 77 

Kinetics and Reaction Mechanics.................................... 86 

Liberal Arts Chemistry (Non Science Majors) 

- Textbooks................................................................. 72 


- Textbooks................................................................. 82 


- Lab Manual............................................................... 84 

- Supplements............................................................. 84 

- Textbooks................................................................. 83 

Physics Chemistry 

- Lab............................................................................ 85 

- Supplements............................................................. 85 

- Textbooks................................................................. 85 


- Supplements............................................................ 74 

- Textbooks............................................................... 73 


• BAUER 

Conceptual Introduction Chemistry.........................73 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322106-9 / MHID: 0-07-322106-6 

• CHANG 

Chemistry, 9e...........................................................77 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322103-8 / MHID: 0-07-322103-1 

• DENNISTON 

General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e...................75 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322107-6 / MHID: 0-07-322107-4 

• GOLDBERG 

Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e................................73 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322104-5 / MHID: 0-07-322104-X 

• HENDRICKSON 


General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e......................76 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282848-1 / MHID: 0-07-282848-X 

• SILBERBERG 

Principles of General Chemistry..............................78 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322105-2 / MHID: 0-07-322105-8 


• CAREY 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331184-5 / MHID: 0-07-331184-7 

• CHANG 

General Chemistry, 5e.............................................77 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331185-2 / MHID: 0-07-331185-5 

• DENNISTON 

Foundations of General, Organic and 

Biochemistry............................................................75 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331183-8 / MHID: 0-07-331183-9 

• SMITH 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304986-1 / MHID: 0-07-304986-7 

71 

HED 2007 Chemistry.indd 71 

9/29/2006 1:14:14 PM

Chemistry 

Liberal Arts Chemistry 

(Non Science Majors) 


Textbooks 

CHEMISTRY IN CONTEXT 

Applying Chemistry to Society, 5th Edition 

By American Chemical Society 

2006 (Feb 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310159-0 / MHID: 0-07-310159-1 

(with OLC Password Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111535-3 / MHID: 0-07-111535-8 

[IE with OLC] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cic 

Following in the tradition of the first four editions, the goal of this 

market leading textbook, Chemistry in Context, fifth edition, is 

to establish chemical principles on a need-to-know basis within 

a contextual framework of significant social, political, economic 

and ethical issues. The non traditional approach of Chemistry in 

Context reflect today’s technological issues and the chemistry 

principles imbedded within them. Global warming, alternate 

fuels, nutrition, and genetic engineering are examples of issues 

that are covered in CIC. 

CONTENTS 

The Air We Breathe / Protecting the Ozone Layer / The Chemistry of 

Global Warming / Energy, Chemistry, and Society / The Water We Drink 

/ Neutralizing the Threat of Acid Rain / The Fires of Nuclear Fission / 

Energy from Electron Transfer / The World of Plastics and Polymers / Manipulating 

Molecules and Designing Drugs / Nutrition: Food for Thought 

/ Genetic Engineering and the Chemistry of Heredity / Measure for 

Measure: Conversion Factors and Constants / The Power of Exponents 

/ Clearing the Logjam / Answers to Your Turn Questions Not Answered 

in the Text / Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Questions 


CHEMISTRY IN CONTEXT 

Applying Chemistry to Society 

5th Edition 

By American Chemical Society 

2006 (Feb 2005) / 224 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282836-8 / MHID: 0-07-282836-6 

The 5th edition Laboratory Manual that accompanies Chemistry 

in Context is compiled and edited by Gail Steehler (Roanoke 

College). The experiments use microscale equipment (wellplates 

and Beral-type pipets) as well as common materials. Projecttype 

and cooperative/collaborative laboratory experiments are 

included. Additional experiments are available on the Online 

Learning Center, as is the instructor’s guide. 

Contents 

Preface to Instructions / To the Student / Essay: The Wonder of Chemistry 

Experiments / Some Notes About Laboratory Safety / 1 Preparation and 

Properties of Gases in a Breath 2 Chromatographic Study of Felt-Tip 

Pen Inks 3 Weighing Air and Cooling Water: A Graphic Experience 4 

Solids in Cigarette Smoke 5 What Protects Use from Ultraviolet Light 

6 Visibly Delighted: A Spectrophotometric Study of Colored Solutions 

7 Chemical Bonds, Molecular Models, and Molecular Shapes 8 Weighing 

Gases To Find Molar Masses 9 Chemical Moles: Converting Baking 

Soda to Table Salt 10 Hot Stuff: An Energy Conservation Problem 11 

Comparison of the Energy Content of Fuels 12 Building a Conductivity 

Detector and Testing for Ions 13 Analysis of Vinegar 14 Measurement of 

Water Hardness 15 Measurement of Chloride in River Water 16 Analysis 

of Bottled Water 17 Reactions of Acids with Common Substances 18 

pH Measurements of Common Substances 19 What Is the pH of Rain 

20 Solubilities: An Investigation 21 Measurement of Radon in Air 22 

Chemical Reactions and Electricity 23 Polymer Synthesis and Properties 

24 Classification and Identification of Common Plastics 25 Identification 

of Analgesic Drugs by Thin-Layer Chromatography 26 Synthesis 

of Aspirin 27 How Much Fat Is in Potato Chips and Hot Dogs 28 How 

Much Sugar Is in Soft Drinks and Fruit Juices 29 Vitamin C in Fruit 

Juice and in a Vitamin Tablet 30 Isolation of DNA (Deoxyribonucleic 

Acid) / Performance-Based Assessment Activities 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING CHEMISTRY 

3rd Edition 

By David Goldberg, University of Illinois – Urbana – Champaign 

2005 (Dec 2004) / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144780-5 / MHID: 0-07-144780-6 


This clear and complete guide to the fundamentals of chemistry 

features course material in a succinct outline form, together 

with hundreds of detailed, fully solved problems. A perfect 

companion to most standard texts, this third edition has been 

updated to include the latest pedagogic approaches; more than 

670 fully worked problems of varying difficulty, designed to 

lead you safely through the pitfalls of the course; and hundreds 

more practice problems. 


CHEMISTRY 

A World of Choices, 2nd Edition 

By Paul B. Kelter, University of North Carolina—Greensboro, James 

D. Carr, University of Nebraska—Lincoln and Andrew Scott 

2003 / 672 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293040-5 / MHID: 0-07-293040-3 

(with OLC Bind-In Card) - Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119938-4 / MHID: 0-07-119938-1 

[IE with OLC Bind-In Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kelter2 

CONTENTS 

Prelude / 1 Origins / 2 Connections / 3 Bonding / 4 Recycling and 

Chemical Mathematics / 5 The Role of Energy in Chemical Reactions 

/ 6 Creating with Carbon—The Importance of Molecular Structure / 7 

Properties of Water / 8 Acids and Bases / 9 Acid Rain / 10 Water Quality: 

Chemical Concerns, Chemical Solutions / 11 Behavior of Gases / 

12 Air Quality: The Choices That Have Let Us Breathe More Easily / 

13 The Earth As a Resource / 14 The Power of the Nucleus / 15 Solar 

Power: The Chemical Energy Alternative / 16 The Chemistry of Life / 

17 The Chemistry of Food / 18 Chemistry at Home 










72 


9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM

Chemistry 

HOW TO SOLVE WORD PROBLEMS IN CHEMISTRY 

By David E. Goldberg, Brooklyn College 

2001 / 231 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136302-0 / MHID: 0-07-136302-5 


Website: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/cgi-bin/getbook.plisbn=007136 

3025&adkey=W02003 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 2: Measurement. Chapter 3: Classical 

Laws of Chemical Combination. Chapter 4: Formula Calculations. Chapter 

5: Stoichiometry. Chapter 6: Concentration Calculations. Chapter 7: 

Gas Laws. Chapter 8: Thermochemistry. Chapter 9: Electrochemistry. 

Chapter 10: Equilibrium. Chapter 11: Colligative Properties. Chapter 

12: Thermodynamics. Chapter 13: Miscellaneous Problems. List of 

Important Equations. 

3,000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN CHEMISTRY 


1988 / 624 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-023684-4 / MHID: 0-07-023684-4 



6844&adkey=W02003 

This powerful problem-solver gives you 3,000 problems in 

chemistry, fully solved step-by-step! From Schaum’s, the originator 

of the solved-problem guide, and students’ favorite with 

over 30 million study guides sold his timesaver helps you master 

every type of general chemistry problem that you will face in 

your homework and on your tests, from basic units to coordination 

compounds. Work the problems yourself, then check the 

answers, or go directly to the answers you need with a complete 

index. Compatible with any classroom text, Schaum’s 3000 

Solved Problems in Chemistry is so complete it’s the perfect 

tool for graduate or professional exam review! 


Textbooks 


New 

CONCEPTUAL INTRODUCTION CHEMISTRY 

By Rich Bauer, James Birk and Pamela S Marks of Arizona State 

University-Tempe 

2007 (Jan 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322106-9 / MHID: 0-07-322106-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110794-5 / MHID: 0-07-110794-0 [IE] 

Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072857684 

A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry by Bauer/Birk/Marks 

offers today’s student a fresh perspective to the introduction of 

chemistry. This new textbook offers a conceptual approach to 

chemistry by starting first with macroscopic phenomena, and 

then presenting the underlying microscopic detail. Each chapter 

opens with a real-life scenario that helps students connect 

abstract chemical concepts to their own lives. The math found 

in A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry is introduced on a 

need-to-know basis, with “Math Toolboxes” ending each chapter, 

in support of the math skills required in that chapter. 

Features 

• Vivid, micro to macro art. 

• Introduction of math where applicable, on a need-to-know basis. 

This book is not a baby general chemistry textbook. 

• All chapters begin with a scenario involving students in real-life 

situations. 

• This textbook will take a conceptual approach, teaching the chemistry 

first and the mathematics later. 

Contents 

Chapter 1 Matter and Energy Chapter 2 Atoms, Ions, and the Periodic 

Table Chapter 3 Chemical Compounds Chapter 4 Chemical Composition 

Chapter 5 Chemical Reactions and Equations Chapter 6 Quantities 

in Chemical Reactions Chapter 7 Electron Structure of the Atom Chapter 

8 Chemical Bonding Chapter 9 The Gaseous State Chapter 10 The Liquid 

and Solid States Chapter 11 Solutions Chapter 12 Reaction Rates and 

Chemical Equilibrium Chapter 13 Acids and Bases Chapter 14 Oxidation-Reduction 

Reactions Chapter 15 Nuclear Chemistry Chapter 16 

Organic Chemistry Appendix A Useful Reference Information Appendix 

B Toolboxes Appendix C Answers to Practice Problems Appendix D 

Answers to Selected Questions and Problems Glossary Index 


New 

FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY 

5th Edition 

By David Goldberg, Brooklyn College 

2007 (May 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322104-5 / MHID: 0-07-322104-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326769-2 / MHID: 0-07-326769-4 

(with ARIS Instructor Access Kit) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110842-3 / MHID: 0-07-110842-4 

[IE with ARIS Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/goldberg 

Designed for the one-semester preparatory chemistry course, 

the new, fifth edition of Fundamentals of Chemistry provides 

students with a solid foundation in problem solving for all the 

topic areas covered in a standard general chemistry course. The 

author not only provides a clear consistent methodology to help 

students develop conceptual and quantitative problem-solving 

skills, but also engages students by using analogies that relate 

chemistry to everyday life. Students who need help with mathematical 

manipulations, as well as reading and writing scientific 

material, will find Goldberg’s text an excellent learning tool. 


• NEW CHAPTER 17: ELECTROCHEMISTRY provides students with 

more detailed coverage of this topic so they are well-prepared for 

future courses. 

FEATURES 

• Proven methodology to teaching chemistry: 

- Use of real world problems (use of analogies and conceptual problems) 

engages students in the topic of study. 

- Dimensional analysis is integrated as a key element for helping students 

to translate word problems into algebraic expressions. 

- Various problem-solving methods are introduced (in-chapter; self-tutorial; 

end-of-chapter problems by topic; end-of-chapter general problems), 

each designed to challenge students to think logically. 

• Proven methodology to helping students learn chemistry: 

73 


9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM

Chemistry 

- Organizing the readers’ thoughts (chapter outlines, learning objectives; 

review clues, problem-solving flow diagrams). 

- Tools to learning (worked examples; stop and review sections; key 

tables and illustrations). 

- Summarizing what they have learned (Snapshot Reviews after each 

section, Chapter Summaries; Items for Special Attention, Self-Tutorial 

Problems). 

• Solid ancillary package, written by the author himself: 

- For the student: Online Learning Center, ChemSkill Builder, How to 

Study Science, 3000 Solved Problems in Chemistry. 

- For the instructor: Instructor’s Manual and Solution Manual, Instructor 

Testing and Resource CD-ROM, Digital Content Manager CD-ROM, 

ChemSkill Builder. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Basic Concepts Chapter 2: Measurement Chapter 3: Atoms 

and Atomic Masses Chapter 4: Electronic Configuration of the Atom 

Chapter 5: Chemical Bonding Chapter 6: Nomenclature Chapter 7: 

Formula Calculations Chapter 8: Chemical Reactions Chapter 9: Net 

Ionic Equations Chapter 10: Stoichiometry Chapter 11: Molarity Chapter 

12: Gases Chapter 13: Atomic and Molecular Properties Chapter 14: 

Solids and Liquids, Energies of Physical and Chemical Changes Chapter 

15: Solutions Chapter 16: Oxidation Numbers Chapter 17: Chemical 

Equilibrium Chapter 18: Acid-Base Theory Chapter 19: Organic Chemistry 

Chapter 20: Nuclear Reactions 

Supplements 

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE BEGINNING CHEMISTRY 


2004 (Oct 2003) / 144 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142239-0 / MHID: 0-07-142239-0 


What could be better than the bestselling Schaum’s Outline 

series For students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, 

it would have to be Schaum’s Easy Outline series. Every book in 

this series is a pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused version 

of its predecessor. With an emphasis on clarity and brevity, 

each new title features a streamlined and updated format and 

the absolute essence of the subject, presented in a concise and 

readily understandable form. 

» Graphic elements such as sidebars, reader-alert icons, and 

boxed highlights stress selected points from the text, illuminate 

keys to learning, and give students quick pointers to the 

essentials. 

» Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers 

turned off by dense text 

» Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the 

material across fast 

» 

Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject 


CHEMISTRY 

A First Course, 3rd Edition 

By Jacqueline I Kroshwitz, formerly of Kean College of New Jersey, 

Melvin Winokur, formerly of Bloomfield College and A Bryan Lees, 

Kean College of New Jersey 

1995 / 640 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-697-27282-9 / MHID: 0-697-27282-6 


ISBN-13: 978-0-697-23660-9 / MHID: 0-697-23660-9 

(with Student Study Art Notebook, Mandatory Package) 


ISBN-13: 978-0-697-32799-4 / MHID: 0-697-32799-X 

(Extended Version) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114453-7 / MHID: 0-07-114453-6 [IE] 

» Deliver expert help from teachers who are authorities in 

their fields 

» Perfect for last-minute test preparation 

So small and light that they fit in a backpack! 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








74 


9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM

Allied Health / Nursing 

Chemistry (General,Organic 


New 

Textbooks 

FOUNDATIONS OF GENERAL, ORGANIC AND 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

By Katherine Denniston and Joseph Topping of Towson University 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331183-8 / MHID: 0-07-331183-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331531-7 / MHID: 0-07-331531-1 

(with ARIS Instructor’s Access Guide) 

This new Foundations of General, Organic, and Biochemistry 

is designed to help undergraduate health-related majors, and 

students of all other majors, understand key concepts and appreciate 

the significant connections between chemistry, health, 

disease, and the treatment of disease. Foundations, just like its 

parent text, strikes a balance between theoretical and practical 

chemistry, while emphasizing material that is unique to 

health-related studies. Foundations of General, Organic and 

Biochemistry is designed for the one semester allied health 

chemistry course. This text has an easy-to-follow problem-solving 

approach, vivid illustrations, and engaging applications 

including timely “Chemistry at the Crime Scene” applications 

with “For Further Understanding” questions that follow to help 

the students think through what they just read. The art program, 

engaging and thought provoking questions, problems, and 

discussion topics, is what will make this book appealing to 

students and instructors alike. 

FEATURES 

• Denniston’s new Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry 

textbook will feature macroscopic and molecular views of a process, 

so students can learn to connect these two levels of reality with each 

other. 

• Denniston’s new Foundations will have a complete ARIS electronic 

homework site that will contain in-chapter and end-of-chapter problems 

from the text and an online gradebook. 

• Clear and Effective Approach to Problem Solving In-Chapter Examples, 

Solutions, and Problems: Each chapter includes examples that 

show the student, step by step, precisely how to properly determine 

the correct answer. Whenever possible, the solved examples are followed 

by in-text problems that allow the students to test their mastery 

of information and to build self-confidence. In-Chapter and End-of 

Chapter Problems: The authors have created a wide variety of paired 

concept problems. The answers to the odd-numbered questions will 

be found in the back of the book as reinforcement for the students as 

they develop problem-solving skills. However, the students must then 

be able to apply the same principles to the related even-numbered 

problems. Critical Thinking Problems: Each chapter includes a set of 

critical thinking problems. These problems are intended to challenge 

the students to integrate concepts to solve more complex problems. 

They make a perfect complement to the classroom lecture since they 

provide an opportunity for in-class discussion of complex problems 

dealing with daily life and the health care sciences 

• Engaging Applications! Connections: Clinical, Medical, Human and 

Chemistry at the Scene Connections are found throughout every chapter 

of the book. The Medical, Clinical, Human and Chemistry at the Scene 

Connections provide updated information in various health fields and 

other growing areas of chemistry to engage students’ interest and help 

them understand chemistry as related to their lives. Learning Goal 

Icons: To help alert the student to the important concepts covered in 

the text, an icon is placed next to the textual material that supports the 

learning goal. Integration of Chemistry in all Disciplines: The emphasis 

in this text is on integration of general, organic, and biochemistry to 

help students understand the interrelatedness of these sub-disciplines. 

Students need to understand that chemistry is not divided into separate 

areas but is one interconnected discipline. Margin notes demonstrate 

the relationships between the areas. 

CONTENTS 

1. Chemistry: Methods and Measurement 2. The Structure of the Atom 

and the Periodic Table 3. Structure and Properties of Ionic and Covalent 

Compounds 4. Calculations and the Chemical Equation 5. Energy, 

Rate, and Equilibrium 6. States of Matter: Gases, Liquids, and Solids 7. 

Solutions 8. Acids and Bases 9. The Nucleus and Radioactivity 10. An 

Introduction to Organic Chemistry: The Saturated Hydrocarbons 11. 

The Unsaturated Hydrocarbons: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Aromatics 12. 

Oxygen- and Sulfur Containing Organic Compounds 13. Carboxylic Acids, 

Esters, Amines, and Amides 14. Carbohydrates 15. Lipids and their 

Functions in Biochemical Systems 16. Protein Structure and Enzymes 

17. Introduction to Molecular Genetics 18. Carbohydrate Metabolism 

19. Fatty Acid and Amino Acid Metabolism 


New 

GENERAL, ORGANIC AND BIOCHEMISTRY 

5th Edition 

By Katherine J. Denniston and Joseph J. Topping of Towson University, 

Robert L Caret, San Jose State University 

2007 (Nov 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322107-6 / MHID: 0-07-322107-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110795-2 / MHID: 0-07-110795-9 



The fifth edition of General, Organic, and Biochemistry is 

designed to help undergraduate health-related majors, and 

students of all other majors, understand key concepts and appreciate 

the significant connections between chemistry, health, 

disease, and the treatment of disease. This text continues to strike 

a balance between theoretical and practical chemistry, while 

emphasizing material that is unique to health-related studies. 

Designed for the one- or two-semester course, the text has an 

easy-to-follow problem-solving pedagogy, vivid illustrations, 

and engaging applications. The updating of the art program 

throughout, along with many new questions, problems, and 

discussion topics, continues to make this book appealing to 

students and instructors alike. 


• New micro-to-macro art! 

• Denniston’s textbook will feature macroscopic and molecular 

views of a process, so students can learn to connect these two levels 

of reality with each other. 

• Art program has been updated throughout. 

Chemistry 

• Approximately 220 full-color illustrations have been revised for this 

edition, in addition to over 30 new illustrations and 50 new photos, 

to help students better understand difficult concepts. In many cases, 

illustrations have been redrawn to be more realistic, and have been 

color-enhanced. 

• New Electronic Homework Program for GOB! GOB Zone will 

contain in-chapter and end-of-chapter problems from the text and an 

online gradebook. 

75 


9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM

Chemistry 

• Additional Questions and Problems have been added in every 

chapter. 

• Each chapter contains new additional problems for students, for a 

total of over 500 new problems in the Fifth Edition. These questions 

are now separated into sections for Foundations and Applications. 

“Foundations” include fundamentals and drill problems. “Applications” 

require the students to use the basic course content to solve more 

complex problems. 

Features 

• Clear and effective approach to problem solving: Each chapter 

includes examples that show the student, step-by-step, precisely how to 

properly determine the correct answer. Whenever possible, the solved 

examples are followed by in-text problems that allow the students to 

test their mastery of information and to build self-confidence. 

• In-chapter and end-of chapter problems: The authors have created a 

wide variety of paired concept problems. The answers to the odd-numbered 

questions will be found in the back of the book as reinforcement 

for students as they develop problem-solving skills. The students must 

then be able to apply the same principles to the related even-numbered 

paired problems. 

• Critical Thinking Problems: Each chapter includes a set of critical 

thinking problems. These problems are intended to challenge the students 

to integrate concepts to solve more complex problems. They make 

a perfect complement to the classroom lecture, since they provide an 

opportunity for in-class discussion of complex problems dealing with 

daily life and the health care sciences. 

• Engaging Applications! 

• Perspectives: Added eleven new Clinical, Medical and Human 

Perspectives throughout the book. The Medical, Clinical, Human and 

Environmental Perspectives provide updated information in various 

health fields and other growing areas of chemistry to engage students’ 

interest and help them understand chemistry as related to their lives. 

• Learning Goal Icons: To help alert the student to the important concepts 

covered in the text, an icon is placed next to the textual material 

that supports the learning goal. 

• Integration of Chemistry in all Disciplines: The emphasis in this text 

is on integration of general, organic, and biochemistry to help students 

understand the interrelatedness of these sub-disciplines. Students need 

to understand that chemistry is not divided into separate areas but is 

one interconnected discipline. Margin notes demonstrate the relationships 

between the areas. 

• Dynamic Visual Program 

• Illustrations: Each chapter is amply illustrated using figures, tables, 

and chemical formulas. All of these illustrations are carefully annotated 

for clarity. 

• Color-Coding Scheme: Because it is difficult for students to understand 

the chemical changes that occur in complex reactions, the authors 

have color-coded the reactions so that chemical groups being added or 

removed in a reaction can be quickly recognized. 

• Spartan models: The students’ ability to understand the geometry 

and three-dimensional structure of molecules is essential to the understanding 

of organic and biochemical reactions. This text has used 

WaveFunction Inc. cutting edge molecular modeling software, Spartan, 

to render many of the molecules in the text. 

• The text’s website has been expanded. The Online Learning Center 

website now includes the former textbook appendices providing crossreferences 

to the website in the text, allowing more effective use of the 

website in conjunction with the text material. In addition, interactive 

learning exercises, animations, web links, and math tutorials have been 

added to this Online Learning Center. 

and problems have been organized to reflect different levels of student 

understanding, and the number of problems has been increased. 

Contents 

Part 1 General Chemistry Chapter 1 Chemistry: Methods and Measurement 

Chapter 2 The Structure of the Atom and the Periodic Table 

Chapter 3 Structure and Properties of Ionic and Covalent Compounds 

Chapter 4 Calculations and the Chemical Equation Chapter 5 States of 

Matter: Gases, Liquids, and Solids Chapter 6 Reactions and Solutions 

Chapter 7 Energy, Rate, and Equilibrium Chapter 8 Acids and Bases 

and Oxidation-Reduction Chapter 9 The Nucleus, Radioactivity, and 

Nuclear Medicine Part 2 Organic Chemistry Chapter 10 An Introduction 

to Organic Chemistry: The Saturated Hydrocarbons Chapter 11 The 

Unsaturated Hydrocarbons: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Aromatics Chapter 

12 Alcohols, Phenols, Thiols, and Ethers Chapter 13 Aldehydes and 

Ketones Chapter 14 Carboxylic Acids and Carboxylic Acid Derivatives 

Chapter 15 Amines and Amides Part 3 Biochemistry Chapter 16 

Carbohydrates Chapter 17 Lipids and Their Functions in Biochemical 

Systems Chapter 18 Protein Structure and Function Chapter 19 Enzymes 

Chapter 20 Introduction to Molecular Genetics Chapter 21 Carbohydrate 

Metabolism Chapter 22 Aerobic Respiration and Energy Production 

Chapter 23 Fatty Acid Metabolism 

New 

Lab Manuals 

LABORATORY MANUAL BY HENDRICKSON 

TO ACCOMPANY GENERAL, ORGANIC & 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

5th Edition 

By Charles H Hendrickson, Western Kentucky University 

2007 (Oct 2005) / 400 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282848-1 / MHID: 0-07-282848-X 

CONTENTS 

I. General Laboratory Procedures and Laboratory Safety II. Basic 

Concepts, Measurement, and Properties 1 Measurement and Density 2 

Preparing Graphs 3 The Identification of an Unknown Liquid III. Chemical 

Separations 4 Elements, Compounds, and Mixtures 5 Separation 

Using Chromatographic Techniques IV. Chemical Formulas, Equations, 

Mass Relationships, and Structure 6 Hydrates and the Determination of 

the Formula of a Hydrate 7 Simple Chemical Reactions 8 Analysis of a 

KClO3-KCl Mixture 9 The Structure of Covalent Molecules and Polyatomic 

Ions V. The Chemical Behavior of Elements 10 An Activity Series 

of Several Metals 11 The Preparation and Properties of Oxygen and the 

Properties of Oxides VI. The Gas Laws 12 Boyle’s Law and Charles’ Law 

13 The Combined Gas Law and Dalton’s Law VII. Acid-Base Chemistry 

14 Acid-Base Titrations 15 Acids, Bases, pH, Hydrolysis, and Buffers 

VIII. Organic and Biochemistry 16 The Structure of Hydrocarbons 17 

Properties of Hydrocarbons 18 The Synthesis of Aspirin 19 The Properties 

and Preparation of Esters and Soaps 20 Alcohols 21 Aldehydes 

and Ketones 22 Organic Functional Group Tests 23 The Detection of 

Fats, Proteins, and Carbohydrates in Foods 24 The Characterization of 

Carbohydrates 25 Enzyme Action 26 Analysis of Proteins and Amino 

Acids by Chromatography 27 Digestion Appendixes A: Vapor Pressure 

of Water at Several Temperatures B: Concentration of Common Acids 

and Bases C: Values of Physical Constants D: The Metric Prefixes E: 

Conversion Factors F: An Introduction to Chemical Nomenclature G: 

Significant Figures and Rounding Numbers H: The Solubility Rules I: 

Using Excel to Prepare Straight-Line Graphs / Periodic Table (inside 

front cover) 

• Substantial revision has been made to the content of specific chapters. 

In response to reviewers’ comments, chapters have been updated 

for content and perspectives; art has been enhanced in all chapters; 

76 


9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM


Supplements 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF GENERAL, ORGANIC AND 

BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY 

By George Odian, and Ira Blei of College of Staten Island, CUNY 

1994 / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-047609-7 / MHID: 0-07-047609-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113529-0 / MHID: 0-07-113529-4 [IE] 


(International Edition is not available for sale in Japan) 

If you want top grades and excellent understanding of general, 

organic and biological chemistry, this powerful study tool is the 

best tutor you can have! It takes you step-by-step through the 

subject and gives you accompanying related problems with fully 

worked solutions. You also get hundreds of additional problems 

to solve on your own, working at your own speed. This superb 

Outline clearly presents every aspect of general, organic and 

biological chemistry. Famous for their clarity, wealth of illustrations 

and examples, and lack of dreary minutia, SchaumÕs 

Outlines have sold more than 30 million copies worldwide. 

Compatible with any textbook, this Outline is also perfect 

for self-study. For better grades in courses covering general, 

organic and biological chemistry, and invaluable preparation 

for careers in the health professions and you can do better than 

this Schaum’s Outline! 

Chemistry 

are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of- the-box” system or one 

in which you can customize to fit your specific course needs, ARIS is 

the solution. Go to www.aris.mhhe.com to learn more. 

• Accurate Chemical Models. New Molecular Images which can be 

found in the text’s line art, figures of molecular reactions, and underlining 

an equation, were created using the Spartan software. 

FEATURES 

• Clear Examples. All of the worked examples assist students with 

step-by-step processes. Additional hand-worked examples show students 

how a scientist would work out a problem (sometimes called the 

back-of-the-envelope calculations.) 

• Macro to Micro Undertstanding. Macroscopic to microscopic art 

pieces allow students to see “zoom in” on real-life examples of chemical 

reactions. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 2 Atoms, Molecules, and Ions 3 Stoichiometry 4 Reactions 

in Aqueous Solutions 5 Gases 6 Energy Relationships in Chemical 

Reactions 7 The Electronic Structure of Atoms 8 The Periodic Table 9 

Chemical Bonding I: The Covalent Bond 10 Chemical Bonding II: Molecular 

Geometry and Hybridization of Atomic Orbitals 11 Introduction 

to Organic Chemistry 12 Intermolecular Forces and Liquids and Solids 

13 Physical Properties of Solutions 14 Chemical Kinetics 15 Chemical 

Equilibrium 16 Acids and Bases 17 Acid-Base Equilibria and Solubility 

Equilibria 18 Thermodynamics 19 Redox Reactions and Electrochemistry 

20 The Chemistry of Coordination Compounds 21 Nuclear Chemistry 

22 Organic Polymers--Synthetic and Natural / Appendix 1 Units for the 

Gas Constant Appendix 2 Selected Thermodynamic Data at 1 atm and 

25 degrees Centigrade Appendix 3 Mathematical Operations Appendix 

4 The Elements and the Derivation of Their Names and Symbols 


Textbooks 


New 

GENERAL CHEMISTRY 

The Essential Concepts, 5th Edition 

By Raymond Chang, Williams College 

2008 (March 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331185-2 / MHID: 0-07-331185-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110226-1 / MHID: 0-07-110226-4 [IE] 

The fifth edition of General Chemistry continues the tradition 

of presenting only the material that is essential for a one-year 

general chemistry course. It strikes a balance between theory 

and application by incorporating real-world examples; helping 

students visualize the three-dimensional atomic and molecular 

structures that are the basis of chemical activity; and developing 

problem-solving and critical thinking skills. Although the 

fifth edition incorporates many new features, such as macro 

to micro artwork, six new animations correlated to the text, 

and the addition of new hand-sketched worked examples, 

General Chemistry is still 200 to 300 pages shorter and much 

less expensive than other two-semester textbooks. Dr. Chang’s 

concise-but-thorough approach will appeal to efficiency-minded 

instructors and value-conscious students. 


• Electronic Homework. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is an online, electronic 

homework and course management system which is designed for greater 

power, flexibility, and ease of use than any other system. Whether you 


New 

CHEMISTRY 

9th Edition 

By Raymond Chang, Williams College 

2007 (June 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322103-8 / MHID: 0-07-322103-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110792-1 / MHID: 0-07-110792-4 [IE] 

Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill/sites/0072980605 

Designed for the two-semester general chemistry course, 

Chang’s best-selling textbook continues to take a traditional 

approach and is often considered a student and teacher favorite. 

The book features a straightforward, clear writing style and 

proven problem-solving strategies. It continues the tradition of 

providing a firm foundation in chemical concepts and principles 

while presenting a broad range of topics in a clear, concise manner. 

The new edition of Chemistry continues to strike a balance 

between theory and application by incorporating real examples 

and helping students visualize the three-dimensional atomic and 

molecular structures that are the basis of chemical activity. An 

integral part of the text is to develop students’ problem-solving 

and critical thinking skills. A hallmark of the ninth edition is the 

integration of many tools designed to inspire both students and 

instructors. The textbook is a foundation for the unparalleled, 

effective technology that is integrated throughout. The multimedia 

package for the new edition stretches students beyond 

the confines of the traditional textbook. 


• New GenchemZone--our newest electronic homework program 

contains algorithmically-generated problems, feedback and solutions 

in response to incorrect answers, a molecular drawing component and 

a comprehensive gradebook. 

77 


9/29/2006 1:14:15 PM

Chemistry 

• Approximately 20% new end-of-chapter problems have been added. 

These problems continue to be categorized into various topics and 

difficulty levels. 


New 

• New Molecular Images created using the Spartan software for chemical 

accuracy of models. You will see the images in line art, figures of 

molecular reactions and underlining an equation. 

• New “Chemistry in Action” essays have been added. 

• New “Chemical Mystery” have been added. 

Features 

• Each chapter opening page has an Interactivity Summary List for the 

accompanying media. 

• All of the worked examples have been revised to give the student 

more help in the step by step processes. Statement of problem, Strategy, 

Solution, Check. 

• Additional hand-worked examples show students what a scientist 

would do as he/she works out a problem (sometimes called the backof-the-envelope 

calculations). 

• Revised art program now includes macroscopic to microscopic art 

pieces. These pieces allow students to see real life examples and to zoom 

in to see what is occurring chemically in a specific reaction. 

Contents 

1 Chemistry: The Study of Change 2 Atoms, Molecules, and Ions 3 Mass 

Relationships in Chemical Reactions 4 Reactions in Aqueous Solutions 

5 Gases 6 Thermochemistry 7 Quantum Theory and the Electronic 

Structure of Atoms 8 Periodic Relationships Among the Elements 9 

Chemical Bonding I: Basic Concepts 10 Chemical Bonding II: Molecular 

Geometry and Hybridization of Atomic Orbitals 11 Intermolecular 

Forces and Liquids and Solids 12 Physical Properties of Solutions 13 

Chemical Kinetics 14 Chemical Equilibrium 15 Acids and Bases 16 

Acid-Base Equilibria and Solubility Equilibria 17 Chemistry in the Atmosphere 

18 Entropy, Free Energy, and Equilibrium 19 Electrochemistry 

20 Metallurgy and the Chemistry of Metals 21 Nonmetallic Elements 

and Their Compounds 22 Transition Metal Chemistry and Coordination 

Compounds 23 Nuclear Chemistry 24 Organic Chemistry 25 Synthetic 

and Natural Organic Polymers / Appendices 1 Derivation of the Names 

of Elements 2 Units for the Gas Constant 3 Thermodynamic Data at 1 

atm and 25 degrees C 4 Mathematical Operations 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COLLEGE CHEMISTRY 

9th Edition 

By Jerome Rosenberg and Lawrence Epstein of University of Pittsburg 

and Peter Krieger, Palm Beach CC Eissey Campus 

2007 (April 2007) / 400 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147670-6 / MHID: 0-07-147670-9 


The best and most up-to-date study guide of its kind, this book 

summarizes the chemical principles of a first course in college 

chemistry through problems with clearly explained solutions. 

This new edition reflects changes in the major current textbooks, 

and it contains up-to-date information about newer techniques 

used in environmental chemistry, biochemistry and medicinal 

chemistry. 

PRINCIPLES OF GENERAL CHEMISTRY 

By Martin Silberberg 

2007 (Jan 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322105-2 / MHID: 0-07-322105-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110793-8 / MHID: 0-07-110793-2 [IE] 

Website: http//highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0073107204 

Silberberg’s Principles of General Chemistry offers students the 

same authoritative topic coverage as his 4th edition textbook 

while appealing to today’s efficiency-minded and value-conscious 

instructors and students. Principles allows for succinct 

coverage of content with minimal emphasis on pedagogic 

learning aids. This new approach offers a more straightforward 

approach to learning the core principles without sacrificing 

depth, clarity, or rigor. 

Features 

• This is a shorter textbook! For any instructor who has felt that Silberberg’s 

text was too much, this will be the perfect book. We will retain 

the same writing style and ground-breaking artwork. However, this will 

be a shorter, cleaner textbook. 

• This text will have a very clean design. It will be void of all margin 

notes and most margin artwork. 

• Less Expensive than most textbooks. This textbook will be approximately 

$12 less expensive than most books on the market. 

Contents 

1 Keys To The Study Of Chemistry 2 The Components Of Matter 3 

Stoichiometry Of Formulas And Equations 4 The Major Classes Of 

Chemical Reactions 5 Gases And The Kinetic-Molecular Theory 6 

Thermochemistry: Energy Flow And Chemical Change 7 Quantum 

Theory And Atomic Structure 8 Electron Configuration And Chemical 

Periodicity 9 Models Of Chemical Bonding 10 The Shapes Of Molecules 

11 Theories Of Covalent Bonding 12 Intermolecular Forces: Liquids, 

Solids, And Phase Changes 13 The Properties Of Mixtures: Solutions And 

Colloids 14 The Main-Group Elements: Applying Principles Of Bonding 

And Structure 15 Organic Compounds And The Atomic Properties Of 

Carbon 16 Kinetics: Rates And Mechanisms Of Chemical Reactions 17 

Equilibrium: The Extent Of Chemical Reactions 18 Acid-Base Equilibria 

19 Ionic Equilibria In Aqueous Systems 20 Thermodynamics: Entropy, 

Free Energy, And The Direction Of Chemical Reactions 21 Electrochemistry: 

Chemical Change And Electrical Work 22 The Transition 

Elements And Their Coordination Compounds 23 Nuclear Reactions 

And Their Applications Appendix A Common Mathematical Operations 

In Chemistry Appendix B Standard Thermodynamic Values For Selected 

Substances At 298 K Appendix C Equilibrium Constants At 298 K Appendix 

D Standard Electrode (Half-Cell) Potentials At 298 K Appendix 

E Answers To Selected Problems Glossary 










78 


9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM

Chemistry 


CHEMISTRY 

The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 

4th Edition 

By Martin Silberberg 

2006 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310169-9 / MHID: 0-07-310169-9 

(with OLC Password Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111659-6 / MHID: 0-07-111659-1 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/silberberg 

Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change by 

Martin Silberberg has become a favorite among faculty and 

students. Silberberg’s 4th edition contains features that make it 

the most comprehensive and relevant text for any student enrolled 

in General Chemistry. The text contains unprecedented 

macroscopic to microscopic molecular illustrations, consistent 

step-by-step worked exercises in every chapter, an extensive 

range of end-of-chapter problems which provide engaging 

applications covering a wide variety of freshman interests, including 

engineering, medicine, materials, and environmental 

studies. All of these qualities make Chemistry: The Molecular 

Nature of Matter and Change the centerpiece for any General 

Chemistry course. 

CONTENTS 

1 Keys to the Study of Chemistry 1.1 Some Fundamental Definitions 

1.2 Chemical Arts and the Origins of Modern Chemistry 1.3 The Scientific 

Approach: Developing a Model 1.4 Chemical Problem Solving 

1.5 Measurement in Scientific Study 1.6 Uncertainty in Measurement: 

Significant Figures 2 The Components of Matter 2.1 Elements, Compounds, 

and Mixtures: An Atomic Overview 2.2 The Observations That 

Led to an Atomic View of Matter 2.3 Dalton’s Atomic Theory 2.4 The 

Observations That Led to the Nuclear Atom Model 2.5 The Atomic 

Theory Today 2.6 Elements: A First Look at the Periodic Table 2.7 

Compounds: Introduction to Bonding 2.8 Compounds: Formulas, 

Names, and Masses 2.9 Mixtures: Classification and Separation 3 Stoichiometry 

of Formulas and Equations 3.1 The Mole 3.2 Determining 

the Formula of an Unknown Compound 3.3 Writing and Balancing 

Chemical Equations 3.4 Calculating Amounts of Reactant and Product 

3.5 Fundamentals of Solution Stoichiometry 4 The Major Classes of 

Chemical Reactions 4.1 The Role of Water as a Solvent 4.2 Writing 

Equations for Aqueous Ionic Reactions 4.3 Precipitation Reactions 4.4 

Acid-Base Reactions 4.5 Oxidation-Reduction (Redox) Reactions 4.6 

Elements in Redox Reactions 4.7 Reversible Reactions: An Introduction 

to Chemical Equilibrium 5 Gases and the Kinetic-Molecular Theory 

5.1 An Overview of the Physical States of Matter 5.2 Gas Pressure and 

Its Measurement 5.3 The Gas Laws and Their Experimental Foundations 

5.4 Further Applications of the Ideal Gas Law 5.5 The Ideal Gas Law 

and Reaction Stoichiometry 5.6 The Kinetic-Molecular Theory: A 

Model for Gas Behavior 5.7 Real Gases: Deviations from Ideal Behavior 

6 Thermochemistry: Energy Flow and Chemical Change 6.1 Forms 

of Energy and Their Interconversion 6.2 Enthalpy: Heats of Reaction 

and Chemical Change 6.3 Calorimetry: Laboratory Measurement of 

Heats of Reaction 6.4 Stoichiometry of Thermochemical Equations 6.5 

Hess’s Law of Heat Summation 6.6 Standard Heats of Reaction (¿Hrxn0) 

7 Quantum Theory and Atomic Structure 7.1 The Nature of Light 7.2 

Atomic Spectra 7.3 The Wave-Particle Duality of Matter and Energy 7.4 

The Quantum-Mechanical Model of the Atom 8 Electron Configuration 

and Chemical Periodicity 8.1 Development of the Periodic Table 8.2 

Characteristics of Many-Electron Atoms 8.3 The Quantum-Mechanical 

Model and the Periodic Table 8.4 Trends in Three Key Atomic Properties 

8.5 Atomic Structure and Chemical Reactivity 9 Models of Chemical 

Bonding 9.1 Atomic Properties and Chemical Bonds 9.2 The Ionic 

Bonding Model 9.3 The Covalent Bonding Model 9.4 Bond Energy and 

Chemical Change 9.5 Between the Extremes: Electronegativity and Bond 

Polarity 9.6 An Introduction to Metallic Bonding 10 The Shapes of 

Molecules 10.1 Depicting Molecules and Ions with Lewis Structures 

10.2 Valence-Shell Electron-Pair Repulsion (VSEPR) Theory and Molecular 

Shape 10.3 Molecular Shape and Molecular Polarity 11 Theories 

of Covalent Bonding 11.1 Valence Bond (VB) Theory and Orbital 

Hybridization 11.2 The Mode of Orbital Overlap and the Types of 

Covalent Bonds 11.3 Molecular Orbital (MO) Theory and Electron 

Delocalization 12 Intermolecular Forces: Liquids, Solids, and Phase 

Changes 12.1 An Overview of Physical States and Phase Changes 12.2 

Quantitative Aspects of Phase Changes 12.3 Types of Intermolecular 

Forces 12.4 Properties of the Liquid State 12.5 The Uniqueness of 

Water 12.6 The Solid State: Structure, Properties, and Bonding 12.7 

Advanced Materials 13 The Properties of Mixtures: Solutions and Colloids 

13.1 Types of Solutions: Intermolecular Forces and Predicting 

Solubility 13.2 Intermolecular Forces and Biological Macromolecules 

13.3 Energy Changes in the Solution Process 13.4 Solubility as an 

Equilibrium Process 13.5 Quantitative Ways of Expressing Concentration 

13.6 Colligative Properties of Solutions 13.7 The Structure and Properties 

of Colloids Chemical Connections in Sanitary Engineering: Solutions 

and Colloids in Water Purification 14 Periodic Patterns in the Main- 

Group Elements: Bonding, Structure, and Reactivity 14.1 Hydrogen, 

the Simplest Atom 14.2 Trends Across the Periodic Table: The Period 

2 Elements 14.3 Group 1A(1): The Alkali Metals 14.4 Group 2A(2): The 

Alkaline Earth Metals 14.5 Group 3A(13): The Boron Family 14.6 Group 

4A(14): The Carbon Family 14.7 Group 5A(15): The Nitrogen Family 

14.8 Group 6A(16): The Oxygen Family 14.9 Group 7A(17): The 

Halogens 14.10 Group 8A(18): The Noble Gases 15 Organic Compounds 

and the Atomic Properties of Carbon 15.1 The Special Nature 

of Carbon and the Characteristics of Organic Molecules 15.2 The 

Structures and Classes of Hydrocarbons 15.3 Some Important Classes 

of Organic Reactions 15.4 Properties and Reactivities of Common 

Functional Groups 15.5 The Monomer-Polymer Theme I: Synthetic 

Macromolecules 15.6 The Monomer-Polymer Theme II: Biological 

Macromolecules 16 Kinetics: Rates and Mechanisms of Chemical 

Reactions 16.1 Factors That Influence Reaction Rate 16.2 Expressing 

the Reaction Rate 16.3 The Rate Law and Its Components 16.4 Integrated 

Rate Laws: Concentration Changes over Time 16.5 The Effect of 

Temperature on Reaction Rate 16.6 Explaining the Effects of Concentration 

and Temperature 16.7 Reaction Mechanisms: Steps in the Overall 

Reaction 16.8 Catalysis: Speeding Up a Chemical Reaction 17 Equilibrium: 

The Extent of Chemical Reactions 17.1 The Dynamic Nature of 

the Equilibrium State 17.2 The Reaction Quotient and the Equilibrium 

Constant 17.3 Expressing Equilibria with Pressure Terms: Relation Between 

Kc and Kp 17.4 Reaction Direction: Comparing Q and K 17.5 

How to Solve Equilibrium Problems 17.6 Reaction Conditions and the 

Equilibrium State: Le Châtelier’s Principle 18 Acid-Base Equilibria 18.1 

Acids and Bases in Water 18.2 Autoionization of Water and the pH 

Scale 18.3 Proton Transfer and the Brønsted-Lowry Acid-Base Definition 

18.4 Solving Problems Involving Weak-Acid Equilibria 18.5 Weak 

Bases and Their Relation to Weak Acids 18.6 Molecular Properties and 

Acid Strength 18.7 Acid-Base Properties of Salt Solutions 18.8 Generalizing 

the Brønsted-Lowry Concept: The Leveling Effect 18.9 Electron-Pair 

Donation and the Lewis Acid-Base Definition 19 Ionic Equilibria in 

Aqueous Systems 19.1 Equilibria of Acid-Base Buffer Systems 19.2 

Acid-Base Titration Curves 19.3 Equilibria of Slightly Soluble Ionic 

Compounds 19.4 Equilibria Involving Complex Ions 19.5 Ionic Equilibria 

in Chemical Analysis 20 Thermodynamics: Entropy, Free Energy, 

and the Direction of Chemical Reactions 20.1 The Second Law of 

Thermodynamics: Predicting Spontaneous Change 20.2 Calculating the 

Change in Entropy of a Reaction 20.3 Entropy, Free Energy, and Work 

20.4 Free Energy, Equilibrium, and Reaction Direction 21 Electrochemistry: 

Chemical Change and Electrical Work 21.1 Half-Reactions and 

Electrochemical Cells 21.2 Voltaic Cells: Using Spontaneous Reactions 

to Generate Electrical Energy 21.3 Cell Potential: Output of a Voltaic 

Cell 21.4 Free Energy and Electrical Work 21.5 Electrochemical Processes 

in Batteries 21.6 Corrosion: A Case of Environmental Electrochemistry 

21.7 Electrolytic Cells: Using Electrical Energy to Drive Nonspontaneous 

Reactions 22 The Elements in Nature and Industry 22.1 How 

the Elements Occur in Nature 22.2 The Cycling of Elements Through 

the Environment 22.3 Metallurgy: Extracting a Metal from Its Ore 22.4 

Tapping the Crust: Isolation and Uses of the Elements 22.5 Chemical 

Manufacturing: Two Case Studies 23 The Transition Elements and Their 

Coordination Compounds 23.1 Properties of the Transition Elements 

23.2 The Inner Transition Elements 23.3 Highlights of Selected Transition 

Metals 23.4 Coordination Compounds 23.5 Theoretical Basis for 

the Bonding and Properties of Complexes 24 Nuclear Reactions and 

Their Applications 24.1 Radioactive Decay and Nuclear Stability 24.2 

The Kinetics of Radioactive Decay 24.3 Nuclear Transmutation: Induced 

Changes in Nuclei 24.4 The Effects of Nuclear Radiation on Matter 24.5 

Applications of Radioisotopes 24.6 The Interconversion of Mass and 

Energy 24.7 Applications of Fission and Fusion 

79 


9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM

Chemistry 


Supplements 

UNDERSTANDING CHEMISTRY 

By Charles Lovett and Raymond Chang of Williams College 

2005 (Jan 2004) / 208 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255553-0 / MHID: 0-07-255553-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121595-4 / MHID: 0-07-121595-6 [IE] 

Website: http://www.understandingchemistry.com 

This is a supplement to accompany any of our General Chemistry 

titles. It is an easy to read guide written to help students 

with little or no background in chemistry. 

CONTENTS 

A User Friendly Guide to General Chemistry / In the Beginning / Building 

a Foundation / Chemical Reactions / Reactants to Products / Energy 

Changes in Chemical Reactions / Atomic Structure and the Periodic 

Table / Chemical Bonding / Chemical Equilibrium / Glossary 

SCHAUM’S A-Z CHEMISTRY 

By Andrew Hunt 

2004 / 400 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141935-2 / MHID: 0-07-141935-7 


Schaum’s A-Z handbooks make excellent complements to 

course textbooks and test preparation guides. Ideal for ambitious 

high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, 

they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions 

of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students 

quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of 

key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build 

mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement 

class work. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition 

and is followed by an explanation and examples. 

• A-to-Z format for ready reference 

• Clear definitions and explanations, cross-referenced and 

enhanced with numerous worked examples and illustrations 

• Extended explanations of more important concepts 

• Review lists of entries that relate to main topics in the Appendix 

aid review 

CHEMISTRY DEMYSTIFIED 

By Linda Williams 

2003 / 280 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141011-3 / MHID: 0-07-141011-2 

[A Professional Reference Publication] 

CONTENTS 

Preface Acknowledgments / Part 1: UNDERSTANDING MATTER Chapter 

1. Scientific Method and Chemistry Chapter 2. Data and How to 

Study It Chapter 3. Properties of Matter Chapter 4. Elements, Symbols, 

and the Periodic Table Test: Part One Part 2: CHEMICAL BUILDING 

BLOCKS Chapter 5. Atoms, Elements, and Compounds Chapter 6. Electron 

Configurations Chapter 7. Concentration and Molarity Chapter 8. 

The Hydrogen Atom Test: Part Two Part 3: ELEMENTS, GROUPS, AND 

BEHAVIOR Chapter 9. Atomic Number and Ions Chapter 10. Organic 

Chemistry and Functional Groups Chapter 11. Radiochemistry Chapter 

12. Metals Test: Part Three Part 4: PROPERTIES AND REACTIONS 

Chapter 13. Chemical Bonding Chapter 14. Acids and Bases Chapter 15. 

Solids Chapter 16. Liquids Chapter 17. Gases Chapter 18. Biochemistry, 

Nanotechnology, and the Future Test: Part Four / Final Exam / Answers 

to Quiz, Test and Exams Questions / References / Index 

DICTIONARY OF CHEMISTRY 

2nd Edition 


2003 / 431 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141046-5 / MHID: 0-07-141046-5 

[A Professional Reference Publication] 

CONTENTS 



SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINES: COLLEGE CHEMISTRY 

By Jerome Rosenberg and Lawrence M. Epstein of University of 

Pittsburgh 

2000 / 156 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-052714-8 / MHID: 0-07-052714-8 


CONTENTS 

Quantities and Units. / Moles and Empirical Formulas. / Calculations 

Based on Chemical Equations. / Concentration and Solution Stoichiometry. 

/ The Ideal Gas Law and Kinetic Theory. / Thermochemistry. / 

Atomic Structure. / Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure. / Solids 

and Liquids. / Oxidation-Reduction. / Properties of Solutions. / Thermodynamics 

and Chemical Equilibrium. / Acids and Bases. / Precipitates 

and Complex Ions. / Electrochemistry. / Rates of Reactions. / Appendix: 

Table of Atomic Masses. 

Lab 

COOPERATIVE CHEMISTRY LAB MANUAL 

3rd Edition 

By Melanie M. Cooper, Clemson University 

2006 (Feb 2005) / 160 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282846-7 / MHID: 0-07-282846-3 

The laboratory course described in the lab manual emphasizes 

experimental design, data analysis, and problem solving. 

Inherent in the design is the emphasis on communication 

skills, both written and oral. Students work in groups on openended 

projects in which they are given an initial scenario and 

then asked to investigate a problem. There are no formalized 

instructions and students must plan and carry out their own 

investigations. 

Contents 

Section 1: Cooperative Chemistry: How and Why / To the Instructor / 

To the Student / Cooperative Learning / Conflict Management / Nature of 

the Course / Brief Outline of the Course / Resources / Safety Rules / Basic 

Laboratory Etiquette / NFPA Hazard Codes / Recording and Reporting 

Results / The Laboratory Notebook / Writing Lab Reports / Preliminary 

Report Guidelines / The Science Writing Heuristic / Sample Laboratory 

Report / Reporting Numerical Results / Graphing Data / Oral Report 

Guidelines / Section 2: Laboratory Equipment / Containers / Measuring 

Devices--Liquids / Measuring Devices--Solids / Transfer Devices / 

80 


9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM

Chemistry 

Support Devices / Heating Devices / Section 3: Laboratory Techniques 

/ Preparing an Experiment / Dealing With Unknown Compounds / Solubility 

Tests / Analysis of Anions / Analysis of Cations / Microscale Techniques 

/ Solution Techniques Filtration / Chromatography / Gravimetric 

Analysis / Boiling Points/Melting Points / Separation of Liquids and Solids 

/ Recrystallization / Organic Chemistry / Section 4: Laboratory Instruments 

and Spectroscopy / Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) / Infra 

Red (IR) / Spectronic 20 Spectrophotometer / Color and Spectroscopy 

/ pH Meters / Voltmeter / Conductivity Meter / Section 5: Projects / 

Project 1: Density / Project 2: Investigation of Chemiluminescence / 

Project 3: Concrete / Project 4: Finding the Relationship Between the 

Volume of a Gas and the Temperature / Project 5: Designing a Calcium 

Supplement / Project 6: Properties of Matter and Separations / Project 

7: Acids and Bases / Project 8: Buffers / Project 9: White Powders / 

Project 10: Electrochemistry / Project 11: Identification, Properties and 

Synthesis of an Unknown Ionic Compound / Project 12: Hot and Cold 

/ Project 13: Analysis of Colas / Project 14: Identification, Properties 

and Synthesis of an Unknown Organic Compound / Project 15: What 

Affects the Rate of a Reaction / Glossary / Index 

HANDS ON CHEMISTRY LABORATORY MANUAL 

By Jeffrey A. Paradis 

2006 (Jan 2005) / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-253411-5 / MHID: 0-07-253411-7 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/paradis 

This lab manual offers a modern approach to the two semester 

general chemistry laboratory course. The manual contains over 

37 labs that cover all of the topics commonly taught in the 

course. Each experiment contacts extensive background and 

procedure outlines to give students a solid conceptual background 

before completing the lab. 

CONTENTS 

1. Alchemy and the Origins of Chemistry 2. An Investigation of the 

Properties of Some Common Metals: Why NASA Needs Chemistry 3. 

Measurement and Proper Use of Laboratory Glassware 4. Classification 

of Matter and Separating Mixtures 5. Chemical Nomenclature 1: 

Inorganic Compounds 6. Understanding the Basics: How Many Is a 

Mole 7. Limiting Reactants 8. Electrolytes in Solution: A Conductivity 

Experiment 9. Precipitation Reactions: The Ion Drop Matrix 10. An 

Application of Redox Chemistry: The Breathalyzer 11. Introduction to 

Thermochemistry: Using a Calorimeter 12. Calorimetry II: Nutrition 

in a Nutshell 13. Calorimetry III: Hess’ Law 14. Electronic Structure 

of Atoms 15. A Determination of the Effectiveness of Sunscreens 16. 

An Exploration of the Chemistry Behind Cyanotype Photography 17. 

LDS and VSEPR: A Model Building Laboratory 18. Discovering the Gas 

Laws 19. The Molecular Weight of a Volatile Liquid 20. Gas Stoichiometry 

and the Automobile Airbag 21. Colligative Properties: Analysis 

of Freezing Point Depression 22. A Titration for the Determination of 

Ions in Water: The Hard Truth 23. Chemical Nomenclature II: Naming 

Basic Organic Compounds 24. Introduction to Organic Analysis: 

Infrared Spectroscopy 25. Spectrophotometric Analysis: Phophates in 

Water 26. Introduction to Kinetics: Factors Effecting the Rate of a Reaction 

27. Determining the Rate Law: A Kinetics Study of the Iodination 

of Acetone 28. Amylase and Enzyme Catalysis 29. Determining the 

Equilibrium Constant of a Complex 30. LeChatelier’s Principle: “Stress 

Management” 31. Introduction to Acids and Bases 32. The Properties 

of Buffers: Resisting Change in a Turbulent World 33. Electrochemistry: 

Voltaic Cells and Their Applications 


Multimedia 

CHEMSKILL BUILDER ONLINE 

Version 2, 2nd Edition 

By James D Spain, Electronic Homework Systems, Inc and Hal Peters 

2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288264-3 / MHID: 0-07-288264-6 

(Student’s Edition-Password Booklet) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125103-7 / MHID: 0-07-125103-0 [IE] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298449-1 / MHID: 0-07-298449-X 

(Instructor’s Edition- Password Booklet) 

This incredible online tool contains more than 1500 algorithmically 

generated questions, each with tutorial feedback. There is 

a direct correlation between student time investment in this program 

and increased problem-solving ability. A record of student 

work is maintained in an online gradebook so that homework 

can be done at home, in a dorm room, or in a university lab. 

CONTENTS 

Unit 1. Introduction to Chemistry Unit 2. Units and Measurements 

Unit 3. Chemical Nomenclature Unit 4. Stoichiometry Unit 5. Chemical 

Reaction Unit 6. Molarity of Solution Unit 7. Properties of Gases 

Unit 8. Thermochemistry Unit 9. Atomic Structure Unit 10. Oxidation 

Reduction Unit 11. Periodic Properties Unit 12. Polyatomic Structures 

Unit 13. Covalent Bonding Section Unit 14. Liquids and Solids Unit 15. 

Properties of Solutions Unit 16. Chemical Kinetics Unit 17. Chemical 

Equilibria Unit 18. Acid-Base Equilibria Unit 19. Buffers and Hydrolysis 

S Unit 20. Solubility Equilibria Unit 21. Thermodynamics Unit 22. Electrochemistry 

Unit 23. Nuclear Chemistry Unit 24. Organic Chemistry 

Unit 25. Polymer Chemistry 



Textbooks 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

An Introduction, 3rd Edition 

By Gertrude McKee, Thomas Jefferson University and James R 

McKee, Philadelphia College Pharmacy 

2003 / 800 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-231592-9 / MHID: 0-07-231592-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112248-1 / MHID: 0-07-112248-6 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/mckee 

CONTENTS 

Part I: Fundamental Concepts 1 Biochemistry: An Introduction 2 Living 

Cells 3 Water: The Medium of Life 4 Energy Part II: Structures and 

Metabolism of Proteins, Carbohydrates, and Lipids 5 Amino Acids, 

Peptides, and Proteins 6 Enzymes 7 Carbohydrates 8 Carbohydrate 

Metabolism 9 Aerobic Metabolism I: Citric Acid Cycle and Electron 

Transport 10 Aerobic Metabolism II: Oxidative Phosphorylation and 

Oxidative Stress 11 Lipids and Membranes 12 Lipid Metabolism 13 

Photosynthesis 14 Nitrogen Metabolism I: Synthesis 15 Nitrogen Metabolism 

II: Degradation 16 Integration of Metabolism Part III: Genetic 

Information Flow 17 Nucleic Acids 18 Genetic Information and Gene 

Expression 19 Protein Synthesis 

81 


9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM

Chemistry 


BASIC CONCEPTS IN BIOCHEMISTRY 

A Student’s Survival Guide, 2nd Edition 

By Hiram F. Gilbert, Baylor University College of Medicine 

2000 / 331 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135657-2 / MHID: 0-07-135657-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120182-7 / MHID: 0-07-120182-3 [IE] 

(A Professional Publication] 

CONTENTS 

Preface. / Prologue. / Chapter 1: Where to Start. / Chapter 2: Protein 

Structure. / Chapter 3: Membranes and Membrane Proteins. / Chapter 

4: DNA-RNA Structure. / Chapter 5: Expression of Genetic Information. 

/ Chapter 6: Recombinant-DNA Methodology. / Chapter 7: Enzyme 

Mechanism. / Chapter 8: EnzymeKinetics. / Chapter 9: Signal Transduction 

Pathways. / Chapter 10: Glycolysis and Gluconeogenesis. / 

Chapter 11: Glycogen Synthesis and Degradation. / Chapter 12: TCA 

Cycle. / Chapter 13: Fat Synthesis and Degradation. / Chapter 14: Electron 

Transport and Oxidative Phosphorylation. / Chapter 15: Pentose 

Phosphate Pathway. / Chapter 16: Amino Acid Metabolism. / Chapter 

17: Integration of Energy Metabolism. / Chapter 18: UREA Cycle. / 

Chapter 19: Purine Metabolism. / Chapter 20: Pyrimidine Metabolism. 

/ Chapter 21: One-Carbon Metabolism. / Chapter 22: Tracking Carbons. 

/ Chapter 23: ph, pKa, Problems. / Chapter 24: Thermodynamics and 

Kinetics. / Appendix. / Glossary. / Index. 


Textbooks 

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY DEMYSTIFIED 

By Daniel Bloch 

2006 (March 2006) / 551pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145920-4 / MHID: 0-07-145920-0 


There’s no easier, faster, or more practical way to learn the 

really tough subjects. Organic Chemistry Demystified follows 

the organization of standard organic chemistry courses and can 

also be used as a study guide for the MCAT (Medical College 

Admission Test) and DAT (Dental Admissions Testing) exams. 

This self-teaching guide comes complete with key points, background 

information, quizzes at the end of each chapter, and 

even a final exam. Simple enough for beginners but challenging 

enough for advanced students, this is a lively and entertaining 

brush-up, introductory text, or classroom supplement. 

FEATURES 

• Written in a style that enables readers to mentally visualize why 

molecules react the way they do 

• Chock-full of illustrations and chemical structures 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BIOCHEMISTRY 

2nd Edition 

By Philip Kuchel, University of Sydney 

1997 / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-036149-2 / MHID: 0-07-036149-5 


This step-by-step outline steers you logically, expertly, and 

clearly through biochemistry. It can save you study time and 

helps you get better grades because it focuses on the core 

information you really need to know and avoids confusing, 

extraneous material that you don’t need! A question-and-answer 

format highlights the meaning of the material and helps 

you remember. Easy-to-read line drawings and diagrams make 

important structures and processes memorable. This new second 

edition features added sections on whole-body metabolism, enzyme 

kinetics, and new technologies for monitoring metabolic 

processes. Use this excellent study guide to help you ace your 

biochemistry course, study it alone as a complete biochemistry 

course, or use it for review before a standardized test it can cut 

your study hours as it moves you quickly from cell structure 

through protein synthesis. This is the study guide that makes 

biochemistry comprehensible the one whose first edition was 

chosen by 32,000 grateful students! 

• Can be used as a study guide for the MCATs and/or DAT exam 

• Questions and answers follow each chapter, and the book includes 

a final exam to help readers monitor their progress and comprehension 

of topics 

CONTENTS 

PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Chapter 1: Structure and Bonding 

Chapter 2: Families and Functional Groups Chapter 3: Acids and Bases 

Chapter 4: Alkanes and Cycloalkanes Chapter 5: Stereochemistry Chapter 

6: Structure and Properties of Alkenes Chapter 7: Reaction Mechanisms 

Chapter 8: Reactions of Alkenes Chapter 9: Alkynes Chapter 10: 

Characterization Chapter 11: Organohalides Chapter 12: Nucleophilic 

Substitution and Elimination Reactions Chapter 13: Alcohols Chapter 

14: Ethers Chapter 15: Sulfur Compounds Chapter 16: Conjugated 

Systems Chapter 17: Aromatic Compounds Chapter 18: Reactions of 

Benzene and other Aromatic Compounds Chapter 19: Aldehydes and 

Ketones Chapter 20: Carboxylic Acids Chapter 21: Derivatives and 

Carboxylic Acids Chapter 22: Alpha-Substitution Reactions in Carbonyl 

Compounds Chapter 23: Carbonyl Condensation Reactions QUIZ 

AND EXAM QUESTIONS / FINAL EXAM / BIBLIOGRAPHY /ABOUT 

THE AUTHOR / INDEX 


ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A Brief Course, 3rd Edition 

By Robert C Atkins, James Madison University 

2002 / 608 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-231944-6 / MHID: 0-07-231944-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112162-0 / MHID: 0-07-112162-5 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/atkins-carey 

CONTENTS 

1 Chemical Bonding 2 Alkanes and Cycloalkanes 3 Alcohols and Alkyl 

Halides 4 Alkenes and Alkynes I: Structure and Preparation 5 Alkenes 

and Alkynes II: Reactions 6 Aromatic Compounds 7 Stereochemistry 

8 Nucleophilic Substitution 9 Free Radicals 10 Alcohols, Ethers, and 

Phenols 11 Aldehydes and Ketones 12 Carboxylic Acids 13 Carboxylic 

Acid Derivatives 14 Amines 15 Carbohydrates 16 Lipids 17 Amino 

Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 18 Nucleic Acids 19 Spectroscopy 

82 


9/29/2006 1:14:16 PM

Chemistry 

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE: ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

By Herbert Meislich, City College 

2000 / 138 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-052718-8 / MHID: 0-07-052718-0 


CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Structure and Properties. / Chapter 2: Reactivity and Reactions. 

/ Chapter 3: Alkanes and Cycloalkanes. / Chapter 4: Stereochemistry. 

/ Chapter 5: Alkenes, Alkynes, and Dienes. / Chapter 6: Alkyl 

Halides. / Chapter 7: Aromatic Compounds. / Chapter 8: Spectroscopy 

and Structure. / Chapter 9: Alcohols, Ethers, and Epoxides. / Chapter 

10: Aldehydes and Ketones. / Chapter 11: Carboxylic Acids and Their 

Derivatives. / Chapter 12: Enolates and enols. / Chapter 13: Amines. / 

Chapter 14: Amino Acids, Peptides, Proteins. / Chapter 15: Carbohydrates 

and Nucleic Acids. / Index. 


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

3rd Edition 

By George Hademenos, University of Dallas 

1999 / 464 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-134165-3 / MHID: 0-07-134165-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116598-3 / MHID: 0-07-116598-3 [IE] 

(International Edition is not for sale in Japan) 

CONTENTS 

Structure and Properties of Organic Compounds:- 1 Bonding and 

Molecular Structure. 2 Chemical Reactivity and Organic Reactions. 3 

Alkanes. 4 Stereochemistry. 5 Alkenes. 6 Alkyl Halides. 7 Alkynes and 

Dienes. 8 Cyclic Hydrocarbons. 9 Benzene and Polynuclear Aromatic 

Compounds. 10 Aromatic Substitution, Arenes. 11 Spectroscopy and 

Structure. 12 Alcohols and Thiols. 13 Ethers, Epoxides, Glycols, and 

Thioethers. 14 Carbonyl Compounds: Aldehydes and Ketones. 15 

Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives. 16 Carbanion-Enolates and 

Enols. 17 Amines. 18 Phenolic Compounds. 19 Aromatic Heterocyclic 

Compounds. 


Textbooks 

New 


7th Edition 

By Francis Carey, University of VA-Charlottesville 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331184-5 / MHID: 0-07-331184-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331529-4 / MHID: 0-07-331529-X 

(with ARIS Instructor QuickStart Guide) 

Throughout all seven editions, Organic Chemistry has been 

designed to meet the needs of the “mainstream,” two-semester, 

undergraduate organic chemistry course. This best-selling text 

gives students a solid understanding of organic chemistry by 

stressing how fundamental reaction mechanisms function and 

reactions occur. With the addition of handwritten solutions, 

new cutting-edge molecular illustrations, updated spectroscopy 

coverage, seamless integration of molecular modeling exercises, 

and state-of-the-art multimedia tools, the 7th edition of Organic 

Chemistry clearly offers the most up-to-date approach to the 

study of organic chemistry. 


• NEW--MCAT Practice. A Descriptive Passage and related Interpretive 

Problems have been added to the end of each chapter. This new feature 

has been written to simulate the types of problems and questions that 

students will encounter when they take the MCAT test. 

• NEW--IR Spectra’s. Chapter 13 “Spectroscopy” has been revised to 

include a new discussion about Infrared Spectra and Characteristic 

Absorption Frequencies. There are 27 new IR spectra graphs in the 

book with 17 specifically located in Chapter 13. 

• NEW--Visual aids. 60 new photo’s and 18 new handwritten solutions 

(a popular feature of the sixth edition) have been added throughout 

the text. 

• NEW--Electronic Homework. McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is an online, electronic 

homework and course management system which is designed 

for greater power, flexibility, and ease of use than any other system. 

Whether you are looking for a “ready-to-use-straight-out-of- the-box” system 

or one in which you can customize to fit your specific course needs, 

ARIS is the solution. Go to www.aris.mhhe.com to learn more. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








CONTENTS 

Chapter 1--Structure Determines Properties Chapter 2--Hydrocarbon 

Frameworks. Alkanes Chapter 3--Conformations of Alkanes and Cycloalkanes 

Chapter 4--Alcohols and Alkyl Halides Chapter 5--Structure 

and Preparation of Alkenes: Elimination Reactions Chapter 6--Reactions 

of Alkenes: Addition Reactions Chapter 7--Stereochemistry Chapter 8-- 

Nucleophilic Substitution Chapter 9--Alkynes Chapter 10--Conjugation 

in alkadienes and Allylic Systems Chapter 11 -Arenes and Aromaticity 

Chapter 12 – Reactions of Arenes: Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution 

Chapter 13 -- Spectroscopy Chapter 14 -- Organometallic Compounds 

Chapter 15 – Alcohols, Diols and Thiols Chapter 16 – Ethers, Epoxides 

and Sulfides Chapter 17 – Aldehydes and Ketones: Nucleophilic Addition 

to the Carbonyl Group Chapter 18 – Enols and Enolates Chapter 

19 – Carboxylic Acids Chapter 20 – Carboxylic Acid Derivates: Nucleophilic 

Acyl Substitution Chapter 21 – Ester Enolates Chapter 22 

-- Amines Chapter 23 – Aryl Halides Chapter 24 -- Phenols Chapter 25 

– Carbohydrates Chapter 26 -- Lipids Chapter 27 – Amino Acids, Peptides 

and Proteins Chapter 28 – Nucleosides, Nucleotides and Nucleic 

Acids Chapter 29 – Synthetic Polymers / Glossary / Credits / Index 

83 


9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM

Chemistry 

New 


2nd Edition 

By Janice Gorzynski Smith, University of Hawaii-Manoa 

2008 (March 2007) / 1408 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304986-1 / MHID: 0-07-304986-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332749-5 / MHID: 0-07-332749-2 


Smith’s Organic Chemistry continues to breathe new life into the 

organic chemistry world. This student and instructor reviewed, 

new 2nd edition presents information in the form of bulleted lists 

and tables; with minimal use of text paragraphs. Janice Smith 

saw a great need for stepped out worked examples; incorporated 

biological, medicinal, and environmental applications, and an 

art program that has yet to be seen in organic chemistry! A highlight 

of the art program includes the micro-to-macro art pieces 

that visually guide students to conceptually understand organic 

chemistry. Smith: Organic Chemistry is the text you need to see 

before making your organic chemistry decision. 


• Students and Instructors alike have commented on the GREAT summaries 

at the end of every chapter. 

• Two new chapters have been added to the second edition; Chapter 

26--Carbon-Carbon Bond-Forming Reactions in Organic Synthesis and 

Chapter 30--Synthetic Polymers. 

FEATURES 

• Smith presents material in short, discrete bites of information keeping 

text paragraphs to a minimum. 

• Great use of bulleted lists, numbered steps, outlines, charts, tables, 

figures, and diagrams. 

• Sample problems show students how to solve organic chemistry 

problems in a logical, stepwise manner. 

• Clear ties between biological and real-world applications [see Application 

sections throughout]. A must have concept for students entering 

the allied health industry. 

• Smith offers students the ultimate in illustrations including select 

micro-to-macro art throughout. 

CONTENTS 

Preface / Chapter 1 Structures and Bonding Chapter 2 Acids and Bases 

Chapter 3 Introduction to Organic Molecules and Functional Groups 

Chapter 4 Alkanes Chapter 5 Stereochemistry Chapter 6 Understanding 

Organic Reactions Chapter 7 Alkyl Halides and Nucleophilic Substitution 

Chapter 8 Alkyl Halides and Elimination Reactions Chapter 9 

Alcohols, Ethers, and Epoxides Chapter 10 Alkenes Chapter 11 Alkynes 

Chapter 12 Oxidation and Reduction Chapter 13 Radical Reactions 

Chapter 14 Mass Spectrometry and Infrared Spectroscopy Chapter 15 

Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy Chapter 16 Conjugation, 

Resonance, and Dienes Chapter 17 Benzene and Aromatic Compounds 

Chapter 18 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution Chapter 19 Carboxylic 

Acids and Acidity of the O¿H Bond Chapter 20 Introduction to Carbonyl 

Chemistry: Organometallic Reagents; Oxidation and Reduction 

Chapter 21 Aldehydes and Ketones—Nucleophilic Addition Chapter 22 

Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives—Nucleophilic Acyl Substitution 

Chapter 23 Substitution Reactions of Carbonyl Compounds at the 

¿-Carbon Chapter 24 Carbonyl Condensation Reactions Chapter 25 

Amines Chapter 26 Carbon-Carbon Bond-Forming Reactions in Organic 

Synthesis Chapter 27 Carbohydrates Chapter 28 Amino Acids and Proteins 

Chapter 29 Lipids Chapter 30 Synthetic Polymers / Appendices / 

Glossary / Credits / Index 


Lab Manuals 

MICROSCALE AND MINISCALE ORGANIC 

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS 

2nd Edition 

By Allen M. Schoffstall and Barbara A. Gaddis of University of 

Colorado—Colorado Springs and Melvin L. Druelinger, University of 

Southern Colorado 

2004 / 640 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294338-2 / MHID: 0-07-294338-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111016-7 / MHID: 0-07-111016-X [IE with OLC] 


This book offers a comprehensive introductory treatment of 

the organic laboratory techniques for handling glassware and 

equipment, safety in the laboratory, micro- and miniscale experimental 

procedures, theory of reactions and techniques, relevant 

background information, applications and spectroscopy. 

CONTENTS 

1 Techniques in the Organic Laboratory / 2 Spectroscopic Methods / 3 

Introduction to Organic Compounds, Solvents, Separations and Recrystallizations 

/ 4 Alcohols and Alkyl Halides / 5 Synthesis of Alkenes / 6 

Alkene Addition Reactions / 7 Molecular Modeling and Stereochemistry 

/ 8 Introduction to Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions / 9 Dienes and 

Conjugation / 10 Qualitative Organic Analysis I / 11 Reactions of Aromatic 

Sidechains / 12 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution / 13 Combined 

Spectroscopy and Advanced Spectroscopy / 14 Organometallics / 15 

Alcohols and Diols / 16 Ethers / 17 Aldehydes and Ketones / 18 Enols 

and Enolates / 19 Carboxylic Acids / 20 Carboxylic Acid Derivatives / 

21 Multistep Preparations / 22 Amines / 23 Aryl Halides / 24 Phenols 

/ 25 Carbohydrates / 26 Lipids / 27 Amino Acids and Proteins / 28 

Qualitative Organic Analysis II / 29 Special Investigations 


Supplements 

3000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

By Herbert Meislich, City College of CUNY, Estelle Meislich, Bergen 

Community College and Jacob Sharefkin, Formerly Brooklyn College 

1994 / 704 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-056424-4 / MHID: 0-07-056424-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113969-4 / MHID: 0-07-113969-9 [IE] 


CONTENTS 

Structure and Properties / Bonding and Molecular Structure / Chemical 

Reactivity and Organic Reactions / Alkanes / Cycloalkanes / Stereo-chemistry 

/ Alkenes / Alkyl Halides / Alkynes, Dienes, and Orbital Symmetry / 

Aromaticity and Benzene / Aromatic Substitution / Arenes / Spectroscopy 

and Structure Proof / Alcohols and Thiols / Ethers, Epoxides, Glycols, 

and Thioethers / Aldehydes and Ketones / Carboxylic Acids / Acid 

Derivatives / Carbanion-Enolates and Enols / Amines / Phenols and 

Their Derivatives / Aromatic Heterocyclic Compounds / Amino Acids, 

Petidides, and Proteins / Carbohydrates. 

84 


9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM

Chemistry 

Physical Chemistry 


Textbooks 

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

5th Edition 

By Ira N. Levine, Brooklyn College 

2002 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-253495-5 / MHID: 0-07-253495-8 (Revised) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123213-5 / MHID: 0-07-123213-3 [IE, Revised] 

CONTENTS 

1 Thermodynamics / 2 The First Law of Thermodynamics / 3 The 

Second Law of Thermodynamics / 4 Material Equilibrium / 5 Standard 

Thermodynamic Functions of Reaction / 6 Reaction Equilibrium in Ideal 

Gas Mixtures / 7 One-Component Phase Equilibrium / 8 Real Gases / 9 

Solutions / 10 Nonideal Solutions / 11 Reaction Equilibrium in Nonideal 

Systems / 12 Multicomponent Phase Equilibrium / 13 Surface Chemistry 

/ 14 Electrochemical Systems / 15 Kinetic Theory of Gases / 16 Transport 

Processes / 17 Reaction Kinetics / 18 Quantum Mechanics / 19 Atomic 

Structure / 20 Molecular Electronic Structure / 21 Spectroscopy and 

Photochemistry / 22 Statistical Mechanics / 23 Theories of Reaction 

Rates / 24 Solids and Liquids 


Lab 

EXPERIMENTS IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

7th Edition 

By David P Shoemaker, Joseph W Nibler of Oregon State University 

and Carl W Garland, Massachusetts Institute of Technology 

2003 / 800 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-231821-0 / MHID: 0-07-231821-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119954-4 / MHID: 0-07-119954-3 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com 

CONTENTS 

CHAPTER 1 Introduction CHAPTER 2 Treatments of Experimental Data 

CHAPTER 3 Use of Computer Software CHAPTER 4 Gases CHAPTER 5 

Transport Properties of Gases CHAPTER 6 Thermochemistry CHAPTER 

7 Solutions CHAPTER 8 Phase Equilibria CHAPTER 9 Electrochemistry 

CHAPTER 10 Chemical Kinetics, Method of Initial Rate CHAPTER 

11 Surface Pheomena CHAPTER 12 Macromolecules CHAPTER 13 

Electric and Magnetic Properties CHAPTER 14 Spectroscopy CHAPTER 

15 Solids CHAPTER 16 Computer Interfacing CHAPTER 17 Electronic 

Devices and Measurements CHAPTER 18 Temperature CHAPTER 19 

Vacuum Techniques CHAPTER 20 Instruments CHAPTER 21 Miscellaneous 

Procedures CHAPTER 22 Least Squares Fitting Procedures 

Appendixes 

Supplements 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

2nd Edition 

By Clyde R. Metz, Indiana University 

1987 / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-041715-1 / MHID: 0-07-041715-6 



7156&adkey=W02003 

If you want top grades and excellent understanding of physical 

chemistry, this powerful study tool is the best tutor you can 

have! It takes you step-by-step through the subject and gives 

you accompanying related problems with fully worked solutions. 

You also get hundreds of additional problems to solve 

on your own, working at your own speed. This superb Outline 

clearly presents every aspect of physical chemistry. Famous 

for their clarity, wealth of illustrations and examples, and lack 

of dreary minutie, Schaum’s Outlines have sold more than 

30 million copies worldwide. Compatible with any textbook, 

this Outline is also perfect for self-study. For better grades in 

courses covering physical chemistry you can do better than this 

Schaum’s Outline! 

Analytical Chemistry 


MODERN ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

By David Harvey, De Pauw University 

2000 / 816 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118374-1 / MHID: 0-07-118374-4 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci/chemistry/harvey 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Basic Tools of Analytical Chemistry 

Chapter 3 The Language of Analytical Chemistry Chapter 4 Evaluating 

Analytical Data Chapter 5 Calibrations, Standardizations, and Blank 

Corrections Chapter 6 Equilibrium Chemistry Chapter 7 Obtaining and 

Preparing Samples for Analysis Chapter 8 Gravimetric Methods of Analysis 

Chapter 9 Titrimetric Methods of Analysis Chapter 10 Spectroscopic 

Methods of Analysis Chapter 11 Electrochemical Methods of Analysis 

Chapter 12 Chromatographic and Electrophoretic Methods Chapter 13 

Kinetic Methods of Analysis Chapter 14 Developing a Standard Method 

Chapter 15 Quality Assurance 

85 


9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM

Chemistry 


PRINCIPLES OF QUANTITATIVE CHEMICAL 

ANALYSIS 

By Robert de Levie, Georgetown University 

1997 / 704 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114288-5 / MHID: 0-07-114288-6 [IE] 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

By Adon Gordus, University of Michigan 

1985 / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-023795-7 / MHID: 0-07-023795-6 


Chemistry students love Schaum’s for their thorough introduction 

to each topic, including easy-to-follow explanations of the 

necessary mathematics and procedures. With 590 fully solved 

problems and hundreds more to solve on your own (with answers 

supplied), this guide can help you spend less time studying 

and still make better grades! Clear and comprehensive, this 

guide covers the entire course and is compatible with all major 

analytical chemistry texts. 

Kinetics and Reaction 

Mechanics 


CHEMICAL KINETICS AND REACTION DYNAMICS 

By Paul L Houston, Cornell University-Ithaca 

2001 / 352 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120260-2 / MHID: 0-07-120260-9 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1 Kinetic Theory of Gases 2 The Rates of Chemical Reactions 3 

Theories of Chemical Reactions 4 Transport Properties 5 Reactions 

in Liquid Solutions 6 Reactions at Solid Surfaces 7 Photochemistry 8 

Molecular Reaction Dynamics 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 

















86 


9/29/2006 1:14:17 PM

2007-2008 NEW Forestry/Agriculture Titles 

FORESTRY 

Forestry/Agriculture 

~ Contents 


• KAY 

Farm Management, 6e.........................................89, 90 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 

Dendrology..................................................................... 88 

Forest Resources............................................................. 88 

Mensuration Measurement.............................................. 88 

Silviculture...................................................................... 88 

AGRICULTURE 

Agricultural Business...................................................... 89 

Agricultural Economics................................................... 89 

Agricultural Education..................................................... 90 

Animal Science............................................................... 91 

Soil Science.................................................................... 91 

. . . . 

87 

HED 2007 Forestry_Agriculture.in87 87 

9/29/2006 1:16:44 PM


Forestry 

Dendrology 

HARLOW AND HARRAR’S TEXTBOOK OF 

DENDROLOGY 

9th Edition 

By James Hardin, North Carolina State University-Raleigh, Donald 

Leopold, State University of New York at Syracuse and Fred White, 

Chief Forester with the Forester Group 

2001 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366171-1 / MHID: 0-07-366171-6 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Classification Chapter 3 Nomenclature 

Chapter 4 Identification Chapter 5 Variation Chapter 6 Habitat, Range, 

and Communities Chapter 7 Vegetative and Reproductive Morphology 

Chapter 8 Pinophyta (Gymnosperms) Chapter 9 Magnoliophyta (Angiosperms) 

Chapter 10 Dendrochronology Chapter 11 After Dendrology, 

What Glossary References Index 

Forest Resources 


GIS APPLICATIONS IN FORESTRY AND NATURAL 

RESOURCES 

By Pete Bettinger, Oregon State University 

2004 / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121590-9 / MHID: 0-07-121590-5 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci 

This new text will provide forestry and natural resources students 

with an overview of the typical types of GIS analysis they may 

perform in an entry-level position and provide professionals the 

basic information they need to update their skills. Many of the 

types of spatial analyses that field foresters perform to assist in 

decision-making activities will be covered. 

CONTENTS 

1 GIS Data Structures / 2 GIS Databases / 3 Maps/Tables/Spatial Analyses 

/ 4 Forest Thinning Opportunities / 5 Delineating Variable Width 

Riparian Areas / 6 Buffer Owl Nest Sites / 7 Forest Fertilization Plan / 

8 Forest Pruning Plan / 9 Recreation Opportunity Spectrum / 10 Land 

Classification / 11 Integration of GIS and Forest Inventories / 12 Soil 

Loss Potential / 13 Tactical Issues with Forest Harvest Schedule 

INTRODUCTION TO FOREST AND RENEWABLE 

RESOURCES 

7th Edition 

By Grant Sharpe, University of Washington, Clare Hendee, Formerly 

University of Maryl, Wenonah Sharpe, Washington Chapter of Federal 

Women in Timber and John Hendee, University of Idaho 

2003 / 640 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366172-8 / MHID: 0-07-366172-4 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/ 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Economic Scope, Organization, and Problems of Agriculture 

CHAPTER 1 Economics of Resources, Agriculture, and Food Part 2 

Microeconomic Concepts CHAPTER 2 Economics of Demand CHAP- 

TER 3 Production Functions and Product Curves CHAPTER 4 Costs, 

Returns, ans Profit Maximization Part 3 Markets CHAPTER 5 Theory of 

Markets CHAPTER 6 Multiple Inputs and Outputs CHAPTER 7 Forms 

of Market Competition CHAPTER 8 International Trade CHAPTER 9 

Agribusinesses Organization, Management, and Finance CHAPTER 10 

Economic Performance of Agribusiness Part 4 Macroeconomic Relationships 

CHAPTER 11 Introduction to Macroeconomics CHAPTER 12 

Gross Domestic Product and Fiscal Policy CHAPTER 13 Gross Domestic 

Product and Monetary Policy CHAPTER 14 Gross Domestic Product, 

International Transactions, and Macroeconomic Policy Part 5 Public 

Policy and Agriculture..CHAPTER 15 Resource and Environmental 

Management CHAPTER 16 Agriculture and Development CHAPTER 

17 Agricultural Price and Income Policy CHAPTER 18 Putting It All 

Together: The Economic System 

Mensuration Measurement 

FOREST MEASUREMENTS 

5th Edition 

By Thomas Eugene Avery and Harold Burkhart 

2002 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366176-6 / MHID: 0-07-366176-7 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/catalogs/sem/agriculture/burkhart. 

mhtml 

CONTENTS 

Preface / 1. Introduction / 2. Statistical Methods / 3. Sampling Designs 

/ 4. Land Measurements. / 5. Cubic Volume, Cord Meaure, and Weight 

Scaling / 6. Log Rules, Scaling Practices, and Specialty Wood Products 

/ 7. Measuring Standing Trees / 8. Volumes and Weights of Standing 

Trees / 9. Forest Inventory / 10. Inventories with Sample Strips or 

Plots / 11. Inventories with Point Samples / 12. Inventories with 3P 

Sampling / 13. Using Aerial Photographs / 14. Geographic Information 

Systems / 15. Site, Stocking, and Stand Density / 16. Tree—Growth and 

Stand-Table Projection / 17. Growth and Yield Models / 18. Assessing 

Rangeland, Wildlife, Water and Recreational Resources / Answers to 

Selected Problems / Glossary 


Silviculture 

SILVICULTURE 

Concepts and Applications, 

2nd Edition 

By Ralph Nyland, SUNY Environmental Science & Forestry 

2002 / 704 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121579-4 / MHID: 0-07-121579-4 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1 Silviculture as an Orderly Discipline 2 The Silvicultural System 3 

Harvesting as a Tool of Silviculture 4 Concepts of Regeneration 5 Site 

Preparation 6 Planning for Artificial Regeneration 7 Nursery and Tree 

Planting Operations 8 Regeneration from Seed and Direct Seeding 9 

Reproduction Methods and Their Implications 10 Selection System and 

Its Application 11 Uneven-Aged Reproduction Methods 12 Growth 

and Development in Selection System Stands 13 Clearcutting 14 

Shelterwood and Seed-Tree Methods 15 Early Stand Development 

16 Release Treatments 17 Thinning and Its Effects on Stand Development 

18 Methods of Thinning 19 Thinning Regimes in the Even-Aged 

Silvicultural System 20 Managing Quality in Forest Stands 21 Stand 

88 


9/29/2006 1:16:44 PM


Protection and Health Management 22 Improvement, Salvage, and 

Sanitation Cuttings 23 Other Partial Cuttings 24 Coppice Silviculture 

25 Adjusting to Administrative Demands 

New 

Agriculture 

Agricultural Business 

FARM MANAGEMENT 

6th Edition 

By Ronald Kay, Texas A&M University 

2007 (June 2006) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829- 3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 

This text was developed for the first course in Farm Management, 

typically taken by a junior/senior level student. It was designed 

to introduce students to the key concepts on how to effectively 

manage a farm business. The sixth edition provides students 

with the basic information needed to measure management 

performance, financial progress, and the financial condition of 

the farm business. 

FEATURES 

• Chapter 1 on “Farm Management in the 21st Century” responds to 

changes coming in the farm business that, “will require a new type of 

manager..able to absorb, organize, and use large amounts of information, 

particularly that related to new technologies.” This gets students 

thinking about farm management practices in a way that will allow 

them to compete in the future. 

• “Chapter Objectives”, “Chapter Summaries”, as well as “Questions 

for review” are helpful learning tools for students. 

• Terminology and Guidelines in Part 2, (the accounting section), 

are based on standards maintained by the Farm Financial Standards 

Council. 

• More emphasis on Strategic Planning in chapter 1 

• As with the previous edition, this book is divided into five parts. Part 

One begins with the chapter “Farm Management in the Twenty-first 

Century”. It describes some of the forces and technology, which are 

driving the changes we see in agriculture. We hope that by reading this 

chapter students will find both an incentive to study farm management 

and an appreciation for the management skills modern farm managers 

must have or acquire. Part One concludes with an explanation of 

the concept of management and the decision-making process with an 

increased emphasis on the importance of strategic decision-making. 

• Part Two presents the basic information needed to measure management 


the farm business. It discusses how to collect and organize accounting 

data and how to construct and analyze balance sheets and income 

statements. In response to several suggestions, income tax depreciation 

(MACRS) has been added to the chapter on depreciation methods and 

asset valuation. 

• As in the fifth edition, Part Three contains three chapters on basic 

microeconomic principles and four on budgeting and planning tools. 

The topics in this part provide the basic tools needed to make good 

management decisions. Students will learn how and when economic 

principles can be used in management decision-making along with the 

importance of the different types of economic costs. The discussion 

of economies of size has been revised and expanded. Practical use of 

budgeting is emphasized in the chapters on enterprise, partial, whole 

farm, and cash flow budgets. An expanded discussion on using sensitivity 

analysis with partial budgets has been added and linear programming 

is covered in more detail than in previous editions. 

• Topics necessary to increase a manager’s decision-making skills are 

included in Part Four. Farm business organization, analyzing investments, 

managing risk, income tax management, and whole farm business 

analysis are discussed. The chapter on income tax management 

has been updated with the latest changes available. Data from an actual 

farm is now used to demonstrate the analysis process in the chapter 

on whole farm business analysis. The chapter on investment analysis 

includes a new discussion of the concepts of annual equivalent and 

capital recovery values. 

• Part Five discusses the management alternatives and decisions 

related to acquiring the resources needed on farms and ranches. This 

part includes chapters on capital and credit, land, human resources, 

and machinery. The human resource chapter includes new sections on 

improving managerial capacity and bridging the cultural barriers that 

may be encountered in managing agricultural labor. 

CONTENTS 

1 Management 1 Farm Management in the Twenty-First Century 2 

Management 2 Measuring Management Performance 3 Acquiring and 

Organizing Management Information 4 Depreciation and Asset Valuation 

5 The Balance Sheet and Its Analysis 6 The Income Statement 

and Its Analysis 3 Developing Basic Management Skills 7 Economic 

Principles--Choosing Production Levels 8 Economic Principles--Choosing 

Input and Output Combinations 9 Cost Concepts in Economics 10 

Enterprise Budgeting 11 Partial Budgeting 12 Whole-Farm Planning 

13 Cash Flow Budgeting 4 Improving Management Skills 14 Forms 

of Farm Business Organization 15 Managing Risk and Uncertainty 16 

Managing Income Taxes 17 Investment Analysis 18 Farm Business 

Analysis 5 Acquiring Resources for Management 19 Capital and the 

Use of Credit 20 Land--Control and Use 21 Human Resource Management 

22 Machinery Management / Appendix 

New 

Agricultural Economics 


6th Edition 


2007 (June 2006) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829-3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 








FEATURES 







89 


9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM






Council. 







and an appreciation for the management skills modern farm managers 

must have or acquire. Part One concludes with an explanation of 




































CONTENTS 















ECONOMICS OF RESOURCES, AGRICULTURE AND 

FOOD 

2nd Edition 

By Wesley D. Seitz, Gerald Nelson and Harold Halcrow of University 

of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign 

2002 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025958-4 / MHID: 0-07-025958-5 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Economic Scope, Organization, and Problems of Agriculture 

/ 1 Economics of Resources, Agriculture, and Food / Part 2 Microeconomic 

Concepts / 2 Economics of Demand / 3 Production Functions 

and Product Curves / 4 Costs, Returns, and Profit Maximization / Part 

3 Markets / 5 Theory of Markets / 6 Multiple Inputs and Outputs / 7 

Forms of Market Competition / 8 International Trade / 9 Agribusiness 

Organization, Management, and Finance / 10 Economic Performance 

of Agribusiness / Part 4 Macroeconomic Relationships / 11 Introduction 

to Macroeconomics / 12 Gross Domestic Product and Fiscal Policy / 

13 Gross Domestic Product and Monetary Policy / 14 Gross Domestic 

Product, International Transactions, and Macroeconomic Policy / Part 

5 Public Policy and Agriculture / 15 Resource and Environmental 

Management / 16 Agriculture and Development / 17 Agricultural Price 

and Income Policy / 18 Putting It All Together: The Economic System 

/ Glossary / Index 

New 

Agricultural Education 


6th Edition 


2007 (June 2006) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302829- 3 / MHID: 0-07-302829-0 








FEATURES 











Council. 







and an appreciation for the management skills modern farm manag- 

90 


9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM


ers must have or acquire. Part One concludes with an explanation of 




































CONTENTS 















COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








Animal Science 


ANIMAL SCIENCES 

The Biology, Care, and Production of Domestic 

Animals, 4th Edition 

By John R. Campbell, Oklahoma State U—Oklahoma City, M. Douglas 

Kenealy, Iowa State University and Karen L. Campbell, University 

of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign 

2003 / 528 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121732-3 / MHID: 0-07-121732-0 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/campbell 

CONTENTS 

1 Animal Agriculture / 2 Breeds and Life Cycles of Livestock and Poultry 

/ 3 Animal Products / 4 Companion Animals / 5 Horses / 6 Aquaculture 

/ 7 State of Being of Domestic Animals / 8 Fundamental Principles of 

Genetics / 9 Principles of Selecting and Mating Farm Animals / 10 

Anatomy and Physiology of Farm Animals / 11 The Application of Endocrinology 

to Selected Animals and Humans / 12 The Physiology of 

Growth and Senescence / 13 Anatomy and Physiology of Reproduction 

and Related Technologies in Farm Mammals / 14 Artificial Insemination 

/ 15 Physiology of Lactation / 16 Physiology of Egg Laying / 17 Ecology 

and Environmental Physiology / 18 Principles of Nutrition: Plant and 

Animal Composition / 19 The Physiology of Digestion in Nutrition / 20 

The Nutritional Application of Vitamins to Human and Animal Health / 

21 The Nutritional Contributions of Minerals to Humans and Animals 

/ 22 Animal Disease and the Health of Humans / 23 Selected Insects 

and Parasites of Significance to Humans and Animals 24 Ethology and 

Animal Behavior / Appendix A: Common Terms or Names Applied to 

Selected Farm Animals / Appendix B: Convenient Conversion Data / 

Appendix C: Tables of Weights and Measures / Appendix D: Agricultural 

Colleges and Experiment Stations in the United States and Its Territories 

/ Appendix E: Alphabetical List of Elements and Symbols 

Soil Science 

LABORATORY MANUAL FOR SOIL SCIENCE 

Agricultural & Environmental Principles, 8th Edition 

By Steve J. Thien, Kansas State University and John Graveel, Purdue 

University—West Lafayette 

2003 / 224 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-242881-0 / MHID: 0-07-242881-3 

CONTENTS 

Preface / 1 Soil as a Natural Resource / 2 Soil Texture / 3 Particle Size 

Distribution / 4 Bulk Density and Soil Porosity / 5 Soil Water Content / 

6 Water Movement in Soil / 7 Environmental Influence on Soil Formation 

/ 8 Properties of Colloids in the Soil Environment / 9 Types of Soil 

Acidity / 10 Liming Acid Soils / 11 Soil Degradation by Salinity and 

Sodicity / 12 Soil Testing for Available Phosphorus / 13 Soil Organic 

Matter and Chemical Sorption / 14 Microbial Decomposition of Organic 

Materials in Soil / 15 Soil Survey Reports / Appendix: Applications of 

Chemistry to Soil Science 

91 


9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM


92 


9/29/2006 1:16:45 PM

2007-2008 NEW General & Human Biology Titles 


~ Contents 


Multimedia............................................................... 109 

Supplements............................................................. 110 


Laboratory................................................................. 106 

Textbook................................................................... 104 


Laboratory................................................................. 100 

Textbook..................................................................... 95 

General Biology - Non Majors & Majors Combined 

Laboratory................................................................. 103 

Textbook................................................................... 101 


Laboratory................................................................. 108 

Textbook................................................................... 107 


• ENGER 

Concepts in Biology, 12e.........................................98 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322737-5 / MHID: 0-07-322737-4 

• ENGER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Concepts 

In Biology, 12e.........................................................100 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298663-1 / MHID: 0-07-298663-8 

• LEWIS 

Life, 6e.....................................................................101 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322480-0 / MHID: 0-07-322480-4 

• MADER 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320928-9 / MHID: 0-07-320928-7 

• MADER 

Lab Manual to Accompany Biology, 9e....................103 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298955-7 / MHID: 0-07-298955-6 

• MADER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Essentials 

of Biology.................................................................101 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340341-0 / MHID: 0-07-340341-5 

• MADER 

Essentials of Biology.................................................98 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322479-4 / MHID: 0-07-322479-0 

• STRETE 

Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e.........................110 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284610-2 / MHID: 0-07-284610-0 

93 

HED 2007 General & Human Biology93 93 

9/29/2006 1:19:13 PM

2007-2008 NEW General & Human Biology Titles 


• BROOKER 

Biology.....................................................................104 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326807-1 / MHID: 0-07-326807-0 

• DOLPHIN 

Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e.................106 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299287-8 / MHID: 0-07-299287-5 

• JOHNSON 

Essentials of the Living World, 2e............................95 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330935-4 / MHID: 0-07-330935-4 

• JOHNSON 

The Living World, 5e................................................95 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325653-5 / MHID: 0-07-325653-6 

• MADER 

Human Biology, 10e................................................107 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298686-0 / MHID: 0-07-298686-7 

• MADER 

Inquiry Into Life, 12e...............................................96 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330933-0 / MHID: 0-07-330933-8 

• MADER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Human 

Biology, 10e.............................................................108 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298690-7 / MHID: 0-07-298690-5 

• MADER 

Laboratory Manual to Accompany Inquiry 

Into Life, 12e............................................................100 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298682-2 / MHID: 0-07-298682-4 

• PRESSON 

Biology: Dimensions of Life.....................................97 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322736-8 / MHID: 0-07-322736-6 

• RAVEN 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322739-9 / MHID: 0-07-322739-0 

• VODOPICH 

Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e................................106 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299522-0 / MHID: 0-07-299522-X 

94 


9/29/2006 1:19:13 PM




Textbook 

New 

ESSENTIALS OF THE LIVING WORLD 

2nd Edition 

By George Johnson and Jonathan Losos of Washington University-St 

Louis 

2008 (October 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330935-4 / MHID: 0-07-330935-4 (ARIS) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110211-7 / MHID: 0-07-110211-6 [IE] 

In this Essentials version of George Johnson’s textbook, The 

Living World which is often considered to be a student favorite. 

Dr. Johnson has written this textbook from the ground up to 

be an engaging and accessible learning tool with an emphasis 

on “how things work and why things happen the way they 

do”. This Essentials textbook features a straightforward, clear 

writing style and a wide variety of media assets to enhance the 

content of the textbook. The strength of the second edition is 

the integration of many tools that are designed to inspire both 

students and instructors. The multi-media package for the new 

edition stretches students beyond the confines of the traditional 

textbook to include high interest video clips and animations of 

key biological concepts. 


• Issues Oriented: The author endeavors to apply biology to current 

issues and students’ lives as much as possible throughout the text. 

However, he specifically adds boxes entitled “A Closer Look”, “Author’s 

Corner” and “Science in Action” to accomplish this objective as well. 

FEATURES 

• Learning Modules: Chapter Concepts are broken into smaller “learning 

modules” contained on one or two pages. 

• Process Boxes: Key processes are illustrated via approximately 40 

boxes that step a process through frame by frame. 

• Relatively Inexpensive: Essentials of the Living World covers all of 

the key biological concepts for a semester course, but costs students 

about $25 less than a traditional, full-length text. 

• Early Coverage of Evolution and Ecology: Evolution and ecology are 

introduced in the beginning of the text (Chapter 2) and then revisited 

later. 

• Chapter Devoted to New Discoveries, Chapter 10, The New Biology, 

focuses on gene technology, genomics, and recent discoveries in 

cell technology. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 The Study of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 Evolution and 

Ecology Part 2 The Living Cell 3 The Chemistry of Life 4 Molecules of 

Life 5 Cells 6 Energy and Life 7 Photosynthesis: Acquiring Energy from 

the Sun 8 How Cells Harvest Energy from Food Part 3 The Continuity 

of Life 9 Mitosis 10 Meiosis 11 Foundations of Genetics 12 DNA: The 

Genetic Material 13 How Genes Work 14 The New Biology Part 4 

The Evolution and Diversity of Life 15 Evolution and Natural Selection 

16 Exploring Biological Diversity 17 Evolution of Microbial Life 18 

Evolution of Plants 19 Evolution of Animals Part 5 The Living Environment 

20 Ecosystems 21 Populations and Communities 22 Behavior 

and the Environment 23 Plant Under Stress Part 6 Animal Life 24 The 

Animal Body and How It Moves 25 Circulation 26 Respiration 27 The 

Path of Food Through the Animal Body 28 Maintaining the Internal 

Environment 29 How the Body Defends Itself 30 The Nervous System 

31 Chemical Signaling Within the Animal Body 32 Reproduction and 

Development Part 7 Plant Life 33 Plant Form and Function 34 Plant 

Reproduction and Growth 


New 

THE LIVING WORLD 

5th Edition 

By George Johnson, Washington University-St Louis 

2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325653-5 / MHID: 0-07-325653-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110212-4 / MHID: 0-07-110212-4 [IE] 

George Johnson’s textbook, The Living World is often considered 

to be a student favorite. Dr. Johnson has written this 

non-majors textbook from the ground up to be an engaging 

and accessible learning tool with an emphasis on “how things 

work and why things happen the way they do”. This authoritative 

textbook features a straightforward, clear writing style 

and a wide variety of media assets to enhance the content of 

the textbook. The strength of the fifth edition is the integration 

of many tools that are designed to inspire both students 

and instructors. The multi-media package for the new edition 

stretches students beyond the confines of the traditional textbook 

to include high interest video clips and animations of key 

biological concepts. 


• NEW FEATURE! Inquiry and Analysis--This new feature appears at 

the end of all chapters and is intended to help students with developing 

their skills in analyzing and interpreting data. 

• The author provides a 2-page discussion on the presentation of data 

in Chapter 1, introducing the students to the concepts of variables, relationships 

between variables, and presentation of data in various types 

of graphs. To reinforce this concept, the Inquiry and Analysis sections 

present the student with experimental data and help them analyze the 

data with a set of questions that walks them through the data. 

• Reorganized Table of Contents--In response to the comments of 

our reviewers, the Table of Contents for the 5th edition will contain 

more, but shorter chapters than the 4th edition. Several of the chapters 

were sited as being too long and containing too much information for 

nonmajors. Six of these longer chapters have been split to form the 

addition of two more manageable chapters. These two new chapters 

are Chapters 29 and 30; 29 is devoted to the circulatory system and 

30 is dedicated to the respiratory system. 

• Art Tie-Ins--Throughout the text, descriptions of the art have been 

incorporated into the textual discussion, encouraging the students to 

look at the art as they are reading the textual descriptions. In many 

cases, the artwork has been revised to make these rat tie-ins in the text 

clearer and more meaningful. A numbering system has been placed 

within the figures allowing the text to guide the student through particular 

areas of a figure. 

• New Boxed Readings!--The addition of boxes readings in the previous 

edition (i.e. Author’s Corner, Science in Action and A Closer Look) were 

very well received, so additional topics have been added. 

• UPDATED TEXT WEBSITE!--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS--Assessment, Review, 

and Instruction System for The Living World, 5/e is a complete 

electronic homework and course management system. Instructors can 


a few clicks of the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, 



algorithmically generated homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a 

student is registered in the course, all student activity within McGraw- 

Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available to the instructor 

through a fully integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. 

95 


9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM




FEATURES 

• Hallmark Feature! Learning Modules--Chapter Concepts are broken 

into smaller “learning modules” so students can absorb difficult concepts 

in easy-to-digest steps. These one or two page units assist students in 

easily identifying the details of major chapter concepts. They always 

end with a summary wrapping up what was just covered. 

• Animated Process Boxes--We have animated 30 key biological 

processes directly from the textbook art. These process animations will 

demonstrate for the student “how it works” by striping away some of 

the detail and focus on the essence of the biological process helping 

them develop a deeper understanding of the science. 

• Digitized Video Clips--McGraw-Hill has organized a series of 75 

digitized video clips that cover all the areas of introductory biology. 

These high interest video clips are an excellent way to start out your 

classes, post to a website for study purposes or to assist in demonstrating 

relevance of key biological topics for your students. 

• Customizable: The Living World is now color customizable by 

chapter so instructors can select only the chapters they will need for 

their course, or couple chapters from The Living World with material 

from another source. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 The Study of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 Evolution and 

Ecology Part 2 The Living Cell 3 The Chemistry of Life 4 Molecules of 

Life 5 Cells 6 Energy and Life 7 Photosynthesis: Acquiring Energy from 

the Sun 8 How Cells Harvest Energy from Food Part 3 The Continuity 

of Life 9 Mitosis 10 Meiosis 11 Foundations of Genetics 12 DNA: The 

Genetic Material 13 How Genes Work Part 4 The New Biology 14 

Gene Technology 15 Genomics 16 The Revolution in Cell Technology 

Part 5 The Evolution and Diversity of Life 17 Evolution and Natural 

Selection 18 How We Name Living Things 19 The First Single-Celled 

Creatures 20 Advent of the Eukaryotes 21 Fungi Invade the Land Part 

6 Plant Life 22 Evolution of Plants 23 Plant Form and Function 24 

Plant Reproduction and Growth Part 7 Evolution of Animal Life 25 

Evolution of the Animal Phyla 26 History of the Vertebrates 27 How 

Humans Evolved Part 8 Animal Life 28 The Animal Body and How It 

Moves 29 Circulation 30 Respiration 31 The Path of Food Through the 

Animal Body 32 Maintaining the Internal Environment 33 How the Body 

Defends Itself 34 The Nervous System 35 Chemical Signaling Within 

the Animal Body 36 Reproduction and Development Part 9 The Living 

Environment 37 Ecosystems 38 Populations and Communities 39 

Behavior and the Environment 40 Planet Under Stress 


New 

INQUIRY INTO LIFE 

12th Edition 


2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330933-0 / MHID: 0-07-330933-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110213-1 / MHID: 0-07-110213-2 [IE] 

From the unique delivery of biology content, to the time tested 

art program, to the complete integration of the text with technology, 

Dr. Sylvia Mader has formed a teaching system that 

will both motivate and enable your students to understand 

and appreciate the wonders of all areas of biology. Inquiry into 

Life, 12/e emphasizes the application of all areas of biology to 

knowledge of human concerns, what the students are able to 

relate to. This distinctive text was developed to stand apart from 

all other non-majors texts with a unique approach, unparalleled 

art, and a straightforward, succinct writing style that has been 

acclaimed by both users and reviewers. 


• More Critical Thinking Emphasis--Discussion questions have been 

provided at the end of each “Focus” boxed reading and at the end of 

each chapter. Is it important that your students be able to apply what 

they’ve learned to real-life applications Do you think this better prepares 

them for the future 

• eInstruction questions are available with this project and can be 

found on the A.R.I.S. site. eInstruction is a wireless student response 

system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, giving 

you immediate feedback from every student. 

• Content Revised Throughout--Content has been revised throughout 

the book by contributing experts in the field. 

• Integrated Disease Coverage--More human disease coverage will be 

integrated throughout the text. Each of the systems chapter will ahve a 

new Disease and Disorder section. 











• Enhanced Art Program--The content and clarity of the art program 

within Inquiry Into Life have always been a hallmark of the text. Great 

care has been taken to maintain this high standard in making this revision. 

Vibrant colors and added dimension have been put into place to 

help create an even more beneficial art program. 

FEATURES 

• Digital Assets--containing 60 pieces of active art, which are text art 

files developed to allow instructors the opportunity to manipulate illustrations 

so you can “tell your own story”, all art and photos from the 

text, and PowerPoint lectures. 

• An Emphasis on the Scientific Process--The introductory chapter 

begins with a new and expanded explanation of the scientific process. 

New art contributes to this expanded coverage; Science Focus readings 

occur throughout the text. These readings discuss recent biological 

research in the area under discussion. 

• Bioethical Issues--No general biology book covers as many issues or 

devotes as much space to this growing area of biology. Most chapters 

of Inquiry into Life end with a bioethical issue. 

• Chapter Opening Vignette A short, thought-provoking vignette applies 

chapter material to a real-life situation. 

• Digitized Video Clips--McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Videos are 

an exciting new presentation tool for introductory general biology 

instructors to use in lecture or lab! Licensed from some of the highestquality 

life science video producers in the world, these brief video clips 

on DVD range in length from 15 seconds to two minutes and cover 

all areas of general biology from cells to ecosystems. Engaging and 

informative, McGraw-Hill’s digitized biology videos will help capture 

students’ interest while illustrating key biological concepts, applications, 

and processes. 

• Inquiry into Life has Four Types of Boxed Readings: 

» Health Focus review procedures and technology that can contribute 

to our well-being. 

» Science Focus readings describe how experimentation and observations 

have contributed to our knowledge about the living world. 

» Ecology Focus readings show how the concepts of the chapter can 

be applied to ecological concerns. 

96 


9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM


» Bioethical Focus readings describe modern situations that call for • Key terms are boldfaced when they are first presented and formally 

value judgments and challenge students to develop a point of view. defined. Then this definition is repeated in the margin space that is 

close to the relevant text. 

• End-of-Chapter Material--Through the wide variety of the The Endof-Chapter 

material, students can be assured that they have grasped 

the concepts just discussed. Each chapter ends with Understanding 

• Key questions appear in the margins throughout the text and ask 

students to rephrase what they have learned. 

Key Terms--Bold terms within the chapter are presented at the end of 

the chapter for review which include page references. Summarizing 

the Concepts,Testing Yourself review questions, and finally Thinking 

Critically questions. 

• Illustrations, photos, graphs, and other visual items complement the 

written text to provide the most accessible definitions of basic biological 

concepts. 

• Chapter by Chapter Customization--Inquiry into Life is chapter-bychapter 

color customizable so you and your students use only the 

chapters you want. 

• Customize this book through Primis Online! This title is tentatively 

planned to be part of the Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/ 

primis/online 

CONTENTS 

1 Exploring Life and Science Part I Human Organization 2 Chemistry 

of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Organization and Regulation of 

Body Systems Part II Maintenance of the Human Body 5 Cardiovascular 

System: Heart and Blood Vessels 6 Cardiovascular System: Blood 7 

Lymphatic System and Immunity ** 8 Digestive System and Nutrition 

9 Respiratory System 10 Urinary System and Excretion Part III Movement 

and Support in Humans 11 Skeletal System 12 Muscular System 

Part IV Integration and Coordination in Humans 13 Nervous System 

14 Senses 15 Endocrine System Part V Reproduction in Humans 16 

Reproductive System 17 Development and Aging Part VI Human Genetics 

18 Patterns of Chromosome Inheritance ** 19 Cancer 20 Patterns of 

Genetic Inheritance ** 21 DNA Biology and Technology ** Part VII 

Human Evolution and Ecology 22 Human Evolution 23 Global Ecology 

24 Human Population, Planetary Resources, and Conservation 

New 

BIOLOGY 

Dimensions of Life 

By Joelle C Presson, University of Maryland-College Park and Janann 

Jenner 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322736- 8 / MHID: 0-07-322736-6 

Presson/Jenner: Biology: Dimensions of Life, 1e is a one-semester 

biology text with an engaging, conversational style 

which encourages basic understanding of biology, issues, and 

applications leading students to a greater awareness of how they 

interact with the world around them. The goal of this text is to 

help students understand how biology relates to their lives and 

why they should develop a desire to obtain knowledge about 

science and biological issues. 

FEATURES 

• Accessible writing style 

• A complete set of instructor and student media ancillaries accompanies 

Modern Biology, including Students Online Learning Center, Life 

Science Animations, Instructor’s Digital Content Manager, Instructor’s 

Testing, and Primis Online customizable digital and print versions. 

• Use of analogies and deeper explanations 

• Added Dimensions 

• Full applications chapters 

• End of Chapter Now You Can Understand 

• What Do You Think 

• Quick Checks 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: The Framework of Biology Part I: Biological Chemistry, 

Cells, and Cellular Processes Chapter 2: Life Emerges from Chemistry: 

Atoms and Molecules Chapter 3: Biological Molecules Chapter 4: Life 

is Cellular: Cell Structure and Function Chapter 5: Life Uses Chemical 

Energy: Energy and Life Chapter 6: Engine of Life: Photosynthesis and 

Glucose Metabolism Part II: Reproduction of Cells and Inheritance 

Chapter 7: The Master Molecule of Life: DNA: Structure and Function 

Chapter 8: Life Renews Itself: Reproduction of Cells Chapter 9: 

Constructing Life: The Control of Eukaryotic Gene Expression Chapter 

10: Rules of Inheritance: Classical Genetics Part III: Applying Your 

Knowledge of Cells and Cellular Processes Chapter 11: Biotechnology 

(Applications chapter) Chapter 12: The Biology and Treatment of Cancer 

(Applications chapter) Part IV: Evolution and Diversity of Life Chapter 

13: Life Evolves: Darwin and the Science of Evolution Chapter 14: All 

Life is Related: Understanding Biological Diversity Chapter 15: Varieties 

of Life: Prokaryotes, Single-Celled Eukaryotes, and Algae Chapter 16: 

Varieties of Life: Fungi and Animals Chapter 17: Varieties of Life: Plants 

Part V: Applying Your Knowledge of Biological Diversity Chapter 18: 

The Value of Biological Diversity (Applications chapter) Part VI: Plant 

Biology Chapter 19: The Living Plant: Plant Structure and Function 

Chapter 20: The Thread of Life: Reproduction of Seed Plants Part VII: 

Human Biology Chapter 21: Nerves, Senses, Bones, Muscles Chapter 

22: Nutrition and Digestion Chapter 23: Circulation, Respiration, and 

Excretion Chapter 24: Hormones, Reproduction, and Early Development 

Part VIII: Applying Your Knowledge of Human Biology Chapter 25: 

Human Control of Reproduction (Applications chapter) Chapter 26: The 

Immune System and Emergent Diseases (Applications chapter) Part IX: 

Ecology Chapter 27: Ecology: Populations and Communities Chapter 28: 

Ecosystems and Biomes Part X: Applying Your Knowledge of Ecology 

Chapter 29: Human Impact Upon the Earth (Applications chapter) 

• Fundamental biological concepts are presented with less complexity 

in terms of detail, but with more attention paid to conveying a deeper 

understanding that students are sure to grasp. 

• Applied topics of particular interest to students (e.g. Psychoactive 

Drugs chapter) are covered in greater detail than normally expected 

in a text for this course. 

• Modern Biology emphasizes the use of scientific processes to understand 

nature. 

• Each chapter starts with an interesting story or scenario and then 

ends with a section that returns to the story and asks the question “How 

Do You Know” The introductory scenario sets up intriguing issues 

and questions and, after covering the material in the chapter, the last 

section returns to the opening scenario and addresses these issues and 

questions in detail. 

97 


9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM



New 

CONCEPTS IN BIOLOGY 

12th Edition 

By Eldon Enger, Delta College 

2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322737-5 / MHID: 0-07-322737-4 

(with ARIS Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110946-8 / MHID: 0-07-110946-3 


Enger/Ross/Bailey: Concepts in Biology is a relatively brief 

introductory general biology text written for students with no 

previous science background. The authors strive to use the 

most accessible vocabulary and writing style possible while 

still maintaining scientific accuracy. The text covers all the 

main areas of study in biology from cells through ecosystems. 

Evolution and ecology coverage are combined in Part Four to 

emphasize the relationship between these two main subject 

areas. The new, 12th edition is the latest and most exciting 

revision of a respected introductory biology text written by 

authors who know how to reach students through engaging 

writing, interesting issues and applications, and accessible 

level. Instructors will appreciate the book’s scientific accuracy, 

complete coverage and extensive supplement package. 


• All new chapter dedicated to coverage of biotechnology. 

• Former biochemical pathways chapter is now separated into two 

chapters. The first covers cellular respiration and the second covers 

photosynthesis. 

• Hundreds of new photographs and illustrations appear in Concepts 

in Biology, 12/e. 

• Concepts in Biology is now organized with physiological processes 

appearing as the last major part of the text. 

• Brief vignettes of 2-3 paragraphs in length now appear at the beginning 

of each chapter. 

• Each chapter now ends with an illustrated summary, organized by 

major heading, and then many new objective questions. 

• McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips are correlated to 

topics covered in the text and identified by an icon on the appropriate 

book pages. 

Features 

• Evolution and ecology coverage appear in the same unit, unlike 

most texts that have evolution in the first 1/3 of the text and ecology 

at the end. 

• Many new and updated high-interest boxed readings appear 

throughout the text. 

Contents 

Part 1 Introduction 1 What is Biology Part 2 Cells: Anatomy and 

Action 2 The Basics of Life: Chemistry 3 Organic Chemistry: The Chemistry 

of Life 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Enzymes 6 Respiration 7 

Photosynthesis 8 DNA and RNA: The Molecular Basis of Heredity Part 

3 Cell Division and Heredity 9 Mitosis: The Cell-Copying Process 10 

Meiosis: Sex-Cell Formation 11 Mendelian Genetics 12 Biotechnology 

Part 4 Evolution and Ecology 13 Diversity Within Species 14 Natural 

Selection and Evolution 15 Speciation and Evolutionary Change 16 

Ecosystem Organization and Energy Flow 17 Community Interactions 

18 Population Ecology 19 Evolutionary and Ecological Aspects of 

Behavior Part 5 The Origin and Classification of Life 20 The Origin 

of Life and Evolution of Cells 21 The Classification and Evolution of 

Organisms 22 Microorganisms: Bacteria, Protista, and Fungi 23 Plants 

24 Animals Part 6 Physiological Processes 25 Materials Exchange in the 

Body 26 Nutrition: Food and Diet 27 The Body’s Control Mechanisms 

and Immunity 28 Human Reproduction, Sex, and Sexuality Appendix 

1: The Metric System Appendix 2: Acronyms 


New 

ESSENTIALS OF BIOLOGY 


2007 (Jan 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322479-4 / MHID: 0-07-322479-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110801-0 / MHID: 0-07-110801-7 


Essentials of Biology is an essentials level introductory general 

biology text for non-majors students that combines Dr. Sylvia 

Mader’s superb and accessible writing style with clear visuals, 

a comprehensive learning system, and abundant supplements. 

Essentials of Biology emphasizes the relevance of biology to 

students’ lives within a framework of biodiversity and basicconcepts 

coverage of all main areas of general biology. The 

three key features of Essentials of Biology include: 

1. Dr. Sylvia Mader’s succinct, precise writing style. Sylvia’s 

writing is what has earned her a reputation as one of the most 

successful introductory biology textbook author ever, and it is 

what will be most compelling in this text. 

2. A comprehensive learning system to help students get the 

most out of each chapter’s text content and an incredible instructional 

visual program. 

3. Our package would not be complete without our robust 

media technology package with quality animations, digitized 

videos, OLC, and student interactive CD-ROM. 

Each chapter features numerous pedagogical tools that are carefully 

developed to help students grasp challenging concepts. 

These include: 

-A numbered outline at the beginning of each chapter with 

accompanying concept statements for the main topics in each 

chapter. 

- Check Your Progress questions and answers at the end of each 

major heading within the chapter to help students assess their 

understanding of the previous section. 

- The boldface terms in each chapter are page referenced in an 

Understanding the Terms list at the end of the chapter, and a 

matching exercise allows students to test their knowledge of 

the terms. 

- A Thinking Scientifically section at the end of each chapter 

gives students the opportunity to use critical thinking skills to 

respond to scientific questions. 

- The Bioethical Issue at the end of each chapter briefly discusses 

a controversial issue confronting society and poses 

questions to help students fully consider the issue and arrive 

at an opinion. 

-Numbered summary at the end of the chapter to help students 

review. 

-Testing Yourself objective questions at the end of the chapter 

to help students prepare for the test. 

Features 

• Essentials of Biology is authored by Dr. Sylvia Mader, one of the 

most respected and successful introductory general biology authors in 

the history of college textbook publishing. 

• Each chapter features numerous learning aids that are carefully 

developed to help students grasp challenging concepts. Examples include: 

98 


9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM


» A numbered outline at the beginning of each chapter with accompanying 

concept statements for the main topics in each chapter. 

» Check Your Progress questions and answers at the end of each major 

heading within the chapter to help students assess their understanding 

of the previous section. 

» Testing Yourself questions at the end of the chapter to help students 

prepare for the test. 

» The boldface terms in each chapter are page referenced in an 

Understanding the Terms list at the end of the chapter, and a matching 

exercise allows students to test their knowledge of the terms. 

» A Thinking Scientifically section at the end of each chapter gives 

students the opportunity to use critical thinking skills to respond to 

scientific questions. 

» The Bioethical Issue at the end of each chapter briefly discusses 

a controversial issue confronting society and poses questions to help 

students fully consider the issue and arrive at an informed opinion. 

• Short, cost efficient paperbound text. 

• Outstanding photographs and vibrantly colored and simple, yet 

accurate and effective, illustrations are featured through Essentials of 

Biology. 

• Outstanding instructor’s media package that includes: 

» McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips DVD. Licensed from 

some of the highest-quality science video producers in the world, these 

brief segments range from 15 seconds to two minutes in length and 

cover all areas of general biology from cells to ecosystems. 

» Approximately 70 new animations of key biological processes, most 

of which are also available in a Spanish version. 

» A Digital Content Manager CD-ROM provides easy access to all 

photos, tables, and artwork from the text, plus a complete set of PowerPoint 

lectures organized by chapter. 

» The Instructor’s Testing and Resource CD-ROM includes the Instructor’s 

Manual; a Test Bank in EZ Test, McGraw-Hill’s flexible and 

easy-to-use electronic testing program; and questions for the Classroom 

Performance System (CPS). 

• Outstanding media study tools for students. 

» The Online Learning Center (OLC) provides study aids such as 

chapter quizzes, art exercises, flashcards, case studies, and access to 

an online tutor. 

» The quizzes and other tutorial exercises from the OLC, as well as 

animations of key biological processes, are on the Student Interactive 

CD. 

• In Essentials of Biology, Dr. Mader focuses on providing non-majors 

with exactly what they need to understand key biological concepts 

instead of emphasizing greater detail. 

• Each chapter opens with several captivating photos and an accompanying 

brief vignette that relates to students’ lives. 

Contents 

1 A View of Life Part 1 The Cell 2 The Chemical Basis of Life 3 The 

Organic Molecules of Life 4 Inside the Cell 5 The Dynamic Cell 6 Energy 

for Life 7 Energy for Cells Part 2 Genetics 8 Cellular Reproduction 9 

Sexual Reproduction 10 Patterns of Inheritance 11 DNA Biology and 

Technology 12 Gene Regulation and Cancer 13 Genetic Counseling 

Part 3 Evolution 14 Darwin and Evolution 15 Evolution on a Small 

Scale 16 Evolution on a Large Scale Part 4 Diversity of Life 17 The 

First Forms of Life 18 Land Environment: Plants and Fungi 19 Both 

Water and Land: Animals Part 5 Plant Structure and Function 20 Plant 

Anatomy and Growth 21 Plant Responses and Reproduction Part 6 

Animal Structure and Function 22 Being Organized and Steady 23 The 

Transport Systems 24 The Maintenance Systems 25 Human Nutrition 

26 Defenses Against Disease 27 The Control Systems 28 Sensory Input 

and Motor Output 29 Reproduction and Development Part 7 Ecology 

30 Ecology of Populations 31 Communities and Ecosystems 32 Human 

Impact on the Biosphere 

BIOLOGY 

3rd Edition 

By Bruce Knox (Deceased), Pauline Ladiges and Barbara Evans 

of University of Melbourne and Robert Saint, Australian National 

Univeristy 

2004 (Sept 2004) / 1240 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471325-9 / MHID: 0-07-471325-6 

[McGraw-Hill Australia Title] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/knox3e 

The new third edition of the leading Australian Biology text 

has been significantly reviewed and revised to incorporate the 

needs and requests of Australian universities and academics. 

Drawing from the many strengths of the second edition of the 

text, this third edition successfully strikes a balance between the 

academic rigour that instructors demand and the simplicity that 

students need. New international examples are accompanied 

not only by Australian examples, but also by examples from 

New Zealand. Knox 3e offers students the key principles essential 

to an understanding of fundamental introductory Biology 

challenges. The appearance, structure and presentation of the 

new edition is substantially different to the previous edition in 

many respects. Technology is now part of the text, rather than 

being an added extra. Animal form and function and Plant form 

and function are now grouped as two individual parts. Students 

who purchase the new edition automatically get access to online 

content such as self-quizzing exercises as well as local and international 

journal articles. Visually, the text is clear and engaging, 

especially with regard to figures, photos and other graphics, 

ensuring that the learning process is an enjoyable one. 

CONTENTS 

Introduction--The nature of biology and science Part 1 – Cell Biology 

and Energetics 1 Molecules of life 2 The chemistry of life 3 Functioning 

cells 4 Movement across membranes 5 Harvesting energy 6 Cells, tissues 

and signals 7 Cell division Part 2 – Genetics and Molecular Biology 

8 Inheritance 9 Genes, chromosomes and DNA 10 The genetic code 

11 Gene expression 12 Genomes, mutation and cancer 13 Genetic 

engineering and biotechnology Part 3 – Plant Form and Function 14 

Reproduction, growth and development of flowering plants 15 Structure 

of plants 16 Plant nutrition, transport and adaptation to stress 17 Plant 

hormones and growth responses Part 4--Animal Form and Function 

18 Animal reproduction 19 Animal development 20 Animal and human 

nutrition 21 Gas exchange in animals 22 Circulation 23 Water, 

solutes and excretion 24 Innate defences and the immune system 25 

Hormonal control in animals 26 Nervous systems 27 Animal movement 

28 Animal behaviour 29 Animals responding to environmental stress 

Part 5--Evolution and Biodiversity 30 Evolving life 31 Evolving earth 

32 Mechanisms of evolution 33 Bacteria 34 Viruses 35 The protists 36 

Plants 37 Fungi 38 Simple animals: sponges to flatworms 39 Annelids, 

molluscs, nematodes and arthropods 40 Echinoderms and chordates 

Part 6 – Ecology 41 Australian biota 42 Population ecology 43 Living 

in communities 44 Ecosystems 45 Human impacts / Appendix 1 Classification 

of cellular organisms / Glossary / Credits / Index 

99 


9/29/2006 1:19:14 PM


New 

Laboratory 


INQUIRY INTO LIFE 

12th Edition 

By Sylvia Mader 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298682-2 / MHID: 0-07-298682-4 

The laboratory exercises in this manual are coordinated with 

Inquiry into Life. The text emphasizes how we can apply biological 

knowledge to our own lives and to our relationships 

with other organisms. Although each laboratory is referenced 

to the appropriate chapter in Inquiry into Life, this manual may 

be used in coordination with other general biology texts. This 

manual can be adapted to a variety of course orientations and 

designs. There are a sufficient number of laboratories to permit 

a choice of activities over the length of the course. Many 

activities may be performed as demonstrations rather than as 

student activities, thereby shortening the time required to cover 

a particular concept. 

FEATURES 

• Customizable. Inquiry into Life Lab Manual is chapter-by-chapter 

color customizable through Primis Online so you and your students 

use only the exercises you want. 

• Integrated Opening. Each laboratory begins with a list of learning 

objectives that are organized according to the major sections of the 

laboratory. The major sections of the labs are numbered on the opening 

page, in the lab material, and in the review. 

• Self-Contained Content. Each lab contains all the background information 

necessary to understand the concepts being studied and to 

answer the questions asked. This feature will reduce student frustration 

and increase learning. 

• Scientific Method. All laboratories stress the scientific method, and 

many opportunities are given for students to gain an appreciation of the 

scientific process. The first laboratory of this edition explicitly explains 

the steps of the scientific method and gives students an opportunity 

to use them. 

• Student Activities. A color bar is used to designate a student activity. 

Some student activities are observations and some are experimental 

procedures. An icon appears whenever a procedure requires a period of 

time before results can be viewed. Sequentially numbered steps guide 

students as they perform an activity. 

• Live Materials. Although students work with living material during 

some part of almost all laboratories, the exercises are designed to be 

completed within one laboratory session. This facilitates the use of the 

manual in multiple-section courses. 

• Laboratory Safety. Lab safety is of prime importance, and the listing 

on page vii will assist instructors in their efforts to make the lab experience 

a safe one. 

• A Laboratory Resource Guide--The lab resource guide is available to 

instructors and lab assistants via the password protected Instructor Center 

of Mader: Human Biology’s A.R.I.S., text specific website. 

• Each lab exercise is designed to be completed within one laboratory 

session. 

CONTENTS 

To the Instructor / To the Student / Laboratory Safety / Part 1 Cell Biology 

1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Chemical 

Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Mitosis and Meiosis 

6 Enzymes 7 Cellular Respiration Part 2 Plant Biology 8 Photosynthesis 

9 Organization of Flowering Plants 10 Reproduction in Flowering Plants 

Part 3 Maintenance of the Human Body 11 Animal Organization 12 

Chemical Aspects of Digestion 13 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 14 

Cardiovascular System 15 Features of the Cardiovascular System 16 

Basic Mammalian Anatomy II 17 Homeostasis Part 4 Integration and 

Control of the Human Body 18 Nervous System and Senses 19 Musculoskeletal 

System Part 5 Continuance of the Species 20 Development 

21 Patterns of Inheritance 22 DNA Biology and Technology 23 Genetic 

Counseling Part 6 Evolution and Diversity 24 Evidences of Evolution 

25 Microbiology 26 Seedless Plants 27 Seed Plants 28 Introduction to 

Invertebrates 29 Molluscs, Annelids, and Arthropods 30 Echinoderms 

and Chordates Part 7 Behavior and Ecology 31 Sampling Ecosystems 32 

Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems / Appendix A Preparing a Laboratory 

Report/Laboratory Report Form Appendix B Metric System Appendix C 

Classification of Organisms 

New 


CONCEPTS IN BIOLOGY 

12th Edition 

By Eldon Enger and Frederick Ross of Delta College 

2007 (March 2007) / 304 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298663-1 / MHID: 0-07-298663-8 


• Each exercise begins with a set of objectives detailing what the student 

should be able to accomplish after completing the exercise. 

• Each exercise begins with a “Safety Box” describing important safety 

procedures for the exercise. 

• The first exercise introduces students to the scientific method. 

• Each exercise has a detailed introduction describing what students 

will encounter in the exercise. 

CONTENTS 

Lab Exercise 1: Metric Measurement and the Scientific Method Lab 

Exercise 2: Atoms and Molecules Lab Exercise 3: Diffusion and Osmosis 

Lab Exercise 4: Structure of Some Organic Molecules Lab Exercise 5: The 

Microscope Lab Exercise 6: Survey of Cell Types: Structure and Function 

Lab Exercise 7: Enzymes Lab Exercise 8: Photosynthesis and Respiration 

Lab Exercise 9: The Chemistry and Ecology of Yogurt Production Lab 

Exercise 10: DNA and RNA: Structure and Function Lab Exercise 11: 

Mitosis-Cell Division Lab Exercise 12: Meiosis Lab Exercise 13: DNA 

Extraction Lab Exercise 14: Genetics Problems Lab Exercise 15: Genetic 

Ratios and Chi-Square Analysis Lab Exercise 16: Human Variation Lab 

Exercise 17: Sensory Abilities Lab Exercise 18: Population Demographics 

Lab Exercise 19: Population Genetics Simulation Lab Exercise 20: 

Bacterial Selection Lab Exercise 21: The Effect of Abiotic Factors on 

Habitat Preference Lab Exercise 22: Successional Changes in Vegetation 

Lab Exercise 23: Behavioral Differences in Small Mammals Lab Exercise 

24: Plant Life Cycles Lab Exercise 25: Plant Structure and Function Lab 

Exercise 26: Natural Selection Lab Exercise 27: Species Diversity Lab 

Exercise 28: Frog Dissection Lab Exercise 29: Roll Call of the Animals 

Lab Exercise 30: Intraspecific and Interspecific Competition Appendix 

A: Chi-Square (Goodness of Fit) Test Appendix B: Math Review 

• Each lab exercise concludes with review and thought questions. 

100 


9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM

New 


ESSENTIALS OF BIOLOGY 


2007 (May 2006) / 304 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340341-0 / MHID: 0-07-340341-5 

CONTENTS 

1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Cell 

Structure and Function 4 Enzymes 5 Cellular Respiration 6 Photosynthesis 

7 Mitosis and Meiosis 8 Patterns of Inheritance 9 DNA Biology 

and Technology 10 Genetic Counseling 11 Evidences of Evolution 12 

Microbiology 13 Seedless Plants and Seed Plants 14 Plant Anatomy 

and Growth 15 Animal Diversity 16 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 17 

Cardiovascular System 18 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 19 Basic 

Mammalian Anatomy II 20 Nervous System and Senses 21 Effects of 

Pollution on Ecosystems Appendix A: Metric System Practical Examination 

Answer Sheet 

INTERACTIVE LABORATORY AND BIOLOGICAL 

SIMULATIONS 

Version 2.0, 2nd Edition 

By Deanne Raineri, University of Illinois 

2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 

(CD and Workbook) 

Interactive Laboratories and Biological Simulations dynamically 

illustrate molecular genetics and biotechnology through lively, 

engaging tutorials and interactive, inquiry-based labs. Developed 

as a collaboration between instructors and students, iLaBS 

provides rigorous yet entertaining exercises that relate lecture 

and lab content to real-life applications. 

CONTENTS 

Interactive Laboratories / Cystic Fibrosis Lab (Case A) / Cystic Fibrosis 

Lab (Case B) / Sickle Cell Anemia Lab / Huntington’s Disease Lab / 

Hemophilia Lab / Restriction Mapping Lab / Solving a Murder Mystery 

/ Lac Operon Exercise 1 / Lac Operon Exercise 2 / Biological Simulations 

/ Basic Techniques in Molecular Biology / A Murder Mystery / 

The Romanov Mystery / DNA Replication / The Polymerase Chain 

Reaction / Sequencing / Transcription / Viruses / Regulation of Lactose 

(Lac) Operon 


General Biology 

Non Majors & Majors Combined 

Textbook 


New 

LIFE 

6th Edition 

By Ricki Lewis, SUNY-at Albany, Bruce Parker, Utah Valley State 

College-Orem, Douglas Gaffin and Marielle Hoefnagels of University 

of Oklahoma-Norman 

2007 (Jan 2006) / 1024 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322480-0 / MHID: 0-07-322480-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110802-7 / MHID: 0-07-110802-5 [IE] 

Classroom concepts “come to life” with this exciting new edition 

of Life by Lewis, Parker, Gaffin and Hoefnagels. For over 15 

years, Life has been known for its ability to weave together solid 

biology content with interesting stories, real-life case studies and 

applications to student life. The sixth edition offers the depth of 

content, pedagogical organization, accuracy and visual appeal 

to serve both majors and non-majors biology students. 


• McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips DVD. Licensed from 

some of the highest-quality science video producers in the World, these 



• Of Atoms and Molecules: Chemistry Basics chapter (Chapter 2) 

has been separated into two distinct chapters, entitled Chemistry and 

Organic Molecules, to help make these concepts easier for students 

to master. 

• Integrated, end-of-chapter Study Guide, containing a summary, quiz 

questions and additional study aids. 

• Concise chapter opening vignettes. 

• A dedicated Genetic Technology chapter now appears in the text, 

combining information into one area for cohesive coverage of topics 

such as cancer research, DNA replication, gene therapy and biological 

weapons. 

Features 

• Many chapters feature a new organization of major headings within 

the chapter. 

• Life, 6/e is customizable. 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








• Where appropriate, chapters include genetics problems for students 

to solve with answers in an appendix. 

• A carefully-developed art program coordinates colors throughout 

the book for instructional value. 

• Numbered process figures walk students through key processes 

such as the cell cycle. 

• Engaging writing combines solid biology content with interesting 

stories, real-life case studies and applications to student life. 

• Online Learning Center located at http://www.mhhe.com/life6 

• Life employs a lively, story-telling style and uses current, true-life 

examples to engage student interest. 

101 


9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM


CONTENTS 

Unit 1 From Atoms to Cells 1 What is Life 2 Of Atoms and Molecules: 

Chemistry Basics 3 Life’s Chemistry 4 Cells 5 The Cell Surface and Cytoskeleton 

6 The Energy of Life 7 Photosynthesis 8 How Cells Release 

Energy Unit 2 Genetics & Biotechnology 9 The Cell Cycle 10 Meiosis 

11 How Inherited Traits are Transmitted 12 Chromosomes 13 DNA 

Structure and Function 14 Genetic Technology Unit 3 Evolution 15 

The Evolution of Evolutionary Thought 16 The Forces of Evolutionary 

Change--Microevolution 17 Speciation and Extinction 18 Evidence for 

Evolution 19 The Origin and History of Life Unit 4 The Diversity of Life 

20 Viruses 21 Bacteria and Archaea 22 Protista 23 Plantae 24 Fungi 25 

Animalia I: Sponges Through Echinoderms 26 Animalia II: Chordates 

Unit 5 Plant Life 27 Plant Form and Function 28 Plant Nutrition and 

Transport 29 Reproduction of Flowering Plants 30 Plant Responses to 

Stimuli Unit 6 Animal Life 31 Animal Tissues and Organ Systems 32 

The Nervous System 33 The Senses 34 The Endocrine System 35 The 

Musculoskeletal System 36 The Circulatory System 37 The Respiratory 

System 38 Digestion and Nutrition 39 Regulation of Temperature and 

Body Fluids 40 The Immune System 41 Human Reproduction and 

Development Unit 7 Behavior and Ecology 42 Animal Behavior 43 

Populations 44 Communities and Ecosystems 45 Biomes and Aquatic 

Ecosystems 46 Environmental Challenges 


New 

BIOLOGY 

9th Edition 


2007 (Dec 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320928-9 / MHID: 0-07-320928-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110780-8 / MHID: 0-07-110780-0 [IE] 

Biology is a comprehensive introductory biology textbook for 

non-majors or mixed-majors courses that covers biology in a 

traditional order from the structure and function of the cell to 

the organization of the biosphere. The book, which centers on 

the evolution and diversity of organisms, is appropriate for a 

one- or two-semester course. It’s no wonder that Sylvia Mader’s 

Biology continues to be a text that’s appreciated as much by 

instructors as it is by the students who use it. The ninth edition 

is the epitome of Mader’s expertise: Its concise, precise writing 

uses an economy of words to present the material as succinctly 

and clearly as possible, thereby enabling students--even nonmajors--to 

understand the concepts without necessarily asking 

the instructor to explain further. 


• McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips DVD. Licensed from 

some of the highest-quality science video producers in the world, these 



• Approximately 70 new animations of key biological processes 

accompany Biology 9e. Approximately 50 of these animations are 

available in a Spanish version. 

• Key content updates are based on reviewer suggestions and biological 

discoveries: 

» Chapter 9 The Cell Cycle and Cellular Reproduction This chapter 

was reorganized and updated. The description of stages now applies 

to both plant and animal cells with differences still clearly designated. 

A new section, “The Functions of Mitosis,” includes a Science Focus 

reading on Reproductive and Therapeutic Cloning. The cancer section 

has been completely rewritten to include the origin of cancer and how 

it relates to the regulation of the cell cycle. The action of oncogenes 

and tumor repressor genes is stressed. 

» Chapter 15 Regulation of Gene Activity and Gene Mutations The 

importance of gene activity control has taken on new significance because 

we now know that humans have far fewer genes than previously 

estimated before the sequencing of the human genome. This chapter was 

revised to reflect the importance of chromatin organization, transcription 

factors and activators to the control of gene activity within the nucleus. 

Translational control within the cytoplasm including the possible role of 

RNA to expand each gene’s functions is discussed as is the importance 

of gene mutations to the development of cancer. 

» Chapter 16 Biotechnology and Genomics This chapter updated 

and the topic of genomics was expanded to include a discussion of a 

genomic profile, proteomics, and bioinformatics. The importance of all 

these advances for improved health care is explored. 

» Chapter 18 Process of Evolution This chapter was reorganized 

to include a section on microevolution and macroevolution. Under 

macroevolution a more thorough discussion of speciation due to 

reproductive isolating mechanisms precedes real-life examples of allopatric 

speciation. 

» Chapter 20 Classification of Living Organisms This chapter was 

rewritten and now includes a better explanation of the phylogenetic 

tree and its relationship to the classification and evolutionary relationships 

between organisms. The utilization of molecular data to guide 

classification from domain to species is stressed. A new Science Focus 

reading describes the proposal to use DNA differences as a basis to 

develop bar codes for all living species. 

» Chapter 23 The Fungi This chapter was reorganized to reflect the 

classification of fungi based on DNA sequencing. Fungi previously classified 

as imperfect fungi have been incorporated into the ascomycetes, 

and this chapter now has an expanded discussion of the sac fungi and 

their relationship to human beings. 

» Chapter 25 Structure and Organization of Plants A generalized flowering 

plant has been developed to present the basics of plant anatomy. 

New additional structural information pervades this chapter, which seeks 

to have students understand the overall functioning of a flowering plant. 

The discussion of primary versus secondary growth has been expanded 

to provide a better explanation for plant growth. 

» Part VI Animal Evolution This part has been reorganized to be 

consistent with molecular data regarding the relationship of groups 

of animals. Traditional classification is the backbone of this part but 

new hypotheses regarding the classification of animals are introduced. 

To accommodate the new hypotheses, Chapter 30 now includes molluscs, 

annelids, arthropods and echinoderms. Chapter 31 is devoted 

exclusively to the vertebrates. 

» Chapter 33 Animal Organization and Homeostasis Reorganization 

of each section in this chapter will lead to better student understanding 

of tissues, organs, and organ systems. Professors will particularly appreciate 

the new homeostasis diagrams that explain negative feedback 

mechanisms. A new Health Focus regarding nerve regeneration stresses 

advances in this field and touches on the possible use of stem cells to 

cure paralysis. 

» Chapter 35 Lymph Transport and Immunity This chapter has been 

updated and revised to include updated explanations of nonspecific and 

specific defenses. New data regarding the role of chronic inflammatory 

response to human illnesses is included. This chapter also has a new 

Health Focus reading regarding Opportunistic Infections and HIV. 

» Chapter 42 Hormones and the Endocrine Systems This chapter 

now begins with an overview of the endocrine system, which includes 

a contrast between hormone and nervous signaling. An in-depth look 

at hormone signaling follows. The review of endocrine glands and their 

hormones includes an updated discussion of diabetes mellitus. 

» Chapter 44 Animal Development This chapter is reorganized to 

present a more logical progression of animal developmental stages 

before developmental processes are explained. The discussion of 

developmental processes places an emphasis on experimental data to 

explain the orderliness of development. As before, the chapter ends 

with a look at the stages of human development. 

» Chapter 46 Ecology of Populations This chapter was reorganized 

and rewritten to better present the modern principles of population ecology. 

The sections now include demographics of populations, population 

growth models, and regulation of population size before life history 

patterns and human population growth is considered. 

102 


9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM

• Phonetic pronunciations have been added to the Glossary. 

• All text, artwork, and photos necessary to understand a particular 

concept (e.g., prokaryotic vs. eukaryotic replication) appear either on 

the same page or facing pages. 

Features 

• Every piece of artwork in Biology 9e is either new or revised. 

Additionally, scores of photographs are new to this edition. The new 

creative paging process retains the functional page spreads but enhances 

the role of art and photos in creating the most effective and appealing 

pages possible. 

• Multi-level perspective figures combine macroscopic (e.g., section 

of intestine) and microscopic (micrograph slice of intestinal tissue) 

images to illustrate subject from larger to smaller. See body systems 

chapters for many examples. 

• The accompanying Online Learning Center serves as a comprehensive 

study tool for students and location for a vast array of teaching 

resources for instructors. Online Learning Center content examples 

include sample quiz questions, learning objectives, flashcards, art 

labeling exercises, and access to current articles and research. 

• Brief “Focus” boxes covering Science, Health, and Ecology present 

relevant applications issues to students. 

• Bioethical Issue topics end many chapters and present both side of 

contemporary issues such as the use of alternative medicines available 

over the counter. 

• Connecting the Concepts boxes appear at the end of most chapters 

and establish connections between the concepts of the chapter and 

other concepts throughout the book. 

• Full-Color Customization--Professors have the option of creating 

a customized version of the text by selecting only the chapters they 

cover in lecture, providing students with significant savings in book 

costs. Customization can occur in two ways:--Chapter-by-chapter color 

customized printed book or a full-color Primis eBook. 

Contents 

1 A View of Life Part I The Cell 2 Basic Chemistry 3 The Chemistry of 

Organic Molecules 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Membrane Structure 

and Function 6 Metabolism: Energy and Enzymes 7 Photosynthesis 8 

Cellular Respiration Part II Genetic Basis of Life 9 The Cell Cycle and 

Cellular Reproduction 10 Meiosis and Sexual Reproduction 11 Mendelian 

Patterns of Inheritance 12 Chromosomal Patterns of Inheritance 

13 DNA Structure and Functions 14 Gene Activity: How Genes Work 

15 Regulation of Gene Activity and Gene Mutations 16 Biotechnology 

and Genomics Part III Evolution 17 Darwin and Evolution 18 Process 

of Evolution 19 Origin and History of Life 20 Classification of Living 

Things Part IV Microbiology and Evolution 21 Viruses, Bacteria, and 

Archaea 22 The Protists 23 The Fungi Part V Plant Evolution and Biology 

24 Evolution and Diversity of Plants 25 Structure and Organization of 

Plants 26 Nutrition and Transport in Plants 27 Control of Growth and 

Responses in Plants 28 Reproduction in Plants Part VI Animal Evolution 

29 Introduction to Invertebrates 30 More Invertebrates 31 Vertebrates 

32 Human Evolution Part VII Comparative Animal Biology 33 Animal 

Organization and Homeostasis 34 Circulation and Cardiovascular 

Systems 35 Lymph Transport and Immunity 36 Digestive Systems 

and Nutrition 37 Respiratory Systems 38 Body Fluid Regulation and 

Excretory Systems 39 Neurons and Nervous Systems 40 Sense Organs 

41 Locomotion and Support Systems 42 Hormones and the Endocrine 

Systems 43 Reproductive Systems 44 Animal Development Part VIII 

Behavior and Ecology 45 Animal Behavior 46 Ecology of Populations 

47 Community Ecology 48 Ecosystems and Human Interferences 49 

The Biosphere 50 Conservation Biology 

New 


Laboratory 

LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY BIOLOGY 

9th Edition 


2007 (March 2006) / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298955-7 / MHID: 0-07-298955-6 

The Laboratory Manual to accompany Biology reflects all of the 

exceptional features of the Biology text. Instructors appreciate 

the refined exercises that are so numerous you won’t need to 

look anywhere else for student activities. Author Sylvia Mader’s 

writing in the laboratory manual, just as in the text, emphasizes 

clarity, with carefully worded study questions that are direct in 

their intent and purpose. The lab manual’s accessible writing 

accompanies unparalleled illustrations to provide students with 

clear exercises and questions. The visuals have been updated 

to be even easier for students--both majors and non-majors--to 

comprehend. The dramatic illustrations and photographs not 

only help students understand concepts and process, but also 

give them an appreciation for the beauty of organisms and biological 

structure. McGraw-Hill’s Biology Digitized Video Clips 

on the accompanying DVD will capture students’ interest while 

illustrating key biological concepts and processes. 

Features 

• All labs stress the scientific method. 

• A Laboratory Resource Guide is featured on the Instructor Edition 

of the Online Learning Center. 

• Customization. An adopting professor has the option of creating a 

full-color customized version of this lab manual by selecting only the 

exercises covered in a particular lab course. Adding additional professor-developed 

exercises is easy as well. 

• Integrated Opening. Each laboratory begins with a list of learning 

objectives that are organized according to the major sections of the 

laboratory. 

• Self-Contained Content. Each lab contains all the background information 

necessary to understand the concepts being studied and to 

answer the questions asked. 

• Student Activities. A color bar is used to designate a student activity. 

Some student activities are observations and some are experimental 

procedures. An icon appears whenever a procedure requires a period of 

time before results can be viewed. Sequentially numbered steps guide 

students as they perform an activity. 

Contents 

Preface / To the Instructor / To the Student / Laboratory Safety / 1 

Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Chemical 

Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Enzymes 6 

Photosynthesis 7 Cellular Respiration 8 Mitosis and Meiosis 9 Mendelian 

Genetics 10 Human Genetics 11 DNA and Biotechnology 12 

Evidences of Evolution 13 Mechanisms in Evolution: Genetic Drift and 

Natural Selection 14 Bacteria and Protists 15 Fungi 16 Nonvascular and 

Seedless Vascular Plants 17 Seed Plants 18 Organization of Flowering 

Plants 19 Water Absorption and Transport in Plants 20 Control of Plant 

Growth and Responses 21 Reproduction in Plants 22 Introduction to 

Invertebrates 23 The Protostomes 24 The Deuterostomes 25 Animal 

Organization 26 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 27 Basic Mammalian 

Anatomy II 28 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 29 Homeostasis 30 

Nervous System and Senses 31 Musculoskeletal System 32 Animal 

Development 33 Symbiotic Relationships 34 Sampling Ecosystems 35 

Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems 

103 


9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM



SIMULATIONS 



2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 








CONTENTS 








(Lac) Operon 


SCHAUM’S 3000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN BIOLOGY 

By Stephen Bernstein and Ruth Bernstein of University of Colorado 

at Boulder 

1989 / 406 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-005022-8 / MHID: 0-07-005022-8 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-099157-6 / MHID: 0-07-099157-X [IE] 

]A Schaum Professional Publication] 

(International Edition is not for sale in Japan) 

New 


Textbook 

BIOLOGY 

By Robert Brooker, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis, Eric Widmaier, 

Boston University, Linda Graham, University of Wisconsin- 

Madison and Peter Stiling, University of South Florida-Tampa 

2008 (January 2007) / 1488 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326807-1 / MHID: 0-07-326807-0 

Coming in January 2007, McGraw-Hill will publish the most 

carefully developed NEW biology textbook in the history of 

our company. Brooker et al Biology combines the talent of four 

active researchers and experienced textbook authors to create 

a comprehensive modern text featuring an evolutionary focus 

with an emphasis on scientific inquiry.--Four active researchers--Four 

experienced text authors--Comprehensive and modern 

approach--Evolutionary focus--Emphasizes scientific inquiry-- 

Realistic, integrated (3-D) visual program 

FEATURES 

• Evolution--A strong evolutionary approach 

The author team delivers a clear theme of evolution through natural 

selection through out each chapter by use of genomes and proteomes. 

This engages students who are reading popular press about these topics 

and encourages their study of biology. It sets the stage of future biology 

courses and/or career opportunities. 

• Content--Top notch and break through content 

Provides the most accurate and up to date reference book on the market 

that will assist students throughout their college career and beyond. The 

Brooker texts will also provide a useful resource to students. 

• Investigative Approach--From the first chapter, the Brooker author 

team guides the reader through how the investigation of living things 

leads to discoveries that no one would have imagined. This is emphasized 

in the Feature Investigation boxes throughout the text. Each Feature 

Investigation highlights important experiments in the various fields of 

biology and the relevance to the discoveries. 

• Art--Instructive visuals 

The student can understand what is going on in the figures/photos 

with out necessarily reading the narrative. Visual learners will especially 

benefit from the clear and concise art/photos. Brand new art, 

all consistent! 

• Integrated Scientific method--You get the traditional TOC, but the 

benefit of integrated feature investigations throughout the narrative at 

appropriate areas in every chapter. 

• Strong Author Team--The best education tool is available with this 

new textbook because this new author team is current researchers, 

active/award-winning teachers, and experienced authors with current 

textbooks in their field of expertise. 

• Balanced pedagogy--Everything in the book is important and the 

student is not overwhelmed by lots of pedagogy (boxes, tables, insights…). 

• 360 Degree Development Plan--The development of Brooker Biology 

has truly gone full circle to guarantee customers the most accurate, 

authoritative new majors biology textbook ever launched in this market. 

This plan includes: 

7 Developmental Focus Groups – 1 for each unit of the book. Never 

before done in publishing development….Each unit was extensively 

reviewed and critiqued by experts in the field from across the country 

to make sure the development of this textbook met the needs of instructors/students. 

This step was taken with the authors present to improve 

the early draft writing of the manuscript. 

6 Freelance Developmental Editors--A monumental undertaking to bring 

in a large staff of developmental editors to make sure the content was 

accurate, concise, and well connected between the other authors and 

it’s important illustration program. 

Steps Taken to Assure Accuracy--*11 Accuracy Checkers *3 Photo 

Consultants *Board of Consultants for Textbook *Board of Consultants 

for Media 

CONTENTS 

1 An Introduction to Biology Unit 1 Chemistry 2 The Chemical Basis 

of Life I: Atoms, Molecules, and Water 3 The Chemical Basis of Life 

II: Organic Molecules Unit 2 Cell 4 General Features of Cells 5 Membrane 

Structure and Transport 6 Systems Biology of Cell Organization 7 

Enzymes, Metabolism and Cellular Respiration 8 Photosynthesis 9 Cell 

Communication and Regulation of the Cell Cycle 10 Multicellularity 

Unit 3 Genetics 11 Nucleic Acid Structure and DNA Replication 12 

Gene Expression at the Molecular Level 13 Gene Regulation 14 Mutation, 

DNA Repair, and Cancer 15 Eukaryotic Chromosomes, Mitosis, and 

Meiosis 16 Simle Patterns of Inheritance 17 Complex Patterns of Inheritance 

18 Genetics of Bacteria and Viruses 19 Developmental Genetics 

20 Genetic Technology 21 Genomes, Proteomes, and Bioinformatics 

104 


9/29/2006 1:19:15 PM


Unit 4 Evolution 22 Origin and History of Life 23 An Introduction to 

Evolution 24 Population Genetics 25 Origin of Species 26 Taxonomy 

and Systematics Unit 5 Diversity 27 The Bacteria and Archaea 28 

Protists 29 The Kingdom Fungi 30 Plants and the Conquest of Land 31 

The Diversity of Modern Gymnosperms and Angiosperms 32 An Introduction 

to Animal Diversity 33 The Invertebrates 34 Vertebrates Unit 

6 Plants 35 An Introduction to Flowering Plants 36 Flowering Plants: 

Behavior 37 Flowering Plants: Nutrition 38 Flowering Plants: Transport 

39 Flowering Plants: Reproduction and Development Unit 7 Animals 

40 Introduction to Animal Form and Function 41 Nutrition, Digestion, 

and Absorption 42 Control of Energy Balance, Metabolic Rate, and 

Body Temperature 43 Neuroscience I: Cells of the Nervous System 

44 Neuroscience II: Evolution and Function of the Brain and Nervous 

Systems 45 Neuroscience III: Sensory Systems 46 The Muscular-Skeletal 

System and Locomotion 47 Circulatory Systems 48 Gas Exchange 49 

Excretory Systems and Salt and Water Balance 50 Endocrine Systems 51 

Animal Reproduction 52 Animal Development 53 Defense Mechanisms 

of the Body Unit 8 Ecology 54 An Introduction to Ecology and Biomes 

55 Behavioral Ecology 56 Population Ecology 57 Species Interactions 

58 Community Ecology 59 Ecosystem Ecology 60 Conservation Biology 

and Biodiversity 


New 

BIOLOGY 

8th Edition 

By Peter Raven, Missouri Botanical Gardens, George Johnson, Washington 

University-St Louis, Kenneth Mason, Purdue University-West 

Lafayette, Jonathan Losos, Washington University-St Louis and Susan 

Singer, Carleton College 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322739-9 / MHID: 0-07-322739-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110202-5 / MHID: 0-07-110202-7 [IE] 

BIOLOGY is an authoritative majors textbook with evolution as a 

unifying theme. In revising the text, McGraw-Hill has consulted 

extensively with previous users, noted experts and professors 

in the field. It is distinguished from other texts by its strong 

emphasis on natural selection and the evolutionary process 

that explains biodiversity. The new 8th edition will feature the 

latest in cutting edge content reflective of the rapid advances 

in Biology and will also offer a Dynamic, Realistic, Accurate 

New Visual Program. 


• Dynamic Author Team--This new team is comprised of Susan Singer, 

Plant Geneticist--Carleton College, Jonathan Losos, Evolutionary Biologist--Harvard 

University, and Ken Mason, Molecular Biologist--Purdue 

University have joined forces and completely overhauled the textbook. 

They were able to successfully modernize the content of the material, 

while maintaining the historical context to the subject matter. 

• Thorough Reorganization of Material--The author team worked closely 

in conjunction with a copy editor to create a sense of unity, providing 

a seamless and balanced presentation of the material. The material has 

been reorganized, including splitting excessively long chapters into 

more manageable components where appropriate. These adjustments 

were made in response to feedback from our many reviewers 

Part of the reorganization has been to ensure that a tightly structured 

pedagogical framework is carried throughout each chapter. This consistent 

flow gives the student a better learning tool. It also allows an instructor 

ease in assigning or eliminating specific sections from a chapter. 

• Strengthened Evolutionary Emphasis--From the inception of Biology, 

evolution has been the underlying theme of the text. The Eighth edition 

has been written with an even greater focus on evolution, beginning 

with the first chapter and more consistently threaded it throughout the 

entire text. There has been a significant increase of coverage at the 

molecular level to create more depth in this area, again balancing the 

amount of evolutionary coverage throughout. 

• Experimental Focus--The authors use existing scientific evidence to 

reinforce biological concepts within the narrative when a particularly 

elegant story exists. Talking about actual experiments within the flow of 

text, rather than a boxed reading or solitary figure, helps students make 

the connection between actual people doing science and the contents 

of the textbook they are reading. 

• Updated Molecular Coverage--The team has brought more modern 

information by incorporating even more molecular information throughout 

the text, which is most evident in the evolution section where two 

new chapters on molecular evolution have been added. 

• Organizational Changes 

* Pattern of Inheritance divided into two chapters allowing more focus 

on heredity and Mendelian principles, and the expanded explanation 

of chromosomal theory of inheritance(12 & 13). 

* Evolution Unit--Expanded coverage of Evolution based on latest 

research in molecular biology. 

Jonathon Losos of Harvard expanded and updated this key unit of text. 

Moved Systematics & Phylogeny Chapter to this unit from Diversity unit. 

= new chapter 23. Split old chapter 24 into two new chapters: 

24 Genome Evolution 

25 Evolution of Development 

* Systematics and the Phylogenetic Revolution Chapter (23) has been 

greatly expanded creating this new chapter. Systematics 

* Expanded Diversity Unit--Chapter 26. This new dedicated chapter on 

diversity coverage was developed by taking content from the previous 

edition, plus adding new information on key events in evolution. This 

chapter can be used as a stand alone chapter for instructors who are 

only able to cover a small amount of diversity in their course. Includes 

Expanded coverage of new molecular understanding of phylogeny 

* Animal Unit--Reorganized and expanded coverage of animal biology 

starting with Nervous System (like Campbell) 











CONTENTS 

Part I The Molecular Basis of Life 1 The Science of Biology 2 The Nature 

of Molecules 3 The Chemical Building Blocks of Life Part II Biology 

of the Cell 4 Cell Structure 5 Membranes 6 Energy and Metabolism 7 

How Cells Harvest Energy 8 Photosynthesis 9 Cell-Cell Interactions 10 

How Cells Divide Part III Genetic and Molecular Biology 11 Sexual 

Reproduction and Meiosis 12 Patterns of Inheritance 13 Chromosomes, 

Mapping and the Meiosis—Inheritance Connection 14 DNA: The 

Genetic Material 15 Genes and How They Work 16 Control of Gene 

Expression 17 Biotechnology 18 Genomics 19 Cellular Mechanisms of 

Development Part IV Evolution 20 Genes Within Populations 21 The 

Evidence for Evolution 22 The Origin of Species 23 Systematics and 

the Phylogenetic Revolution 24 Genome Evolution 25 Evolution of Development 

Part V Diversity of Life on Earth 26 Tree of Life 27 Viruses 

28 Prokaryotes 29 Protists 30 Overview of Plant Diversity 31 Fungi 32 

Overview of Animal Diversity 33 Noncoelomate Invertebrates 34 Coelomate 

Invertebrates 35 Vertebrates Part VI Plant Form and Function 

36 Plant Form 37 Vegetative Plant Development 38 Transport in Plants 

39 Plant Nutrition 40 Plant Defense Responses 41 Sensory Systems in 

Plants 42 Plant Reproduction Part VII Animal Form and Function 43 

The Animal Body and Principles of Regulation 44 The Nervous System 

45 Sensory Systems 46 The Endocrine System 47 The Musculoskeletal 

System 48 The Digestive System 49 The Circulatory and Respiratory 

Systems 50 Temperature, Osmotic Regulation and the Urinary System 

105 


9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM


51 The Integumentary & Immune Systems 52 The Reproductive Systems 

53 Animal Development Part VIII Ecology and Behavior 54 Behavioral 

Biology 55 Population Ecology 56 Community Ecology 57 Dynamics 

of Ecosystems 58 The Biosphere 59 Conservation Biology 


Laboratory 

New 

BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS LAB MANUAL 

8th Edition 

By Warren Dolphin, Iowa State University 

2008 (January 2007) / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299287-8 / MHID: 0-07-299287-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110201-8 / MHID: 0-07-110201-9 [IE] 

This independent lab manual can be used for a one or two-semester 

majors level general biology lab and can be used with 

any majors-level general biology textbook. The labs are investigative 

and ask students to use more critical thinking and handson 

learning. The author emphasizes investigative, quantitative, 

and comparative approaches to studying the life sciences. 


• The instructor’s manual to the lab manual can be found at www. 

mhhe.com/labcentral 

• Revised Art Program--More than 90 figures have been reived or 

replaced throughout the textbook. 

• How To Evaluate Web Material--Information on evaluating material 

gathered on the web has been added to Lab Topic 1. 

FEATURES 

• Emphasis on Hypothesis Testing--Throughout the manual, the concept 

of hypothesis testing as the basic method of inquiry has been emphasized. 

Students are asked to form hypotheses to be tested during their 

lab work and then are asked to reach a conclusion to accept or reject 

their hypotheses. 

• Labs Consistently Organized--Icons throughout the lab manual distinguish 

activities and critical thinking questions. 

• “Understanding Scientific Terminology”--This useful chart is located 

on the inside of the back cover of the Lab Manual. This is a table of 

Greek and Latin prefixes and suffixes that will help students decipher 

the meaning of scientific terminology. 

• Customizeable!--Instructors can customize this text using our do-ityourself 

website! The Primis Content Center features more than one 

million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw- 

Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, 






CONTENTS 

1 Science: A Way of Gathering Knowledge 2 Techniques in Microscopy 

3 Cellular Structure Reflects Function 4 Determining How Materials 

Enter Cells 5 Using Quantitative Techniques and Statistics 6 Modeling 

Biological Molecules 7 Determining the Properties of an Enzyme 8 

Measuring Cellular Respiration 9 Determining Chromosome Number 

in Mitotic Cells 10 Observing Meiosis and Determining Cross-Over 

Frequency 11 Determining Genotypes of Fruit Flies 12 Isolating DNA 

and Working with Plasmids 13 Testing Assumptions in Microevolution 

and Inducing Mutations 14 Working with Diverse Bacteria 15 Diversity 

Among Protists 16 Investigating Plant Phylogeny: Seedless Plants 

17 Investigating Plant Phylogeny: Seed Plants 18 Observing Fungal 

Diversity and Symbiotic Relationships 19 Investigating Early Events 

in Animal Development 20 Animal Phylogeny: Investigating Animal 

Body Plans 21 Protostomes I: Lophotrochozoans and Development of 

Complexity 22 Protostomes II: Ecdysozoa and Great Diversity 23 Deuterostomes 

and the Origins of Vertebrates 24 Investigating Plant Tissues 

and Primary Root Structure 25 Investigating Primary Roots, Stems and 

Secondary Growth 26 Investigating Leaf Structure and Photosynthesis 27 

Angiosperm Reproduction, Germination, and Development Interchapter 

Investigating Animal Form and Function 28 Investigating Digestive 

and Gas Exchange Systems 29 Investigating Circulatory Systems 30 

Investigating the Mammalian Urogenital System 31 Investigating the 

Properties of Muscle and Skeletal Systems 32 Investigating Nervous 

and Sensory Systems 33 Statistically Analyzing Simple Behaviors 34 

Estimating Population Size and Growth Appendix A Significant Figures 

and Rounding Appendix B Making Graphs Appendix C Simple Statistics 

Appendix D Writing Lab Reports and Scientific Papers 

New 

BIOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 

8th Edition 

By Darrell S Vodopich, Baylor University and Randy Moore, University 

of Minnesota-Minneapolis 

2008 (January 2007) / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299522-0 / MHID: 0-07-299522-X 

This laboratory manual is designed for an introductory majors 

biology course with a broad survey of basic laboratory techniques. 

The experiments and procedures are simple, safe, easy 

to perform, and especially appropriate for large classes. Few 

experiments require a second class-meeting to complete the 

procedure. Each exercise includes many photographs, traditional 

topics, and experiments that help students learn about 

life. Procedures within each exercise are numerous and discrete 

so that an exercise can be tailored to the needs of the students, 

the style of the instructor, and the facilities available. 


• Clearer information on Safety--A new safety icon will be used 

throughout the text, replacing the current “CAUTION” that appears in 

red font. Plus a Laboratory Safety Rules table has been added to the 

Welcome chapter. 

• Process of Science Exercises--A new exercises on Process of Science 

now appears in Chapter 1. 

• New Figures and Tables--More than 70 tables and figures have been 

extended with additions, revisions or replacements. 

FEATURES 

• Clearly Marked Steps--Procedures have been numbered consecutively 

and the steps of the procedures have been highlighted within each 

exercise making it easier for students to follow the necessary steps. 

• Objectives Clearly Identified--The objectives of the labs and the steps 

of each procedure are clearly identified to help students identify the 

goals of the lab and how to achieve them. 

• Critical Thinking Skills Enhanced--Questions embedded within the 

procedures help students see the big picture by making them think 

beyond the next step in the procedure. Questions are available on the 

website as a handout, which enables the instructor to collect the answers 

to these questions if desired. 

106 


9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM


• “How to Write a Scientific Paper or Lab Report”--This useful information 

has been moved from an appendix to the Front Matter directly 

before the first exercise. 

• Optional Writing Assignments--Writing to Learn Biology and Doing 

Biology Yourself activites found throughout the manual provide further 

avenues of study, and give students an opportunity to express their 

understanding of biology in written form. 

• An investigation section at the end of most labs walks students 

through the process of designing an experiment based on what they 

just learned. 

• Instructor’s Manual--The instructor’s manual to the lab manual can 

be found at www.mhhe.com/labcentral 

• Fully Customizable--Instructors can customize this text using our doit-yourself 

website! The Primis Content Center features more than one 

million items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw- 

Hill textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, 






CONTENTS 

1 Scientific Methods 2 Measurements in Biology: The Metric System 

and Data Analysis 3 The Microscope: Basic Skills of Light Microscopy 

4 The Cell: Structure and Function 5 Solutions, Acids, and Bases: The 

pH Scale 6 Biologically Important Molecules: Carbohydrates, Proteins, 

Lipids, and Nucleic Acids 7 Separating Organic Compounds: Column 

Chromatography, Paper Chromatography, and Gel Electrophoresis 8 

Spectrophotometry: Identifying Solutes and Determining Their Concentration 

9 Diffusion and Osmosis: Passive Movements of Molecules 

in Biologal Systems 10 Cellular Membranes: Effects of Physical and 

Chemical Stress 11 Enzymes: Factors Affecting the Rate of Activity 12 

Respiration: Aerobic and Anaerobic Oxidation of Organic Molecules 

13 Photosynthesis: Pigment Separation, Starch Production, and CO2 

Uptake 14 Mitosis: Replication of Eukaryotic Cells 15 Meiosis: Reduction 

Division and Gametogenesis 16 Molecular Biology and Biotechnology: 

DNA Isolation and Bacterial Transformation 17 Genetics: The Principles 

of Mendel 18 Evolution: Natural Selection and Morphological Change 

in Green Algae 19 Human Evolution: Skull Examination 20 Ecology: Diversity 

and Interaction in Plant Communities 21 Community Succession 

22 Population Growth: Limitations of the Environment 23 Pollution: The 

Effect of Chemical, Thermal, and Acid Pollution 24 Survey of Bacteria: 

Kingdoms Archaebacteria and Bacteria 25 Survey of the Kingdom Protista: 

The Algae 26 Survey of the Kingdom Protista: Protozoa and Slime 

Molds 27 Survey of the Kingdom Fungi: Molds, Sac Fungi, Mushrooms, 

and Lichens 28 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Liverworts, Mosses, and 

Hornworts of Phyla Hepaticophyta, Bryophyta, and Anthocerophyta 29 

Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Seedles Vascular Plants of Phyla Pterophyta 

and Lycophyta 30 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Gymnosperms 

of Phyla Cycadophyta, Ginkgophyta, Coniferophyta, and Gnetophyta 

31 Survey of the Plant Kingdom: Angiosperms 32 Plant Anatomy: Vegetative 

Structure of Vascular Plants 33 Plant Physiology: Transpiration 

34 Plant Physiology: Tropisms, Nutrition, and Growth Regulators 35 

Bioassay: Measuring Physiologically Active Substances 36 Survey of the 

Animal Kingdom: Phyla Porifera and Cnidaria 37 Survey of the Animal 

Kingdom: Phyla Platyhelminthes and Nematoda 38 Survey of the Animal 

Kingdom: Phyla Mollusca and Annelida 39 Survey of the Animal 

Kingdom: Phylum Arthropoda 40 Survey of the Animal Kingdom: Phyla 

Echinodermata, Hemichordata, and Chordata 41 Vertebrate Animal Tissues: 

Epithelial, Connective, Muscular, and Nervous Tissues 42 Human 

Biology: The Human Skeletal System 43 Human Biology: Muscles and 

Muscle Contraction 44 Human Biology: Breathing 45 Human Biology: 

Circulation and Blood Pressure 46 Human Biology: Sensory Perception 

47 Vertebrate Anatomy: External Features and Skeletal System of the 

Rat 48 Vertebrate Anatomy: Muscles and Internal Organs of the Rat 49 

Vertebrate Anatomy: Urogenital and Circulatory Systems of the Rat 50 

Embryology: Comparative Morphologies and Strategies of Development 

51 Animal Behavior: Taxis, Kinesis, and Agonistic Behavior 


SIMULATIONS 



2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 








CONTENTS 








(Lac) Operon 



Textbook 

New 

HUMAN BIOLOGY 

10th Edition 


2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298686-0 / MHID: 0-07-298686-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330934-7 / MHID: 0-07-330934-6 (ARIS) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128579-7 / MHID: 0-07-128579-2 [IE] 

This market leading human biology text emphasizes the relationships 

of humans to other living things. Human Biology remains 

user friendly; relevancy and pedagogy are among its strengths. 

In this edition, as in previous editions, each chapter presents 

the topic clearly and distinctly so that students will feel capable 

of achieving an adult level of understanding. Detailed, highlevel 

scientific data and terminology are not included because 

Dr. Mader believes that true knowledge consists of working 

concepts rather than technical facility. 


• New Artwork!--New art will be presented throughout the text. Several 

of the new figures have been created specifically for Human Biology 

incorporating a new updated style. Chapter summaries will also be 

more visually focused with the addition of art and sections of art brought 

into the summary. 

• A.R.I.S.--McGraw-Hill’s ARIS--Assessment, Review, and Instruction 

System for Human Biology, 10/e is a complete electronic homework 

and course management system. Instructors can create and share 

course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of 

the mouse. Instructors can edit questions and algorithms, import their 

own content, and create announcements and due dates for assignments. 

ARIS has automatic grading and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically 

generated homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is 



integrated grade book that can be downloaded to Excel. Contact your 

107 


9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM


local McGraw-Hill Publisher’s representative for more information on 

getting started with ARIS. 

• New Chapter Openers Throughout--Each chapter begins with an 

engaging, real-life vignette that captures the student’s attention. The 

vignette is referenced throughout the chapter with connections/applications 

woven into the chapter and finally at the end of the chapter students 

are asked to consider the vignette in light of the chapter concepts by 

discussing critical-thinking questions related to the chapter opener. 

• Human Disease Coverage Expanded--Human Disease coverage has 

been enhanced and is covered as each system is discussed. Additionally 

each of these chapters will have a Disease and Disorder section. 

• Updated Genetics Coverage--The entire genetics chapter has been 

updated to include the most recent information possible. This edition 

now combines genetics and genetic counseling topics in one chapter. 

FEATURES 

• Updated Boxed Readings Throughout--Human Biology features three 

different types of boxed readings. Theses readings have been thoroughly 

updated by Dr. Mader, as well as experts in the field, throughout the 

book to remain current. 

Health Focus boxes provide relevant information and ideas that contribute 

to our overall well-being. 

Science Focus boxes describe how experimentation and observations 

have contributed to our knowledge about the living world. 

Bioethical Focus boxes describe modern situations that call for value 

judgments and challenge students to develop a point of view. 

• eInstruction--eInstruction is a wireless student response system that 

allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, giving you immediate 

feedback from every student. These questions can be found on the text 

specific website under the instructor assets. 

• A complete set of chapter learning aids includes a listing of chapter 

concepts, brief concept summaries within the chapter, boldface key 

terms, summary, and objective questions. Students value tools within 

the text that help them grasp the concepts. 

• Customize this book through Primis Online! This title is tentatively 

planned to be part of the Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/ 

primis/online 

• Emphasis on Homeostasis--Homeostasis is emphasized throughout 

the text. The homeostasis sections at the end of specific chapters and the 

accompanying homeostasis illustrations, have been revised for greater 

clarity and explain in depth how the body systems work together to 

maintain homeostasis. 

CONTENTS 

1 Exploring Life and Science Part I Human Organization 2 Chemistry 

of Life 3 Cell Structure and Function 4 Organization and Regulation of 

Body Systems Part II Maintenance of the Human Body 5 Cardiovascular 

System: Heart and Blood Vessels 6 Cardiovascular System: Blood 

7 Lymphatic System and Immunity 8 Digestive System and Nutrition 

9 Respiratory System 10 Urinary System and Excretion Part III Movement 

and Support in Humans 11 Skeletal System 12 Muscular System 

Part IV Integration and Coordination in Humans 13 Nervous System 

14 Senses 15 Endocrine System Part V Reproduction in Humans 16 

Reproductive System 17 Development and Aging Part VI Human Genetics 

18 Patterns of Chromosome Inheritance 19 Cancer 20 Patterns 

of Genetic Inheritance 21 DNA Biology and Technology Part VII Human 

Evolution and Ecology 22 Human Evolution 23 Global Ecology 

and Human Interferences 24 Human Population, Planetary Resources, 

and Conservation 

New 

Laboratory 

LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN 

BIOLOGY 

10th Edition 


2008 (March 2007) / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298690-7 / MHID: 0-07-298690-5 


LABORATORY MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY HUMAN 

BIOLOGY 

9th Edition 

By Sylvia S. Mader 

2006 (June 2005) / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285799-3 / MHID: 0-07-285799-4 

The laboratory exercises in this manual are coordinated with 

Human Biology, a text that has two primary functions: 1) to 

understand how the human body works and 2) to understand 

the relationship of humans to other living things in the biosphere. 

This laboratory manual can be adapted to a variety of 

course orientations and designs. There are a sufficient number 

of laboratories to permit a choice of activities over the length of 

the course. Many activities may be performed as demonstrations 

rather than as student activities, thereby shortening the time 

required to cover a particular concept. 

CONTENTS 

1 Scientific Method 2 Metric Measurement and Microscopy 3 Chemical 

Composition of Cells 4 Cell Structure and Function 5 Human Body 

Tissues 6 Basic Mammalian Anatomy I 7 Chemical Aspects of Digestion 

8 Energy Requirements and Ideal Weight 9 Cardiovascular System 10 

Features of the Cardiovascular System 11 Basic Mammalian Anatomy 

II 12 Homeostasis 13 Musculoskeletal System 14 Nervous System and 

Senses 15 Human Development 16 Mitosis and Meiosis 17 Human 

Genetics 18 DNA and Biotechnology 19 Infectious Disease and Immunology 

20 Human Evolution 21 Effects of Pollution on Ecosystems 

Appendix: Metric System Practical Examination Answer Sheets 










108 


9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM



Multimedia 

BIOLOGY DIGITIZED VIDEO CLIPS 


2006 (August 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312155-0 / MHID: 0-07-312155-X 



SIMULATIONS 



2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285012-3 / MHID: 0-07-285012-4 








CONTENTS 








(Lac) Operon 

MICROBES IN MOTION III 

CD-ROM 

3rd Edition 

By Gloria J Delisle, Queen’s University and Lewis L Tomalty, 

Queen’s University/Kingston General Hospital 

2002 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-233438-8 / MHID: 0-07-233438-X 

CONTENTS 

Anaerobic Bacteria / Antimicrobial Action / Antimicrobial Resistance 

/ Bacterial Structure & Function / Control—Physical & Chemical / 

Environmental Microbiology / Epidemiology of Infectious Diseases / 

Microbial Genetics / Gram Negative Organisms / Gram Positive Organisms 

/ Immunology / Metabolism and Growth / Miscellaneous Bacteria / 

Mycology/Fungal Structure and Function / Parasitology/Parasite Structure 

and Function / Microbial Pathogenesis—Specific Immunology / Vaccines 

/ Virology/Viral Structure & Function / Glossary 

BIOCOURSE.COM 

By Mark Decker, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 

2001 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248557-8 / MHID: 0-07-248557-4 

Website: www/biocourse.com 

BioCourse.Com is an electronic meeting place for students and 

instructors. It provides a comprehensive set of resources in one 

place that is up-to-date and easy to navigate. You can access 

BioCourse.Com from any of McGraw-Hill’s Life Science Online 

Learning Centers. A password for this site is packaged for 

free with the following 2002 copyright titles: Raven/Johnson: 

Biology, 6th edition; Lewis et al: Life, 4th edition; and Mader: 

Human Biology, 7th edition. 

DIGITAL ZOOLOGY VERSION 2.0 CD-ROM 

By Jon Houseman, University of Ottawa 

2003 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256481-5 / MHID: 0-07-256481-4 

(with Workbook) 

Website: www.mhhe.com/digitalzoology 

CONTENTS 

Unit Names: Annelida / Apicomplexa / Arthropoda / Cheliceriformes / 

Ciliophora / Cnidaria / Crustacea / Ctenophora / Echinodermata / Hemichordata 

/ Lophophores / Mesozoa / Microspora / Mollusca / Myxozoa 

/ Nematoda / Nemertea / Other Chordata / Other Pseudocoelomates / 

Placozoa / Platyhelminthes / Porifera / Sarcomastigophora / Uniramia / 

Vertebrata / Workbook chapters: Protozoans / Porifera / Cnidaria / Platyhelminthes 

/ Annelida / Mollusca / Nematoda, Gastrotricha, Rotifera, 

including Acanthocephala / Arthropoda / Bryozoa and Brachiopoda / 

Echinodermata /Hemichordata / Urochordata and Cephalochordata / 

Agnatha / Jawed Fishes / Amphibia / Mammalia 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








109 


9/29/2006 1:19:16 PM


New 

Supplements 

PHOTO ATLAS FOR GENERAL BIOLOGY 

2nd Edition 

By Dennis Strete, McLennan Communiy College and Darrell S. 

Vodopich, Baylor University 

2007 (August 2006) / 272 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284610-2 / MHID: 0-07-284610-0 


SCHAUM’S A-Z BIOLOGY 

By Bill Indge 

2003 / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141934-5 / MHID: 0-07-141934-9 




high school seniors--especially AP students--and college 

freshmen, they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced 

definitions of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help 

students quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations 

of key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, 

help build mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to 

supplement class work. 

• Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition and 

is followed by an explanation and examples. 






aid review 

PHOTO ATLAS FOR GENERAL BIOLOGY 

By Dennis Strete, McLennan Community College and Darrell Vodopich, 

Baylor University 

2002 / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234855-2 / MHID: 0-07-234855-0 

CONTENTS 

1 Microscopy 2 Plant Cells 3 Animal Cells and Tissues 4 Plant Mitosis 

and Gametogenesis 5 Animal Cell Mitosis and Meiosis 6 Prokaryotes 

7 Kingdom Protista 8 Kingdom Fungi 9 Bryophytes 10 Seedless 

Vascular Plants 11 Ferns 12 Gymnosperms 13 Flowering Plants 14 

Invertebrate Phyla 15 Chordates 16 The Vertebrates 17 Vertebrate 

Dissections 18 Human Biology - Histology and Anatomy of Systems 

19 Development 

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF BIOLOGY 

By George H. Fried and George J. Hademenos 

2001 / 154 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136971-8 / MHID: 0-07-136971-6 


CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: The Chemistry of Life. / Chapter 2: Cell Structure and Function. 

/ Chapter 3: The Molecular Basis of Inheritance. / Chapter 4: The 

Cellular Basis of Inheritance. / Chapter 5: The Mechanism of Inheritance. 

/ Chapter 6: Classification of Prokaryotes. / Chapter 7: Classification 

of Eukaryotes. / Chapter 8: Plant STructure and Function. / Chapter 9: 

Intercellular Communication. / Chapter 10: Musculoskeletal System. 

/ Chapter 11: Respiration and Circulation. / Chapter 12: Homeostasis 

and Excretion. / Chapter 13: Nurition and Digestion. / Chapter 14: 

Reproduction and Early Human Development. / Chapter 15: Evolution 

and the Origin of Life. / Chapter 16: Ecology. 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BIOLOGY 

2nd Edition 

By George Fried, Brooklyn College 

1999 / 455 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-022405-6 / MHID: 0-07-022405-6 

[A Schaum Publication] 

CONTENTS 

Part I: Fundamentals of Biology. Part II: Biology of the Cell. Part III: 

Genetics and Inheritance. Part IV: Plant Biology. Part V: Animal Biology. 

Part VI: Evolution and Ecology. Part VII: Biological Diversity. 

HOW TO STUDY SCIENCE 

4th Edition 

By Kristin L.D. Milligan and Frederick W. Drewes, Suffolk Community 

College—Selden 

2003 / 128 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234693-0 / MHID: 0-07-234693-0 

CONTENTS 

1 The Study of Science / 2 Science Classes and Instructors / 3 Bridging 

the Learning Pyramid / 4 The First Week and the “Two D’s” / 5 Listening 

and Taking Notes / 6 Time Management / 7 Study Sessions / 8 Use 

of Textbooks / 9 Terms, Symbols, and Figures / 10 Analyzing Figures / 

11 Practice Understanding Figures / 12 Assignments and Reports / 13 

Answering Essay and Math-Based Problems / 14 Tests / 15 Analyzing 

Results of Tests and Assignments / Appendix A Mnemonics / Appendix 

B Exercise Resource 










110 


9/29/2006 1:19:17 PM

2007-2008 NEW Geography Titles 

Geography~ Contents 


GIS................................................................................ 112 

Human / Cultural Geography........................................ 113 

Intro to Geography........................................................ 114 

Latin America................................................................ 117 

Map Use / Cartography................................................. 115 

Meteorology.................................................................. 116 

US & Canada................................................................ 117 

• BRADSHAW 

Contemporary World Regional Geography 

2e.............................................................................116 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322272-1 / MHID: 0-07-322272-0 

• FELLMANN 

Human Geography, 9e.............................................113 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322271-4 / MHID: 0-07-322271-2 

• Klett International 

Perthes World Atlas ................................113, 115, 117 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 

World Regional Geography........................................... 116 


• CHANG 

Introduction to Geographic Information 

Systems, 4e..............................................................112 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305115-4 / MHID: 0-07-305115-2 

• GETIS 

Introduction to Geography, 12e..............................114 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305126-0 / MHID: 0-07-305126-8 

• PRICE 

Mastering ARCGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM 

3e.............................................................................112 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331280-4 / MHID: 0-07-331280-0 

111 

HED 2007 Geography.indd 111 

9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM

Geography 

New 

GIS 

INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION 

SYSTEMS 

4th Edition 

By Kang-Tsang (Karl) Chang, University of Idaho 

2008 (October 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305115-4 / MHID: 0-07-305115-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331279-8 / MHID: 0-07-331279-7 

(with Data Files CD) 

This book is designed to provide students in a first or second 

GIS course with a solid foundation in both GIS concepts and the 

use of GIS. Introduction to GIS strikes a careful balance between 

GIS concepts and hands-on applications. The main portion of 

the chapter presents GIS terms and concepts and helps students 

learn how each one fits into a complete GIS system. At the end 

of each chapter, an application section with 3-5 tasks presents 

students with actual GIS exercises and the necessary data to 

solve the problem. 


• The website provides PowerPoint files and sample test questions. 

The student center provides ArcView9.0 data sets and exercise instructions. 

• The text provides data sets and instructions for the applications section 

in each chapter, as well as challenge tasks, written questions, and 

review questions for each chapter. 

• Key terms are boldfaced where they first appear in the chapter 

and then summarized and defined with a glossary at the end of the 

chapter. 

• The author created all the figures and tables ensuring precise correlation 

between the chapter material and their accompanying visuals. 

• Emphasizes both concepts and hands-on experience in GIS. Follows 

a logical progression from basic to complex and specialized GIS topics. 

Key changes or enhancements in the 4th edition include network 

applications (Chapter 18), applications of geocoding (Chapter 17), and 

online connection to a remote database (Chapter 6). 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Coordinate Systems Chapter 3 

Georelational Vector Data Model Chapter 4 Object-Based Vector Data 

Model Chapter 5 Raster Data Model Chapter 6 Data Input Chapter 7 

Geometric Transformation Chapter 8 Spatial Data Editing Chapter 9 

Attribute Data Input and Management Chapter 10 Data Display and 

Cartography Chapter 11 Data Exploration Chapter 12 Vector Data 

Analysis Chapter 13 Raster Data Analysis Chapter 14 Terrain Mapping 

and Analysis Chapter 15 Viewsheds and Watersheds Chapter 16 Spatial 

Interpolation Chapter 17 Geocoding and Dynamic Segmentation 

Chapter 18 Path Analysis and Network Applications Chapter 19 GIS 

Models and Modeling 

New 

MASTERING ARCGIS WITH VIDEO CLIPS CD-ROM 

3rd Edition 

By Maribeth Price, South Dakota School Mines & Technology 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331280-4 / MHID: 0-07-331280-0 

Mastering ArcGIS is an introductory GIS text that is designed to 

offer everything you need to master the basic elements of GIS. 

The author’s step-by-step approach helps students negotiate the 

challenging tasks involved in learning sophisticated GIS software. 

This text employs a carefully developed learning system 

to help students use ArcView 9.2 or ArcGIS Desktop or higher, 

to set up and solve GIS problems. An innovative and unique 

feature of Mastering ArcGIS is its accompanying CD-ROM with 

narrated video clips that show students exactly how to perform 

chapter tutorials before attempting an exercise on their own. 


• New 3rd edition of Price has been updated to reflect ArcView 9.2 

software (2nd edition reflected 9.0). 

• More current/relevant examples. 

• A more expanded treatment of ModelBuilder and geoprocessing 

issues. 

• Maribeth Price narrates the video clips on the accompanying CD 

herself. 

• Earlier coverage of geodatabases. 

FEATURES 

• Comprehensive tutorials in every chapter to learn the skills. Each 

step is demonstrated in a video clip. 

• A set of exercises, map documents, and data for practicing skills 

independently. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1. Introducing ArcGIS Chapter 2. Working with ArcMap Chapter 

3. Coordinate Systems and Map Projections Chapter 4. Drawing 

and Symbolizing Features Chapter 5. Working with Tables Chapter 

6. Queries Chapter 7. Spatial Joins Chapter 8. Map Overlay Chapter 

9. Presenting Data Chapter 10. Geocoding Chapter 11. Basic Editing 

in ArcMap Chapter 12. More Editing Techniques Chapter 13. Working 

with Geodatabases Chapter 14. Analyzing Networks Chapter 15. 

Raster Analysis 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








112 


9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM

Geography 

Human / Cultural Geography 

• Focus Follow-Up Located in the end-of-chapter material, this 

summary section conveys additional information and explanation of 

integral parts of the text. 


New 

• A Digital Content Manager CD-ROM accompanies Human Geography, 

with all of the art and tables from the text, most of the photographs 

from the text, extra photos from other sources, and a complete set of 

PowerPoint lectures. 

HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 

9th Edition 

By Jerome D Fellmann, University of Illinos-Champaign, Arthur 

Getis, San Diego State University-San Diego and Judith Getis 

2007 (Nov 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322271-4 / MHID: 0-07-322271-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110797-6 / MHID: 0-07-110797-5 [IE with OLC] 

Fellmann’s Human Geography introduces students to the 

scope and excitement of human geography and its relevance to 

their daily lives. Designed for the one-semester or one-quarter 

course, this edition continues to convey the breadth of human 

geography and to provide insight into the nature and intellectual 

challenges of the field of geography itself. The authors 

pay special attention to gender issues and assume no previous 

experience in geography on the part of the students. 


• Chapter 7: Folk and Popular Culture includes extensive expansion 

on sections on Popular Culture, including microbreweries and rap 

music. This chapter also now includes new and expanded material on 

expanding crop production, fishing, and genetically modified foods. 

• Four new boxed readings have been added to this edition: “Is Geography 

Destiny”, “Log Cabin Myths and Facts”, “The Globalization 

of Reggae”, and “Terrorism and Political Geography.” 

• Updated artwork and photos throughout include maps that have 

been altered to accommodate colorblind readers. 

• Many new and updated topics have been added throughout, 

including: the meaning of “space” and “place” in Remote Sensing; 

outsourcing, off-shoring and New International Division of Labor; 

World Cities and exurbs, spread city, and counter-urbanization; Cities 

in the Developing World; and “e-waste” and its disposal problems 

and regulations. 

• NEW CD-ROM available to instructors, featuring the “Sights and 

Sounds” of world regions. This program provides brief slide shows of 

China, South America, or the South Pacific (in addition to others) accompanied 

by native music of the region to offer a glimpse of diversity 

manifested by the cultures and landscapes of world regions. 

• Interactive maps now include physical features. 

Features 

• Chapter Opening Vignettes As in earlier editions, chapter introductions 

take the form of interest-arousing vignettes to focus student 

attention on the subject matter that follows. 

• Focus Preview This intro chapter page alerts students to the main 

themes of the chapter. 

• Boxed Inserts Located in every chapter, these boxes expand on 

ideas included within the text or introduce related examples of chapter 

concepts or conclusions, often in gender-related contexts. 

• End-of-Chapter Learning Aids 

• New terms are included in the Key Words list at the end of the 

chapter. The Summary reiterates the main points of the chapter and 

provides a bridge to the chapter that follows. For Review contains 

questions that direct student attention to important concepts developed 

within the chapter. Selected References suggest a number of book and 

journal articles that expand on topics. 

• The Online Learning Center not only includes interactive quizzing 

and exercises, but also interactive map exercises, case studies, and base 

maps. It also includes Case Studies, one- to three-page readings relating 

concepts to a student’s daily life. Maps, photos, and graphics are 

included, as well as further study and discussion questions that allow 

students to investigate readings and concepts in greater detail. 

• This ninth edition retains the basic format of its predecessors but 

contains significant content changes including new and revised tables, 

maps, and text. The world of human geography is constantly changing 

in response to developing cultural, economic, and political patterns. 

• Geography and Public Policy Boxes Located in almost every 

chapter, these special-purpose boxes introduce discussions of a topic 

of current national or international interest and conclude with a set of 

questions designed to induce thought and class discussion. 

Contents 

1 Introduction: Some Background Basics Part 1 Themes and Fundamentals 

of Human Geography 2 Roots and Meaning of Culture 3 

Spatial Interaction and Spatial Behavior 4 Population: World Patterns, 

Regional Trends Part 2 Patterns of Diversity and Unity 5 Language and 

Religion: Mosaics of Culture 6 Ethnic Geography: Threads of Diversity 

7 Folk and Popular Culture: Diversity and Uniformity Part 3 Dynamic 

Patterns of the Space Economy 8 Livelihood and Economy: Primary 

Activities 9 Livelihood and Economy: From Blue Collar to Gold Collar 10 

Patterns of Development and Change Part 4 Landscapes of Functional 

Organization 11 Urban Systems and Urban Structures 12 The Political 

Ordering of Space Part 5 Human Actions and Environmental Impacts 

13 Human Impacts on Natural Systems / Appendix A Map Projections 

Appendix B 2003 World Population Data Appendix C Anglo America 

Reference Map 

New 

PERTHES WORLD ATLAS 

By Klett International 

2007 (July 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/klett/ 

The NEW World Atlas for Higher Education and College Geography 

Level teachings. This new atlas uses the Klett-Perthes 

high quality map print details as known from their Wall Maps. 

Features over 350 pages of detailed maps, statistics, glossary and 

information to teach higher level geography education. 

FEATURES 

• High quality physical and polical maps. 

• Sophisticated thematic maps. 

• Detailed regional maps. 

• Easy to understand introduction. 

• Statistics for all countries of the world. 

• Glossary of important terms. 

• Index with more than 20,000 names. 

113 


9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM

Geography 

INTERACTIVE WORLD ISSUES CD-ROM 

By Cambridge Studios 

2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255648-3 / MHID: 0-07-255648-X 

This CD emphasizes critical thinking by presenting regional 

issues through the use of videos, animations, and diagrams 

that closely examine the how and why of specific case studies. 

The CD will feature 5 case studies (Oregon, Chicago, Mexico, 

South Africa, and China), and can be packaged with any geography 

or environmental science title. FREE with Bradshaw et. 

al. Contemporary World Regional Geography. 

CONTENTS 

(CD-ROM 1) Oregon Part 1. Salmon Recovery: A Spatial Approach 

Part 2. Conflict on the Umatilla Part 3. Controversy on the Columbia 

South Africa Part 1. The Geography of Apartheid Part 2. Righting the 

Wrongs: Initial Land Reform Stategies Part 3. Land Reform (CD-ROM 2) 

Mexico: Motive to Migrate Part 1. Mapping Migration Part 2. Domestic 

Destinations Part 3. Maquila Movement China—Lanzhou: Frontier Forces 

Part 1. Borderlands and Ecoregions Part 2. Great Walls,Silk Roads, 

and Oil Pipelines Part 3. Han, Hui, and Uygur Chicago: Farming on 

the Edge Part 1. The Growth of a City Part 2. Put Up a Parking Lot Part 

3. National Implications of Cropland Loss 

Intro to Geography 

• Discussions of Hurricane Katrina and tsunami have been expanded. 

• Appendix 2, a modified version of the 2006 World Population Data 

Sheet of the Population Reference Bureau, includes basic demographic 

data and projections for countries, regions, and continents, as well as 

selected economic and social statistics helpful in national and regional 

comparisons. 

• CD-ROM available to instructors, featuring the “Sights and Sounds” of 

world regions. This program provides brief slide shows of China, South 

America, or the South Pacific (in addition to others) accompanied by 

native music of the region to offer a glimpse of diversity manifested by 

the cultures and landscapes of world regions. 

FEATURES 

• Chapter 2: Maps features expanded information on Global Positioning 

Systems (GPS). Also new in this chapter is a section on Applications of 

Geographic Information Systems (GIS). 

• World maps have been put on the Robinson projection for added 

visual appeal. In addition, all colors in the maps have been altered to 

accommodate most colorblind readers. 

• Fold-out World Map in the inside back cover provides students with 

both political and physical world data. The map is easy to use; when 

folded out it can be referenced from any chapter in the book. 

• The Online Learning Center features quizzes, internet exercises, flash 

animations and eInstruction questions. eInstruction is a wireless student 

response system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, 

giving instructors immediate feedback from every student. 


New 

• Interactive base maps appear in the Online Learning Center, showing 

the political boundaries of Europe, North and South America, Africa, 

and the Caribbean. Students can choose drag and drop exercises to test 

their knowledge of regions, states and key cities. 

INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY 

12th Edition 

By Arthus Getis and Judith Getis of San Diego State University, Jerome 

Fellmann, University of Illinois – Champaign and Victoria Getis, 

Ohio State University 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305126-0 / MHID: 0-07-305126-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325649-8 / MHID: 0-07-325649-8 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110228-5 / MHID: 0-07-110228-0 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/getis11e 

This market-leading book introduces college students to the 

breadth and spatial insights of the field of geography. The 

authors’ approach allows the major research traditions of geography 

to dictate the principal themes. Chapter 1 introduces 

students to the four organizing traditions that have emerged 

through the long history of geographical thought and writing: 

earth science, culture-environment, location, and area analysis. 

Each of the four parts of this book centers on one of these 

geographic perspectives. 


• Major reorganization and revision of Chapter 11, including new 

sections on “Origin and Evolution of Cities,” “The Functions of Urban 

Areas, and “Planned Cities.” 

• Seven new boxed readings have been added to this edition, including: 

Red States, Blue States, township and range survey system, Is Geography 

Destiny, Broken Borders, Central Place Theory, The Canadian City, 

and disposal of electronic waste. 

• Maps, charts, tables, graphs, and illustrations have been revised 

throughout to include the most current data. Several new figures have 

been added where appropriate. 

• Interactive World Issues CD-ROM is available as an optional package 

with this text. This CD emphasizes critical thinking by presenting 

regional issues through the use of videos, animations, and diagrams 

that closely examine the how and why of specific case studies. The 

CD features five case studies (Oregon, Chicago, Mexico, South Africa, 

and China). 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 2 Maps Part 1 The Earth Science Tradition 3 Physical 

Geography: Landforms 4 Physical Geography: Weather and Climate 5 

The Geography of Natural Resources Part 2 The Culture-Environment 

Tradition 6 Population Geography 7 Cultural Geography 8 Spatial 

Interaction 9 Political Geography Part 3 The Locational Tradition 

10 Economic Geography 11 Urban Geography 12 Human Impact on 

the Environment Part 4 The Area Analysis Tradition 13 The Regional 

Concept 










114 


9/29/2006 1:21:44 PM

Geography 

New 



2007 (July 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 







FEATURES 








CHANGING LANDSCAPES OF SINGAPORE 

By Peggy Teo, Brenda S A Yeoh, Ooi Giok Ling and Karen P Y Lai 

2004 / 240 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123479-5 / MHID: 0-07-123479-9 

[An Asian Publication] 

The transformations that have occurred in Singapore’s landscape 

have been rapid since independence. Changing Landscapes of 

Singapore discusses these changes from the perspective of lived 

landscapes which have day-to-day meanings for Singaporeans. 

It begins with an exploration of the major physical changes 

resulting from rapid urbanisation and industrialisation and 

Singapore’s attempt to balance the stresses of physical development 

with the needs of a green agenda. Several other themes 

relating to landscape change follow. A section on landscapes of 

community and nationhood investigates how issues concerning 

shelter (public housing), heritage conservation, street-names and 

national symbols affect Singaporeans’ notions of belonging. This 

is followed by a discussion on globalisation and the way it affects 

the nationstate’s development. This section examines not only 

Singapore’s efforts at regionalisation and its attempt to gain a 

better foothold in the workings of the global capitalistic system 

but also evaluates the impacts of globalisation on the society. 

The last section on forgotten landscapes is a reminder of who 

and what may be left behind in striving for excellence. Landscapes 

reveal and refl ect forgotten needs as much as they record 

what have been remembered and valued. The various strands 

are brought together in the fi nal chapter where the landscape 

is used as a lens to raise questions on future challenges. While 

intended as a general text for university students, this book will 

also provide source materials for school teachers (junior college 

and upper secondary levels), the general student population 

as well as the general reader interested in understanding the 

country’s rapid landscape changes. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction: Changing Landscapes of Singapore Part I NATURAL 

ENVIRONMENTS AND ENGINEERED LANDSCAPES 2 Environmental 

Planning and Management 3 Engineered Biophysical Landscapes: Parks 

and Open Spaces for Recreation Part II LANDSCAPES OF COMMUNITY 

AND NATIONHOOD 4 Urbanisation and Landscape Changes 5 The 

Nation, Its Signs and Symbols: Street-names and Monuments 6 Public 

Housing: The Housing of a Nation 7 Landscapes of Heritage: Historic 

and Cultural Districts Part III LANDSCAPES OF GLOBALISATION 8 

Achieving Global City Status: Industrial Restructuring and Regionalisation 

9 Tourism Capital: Reinterpreting Tourism Space 10 Transnational 

Connectivities and Local Tensions Part IV FORGOTTEN LANDSCAPES 

11 Neglected Landscapes: Old and Forgotten Singaporeans 12 Landscapes 

of Death: Cemeteries, Crematoria and Columbaria 13 Changing 

Landscapes and Future Challenges: A Review 

Map Use / Cartography 


MAP USE AND ANALYSIS 

4th Edition 

By John Campbell, University of Wisconsin – Parkside 

2001 / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303748-6 / MHID: 0-07-303748-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125264-5 / MHID: 0-07-125264-9 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/campbell4e 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Basic Mapping Processes Chapter 3 

Map Projections Chapter 4 Locational and Land-Partitioning Systems 

Chapter 5 Scale and Generalization Concepts Chapter 6 Measurement 

from Maps Chapter 7 Route Selection and Navigation Chapter 

8 Terrain Representation Chapter 9 Contour Interpretation Chapter 10 

Topographic Features Chapter 11 Qualitative and Quantitative Information 

Chapter 12 Characteristics of Map Features: Shape and Point 

Patterns Chapter 13 Characteristics of Map Features: Networks and Trees 

Chapter 14 Cartograms and Special Purpose Maps Chapter 15 Maps 

and Graphs Chapter 16 Map Misuse Chapter 17 Remote Sensing from 

Airborne Platforms Chapter 18 Remote Sensing from Space Chapter 19 

Computer-Assisted Cartography Chapter 20 Digital Map Applications 

Chapter 21 Geographic Information Systems Appendixes: A U.S. and 

Canadian Map Producers and Information Sources B Foreign Maps C 

Copyright D Magnetic Compass Use E Map Storage and Cataloging 

Systems F British National Grid 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








115 


9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM

Geography 


Meteorolgy 

METEOROLOGY 

2nd Edition 

By Eric W. Danielson, Hartford College For Women, James Levin, 

Pennsylvania State University—University Park and Elliot Abrams, 

AccuWeather, Inc. 

2003 / 558 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-242072-2 / MHID: 0-07-242072-3 

(with Essential Study Partner CD-ROM) – Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121383-7 / MHID: 0-07-121383-X 

[IE with Essential Study Partner CD-ROM] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meteorology 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction to Meteorological Inquiry / 2 Is the Atmosphere’s 

Composition Changing / 3 How Does the Atmosphere Maintain Such 

a Steady Temperature / 4 Humidity / 5 How Do Clouds Form / 6 

Precipitation / 7 Structure of Large Mid-Latitude Weather Systems / 8 

Air Masses, Fronts, and Frontal Cyclones / 9 Weather Forecasting / 10 

Circulations on Many Scales, and Their Interactions / 11 Thunderstorms 

and Tornadoes / 12 Hurricanes / 13 Introduction to Climatology: How 

Stable is Earth’s Climate / 14 Is the Atmosphere Warming / 15 Light 

and Color in the Atmosphere / 16 Air Pollution / Appendix A: Some 

Notable Dates in the History of Meteorology / B Scientific Notation / 

C SI Units of Measurement / D Other Units, Conversion Factors, and 

Constants / E List of Elements / F Latitude and Longitude / G Time Zones 

/ H Weather Plotting Symbols / I Windchill and Heat Index Tables / J 

Humidity Tables / K Saturation Mixing Ratio Diagram / L Thermodynamic 

Diagram / M Climatological Data / N Atomic Structure: A Review 

of Some Basics 

World Regional Geography 


New 

CONTEMPORARY WORLD REGIONAL GEOGRAPHY 

2nd Edition 

By Michael Bradshaw, College of St. Mark & John, Joseph Dymond, 

George Washington University, George White, Frostburg State University 

and Elizabeth Chacko 

2007 (Dec 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322272-1 / MHID: 0-07-322272-0 

(with Interactive World Issues CD) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110799-0 / MHID: 0-07-110799-1 

[IE with CD and ARIS] 


Contemporary World Regional Geography provides a current, 

balanced geographical study of world issues through analysis 

of nine world regions and the countries in each. It consistently 

integrates the themes of “global connections” and “local voices” 

and is structured so that within each chapter the global and local 

tensions are discussed, as well as economic, political, cultural, 

social, and environmental issues. Each chapter follows the same 

framework, allowing students to easily make comparisons from 

one world region to the next. 


• Regional chapters will feature a stronger emphasis on culture and 

less on regional data. 

• Every regional chapter will include a new box titled “Geographers 

at Work.” 

• A NEW Sights and Sounds CD-ROM is packaged with every new 

text. This unique lecture tool offers a brief slide show of every region, 

along with music native to that region, allowing students to both see 

and hear an overview of regions, countries and local areas covered 

in the text. 

• Interactive World Issues CD-ROM is also packaged with every new 

text, and is an excellent tool for assignments or self-paced study. This 

CD features five case studies (Oregon, China, South Africa, Mexico, 

and Chicago) and allows students to view videos and complete inquirybased 

exercises, mapping exercises and quizzes. 

• Approximately 100 NEW photos have been added to the text, in 

addition to those found in the first edition, to give students an even 

more complete visual presentation of each region. 

• Each region features NEW physical maps, now found at the beginning 

of each chapter, providing greater physical detail of each region 

being studied. Thematic maps have also been updated and improved 

throughout the text. In addition, students will continue to find a foldout 

world map at the end of the book, showing political and physical 

features of the world regions. 

• A NEW partnership with Klett-Perthes Verlag that will give McGraw- 

Hill customers an exclusive 30% discount on any item from the KPV 

catalog of maps and geographic resources. 

Features 

•“Personal View” boxes focus on the life of an individual or family 

from the region. 

• Contemporary World Regional Geography provides thematic integration 

of “global connections” and “local voices.” The text introduces 

each major region from the big picture perspective with transitions into 

local issues of cultural, social, historical, and economic importance. An 

emphasis on the relationships between the other regions of the world 

and the local issues in a particular region provide the framework for 

the Global Connections-Local Voices theme. 

• A unique feature, not found in any other world regional text, is that the 

book concludes with a summary chapter that emphasizes the “connections” 

of global policies, economies, and heritages around the world. 

This final chapter reiterates the main theme, of global connections/local 

voices, of the book and ties together the regional chapters. 

• Contemporary World Regional Geography is the recommended text 

for the popular world regional telecourse produced and distributed by 

Annenberg/CPB. The video tape series that is developed by Cambridge 

Studios for this telecourse ties directly to this text. 

• Contemporary World Regional Geography is designed to be color 

customized for those who want to use a book that matches their syllabus. 

• Well-integrated pedagogical aids, such as “Test Your Understanding” 

segments and “Point-Counterpoint” boxes throughout promote student 

understanding and tackle challenging issues, teaching students to 

explore various sides of difficult topics. Two boxed pedagogical aids, 

“Personal View” boxes and “Geography At Work” boxes, portray “geography 

in action,” offering a glimpse of what it’s like to live in another 

part of the world or to work in a geographic-related field. These boxes 

provide a local voice with an awareness of global connections. 

• The text’s Online Learning Center offers a wealth of online study 

aids for students as well as teaching aids for instructors. It includes: 

interactive chapter quizzing, key term flashcards, and base maps with 

labeling exercises. 

• Emphasis on “geography in action” by using point-counterpoint debates 

and by featuring “personal view” boxes that focus on an individual or 

family in a particular region. The point-counterpoint boxes highlight 

opposing sides of an issue such as the war between Pakistan and India 

over Kashmir. 

116 


9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM

Geography 

Contents 

Chapter 1: Globalization and World Regions Chapter 2: Human Development 

and World Regional Geography Chapter 3: Europe Chapter 4: 

Russia and Neighboring Countries Chapter 5: East Asia Chapter 6: Southeast 

Asia and South Pacific Chapter 7: South Asia Chapter 8: Northern 

Africa and Southwestern Asia Chapter 9: Africa South of Sahara Chapter 

10: Latin America Chapter 11: North America Chapter 12: Global Connections, 

Local Voices / Glossary of Key Terms / Index 

New 



2007 (July 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329073-7 / MHID: 0-07-329073-4 







FEATURES 



Latin America 

LATIN AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN 

4th Edition 

By David L. Clawson, University of New Orleans 

2006 (June 2005) / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282694-4 / MHID: 0-07-282694-0 

This book has been written primarily as a geography of Latin 

America and the Caribbean, but is also intended to serve as 

an interdisciplinary introduction to the region. The focus of 

the text is on comprehension of concepts, patterns, and issues 

rather than on memorization of facts and figures. The latter are 

provided, but they are intended primarily to illustrate the underlying 

conditions rather than to serve as the focus of the text. 

The text is designed for maximum flexibility. Written to be readable 

for beginning students, it is also generously documented 

with scholarly references for the research needs of advanced 

undergraduate and graduate students. The individual chapters 

can be used in all, or in part, and in any order. 

CONTENTS 

1 The Changing Face of Latin America and the Caribbean I Physical 

Geography 2 Landform Regions of Latin America and the Caribbean 3 

Weather and Climate 4 Natural Regions II Cultural Patterns 5 Iberian 

Heritage, Conquest, and Institutions 6 Political Change 7 Race, Ethnicity, 

and Social Class 8 Latin America as a Culture Region 9 Religion III 

Economic Patterns 10 Agriculture and Agrarian Development 11 Mining, 

Manufacturing, and Tourism 12 Urbanization, Population Growth, 

and Migration 13 Development and Health 






US & Canada 

THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA 

The Land and the People, 

2nd Edition 

By Arthur Getis, Judith Getis and Imre Quastler of San Diego State 

University - San Diego 

2001 / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235677-9 / MHID: 0-07-235677-4 

Website: www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geography/survey.mhtml 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 2 Phyiscal Features of the United States and Canada 3 

Settlement Patterns before 1950 4 Population Trends since 1950 5 

Political Geography 6 Agriculture, Gathering, and Extractive Industries 

7 Industrial and Commercial Organization 8 Modern Transportation and 

Communication Systems 9 Cities 10 Neighborhoods 11 Recreational 

Resources 12 Human Impact on the Environment 13 Culture Regions 

of the United States 14 The Canadian Difference 










117 


9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM

Geography 

118 


9/29/2006 1:21:45 PM

2007-2008 NEW Geology Titles 

Geology~ Contents 

Dinosaurs...................................................................... 120 

Earth Science................................................................. 120 

Environmental Geology................................................. 121 

General Geology........................................................... 121 

Geomorphology............................................................ 121 

Hazards / Natural Disasters........................................... 122 

Historical Geology........................................................ 122 


• LUCAS 

Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e....................................120 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282695-1 / MHID: 0-07-282695-9 

• PLUMMER 

Physical Geology, 11e..............................................127 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321821-2 / MHID: 0-07-321821-9 

• ZUMBERGE 

Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 

13e...........................................................................128 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298861-4 / MHID: 0-07-298861-4 

Hydrogeology............................................................... 123 

Meteorology.................................................................. 123 

Oceanography.............................................................. 124 

Paleontology................................................................. 125 

Petrology....................................................................... 125 


Laboratory................................................................. 128 

Textbook................................................................... 126 


• ABBOTT 

Natural Disasters, 6e................................................122 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329232-8 / MHID: 0-07-329232-X 

• CARLSON 

Physical Geology, 7e................................................126 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325648-1 / MHID: 0-07-325648-X 

• CHAMBERLIN 

Exploring the World Ocean.....................................124 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331276-7 / MHID: 0-07-331276-2 

• JONES 

Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 

6e.............................................................................128 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305091-1 / MHID: 0-07-305091-1 

• McCONNELL 

The Good Earth: Introduction to Earth 

Sciences...................................................................120 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325650-4 / MHID: 0-07-325650-1 

• SVERDRUP 

Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e...................124 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325483-8 / MHID: 0-07-325483-5 

119 

HED 2007 Geology.indd 119 

9/29/2006 1:23:55 PM

Geology 

Dinosaurs 

Earth Science 

New 

DINOSAURS 

The Textbook, 5th Edition 

By Spencer George Lucas, New Mexico Museum of Natural History 

2007 (Oct 2005) / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282695-1 / MHID: 0-07-282695-9 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lucas5e 

Dinosaurs: The Textbook is a monument to our present understanding 

of these wonderful creatures. It is a book that takes 

the student on a journey through nearly every aspect of dinosaur 

biology, geology, and the history of their discovery. The 

book presents facts together with current ideas, notions, and 

controversies. Dr. Lucas presents dinosaurs as successful, living 

creatures that were merely different in appearance from animals 

living today. Dr. Lucas has written a comprehensive book that 

is easily read and understood by students with little scientific 

background--a book that teaches students not only how to use 

scientific methods, but how to synthesize data to create their 

own ideas. In contrast with many dinosaur books from the past, 

Dr. Lucas, although indicating his own views, allows students 

the opportunity to think for themselves. 


• Expanded art and photo program. This is one of the hallmark 

strengths of the Lucas text. We added new photos and illustrations as 

appropriate to enhance the understanding of the prose. 

• New information on the latest dinosaur discoveries has been 

added, including the Microraptor from China and the Neuquenraptor 

from Argentina. 

• Spencer Lucas has updated the text with new and revised theories in 

the study of dinosaurs based on his research and reviewer requests. 

• The text now incorporates the newest ideas on bird origins. 

• Updated references have been added to the end-of-chapter lists. 

Features 

• Page referenced key terms at the end of each chapter. 

• The excellent writing style continues to present a scientifically 

accurate overview of dinosaurs that is understandable to the non-science 

student. 

• The Instructor’s Manual is available on the text web site. The 

Instructor’s Manual includes a suggested syllabus along with a description 

of the text’s organization and chapter interdependence to assist 

instructors in planning how best to use the text to meet the needs of 

their course. The manual provides a description of the material covered 

in each chapter as well as suggestions for presenting the material. The 

suggestions discuss what material should be emphasized and methods 

for overcoming potential difficulties. Answers to all of the review questions 

are also provided for each chapter, a benefit that’s unique to this 

Instructor’s Manual. 

Contents 

A Dinosaur Dictionary 1 Dinosaur Hunters 2 Evolution, Phylogeny, 

and Classification 3 Fossils, Sedimentary Environments, and Geologic 

Time 4 The Origin of Dinosaurs 5 Theropods 6 Sauropodomorphs 7 

Ornithopods 8 Stegosaurs and Ankylosaurs 9 Ceratopsians and Pachycephalosaurs 

10 The Dinosaurian World 11 Dinosaur Trace Fossils 

12 Dinosaur Biology and Behavior 13 Hot-Blooded Dinosaurs 14 The 

Origin of Birds 15 Dinosaur Extinction 16 Dinosaurs in the Public Eye 

Appendix A Primer of Dinosaur Anatomy 

New 

THE GOOD EARTH 

Introduction to Earth Sciences 

By David McConnell, David Steer, Katherine Owens, Catherine 

Knight and Lisa Park of University of Akron 

2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325650-4 / MHID: 0-07-325650-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331534-8 / MHID: 0-07-331534-6 


The Good Earth (TGE) is the product of collaboration between 

the content rigor provided by Earth Science specialists (Mc- 

Connell, Park, Steer) and the results of research on learning as 

contributed by pedagogical experts (Knight, Owens). TGE has 

been explicitly designed to be compatible with inquiry-based, 

active learning in the college classroom. The structural elements 

of this text will allow the instructor to incorporate these studentcentered 

teaching methods into their Earth Science course. The 

authors have tested the book’s content and pedagogy in large 

Earth Science classes for non-majors that are populated with 

mostly freshmen. Their experiences show that the materials and 

methods in TGE can improve students’ learning, increase daily 

attendance, reduce attrition, and increase students’ enthusiasm 

in comparison with classes taught following a traditional lecture 

format. The authors have chosen to emphasize three scientific 

themes throughout the text: i) scientific literacy; ii) Earth Science 

and the human experience; and, iii) the science of global 

change. The discussion of scientific methods is woven into the 

text throughout. They have included numerous examples of 

human interaction with the Earth that can serve as entry points 

for students to appreciate the nature of science. Global change 

is a theme that is evident in much current Earth Science research 

so our authors have used global change as a content theme 

throughout the book. 

FEATURES 

• The text emphasizes “active learning” by providing ample opportunities 

for self-assessement. Some of these can be completed electronically 

with results forwarded to the instructor. 

• The text organization is similar to competing texts with the defining 

difference being the focus on concepts and everyday examples that 

will support what is relevant to the student. 

• Another unique differentiation is the author’s goal to introduce cognitive 

development by providing guidance to instructors on “how” to 

utilize inquiry-based learning strategies. 

• The text is heavily supported by media elements (animations, simulations, 

actvities, quizzing, etc.) 

• The author team provides a specialized range of expertise in geology 

and education to support the text’s goal of being a unique collaboration 

of earth science and active learning modules. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction to Earth Science 2 Earth in Space 3 Near-Earth Objects 

4 Plate Tectonics 5 Earthquakes 6 Volcanoes and Mountains 7 Rocks 

and Minerals 8 Geologic Time 9 Weathering and Soils 10 Slope Failure 

11 Streams and Floods 12 Groundwater and Wetlands 13 Oceans and 

Coastlines 14 The Atmosphere 15 Weather Systems 16 Earth’s Climate 

System 17 Global Change 

120 


9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM

Geology 

DICTIONARY OF EARTH SCIENCE 

2nd Edition 


2003 / 468 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141045-8 / MHID: 0-07-141045-7 

[A Professional Reference] 

CONTENTS 




EARTH SCIENCE 

Understanding Environmental Systems 

By Edgar W. Spencer, Washington & Lee University 

2003 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234146-1 / MHID: 0-07-234146-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121876-4 / MHID: 0-07-121876-9 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

I Introduction to Earth System Science / Unit I Major Elements of the 

Earth System / 1 The Building Blocks of Earth Materials / 2 Minerals 

and the Rock Cycle / 3 Earth Model—Core-Mantle System / 4 Time 

and Change in Earth Systems / Unit II The Plate Tectonic System / 5 

Plate Tectonics and Mountain Building / 6 Earthquakes / 7 Volcanic 

Activity / Unit III Earth’s Physical Climate System / Part 1 Oceans and 

Coasts / 8 The Sea Floor and Marine Environments / 9 Ocean Dynamics 

/ 10 Coasts and Coastal Environments / Part 2 The Atmosphere / 11 

Earth’s Atmosphere / 12 The Atmosphere in Motion / 13 Climate—Past, 

Present, and Future / Part 3 The Land Surface / 14 Introduction to 

Earth’s Land Environments / 15 Weathering and Soil Development / 

16 Mass Wasting—The Work of Gravity / 17 The Role of the Wind / 

18 Streams / 19 GroundWater / 20 The Role of Ice in Earth Systems / 

Unit IV The Solar System and Its Place in the Universe / 21 Earth’s 

Neighbors in Space—The Solar System / 22 Beyond the Solar System / 

Appendix A Units and Conversions / Appendix B Minerals / Appendix 

C Rock Identification / Appendix D Topographic and Geologic Maps 

/ Appendix E Star Charts / Appendix F The Periodic Table of Elements 

/ Appendix G Glossary 

CONTENTS 

Section One Foundations 1 An Overview of Our Planetary Environment 

2 Rocks and Minerals--A First Look Section Two Internal Processes 

3 Plate Tectonics 4 Earthquakes 5 Volcanoes Section Three Surface 

Processes 6 Streams and Flooding 7 Coastal Zones and Processes 8 

Mass Movements 9 Geology and Climate: Glaciers, Deserts, and Global 

Climate Trends Section Four Resources 10 Water as a Resource 11 Soil 

as a Resource 12 Mineral and Rock Resources 13 Energy Resources--Fossil 

Fuels 14 Energy Resources--Alternative Sources Section Five Waste 

Disposal, Pollution, and Health 15 Waste Disposal 16 Water Pollution 

17 Air Pollution Section Six Other Related Topics 18 Environmental Law 

19 Land-Use Planning and Engineering Geology / Appendix A Geologic 

Time, Geologic Process Rates Appendix B Introduction to Topographic 

and Geologic Maps and Remotely Sensed Imagery Appendix C Mineral 

and Rock Identification 

General Geology 

DICTIONARY OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY 

2nd Edition 


2003 / 420 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141044-1 / MHID: 0-07-141044-9 

(A Professional Reference) 

CONTENTS 


Pronunciation Key / Dictionary / Appendix 

Geomorphology 


Environmental Geology 


ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY 

7th Edition 

By Carla W. Montgomery, Northern Illinois University 

2006 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304082-0 / MHID: 0-07-304082-7 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/montgomery7 

Intended for the introductory-level college course, the principal 

aim of this text is to present the student with a broad overview 

of environmental geology. The text looks both at how the earth 

developed into its present condition and where matters seem 

to be moving for the future. It is hoped that this knowledge will 

provide the student with a useful foundation for discussing and 

evaluating specific environmental issues, as well as for developing 

ideas about how the problems should be solved. 

PROCESS GEOMORPHOLOGY 

4th Edition 

By Dale F Ritter, University of Nevada-Desert Research Institute, R 

Craig Kochel, Bucknell University and Jerry R Miller, University of 

Nevada-Desert Research Institute 

2002 / 576 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111022-8 / MHID: 0-07-111022-4 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1 Process Geomorphology 2 Climate and Internal Forces 3 Chemical 

Weathering and Soils 4 Physical Weathering, Mass Movement, 

and Slopes 5 The Drainage Basin: Development, Mormometry, and 

Hydrology 6 Fluvial Processes 7 Fluvial Landforms 8 Wind Processes 

and Landforms 9 Glaciers and Glacial Mechanics 10 Glacial Erosion, 

Deposition at Landforms 11 Periglacial Processes and Landforms 12 

Karst: Processes and Landforms 13 Coastal Zones: Processes and Landforms 

Bibliography Index 

121 


9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM

Geology 

Hazards / Natural Disasters 

New 

NATURAL DISASTERS 

6th Edition 

By Patrick Leon Abbott, San Diego State University 

2008 (March 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329232-8 / MHID: 0-07-329232-X 

This book focuses on natural disasters: how the normal processes 

of the Earth concentrate their energies and deal heavy 

blows to humans and their structures. It is concerned with how 

the natural world operates and, in so doing, kills and maims 

humans and destroys their works. Throughout the book, certain 

themes are maintained: * energy sources underlying disasters * 

plate tectonics and climate change * earth processes operating 

in rock, water, and atmosphere * significance of geologic time 

* complexities of multiple variables operating simultaneously 

* detailed and readable case studies. 


• New feature: Entire text has been revised to feature 4-color line 

drawings and photos. 

• Case Histories: The text aims to explain important principles about 

the Earth and then develop further understanding through numerous 

case studies. 

• End-of-Chapter Learning Aids: Learning aids at the conclusion of 

every chapter include Terms to Remember, Questions for Review and 

Questions for Further Thought. 

• Organization: The primary organization of the book is based on an 

energy theme. Chapter 1 leads off with data describing death and destruction, 

and then examines the energy sources underlying disasters. 

Earthquake and volcano disasters fueled by Earth’s internal energy are 

addressed in Chapters 2 through 7 and are organized on a plate-tectonics 

theme. Disasters powered primarily by gravity are covered in Chapter 

8 on mass movements. Disasters fueled by the external energy of the 

Sun are examined in Chapters 9 through 13 on climate change, severe 

weather, floods, and fire. Chapter 14 examines the great dyings encased 

in the fossil record. Chapter 15 examines impacts from asteroids and 

comets and includes plans to protect Earth from future impacts. 

Historical Geology 

LABORATORY STUDIES IN EARTH HISTORY 

8th Edition 

By James C. Brice, Harold L. Levin, Washington University—St. Louis 

and Michael S. Smith 

2004 / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252806-0 / MHID: 0-07-252806-0 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/brice 

Utilizing actual case studies and field photographs, this successful 

lab manual covers the full spectrum of historical geology 

sediments, plate tectonics, paleontology, and petrology in 

flexible, self-contained units. This manual has been developed 

for use in both nonmajors and combined courses in historical 

geology. The exercises emphasize the principles and methods 

by which geologists discover the origins and changing nature 

of our planet. These exercises or “studies” will help students 

understand how ancient conditions can be read from rocks 

and fossils, how geologic forces at the surface and within the 

planet can alter the environment and change world geography, 

and how events of the past can be placed within an integrated 

chronological sequence. The exercises are designed for students 

who may not intend to specialize in geology. This does 

not mean, however, that the treatment is superficial, nor that 

it cannot give adequate preparation for students pursuing an 

academic major in the earth sciences. 

CONTENTS 

1 Sedimentary Rock in Hand Sample 2 Textural Clues to the History 

of Sediment 3 Sedimentary Rock Under the Microscope 4 Ancient 

Sedimentary Environments 5 Major Tectonic Settings of Earth History 

6 Sea-Floor Spreading and Plate Tectonics 7 Age Relations and Unconformity 

8 Rock Units and Time-Rock Units 9 Ancient Shorelines 10 

Fossils and Their Living Relatives: Protists, Sponges, Corals, Bryozoans, 

and Brachiopods 11 Fossils and Their Living Relatives: Mollusks, Arthropods, 

Echinoderms, Graptolites, and Plants 12 Fossil Indicators of 

Age, Environment, and Correlation 13 A Brief Survey of the Vertebrates 

14 Geologic Maps and Geologic Structures 15 Canadian Shield and 

Basement Rocks of North America 16 Mountain Belts of North America 

17 The Interior Plains and Plateaus 18 Igneous Rocks 19 Metamorphic 

Rocks Plates 

• Comprehensiveness: The text covers the most significant natural 

hazards from geologic to oceanographic to atmospheric to space debris 

and their associated phenomena. The broad range of natural disasters 

topics allows each instructor to select those chapters that cover their 

interests and local hazards. 

CONTENTS 

1 Natural Disasters and Their Energy Sources 2 Plate Tectonics and 

Earthquakes 3 Basic Principles of Earthquake Geology, Seismology and 

Tsunami 4 Some Earthquakes in Western North America 5 More United 

States and Canadian Earthquakes 6 Volcanic Eruptions: Plate Tectonics 

and Magmas 7 Volcanic Eruptions Continue 8 Mass Movements 9 

Climate Change 10 Severe Weather 11 Hurricanes and the Coastline 12 

Floods 13 Fire 14 The Great Dyings 15 Impacts with Space Objects 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








122 


9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM

Geology 


EVOLUTION OF THE EARTH 

7th Edition 

By Donald A. Prothero, Occidental College and Robert Dott, University 

of Wisconsin—Madison 

2004 (July 2003) / 608 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252808-4 / MHID: 0-07-252808-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121628-9 / MHID: 0-07-121628-6 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/prothero7 

Evolution of the Earth reveals the logical framework of geology, 

shows relations of the science to the totality of human knowledge, 

and gives some idea of what it is to be a participant in 

the discipline. In keeping with the preference for a “How do 

we know” rather than “What do we know” approach, the 

authors stress what assumptions are made by earth historians, 

what kinds of evidence (and tools for gathering that evidence), 

and what processes of reasoning and limitations of hypotheses 

are involved in reconstructing and interpreting the past. Each 

chapter begins with a list of highlights entitled “Major Concepts”. 

Many chapters have a summary timeline that puts the 

entire sequence of events into a quick visual reference frame. 

The use of dioramas and reconstructions of extinct animals 

and plants has been greatly expanded, so that students can get 

a more vivid concept of typical life in any part of the geologic 

past. In many places, the authors have supplied a full page of 

color photos of classic fossils from each period to improve the 

visual recognition of the organisms that give life its distinctive 

history. The areas of hottest controversy, such as mass extinctions, 

dinosaur endothermy, the origin of life, and controversies 

over late Proterozoic tectonics and glaciation, have been given 

separate sections so that students can appreciate the different 

sides of the debates. 

CONTENTS 

1 Time and Terrestrial Change / 2 Floods, Fossils, and Heresies: “No 

vestige of a beginning, no prospect of an end” / 3 Evolution / 4 The 

Relative Geologic Time Scale and Modern Concepts of Stratigraphy / 

5 The Numerical Dating of the Earth / 6 Origin and Early Evolution of 

the Earth / 7 Mountain Building and Drifting Continents / 8 Cryptozoic 

History: An Introduction to the Origin of Continental Crust / 9 Early Life 

and its Patterns / 10 Earliest Paleozoic History: The Sauk Sequence—An 

Introduction to Cratons and Epeiric Seas / 11 The Later Ordovician: 

Further Studies of Plate Tectonics and the Paleogeography of Orogenic 

Belts / 12 The Middle Paleozoic: Time of Reefs, Salt, and Forests / 13 

Late Paleozoic History: A Tectonic Climax and Retreat of the Sea / 

14 The Mesozoic Era: Age of Reptiles and Continental Breakup / 15 

Cenozoic History: Threshold of the Present / 16 Pleistocene Glaciation 

and the Advent of Humans / 17 The Best of all Possible Worlds 

/ Appendix I The Classification and Relationships of Life / Appendix II 

English Equivalents of Metric Measures 


Hydrogeology 

INTRODUCTION TO HYDROGEOLOGY 

By David Deming, University of Oklahoma-Norman 

2002 / 480 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113019-6 / MHID: 0-07-113019-5 [IE] 

CONTENTS 

1 Fluids in the Earth’s Crust: The Science of Hydrogeology 2 Darcy’s Law 

and Hydraulic Head 3 Properties of Porous Media 4 Geologic Fluids 5 

Transient Flow 6 Near Surface Flow 7 Driving Forces and Mechanisms 

for Fluid Flow 8 Abnormal Fluid Pressures 9 Environmental Hydrogeology 

10 Petroleum Migration 11 Heat Transport 12 Earthquakes, Stress, 

and Fluids 13 Fluids in the Oceanic Crust 14 Fluids and Ore Deposits 


Meteorology 

METEROLOGY 

2nd Edition 

By Eric W. Danielson, Hartford College for Women, James Levin, 

Pennsylvania State University—University Park and Elliot Abrams, 

AccuWeather, Inc. 

2003 / 558 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-242072-2 / MHID: 0-07-242072-3 

(with Essential Study Partner CD-ROM) – Out of Print 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121383-7 / MHID: 0-07-121383-X [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meteorology 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction to Meteorological Inquiry 2 Is the Atmosphere’s Composition 

Changing 3 How Does the Atmosphere Maintain Such a Steady 

Temperature 4 Humidity 5 How Do Clouds Form 6 Precipitation 7 

Structure of Large Mid-Latitude Weather Systems 8 Air Masses, Fronts, 

and Frontal Cyclones 9 Weather Forecasting 10 Circulations on Many 

Scales, and Their Interactions 11 Thunderstorms and Tornadoes 12 Hurricanes 

13 Introduction to Climatology: How Stable is Earth’s Climate 

14 Is the Atmosphere Warming 15 Light and Color in the Atmosphere 

16 Air Pollution Appendix A: Some Notable Dates in the History of 

Meteorology B Scientific Notation C SI Units of Measurement D Other 

Units, Conversion Factors, and Constants E List of Elements F Latitude 

and Longitude G Time Zones H Weather Plotting Symbols I Windchill 

and Heat Index Tables J Humidity Tables K Saturation Mixing Ratio 

Diagram L Thermodynamic Diagram M Climatological Data N Atomic 

Structure: A Review of Some Basics 










123 


9/29/2006 1:23:56 PM

Geology 

Oceanography 

• “You Might Wonder” sections offer general interest questions and 

answers that provide interesting tidbits, strange and amazing facts, common 

misconceptions and miscellaneous topics of interest to students. 

New 

EXPLORING THE WORLD OCEAN 

By Sean Chamberlin, Fullerton College and Tommy Dickey 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331276-7 / MHID: 0-07-331276-2 

Exploring the World Ocean presents oceanography as a systems 

science, aimed at understanding the world ocean as a single, 

interdependent system of interacting geological, physical, 

chemical and biological processes. Also emphasized is the idea 

that ocean science is an ongoing process, dependent upon cutting-edge 

technology and research. Students are encouraged to 

take an active role in learning by exploring scientific ideas, data, 

and alternative ways of thinking as they view oceanography 

through the eyes of an oceanographer. 

FEATURES 

• Exploring the World Ocean takes a systems approach: each chapter 

contributes to the understanding of the ocean’s geological, physical, 

chemical, and biological processes and how they work together to 

form one world ocean. 

• Written by an oceanographer and researcher currently in the field, 

the authors’ goal is to capture the spirit of oceanography by allowing 

the reader to view it through the eyes of an oceanographer. 

• Guided by the desire to present science as a process and to immerse 

students in the literature of modern day oceanographic research, 

fundamental questions of human and scientific interest are explored 

throughout the text. 

• Exploring the World Ocean offers a more contemporary view of 

oceanography, prompting students to question the ocean and its systems, 

and to seek answers by investigating the different tools and methods 

scientists use to explain the processes they observe. 

• “Spotlight” boxed readings highlight cutting-edge oceanographic 

research and technology through discussions of ocean-related environmental 

and societal issues, as well as controversies and areas of 

research where oceanographers disagree. These boxes provide added 

interest and demonstrate the fact that science is constantly changing. 

Topics include: Sea Floor Observatories: Telescopes to Inner Space, 

Increasing CO2 in the World Ocean, Are the Polar Ice Caps Melting, 

and Robotic “Oceanographers” Witness Extreme Events. 

• Pedagogical features include: chapter outline, Questions to Consider, 

bolded key terms, “Spotlight” boxed readings, “You Might Wonder” 

questions and answers, bulleted key concepts, Terms to Remember, 

and directions to the Online Learning Center for self-assessment, web 

links, and animations. 

• Each chapter begins with Questions to Consider; a set of questions 

that may be used as an introduction to a topic, or a starting point for 

inquiry-based studies. These questions are intended to stimulate curiosity 

and promote thinking like an oceanographer. 

• Historical content and environmental issues are woven throughout 

the text in the context of chapter-specific subject matter. 

• Figure captions often function as an extension of the text by providing 

new or additional information about a topic. This forces students 

to view the art as a learning tool, and helps them to better understand 

the concept being presented. 

• Exploring the World Ocean contains more than 400 full-color maps, 

illustrations and photographs. All of the art has been carefully designed 

and selected to complement and reinforce the text. World maps have 

been put on the Robinson projection for added visual appeal. 

• Each chapter ends with Critical Thinking questions and activities 

which are designed to help students assess their understanding of chapter 

material. These questions also provide an excellent starting point for 

deeper explorations of a topic in classroom or online discussions. 

• Appendices include: Symbols, Metric System, Conversions, and 

Useful Oceanographic Formulas. 

• A fold-out map at the end of the book provides a quick reference to 

the oceans, seas, bays, gulfs, straights, channels, and waters that form 

the world ocean. 

• The Online Learning Center features additional tools and activities for 

students including: chapter quizzing, key terms flashcards, web links, 

animations, and Scripps video clips. 

• Instructors will find an Instructor’s Manual, PowerPoint Lecture 

outlines, and CPS questions. 

CONTENTS 

Preface / Chapter One: Introducing the World Ocean Chapter Two: 

World Ocean Origins Chapter Three: Plate Tectonics Theory and Evidence 

Chapter Four: Sea Floor Features Chapter Five: Ocean Sediments 

Chapter Six: Ocean Chemistry Chapter Seven: Ocean Physics Chapter 

Eight: The Ocean and the Atmosphere Chapter Nine: Surface and Deep 

Circulation Chapter Ten: Ocean Waves Chapter Eleven: Ocean Tides 

and Sea Level Chapter Twelve: Ocean Life and Its Evolution Chapter 

Thirteen: Phytoplankton Productivity Chapter Fourteen: Ocean Food 

Webs Chapter Fifteen: Humans and the Coastal Ocean Chapter Sixteen: 

Future Explorations Appendices 


New 

INTRODUCTION TO THE WORLD’S OCEANS 

9th Edition 

By Keith Sverdrup and Alyn Duxbury of University of Washington 

and Alison Duxbury, North Seattle Comm College 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325483-8 / MHID: 0-07-325483-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110221-6 / MHID: 0-07-110221-3 [IE] 

An Introduction to the World’s Oceans, Ninth Edition, is an 

introductory oceanography text intended for students without 

a background in mathematics, chemistry, physics, geology, or 

biology. It emphasizes the role of basic scientific principles in 

helping understand the processes that govern the ocean and 

the earth. A major objective of the text is to stimulate student 

interest and curiosity by blending contemporary information and 

research with basic principles to form an integrated introduction 

to the sciences of the oceans. To keep the text as current as 

possible, the authors conduct their own research and examine 

other findings such as analyzing satellite data and large-scale 

oceanographic programs. From this vast amount of data, they 

select interesting, relevant, and understandable examples 

that illustrate contemporary principles of oceanography. An 

Introduction to the World’s Oceans places greater emphasis 

on the physical and geological aspects of the oceans than on 

the chemical and geochemical properties, because the latter 

disciplines require more specific background knowledge. An 

ecological approach helps integrate the biological chapters with 

other subjects. Students are encouraged to look at oceanography 

as a cohesive and united discipline rather than a collection of 

subjects gathered under a marine umbrella. As with all previous 

editions, the authors continue to make each chapter stand as 

independently as possible, so that professors can assign chapters 

in the order that best suits their classrooms. 

124 


9/29/2006 1:23:57 PM


• Field Notes (six found throughout the book) feature guest essays by 

prominent oceanographers. These essays offer insight into the world of 

oceanographers and help students learn about some of the most exciting 

and cutting-edge developments in oceanography. They also provide the 

reader a glimpse into the near future of the discipline. 

• Thirty-four Scripps Video Clips are available to users of this text. These 

15- to 20-second, underwater clips feature footage of marine animals 

and their behavior, giving students a glimpse into a real, underwater 

perspective. 

FEATURES 

• Updated: The Online Learning Center now features a student study 

guide, flashcards, and web links, in addition to online quizzing, animations 

and exercises, and instructor resources. 

• The authors each bring unique skills and expertise to this text. Alyn 

Duxbury has expertise in physical oceanography, Alison Duxbury 

has expertise in marine biology, and Keith Sverdrup has expertise in 

marine geology, geophysics, and how oceanography relates to other 

areas of science. 

• The Digital Content Manager CD-ROM contains nearly every photograph 

and piece of artwork from the textbook. Additionally, video 

clips from the Scripps Institute of Oceanography are also included on 

this presentation CD-ROM. 

CONTENTS 

1 The History of Oceanography 2 The Water Planet 3 Plate Tectonics 4 

The Sea Floor and Its Sediments 5 The Physical Properties of Water 6 The 

Chemistry of Seawater 7 The Structure and Motion of the Atmosphere 8 

Circulation and Ocean Structure 9 The Surface Currents 10 The Waves 

11 The Tides 12 Coasts, Beaches, and Estuaries 13 Environmental Issues 

and Concerns 14 The Living Ocean 15 Production and Life 16 The 

Plankton: Drifters of the Open Ocean 17 The Nekton: Free Swimmers 

of the Sea 18 The Benthos: Dwellers of the Sea Floor 

Paleontology 

BRINGING FOSSILS TO LIFE 

An Introduction to Paleobiology, 2nd Edition 

By Donald A. Prothero, Occidental College 

2004 / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366170-4 / MHID: 0-07-366170-8 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geology 

This is the first text to combine both paleontology and paleobiology. 

Traditional textbooks treat these separately, despite the 

recent trend to combine them in teaching. It bridges the gap 

between purely theoretical paleobiology and purely descriptive 

invertebrate paleontology books. The text is targeted at 

undergraduate geology and biology majors, with the emphasis 

on organisms, rather than dead objects to be described and 

catalogued. Current ideas from modern biology, ecology, 

population genetics, and many other concepts will be applied 

to the study of the fossil record. 

CONTENTS 

1 The Fossil Record: A Window on the Past 2 Variation in Fossils 3 Species 

and Speciation 4 Systematics 5 Evolution 6 Extinction 7 Functional 

Morphology 8 Paleoecology 9 Biogeography 10 Biostratigraphy 11 

Micropaleontology 12 Colonial Life: Archaeocyathans, Sponges, and 

Enidarians 13 Lophophorates: Brachiopods and Bryozoans 14 Arthropods 

15 Mollusks 16 Echinoderms 17 Chordates 18 Trace Fossils 

Petrology 

Geology 


FUNDAMENTALS OF OCEANOGRAPHY 

5th Edition 

By Keith A. Sverdrup, University of Wisconsin – Milwaukee, Alyn C. 

Duxbury, University of Washington, Alison B. Duxbury, North Seattle 

Community College 

2006 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304081-3 / MHID: 0-07-304081-9 

(Essential Version) 


Website: http://www.mhhe.com/sverdrup5 

Fundamentals of Oceanography is intended for less intensive 

college oceanography courses, courses for non-science majors 

and advanced placement oceanography programs for high 

school students. To meet the needs of these groups, this text has 

numerous student aids including chapter learning objectives, 

section review questions, summary charts, units in metric and 

English units, chapter summaries, chapter word lists, bold face 

for technical terms in the text, and reduced use of technical 

terms. No prerequisites in math, chemistry, physics, or biology 

are required. 

CONTENTS 

1 History of Oceanography 2 Introduction to Earth 3 Plate Tectonics 4 

The Sea Floor 5 Water 6 The Atmosphere and the Oceans 7 Circulation 

Patterns and Ocean Currents 8 Waves and Tides 9 Coasts, Estuaries, 

and Environmental Issues 10 Oceanic Environment and Production 

11 Life in the Water 12 Life on the Sea Floor Appendix A Latitude and 

Longitude Appendix B Classification Summaries Appendix C Units 

and Notation 


PETROLOGY 

The Study of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic 

Rocks, 2nd Edition 

By Loren A Raymond, Appalachian State University 

2002 / 736 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366168-1 / MHID: 0-07-366168-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115041-5 / MHID: 0-07-115041-2 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geoscience/virtuality/raymond/index. 

mhtml 

CONTENTS 

Part I Introduction 1 Rocks and Earth Structure Part II Igneous 

Rocks..2 Igneous Rocks: Their Structures and Textures 3 Chemistry, 

Mineralogy, and Classification of Igneous Rocks 4 The Phase Rule 

and Phase Diagrams 5 Petrogenesis, Movement, and Modification 

of Magmas 6 Basalts and Ultramafic Volcanic Rocks 7 Rhyolites and 

Pyroclastic Rocks 8 Andesites and Related Rocks 9 Ultramafic-Mafic 

Complexes and Related Rocks 10 Granodiorites and Related Rocks 11 

Alkaline Igneous Rocks and Carbonatites Part III Sedimentary Rocks 

12 Sedimentary Rocks: Their Structures, Textures, and Compositions 

13 Classification of Sedimentary Rocks 14 Sedimentary Provenance, 

Processes, and Diagenesis 15 Sedimentary Environments 16 Mudrocks 

17 Sandstones 18 Conglomerates, Diamictites, Breccias 19 Carbonate 

Rocks 20 Cherts, Evaporites, and Other Precipitated Rocks Part IV Metamorphic 

Rocks 21 Metamorphism and Metamorphic Rock Textures and 

Structures 22 Metamorphic Conditions, Classifications, Mineralogies, 

Protoliths, Facies, and Facies Series 23 Metamorphic Phase Diagrams 

24 Contact Metamorphism 25 Regional Metamorphism Under Low to 

Medium P/T Conditions: Buchan and Barrovian Facies Series 26 High 

P/T Metamorphism: Franciscan and Sanbagawa Facies Series and the 

Origin of Blueschists 27 Eclogites 28 Dynamic Metamorphism 29 Alpine 

Ultramafic Rocks and the Mantle Part V Epilogue 30 Petrotectonic 

Assemblages 

125 


9/29/2006 1:23:57 PM

Geology 



Textbook 

New 

PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 

7th Edition 

By Diane Carlson and Charles Plummer of California State University-Sacramento 

and David McGeary 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325648-1 / MHID: 0-07-325648-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110219-3 / MHID: 0-07-110219-1 [IE] 

Physical Geology: Earth Revealed is a classic in introductory 

geology classes. This text, which includes the same information 

as the market-leading Physical Geology, 11th Edition, is for the 

professor who wants to use the same valuable information and 

engaging format but in a different teaching sequence. Coverage 

of plate tectonics is moved to the beginning of the book. 

In keeping with the long-standing tradition, the seventh edition 

has been updated to include the most current information from 

the various sub-disciplines that comprise physical geology. The 

book’s purpose is to clearly present the various aspects of physical 

geology so that students can understand the logic of what 

scientists have discovered, as well as the elegant way the parts 

are interrelated to explain how Earth, as a whole, works. The 

outstanding art program and proven, accessible writing style 

will grab students’ attention and further their interest. This text 

continues to be used as the official textbook to accompany the 

Annenberg CPB distributed telecourse for physical geology. 


• McGraw-Hill is proud to bring you an assortment of 44 outstanding 

animations like no others. These include 20 new animations and 

24 animations retained from previous editions. These animations are 

located on ARIS and also on the Digital Content Manager. A special 

animation icon has been placed beside every figure in the text that has 

a corresponding animation. 

• This new edition includes an updated art program that will not only 

aid in understanding, but also engage students’ interest. Over 300 illustrations 

have been revised or created from scratch. Over 130 new 

photos have been added to provide the reader with significant detail 

to support the textual material. Several photos from previous editions 

have been retained for their subject matter, but have been electronically 

enhanced to improve focus and clarity. 

• “A Geologist’s View” pieces have been added. Seventeen photos in 

the text are accompanied by an illustration depicting how a geologist 

would view the scene. Students gain experience understanding how 

the trained eye of a geologist views a scene in order to understand 

the historical processes that have occurred that result in what they are 

seeing today. 

• McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for Carlson is a complete electronic homework 

and course management system, designed for greater ease of use than 

any other system available. Instructors can create and share course 

materials and assignments with colleagues with a few clicks of the 

mouse. Instructors can edit questions, import their own content, and 

create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic 

grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and 

testing. Once a student is registered in the course, all student activity 

within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically recorded and available 

to the instructor through a fully integrated grade book that can be 

downloaded to Excel. 

• New Classroom Performance System and Questions--McGraw-Hill 

has partnered with eInstruction to provide the revolutionary Classroom 

Performance System (CPS) and to bring interactivity into the classroom. 

CPS is a wireless response system that gives the instructor and students 

immediate feedback from the entire class. The wireless response pads 

are essentially remotes that engage students and are easy to use. CPS 

allows you to motivate student preparation, interactivity, and active 

learning so you can receive immediate feedback and know what students 

understand. A text-specific set of questions, formatted for both CPS and 

PowerPoint, is available via download from the Instructor area of the 

Online Learning Center. 

• A three page fold-out map has been added to the back of the text for 

students’ reference. The front side of the foldout contains a geographic 

map of the world. 

FEATURES 

• Planetary Geology Boxes. These boxes compare features elsewhere 

in the solar system to their Earthly counterparts (e.g.; Stream Features 

on the Planet Mars). 

• Environmental Geology Boxes. These boxes discuss topics that relate 

the chapter material to environmental issues, including impact on 

humans (e.g., Radon-A Radioactive Health Hazard). 

• Earth Systems Boxes. These boxes highlight the interrelationships 

between the geosphere, the atmosphere, and other Earth systems (e.g., 

Oxygen Isotopes and Climate Change). 

• Web Boxes. These boxes summarize material that is further explained 

on the book’s Online Learning Center. 

• Internet Resource Integration. The Internet has revolutionized the way 

we obtain knowledge, and this book makes full use of its potential to 

help students learn. We have URLs for appropriate websites throughout 

the book– within the main body of text, at the end of many boxes, and 

at the end of chapters. We have made the process student-friendly by 

having all websites that we mention in the book posted as links in this 

book’s Online Learning Center website. (We also include all URLs in 

the textbook for those who wish to go directly to a site.) 

• In Greater Depth Boxes. These boxes discuss phenomena that are 

not necessarily covered in a geology course (e.g., Precious Gems) or 

present material in greater depth (e.g., Calculating the Age of a Rock). 

• Purpose Statements. Each chapter begins with a statement of purpose 

of the chapter and its relationship with other chapters. This is usually 

followed by a section showing how that chapter’s material relates to 

Earth systems. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introducing Geology, the Essentials of Plate Tectonics, and other 

Important Concepts 2 Earth’s Interior and Geophysical Properties 3 The 

Sea Floor 4 Plate Tectonics 5 Mountain Belts and the Continental Crust 

6 Geologic Structures 7 Earthquakes 8 Time and Geology 9 Atoms, 

Elements, and Minerals 10 Volcanism and Extrusive Rocks 11 Igneous 

Rocks, Intrusive Activity, and the Origin of Igneous Rocks 12 Weathering 

and Soil 13 Mass Wasting 14 Sediment and Sedimentary Rocks 

15 Metamorphism, Metamorphic Rocks, and Hydrothermal Rocks 16 

Streams and Floods 17 Ground Water 18 Deserts and Wind Action 19 

Glaciers and Glaciation 20 Waves, Beaches and Coasts 21 Geologic 

Resources 22 The Earth’s Companions 










126 


9/29/2006 1:23:57 PM

Geology 


New 

PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 

11th Edition 

By Charles (Carlos) C Plummer and Diane Carlson of California State 

University-Sacramento and David McGeary (Deceased) 

2007 (Dec 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321821-2 / MHID: 0-07-321821-9 

(with ARIS Card) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110789-1 / MHID: 0-07-110789-4 



Physical Geology, Eleventh Edition, is the latest refinement of a 

classic introductory text that has helped countless students learn 

basic physical geology concepts for over 20 years. Students 

taking introductory physical geology to fulfill a science elective, 

as well as those contemplating a career in geology, will 

appreciate the accessible writing style and depth of coverage in 

Physical Geology. Hundreds of carefully rendered illustrations 

and accompanying photographs correlate perfectly with the 

chapter descriptions to help readers quickly grasp new geologic 

concepts. Numerous chapter learning tools and a rich Online 

Learning Center website further assist students in their study of 

physical geology. For professors, McGraw-Hill offers a complete 

supplement package consisting of slides, transparencies, computerized 

testbank, PowerPoint lectures, and digital images of 

every single piece of artwork and photograph in the text. These 

valuable supplements will make teaching easier and assist in 

fully conveying important concepts to students. McGraw-Hill is 

committed to adding considerable quality to each new edition 

of Physical Geology in the form of new and revised content, 

artwork, supplements, and media technology. Professors can 

adopt Physical Geology, Eleventh Edition, with confidence 

and count on the authors and McGraw-Hill to help them most 

effectively teach introductory physical geology. 


• Outstanding art program by illustrator Cindy Shaw featuring accuracy 

in scale, realism, and aesthetic appeal driven by a panel of profesors, 

the authors, and illustrator including an intense weekend event. 

• “A Geologist’s View” pieces have been added. Seventeen photos 

in the text are accompanied by an illustration depicting how a geologist 

would view the scene. Students gain experience understanding how 

the trained eye of a geologist views a scene in order to understand 

the historical processes that have occurred that result in what they are 

seeing today. 

• New Classroom Performance System and Questions--McGraw-Hill 

has partnered with eInstruction to provide the revolutionary Classroom 

Performance System (CPS) and to bring interactivity into the classroom. 

CPS is a wireless response system that gives the instructor and students 

immediate feedback from the entire class. The wireless response pads 

are essentially remotes that engage students and are easy to use. CPS 

allows you to motivate student preparation, interactivity, and active 

learning so you can receive immediate feedback and know what students 

understand. A text-specific set of questions, formatted for both CPS and 

PowerPoint, is available via download from the Instructor area of the 

Online Learning Center. 

Two new contributing authors: 

Rick Hazlett from California Polytechnic University--Pomona contributed 

to chapters 2, 19, and 21. 

J Bret Bennington from Hofstra University contributed to chapters 5 

and 6. 

Features 

• This new edition includes an updated art program that will not 

only aid in understanding, but also engage students’ interest. Over 300 

illustrations have been revised or created from scratch. Over 130 new 

photos have been added to provide the reader with significant detail 

to support the textual material. Several photos from previous editions 

have been retained for their subject matter, but have been electronically 

enhanced to improve focus and clarity. 

• Each chapter concludes with the following learning tools: 

» Summaries bring together and summarize the major concepts of 

the chapter. 

» Terms to Remember include all the boldfaced terms covered in the 

chapter so that students can verify their understanding of the concepts 

behind each term. 

» Testing Your Knowledge Quizzes allow students to gauge their 

understanding of the chapter (The answers to the multiple choice portions 

are posted on the website). 

» Expanding Your Knowledge Questions stimulate a student’s critical 

thinking by asking questions with answers that are not found in 

the textbook. 

» Exploring Web Resources describe some of the best sites on the 

web that relate to the chapter. 

» Animations listing of related animations on Online Learning 

Center. 

• Physical Geology, 11/e will feature five types of boxed readings: 

1) In Greater Depth Boxes. These boxes discuss phenomena that are 

not necessarily covered in a geology course (e.g., Precious Gems) or 

present material in greater depth (e.g., Calculating the Age of a Rock). 

2) Environmental Geology Boxes. These boxes discuss topics that relate 

the chapter material to environmental issues, including impact on 

humans (e.g., Radon-A Radioactive Health Hazard). 

3) Planetary Geology Boxes. These boxes compare features elsewhere 

in the solar system to their Earthly counterparts (e.g.; Stream Features 

on the Planet Mars). 

4) Earth Systems Boxes. These boxes highlight the interrelationships 

between the geosphere, the atmosphere, and other Earth systems (e.g., 

Oxygen Isotopes and Climate Change). 

5) Web Boxes. These boxes summarize material that is further explained 

on the book’s Online Learning Center. 

• Digital Content Manager has been updated. This CD-ROM contains 

every illustration, photograph and table from the text, 80 animations, active 

art, lecture outlines, and 200 additional photos. The software makes 

customizing your multimedia presentation easy. You can organize 

figures in any order you want; add labels, lines, and your own artwork; 

integrate material from other sources; edit and annotate lecture notes; 

and have the option of placing your multimedia lecture into another 

presentation program such as PowerPoint. 

• Dr. Steve Boss of the University of Arkansas will thoroughly update 

the Online Learning Center website that he created for Physical 

Geology, 9e. 

• Instructors will find an instructor’s manual, test questions, and list 

of slides and transparencies for each chapter. Students will be able to 

access a study guide, animations of difficult concepts, interactive quizzing, 

flashcards, Internet exercises, and more. 

• Instructor’s can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! 

The Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including 

this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, 

laboratories, case studies, and readings These materials, along with 

others including your own notes, can be customized into a black and 

white, high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that 

saves your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, 

register, and create your own complimentary copy. 

• www.primiscontentcenter.com 

127 


9/29/2006 1:23:58 PM

Geology 

Contents 

1 The Essentials of Plate Tectonics and other Important Concepts 2 

Atoms, Elements, and Minerals 3 Igneous Rocks, Intrusive Activity, and 

the Origin of Igneous Rocks 4 Volcanism and Extrusive Rocks 5 Weathering 

and Soil 6 Sediment and Sedimentary Rocks 7 Metamorphism, 

Metamorphic Rocks, and Hydrothermal Rocks 8 Time and Geology 9 

Mass Wasting 10 Streams and Floods 11 Ground Water 12 Glaciers 

and Glaciation 13 Deserts and Wind Action 14 Waves, Beaches and 

Coasts 15 Geologic Structures 16 Earthquakes 17 Earth’s Interior and 

Geophysical Properties 18 The Sea Floor 19 Plate Tectonics 20 Mountain 

Belts and the Continental Crust 21 Geologic Resources 22 The 

Earth’s Companions 

New 

Laboratory 

LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY PHYSICAL 

GEOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By Norris Jones, University of Wisconsin-Oshkosh and Charles Jones, 

University of Pittsburgh 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305091-1 / MHID: 0-07-305091-1 

If it’s important for you to incorporate the scientific method 

into your teaching, this lab manual is the perfect fit. In every 

exercise there are scientific method boxes that provide students 

with insight into the relevance of the scientific method to the 

topic at hand. The manual also includes “In Greater Depth” 

problems, a more challenging probe into certain issues. They are 

more quantitative in nature and require more in-depth, critical 

thinking, which is unique to this type of manual. 

CONTENTS 

Minerals 1 Properties of Minerals / 2 Mineral Identification / Rocks 3 

Igneous Rocks / 4 Sedimentary Rocks / 5 Metamorphic Rocks / Maps 

and Images 6 Topographic Maps and Digital Elevation Models / 7 

Remote Sensing of Volcanoes and Volcanic Hazards / Surface Processes 

8 Streams and Humid-Climate Landscapes / 9 Groundwater and 

Groundwater-Influenced Landscapes / 10 Glaciation / 11 Sea Coasts / 12 

Arid-Climate Landscapes / Geologic Time and Sequences 13 Geologic 

Age / Internal Processes 14 Structural Geology / 15 Geologic Maps / 

16 Earthquakes / 17 Plate Tectonics 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








New 

LABORATORY MANUAL FOR PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 

13th Edition 

By James H Zumberge (Deceased) 

2007 (June 2006) / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298861-4 / MHID: 0-07-298861-4 

This successful laboratory manual is written for the freshmanlevel 

laboratory course in physical geology. In this lab, students 

study Earth materials, geologic interpretation of topographic 

maps, aerial photographs and Earth satellite imagery, structural 

geology and plate tectonics and related phenomena. With nearly 

30 exercises, professors have great flexibility when developing 

the syllabus for their physical geology lab course. The ease of 

use, tremendous selection, and tried and true nature of the labs 

selected have made this lab manual one of the leading selling 

physical geology lab manuals. 

Features 

• This lab manual incorporates well-produced, easy-to-read, and 

varied topographic and geologic maps. The authors have selected maps 

from across North America, helping professors tailor the presentation 

to their region of the country. 

• The authors provide excellent coverage of Earth materials (rocks 

and minerals), while doing an outstanding job of teaching the scientific 

method, through well-written and well-illustrated exercises. 

• The authors consistently use K-feldpsar rather than potassium feldspar 

and/or orthoclase throughout the manual. 

• Throughout the text, website listings called Web Connections, 

related to the topic at hand, provide students with access to current 

information and additional resources. 

• A glossary, located in the back of the manual, allows students to 

review the important concepts and geologic terms they will encounter 

in the laboratory. The glossary is particularly useful when students do 

not routinely bring their textbooks to the lab, or when students are not 

concurrently enrolled in the lecture course. 

• An Instructor’s Manual to the Laboratory Manual can be found on 

the custom web site. 

• The website that accompanies Zumberge provides students with 

flashcards, animations, additional photos, and all of the weblinks listed 

in the lab manual. 

• Instructor’s can customize this lab manual using our do-it-yourself 

website. The Primis Content Center features more than one million 

items, including this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill 

textbooks, laboratories, case studies, and readings These materials, 




website, register, and create your own complimentary copy. 

Contents 

1 Earth Materials / Minerals / Rocks / The Geologic Column and 

Geologic Time / 2 Topographic Maps, Aerial Photographs, and Other 

Imagery From Remote Sensing / Map Coordinates and Land Divisions 

Topographic Maps / Imagery From Remote Sensing / 3 Geologic 

Interpretation of Topographic Maps, Aerial Photographs, and Earth 

Satellite Images / 4 Structural Geology / Structural Features of Sedimentary 

Rocks / Faults and Earthquakes / The Use of Seismic Waves to 

Locate the Epicenter of an Earthquake / 5 Plate Tectonics and Related 

Geologic Phenomena / Seafloor Spreading in the South Atlantic and 

Eastern Pacific Oceans 

128 


9/29/2006 1:23:58 PM

2007-2008 NEW Integrative Biology (PAE) Titles 


~ Contents 

Animal Behavior........................................................... 130 

Biostatistics................................................................... 130 

Botany (Economic)........................................................ 131 


Lab Manuals.............................................................. 131 

Textbook................................................................... 130 

Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy.................................. 140 

Conservation Biology.................................................... 132 

Ecology......................................................................... 132 

Laboratory................................................................. 133 


Introductory Texts..................................................... 133 

Media....................................................................... 137 

Evolution....................................................................... 137 

Invertebrate Biology...................................................... 138 

Limnology..................................................................... 138 

Mammalogy.................................................................. 138 

Marine Biology............................................................. 139 

Parasitology.................................................................. 139 


Laboratory................................................................. 140 

Textbook................................................................... 140 

Zoology 

Laboratory - Majors................................................... 142 

Supplements............................................................. 142 

Textbook................................................................... 141 


• CASTRO 

Marine Biology, 6e...................................................139 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321577-8 / MHID: 0-07-321577-5 


Environmental Science, 9e.......................................136 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321881-6 / MHID: 0-07-321881-2 

• HICKMAN 

Animal Diversity, 4e................................................141 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252844-2 / MHID: 0-07-252844-3 

• HICKMAN 

Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e..............142 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326098-3 / MHID: 0-07-326098-3 

• MILLER 

Zoology, 7e..............................................................141 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322807-5 / MHID: 0-07-322807-9 



Principles of Environmental Science, 4e..................133 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330446-5 / MHID: 0-07-330446-8 

• ENGER 

Environmental Science, 11e.....................................134 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330447-2 / MHID: 0-07-330447-6 

• KARDONG 

Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e..................137 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305077-5 / MHID: 0-07-305077-6 

• KAULFMANN 

Environmental Science.............................................135 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331186-9 / MHID: 0-07-331186-3 

• MOLLES 

Ecology, 4e...............................................................132 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330976-7 / MHID: 0-07-330976-1 

• STERN 

Introductory Plant Biology, 11e...............................130 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331421-1 / MHID: 0-07-331421-8 

• STERN 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory 

Plant Biology, 11e....................................................131 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283068-2 / MHID: 0-07-283068-9 

129 

HED 2007 Integrative Biology (PA129 129 

9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM


Animal Behavior 


ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

5th Edition 

By Lee C Drickamer, Southern Illinois University, Carbondale, 

Stephen H Vessey, Bowling Green State University and Elizabeth 

Jakob, University of Massachusetts - Amherst 

2002 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-012199-7 / MHID: 0-07-012199-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113020-2 / MHID: 0-07-113020-9 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/zoology 

CONTENTS 

Part One The Study of Animal Behavior 1 Introduction 2 History of 

the Study of Animal Behavior 3 Approaches and Methods Part Two 

Behavior Genetics and Evolution 4 Genes and Evolution 5 Behavioral 

Genetics 6 Evolution of Behavior Patterns Part Three Mechanisms 

of Behavior 7 The Nervous System and Behavior 8 Hormones and 

Behavior, and Immunology and Behavior 9 Biological Timekeeping 

10 Development of Behavior 11 Learning Behavior 12 Communication 

Part Four Finding Food and Shelter 13 Migration, Orientation, 

and Navigation 14 Habitat Selection 15 Foraging Behavior Part Five 

Social Organization and Mating Systems 16 Aggression 17 Sexual 

Reproduction and Parental Care 18 Parental Investment and Mating 

Systems 19 Evolution of Social Systems / References / Glossary 


Biostatistics 

INTRODUCTION TO BIOSTATISTICS 

By Thomas Glover and Kevin Mitchell of Hobart & WM Smith 

College 

2002 / 432 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123743-7 / MHID: 0-07-123743-7 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/zoology/glover/index.mhtml 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction to Data Analysis 2 Introduction to Probability 3 Probability 

Distributions 4 Sampling Distributions 5 Introduction to Hypothesis 

Testing 6 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 7 Tests of Hypothesis 

Involving Two Samples 8 k-Sample Tests of Hypothesis: The Analysis of 

Variance 9 Two-Factor Analysis 10 Linear Regression and Correlation 

11 Goodness of Fit Tests for Categorical Data Appendixes: A Proofs of 

Selected Results / B Answers to Even-numbered Problems / C Tables 

of Distributions and Critical Values 

New 


Textbook 

INTRODUCTORY PLANT BIOLOGY 

11th Edition 

By Kinsley Stern, California State University-Chico, James Bidlack, 

University of Central Oklahoma and Shelley Jansky, University of 

Wisconsin-Madison 

2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331421-1 / MHID: 0-07-331421-8 

This introductory text assumes little prior scientific knowledge 

on the part of the student. It includes sufficient information for 

some shorter introductory botany courses open to both majors 

and nonmajors, and is arranged so that certain sections can be 

omitted without disrupting the overall continuity of the course. 

Stern emphasizes current interests while presenting basic botanical 

principles. 

FEATURES 

• Stern implements a traditional, micro to macro approach (cells to 

ecology) to organizing chapters. 

• To pique student interest and reinforce concepts, there is a considerable 

amount of ecology and ethnobotany included with traditional 

botany throughout the text. 

• A chapter outline, review questions, discussion questions, learning 

online topics, and additional reading lists are provided for each chapter. 

New terms are defined as they are introduced, and those used more than 

once are boldfaced and included in a pronunciation glossary. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: What Is Plant Biology Chapter 2: The Nature of Life 

Chapter 3: Cells Chapter 4: Tissues Chapter 5: Roots and Soils Chapter 

6: Stems Chapter 7: Leaves Chapter 8: Flowers, Fruits, and Seeds 

Chapter 9: Water in Plants Chapter 10: Plant Metabolism Chapter 11: 

Growth Chapter 12: Meiosis and Alternation of Generation Chapter 

13: Genetics Chapter 14: Plant Breeding and Propagation Chapter 

15: Evolution Chapter 16: Plant Names and Classification Chapter 17: 

Domain (Kingdom) Bacteria, Domain (Kingdom) Archaea, and Viruses 

Chapter 18: Kingdom Protista Chapter 19: Kingdom Fungi Chapter 20: 

Introduction to the Plant Kingdom: Bryophytes Chapter 21: The Seedless 

Vascular Plants: Ferns and Their Relatives Chapter 22: Introduction 

to Seed Plants: Gymnosperms Chapter 23: Seed Plants: Angiosperms 

Chapter 24: Flowering Plants and Civilization Chapter 25: Ecology 

Chapter 26: Biomes 

COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








130 


9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM


PRINCIPLES OF BOTANY 

By Gordon Uno, National Science Foundation, Richard Storey, 

Colorado College and Randy Moore, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis 

2001 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118087-0 / MHID: 0-07-118087-7 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/botany 

CONTENTS 

1 An Introduction to Plants and Their Study 2 The Ecology and Natural 

Selection of Plants 3 Energy and Cell Chemistry 4 Plant Cells and Tissue 

Systems 5 DNA, Genes, and Cell Division 6 Plant Growth and Development 

7 Root Systems and Plant Mineral Nutrition 8 Stems and Secondary 

Growth 9 Leaves and the Movement of Water 10 Photosynthesis 

11 Respiration 12 Flowers, Fruits and Seeds 13 Genetics 14 Evolution 

15 The Diversity and Classification of Plants 16 Bacteria, Fungi and 

Algae 17 Bryophytes and Ferns: The Seedless Plants 18 Gymnosperms 

and Angiosperms: The Seed Plants 19 Ecology Appendix A: What is 

Genetic Engineering Appendix B: Fundamentals of Chemistry for 

Botany Students 

New 

Lab Manuals 


INTRODUCTORY PLANT BIOLOGY 

11th Edition 

By Kingsley Stern, California State University-Chico and James Bidlack, 

University of Central Oklahoma 

2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283068-2 / MHID: 0-07-283068-9 

CONTENTS 

1: The Microscope 2: The Cell 3: Mitosis 4: Roots 5: Stems 6: Leaves 

7: Plant Propagation 8: Cell Components and Products 9: Diffusion, 

Growth, and Hormones 10: Photosynthesis 11: Water in Plants; Respiration; 

Digestion 12: Meiosis and Alternation of Generations 13: Domain 

and Kingdom Survey 14: Domains Archaea and Bacteria; Kingdom 

Protista 15: Kingdom Fungi (Mycota) 16: Bryophytes and Ferns 17: 

Kingdom Plantae: Gymnosperms 18: Kingdom Plantae: Angiosperms 

(Flowering Plants--Phylum Magnoliophyta) 19: Fruits, Spices, Survival 

Plants, and Poisonous Plants 20: Ecology 21: Genetics 

LABORATORY MANUAL FOR APPLIED BOTANY 

By Estelle Levetin and Karen McMahon of the University of Tulsa, 

Rob Reinsvold, University of Northern Colorado 

2002 / 272 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246548-8 / MHID: 0-07-246548-4 

Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/botany/ 

CONTENTS 

1 Cells of Crystal and Color 2 Cell Division and Cloning 3 Plant Tissues-The 

Fabrics of Our Lives 4 Plant Architecture 5 Plants Do It All- 

Photosynthesis, Respiration, and Transpiration 6 Say It With Flowers 

7 Fleshy Fruits and Flying Seeds 8 Genetic Diversity of Our Food 9 

Algae-From Diversity to Dessert 10 Your Piece of the Sun 11 Leaves 

of Grass 12 The Lowdown on Legumes 13 Food from Underground 

and Far Away 14 The Spice of Life 15 The Beauty of Wood 16 Bioprospecting 

for Medicinal Plants 17 Bioactive Drugs in Action 18 The 

Fungus Among Us 


Botany (Economic) 

PLANTS AND SOCIETY 

4th Edition 

By Estelle Levetin and Karen McMahon of University of Tulsa 

2006 (Feb 2005) / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252842-8 / MHID: 0-07-252842-7 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/levetin4e 

This introductory, one quarter/one-semester text takes a multidisciplinary 

approach to studying the relationship between 

plants and people. The authors strive to stimulate interest in 

plant science and encourage students to further their studies in 

botany. Also, by exposing students to society’s historical connection 

to plants, Levetin and McMahon hope to instill a greater 

appreciation for the botanical world. Plants and Society covers 

basic principles of botany with strong emphasis on the economic 

aspects and social implications of plants and fungi. 

CONTENTS 

I Plants and Society: The Botanical Connections to Our Lives 1 Plants 

in Our Lives II Introduction to Plant Life: Botanical Principles 2 The 

Plant Cell 3 The Plant Body 4 Plant Physiology 5 Plant Life Cycle: Flowers 

6 Plant Life Cycle: Fruits and Seeds 7 Genetics 8 Plant Systematics 

and Evolution 9 Diversity of Plant Life III Plants as a Source of Food 

10 Human Nutrition 11 Origins of Agriculture 12 The Grasses 13 Legumes 

14 Starchy Staples 15 Feeding a Hungry World IV Commercial 

Products Derived from Plants 16 Stimulating Beverages 17 Herbs and 

Spices 18 Materials: Cloth, Paper, and Wood V Plants and Human 

Health 19 Medicinal Plants 20 Psychoactive Plants 21 Poisonous and 

Allergy Plants VI Algae and Fungi: The Impacts of Algae Fungi on 

Human Affairs 22 The Algae 23 Fungi in the Natural Environment 24 

Beverages and Foods from Fungi 25 Fungi that Affect Human Health 

VII Plants and the Environment 26 Plant Ecology Appendix A Metric 

System Appendix B Classification of Plants. 


ECONOMIC BOTANY 

3rd Edition 

By Beryl Simpson and Molly Ogorzaly of University of Texas at 

Austin 

2001/ 210 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290938-8 / MHID: 0-07-290938-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118188-4 / MHID: 0-07-118188-1 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/botany/simpson-links/weblinks. 

mhtml 

CONTENTS 

1 Plants and Their Manipulation by People 2 Origins of Agriculture 

3 Fruits and Nuts of Temperate Regions 4 Fruits and Nuts of Warm 

Regions 5 Cereal Grains and Forage Grasses 6 Legumes 7 Foods from 

Leaves, Stems, and Roots 8 Spices, Herbs, and Perfumes 9 Vegetable 

Oils and Waxes 10 Hydrogels, Elastic Latexes, and Resins 11 Medicinal 

Plants 12 Psychoactive Drugs and Poisons from Plants 13 Stimulating 

Beverages 14 Alcoholic Beverages 15 Fibers, Dyes, and Tannins 16 

Wood, Cork, and Bamboo 17 Ornamental Plants 18 Algae 19 Uses of 

Plants in the Future 

131 


9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM


Conservation Biology 


CONSERVATION BIOLOGY 

Foundations, Concepts, Applications 

By Fred Van Dyke, Wheaton College 

2003 / 432 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239770-3 / MHID: 0-07-239770-5 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119906-3 / MHID: 0-07-119906-3 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/conservation 

CONTENTS 

1 The History and Distinctions of Conservation Biology 2 The Legal 

Foundations of Conservation Biology 3 Values and Ethics in Conservation 

4 Biodiversity: Concept, Measurement, and Challenge 5 The 

Historic and Foundational Paradigms of Conservation Biology 6 The 

Conservation of Genetic Diversity 7 The Conservation of Populations 

8 The Conservation of Habitat and Landscape 9 The Conservation of 

Aquatic Systems 10 Ecosystem Management 11 Restoration Ecology 12 

Conservation, Economics, and Sustainable Development 13 Professional 

Effectiveness and Future Directions in Conservation Biology 


Ecology 

New 

ECOLOGY 

Concepts and Applications, 4th Edition 

By Manuel Molles, University of New Mexico-Albuquerque 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330976-7 / MHID: 0-07-330976-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110197-4 / MHID: 0-07-110197-7 [IE] 

This introductory general ecology text features a strong emphasis 

on helping students grasp the main concepts of ecology 

while keeping the presentation more applied than theoretical. 

An evolutionary perspective forms the foundation of the entire 

discussion. The book begins with the natural history of the 

planet, considers portions of the whole in the middle chapters, 

and ends with another perspective of the entire planet in the 

concluding chapter. Its unique organization of focusing only 

on several key concepts in each chapter sets it apart from the 

competition. 


• Content has been updated throughout with current examples and 

sources. Updated coverage includes: ecological stoichiometry, acid 

precipitation, global warming, symbiotic systems, speciation, organismal 

ecology, and discussion of tsunamis. 

• “Investigating the Evidence” boxes now include critical thinking 

questions. These boxes focus on the scientific method, emphasizing 

statistics and study design. They support the concept discussions by 

presenting step-by-step clarification within a broader treatment of the 

process of science. 

• A foldout, 2-page biome map has been added at the back of the 

book. 

• Changes to the pedagogical system strengthen the critical thinking 

aspect of the book and include: 

- A new feature called “Concept Review” questions, with answers, 

now appears at the end of each section of the chapter. Each section 

of the chapter now contains “Concepts,” “Concept Discussions,” and 

“Concept Review” questions. 

- A new list of key terms now appears at the end of each chapter. 

- The author has shortened the length of the “Suggested Readings” 

where possible. Items in the “Suggested Readings” are not duplicated 

with items in the “References” at the end of the book. 

- The “List of Chapter Concepts” now appears in the Online Learning 

Center, rather than in an appendix. 

- Helpful appendices include commonly used statistical tables and an 

extended list of abbreviations used in the text, for use as reference and 

as study aids. 

FEATURES 

• This text takes a true “Concepts” approach with each chapter being 

built around several key concepts. It includes many examples drawn 

from the natural history of organisms. 

• This text offers a unique art program that uses captions within the 

illustration to explain the process. The key information is integral to the 

concept, rather than contained in a standard figure legend. 

• Includes classical studies along with contemporary examples to 

show the scientific method is valid and that research is still incomplete 

or ongoing. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introduction: What Is Ecology Section I: Natural History 

Chapter 2: Life on Land Chapter 3: Life in Water Section II: Individuals 

Chapter 4: Temperature Relations Chapter 5: Water Relations Chapter 

6: Energy and Nutrient Relations Chapter 7: Social Relations Section 

III: Population Ecology Chapter 8: Population Genetics and Natural 

Selection Chapter 9: Population Distribution and Abundance Chapter 

10: Population Dynamics Chapter 11: Population Growth Chapter 12: 

Life Histories Section IV: Interactions Chapter 13: Competition Chapter 

14: Exploitative Interactions: Predation, Herbivory, Parasitism, and Disease 

Chapter 15: Mutualism Section V: Communities and Ecosystems 

Chapter 16: Species Abundance and Diversity Chapter 17: Species 

Interactions and Community Structure Chapter 18: Primary Production 

and Energy Flow Chapter 19: Nutrient Cycling and Retention Chapter 

20: Succession and Stability Section VI: Large-Scale Ecology Chapter 

21: Landscape Ecology Chapter 22: Geographic Ecology Chapter 23: 

Global Ecology 

• Artwork has been updated throughout for greater focus and clarity. 

The art program continues to use captions within the illustrations to 

explain the point of the art. The key information is integral to the concept, 

rather than contained in a standard figure legend. The explanatory 

boxes used in this text are unique and not available in any other 

ecology textbook. 

• New photos have been added throughout the text to illustrate the 

dynamic nature of ecological study. 

132 


9/29/2006 1:26:55 PM


FUNDAMENTALS OF ECOLOGY 

2nd Edition 

By Dash Madhab 

2001 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-042147-9 / MHID: 0-07-042147-1 

[Tata McGraw-Hill Title] 

The book has retained its fundamental, interdisciplinary approach, 

with balanced treatment of botany and zoology related 

concepts and examples. The environmental aspect has been 

strengthened in this edition. There are several new chapters to 

this edition: 1. Enviromental Toxicology with relevant case studies 

2. Pollution Ecology with a comprehensive section on the 

provisions of the Indian Constitution and environmental laws, 

and detailed discussion on a wide range of pollutants, including 

industrial pollutants. Other important additions: 1. The concept 

of landscape ecology 2. Coverage on the Eastern and Western 

ghats of India 3. A discussion on world climate change 4. The 

concept of sustainable development 5. Geographical information 

system and remote sensing, applied to ecology. 

Laboratory 

GENERAL ECOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 

8th Edition 

By George Cox 

2002 / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290974-6 / MHID: 0-07-290974-9 

Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae 

CONTENTS 

Part I Techniques of Ecological Study 1 Designing an Ecological Study 

2 Experimental Design in Ecological Studies 3 Sampling Design in Ecological 

Studies 4 Statistical Analysis and Testing in Ecology 5 Literature 

Research in Ecology 6 Internet Resources in Ecology 7 Preparing an 

Ecological Research Paper Part II Terrestrial and Aquatic Ecosystems 

8 Plant Community Structure 9 Animal Community Structure 10 Soil 

Arthropod Community Structure 11 Structure of a Lake Ecosystem Part 

III Temperature, Water, and Energy Relations 12 Acclimation to Temperature 

13 Behavioral Preference Analysis 14 Plant Water Potential 

15 Field Measurement of Photosynthesis and Transpiration Part IV 

Population Ecology 16 Mark-Recapture and Catch-Effort Population 

stimates 17 Mapping Home Ranges and Territories 18 Intrapopulation 

Dispersion Analysis 19 Mortality, Recruitment, and Migration Rates 

in Populations 20 Life Tables and Survivorship Curves 21 Ecogenetic 

Evolution in Plants 22 Population Growth, Limitation, and Interaction 

Part V Intraspecific and Interspecific Interactions 23 Field Studies of 

Plant Competition 24 Ecological Isolation 25 Niche Breadth, Niche 

Overlap, and the Community Matrix 26 Interspecific Association 27 

Pollination Ecology Part VI Community Ecology 28 Measurement of 

Species Diversity 29 Community Similarity and Ordination 30 Nestedness 

in Community Composition Part VII Ecosystem Ecology 31 

Analysis of Food Webs 32 Primary Production in Terrestrial Ecosystems 

33 Primary Production in Aquatic Ecosystems 34 Simulation of Ecosystem 

Dynamics 35 Mechanisms of Biotic Succession Part VIII Regional 

and Global Ecology 36 Species-Area Relationships 37 Metapopulation 

Dynamics 38 Landscape Ecology 39 Geographic Information Systems 

40 Conserving Global Biodiversity Appendix I Statistical Tables Appendix 

II Sources of Software and Hardware 


Introductory Texts 


New 

PRINCIPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 

Inquiry and Applications, 

4th Edition 

By William Cunningham, University of Minnesota and Mary Ann 

Cunningham, Vassar College 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330446-5 / MHID: 0-07-330446-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110194-3 / MHID: 0-07-110194-2 [IE] 

Rather than the 25 to 30 chapters found in most environmental 

science textbooks, the authors have limited Principles of Environmental 

Science: Inquiry and Applications to 15 chapters--perfect 

for the one-semester, non-majors environmental science course. 

True to its title, the goal of this concise text is to provide an upto-date, 

introductory view of essential themes in environmental 

science along with offering students numerous opportunities to 

practice scientific thinking and active learning. 


• Several chapters have been significantly revised: 

- In addition to significant revisions of the section on matter, energy, 

chemistry, biomolecules, and cells, Chapter 2 features a new section 

on ecological systems, and expanded discussion on DNA. 

- Chapter 3 has been revised heavily to include a strengthened discussion 

of evolution, speciation, taxonomy, species interaction, keystone 

species, community complexity, and ecological disturbance. 

- Chapter 5 features a major revision on the discussion on biomes with 

a greatly expanded section on coastlines, reefs, mangroves, estuaries, 

saltmarshes and freshwater ecosystems. 

- A new section on New Source Review and the 2005 Clean Air Interstate 

Rule has been added to Chapter 9. In addition, the section on 

evidence for climate change including 2005 hurricane season has been 

rewritten; and the section on controlling greenhouse gas emissions has 

been updated. 

- In Chapter 12, a discussion on rapid energy demand growth in China 

and India, and on LNG shipments has been added. The discussion of 

energy conservation and renewable energy sources has been expanded, 

including new sections on biofuels and wave power. 

- Chapter 15 has undergone a major revision and reorganization including 

much more material on sustainability and what individuals can do. 

Also, a new section on “What can Individuals Do” has been added, 

including environmental education, environmental literacy, citizen science, 

environmental careers, individual choices, green consumerism, 

working together, and student environmental groups. The section on 

ecosystem management has been rewritten with a focus on Everglades 

restoration; and the chapter now ends with a new positive message 

about global sustainability and the key messages from the Millennium 

Assessment study. 

• Updated Case Studies--Every chapter opens with a Case Study (nearly 

all of them are new to this edition) that shows how the science presented 

in that chapter is of current interest. In this edition, the authors have 

chosen positive examples in which people are taking action to repair 

and improve some aspect of their environment. In addition, each case 

study has a new Locator Map that highlights the area of interest being 

discussed. 

133 


9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM


• Numerous new photos have been added throughout the text to depict 

real-life situations. Several illustrations, graphs, and charts are new or 

revised to present realistic and current information in a form that is easier 

to comprehend than if that same material were presented in text. 

• Each chapter opens with a “List of Objectives” that will help students 

organize study priorities. Rather than being imperative requirements, 

these objectives have been changed to more active questions that lead 

rather than command. 

• New and Redesigned End-of-Chapter Tools: 

New Data Analysis Exercises. Because so many students need practice 

analyzing data, graphing data, and thinking analytically, the end-ofchapter 

exercises have been redesigned as Data Analysis projects. In 

each exercise, students are asked to create or analyze graphs, to map 

or inspect a data set, or take other steps to analyze data. 

A more challenging, open-ended set of questions have been added 

to encourage students to think more deeply and independently about 

issues and principles presented in the chapter. These Critical Thinking 

and Discussion questions make excellent starting points for discussion 

sections. They also could be used to practice for essay exams. 

The number of Review Questions has been doubled to provide more 

comprehensive coverage of important topics in each chapter. Answers 

to review questions are posted to the text website. 

• McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a new complete electronic homework and 










FEATURES 

• Concise and affordable, Principles of Environmental Science: Inquiry 

and Applications explores the scientific principles and active investigation 

behind environmental science. Three themes are woven throughout 

every chapter: scientific thinking, active learning, and sustainability. 

• Central questions that underlie the text are “how would a scientist 

think about this problem” and “how can we make informed decisions 

in the face of uncertainty”. 

• Because few of us learn effectively without an opportunity to actively 

apply new ideas, application boxes have been included throughout 

the text. These boxes provide a break in reading and invite students 

to practice or apply skills they have just learned. In addition, “What 

can you do” boxes in nearly every chapter suggest practical things 

that individuals can do to help improve environmental quality and 

resource conservation. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Understanding Our Environment Chapter 2: Environmental 

Systems: Connections, Cycles, Flows, and Feedback Loops Chapter 3: 

Species Populations, Interactions, and Communities Chapter 4: Human 

Populations Chapter 5: Biomes and Biodiversity Chapter 6: Environmental 

Conservation: Forests, Grasslands, Parks, and Nature Preserves 

Chapter 7: Food and Agriculture Chapter 8: Environmental Health and 

Toxicology Chapter 9: Air: Climate and Pollution Chapter 10: Water: 

Resources and Pollution Chapter 11: Environmental Geology and Earth 

Resources Chapter 12: Energy Chapter 13: Solid and Hazardous Waste 

Chapter 14: Economics and Urbanization Chapter 15: Environmental 

Policy and Sustainability 


New 

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 

A Study of Interrelationships, 11th Edition 

By Eldon Enger, Delta College and Bradley Smith, Western Washington 

University 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330447-2 / MHID: 0-07-330447-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110195-0 / MHID: 0-07-110195-0 [IE] 

This full-color, introductory environmental science text is known 

for being concise, conceptual, and value-priced. The approach 

and reading level cover the basic concepts without overloading 

students with too much detail. The authors reinforce the text’s 

central theme of “interrelationships” by providing a historical 

perspective, information on economic and political realities, 

discuss the role of different social experiences, and integrate 

this with the crucial science to describe the natural world and 

how we affect it. 


• Several chapters have been significantly revised. 

- New guest author, Christopher Preston, University of Montana, has 

broadened the coverage of Chapter 2-Environmental Ethics-to give the 

chapter greater force and clarity. New information has been added 

to reflect the history, development, and maturation of thinking about 

environmental issues. 

- New guest author, Jacob VanHouten, Delta College, has intergrated 

his knowledge of environmental regulations and the handling of hazardous 

materials into Chapter 3--Environmental Risk and Chapter 18- 

-Environmental Regulations. Energy savings cost/benefit analysis, and 

the Great Lakes Resource Management are topics addressed through 

detailed discussion and case studies. Also included are the most current 

Environmental liability protection and grants through the new 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Small Business Liability Relief 

and Brownfield Revitalization Act (SBLRBRA or “Brownfield Law”) as 

it relates to economics, assessment and management. 

- Chapter 7- Populations: Characteristics and Issues is the result of the 

combination of two separate chapters from previous editions (chapters 

7 and 8). In response to reviewer requests, several sections such as 

those on carrying capacity, limiting factors, and r and K strategists have 

been rewritten. 

- Chapter 10- Nuclear Energy has been completely reorganized. New 

material has been added on the biological effects of ionizing radiation, 

measuring radiation, radiation protection, radioactive decay series, and 

dirty bombs. 

• Nearly 300 new photos have been added throughout the eleventh 

edition to present real-life situations. Several illustrations, graphs, and 

charts are new or revised to present detailed information in a form that 

is easier to comprehend than if that same information were presented 

in text form. 

• The new “What’s Your Take” feature found at the end of each 

chapter asks students to take a stand on a particular issue and develop 

arguments to support their position. This is an effective way to develop 

and foster critical thinking. 

• The new student learning tool, “Experience This”, asks students to 

extend their learning by undertaking simple activities that relate to the 

content of the chapter. 









134 


9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM




FEATURES 

• Environmental Science: A Study of Interrelationships covers the engaging 

topics of ethics, law & policy, energy, and pollution in addition to 

traditional biological and physical subjects. The length and price of this 

text make it one of the most cost-effective, one-semester environmental 

science texts available. 

• “Global Perspectives” compare different countries approaches to 

environmental problems and provide examples of environmental issues 

not typically found in North America. 

• Critical Thinking questions can be found in every chapter. By answering 

these questions, students will become better at evaluating 

information, opinions, and arguments, so they can learn to recognize 

bias, characterize the assumption behind arguments, and avoid jumping 

to conclusions. 

• Issues--Analysis boxed readings encourage students to think about 

issues and formulate their own thoughts. Found in each chapter, these 

readings present real world examples of environmental problems and 

prompt students to think about issues involved and respond to a series 

of questions. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Environmental Interrelationships Chapter 2: Environmental 

Ethics Chapter 3: Environmental Risk: Economics, Assessment, and 

Management Chapter 4: Interrelated Scientific Principles: Matter, Energy, 

and Environment Chapter 5: Interactions: Environments and Organisms 

Chapter 6: Kinds of Ecosystems and Communities Chapter 7: Populations: 

Characteristics and Issues Chapter 8: Energy and Civilization: 

Patterns of Consumption Chapter 9: Energy Sources Chapter 10: Nuclear 

Energy Chapter 11: Biodiversity Issues Chapter 12: Land-Use Planning 

Chapter 13: Soil and Its Uses Chapter 14: Agricultural Methods and Pest 

Management Chapter 15: Water Management Chapter 16: Air Quality 

Issues Chapter 17: Solid Waste Management and Disposal Chapter 18: 

Environmental Regulations: Hazardous Substances and Wastes Chapter 

19: Environmental Policy and Decision Making 

New 


By Robert Kaufmann and Cutler Cleveland of Boston University 

2008 (February 2007) 

ISBN13: 978-0-07-331186-9 / MHID: 0-07-331186-3 

Unlike any other introductory environmental science text, 

Kaufmann/Cleveland takes a fresh approach to the subject in 

that they intertwine social science (i.e. economic systems and 

policy) with the natural sciences (i.e. energy) throughout the 

entire text. In other words, students are going to clearly see the 

relevancy between the underlying causes of environmental 

problems and how they are affected on a daily basis. 

FEATURES 

• An Interdisciplinary Approach. Unlike other textbooks, the authors 

weave both social and natural sciences throughout the text, allowing 

students to see the complete relationship between people and their environment. 

The five main themes woven throughout include: 1) energy 

and material flows, 2) ecology and economics, 3) costs and benefits 

of environmental policy, 4) a systems perspective, and 5) Darwinian 

evolution and natural selection. 

• Unlike other environmental science textbooks, Environmental Science 

is not an “encyclopedia of facts”. The authors teach principles and applications, 

aiming to identify relevant problems, understand the basis of 

those problems, and develop the tools to solve those problems. 

• The text’s unique art program does not rely heavily on photographs. 

Instead, conceptual figures and graphs are used to illustrate important 

ideas and relationships. 

• Three types of boxed readings are available in each chapter to help 

students see the relationship between humans and the environment: 

- Your Ecological Footprint. These exercises ask students to calculate 

how certain parts of their lifestyle affect the environment. Consistent 

with the interdisciplinary emphasis, these Ecological Footprint exercises 

build on each other from chapter to chapter. 

- Case Studies. Case studies illustrate how the systems aspects of environmental 

challenges complicates possible solutions. 

- Policy in Action. These readings apply the systems perspective to decision 

making and thus help students understand how the links between 

natural and social sciences influence why some environmental policies 

are effective while others are not. 











CONTENTS 

Introduction to Environmental Science 1 Environment and Society: A 

Sustainable Partnership Building a Framework to Study Environmental 

Problems 2 The Laws of Energy and Matter 3 Systems: Why Are Environmental 

Problems So Difficult to Solve How the Natural Environment 

Works 4 THe Physical Systems of Planet Earth: The Engine of Life 5 The 

Flow of Energy in Biological Systems: Why Does It Matter 6 The Flow 

of Matter in the Environment: Why Does It Matter 7 Biomes: Where Do 

Plants and Animals Live 8 Succession: How Do Ecosystems Respond 

to Disturbance How Human Systems Work 9 Carrying Capacity: How 

Large a Population 10 An Ecological View of the Economy 11 The 

Driving Forces of Environmental Change Global Environmental Challenges 

12 Biodiversity: Species and So Much More 13 Global Climate 

Change: A Warming Planet 14 A Reduction in Atmospheric Ozone: Let 

the Sunshine In Living Off the Land: Soils, Food Production, and Forests 

15 Soil: A Potentially Sustainable Resource 16 Agriculture: The Ecology 

of Growing Food 17 Forests: So Much More Than Wood Air and Water 

Resources 18 Water Resources 19 Air Pollution: Costs and Benefits of 

Clean Air Energy and Materials 20 Fossil Fuels: The Lifeblood of the 

Global Economy 21 Nuclear Power 22 Renewable Energy and Energy 

Efficiency 23 Materials, Society, and the Environment 24 A Sustainable 

Future: Will Business as Usual Get Us There 










135 


9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM



New 

• Critical thinking emphasis. Throughout the text, the skill of critical 

thinking is emphasized by asking the reader to view all sides of an issue 

and to make informed, rational decisions based on ethical values. 


A Global Concern, 9th Edition 

By William P Cunningham, University of Minnesota--Minneapolis, 

Mary Ann Cunningham, Vassar College and Barbara Woodworth 

Saigo 

2007 (Nov 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321881-6 / MHID: 0-07-321881-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110790-7 / MHID: 0-07-110790-8 [IE with ARIS] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cunningham9e 

Environmental Science, Ninth Edition, is a comprehensive 

presentation of environmental science for non-science majors 

which emphasizes critical thinking, environmental responsibility, 

and global awareness. This book is intended for use in a 

one- or two-semester course in environmental science, human 

ecology, or environmental studies at the college or advanced 

placement high school level. The goal of this book is to provide 

an up-to-date, introductory global view of essential themes in 

environmental science along with emphasis on details and case 

studies that will help students process and retain the general 

principles. Because most students who will use this book are 

freshman or sophomore non-science majors, the authors make 

the text readable and accessible without technical jargon or a 

presumption of prior science background. At the same time, 

enough data and depth are presented to make this book suitable 

for many upper-division classes and a valuable resource 

for students who will keep it in their personal libraries after their 

formal studies are completed. 


• Every chapter now opens with a Case Study, introducing students 

to real-life applications of environmental science. Examples include: the 

IPCC report on climate change, the Alaska National Wildlife Refuge, 

genetically modified organisms (GMSs), the explosion of urban geese 

populations, and the recent earthquake in Gujarat, India. Many more 

Case Studies can be found on the text’s website. 

• New and updated content throughout ensures that the most recent 

data in environmental science are included. Expanded coverage of 

evolution, found in Chapter 4. 

• New Instructor Media! Upon adoption of the text, instructors will 

have access to over 200 engaging video clips to integrate into their 

lectures for more visually stimulating presentations. 

--New Discovery Channel Education Video Clips on DVD cover topics 

ranging from ecology, evolution, chemistry, and energy, among several 

others. These short, 5-minute video clips include an easy-to-use search 

function for quick access. 

--Biology Digitized Video Clips on DVD are now available. Licensed 

from some of the highest-quality science video producers in the world 

(including National Geographic), these brief segments range from 15 

seconds to two minutes in length and cover all areas of general biology. 

Engaging and informative, these video clips will help capture students’ 

interest while illustrating key biological concepts and processes. 

• New, more contemporary design throughout makes the textbook 

more visually appealing and inviting than ever before. 

• New Website Index found on the text’s website (www.mhhe.com/ 

cunningham9e) provides students and instructors with quick links to 

the wealth of content within it. The topics are listed alphabetically for 

quick and easy searches. 

Features 

• Global Concern Theme. The text’s “global concern” theme is critical 

because students need to understand that environmental problems 

and solutions are relevant to all nations and countries and not specific 

to just North America. 

--Case Studies, “Exploring Science” boxes, “What Do You Think” essays 

(many with “Ethical Considerations” attached), and “Think About 

It” boxes give students real-life examples to evaluate and a chance to 

practice critical thinking skills and formulate reasoned opinions. These 

boxes are carefully planned to build upon chapter content and are long 

enough to present important, real information. 

-End-of-chapter “Questions for Critical Thinking” are designed to 

stimulate creative, analytical thinking and to serve as a springboard 

for class discussions. 

• “Learning to Learn” chapter. Speaking directly to the student about 

why environmental science is important, how to study, how to take a 

test, critical thinking, and cognitive maps, this introductory chapter 

prepares students to succeed. No other book goes into the fundamentals 

of critical thinking theory and application found here. 

• Unique “Environmental Policy, Planning, and Law” chapter. Our 

future on this Earth depends on both good science and good decisionmaking. 

How is policy made Why do we write our laws as we do 

The unique “Environmental Policy, Planning and Law” chapter (24) 

explains the policy cycle of agenda setting, problem definition, implementation, 

and evaluation by which public environmental policy is 

established. Statutory, case, and administrative law are discussed with 

a level of sophistication never before presented in an environmental 

science textbook. Also included are current concepts such as alternative 

dispute resolution, wicked problems, resilience in ecosystems and 

institutions, the precautionary principle, arbitration and mediation, and 

collaborative approaches to community-based planning. If students are 

going to be educated environmental citizens, they need to know how 

these processes work. 

• Every chapter in this book is enhanced with links to web-based 

material. The links give the address to our Online Learning Center 

(OLC) where students can find an abundant amount of learning aids 

and resources. 

• Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! 



laboratories, case studies, and readings. These materials, along with 




register, and create your own complimentary copy. www.primiscontentcenter.com 

Contents 

Introduction: Learning to Learn Part One: Principles for Understanding 

Our Environment Chapter 1: Understanding Our Environment Chapter 

2: Frameworks for Understanding Science, Systems, and Ethics Chapter 

3: Matter, Energy, and Life Chapter 4: Biological Communities and Species 

Interactions Chapter 5: Biomes: Global Patterns of Life Chapter 6: 

Population Biology Part Two: People in the Environment Chapter 7: 

Human Populations Chapter 8: Environmental Health and Toxicology 

Chapter 9: Food and Agriculture Chapter 10: Pest Control Part Three: 

Understanding and Managing Living Systems Chapter 11: Biodiversity 

Chapter 12: Land Use: Forests and Grasslands Chapter 13: Preserving 

and Restoring Nature Part Four: Physical Resources and Environmental 

Systems Chapter 14: Geology and Earth Resources Chapter 15: Air, 

Weather, and Climate Chapter 16: Air Pollution Chapter 17: Water 

Use and Management Chapter 18: Water Pollution Part Five: Issues 

and Policy Chapter 19: Conventional Energy Chapter 20: Sustainable 

Energy Chapter 21: Solid, Toxic, and Hazardous Waste Chapter 22: 

Urbanization and Sustainable Cities Chapter 23: Ecological Economics 

Chapter 24: Environmental Policy, Law, and Planning Chapter 25: What 

Then Shall We Do / Glossary / Index 

136 


9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM



CONNECTIONS IN ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 

A Case Study Approach 

By J Richard Mayer, Western Washington University 

2001 / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229726-3 / MHID: 0-07-229726-3 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247288-2 / MHID: 0-07-247288-X 

(with ESP 2.0 CD-ROM) (Out of Print) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118941-5 / MHID: 0-07-118941-6 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/environmentalscience 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1 Arctic Wilderness and Wildlife Chapter 2 Tropical Forests 

and Biodiversity Chapter 3 Industrial Revolution and Polution Chapter 

4 Estuaries, Seagrass Meadows, and Saltwater Ecosystems Chapter 5 

Air Pollution: History, Legislation, and Trends Chapter 6 Population 

Principles and Demography Chapter 7 Impacts of Green Revolution 

Agriculture Chapter 8 Sustainable Agriculture Chapter 9 Petroleum 

Resources and Fossil Fuels Chapter 10 Nuclear Power Chapter 11 

Sustainable Energy Chapter 12 Global Climate Chang Chapter 13 

Stratospheric Ozone Depletion Chapter 14 Managing Hazardous 

Wastes Glossary Credits Index 

INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGICAL EVOLUTION 

2nd Edition 

By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University-Pullman 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305077-5 / MHID: 0-07-305077-6 

ISBN-13:978-0-07-128582-7 / MHID: 0-07-128582-2 [IE] 

Written for a general college audience, this book offers an 

introduction to the principles and significance of Darwinian 

evolution. It differs from most other textbooks on evolution 

in three fundamental ways: First, it is intended for students 

taking evolution early in their studies. Second, it examines 

the intellectual significance of Darwinian evolution. Third, the 

text departs from the standard treatment of evolution in other 

textbooks, wherein the arguments are reductionist, molecular, 

and overwhelmingly genetic in emphasis. Ken Kardong, 

also author of Vertebrates; Comparative Anatomy, Function, 

Evolution, is known for his accessible writing style. His almost 

conversational approach to this topic puts the reader at ease 

while learning evolutionary concepts. The result is an inviting 

book--that will be read. 


• New Chapter 17: This new short concluding chapter takes advantage 

of the collective case made throughout the book and focuses on current 

issues facing students—the threat of epidemics and a critique of 

“intelligent design”. 

• Organization. Major sections (e.g. hot and cold blooded dinosaurs) 

have been re-deployed to chapters where they more logically fit and 

enhance the theme of that chapter. 

• Revisions. Although each chapter was revised for currency, special 

effort was made to update chapters of central importance (e.g. selection) 

or special interest (e.g. chapters on hominid evolution). 

• New Material. A short section on population genetics has been added 

(chapter 3), as well as sections on “What is life” (chapter 4), “Darwin’s” 

pigeons (chapter 7), ring species (chapter 9), and on cultural and social 

evolution in hominids (chapters 14 and 15). 

• Throughout the text, many figures have been replaced, and many 

new ones added. 

Media 

DISCOVERY CHANNEL VIDEO SERIES DVD 

By Discovery Channel 

2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352541-9 / MHID: 0-07-352541-3 

The exciting NEW Discovery Channel DVD offers 50 short (3-5 

minute) videos on topics ranging from conservation to volcanoes. 

The video clips are most appropriate for environmental 

science, ecology, geology, and physical science courses. Search 

by topic and download into your PowerPoint lecture. Begin 

your class with a quick peek at science in action. 


Evolution 

New 

FEATURES 

• Introduction to Evolution differs from other evolution textbooks in 

three ways: 1. The book is intended for a general college audience new 

to the subject of Darwinian evolution. In other words, it is written for an 

introductory course for non-science majors. 2. The book examines the 

intellectual significance of Darwinian evolution. Students will study the 

history of his thought, the evidence for his ideas, the implications these 

have for the appearance and loss of life on Earth, and the significance to 

our own history as a species. 3. Other texts are higher level, molecular, 

and overwhelmingly genetic. 

• “Consider This” boxes feature a short paragraph on every day connections 

to evolution. For example, when you turn on a faucet, do you 

wonder where that water comes from-was it part of a glacier long ago 

The idea is to connect the student with evolutionary principles that play 

a part in their daily existence. 

• Learning tools built into the text include chapter outlines, introductions, 

boldfaced terms, chapter overviews, references, and “On the 

Internet” information. 

• Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! 








CONTENTS 

1 Evolution of Evolution 2 Time 3 Heredity 4 Emergence of Life 5 

Diversity of Life 6 Evidence of Evolution 7 Selection 8 Variation: Spice 

of Life 9 Speciation 10 Co-Evolution 11 Life History Strategies 12 Life 

in Groups 13 Extinctions 14 Human Evolution: The Early Years 15 

Human Evolution: Building Modern Humans 16 Evolutionary Biology: 

Today and Beyond 17 Afterword / Appendix 1 Cell Division--A Review 

Appendix 2 Taxonomy Appendix 3 Molecular Clocks 

137 


9/29/2006 1:26:56 PM


Limnology 

INTRODUCTION TO LIMNOLOGY 

By Stanley Dodson, University of Wisconsin — Madison 

2005 (Jan 2004) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287935-3 / MHID: 0-07-287935-1 

This text includes the basic foundation information of limnology 

in an appropriate length for a one-semester course. It is written 

for intermediate undergraduate college students with some 

science background, including an introductory biology course. 

The text is especially well-suited for undergraduate majors in 

zoology, botany, conservation biology, biology, environmental 

studies, ecology, aquatic biology, and related fields. Introduction 

to Limnology contains more biology, ecology, and human-environmental 

connections than other such books on the market. 

The text emphasizes aquatic ecology, with a wide range of 

ecological fields represented, including: landscape, ecosystem, 

physiological, population, community, and biome. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction to Limnology 2 Setting the Stage: Water as an Environment 

3 Diversity of Aquatic Organisms: The Single-Celled and Colonial 

Organisms 4 Diversity of Aquatic Organisms: Rotifers, Annelids, and 

Arthropods 5 Diversity of Aquatic Organisms: Larger Organisms 6 

Population Dynamics in Limnology: Population Size Changing with 

Time 7 Community Ecology: Species Interactions and Community 

Structure 8 Community Ecology: Freshwater Communities Changing 

Through Time 9 Aquatic Ecosystems and Physiology: Energy Flow 10 

Aquatic Ecosystems: Chemical Cycles 11 Water in Landscapes 12 The 

Citizen Limnologist 13 Field and Laboratory Exercises 

Invertebrate Biology 


BIOLOGY OF INVERTEBRATES 

5th Edition 

By Jan Pechenik, Tufts University 

2005 (May 2004) / 608 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234899-6 / MHID: 0-07-234899-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111175-1 / MHID: 0-07-111175-1 [IE] 


This textbook is the most concise and readable invertebrates 

book in terms of detail and pedagogy (other texts do not offer 

boxed readings, a second color, end of chapter questions, or 

pronunciation guides). All phyla of invertebrates are covered 

(comprehensive) with an emphasis on unifying characteristics 

of each group. 

CONTENTS 

1 Environmental Considerations 2 Invertebrate Classification and Relationships 

3 The Protozoans 4 The Poriferans and Placozoans 5 Introduction 

to the Hydrostatic Skeleton 6 The Cnidarians 7 The Ctenophores 

8 The Platyhelminthes 9 The Mesozoans: Possible Flatworm Relatives 

10 The Nemertines 11 The Rotifers and Acanthocephalans 12 The 

Molluscs 13 The Annelids and Sipunculans 14 The Arthropods 15 Two 

Phyla of Likely Arthropod Relatives: Tardigrada and Onychophora 16 

The Nematodes 17 Four Phyla of Likely Nematode Relatives: Nematomorpha, 

Priapulida, Kinorhyncha, and Loricifera 18 Five Phyla (Plus 

One Species) of Uncertain Affiliation: Myxozoa, Gnathostomulida, 

Gastrotricha, Xenoturbella bocki, Chaetognatha, and Cyliophora 19 The 

Lophophorates (Phoronids, Brachiopods, Bryozoans) and Entoprocts 20 

The Echinoderms 21 The Hemichordates 22 The Nonvertebrate Chordates 

23 Invertebrate Reproduction and Development—An Overview 

/ Glossary / Index 


Mammalogy 

MAMMALOGY 

Adaptation, Diversity, and Ecology, 2nd Edition 

By George A. Feldhamer, Southern Illinois University—Carbondale, 

Lee C. Drickamer, Northern Arizona University, Stephen H. Vessey, 

Bowling Green State University—Bowling Green and Joseph F. Merritt, 

Powdermill Biological Station 

2004 / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290948-7 / MHID: 0-07-290948-X (Out of Print) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123240-1 / MHID: 0-07-123240-0 [IE] 

Introductory mammalogy for use at upper level undergraduate 

or graduate level. Assumes students have basic background in 

zoology of vertebrates. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1: Introduction / 1 Study of Mammals / 2 History of Mammalogy 

/ 3 Methods and Techniques for Studying Mammals / 4 Evolution and 

Dental Characteristics / Part 2: Structure and Function / 5 Integument, 

Support and Movement / 6 Foods and Feeding / 7 The Nervous and 

Endocrine Systems and Biological Rhythms / 8 Environmental Adaptations 

/ 9 Reproduction / Part 3: Adaptive Radiation and Diversity / 10 

Monotremes and Marsupials / 11 Insectivora, Macroscelidea, Scandentia, 

and Dermoptera / 12 Chiroptera / 13 Primates / 14 Xenarthra, 

Pholidota, and Tubulidentata / 15 Carnivora / 16 Cetacea / 17 Rodentia 

and Lagomorpha / 18 Proboscidea, Hyracoidea, and Sirenia / 19 Perissodactyla 

and Artiodactyla / Part 4: Behavior, Ecology, and Biogeography 

/ 20 Communication, Aggression, and Spatial Relations / 21 Sexual 

Selection, Parental Care, and Mating Systems / 22 Social Behavior / 23 

Dispersal, Habitat Selection, and Migration / 24 Populations and Life 

History / 25 Community Ecology / Part 5: Special Topics / 27 Parasites 

and Diseases / 28 Domestication and Domesticated Mammals / 29 

Conservation / Glossary / References 

A MANUAL OF MAMMALOGY WITH KEYS TO 

FAMILIES OF THE WORLD 

3rd Edition 

By Robert Martin, McMurry University, Ron Pine and Anthony De 

Blase 

2001 / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-697-00643-1 / MHID: 0-697-00643-3 


CONTENTS 

Preface Acknowledgments 1 Introduction 2 The Skull 3 Teeth 4 The 

Integument 5 Horns and Antlers 6 The Postcranial Skeleton 7 Locomotor 

Adaptations 8 Keys and Keying 9 The Orders of Living Mammals 10 The 

Monotremes 11 The Marsupials 12 The Insectivores 13 The Colugos 

14 The Bats 15 The Tupaiids 16 The Primates 17 The Xenarthrans: 

Anteaters, Armadillos, and Sloths 18 The Pangolins 19 The Carnivores 

20 The Whales, Dolphins, and Porpoises 21 The Macroscelideans 22 

The Rabbits, Hares, and Pikas 23 The Rodents 24 The Aardvark 25 The 

Subungulates 26 The Perissodactyls 27 The Artiodactyls 28 Sign and 

Habitat Analysis 29 Recording Data 30 Collecting 31 Specimen Preparation 

and Preservation 32 Collecting Ectoparasites of Mammals 33 Age 

Determination 34 Diet Analysis 35 Analysis of Spatial Distribution 36 

Estimation of Abundance and Density 37 Literature Research Glossary 

Selected Bibliography Index 

138 


9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM


Marine Biology 

New 

MARINE BIOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By Peter Castro, California State Polytechnic University-Pomona and 

Michael E Huber, Global Coastal Strategies, Brisbane-Australia 

2007 (Dec 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321577-8 / MHID: 0-07-321577-5 


Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com:80/sites/0072933569 

The new, sixth edition of Marine Biology covers the basics of 

marine biology and takes a global, non-regional perspective, 

emphasizing that the world’s oceans and seas are an integrated 

system that cannot be understood by looking in any one person’s 

own backyard. For many students this is a new perspective. This 

introductory, one-semester text is designed for non-majors. 


• Updated content throughout, reflecting recent events, new research, 

and changes in perspective. 

• NEW “Eye on Science” boxed readings throughout the book reflect 

current scientific research and technology in the field of marine biology. 

Sample topics include: ocean observing systems, deep-ocean drilling, 

female mimicry in cuttlefishes, restoration of seagrass beds, search for 

the giant squid, etc. 

• NEW fold-out world map at the end of the book provides a quick 

reference to the world’s oceans. 

Features 

• Marine Biology features a global, non-regional perspective. That 

the world’s oceans and seas function as a vast, integrated system is 

among the most important messages of this book. One aspect of this 

global approach is the deliberate inclusion of examples from many 

different regions and ecosystems, so as many students as possible will 

find something relevant to their local areas. 

• Outstanding art program, illustrated by two professional illustrators 

with a strong reputation in the science field: Bill Ober and Claire 

Garrison. 

• Thirty-four Scripps Video Clips are available to users of this text. 

These 15-20 second,”See it in Motion” underwater clips feature video 

footage of marine animals and their behavior, giving students a glimpse 

into a real, underwater perspective. 

• A collection of eight laboratories and field investigations in marine 

biology have been specially written to be used with Marine Biology. 

Each of the exercises includes review questions that integrate information 

learned in the laboratory or field with material covered by the text. 

The exercises are available as part of the Online Learning Center for 

this text at www.mhhe.com/castro6e. 

- Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website! The 

Primis Content Center features more than one million items, including 

this and hundreds of other best-selling McGraw-Hill textbooks, laboratories, 

case studies, and readings. These materials, along with others 

including your own notes, can be customized into a black and white, 

high resolution printed textbook or a full-color Primis eBook that saves 

your students 1/3 off bookstore prices. Log on to our website, register, 

and create your own complimentary copy. 

• www.primiscontentcenter.com 


Contents 

1 Principles of Marine Science 1 The Science of Marine Biology 2 The 

Sea Floor 3 Chemical and Physical Features of Seawater and the World 

Ocean 4 Fundamentals of Biology 2 The Organisms of the Sea 5 The Microbial 

World 6 Multicellular Primary Producers: Seaweeds and Plants 7 

Marine Animals without a Backbone 8 Marine Fishes 9 Marine Reptiles, 

Birds, and Mammals 3 Structure and Function of Marine Ecosystems 10 

An Introduction to Marine Ecology 11 Between the Tides 12 Estuaries: 

Where Rivers Meet the Sea 13 Life on the Continental Shelf 14 Coral 

Reefs 15 Life Near the Surface 16 The Ocean Depths 4 Humans and 

the Sea 17 Resources from the Sea 18 The Impact of Humans on the 

Marine Environment 19 The Oceans and Human Affairs / Appendix A 

Units of Measurement 


Parasitology 

FOUNDATIONS OF PARASITOLOGY 

7th Edition 

By Larry Roberts, University of Miami and John Janovy, Jr., University 

of Nebraska—Lincoln 

2005 (May 2004) / 736 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234898-9 / MHID: 0-07-234898-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111271-0 / MHID: 0-07-111271-5 [IE] 

A parasitology text for biology and/or zoology students at the 

undergraduate level. Emphasizes principles with related information 

on the biology, physiology, morphology, and ecology 

of the major parasites of humans and domestic animals. This is 

not a diagnostic manual for medical students. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1- Introduction to Parasitology Chapter 2- Basic Principles and 

Concepts I: Parasite Ecology and Evolution Chapter 3- Basic Principles 

and Concepts II: Immunology and Pathology Chapter 4- Parasitic 

Prototoa: Form, Function, and Classification Chapter 5- Kinetoplasta: 

Trypanosomes and their Kin Chapter 6- Other Flagellated Protozoa 

Chapter 7- The Amebas Chapter 8- Phylum Apicomplexa: Gregarines, 

Coccidia, and Related Organisms Chapter 9- Phylum Apicomplexa: 

Malaria Organisms and Piroplasms Chapter 10- Phylum Ciliophora: 

Ciliated Protistan Parasites Chapter 11- Phyla Microspora and Myxozoa: 

Parasites with Polar Filaments Chapter 12- The Mesozoa: Pioneers or 

Degenerates Chapter 13- Introduction to the Phylum Platyhelminthes 

Chapter 14- Trematoda: Aspidobothrea Chapter 15- Trematoda: Form, 

Function, and Classification of Digeneans Chapter 16- Digeneans: 

Strigeiformes Chapter 17- Digeneans: Echinostomatiformes and 

Paramphistomiformes Chapter 18- Digeneans: Plagiorchiformesand 

Opisthorchiformes Chapter 19- Monogenea Chapter 20- Cestoidea: 

Form, Function, and Classification of the Tapeworms Chapter 21- 

Tapeworms Chapter 22- Phylum Nematoda: Form, Function, and Classification 

Chapter 23- Nematodes: Trichurida and Dioctophymatida, 

Enoplean Parasites Chapter 24- Nematodes: Rhabditida, Pioneering 

Parasites Chapter 25- Nematodes: Strongylida, Bursate Rhabditians 

Chapter 26- Nematodes: Ascaridida, Intestinal Large Roundworms Chapter 

27- Nematodes: Oxyurida, the Pinworms Chapter 28- Nematodes: 

Spirurida, A Potpourri Chapter 29- Nematodes: Filaroidea, the Filarial 

Worms Chapter 30- Nematodes: Camallanina, the Guinea Worms and 

Others Chapter 31- Phylum Acanthocephala: Thorny-Headed Worms 

Chapter 32- Phylum Pentastomida: Tongue Worms Chapter 33- Phylum 

Arthropoda: Form, Function, and Classification Chapter 34- Parasitic 

Crustaceans Chapter 35- Parasitic Insects: Mallophaga and Anoplura, 

the Lice Chapter 36- Parasitic Insects: Hemiptera, the Bugs Chapter 

37- Parasitic Insects: Siphonaptera, the Fleas Chapter 38- Parasitic 

Insects: Diptera, the Flies Chapter 39- Parasitic Insects: Strepsiptera, 

Hymenoptera, and Others Chapter 40- Parasitic Archnids: Subclass 

Acri, the Ticks and Mites / Glossary 

139 


9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM




Textbook 

VERTEBRATE BIOLOGY 

By Donald Linzey, Wytheville Community College 

2001 / 552 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-697-36387-9 / MHID: 0-697-36387-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118866-1 / MHID: 0-07-118866-5 [IE] 


CONTENTS 

Part 1 The Vertebrate Story: An Overview Part 2 Systematics and Vertebrate 

Evolution Part 3 Vertebrate Zoogeography Part 4 Early Chordates 

and Jawless Fishes Part 5 Gnathostome Fishes Part 6 Amphibians Part 

7 Evolution of Reptiles Part 8 Reptiles (Including Birds): Morphology, 

Reproduction and Development Part 9 Mammals Part 10 Population 

Dynamics Part 11 Movements Part 12 Intraspecific Behavior and Ecology 

Part 13 Interspecific Interactions Part 14 Techniques for Ecological and 

Behavioral Studies Part 15 Extinction and Extirpation Part 16 Conservation 

and Management Appendices Glossary Bibliography Index 

Laboratory 

Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy 


Vertebrates 

Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution, 

4th Edition 

By Kenneth V Kardong, Washington State University – Pullman 

2006 (June 2005) / 784 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252830-5 / MHID: 0-07-252830-3 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124457-2 / MHID: 0-07-124457-3 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kardong4e 

This one-semester text is designed for an upper-level majors 

course. Vertebrates features a unique emphasis on function 

and evolution of vertebrates, complete anatomical detail, and 

excellent pedagogy. Vertebrate groups are organized phylogenetically, 

and their systems discussed within such a context. 

Morphology is foremost, but the author has developed and 

integrated an understanding of function and evolution into the 

discussion of anatomy of the various systems. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 2 Origin of Chordates 3 The Vertebrate Story 4 Biological 

Design 5 Life History 6 Integument 7 Skeletal System: The Skull 8 

Skeletal System: The Axial Skeleton 9 Skeletal System: The Appendicular 

Skeleton 10 The Muscular System 11 The Respiratory System 12 The 

Circulatory System 13 The Digestive System 14 The Urogenital System 

15 The Endocrine System 16 The Nervous System 17 Sensory Organs 

18 Conclusions 


Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy 

Laboratory Dissection Guide, 4th Edition 

By Kenneth Kardong, Washington State University and Edward 

Zalisko, Blackburn College 

2006 (June 2005) / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252831-2 / MHID: 0-07-252831-1 


This high-quality laboratory manual may accompany any 

comparative anatomy text, but correlates directly to Kardong’s 

Vertebrates: Comparative Anatomy, Function, Evolution text. 

This text carefully guides students through dissections and is 

richly illustrated. First and foremost, the basic animal architecture 

is presented in a clear and concise manner. This richly 

illustrated manual carefully guides students through dissections. 

Throughout the dissections, the authors pause strategically to 

bring the students attention to the significance of the material 

they have just covered. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction Classification and Comparison / Defining the Chordates 

/ Studying Advice / Designing for Students 2 Protochordates 3 Agnathans--Examination 

of a Primitive Vertebrate: The Lamprey Agnathans / 

Adult Lamprey Anatomy / Anatomy of the Lamprey (Ammocoete) Larva 

4 Vertebrate Integuments Introduction / Examination of Vertebrate Integuments 

/ Specializations of the Integument 5 Skeletal System Tissues 

of the Skeletal System / Divisions of the Skeletal System / Postcranial 

Skeleton / Skull / Cranial Skeleton / Teeth 6 Muscular System and 

External Anatomy Introduction / Shark Dissection / Necturus / Cat 7 

Digestive Systems Introduction / Shark / Necturus / Cat 8 Circulatory 

and Respiratory Systems Introduction / Shark / Necturus / Cat 9 Urogential 

System Shark / Necturus / Cat 10 Nervous System Introduction 

/ Shark / Sheep Brain 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE VERTEBRATES 

9th Edition 

By George Kent, Louisiana State University-Baton Rouge and Robert 

Carr, Ohio University-Athens 

2001 / 544 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303869-8 / MHID: 0-07-303869-5 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118168-6 / MHID: 0-07-118168-7 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/biosci/pae/kentcarr/links.mhtml 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction 2 Concepts, Premises, and Pioneers 3 Protochordates 

and the Origin of Vertebrates 4 The Parade of the Craniates in Time 

and Taxa 5 Early Craniate Morphogenesis 6 Integument 7 Mineralized 

Tissues: An Introduction to the Skeleton 8 Vertebrae, Ribs, and Sterna 

9 Skull and Visceral Skeleton 10 Girdles, Fins, Limbs, and Locomotion 

11 Muscles 12 Digestive System 13 Respiratory System 14 Circulatory 

System 15 Urogential System 16 Nervous System 17 Sense Organs18 

Endocrine Organs Appendix Glossary Credits Index 

140 


9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM


Zoology 

Textbook 

New 

ANIMAL DIVERSITY 

4th Edition 

By Cleveland P Hickman Jr, Washington & Lee University, Larry S 

Roberts, Florida Int’l University-Miami, Susan L Keen, University of 

California Davis, Allan Larson, Washington University-St Louis and 

Eisenhour J David, Morehead State University 

2007 (Feb 2006) / 480 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252844-2 / MHID: 0-07-252844-3 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110670-2 / MHID: 0-07-110670-7 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hickmanad4e 

A top choice among students and instructors alike, Animal Diversity 

continues to earn the appreciation of both science majors 

and non-majors alike. The book uses the theme of evolution 

to develop a broad-scale view of animal diversity—students 

focus not only the organisms themselves, but also the processes 

that produce evolutionary diversity. The book is unique in its 

comprehensive survey of zoological diversity and its emphasis 

on evolutionary, systematic and ecological principles, all in 

one package. 


• Information on phylogeny, always of major importance, has been 

updated to include the latest research findings. 

• Students will examine genetics, systematic principles, habitat 

distributions, structure and function in this text that has been carefully 

revised utilizing comments from users of past editions. 

• The text’s high-quality photographs and illustrative drawings have 

been updated. 

Features 

• The text helps learners understand existing diversity of animal forms, 

and understand the evolutionary processes that produce diversity. 

• Animal Diversity includes chapters that develop general diversity 

principles, as well as a series of chapters that range from the details of 

diversity to illustration of principles presented in the earlier chapters. 

• The scientific method is used to answer questions about the evolutionary 

relationship of organisms, and students learn how information 

is gathered from comparisons of morphology, comparisons of genomes 

and reconstruction of the historical relationships of organisms. 

• Author recognition- Professors and students can depend on accurate, 

experienced writing, knowing the tradition of quality work by 

these authors. 

CONTENTS 

1 Science of Zoology and Evolution of Animal Diversity 2 Animal Ecology 

3 Animal Architecture 4 Classification and Phylogeny of Animals 

5 Protozoan Groups 6 Sponges: Phylum Porifera 7 Radiate Animals: 

Cnidarians and Ctenophores 8 Acoelomate Bilateral Animals: Flatworms, 

Ribbon Worms, and Jaw Worms 9 Pseudocoelomate Animals 

10 Molluscs 11 Segmented Worms: Annelids, Including Pogonophorans 

12 Arthropods 13 Lesser Protostomes 14 Echinoderms and Hemichordates 

15 Vertebrate Beginnings: The Chordates 16 Fishes 17 The Early 

Tetrapods and Modern Amphibians 18 Amniote Origins and Reptilian 

Groups 19 Birds 20 Mammals 



New 

ZOOLOGY 

7th Edition 

By Stephen A Miller, College of the Ozarks and John P Harley, 

Eastern Kentucky University 

2007 (May 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322807-5 / MHID: 0-07-322807-9 


The new 7th edition of Zoology continues to offer students an 

introductory general zoology text that is manageable in size and 

adaptable to a variety of course formats. It is a principles-oriented 

text written for the non-majors or the combined course, presented 

at the freshman and sophomore level. Zoology is organized 

into three parts. Part One covers the common life processes, 

including cell and tissue structure and function, the genetic basis 

of evolution, and the evolutionary and ecological principles 

that unify all life. Part Two is the survey of protists and animals, 

emphasizing evolutionary and ecological relationships, aspects 

of animal organization that unite major animal phyla, and animal 

adaptations. Part Three covers animal form and function using 

a comparative approach. This approach includes descriptions 

and full-color artwork that depict evolutionary changes in the 

structure and function of selected organ systems. 


• Incorporating feedback from current users and reviewers of the text, 

there has been an overall update of content throughout, particularly in 

molecular biology. 

• New “How Do We Know” sections throughout the text offer 

students brief scientific explanations for occurrences while debunking 

popular myths. 

Features 

• This text features an evolutionary and ecological focus, believing 

that these perspectives captivate students and are fundamental to 

understanding the unifying principles of zoology and the remarkable 

diversity within the animal kingdom. 

• Emphasis on basic concepts at the most accessible level for students 

with no science background assures understanding by students with a 

variety of backgrounds. 

• “Wildlife Alert” boxes increase student awareness of the need to 

preserve animal habitats and species. 

• In response to reviewer suggestions and requests, several chapters 

that are often treated as optional in courses can be found on the text’s 

website, including: The Chemical Basis of Animal Life / Energy and 

Enzymes: Life’s Driving and Controlling Forces / How Animals Harvest 

Energy Stored In Nutrients / Embryology. 

• Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website. 








Contents 

Part One Biological Principles 1 Zoology: An Ecological and Evolutionary 

Perspective 2 Cells, Tissues, Organs, and Organ Systems of Animals 

3 Cell Division and Inheritance 4 Evolution: History and Evidence 5 

Evolution and Gene Frequencies 6 Ecology: Preserving the Animal 

Kingdom Part Two Animal-Like Protists and Animalia 7 Animal Classification, 

Phylogeny, and Organization 8 Animal-like Protists: The 

Protozoa 9 Multicellular and Tissue Levels of Organization 10 The Triploblastic, 

Acoelomate Body Plan 11 The Pseudocoelomate Body Plan: 

Aschelminths 12 Molluscan Success 13 Annelida: The Metameric Body 

141 


9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM


Form 14 The Arthropods: Blueprint for Success 15 The Hexapods and 

Myriapods: Terrestrial Triumphs 16 The Echinoderms 17 Hemichordata 

and Invertebrate Chordates 18 The Fishes: Vertebrate Success in Water 

19 Amphibians: The First Terrestrial Vertebrates 20 Reptiles: The First 

Amniotes 21 Birds: Feathers, Flight, and Endothermy 22 Mammals: 

Specialized Teeth, Hair Endothermy, and Viviparity Part Three Form 

and Function: A Comparative Perspective 23 Protection, Support, and 

Movement 24 Communication I: Nervous and Sensory Systems 25 

Communication II: The Endocrine System and Chemical Messengers 

26 Circulation and Gas Exchange 27 Nutrition and Digestion 28 Temperature 

and Body Fluid Regulation 29 Reproduction and Development 

30 The Chemical Basis of Animal Life 31 Energy and Enzymes: Life’s 

Driving and Controlling Forces 32 How Animals Harvest Energy Stored 

in Nutrients 33 Embryology 34 Animal Behavior 


INTEGRATED PRINCIPLES OF ZOOLOGY 

13th Edition 

By Cleveland P. Hickman, Jr, Washington & Lee University, Larry 

S. Roberts, Florida International University—Miami, Allan Larson, 

Washington University – St. Louis and Helen I’ Anson, Washington 

& Lee University and David Eisenhour, Morehead State University 

2006 (Feb 2005) / 872 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310174-3 / MHID: 0-07-310174-5 

(with Bind-In OLC Card) - No Sales Rights 


This best-selling, comprehensive text is suitable for one- or twosemester 

courses. Integrated Principles of Zoology is considered 

the standard by which other texts are measured. It features high 

quality illustrations and photos, engaging narrative, traditional 

organization, and comprehensive coverage. 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Introduction to Living Animals 1 Life: Biological Principles and 

the Science of Zoology 2 The Origin and Chemistry of Life 3 Cells as 

Units of Life 4 Cellular Metabolism Part 2 Continuity and Evolution 

of Animal Life 5 Genetics: A Review 6 Organic Evolution 7 The Reproductive 

Process 8 Principles of Development Part 3 Diversity of 

Animal Life 9 Architectural Pattern of an Animal 10 Classification and 

Phylogeny of Animals 11 Protozoan Groups 12 Mesozoa and Parazoa 13 

Radiate Animals 14 Acoelomate Bilateral Animals 15 Pseudocoelomate 

Animals 16 Molluscs 17 Segmented Worms 18 Arthropods 19 Aquatic 

Mandibulates 20 Terrestrial Mandibulates 21 Smaller Protostome Phyla 

22 Echinoderms and Hemichordates 23 Chordates 24 Fishes 25 Early 

Tetrapods and Modern Amphibians 26 Amniote Origins and Reptilian 

Groups 27 Birds 28 Mammals Part 4 Activity of Life 29 Support, Protection, 

and Movement 30 Homeostasis 31 Internal Fluids and Respiration 

32 Digestion and Nutrition 33 Nervous Coordination 34 Chemical 

Coordination 35 Immunity 36 Animal Behavior Part 5 Animals and 

Their Environments 37 The Biosphere and Animal Distribution 38 

Animal Ecology 

DIGITAL ZOOLOGY VERSION 2.0 CD-ROM 

By Jon Houseman, University of Ottawa 

2003 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256481-5 / MHID: 0-07-256481-4 

(with Workbook) 

Website: www.mhhe.com/digitalzoology 

CONTENTS 

Unit Names: Annelida / Apicomplexa / Arthropoda / Cheliceriformes / 

Ciliophora / Cnidaria / Crustacea / Ctenophora / Echinodermata / Hemichordata 

/ Lophophores / Mesozoa / Microspora / Mollusca / Myxozoa 

/ Nematoda / Nemertea / Other Chordata / Other Pseudocoelomates / 

Placozoa / Platyhelminthes / Porifera / Sarcomastigophora / Uniramia / 

Vertebrata / Workbook chapters: Protozoans / Porifera / Cnidaria / Platyhelminthes 

/ Annelida / Mollusca / Nematoda, Gastrotricha, Rotifera, 

including Acanthocephala / Arthropoda / Bryozoa and Brachiopoda / 

Echinodermata /Hemichordata / Urochordata and Cephalochordata / 

Agnatha / Jawed Fishes / Amphibia / Mammalia 

Supplements 

TAXONOMIC WALL CHART 

12th Edition 

By Cleveland P. Hickman, Washington & Lee University 

2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291786- 4 / MHID: 0-07-291786-5 

This 30 x 36” poster is a great reference/study tool for students. 

This full-color poster presents the Chief Taxonomic Subdivisions 

and Organ Systems of the Major Animal Phyla. 

New 

Laboratory - Majors 

LABORATORY STUDIES IN ANIMAL DIVERSITY 

4th Edition 

By Cleveland Hickman, Washington & Lee University 

2007 (January 2006) / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326098-3 / MHID: 0-07-326098-3 

Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity offers students hands-on 

experience in learning about the diversity of life. It provides 

students the opportunity to become acquainted with the principal 

groups of animals and to recognize the unique anatomical 

features that characterize each group as well as the patterns that 

link animal groups to each other. 

FEATURES 

• Project exercises are placed with certain chapters in units entitles 

“Experimenting in Zoology.” Some of these exercises can be completed 

within a single laboratory period; others are followed for a longer period. 

In all project exercises the student follows experimental procedures, 

records and analyzes quantitative data, and draws conclusions from 

the results. Many instructors will want their students to gain additional 

experience by writing a laboratory report in which the student states 

the objectives, methods followed, results obtained, and conclusions 

that can be drawn from the results. The Experimenting in Zoology 

exercises are: 

Regeneration in Planaria (Exercise 7); Behavior of the medicinal leech, 

Hirudo medicinalis (Exercise 10); The Phototactic behavior of Daphnia 

(Exercise 12); Aggression in paradise fish, Macropodus opercularis 

(Exercise 16); Analysis of the multiple hemoglobin system in Carassius 

auratus, the common goldfish (Exercise 16). 

• The exercises are designed to be more interactive with questions 

placed throughout the text, and spaces for students to write down 

their responses and observations. This “active learning” approach 

involves students in the exercise and encourages them to think about 

the information as they read. Some questions may require students to 

consult their textbook for answers. A few exercises have questions in 

the figure legends, to be answered in the spaces provided when the 

student consults the figure. Examples of this interactive approach are 

found in Exercise 15 through 20. 

142 


9/29/2006 1:26:57 PM


• There are many aids for the student in this laboratory manual. 

Throughout the exercises, working instructions are clearly set off from 

the descriptive material. Classifications, where appropriate, are included 

with the text, together with a “pie” diagram showing the relative sizes 

of the classes Mina phylum. Function is explained along with anatomy. 

Topic headings help the student mentally organize the material. Metric 

tables and definitions are placed on the inside front and back covers for 

convenient use. Much of the artwork was designed to assist the student 

with difficult dissections. 

CONTENTS 

1 Activity of Life 1 Ecological Relationships of Animals 2 Introduction 

to Animal Classification 2 The Diversity of Animal Life 3 The Microscope 

4 Protozoan Groups 5 The Sponges 6 The Radiate Animals 7 The 

Acoelomate Animals 8 The Pseudocoelomate Animals 9 The Molluscs 

10 The Annelids 11 The Chelicerate Arthropods 12 The Crustacean 

Arthropods 13 The Uniramia Arthropods: Myriapods and Insects 14 

The Echinoderms 15 Phylum Chordata: A Deuterostome Group 16 

The Fishes—Lampreys, Sharks, and Bony Fishes 17 Class Amphibia 18 

Class Reptilia 19 Class Aves 20 Class Mammalia 

LABORATORY STUDIES IN INTEGRATED 

PRINCIPLES OF ZOOLOGY 

13th Edition 

By Cleveland P Hickman, Washington & Lee University 

2006 (April 2006) / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283074-3 / MHID: 0-07-283074-3 

Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of Zoology uses a 

comprehensive, phylogenetic approach in emphasizing basic 

biological principles, animal form and function, and evolutionary 

concepts. This introductory lab manual is ideal for a one- or 

two-semester course. The new edition expertly combines up-todate 

coverage with the clear writing style and dissection guides 

that have distinguished this manual from edition to edition. 

Contents 

1 Introduction to the Living Animal 1 The Microscope 2 Cell Structure 

and Division 3 Gametogenesis and Embryology 4 Tissue Structure and 

Function 5 Introduction to Animal Classification 2 The Diversity of 

Animal Life 6 Protozoan Groups 7 The Sponges 8 The Radiate Animals 

9 The Acoelomate Animals 10 The Pseudocoelomate Animals 11 The 

Molluscs 12 The Annelids 13 The Chelicerate Arthropods 14 The Crustacean 

Arthropods 15 The Uniramia Arthropods: Myriapods & Insects 

16 The Echinoderms 17 Phylum Chordata: A Deuterostome Group 18 

The Fishes--Lampreys, Sharks, and Bony Fishes 19 Class Amphibia 20 

Class Reptilia 21 Class Aves 22 Class Mammalia 3 Activity of Life 23 

Ecological Relationships of Animals / Appendix A Instructor’s Resources 

for Implementing Exercises Appendix B Sources of Living Material and 

Prepared Microslides 

GENERAL ZOOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL 

14th Edition 

By Charles Lytle, North Carolina State University—Raleigh and John 

Meyer 

2005 (May 2004) / 400 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234900-9 / MHID: 0-07-234900-X 

Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com:80/sites/007234900x 

General Zoology Laboratory Manual is ideal for the laboratory 

that emphasizes the dissection and microscopic study of live 

and preserved specimens. Recognized for its accuracy and 

readability, this manual is comprehensive in its representation 

of the major groups of animal phyla.This new edition is suitable 

for a wide range of course needs and structures. 

CONTENTS 

Contents / Preface / Laboratory Safety / Comparative Safety of Preservatives 

/ 1 Microscopy 2 Animal Cells and Tissues 3 Mitosis and Meiosis 4 

Development 5 Protozoa 6 Porifera 7 Cnidaria 8 Introduction to Animal 

Morphology 9 Platyhelminthes 10 Pseudocoelomate Animals 11 Mollusca 

12 Annelida 13 Arthropoda and Onychophora 14 Echinodermata 

15 Chordata 16 Shark Anatomy 17 Perch Anatomy 18 Frog Anatomy 

19 Fetal Pig Anatomy 20 Rat Anatomy / Index 

GENERAL ZOOLOGY LABORATORY MANUAL TO 

ACCOMPANY ZOOLOGY 

6th Edition 

By Stephen A. Miller, College of The Ozarks 

2005 (April 2004) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252837-4 / MHID: 0-07-252837-0 

This General Zoology Laboratory Manual is intended for 

students taking their first course in zoology. Provided are exercises 

and experiences that will help students: (1) understand 

the general principles that unite animal biology, (2) appreciate 

the diversity found in the animal kingdom and understand the 

evolutionary relationships that explain this diversity, (3) become 

familiar with the structure and function of vertebrate organ 

systems and appreciate some of the evolutionary changes that 

took place in the development of those organ systems, and (4) 

develop problem-solving skills. 

CONTENTS 

Unit I Introductory Concepts and Skills 1 The Microscope and Scientific 

Method 2 Cells and Tissues 3 Aspects of Cell Function 4 Genetics 5 

Embryology 6 Adaptations of Stream Invertebrates--A Scavenger Hunt 

Unit II An Evolutionary Approach to the Animal Phyla 7 The Classification 

of Organisms 8 Animal-like Protists 9 Porifera 10 Cnidaria 

(Coelenterata) 11 Platyhelminthes 12 The Pseudocoelomate Body Plan: 

Aschelminths 13 Mollusca 14 Annelida 15 Arthropoda 16 Echinodermata 

17 Chordata Unit III An Evolutionary Approach to Vertebrate 

Structure and Function 18 Vertebrate Musculoskeletal Systems 19 

Vertebrate Nervous Regulation 20 Vertebrate Circulation 21 Vertebrate 

Respiration 22 Vertebrate Digestion 23 Vertebrate Excretion 24 

Vertebrate Reproduction 










143 


9/29/2006 1:26:58 PM


144 


9/29/2006 1:26:58 PM

2007-2008 NEW Nutrition Titles 

Nutrition ~ Contents 


Multimedia............................................................... 147 

Supplements............................................................. 147 

Textbook................................................................... 146 

Nutritional Assessment.................................................. 149 

Nutrition and Sport....................................................... 148 

Nutrition Through The Life Cycle 

Nutrition & Human Development............................. 148 


• LEE 

Nutritional Assessment, 4e.......................................149 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244106-2 / MHID: 0-07-244106-2 

• WARDLAW 

Contemporary Nutrition, 6e....................................146 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325652-8 / MHID: 0-07-325652-8 

• WARDLAW 

Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e....................................146 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322806-8 / MHID: 0-07-322806-0 

• WILLIAMS 

Nutrition For Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e..............148 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327058-6 / MHID: 0-07-327058-X 

145 

HED 2007 Nutrition.indd 145 

9/29/2006 1:29:07 PM

Nutrition 



Textbook 

New 

CONTEMPORARY NUTRITION 

6th Edition 

By Gordon M. Wardlaw and Anne M. Smith of Ohio State University 

2007 (Feb 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325652-8 / MHID: 0-07-325652-8 

(Updated Edition) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110950-5 / MHID: 0-07-110950-1 

[IE, Updated Edition with ARIS Card] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/wardlawcont6 

Contemporary Nutrition is designed for students with little or 

no background in college-level biology, chemistry or physiology. 

Updated to reflect the latest guidelines and research in this 

constantly evolving and dynamic field, Contemporary Nutrition 

will provide students who lack a strong science background 

the ideal balance of reliable nutrition information and practical 

consumer-oriented knowledge. With his friendly writing style, 

Gordon Wardlaw acts as the student’s personal guide to dispelling 

common misconceptions and to gaining a solid foundation 

for making informed nutrition choices. 


• McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is a complete electronic homework and course 

management system, designed for greater ease of use than any other 

system available. Free upon adoption of Wardlaw’s Perspectives in 

Nutrition, 7th edition, instructors can create and share course materials 




and reporting of easy-to-assign algorithmically generated [if applicable] 

homework, quizzing, and testing. Once a student is registered in the 

course, all student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically 

recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade 

book that can be downloaded to Excel. 

• This edition includes information on MyPyramid, the new food 

guidance system released in April 2005 by the USDA. This replaces 

the older Food Guide Pyramid. 

• McGraw-Hill has partnered with NBC to provide 12 short videoclips 

on current nutrition topics. These will be available on both a DVD 

and ARIS. 

FEATURES 

• Over 30 new animations and simulations have been developed for 

the Sixth Edition to cover a broad range of nutrition topics, allowing 

instructors and students to harness the visual impact of nutrition processes 

in motion. 

• eInstruction questions are available with this project and can be 

found on the Online Learning Center. eInstruction is a wireless student 

response system that allows for the ultimate in classroom participation, 

giving you immediate feedback from every student. 

• The authors purposefully write as though they are acting as personal 

guides to each student as they explore the world of nutrition. They provide 

ample opportunities for students to apply concepts and guidelines 

to their own lives. For example: 

* Real Life Scenarios at the beginning of each chapter introduce nutrition 

topics to be covered in context of a real person. The questions raised in 

the Real Life Scenario are revisited later in the chapter once the student 

has achieved a better understanding of the concepts involved. 

* Each chapter concludes with two Rate Your Plate activities that students 

can work through as a group or individually. All are designed to 

encourage to students to actively analyze their own eating habits. 

• Concept Checks At key points throughout the chapter, Concept 

Checks allow students to mentally summarize what they have learned 

before proceeding to the next topic in the chapter. 

• Critical Thinking Questions As students read the text, Critical Thinking 

Questions challenge them to apply their newly acquired knowledge in 

the context of real-life circumstances. Answers to these can be found 

at the end of the book. 

• The food composition table (Appendix J) reflects the expanded food 

database in NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 

CONTENTS 

Part 1 Nutrition: A Key to Health 1 What You Eat and Why 2 Tools for 

Designing a healthy diet 3 The Human Body: A Nutrition Perspective 

Part 2 Nutrients and Alcohol: The Heart of Nutrition 4 Carbohydrates 

5 Lipids 6 Proteins Part 3 Vitamins and Minerals 7 Alcohol 8 Vitamins 

9 Water and Minerals Part 4 Energy: Balance and Imbalance 10 Energy 

Balance and Weight Control 11 Nutrition: Fitness and Sport 12 Eating 

Disorders Part 5 Nutrition: A Focus on Life Stages 13 Pregnancy and 

Breastfeeding 14 Nutrition from Infancy through Adolescence 15 Nutrition 

through Adulthood Part 6 Nutrition Beyond the Nutrients 16 

Food Safety 17 Undernutrition throughout the World / Appendixes / 

Answers to Critical Thinking Questions / Glossary / Index 


New 

PERSPECTIVES IN NUTRITION 

7th Edition 

By Gordon M Wardlaw, Ohio State University--Columbus and Jeffrey 

Hampl, Arizona State University-East Campus 

2007 (May 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322806-8 / MHID: 0-07-322806-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110806-5 / MHID: 0-07-110806-8 


Perspectives in Nutrition, Seventh Edition, is an introductory 

nutrition text appropriate for the majors and mixed-majors 

nutrition courses. This student-focused text presents the major 

concepts in nutrition including the body’s use of food nutrients 

and diet planning throughout the life cycle. The text places 

special emphasis on the application of nutrition principles in 

everyday life by exploring the health consequences of nutrition 

practices. 


• Chapter 4 “Metabolism” has been totally rewritten to include the 

latest research and to make it more understandable for students. The 

reorganized content begins with a simple conceptual explanation of 

metabolic processes and logically builds into an in-depth scientific 

understanding of metabolic pathways. New illustrations also help guide 

students to develop a better understanding of this challenging topic. 

• This edition includes information on MyPyramid, the new food 

guidance system released in April 2005 by the USDA. This replaces 

the older Food Guide Pyramid. 

• Content is included on the new Dietary Guidelines, which were 

released in the Spring of 2005 by the USDA. 

• New “Expert Opinion” boxes. Each chapter contains “Expert Opinion” 

boxes which address a key topic covered in that chapter. These 

sometimes controversial topics can be excellent catalysts for classroom 

discussion and essay ideas. Just a few of the new titles include: 

146 


9/29/2006 1:29:07 PM

--Fiber: Finally a Nutrient (Chapter 5), by Dr. Joanne Slavin, University 

of Minnesota 

--The Miracle Vitamin D: Importance for Bone Health and Prevention 

of Common Cancers, Autoimmune Diseases, Schizophrenia and 

Cardiovascular Disease (Chapter 9), by Dr. Michael Holick, Boston 

University 

--Are Savvy Marketers Contributing to the Obesity Epidemic in Children 

(Chapter 16), by Dr. Carol Byrd-Bredbenner, Rutgers University 

• Artwork has been updated throughout the text, providing students 

with the most current, accurate look at the processes being discussed 

and intensifying the visual impact, making material more interesting 

to students. 

Features 

• Personalized Approach. The authors provide ample opportunities 

for students to apply nutrition concepts and guidelines to their own 

lives through real-life examples and individualized activities, such 

as the chapter-opening “Case Study Scenarios” and in-chapter “Take 

Action” activities. 

• The authors’ proven learning system provides an extensive pedagogical 

framework that includes: 

--Beginning of each chapter: Chapter Outline and Chapter Objectives. 

--Within each chapter: Marginal notes and definitions, Critical Thinking 

Questions (in margins), Concept Checks, Nutrition Focus, and Expert 

Opinions. 

--End of each chapter: Summary, Study Questions, References, Take 

Action, and Nutrition Perspective. 

• Website addresses are incorporated throughout the text, providing 

information for students wishing to explore specific topics in more 

detail. 

• Instructors can customize this text using our do-it-yourself website. 








Contents 

1 Nutrition Basics 1 What Nourishes You 2 The Basis of a Healthy 

Diet 3 Human Digestion and Absorption 4 Metabolism 2 The Energy- 

Yielding Nutrients and Alcohol 5 Carbohydrates 6 Lipids 7 Proteins 

8 Alcohol 3 The Vitamins and Minerals 9 The Fat-Soluble Vitamins 

10 The Water-Soluble Vitamins 11 Water and the Major Minerals 12 

Trace Minerals 4 Energy Production and Energy Balance 13 Energy Balance 

and Weight Control 14 Nutrition for Fitness and Sports 15 Eating 

Disorders: Anorexia Nervosa, Bulimia Nervosa, Binge-Eating Disorder, 

and Other Conditions 5 Nutrition Applications in the Life Cycle 16 

Pregnancy and Breastfeeding 17 Nutrition from Infancy through Adolescence 

18 Nutrition During Adulthood 6 Putting Nutrition Knowledge 

into Practice 19 Food Safety 20 Undernutrition Throughout the World 

Appendixes A Chemistry: A Tool for Understanding Nutrition B Human 

Physiology: A Tool for Understanding Nutrition C Dietary Advice for 

Canadians D The Exchange System: A Helpful Menu-Planning Tool E 

Exchange System Lists F Dietary Intake and Energy Expenditure Assessment 

G Fatty Acids, Including Omega-3, Fatty Acids in Foods H The 

1983 Metropolitan Life Insurance Company Height- Weight Table and 

Determination of Frame Size I Caffeine Content of Foods J Sources of 

Nutrition Information K English-Metric Conversions, and Metric and 

Household Units L Estimated Average Requirements for Nutrients: 

Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, National Academies 

M Food Composition Table 

Supplements 

NUTRITION ALMANAC 

6th Edition 

By Lavon J Dunne, John D Kirschmann, Nutrition Search, Inc 

2007 (December 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-143658-8 / MHID: 0-07-143658-8 


(Details unavailable at presst time) 

NUTRITION ALMANAC 

5th Edition 

By Lavon J Dunne 

2002 / 404 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-137338-8 / MHID: 0-07-137338-1 



3381&adkey=W02003 

CONTENTS 

SECTION I: NUTRIENTS: Macronutrients / Micronutrients SECTION II: 

ALTERNATIVE MEDICINE AND THERAPIES: Aromatherapy / Ayurvedic 

Medicine / Bodywork / Chinese Medicine / Chiropractic / Herbal 

Therapy Homeopathy / Mindbody Therapy SECTION III: HEALTH 

CONDITIONS SECTION IV: FOODS: Food Groups / Food Lists SEC- 

TION V: DIET AND FOOD COMPOSITION: Weights and Measures 

Recommended Dietary Intake Chart / Table of Food Composition / 

References / Bibliography / Index 

Multimedia 

Nutrition 

FOODWISE 1.2 CD-ROM 

6th Edition 


2006 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319531-5 / MHID: 0-07-319531-6 

Based on the widely tested FoodWorks product, this Windows-based 

CD-ROM product is designed for dietary analysis 

in college courses. It offers a variety of functions based on the 

latest release of the USDA database. FoodWise features a novice-friendly 

interface and contains approximately 7,500 foods! 

It generates a variety of simple-to-grade reports and allows the 

user to easily add their own foods to the database. 


• The Dietary Reference Intakes (DRIs) have been updated with 

the most current information 

Features 

• Easy to quickly distinguish between colors on RDA graph to indicate 

nutrient levels above and below 100% of RDA. 

• Caution notes within the Weight Manager indicate if BMI (Body 

Mass Index) at weight goal becomes dangerously low. 

• Database to includes the latest “USDA Release 13” foods. 

• Users are able to preview reports and food list details before printing 

them. 

147 


9/29/2006 1:29:07 PM

Nutrition 

NUTRITIONCAL PLUS 2.0 

CD-ROM STANDALONE 


2006 (July 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319532-2 / MHID: 0-07-319532-4 

NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 is a suite of powerful dietary self-assessment 

tools. Use NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 to analyze and monitor 

your personal diet and health goals. An easy-to-use interface and 

the reliability of the ESHA database make NutritionCalc Plus 

2.0 your best choice for nutrition analysis software. 


• The database has been expanded to include a broader range of 

ethnic foods, fast foods, and supplements, for a total of 10,000 foods. 

• MyPyramid report allows user to view recommendations based 

upon their personal profile information. 

• User-friendly tool bar icons make navigating through the program 

easier and more intuitive. 

• The latest DRI values are included for essential nutrients, vitamins, 

and minerals. 

NUTRITIONCALC PLUS 2.0 ONLINE STANDALONE 

6th Edition 


2006 (July 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321924-0 / MHID: 0-07-321924-X 

NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 is a suite of powerful dietary self-assessment 

tools. Use NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 to analyze and monitor 

your personal diet and health goals. An easy-to-use interface and 

the reliability of the ESHA database make NutritionCalc Plus 

2.0 your best choice for nutrition analysis software. 


• MyPyramid report allows user to view recommendations based 

upon their personal profile information. 

• The database has been expanded to include a broader range of 

ethnic foods, fast foods, and supplements, for a total of 10,000 foods. 

• NutritionCalc Plus 2.0 now allows you track your daily diet for 

up to 28 days. 

• You can now track your Energy Expenditure over multiple days, 

rather than a single typical day. 

• The Multiple-Day Average feature now allows you to select the 

specific days you wish to include in your diet analysis. 

• Weight manager function allows you to adjust your intake goals. 

• The Fast Entry feature allows you to quickly retrieve favorite 

foods. 

• Personalized reports and graphs have been expanded to include 

an intake/expenditure comparison report. 

• For convenience you can now delete an entire day’s foods with a 

single command. 

• The latest DRI values are included for essential nutrients, vitamins, 

and minerals. 

Nutrition Through The Life 

Cycle 

Nutrition & Human 

Development 


NUTRITION THROUGHOUT THE LIFE CYCLE 

4th Edition 

By Bonnie Worthington-Roberts, University of Washington and Sue 

Williams, SRW Productions 

2000 / 464 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292732-0 / MHID: 0-07-292732-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118379-6 / MHID: 0-07-118379-5 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/worthington 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1. Introduction to the Lifecycle: The Role of Nutrition (B. 

Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 2. The Assessment of Nutritional Needs 

(S. Rodwell Williams) Chapter 3. Maternal Nutrition: The Beginning of 

Life and the Physiology of Pregnancy (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 

4. Maternal Nutrition: Overall Nutrition and the Roles of Specific Nutrients 

(B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 5. Maternal Nutrition: Issues 

Beyond the Nutrients (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 6. Lactation: 

The Mother and Her Milk (B. Worthington-Roberts) Chapter 7. Lactation: 

Breast-Feeding Is a Desirable Option (B. Worthington-Roberts) 

Chapter 8. Nutrition in Infancy: Physiology, Development, and Nutritional 

Recommendations (D. Johnson) Chapter 9. Nutrition in Infancy: 

Feeding in the First Year of Life (D. Johnson) Chapter 10. Nutrition in 

Childhood (C. Trahms) Chapter 11. Adolescent Nutrition: General (B. 

Spear) Chapter 12. Weight-Related Concerns and Disorders Among 

Adolescents (D. Neumark-Sztainer, J. Moe) Chapter 13. Nutrition During 

the Middle Adult Years (S. Rodwell Williams) Chapter 14. Nutrition in 

the Older Adult (E. Schlenker) 

Nutrition and Sport 


New 

NUTRITION FOR HEALTH, FITNESS AND SPORT 

8th Edition 

By Melvin H Williams, Old Dominion University 

2007 (April 2006) / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327058-6 / MHID: 0-07-327058-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110333-6 / MHID: 0-07-110333-3 [IE] 

This textbook provides the reader with thorough coverage of 

the role nutrition plays in enhancing one’s health, fitness and 

sport performance. Current research and practical activities are 

incorporated throughout. 


• Chapter 13--new chapter for this edition, covering several drug foods, 

such as alcohol and caffeine, and other related dietary supplements 

that previously had been integrated in other chapters. Instructors who 

prefer to adhere to the chapter content of previous editions may have 

students read the relevant sections of chapter 13. 

148 


9/29/2006 1:29:08 PM

Nutrition 

• The reference lists have been completely updated for this eighth 

edition, with the inclusion of nearly 450 new references, and provide 

the scientific basis for the new concepts or additional support for those 

concepts previously developed. These references provide greater indepth 

reading materials for the interested student. 

• The text has been updated throughout, including new information 

on the MyPyramid food guide! 

FEATURES 

• Uses a question-answer approach with questions arranged in a logical 

sequence, so that the answer to one question often leads into the 

question that follows. 

• Examines the interrelationship of health, fitness, sport and nutrition. 

• Incorporates up-to-date research throughout the text, including 

expanded information on dietary supplements, ergogenic aids, and 

nutritional quackery. 

• Gives students the latest resources for further exploration and research 

in the appendix: American College of Sports Medicine: Maintaining 

Cardiorespiratory and Muscular Fitness; Healthy People 2010 (website 

updates): Objectives for Physical Activity and Nutrition; Internet 

Sources of Reliable Information on Nutrition as Related to Health, 

Exercise, and Sports. 

• Offers practical activities throughout, such as estimating body fat, 

estimating the number of calories needed to maintain body weight, or 

calculating the caloric expenditure for a given exercise. 

CONTENTS 

1 Introduction to Nutrition for Health, Fitness, and Sports Performance 

2 Healthful Nutrition for Fitness and Sport 3 Human Energy 4 Carbohydrates: 

The Main Energy Food 5 Fat: An Important Energy Source 

during Exercise 6 Protein: The Tissue Builder 7 Vitamins: The Organic 

Regulators 8 Minerals: The Inorganic Regulators 9 Water, Electrolytes 

and Temperature Regulation 10 Body Weight and Composition for 

Health and Sport 11 Weight Maintenance and Loss through Proper 

Nutrition and Exercise 12 Weight Gaining through Proper Nutrition and 

Exercise 13 Food Drugs and Related Supplements / Appendix A--Units 

of Measurement: English System--Metric System Equivalents Appendix 

B--Approximate Caloric Expenditure per Minute for Various Physical 

Activities Appendix C--Self-Test on Drinking Habits and Alcoholism 

Appendix D--Determination of Healthy Body Weight Appendix E-- 

Exchange Lists for Meal Planning Appendix F--Calories, Percent Fat, 

and Cholesterol in Selected Fast-Food Restaurant Products Appendix 

G--Energy Pathways of Carbohydrate, Fat, and Protein 

Nutritional Assessment 


New 

NUTRITIONAL ASSESSMENT 

4th Edition 

By Robert D Lee, Central Michigan University and David C Nieman, 

Appalachian State University 

2007 (March 2006) / 608 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244106-2 / MHID: 0-07-244106-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125426-7 / MHID: 0-07-125426-9 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lee-nieman3 

This text describes the four major methods of nutritional assessment 

(dietary, anthropometric, biometric, and clinical) in an 

understandable and contemporary way. It thoroughly covers 

assessment of the hospitalized individual, but also serves as 

an invaluable resource to the nutrition professional working in 

such areas as public health and community nutrition, corporate 

health, and sports medicine. 


• The new edition includes the most recent updates in the nutrition 

world, including: 

--recent changes in the Dietary Reference Intakes 

--2005 Dietary Guidelines for Americans 

--revised food pyramid: MyPyramid. Included is a new activity for 

students utilizing www.mypyramidtracker.gov (a new online dietary 

and physical activity assessment tool that provides information on diet 

quality and physical activity status). 

--information on the recent integration of the Continuing Survey of Food 

Intakes by Individuals (CSFII) and the National Health and Nutrition 

Examination Survey (NHANES) 

• Updated figures and tables reflect most recent data on nutritional 

status and health 

• Chapter 8 has been revised and updated on nutritional assessment 

in disease prevention 

• Updated and expanded Nutritional Assessment Web Site includes 

interactive student activities and resource information for students and 

instructors . 

Features 

• Pedagogy: The textbook utilizes chapter outlines, figures and tables, 

chapter summaries, glossary and a complete list of up-to-date references 

at the end of each chapter. These references provide the student and 

instructor with extensive resources for continued study. 

• Appendixes: To make the textbook as practical as possible, a wide 

variety of questionnaires, checklists and tables are given in the appendices. 

All have been updated to reflect the latest values and data, 

including new food composition tables. In all there are twenty-one 

(21) appendixes. 

• Web Links: Throughout the textbook are URLs to provide the 

students with additional sources of information. In addition, the text is 

linked to McGraw-Hill’s Nutrition web site, which will contain the latest 

information and links to other reputable and valuable sites. 

• Nutritional Assessment provides the information students need to 

evaluate and assess client nutritional needs. Not only is it a textbook, 

but it is a handbook on the topic that can be used outside the classroom 

by dietitians and practitioners. 

• Chapter Outline: A chapter outline begins each chapter to provide 

the students with a road map of where they are going. It is also useful 

as a review mechanism. 

• Assessment Activities: Each chapter ends with an assessment activity 

to give the students practical experience and to better understand the 

concepts they have learned. 

Contents 

1 Introduction to Nutritional Assessment 2 Standards for Nutrient Intake 

3 Measuring Diet 4 National Dietary and Nutrition Surveys 5 Computerized 

Dietary Analysis Systems 6 Anthropometry 7 Assessment of the 

Hospitalized Patient 8 Nutritional Assessment in Disease Prevention 9 

Biochemical Assessment of Nutritional Status 10 Clinical Assessment 

of Nutritional Status 11 Counseling Theory and Technique 

149 


9/29/2006 1:29:08 PM

Nutrition 

150 


9/29/2006 1:29:08 PM

2007-2008 NEW Physics & Astronomy Titles 


~ Contents 

College Physics............................................................. 156 

Conceptual Physics....................................................... 156 

Electricity and Magnetism............................................. 162 

Integrated Sciences........................................................ 155 

Introduction to Astronomy............................................ 165 

Intro to Physical Science............................................... 152 

Mathematical Physics.................................................... 162 

Medical Physics............................................................ 163 

Modern Physics............................................................. 163 

Optics........................................................................... 165 

Quantum Mechanics..................................................... 164 

Stars and Galaxies......................................................... 167 

Technical Physics.......................................................... 164 

University Physics......................................................... 161 



College Physics, 2e..................................................157 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322274-5 / MHID: 0-07-322274-7 

• GRIFFITH 

Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e........................156 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325315-2 / MHID: 0-07-325315-4 

• SCHNEIDER 

Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies (Vol 2) 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327966-4 / MHID: 0-07-327966-8 

• SCHNEIDER 

Pathways to Astronomy with Solar System (Vol 1) 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327968-8 / MHID: 0-07-327968-4 

• SCHNEIDER 

Pathways to Astronomy with Starry Nights 

Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1)......................................165 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292208-0 / MHID: 0-07-292208-7 

• TILLERY 

Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e..............................152 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329818-4 / MHID: 0-07-329818-2 

• TILLERY 

Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e..................153 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329850-4 / MHID: 0-07-329850-6 

• TILLERY 

Integrated Science, 3e..............................................155 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322273-8 / MHID: 0-07-322273-9 

• TILLERY 

Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 

3e.............................................................................155 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299682-1 / MHID: 0-07-299682-X 

• TILLERY 

Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 

7e.............................................................................153 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304993-9 / MHID: 0-07-304993-X 

• TILLERY 

Physical Science, 7e.................................................153 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325647-4 / MHID: 0-07-325647-1 

• TILLERY 

Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e........................................154 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329817-7 / MHID: 0-07-329817-4 

• TIPPENS 

Physics, 7e...............................................................164 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322270-7 / MHID: 0-07-322270-4 



Physics.....................................................................156 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332750-1 / MHID: 0-07-332750-6 

• KRAUSKOPF 

The Physical Universe, 12e......................................152 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331275-0 / MHID: 0-07-331275-4 

151 

HED 2007 Physics & Astronomy.ind151 151 

9/29/2006 1:31:25 PM


New 

Intro to Physical Science 

THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE 

12th Edition 

By Konrad Krauskopf (Deceased), Arthur Beiser, formerly New York 

University 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331275-0 / MHID: 0-07-331275-4 

This is an outstanding text with a long history that has been 

updated and given a fresh look, including worked examples 

pulled out of the text into numbered boxes. The text is now also 

accompanied by stronger media support with “CPS” eInstruction 

student response system questions, more extensive online 

quizzing, and PowerPoint lectures. Aimed at presenting the 

essentials of physics, chemistry, earth science, and astronomy 

in a clear, easy-to-understand way, The Physical Universe 

shows students how science works, how scientists approach 

problems, and why science constantly evolves in its search 

for understanding. The text can also be packaged with its long 

time companion student study guide, which includes a review 

of chapter terms and concepts; self quizzing for extra practice; 

and solved problems from the text. 


• Mathematical support of topics is included where it can enhance 

the understanding of the concepts. It is designed to be optional so that 

an instructor can choose to leave out the more mathmatical emphasis, 

without disrupting the flow and coverage of the concepts in the text. 

Although this material is NOT marked as “optional” in the text (so as 

to not confuse the students), a section has been added to each chapter 

of the 12th edition Instructor’s Manual to identify this slightly more difficult 

computational material as “optional”: material that can be left-out 

without affecting the conceptual coverage of the course. 

• There will be approximately 200 new end-of-chapter Questions and 

Problems for the 12th edition (approximately 30 replacement and 170 

new/additional). The end of chapter Questions and Problems will also 

be organized by-section for the 12th edition. 

• Chapter Goals will be added back into the 12th edition text as part 

of the chapter opener content. 

• The ARIS site provide online, grade-able homework using the problems 

from the text. This site also includes instructor resources, such 

as the instructor’s manual, digital images from the text, PowerPoint 

lectures, CPS eInstruction questions, daily concept quizzes (for JiTT) 

and professional resources for the instructor. For the student, it contains 

self quizzing, animations, web links, a glossary. 

FEATURES 

• Superb pedagogy: updated “A Scientist at Work” essays, biographies 

of important scientists, worked examples and exercises, chapter summaries, 

conceptual questions and problems, high-interest sidebars 

applying science to everday life, and answers to all odd-numbered 

questions and problems. 

• Emphasis on environment, structure of matter, science of life. 

• The Krauskopf/Beiser text is more conceptual than most physical 

science texts in particular emphasizing the scientific method of inquiry- 

-how scientists think. 

• Additional in-text, numbered worked examples will be added to 

the 12th edition. This addition in the 11th edition was very popular. 

The worked examples are pulled out and set apart from the textual 

presentation while still appearing where they should fall in the flow 

of the text. 

• Math Refresher at the back of the book. This self-contained section 

provides back ground information for all of the math used in the 

book. 

• Questions for student response systems and Daily Concept Quizzes 

to assist with Just in Time Teaching (JiTT) are included on the Online 

Learning Center and Instructor’s Testing & Resource CD-ROM. 

• Text-specific Student Study Guide (SSG) 

• Digital Content Manager (DCM) housing instructor presentation tools: 

jpeg images of ALL 4-color line art (~430), ALL photos (~340), ALL 

tables (~40), and ALL worked examples (~60) from the text; a collection 

of animations (~150); and Powerpoint Lectures (18 chapters). 

• Instructors Testing and Resource CD-ROM contains 1) EZ Test Test 

Bank with over 900 questions and problems; 2) Word and PDF files of 

the Instructor’s Manual, Test Bank, and Student Study Guide 3) Word 

files of the quizzes from ARIS 4) CPS eInstruction Questions in CPS 

database and PowerPoint. 

• Overhead Transparencies: over 100 full color transparencies featuring 

images from the text. NOTE: This is the 11E set RELABELED to accompany 

the 12E with a correlation sheet for figure numbers. 

CONTENTS 

1 The Scientific Method: How Scientists Study Nature / The Solar System 

/ Universal Gravitation / How Many of What 2 Motion: Describing 

Motion / Acceleration of Gravity / Force and Motion / Gravitation 3 

Energy: Work / Energy / Momentum / Relativity / Energy and Civilization 

4 Matter and Heat: Temperature and Heat / Fluids / Kinetic Theory of 

Matter / Changes of State / Energy Transformations 5 Electricity and 

Magnetism: Electric Charge / Electricity and Matter / Electric Current/ 

Magnetism / Using Magnetism 6 Waves: Wave Motion / Sound Waves 

/ Wave Behavior 7 The Nucleus: Atom and Nucleus / Radioactivity / 

Nuclear Energy / Fission and Fusion/ Elementary Particles 8 The Atom: 

Quantum Theory of Light / Matter Waves / The Hydrogen Atom / Quantum 

Theory of the Atom 9 The Periodic Law: Elements and Compounds / 

The Periodic Law / Atomic Structure / Chemical Bonds 10 Crystals, Ions, 

and Solutions: Solids / Solutions / Acids and Bases 11 Chemical Reactions: 

Quantitative Chemistry / Chemical Energy / Fuels / Reaction Rates 

/ Oxidation and Reduction 12 Organic Chemistry: Carbon Compounds 

/ Structures of Organic Molecules / Organic Compounds / Chemistry 

of Life 13 Atmosphere and Hydrosphere: The Atmosphere / Weather / 

Climate / The Hydrosphere 14 The Rock Cycle: Rocks / Within the Earth 

/ Erosion / Vulcanism 15 The Evolving Earth: Tectonic Movement / Plate 

Tectonics / Methods of Historical Geology / Earth History 16 The Solar 

System: The Family of the Sun / The Inner Planets / The Outer Planets 

/ The Moon 17 The Stars: Tools of Astronomy / The Sun / The Stars / 

Life Histories of the Stars 18 The Universe: Galaxies / The Expanding 

Universe / Evolution of the Universe / Extraterrestrial Life 

New 

CHEMISTRY (CHAPTERS 1, 8-13) 

7th Edition 

By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe 

2007 (May 2006) / 286 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329818-4 / MHID: 0-07-329818-2 

CONTENTS 

Preface / 1 What Is Science Chemistry 8 Atoms and Periodic Properties 

9 Chemical Bonds 10 Chemical Reactions 11 Water and Solutions 12 

Organic Chemistry 13 Nuclear Reactions Appendices A-D Glossary 

Credits Index Table of Atomic Weights 

152 


9/29/2006 1:31:25 PM


New 

CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS SPLIT PREPACK 

7th Edition 


2007 (May 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329850-4 / MHID: 0-07-329850-6 


New 

LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY PHYSICAL 

SCIENCE 

7th Edition 


2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304993-9 / MHID: 0-07-304993-X 

FEATURES 

• Written and classroom tested by the author 

• There are laboratory exercises that require measurement, data analysis, 

and thinking in a more structured learning environment. 

• There are also alternative laboratory exercises. The more open-ended 

“Invitations to Inquiry” are provided for instructors who would like a 

less structured approach. 

• The instructor’s edition of the laboratory manual can be found on 

ARIS for Physical Science and on the ITR CD. 

CONTENTS 

Introduction / Materials Required for Each Experiment / Experiments / 1. 

Graphing 2. Ratios 3. Motion 4. Free Fall 5. The Pendulum 6. Projectile 

Motion 7. Newton’s Second Law 8. Conservation of Momentum 9. 

Rotational Equilibrium 10. Centripetal Force 11. Archimedes’ Principle 

12. Boyle’s Law 13. Work and Power 14. Friction 15. Hooke’s Law 

16. Thermometer Fixed Points 17. Absolute Zero 18. Specific Heat 19. 

Static Electricity 20. Electric Circuits 21. Series and Parallel Circuits 

22. Ohm’s Law 23. Magnetic Fields 24. Electromagnets 25. Standing 

Waves 26. Speed of Sound in Air 27. Reflection and Refraction 28. 

Physical and Chemical Change 29. Hydrogen 30. Oxygen 31. Conductivity 

of Solutions 32. Percentage Composition 33. Metal Replacement 

Reactions 34. Producing Salts by Neutralization 35. Identifying Salts 

36. Solubility Curves 37. Natural Water 38. Measurement of pH 39. 

Amount of Water Vapor in the Air 40. Nuclear Radiation 41. Growing 

Crystals 42. Properties of Common Minerals 43. Density of Igneous 

Rocks 44. Latitude and Longitude 45. Topographic Maps 46. Telescopes 

47. Celestial Coordinates 48. Motions of the Sun 49. Phases of Moon 

50. Power Output of Sun 51. Special Project Appendix I. The Simple 

Line Graph II. The Slope of a Straight Line III. Experimental Error IV. 

Significant Figures V. Conversion of Units VI. Scientific Notation 


New 

PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

7th Edition 

By Bill W Tillery, Arizona State University--Tempe 

2007 (March 2006) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325647-4 / MHID: 0-07-325647-1 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110948-2 / MHID: 0-07-110948-X [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/tillery 

Physical Science, Seventh Edition, is a straightforward, easy-toread, 

but substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of 

matter and energy. It is intended to serve the needs of non-science 

majors who are required to complete one or more physical 

science courses. It offers exceptional, straight-forward writing, 

complimented with useful pedagogical tools. Tillery introduces 

basic concepts and key ideas while providing opportunities for 

students to learn reasoning skills and a new way of thinking 

about their environment. No prior work in science is assumed. 

The text offers students complete coverage of the physical 

sciences with a level of explanation and detail appropriate for 

all students. The sequence of chapters in Physical Science is 

flexible, and the instructor can determine topic sequence and 

depth of coverage as needed. The materials are also designed 

to support a conceptual approach, or a combined conceptual 

and problem-solving approach. With laboratory studies, the text 

contains enough material for the instructor to select a sequence 

for a two-semester course. It can also serve as a text in a onesemester 

physics and chemistry course. 


• Science & Society boxes relate the chapter’s content to current 

societal issues. 

• New Myths, Mistakes, and Misunderstandings boxes 

• Invitation to Inquiry exercises have been added to the end of each 

chapter. 

• For Further Analysis exercises have also been added to the end of 

each chapter. 

• McGraw-Hill’s ARIS for Physical Science is a complete, online 

electronic homework and course management system, designed for 

greater ease of use than any other system available. Free on adoption 

of any McGraw-Hill physical science text, instructors can create and 

share course materials and assignments with colleagues with a few 

clicks of the mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, assignments, quizzes, and 

animations are directly tied to text-specific materials in Physical Science, 

but instructors can also edit questions, import their own content, and 

create announcements and due dates for assignments. ARIS has automatic 

grading and reporting of easy-to-assign homework, quizzing, and 

testing. All student activity within McGraw-Hill’s ARIS is automatically 

recorded and available to the instructor through a fully integrated grade 

book that can be downloaded to Excel. 

• People Behind the Science biographical boxes have been revised. 

• Applying the Concepts multiple-choice questions were revised. 

Features 

• Professors have the option of creating a customized version of the text 

by selecting only the chapters they cover in lecture, allowing students a 

savings in book costs. Customization can occur in three ways: 

• Physics and Chemistry chapter splits 

• Chapter-by-chapter color customization (printed book). 

• Primis Online--choose the appropriate chapters and mix and match 

with other items on Primis Online, allowing maximum choice and flexibility. 

Choose between two delivery formats: custom printed books (in 

black and white) or custom eBooks (in color). 

153 


9/29/2006 1:31:25 PM


Contents 

1 What Is Science Physics 2 Motion 3 Energy 4 Heat and Temperature 

5 Wave Motions and Sound 6 Electricity 7 Light Chemistry 8 Atoms and 

Periodic Properties 9 Chemical Bonds 10 Chemical Reactions 11 Water 

and Solutions 12 Organic Chemistry 13 Nuclear Reactions Astronomy 

14 The Universe 15 The Solar System 16 Earth in Space Earth Science 

17 Rocks and Minerals 18 Plate Tectonics 19 Building Earth’s Surface 20 

Shaping Earth’s Surface 21 Geologic Time 22 The Atmosphere of Earth 

23 Weather and Climate 24 Earth’s Waters Appendixes A Mathematical 

Review B Solubilities Chart C Relative Humidity Table D Solutions for 

Group A Parallel Exercises 


New 

PHYSICS (CHAPTERS 1-7) 

7th Edition 


2007 (May 2006) / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329817-7 / MHID: 0-07-329817-4 

Physical Science, Seventh Edition, is a straightforward, easy-toread, 

but substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of 

matter and energy. It is intended to serve the needs of non-science 

majors who are required to complete one or more physical 

science courses. It offers exceptional, straight-forward writing, 

complimented with useful pedagogical tools. Tillery introduces 




The text offers students complete coverage of the physical 

sciences with a level of explanation and detail appropriate for 

all students. The sequence of chapters in Physical Science is 

flexible, and the instructor can determine topic sequence and 

depth of coverage as needed. The materials are also designed 

to support a conceptual approach, or a combined conceptual 

and problem-solving approach. With laboratory studies, the text 

contains enough material for the instructor to select a sequence 

for a two-semester course. It can also serve as a text in a onesemester 

physics and chemistry course. 

CONTENTS 

Preface 1 What Is Science Physics 2 Motion 3 Energy 4 Heat and Temperature 

5 Wave Motions and Sound 6 Electricity 7 Light Appendices 

A-D Glossary Credits Index Table of Atomic Weights 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

2nd Edition 

By Arthur Beiser, formerly of New York University 

1988 / 368 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-004419-7 / MHID: 0-07-004419-8 


CONTENTS 

Physical Quantities. / Motion in a Straight Line. / The Laws of Motion. 

/ Circular Motion and Gravitation. / Energy. / Momentum. / Relativity. 

/ Fluids. / Heat. / Kinetic Theory of Matter. / Thermodynamics. / Electricity. 

/ Electric Current. / Magnetism. / Electromagnetic Induction. / 

Waves. / Lenses. / Quantum Physics. / The Nucleus. / Radioactivity 

and Elementary Particles. / Theory of the Atom. / The Periodic Law. / 

Molecules and Solids. / Formulas and Equations. / Stoichiometry. / Gas 

Stoichiometry. / Solutions. / Acids and Bases. / Oxidation and Reduction. 

/ Electrochemistry. / Chemical Energy. / Reaction Rates and Equilibrium. 

/ Organic Chemistry. / The Atmosphere. / Weather. / The Oceans. / Earth 

Materials. / Erosion and Sedimentation. / Vulcanism and Diastrophism. 

/ The Earth’s Interior. / Continental Drift. / Earth History. / Earth and Sky. 

/ The Solar System. / The Sun. / The Stars. / The Universe. 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF LAGRANGIAN DYNAMICS 

By Dave Wells, University of Texas 

1967 / 368 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-069258-9 / MHID: 0-07-069258-0 


CONTENTS 

Background Material. / Lagrange’s Equations of Motion of a Single 

Particle. / Lagrange’s Equations of Motion for a System of Particles. 

/ Conservative Systems. / Dissipative Forces. / General Treatment of 

Moments and Products of Inertia. / Lagrangian Treatment of Rigid 

Body Dynamics. / The Euler Method of Rigid Body Dynamics. / Small 

Oscillations about Positions of Equilibrium. / Small Oscillations about 

Steady Motion. / Forces of Constraint. / Driving Forces Required to 

Establish Known Motions. / Effects of Earth’s Figure and Daily Rotation 

on Dynamical Problems. / Application of Lagrange’s Equations to Electrical 

and Electromechanical Systems. / Hamilton’s Equations of Motion. 

/ Hamilton’s Principle. / Basic Equations of Dynamics in Vector and 

Tensor Notation. / Appendix: Relations between Direction Cosines. 

DICTIONARY OF PHYSICS 

3rd Edition 


2003 / 483 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141048-9 / MHID: 0-07-141048-1 


CONTENTS 



COMPLIMENTARY 

COPIES 








154 


9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM


Integrated Sciences 

New 

INTEGRATED SCIENCE 

3rd Edition 

By Bill W Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe, Eldon Enger, Delta 

College and Robert S Ross, California State University-Chico 

2007 (Sept 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322273-8 / MHID: 0-07-322273-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110798-3 / MHID: 0-07-110798-3 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/tillery 

Integrated Science, Third Edition is a straightforward, easy-toread, 

yet substantial introduction to the fundamental behavior of 

matter and energy in living and nonliving systems. The authors 

provide even, well-integrated coverage of chemistry, physics, 

earth science, biology, and astronomy. The book is intended 

to serve the needs of non-science majors who are required to 

complete one or more science courses as part of a general or 

basic studies requirement. This edition continues to introduce 




The language, as well as the mathematics, is as simple as can 

be practical for a college-level science course. 


• A core concept map has been added to the beginning of each 

chapter. 

• New Science & Society boxes added. 

• New Myths, Mistakes, and Misunderstandings boxes added. 

• Invitation to Inquiry exercises have been added to the end of each 

chapter. 

• For Further Analysis exercises have also been added to the end of 

each chapter. 

• Some computational examples have been added back into the 

Third Edition. 

• The Lab Manual has been revised for this edition. Emphasis has been 

placed on making the manual more inquiry-oriented and increasing the 

number of biology labs. 

Features 

• An outline and introduction of concepts at the beginning of each 

chapter. Chapter Outlines include all the major topic headings and 

subheadings within the body of the chapter. The Introductory Overview 

previews the chapter’s contents and what the student can expect to 

learn from that chapter. 

• Boxed features called “Concepts Applied” 

• New design: more open, less text intense presentation. 

• Even coverage of chemistry, physics, earth science, biology, and 

astronomy. 

• A Closer Look and Connection boxes contain information on topics 

of special interest to the general population as well as the science 

community. This is supplemental reading material. The information 

contained in them goes “beyond” the boundaries of the required text 

material. 

• Summary of Equations: reinforce the retention of equations in the 

text. 

• Applying the Concepts Quiz 

• Questions for Thought: Designed to challenge the student to demonstrate 

comprehension of the topics. 

• Parallel Exercise Sets 

Contents 

Chapter One – What Is Science Chapter Two--Motion Chapter Three- 

-Energy Chapter Four--Heat and Temperature Chapter Five--Wave 

Motions and Sound Chapter Six--Electricity Chapter Seven--Light Chapter 

Eight – Atoms and Periodic Properties Chapter Nine – Chemical 

Reactions Chapter Ten – Water and Solutions Chapter Eleven--Nuclear 

Reactions Chapter Twelve--The Universe Chapter Thirteen--The Solar 

System Chapter Fourteen – Earth in Space Chapter Fifteen--The Earth 

Chapter Sixteen--The Earth’s Surface Chapter Seventeen--Earth’s Weather 

Chapter Eighteen--Earth’s Waters Chapter Nineteen – Organic and 

Biochemistry Chapter Twenty – The Nature of Living Things Chapter 

Twenty-One--The Origin and Evolution of Life Chapter Twenty-two 

– The History of Life on Earth Chapter Twenty-three--Ecology and Environment 

Chapter Twenty-four – Human Biology: Materials Exchange 

and Control Mechanisms Chapter Twenty-five – Human Biology: Sex 

and Sexuality Chapter Twenty-six--Mendelian and Molecular Genetics 

/ Appendices / Glossary / Credits / Index 

New 


LAB MANUAL TO ACCOMPANY INTEGRATED 

SCIENCE 

3rd Edition 

By Bill Tillery, Arizona State University-Tempe, Eldon Enger and 

Frederick Ross of Delta College 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299682-1 / MHID: 0-07-299682-X 


• Each lab begins with an open-ended “Invitations to Inquiry,” designed 

to peak student interest in the lab concept. This is followed by laboratory 

exercises that require measurement and data analysis for work in 

a more structured learning environment. 

FEATURES 

• The laboratory manual has been written and classroom-tested by 

the authors. 

• There is also an instructor’s edition lab manual available for instructors 

on the OLC and the ITR CD. 

CONTENTS 

Introduction / Acknowledgments / Materials Required for Each Experiment 

/ Experiment / 1. Graphing 2. Ratios 3. Motion 4. Free Fall 5. 

Centripetal Force 6. Work and Power 7. Thermometer Fixed Points 8. 

Specific Heat 9. Speed of Sound in Air 10. Static Electricity 11. Ohm’s 

Law 12. Magnetic Fields 13. Reflection and Refraction 14. Physical and 

Chemical Change 15. Conductivity of Solutions 16. Metal Replacement 

Reactions 17. Identifying Salts 18. Natural Water 19. Measurement of pH 

20. Amount of Water Vapor in the Air 21. Growing Crystals 22. Properties 

of Common Minerals 23. Density of Igneous Rocks 24. Latitude 

and Longitude 25. Telescopes 26. Celestial Coordinates 27. Motions 

of the Sun 28. Diffusion and Osmosis 29. The Microscope 30. Survey 

of Cell Types: Structure and Function 31. Enzymes 32. Photosynthesis 

and Respiration 33. The Chemistry and Ecology of Yogurt Production 

34. DNA and RNA 35. Mitosis—Cell Division 36. Meiosis 37. Genetics 

Problems 38. Human Variation 39. Sensory Abilities 40. Daily Energy 

Balance 41. The Effect of Abiotic Factors on Habitat Preference 42. 

Natural Selection 43. Roll Call of the Animals 44. Special Project / 

Appendix I. The Simple Line Graph II. The Slope of a Straight Line III. 

Experimental Error IV. Significant Figures V. Conversion of Units VI. 

Scientific Notation Inside Front Cover: Relative Humidity Chart Inside 

Back Cover: Metric Relationships 

155 


9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM



Conceptual Physics 

New 

PHYSICS OF EVERYDAY PHENOMENA 

5th Edition 

By Thoms Griffith, Pacific University 

2007 (June 2006) / 576 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325315-2 / MHID: 0-07-325315-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110320-6 / MHID: 0-07-110320-1 [IE] 

The Physics of Everyday Phenomena, Fifth Edition, introduces 

students to the basic concepts of physics using examples of 

common occurrences. Intended for use in a one-semester or 

two-quarter course in conceptual physics, this book is written 

in a narrative style, frequently using questions designed to 

draw the reader into a dialogue about the ideas of physics. This 

inclusive style allows the book to be used by anyone interested 

in exploring the nature of physics and explanations of everyday 

physical phenomena. Beginning students will benefit from the 

large number of student aids and the reduced math content. 

Professors will appreciate the organization of the material and 

the wealth of pedagogical tools. 


• NEW “Secrets to Success” introduction, found in the To the Student 

section at the start of the book, helps students see how to use the text 

and its resources to master physics. 

• UPDATED AND REVISED chapter exercises continue to offer students 

practice in applying the concepts presented. 

• UPDATED AND ADDITIONAL Everyday Phenomenon boxes 

throughout the text analyze common phenomena in more detail to 

promote a better understanding of everyday events in students’ lives. 

These boxes emphasize the main theme of the text and give relevance 

to the concepts being presented. 

• Approximately 5 EOC Conceptual Questions Answers per chapter 

are provided to students in the text, with approximately another 5 per 

chapter online. Color is used to highlight question numbers that have 

answers available to students (at the EOB or online). 

FEATURES 

• Instead of traditional titles for each section, leading questions introduce 

the material. 

• Effective pedagogy includes unit openers and chapter overviews 

that alert students to the most important concepts. Internal summaries 

clarify and remind students of what is most important. The pedagogy 

and end-of-chapter student aids present a learning system to guide 

students through the course. 

CONTENTS 

1 Physics, the Fundamental Science The Newtonian Revolution 2 

Describing Motion 3 Falling Objects and Projectile Motion 4 Newton’s 

Laws: Explaining Motion 5 Circular Motion, the Planets, and Gravity 

6 Energy and Oscillations 7 Momentum and Impulse 8 Rotational 

Motion of Solid Objects Fluids and Heat 9 The Behavior of Fluids 10 

Temperature and Heat 11 Heat Engines and the Second Law of Thermodynamics 

Electricity and Magnetism 12 Electrostatic Phenomena 

13 Electric Circuits 14 Magnets and Electromagnetism Wave Motion 

and Optics 15 Making Waves 16 Light Waves and Color 17 Light and 

Image Formation The Atom and Its Nucleus 18 The Structure of the 

Atom 19 The Nucleus and Nuclear Energy Relativity and Beyond 20 

Relativity 21 Beyond Everyday Phenomena 


PHYSICS FOR POETS 

5th Edition 

By Robert March, University of Wisconsin – Madison 

2003 / 304 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247217-2 / MHID: 0-07-247217-0 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119853-0 / MHID: 0-07-119853-9 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci 

CONTENTS 

1 A Vast and Most Excellent Science 2 Toward a Science of Mechanics 

3 The Denouement: Newton’s Laws 4 The Moon and the Apple 5 

The Romance of Energy 6 One Last Part for the Machine 7 Waves 8 

Does the Earth Really Move 9 The Birth of Relativity 10 The Wedding 

of Space and Time 11 E=mc2 and All That 12 Did God Have Any 

Choice 13 The Atom Returns 14 Rutherford Probes the Atom 15 The 

Atom and the Quantum 16 Particles and Waves 17 Does God Play 

Dice 18 Schrodinger’s Cat 19 The Dreams Stuff Is Made Of 20 The 

Whole Shebang 

New 

College Physics 

PHYSICS 

By Alan Giambattista, Betty Richardson and Robert Richardson of 

Cornell University-Ithaca 

2008 (January 2007) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332750-1 / MHID: 0-07-332750-6 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332813-3 / MHID: 0-07-332813-8 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332751-8 / MHID: 0-07-332751-4 (Volume 1) 


Physics, 1st edition is the best solution for today’s college 

physics market. With a unique, new, approach to physics that 

builds a conceptual framework as motivation for the physical 

principles, consistent problem solving coverage strategies, stunning 

art, extensive end-of-chapter material, and superior media 

support, Giambattista, Richardson, and Richardson delivers a 

product that addresses today’s market needs with the best tools 

available. Physics 1st edition is a spin-off of the market leading 

College Physics 2nd edition text by Giambattista/Richardson/ 

Richardson. The key difference in in College Physics there is 

an integrated approach of forces and kinematics, leading with 

forces, while in this new 1st edition, Physics covers forces in 

the traditional manner by leading with Kinematics and not 

integrating forces. 

FEATURES 

• Eight Review and Synthesis sections now appear throughout the text, 

following groups of related chapters. The MCAT® Review includes 

actual reading passages and questions written for the Medical College 

Admission Test (MCAT). The Review Exercises are intended to serve 

as a bridge between textbook problems that are linked to a particular 

chapter and exam problems that are not. These exercises give students 

practice in formulating a problem-solving strategy without an external 

clue (section or chapter number) that indicates which concepts are 

involved. Many of the problems draw on material from more than one 

chapter to help the student integrate new concepts and skills with what 

has been learned previously. 

• Real MCAT questions included in the text. 

156 


9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM


• Unparalleled Illustration Program: Giambattista offers an incredible 

visual program that combines “showcase” pieces with simpler, diagrammatic 

pieces to aid student understanding. 

• Flash-based Interactives! These “Interactives” offer a fresh and dynamic 

method to teach the physics basics by providing students with simulations 

that are completely accurate and work with real data. Interactives 

allow students to manipulate parameters and gain a better understanding 

of 16 of the more difficult physics topics by watching the effect of these 

manipulations. Each Interactive includes: • Analysis Tool (interactive 

model) • Tutorial describing its function with content describing its 

principle themes, self-test questions and explanations. 

• New approach to college physics! Giambattista was developed from 

the notes and experiences of authors sitting next to students in study 

labs explaining physical principles on a daily basis. The authors found 

that students were able to grasp principles much more easily and 

completely, and to remember those principles, if they were discussed 

with-in the context of familiar and relative examples. The “Conceptual 

Framework” approach was developed, and all physics concepts are 

presented to students in such a fashion. 

• Chapter 8, presents another great example of how the Conceptual 

Framework approach has influenced presentation. Rotational kinetic 

energy is introduced first since it usually is the easiest of the rotational 

quantities for the student to understand. It also leads in a very natural 

way, to the necessity of rotational inertia. Torque, one of the most difficult 

concepts for many students, is introduced after the student already 

has some understanding of other rotational concepts. 

• Problem Solving Approach: Giambattista/Richardson/Richardson 

employs a consistent approach to the presentation of examples. Every 

example includes strategy, solution, discussion, and practice problem 

(with answer at end-of-chapter). Care is taken to make sure that students 

are equipped with tools to solve problems and that they do not just 

MEMORIZE STEPS to solve that one example problem. 

• Extensive End-of-Chapter Material which includes: Master The 

Concepts (summary of CONCEPTS as well as the integrated equations) 

Problems--clearly, one of the most closely scrutinized portions of any 

college physics textbook is the end-of-chapter material including but 

not limited to the quality and quantity of problems. The Giambattista/ 

Richardson/Richardson problems have consistently reviewed very well 

and have been quadruple checked for accuracy. The various problem 

types are as follows: 

* Conceptual Questions; 

* Multiple Choice Questions (with more on the website); 

* Problems by Section (featuring paired problems); 

* Problems paired by concept; 

* Comprehensive Problems; 

* Combination Problems (quantitative and conceptual problems 

combined); 

* Bio/Med application problems. 

• ARIS (assessment, review, and instruction system) is available with 

each textbook adoption. ARIS for Physics, First Edition is a complete, 

online tutorial, electronic homework, and course management system 

designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. Instructors 

can create and share course materials and assignments with 

colleagues with a few clicks of a mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, 

assignments, quizzes, tutorials, and interactives are directly tied to 

text-specific materials in Physics, First Edition. ARIS courses are customized 

to your textbook, but instructors can also edit questions and 

algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and 


of easy-to-assign, algorithmically-generated homework, quizzing, and 

testing. All student activity within ARIS is automatically recorded and 

available to the instructor through a fully-integrated grade book that 


• ALEKS (Assessment and Learning in Knowledge Spaces) for College 

Physics is a tremendously successful math tutorial system available with 

this text. The program focuses on only the math operations needed for 

college physics. ALEKS determines students’ current knowledge base, 

identifies where they need help, and then supplies that student with 

additional information and problems, allowing them to master those 

math concepts. This robust course management system is fast, efficient 

and customizable, and is available free to adopters. 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: Introduction PART ONE: MECHANICS Chapter 2: Motion 

Along a Line Chapter 3: Motion in a Plane Chapter 4: Force and Newton’s 

Laws of Motion Chapter 5: Circular Motion Chapter 6: Conservation of 

Energy Chapter 7: Linear Momentum Chapter 8: Torque and Angular 

Momentum Chapter 9: Fluids Chapter 10: Elasticity and Oscillations 

Chapter 11: Waves Chapter 12: Sound PART TWO: THERMAL PHYSICS 

Chapter 13: Temperature and the Ideal Gas Chapter 14: Heat Chapter 

15: Thermodynamics PART THREE: ELECTROMAGNETISM Chapter 

16: Electric Forces and Fields Chapter 17: Electric Potential Chapter 18: 

Electric Current and Circuits Chapter 19: Magnetic Forces and Fields 

Chapter 20: Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 21: Alternating Current 

PART FOUR: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND OPTICS Chapter 22: 

Electromagnetic Waves Chapter 23: Reflection and Refraction of Light 

Chapter 24: Optical Instruments Chapter 25: Interference and Diffraction 

PART FIVE: QUANTUM AND PARTICLE PHYSICS Chapter 26: 

Relativity Chapter 27: Early Quantum Physics and the Photon Chapter 

28: Quantum Physics Chapter 29: Nuclear Physics Chapter 30: Particle 

Physics APPENDICES Appendix A: Mathematics Review A.1 Algebra 

A.2 Solving equations A.3 Exponents and logarithms A.4 Proportions 

and ratios A.5 Geometry A.6 Trigonometry A.7 Approximations A.8 

Vectors Appendix B: Table of Selected Isotopes Answers to Selected 

Questions and Problems 


New 

COLLEGE PHYSICS 

2nd Edition 

By Alan Giambattista, Betty Richardson and Robert C. Richardson of 

Cornell University—Ithaca 

2007 (Dec 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322274-5 / MHID: 0-07-322274-7 



ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110800-3 / MHID: 0-07-110800-9 [IE with Card] 


College Physics, Second Edition is the best solution for today’s 

college physics market. With a unique, new, approach to physics 

that builds a conceptual framework as motivation for the physical 

principles, consistent problem solving coverage strategies, 

stunning art, extensive end-of-chapter material, and superior 

media support, Giambattista, Richardson, and Richardson delivers 

a product that addresses today’s market needs with the 

best tools available. 


• Review & Synthesis: A completely new set of problems and exercises 

has been added to this edition. Eight Review & Synthesis sections 

now appear throughout the text, following groups of related chapters. 

The Review & Synthesis sections contain one set of Review Exercises that 

ask students to combine two or more concepts learned in the previous 

chapters. The second set of exercises, MCAT® Review, include actual 

reading passages and questions written for the MCAT® exam. 

• Real MCAT questions included in the text. 

• Revisions to Problem Sets: Great care was taken by both the authors 

and the contributors to the Second Edition to add more variety to the 

end of chapter problem sets. 

157 


9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM


• Unparalleled Illustration Program: Giambattista offers an incredible 

visual program that combines “showcase” pieces with simpler, diagrammatic 

pieces to aid student understanding. The majority of reviewers of 

the first edition of College Physics felt that the text’s innovative illustrations 

and Showcase figures were an enormous improvement over the artwork 

in most other existing texts. However, reviewers also commented 

that the graphs were very similar in quality to other texts and that some 

of the showcase illustrations were “distracting” and “too large.” Given 

this feedback on the art program, an art panel of experienced instructors 

was assembled. These instructors advised us on the most useful showcase 

illustrations to retain and update for the second edition of College 

Physics. This group also advised us on where to supply additional and 

improved graphs, diagrams, simpler sketches, and free-body diagrams 

to truly enhance the text discussions and examples. 

• Reorganization of chapters 2 through 4: 1. Based on reviewer 

feedback, the introduction of fundamental forces in Chapter 2 was 

simplified. All material involving surface tension, buoyant forces, 

Coulomb’s law, and electric field was removed. / 2. Other reviewer 

feedback included comments that Chapter 2 needed more numerical 

examples and problems and more examples with pictures for free-body 

diagrams. So, the introduction of contact forces, ideal cords, and ideal 

springs was retained in order to have a sufficient variety of examples 

and problems dealing with free-body diagrams and adding forces. / 

3. Some reviewers also felt that the treatment of vector addition and 

subtraction was “too spread out” in the first edition, so Sections 2.4 

and 2.5 now provide a two-dimensional treatment of vector addition 

and subtraction. / 4. In an attempt to make chapter 2 more intuitive 

for students, 1-dimensional statics is followed by 2-dimensional statics 

before introducing kinematics to let students concentrate on each concept 

before progressing to the next. This also allows one dimensional 

motion to be discussed as a special case of two-dimensional motion as 

opposed to treating 1-D motion first, then going to 2-D, which many 

students find difficult. Whereas, by covering 2-D vectors first and then 

interspersing 1-D examples among the 2-D coverage, students seem 

to experience much less difficulty with comprehending the material. 

All sections from 2.4 to 2.9 now include worked examples of adding 

forces to find the net force and examples of equilibrium (net force = 

0), starting very simply and gradually increasing in complexity. Material 

from the previous Section 4.3 is now distributed among these sections. 

/ 5. Finally, some reviewers felt that it would be better not to introduce 

Newton’s second law until after the definition of acceleration. General 

definitions of position, displacement, velocity, and acceleration (using 

vector diagrams in order to avoid common misconceptions that can 

arise when defining them first in 1D) are now presented at the beginning 

of Chapter 3. Examples start with 1D and then progress to 2D 

within each section. 

• Revision of Chapter 6: Chapter 6 has been revised to provide a 

presentation that gives a clearer view of the simplified model and when 

it is applicable, along with providing “caveats” of when the simplified 

model is not applicable. This provides students with varying models 

of problems of energy conservation. Chapter 6 now presents the big 

picture of the simplified model and its exceptions, rather than just a 

repetitious, forbidding list of warnings. 

• Revision of Chapter 15: Chapter 15 has been revised to simplify 

and provide more commonly-used notation. 

• Online Learning Center with ARIS is now available free with each 

textbook adoption. ARIS for College Physics, Second Edition is a complete, 

online tutorial, electronic homework, and course management 

system designed for greater ease of use than any other system available. 

Instructors can create and share course materials and assignments with 

colleagues with a few clicks of a mouse. All PowerPoint lectures, assignments, 

quizzes, tutorials, and interactives are directly tied to textspecific 

materials in College Physics, Second Edition. ARIS courses are 

customized to your textbook, but instructors can also edit questions and 

algorithms, import their own content, and create announcements and 


of easy-to-assign, algorithmically-generated homework, quizzing, and 

testing. All student activity within ARIS is automatically recorded and 

available to the instructor through a fully-integrated grade book that 


Features 

• Flash-based Interactives! These “Interactives” offer a fresh and 

dynamic method to teach the physics basics by providing students 

with applets that are completely accurate and work with real data. 

Interactives allow students to manipulate parameters and gain a better 

understanding of 16 of the more difficult physics topics by watching 

the effect of these manipulations. Each Interactive includes: • Analysis 

Tool (interactive model) • Tutorial describing its function • Content 

describing its principle themes • Related Exercises • Solutions to the 

exercises.exercises. 

• New approach to college physics; Giambattista was developed from 

the notes and experiences of authors sitting next to students in study labs 

explaining physical principles on a daily basis. The authors found that 

students were able to grasp principles much more easily, completely, 

and remember those principles, if they were discussed with-in the 

context of something students were already familiar with and could 

relate to. The “Conceptual Framework” approach was developed and 

all physics concepts are presented to students in such a fashion. 

• Because of the conceptual framework approach, the authors have 

integrated kinematics with forces in chapters 2-4. 

• This presentation uses force as the central theme and presents kinematics 

as a natural extension that is necessary to provide a mathematical 

description of motion that results from a force being applied. This 

prevents the material from becoming compartmentalized and viewed 

as something to memorize instead of understand. This approach allows 

for a gradual exposure to one-dimensional forces, two-dimensional 

and then multi-dimensional forces. Students also benefit from being 

exposed to vectors and their terminology much sooner, allowing them 

to sharpen their skills on simpler situations and then gain confidence 

as they continue through the force chapters. 

• Chapter 8, presents another great example of how the Conceptual 

Framework approach has influenced presentation. Rotational kinetic 

energy is now introduced first since it usually is the easiest of the rotational 

quantities for the student to understand. It also leads in a very 

natural way, to the necessity of rotational inertia. Torque, one of the 

most difficult concepts for many students, is introduced after the student 

already has some understanding of other rotational concepts. 

• Problem Solving Approach: Giambattista/Richardson/Richardson 

employs a consistent approach to the presentation of examples. Every 

example includes strategy, solution, discussion, and practice problem 

(with answer at end-of-chapter). Care is taken to make sure that students 

are equipped with tools to solve problems and that they do not just 

MEMORIZE STEPS to solve that one example problem. 

• Extensive End-of-Chapter Material which includes: 

• Master These Concepts (summary of CONCEPTS as well as the 

integrated equations) 

• Problems--clearly, one of the most closely scrutinized portions of 

any college physics textbook is the end-of-chapter material including 

but not limited to the quality and quantity of problems. The Giambattista/Richardson/Richardson 

problems have consistently reviewed 

very well and have been quadruple checked for accuracy. The various 

problem types are as follows: 

* Conceptual Questions; 

* Multiple Choice Review Questions (with more on the website); 

* Problems by Section (featuring paired problems) 

* Comprehensive Problems; 

* Combination Problems (quantitative and conceptual problems 

combined) 

* Bio/Med application problems 

* Problems paired by concept 

• ALEKS (Assessment and Learning in Knowledge Spaces) for College 

Physics is a tremendously successful math tutorial system available with 

this text. The program focuses on only the math operations needed for 

college physics. ALEKS determines students’ current knowledge base, 

158 


9/29/2006 1:31:26 PM


identifies where they need help, and then supplies that student with 

additional information and problems, allowing them to master those 

math concepts. This robust course management system is fast, efficient 

and customizable, and is available free to adopters. 

Contents 

Chapter 1: Introduction PART ONE: MECHANICS Chapter 2: Force 

Chapter 3: Acceleration and Newton’s Second Law of Motion Chapter 

4: Motion with a Changing Velocity Chapter 5: Circular Motion Chapter 

6: Conservation of Energy Chapter 7: Linear Momentum Chapter 8: 

Torque and Angular Momentum Chapter 9: Fluids Chapter 10: Elasticity 

and Oscillations Chapter 11: Waves Chapter 12: Sound PART TWO: 

THERMAL PHYSICS Chapter 13: Temperature and the Ideal Gas Chapter 

14: Heat Chapter 15: Thermodynamics PART THREE: ELECTROMAG- 

NETISM Chapter 16: Electric Forces and Fields Chapter 17: Electric 

Potential Chapter 18: Electric Current and Circuits Chapter 19: Magnetic 

Forces and Fields Chapter 20: Electromagnetic Induction Chapter 21: 

Alternating Current PART FOUR: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND 

OPTICS Chapter 22: Electromagnetic Waves Chapter 23: Reflection 

and Refraction of Light Chapter 24: Optical Instruments Chapter 25: 

Interference and Diffraction PART FIVE: QUANTUM AND PARTICLE 

PHYSICS Chapter 26: Relativity Chapter 27: Early Quantum Physics and 

the Photon Chapter 28: Quantum Physics Chapter 29: Nuclear Physics 

Chapter 30: Particle Physics APPENDICES Appendix A: Mathematics 

Review Appendix B: Table of Selected Isotopes 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COLLEGE PHYSICS 

10th Edition 

By Frederick J Bueche, University of Dayton-Emeritus and Eugene 

Hecht, Adelphi University 

2006 (Nov 2005) / 448 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144814-7 / MHID: 0-07-144814-4 


An introduction to physics that you don’t need to be a math 

whiz to understand. Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, Tenth 

Edition, is a clear, easily understood review of introductory 

noncalculus-based physics. It is especially helpful if you do not 

have a strong background in mathematics. 

RELATIVITY DEMYSTIFIED 

By David McMahon and Paul Alsing 


ISBn-13: 978-0-07-145545-9 / MHID: 0-07-145545-0 

(A Professional Publicaition) 

In Relativity Demystified a physicist explains Einstein’s theory 

of relativity in layman’s terms, minus heavy-duty discussion or 

formal mathematics. Author David McMahon gradually builds 

up readers’ practical skills to a point where they can eventually 

solve real problems in the field of general relativity. The book 

offers examples that vary in complexity from textbook-like 

problems to real-world situations from actual current research. 

Relativity Demystified also focused on quick definitions and 

demonstrations of procedures needed to solve problems. 

FEATURES 

• Overview of the essentials and formulas of Einstein’s theory 

• “Teach by Example” approach with simple explanations 

• Forcuses on quick definitions and demonstrations of the procedures 

needed to solve problems 

• Key definitions, examples, and results are set off from regular text, 

making the important text easy to access 

• Examples vary in complexity from textbook-like problems to realworld 

situations from actual current research 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: A Quick Review of Special Relativity Chapter 2: Vectors, 

One Forms, and the Metric Chapter 3: More on Tensors Chapter 4: 

Tensor Calculus Chapter 5: Cartan’s Structure Equations Chapter 6: 

The Einstein Field Equations Chapter 7: The Energy-Momentum Tensor 

Chapter 8: Killing Vectors Chapter 9: Null Tetrads and the Petrov 

Classification Chapter 10: The Schwarzchild Solution Chapter 11: 

Black Holes Chapter 12: Cosmology Chapter 13: Gravitational Waves 

FINAL EXAM QUIZ AND EXAM SOLUTIONS REFERENCES AND 

BIBLIOGRAPHY INDEX 

ALEKS PREP FOR PHYSICS 

By Aleks Corporation 

2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293245-4 / MHID: 0-07-293245-7 (Packaged) 


ALEKS: Math Prep for Physics is the solution for students struggling 

with poor math skills in their college physics courses. 

ALEKS works by first identifying what students already know 

and do not know. ALEKS is able to feed students problems and 

new concepts based on what they are ready to learn next as 

opposed to what is next on the syllabus. This allows for students 

to finally master and understand concepts. 

Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics 

4th Edition 

By Arthur Beiser, formerly of New York University 

2004 / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142611-4 / MHID: 0-07-142611-6 


Over the past decade, significant changes in the teaching of applied 

physics have taken place. More emphasis is now placed 

on subjects such as relativity, atomic physics, nuclear physics, 

elementary particle physics, semiconductors, and superconductors. 

Completely updated, Schaum’s Outline of Applied 

Physics, Fourth Edition, devotes more space to these subjects 

and includes a host of new material. 

SCHAUM’S A-Z PHYSICS 

By Michael Chapple 

2003 / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141937-6 / MHID: 0-07-141937-3 




high school seniors--especially AP students--and college freshmen, 

they feature concise, thoroughly cross-referenced definitions 

of hundreds of key terms and phrases that help students 

quickly break through the jargon barrier. Clear explanations of 

key concepts, supplemented with lucid illustrations, help build 

mastery of theory and provide a ready reference to supplement 

class work. Each entry begins with a clear, one-sentence definition 

and is followed by an explanation and examples. 




159 


9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM




aid review 

PHYSICS DEMYSTIFIED 

By Stan Gibilisco 

2003 / 599 pages 

ISBn-13: 978-0-07-138201-4 / MHID: 0-07-138201-1 


CONTENTS 

PART ZERO: A REVIEW OF MATHEMATICS CHAPTER 1 Equations, 

Formulas, and Vectors CHAPTER 2 Scientific Notation CHAPTER 3 

Graphing Schemes CHAPTER 4 Basics of Geometry CHAPTER 5 Logarithms, 

Exponentials, and Trigonometry Test: Part Zero PART ONE: 

CLASSICAL PHYSICS CHAPTER 6 Units and Constants CHAPTER 7 

Mass, Force, and Motion CHAPTER 8 Momentum, Work, Energy, and 

Power Chapter 9: Particles of Matter Chapter 10: Basic States of Matter 

Chapter 11: Temperature, Pressure, and Changes of State Test: Part 

One PART TWO: ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM, AND ELECTRONICS 

Chapter 12: Direct Current Chapter 13: Alternating Current Chapter 

14: Magnetism Chapter 15: More About Alternating Current Chapter 

16: Semiconductors Test: Part Two PART THREE: WAVES, PARTICLES, 

SPACE, AND TIME Chapter 17: Wave Phenomena Chapter 18: Forms 

of Radiation Chapter 19: Optics Chapter 20: Relativity Theory Test: 

Part Three / Final Exam / Answers to Quiz, Test, and Exam Questions / 

Suggested Additional References / Index 

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF COLLEGE PHYSICS 

By J. Bueche, Emeritus University of Dayton, Eugene Hecht, Adelphi 

University and George J. Hademenos 

2000 / 138 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-052711-9 / MHID: 0-07-052711-3 


CONTENTS 

Newtonian Mechanics. / Density, Elasticity, and Fluids. / Heat, Temperature, 

and Thermodynamics. / Waves. / Electricity and Magnetism. 

/ Light and Geometrical Optics. 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING PHYSICS II 

By Alvin Halpern 

1998 / 592 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025707-8 / MHID: 0-07-025707-8 


CONTENTS 

Wave Motion. / Sound. / Coulomb’s Law and Electric Fields. / Electric 

Potential and Capacitance. / Simple Electric Circuits. / Magnetism--Effect 

of the Field. / Magnetism--Source of the Field. / Magnetic Properties of 

Matter. / Induced EMF. / Inductance. / Time Varying Electric Circuits. 

/ Electromagnetic Waves. / Light and Optical Phenomena. / Mirrors, 

Lenses and Optical Instruments. / Interference, Diffraction and Polarization. 

/ Special Relativity. / Particles of Light and Waves of Matter: 

Introduction to Quantum Physics. / Modern Physics: Atomic, Nuclear 

and Solid-State Physics. 


CONTEMPORARY COLLEGE PHYSICS 

2001 Update, 3rd Edition 

By Edwin R Jones and Richard L Childers of University of South 

Carolina 

2001 / 1088 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-241512-4 / MHID: 0-07-241512-6 

(with CD-ROM, Mandatory Package) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118236-2 / MHID: 0-07-118236-5 [IE - Text] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118090-0 / MHID: 0-07-118090-7 

[IE, Mandatory Package] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120491-0 / MHID: 0-07-120491-1 [IE, Updated] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci/physical/jones/ 

CONTENTS 

1 Measurements and Models 2 Motion in One Dimension 3 Motion 

in Two Dimensions 4 Force and Motion 5 Uniform Circular Motion 

6 Work and Energy 7 Momentum 8 Applying the Conservation Laws 

9 Rigid Bodies and Rotational Motion 10 Fluids 11 Thermal Physics 

12 Gas Laws and Kinetic Theory 13 Thermodynamics 14 Periodic 

Motion 15 Waves and Sound 16 Electric Charge and Electric Field 17 

Electric Potential and Capacitance 18 Electric Current and Resistance 

19 Magnetism 20 Electromagnetic Induction 21 Alternating-Current 

Circuits 22 Geometrical Optics 23 Optical Instruments 24 Wave Optics 

25 Relativity 26 Discovery of Atomic Structure 27 Origins of the 

Quantum Theory 28 Quantum Mechanics 29 The Nucleus 30 Lasers 

and Holography 31 Condensed Matter 32 Elementary Particle Physics 

Appendices: A Formulas from Algebra, Geometry, and Trigonometry 

B The International System of Units C Alphabetical List of Elements D 

Answers to Odd Numbered Problems 

PHYSICS FOR THE UTTERLY CONFUSED 

By Robert Oman and Daniel Oman 

1998 / 208 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048262-3 / MHID: 0-07-048262-4 



2624&adkey=W02003 

CONTENTS 

Mathematical Background./ Vectors. / Motion in One Dimension. / Motion 

in Two Dimensions. / Forces. / Unifrom Circular Motion. / Work 

and Energy. / Momentum Analysis. / Rotational Motion. / Rotational 

Dynamics. / Simple Harmonic Motion. / Fluids. / Temperature and Calorimetry. 

/ Kinetics and the Gas Laws. / Thermodynamics. / Mechanical 

Waves. / Sound. / Electric Forces and Electric Fields. / Electric Potential. 

/ Electric Circuits. / Magnetic Forces and Magnetic Fields. / Magnetic 

Forces. / Electromagnetic Induction. / Alternating Current Circuits. / 

Electromagnetic Waves. / Reflection, Refraction and Polarization. / 

Lenses. / The Wave Nature of Light and Interference. / Special Relativity. 

/ Particles and Waves. / The Atom. / Radioactivity. 










160 


9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM

HOW TO SOLVE PHYSICS PROBLEMS AND MAKE 

THE GRADE 

By Robert Oman and Daniel Oman 

1996 / 352 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048166-4 / MHID: 0-07-048166-0 



1660&adkey=W02003 

The purpose of this book is to show you how to do physics 

problems. It is only through applications of concepts to solving 

problems that we can know for certain that we understand something. 

Nowhere is this more true than in a physics course where 

performance is measured almost exclusively by your ability to do 

problems. This book is not a collection of problems. Neither is 

it a text. It is an attempt to strike a balance between theory and 

problem solving with heavy emphasis on the problem solving. 

As such it is intended to complement your course text. 


University Physics 

SIX IDEAS THAT SHAPED PHYSICS 

Unit C – Conservation Laws Constraint Interactions, 

2nd Edition 

By Thomas A. Moore, Pomona College 

2003 / 306 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229152-0/ MHID: 0-07-229152-4 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mooresixideas 

CONTENTS 

C1 Introduction to Interactions C2 Vectors C3 Interactions Transfer 

Momentum C4 Particles and Systems C5 Applying Momentum Conservation 

C6 Introduction to Energy C7 Some Potential Energy Functions 

C8 Force and Energy C9 Rotational Energy C10 Thermal Energy C11 

Energy in Bonds C12 Power, Collisions, and Impacts C13 Angular 

Momentum C14 Conservation of Angular Momentum 


PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS 

6th Edition 

By Frederick Bueche, Emeritus, University of Dayton and David 

Jerde, St. Cloud State 

1995 / 900 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-008986-0 / MHID: 0-07-008986-8 

(Revised Edition) (Out of Print) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113854-3 / MHID: 0-07-113854-4 [IE] 

(Details unavailable) 


Unit E – Electromagnetic Fields, 2nd Edition 


2003 / 384 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239711-6 / MHID: 0-07-239711-X 


CONTENTS 

E1 Electrostatics E2 Electric Fields E3 Electric Potential E4 Conductors E5 

Driving Currents E6 Analyzing Circuits E7 Magnetic Fields E8 Currents 

and Magnets E9 Symmetry and Flux E10 Gauss’s Law E11 Ampere’s Law 

E12 The Electromagnetic Field E13 Maxwell’s Equations E14 Induction 

E15 Introduction to Waves E16 Electromagnetic Waves 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING PHYSICS I 

By Alvin Halpern, City University of New York 

1995 / 471 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025653-8 / MHID: 0-07-025653-5 


CONTENTS 

Introduction and Mathematical Background. / Motion in a Straight Line. 

/ Motion in a Plane./ Forces and Equilibrium. / Newton’s Second Law. / 

Work and Mechanical Energy. / Energy, Power and Simple Machines. 

/ Impulse and Momentum. / Equilibrium for Rigid Bodies. / Rotational 

Motion. / Elasticity and Objects under Stress. / Simple Harmonic Motion. 

/ Fluids at Rest. / Fluids in Motion. / Temperature and Heat. / Thermal 

Energy Transfer. / Gas Laws and Kinetic Theory. / Thermodynamics: 

The First and Second Laws. 


Unit N – Laws of Physics are Universal, 2nd Edition 


2003 / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239712-3 / MHID: 0-07-239712-8 


CONTENTS 

N1 Newton’s Law N2 Vector Calculus N3 Forces from Motion N4 

Motion from Forces N5 Statics N6 Linearly Constrained Motion N7 

Coupled Objects N8 Circularly Constrained Motion N9 Noninertial 

Reference Frames N10 Projectile Motion N11 Oscillatory Motion N12 

Introduction to Orbits N13 Planetary Motion 

3,000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN PHYSICS 

By Alvin Halpern 

1988 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025734-4 / MHID: 0-07-025734-5 



7345&adkey=W02003 

Solved Problem Series -- These books help readers review 

and master what they’ve learned by showing them how to 

solve thousands of relevant problems. Perfect for preparing for 

graduate or professional exams, these detailed reminders of 

problem-solving techniques show readers the best strategies 

for answering even the toughest questions, including the types 

that appear on typical tests. 


Unit Q – Matter Behaves like Waves, 2nd Edition 


2003 / 288 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239713-0 / MHID: 0-07-239713-6 


CONTENTS 

Q1 Standing Waves Q2 The Wave Nature of Light Q3 The Particle 

Nature of Light Q4 The Wave Nature of Matter Q5 The Quantum 

Facts of Life Q6 The Wavefunction Q7 Bound Systems Q8 Spectra 

Q9 Understanding Atoms Q10 The Schrodinger Equation Q11 Energy 

Eigenfunctions Q12 Introduction to Nuclei Q13 Stable and Unstable 

Nuclei Q14 Radioactivity Q15 Nuclear Technology 

161 


9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM



Unit R – Laws of Physics are Frame-Independent, 2nd 

Edition 


2003 / 240 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239714-7 / MHID: 0-07-239714-4 


CONTENTS 

R1 The Principle of Relativity R2 Synchronizing Clocks R3 The Nature 

of Time R4 The Metric Equation R5 Proper Time R6 Coordinate 

Transformations R7 Lorentz Contraction R8 The Cosmic Speed Limit 

R9 Four-Momentum R10 Conservation of Four-Momentum Appendix 

A Conversion of Equations to SI Units Appendix B The Relativistic 

Doppler Effect 


Unit T – Some Processes are Irreversible, 2nd Edition 


2003 / 208 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239715-4 / MHID: 0-07-239715-2 


CONTENTS 

T1 Temperature T2 Ideal Gases T3 Gas Processes T4 Macrostates and 

Microstates T5 The Second Law T6 Temperature and Entropy T7 Some 

Mysteries Resolved T8 Calculating Entropy Changes T9 Heat Engines. 


6 Unit Package, 2nd Edition 


2003 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256482-2 / MHID: 0-07-256482-2 

CONTENTS 

See individual books 

and the Laws of Geometric Optics./ Geometric Optics./ Interference of 

Light Waves./ Diffraction and Polarization./ Special Theory of Relativity./ 

Introduction to Quantum Physics./ Quantum Mechanics./ Atomic 

Physics./ Molecules and Solids./ Nuclear Structure./ Nuclear Physics 

Applications and Elementary Particles. 

Electricity and Magnetism 


BASIC ELECTRONICS FOR SCIENTISTS 

5th Edition 

By Manes J Brophy, formerly of University of Utah 

1990 / 462 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100675-0 / MHID: 0-07-100675-3 [IE] 


ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 

Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2nd Edition 

By Berkeley Physics, University of California -- Berkeley 

1985 / 512 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-004908-6 / MHID: 0-07-004908-4 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-066495-1 / MHID: 0-07-066495-1 [IE] 

The sequence of topics covered include: electrostatics; steady 

currents; magnetic field; electromagnetic induction; and electric 

and magnetic polarization in matter. Taking a nontraditional approach, 

students focus on fundamental questions from different 

frames of reference. Each chapter has figures and problems to 

apply concepts studied. 


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICS FOR 

ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE 

By Michael Browne, University of Idaho 

1999 / 452 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-008498-8 / MHID: 0-07-008498-X 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124112-0 / MHID: 0-07-124112-4 [IE] 


CONTENTS 

Measurements and Vectors./ Motion in One Dimension./ Motion in 

Two Dimensions./ The Laws of Motion./ Circular Motion and Other 

Applications of Newton’s Laws./ Work and Energy./ Potential Energy and 

Conservation of Energy./ Linear Momentum and Collisions./ Rotation 

of a Rigid Body About a Fixed Axis./ Angular Momentum and Torque 

As a Vector Quantities./ Static Equilibrium of a Rigid Body./ Oscillatory 

Motion./ The Law of Universal Gravitation./ Mechanics of Solids and 

Fluids./ Wave Motion./ Sound Waves./ Superposition and Standing 

Waves./ Temperature, Thermal Expansion, and Ideal Gases./ Heat and 

the First Law of Thermodynamics./ The Kinetic Theory of Gases./ Heat 

Engines, Entropy, and the Second Law of Thermodynmics./ Electric 

Fields./ Gauss’ Law./ Electric Potential./ Capacitance and Dielectrics./ 

Current and Resistance./ Direct Current Circuits./ Magnetic Fields./ 

Sources of the Magnetic Field./ Faraday’s Law./ Inductance./ Alternating 

Current Circuits./ Electromagnetic Waves./ The Nature of Light 

Mathematical Physics 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MATHEMATICS FOR 

PHYSICS STUDENTS 

By Robert Steiner, Teachers College at Columbia University and 

Philip Schmidt, State University of New York-New Paltz 

2007(January 2007) / 400 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146158-0 / MHID: 0-07-146158-2 


Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics Students helps 

you to apply mathematical concepts to your studies and shows 

you how these concepts operate in physics problems. The 

book includes both fully solved problems and supplementary 

practice problems. 

162 


9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM



DATA REDUCTION AND ERROR ANALYSIS FOR 

THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES 

3rd Edition 

By Philip Bevington (Deceased) and D. Keith Robinson, Case Western 

Reserve University 

2003 / 336 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247227-1 / MHID: 0-07-247227-8 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119926-1 / MHID: 0-07-119926-8 [IE] 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bevington 

CONTENTS 

1 Uncertainties in Measurements 2 Probability Distributions 3 Error 

Analysis 4 Estimates of Mean and Errors 5 Monte Carlo Techniques 6 

Least-Squares Fit to a Straight Line 7 Least-Squares Fit to a Polynomial 

8 Least-Squares Fit to an Arbitrary Function 9 Fitting Composite Curves 

10 Direct Application of the Maximum-Likelihood Method 11 Testing 

the Fit Appendix A Numerical Methods Appendix B Matrices Appendix 

C Graphs and Tables Appendix D Histograms and Graphs Appendix E 

Computer Routines in Fortran 

Modern Physics 


CONCEPTS OF MODERN PHYSICS 

6th Edition 

By Arthur Beiser 

2003 / 560 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-244848-1 / MHID: 0-07-244848-2 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123460-3 / MHID: 0-07-123460-8 [IE] 

Website: www.mhhe.com/physsci 

CONTENTS 

1 Relativity 2 Particle Properties of Waves 3 Waves Properties of Particles 

4 Atomic Structure 5 Quantum Mechanics 6 Quantum Theory of 

the Hydrogen Atom 7 Many-Electron Atoms 8 Molecules 9 Statistical 

Mechanics 10 The Solid State 11 Nuclear Structure 12 Nuclear Transformations 

13 Elementary Particles Appendix Atomic Masses 



FUNDAMENTALS OF STATISTICAL AND THERMAL 

PHYSICS 

By Frederick Reif, University of California-Berkeley 

1965 / 651 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-051800-1 / MHID: 0-07-051800-9 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085615-8 / MHID: 0-07-085615-X [IE] 

Medical Physics 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PHYSICS FOR PRE-MED, 

BIOLOGY AND ALLIED HEALTH STUDENTS 

By George Hademenos, University of California at Los Angeles 

1998 / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025474-9 / MHID: 0-07-025474-5 


Students of medicine and the life sciences will appreciate the 

special perspective of this invaluable study guide. It explains 

how physics principles and concepts apply in these particular 

fields, including more than 70 drawings and graphs to help 

students visualize, understand and remember the relationships. 

The hundreds of problems solved step-by-step also help boost 

learning and grades by reinforcing the ideas and aiding recall. 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MODERN PHYSICS 

2nd Edition 

By Gautreau 

1999 / 338 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-024830-4 / MHID: 0-07-024830-3 


CONTENTS 

Part I:The Special Theory Of Relativity. 1 The Gaililean Transformations. 

2 The Postulates of Einstien. 3 The Lorentz Coordinates 

Transformations. 4 Relativistic Length Contraction. 5 Realistic Time 

Dilation. 6 Relativistic Space-Time Measurements. 7 Relativistic Velosity 

Transformations. 8 Mass, Energy, and Momentum in Relativity. Part II: 

The Quantum Theory of Electromagnetic Radiation. 9 Electromagnetic 

Radioation - Photons. 10 Matter Waves. Part III: Hydrogenlike Atoms. 

11 The Bohr Atom. 12 Electron Orbital Motion. 13 Electron Spin. Part 

IV: Many-Electron Atoms. 14 The Pauli Exclusion Principle. 15 Many- 

Electron Atoms and the Periodic Table. 16 X-Rays. Part V: Nuclear 

Physics. 17 Properties of Nuclei. 18 Nuclear Models. 19 The Decay 

of Unstable Nuclei. 20 Nuclear Reactions. 21 Particle Physics. Part VI: 

Atomic Systems. 22 Molecules. 23 Kinetic Theory. 24 Distribution 

Functions. 25 Classical Statistics: The Macwell-Boltzmann Distribution. 

27 Quantum-Statistics: Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein Distributions. 

Solids. Appendix. Index. 


PERSPECTIVES OF MODERN PHYSICS 

By Arthur Beiser, New York University 

1984 / 624 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085047-7 / MHID: 0-07-085047-X [IE] 

163 


9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM


Quantum Mechanics 

Technical Physics 

QUANTUM MECHANICS DEMYSTIFIED 

By David McMahon 

2006 (November 2005) / 393 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145546-6 / MHID: 0-07-145546-9 


This clear, concise introduction to quantum mechanics is the 

perfect supplement and complement to the math-heavy texts that 

dominate the field. The author includes hundreds of worked examples 

to illustrate the processes discussed and Dirac’s Method, 

explains how to obtain a desired result in familiar terms rather 

than with confusing terminology and formulas. 

CONTENTS 

PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS / Chapter 1: Historical Review 

Chapter 2: Basic Developments Chapter 3: The Time Independent 

Schrodinger Equation Chapter 4: An Introduction to State Space Chapter 

5: The Mathematical Structure of Quantum Mechanics I Chapter 6: The 

Mathematical Structure of Quantum Mechanics II Chapter 7: The Mathematical 

Structure of Quantum Mechanics III Chapter 8: The Foundations 

of Quantum Mechanics Chapter 9: The Harmonic Oscillator Chapter 

10: Angular Momentum Chapter 11: Spin-1/2 Systems Chapter 12: 

Quantum Mechanics in Three Dimensions / FINAL EXAM / ANSWERS 

TO QUIZ AND EXAM QUESTIONS / REFERENCES / INDEX 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF QUANTUM MECHANICS 

By Elyahu Zaarur, Reuven Pnini and Yoav Peleg of formerly of the 

Technion Institute of Technology, Haifa, Israel 

1998 / 320 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-054018-7 / MHID: 0-07-054018-7 


CONTENTS 

Introduction. / Mathematical Background. / Schrodinger Equation and 

Applications. / Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. / Harmonic Oscillator. 

/ Angular Momentum. / Spin. / Hydrogen-Like Atoms. / Particle 

Motion in an Electromagnetic Field. / Solution Methods in Quantum 

Mechanics. / Part A: Solutions Methods in Quantum Mechanics. / Part 

B: Numerical Methods in Quantum Mechanics. / dentical Particles. 

/ Addition of Angular Momenta. / Scattering Theory. / Semiclassical 

Treatment of Radiation. 


QUANTUM MECHANICS 

3rd Edition 

By Leonard I Schiff 

1968 / 432 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085643-1 / MHID: 0-07-085643-5 [IE] 


New 

PHYSICS 

7th Edition 

By Paul E Tippens 

2007 (Dec 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322270-7 / MHID: 0-07-322270-4 


Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/007301267x 

Physics, Seventh Edition is designed for the non-calculus physics 

course taken by students who are pursuing careers in science 

or engineering technology. Content is built through extensive 

use of examples with detailed solutions designed to develop 

students’ problem-solving skills. 


• Digital Content Manager includes electronic copies of all images 

from the text plus text-specific PowerPoint presentation for each 

chapter. 

• Instructor’s Testing and Resource CD-ROM includes an electronic 

test generator, the testbank in Word and the Instructor’s Manual in 

Word. 

Features 

• “CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLES” in every chapter show the student 

how to develop problem solving strategies. 

• Includes marginal notes that involve “Key Terms”, “Critical Thinking 

Questions”, “Using the Calculator”, “Job Tips”, “Math Revisted”, 

“Internet Connections” plus other areas of interest to today’s student. 

• Comprehensive Instructor’s Management System contains solutions 

to chapter-ending questions and problems; ideas for using the Internet 

in the classroom; answers to Activities Manual experiments; and a new 

CD-ROM with a PowerPoint presentation of key chapter features and a 

comprehensive Windows-based test bank. 

• The activities manual is a combined study guide and experiments 

manual. Each chapter begins with a concise one-page self-test of basic 

concepts. The study guide portion outlines each chapter with workedout 

problems. Each section of the book is described concisely in a brief 

paragraph. Following the study guide material, each Chapter includes 

one experiment. 

Contents 

MECHANICS 1 Introduction 2 Technical Mathematics 3 Technical Measurements 

and Vectors. 4 Translational Equilibrium and Friction 5 Torque 

and Rotational Equilibrium 6 Uniform Acceleration 7 Newton’s Second 

Law 8 Work, Energy, and Power 9 Impulse and Momentum 10 Uniform 

Circular Motion. 11 Rotation of Rigid Bodies 12 Simple Machines 13 

Elasticity 14 Simple Harmonic Motion 15 Fluids THERMODYNAMICS, 

MECHANICAL WAVES, AND SOUND 16 Temperature and Expansion 

17 Quantity of Heat 18 Transfer of Heat 19 Thermal Properties of Matter 

20 Thermodynamics 21 Mechanical Waves 22 Sound ELECTRICITY, 

MAGNETISM, AND OPTICS 23 The Electric Force 24 The Electric 

Field 25 Electric Potential 26 Capacitance 27 Current and Resistance 

28 Direct-Current Circuits 29 Magnetism and the Magnetic Field 30 

Forces and Torques in a Magnetic Field 31 Electromagnetic Induction 32 

Alternating-Current Circuits 33 Light and Illumination 34 Reflection and 

Mirrors 35 Refraction 36 Lenses and Optical Instruments 37 Interference, 

Diffraction, and Polarization MODERN PHYSICS 38 Modern Physics 

and the Atom 39 Nuclear Physics and the Nucleus INDEX 

164 


9/29/2006 1:31:27 PM


Optics 

FUNDAMENTALS OF OPTICS 

4th Edition 

By Francis A Jenkins, deceased and Harvey E White, University of 

California, Berkeley 

1976 / 746 pages 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085346-1 / MHID: 0-07-085346-0 [IE] 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF OPTICS 

By Eugene Hecht, Adelphi University 

1974 / 256 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-027730-4 / MHID: 0-07-027730-3 


CONTENTS 

Wave Motion. / Electromagnetic Waves and Photons. / Reflection and 

Transmission. / Geometrical Optics. / Polarization. / Interference and 

Coherence. / Diffraction. / Fourier Optics 

Introduction to Astronomy 

ASTRONOMY FOR THE UTTERLY CONFUSED 

By Terry Jones, University of Minnesota and Jeanne Hanson 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147158-9 / MHID: 0-07-147158-8 


In this latest installment in the bestselling Utterly Confused series, 

an astronomy professor and a popular science writer team 

up to fill you in on all the essentials of modern astronomy. From 

the solar system and the constellations to space-time, gravity, 

and quantum physics, you’ll go on a fascinating journey through 

the cosmos, becoming acquainted with the most recent astronomical 

phenomena and concepts, and dozens of fun facts. 

CONTENTS 

Ch 1: The Universe in Time and Space Ch 2: The Earth’s Place Ch 3: 

The Sky As Visible From earth Ch 4: Key Concepts and Basic laws Ch 5: 

The Gas Planets Ch 6: The Rocky Planets and Moons Ch 7: The Smaller 

Bodies Ch 8: Brahe, Copernicus, Einstein, and On Ch 9: Down to the 

Atom and Below Ch 10: How They are Studied Ch 11: How Stars Evolve 

Ch 12: How Stars End Their “Lives” Ch 13: Formation and Evolution 

Ch 14: The Role of Dark Matter Ch 15: The Role of Dark Energy Ch 16: 

Expansion, Contraction, Dissolution Ch 17: Space Travel 



New 

pathways TO ASTRONOMY 

with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1) 

By Steven Schneider and Thomas T Arny, University of Mass-Amherst 

2007 (Feb 2006) / 416 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292208-0 / MHID: 0-07-292208-7 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110847-8 / MHID: 0-07-110847-5 [IE] 


Pathways to Astronomy is designed more like a series of minilectures 

instead of a monograph of the entire field of astronomy. 

The same material covered in other introductory astronomy texts 

is included, but this is broken up into smaller self-contained 

units. These units are woven together to flow naturally for the 

person who wants to read the text like a book, but it is also 

possible to assign them in different orders, or skip certain units 

altogether. Professors can customize the units to fit their course 

needs. They can select individual units for exploration in lecture 

while assigning easier units for self-study, or they can cover all 

the units in full depth in a content-rich course. With the short 

length of units, students can easily digest the material covered in 

an individual unit before moving onto the next unit. Pathways to 

Astronomy offers the most complete technology media support 

package available. That technology media package includes: 

Starry Night Planetarium Software free with the purchase of 

every new text, 23 Interactives (on the text website and Digital 

Content Manager CD); Animations (on the text website); Online 

Learning Center (that allows instructors to take their course to 

the web if they choose). Electronic Media Integration has been 

incorporated throughout the text. Interactive and Animation 

icons have been placed in places where additional understanding 

can be gained through an animation or interactive. 

Features 

• Accessible writing style that allows coverage of technically complex 

ideas without confusing students. Tom Arny gives the students a reason 

to read every sentence. 

• Concise introduction to Astronomy. 

• PowerWeb subscription included with each new textbook. 

• Interactive CD-ROM packaged free with the new text! This CD- 

ROM includes animations, video, audio, an image bank, full text search 

engine, links to web sites, and planetarium software. The CD-ROM is 

hybrid, so it’s compatible on both MAC and Windows systems. 

• Comprehensive OLC / Pageout: The web site gives instructors the 

tools they need, and provides study aids and enrichment for students. 

Instructors will have access to sample syllabi and lecture outlines. The 

web site will also include animations, hundreds of images, chapter summaries 

and key terms, web links, scorable practice quizzes, interactive 

tutorials, and much more. 

• “Re-modeling” Sidebar applications. These boxes deal with the 

dynamic nature of scientific models, explaining how new technologies 

and information lead to the evolution and refinement of our theories. 

• “Observational Activities”: Many additional activities are included 

that students can try at home or in class. These are scattered throughout 

the text. 

• Analogy Sketches are included in the margins. 

• Latest Scientific Information! 

Contents 

1 The Night Sky 2 Laws of Light and Motion 3 The Earth 4 The Moon 

5 Telescopes 6 Survey of the Solar System 7 Origin of the Solar System 

8 The Planets 9 Meteors, Asteroids, and Comets 10 The Sun, Our Star 

11 Measuring the Properties of Stars 12 Stellar Evolution 13 The Milky 

Way Galaxy 14 Galaxies 15 Cosmology / Appendix Powers-of-Ten 

Notation 

165 


9/29/2006 1:31:28 PM


New 

PATHWAYS TO ASTRONOMY 

Solar System (Volume 1) with Starry Nights Pro 

CD-ROM 

By Steven Schneider and Thomas Arny of University of Mass-Amherst 

2007 (April 2006) / 474 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327968 8 / MHID: 0-07-327968-4 

CONTENTS 

THE COSMIC LANDSCAPE 1 Our Planetary Neighborhood 2 Beyond 

the Solar System 3 Astronomical Numbers 4 Foundations of Astronomy 

5 The Night Sky 6 The Year 7 The Time of Day 8 Lunar Cycles 9 

Calendars 10 Geometry of the Earth, Sun and Moon 11 Planets: The 

Wandering Stars 12 The Beginnings of Modern Astronomy 13 Observing 

the Sky PROBING MATTER,LIGHT AND INTERACTION 14 

Inertia, Mass and Force 15 Accerleration and Interaction 16 The Law of 

Gravity 17 Measuring a Body’s Mass Using Orbital Motion 18 Escape 

Velocity 19 Tides 20 Conservation Laws 21 Light, Matter and Energy 

22 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 23 Thermal Radiation 24 Atomic 

Spectra 25 The Doppler Shift 26 Detecting Light 27 Collecting Light 

28 Focusing Light 29 Telescope Resolution 30 The Earth’s Atmosphere 

and Space Observations 31 Amateur Astonomy THE SOLAR SYSTEM 

32 Patterns in the Solar System 33 The Origin of the Solar System 34 

Other Planetary Systems 35 The Earth as a Terrestrial Planet 36 Earth’s 

Atmosphere and Hydrosphere 37 Our Moon 38 Mercury 39 Venus 40 

Mars 41 Asteroids 42 Comparative Planetology 43 Jupiter 44 Saturn 

45 Uranus and Neptune 46 Ice Worlds: Moons, Pluto, and Beyond 47 

Comets 48 Impacts on Earth 

New 

PATHWAYS TO ASTRONOMY 

Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) with Starry Nights Pro 

CD-ROM 

By Steven Schneider and Thomas Arny of University of Mass-Amherst 

2007 (April 2006) / 620 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327966-4 / MHID: 0-07-327966-8 

CONTENTS 

THE COSMIC LANDSCAPE 1 Our Planetary Neighborhood 2 Beyond 

the Solar System 3 Astronomical Numbers 4 Foundations of Astronomy 5 

The Night Sky 6 The Year 7 The Time of Day 8 Lunar Cycles 9 Calendars 

10 Geometry of the Earth, Sun and Moon 11 Planets: The Wandering 

Stars 12 The Beginnings of Modern Astronomy 13 Observing the Sky 

PROBING MATTER,LIGHT AND INTERACTION 14 Inertia, Mass and 

Force 15 Accerleration and Interaction 16 The Law of Gravity 17 Measuring 

a Body’s Mass Using Orbital Motion 18 Escape Velocity 19 Tides 20 

Conservation Laws 21 Light, Matter and Energy 22 The Electromagnetic 

Spectrum 23 Thermal Radiation 24 Atomic Spectra 25 The Doppler Shift 

26 Detecting Light 27 Collecting Light 28 Focusing Light 29 Telescope 

Resolution 30 The Earth’s Atmosphere and Space Observations 31 

Amateur Astonomy STARS AND STELLAR EVOLUTION 49 The Sun, 

Our Star 50 The Sun’s Source of Power 51 Solar Activity 52 Surveying 

the Stars 53 Light and Distance 54 The Composition and Temperatures 

of Stars 55 The Sizes of Stars 56 The Masses of Orbiting Stars 57 The 

H-R Diagram 58 Stellar Evolution 59 Star Formation 60 Main-Sequence 

Stars 61 Giant Stars 62 Variable Stars 63 Mass Loss and Death of Low 

Mass Stars 64 Old Age and Death of Massive Stars 65 Star Clusters 66 

Exploding White Dwarfs 67 Neutron Stars 68 Black Holes GALAXIES 

AND THE UNIVERSE 69 Discovering the Milky Way 70 Stars of the 

Milky Way 71 Gas and Dust in the Milky Way 72 Mass and Motions 

in the Milky Way 73 A Universe of Galaxies 74 Types of Galaxies 75 

Galaxy Clustering 76 Active Galaxies 77 Dark Matter 78 Cosmology 79 

Edges of the Universe 80 The Fate of the Universe 81 The Beginnings of 

the Universe 82 Astrobiology 83 The Search for Life Elsewhere 

EXPLORATION 

An Introduction to Astronomy, 4th Edition 

By Thoms T Arny, University of Massachusetts – Amherst 

2006 (Feb 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304080-6 / MHID: 0-07-304080-0 

(with Starry Nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304079-0 / MHID: 0-07-304079-7 

(Case Bound with Starry Nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312589-3 / MHID: 0-07-312589-X 

(Solar System (Vol 1) with Starry nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/arny 

Arny: Explorations-An Introduction to Astronomy, 4th edition, 

is built on the foundation of its well known writing style, accuracy, 

and emphasis on current information. This new edition 

continues to offer the most complete technology/new media 

support package available. That technology/new media package 

includes: 23 Interactives including 17 NEW and 6 originals 

converted from Java to Flash(located on the text website and 

Digital Content Manager CD); Online Learning Center (that allows 

instructors to take their course to the web if they choose); 

and Starry Night Planetarium Software (packaged free with 

each new text). 

CONTENTS 

Preface / Preview: The Cosmic Landscape / Part 1 The Night Sky / 1 

History of Astronomy / Essay 1 Backyard Astronomy / Part 2 Atoms, 

Forces, Light, and How We Learn About the Universe / 2 Gravity and 

Motion / 3 Light and Atoms / 4 Telescopes / Part 3 The Earth and Moon 

/ 5 The Earth / Essay 2 Keeping Time / 6 The Moon / Part 4 The Solar 

System / 7 Survey of the Solar System / 8 The Terrestrial Planets / 9 

The Outer Planets / 10 Meteors, Asteroids, and Comets / Part 5 Stars / 

11 The Sun, Our Star / 12 Measuring the Properties of Stars / 13 Stellar 

Evolution / 14 Stellar Remnants: White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and Black 

Holes / Part 6 The Milky Way and Other Galaxies / 15 The Milky Way 

Galaxy / 16 Galaxies / 17 Cosmology / Essay 3 Life in the Universe / 

Answers to “Test Yourself” / Appendix / Glossary / Index 

ASTRONOMY 

Journey to the Cosmic Frontier, 4th Edition 

By John D. Fix, University of Alabama – Huntsville 

2006 (Jan 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304078-3 / MHID: 0-07-304078-9 

(with Starry Nights Version 3.1 CD-ROM) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312612-8 / MHID: 0-07-312612-8 

(Galaxies (Vol 2) and Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, Chapter 1-6; 

17-27) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312611-1 / MHID: 0-07-312611-X 

(Solar System (Volume 1) and Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, 

Chapter 1-17) 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fix 

This is a text for an introductory astronomy course. One of the 

main goals is to provide a broad enough and deep enough 

background in astronomy so the student will be able to follow 

current developments in astronomy years after they complete 

the course. This book presumes that most of its readers are 

not science majors and that they probably have not had a college-level 

science or mathematics course. The book provides 

a complete description of current astronomical knowledge, 

neither at an extreme technical level nor at a level that fails 

to communicate the quantitative nature of physical science. 

Finally, the historical development of astronomy is emphasized 

to show that astronomy, like other sciences, advances through 

the efforts of many scientists, and to show how present ideas 

have been developed. 

166 


9/29/2006 1:31:28 PM


CONTENTS 

Foreword / Preface / Guided Tour Part 1 The Journey Begins 1 Journey’s 

Start 2 Patterns in the Sky 3 Ancient Astronomy 4 Renaissance 

Astronomy 5 Gravity and Motion 6 Light and Telescopes Part 2 Journey 

Through the Solar System 7 Overview of the Solar System 8 The Earth 

9 The Moon 10 Mercury and Venus 11 Mars 12 Jupiter and Saturn 13 

The Outer Planets 14 Satellites 15 Solar System Debris Part 3 Journey 

to the Stars 16 Basic Properties of Stars 17 The Sun 18 The Formation 

of Stars and Planets 19 The Evolution of Stars 20 White Dwarfs, Neutron 

Stars, and Black Holes 21 Binary Star Systems Part 4 Journey to the 

Cosmic Frontier 22 The Milky Way 23 Galaxies 24 Quasars and Other 

Active Galaxies 25 Galaxy Clusters and the Structure of the Universe 26 

Cosmology Part 5 The Journey in Search of Life 27 Life in the Universe 

/ Appendixes / Glossary / References / Credits / Index 

/ Final Exam / Answers to Quiz, Test, and Exam Questions / Suggested 

Additional Reading and Reference / Index 

McGRAW-HILL DICTIONARY OF ASTRONOMY 

2nd Edition 


2003 / 272 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141047-2 / MHID: 0-07-141047-3 

CONTENTS 



EXPLORATIONS 

Stars, Galaxies, and Planets, Update 

By Thomas T. Arny, University of Massachusetts—Amherst 

2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299699-9 / MHID: 0-07-299699-4 

(with OLC, ESP CD-ROM and Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM) 

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/arny 

The text takes all of the features that have made Arny Explorations 

a top-selling textbook and applies them under a stars-first 

approach. This new edition continues to offer the most complete 

technology/new media support package available. That 

technology/new media package includes: 6 NEW Interactives; 

PowerWeb (web-based research and interactive quizzing--very 

current); Online Learning Center (that allows instructors to take 

their course to the web if they choose); and a new CD-ROM 

that offers new and different text material/animations/links to 

even further enhance student comprehension. 

CONTENTS 

Preview The Cosmic Landscape / 1 History of Astronomy / Essay 1 

Backyard Astronomy /2 Gravity and Motion / 3 Light and Atoms /4 

Telescopes / 5 The Sun, Our Star / 6 Measuring the Properties of Stars / 

7 Stellar Evolution / 8 Stellar Remnants: White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, 

and Black Holes / 9 The Milky Way Galaxy / 10 Galaxies / 11 Cosmology 

/ 12 The Earth / Essay 2 Keeping Time / 13 The Moon / 14 Survey 

of the Solar System / 15 The Terrestrial Planets / 16 The Outer Planets 

/ 17 Meteors, Asteroids, and Comets / Essay 4 Life in the Universe / 

Appendix: Powers-of-Ten Notation / Some Useful Formulas / Solving 

Distance, Velocity, Time (D, v, t) / Problems 

ASTRONOMY DEMYSTIFIED 

By Stan Gibilisco 

2003 / 575 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-138427-8 / MHID: 0-07-138427-8 


CONTENTS 

Preface / Acknowledgments / PART ONE: THE SKY Chapter 1: Coordinating 

the Heavens Chapter 2: Stars Constellations Chapter 3: The 

Sky “Down Under” Chapter 4: The Moon and the Sun Test: Part One 

PART TWO: THE PLANETS Chapter 5: Mercury and Venus Chapter 

6: Mars Chapter 7: The Outer Planets Chapter 8: An Extraterrestrial 

Visitor’s Analysis of Earth Test: Part Two PART THREE: SOLAR SYSTEM 

DYNAMICS Chapter 9: Evolution of the Solar System Chapter 10: Major 

Moons of the Outer Planets Chapter 11: Comets, Asteroids, and Meteors 

Chapter 12: The Search for Extraterrestrial Life Test: Part Three PART 

FOUR: BEYOND OUR SOLAR SYSTEM Chapter 13: Stars and Nebulae 

Chapter 14: Extreme Objects in Our Galaxy Chapter 15: Galaxies and 

Quasars Chapter 16: Special and General Relativity Test: Part Four PART 

FIVE: SPACE OBSERVATION AND TRAVEL Chapter 17: Optics and 

Telescopes Chapter 18: Observing the Invisible Chapter 19: Traveling 

and Living in Space Chapter 20: Your Home Observatory Test: Part Five 

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ASTRONOMY 

By Starcey Palen, University of Washington 

2002 / 304 pages 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136436-2 / MHID: 0-07-136436-6 


Providing a basic introduction to a beginning astronomy course, 

with an emphasis on problem-solving methods ordinarily taught 

“on the fly” or in ad-hoc tutorials, this essential guide provides 

a focused, comprehensive presentation of basic astronomical 

problem-solving techniques. Readers learn by example with the 

help of more than 200 detailed problems supplemented with 

over 100 detailed charts and graphs. 

Stars and Galaxies 

EXPLORATIONS, STARS AND GALAXIES (VOLUME 

2) WITH STARRY NIGHTS 3.1 CD-ROM 

4th Edition 

By Thomas T Arny, University of Mass-Amherst 

2006 (March 2005) 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312586-2 / MHID: 0-07-312586-5 

CONTENTS 

Chapter 1: History of Astronomy Chapter 2: Gravity and Motion Chapter 

3: Light and Atoms Chapter 4: Telescopes Chapter 11: The Sun, Our Star 

Chapter 12: Measuring the Properties of Stars Chapter 13: Stellar Evolution 

Chapter 14: Stellar Remnants: White Dwarfs, Neutron Stars, and 

Black Holes Chapter 15: The Milky Way Galaxy Chapter 16: Galaxies 

Chapter 17 Cosmology Appendix: Powers-of-Ten Notation 

167 


9/29/2006 1:31:28 PM

Accounting 

Dushkin / McGraw-Hill Titles 

C O N T E N T S 


ISBN-13 / MHID AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION YEAR 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351541-0/MHID: 0-07-351541-8 Ramont Annual Editions: Nursing 06/07 2006 

Geography 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294009-1/MHID: 0-07-249008-3 Palka Afghanistan: Regional Geography 2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294010-7/MHID: 0-07-294010-7 Malinowski Iraq: Regional Geography 2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294011-4/MHID: 0-07-294011-5 Palka-Galgano North Korea: Regional Geography 2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351624-0/MHID: 0-07-351624-4 Griffiths Annual Editions: Developing World 07/08 [17e] 2007 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320964-7/MHID: 0-07-320964-3 Griffiths Annual Editions: Developing World 06/07 [16e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-354567-7/MHID: 0-07-354567-8 Pitzl Annual Editions: Geography 06/07 [21e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339728-3/MHID: 0-07-339728-8 Jackson Annual Editions: Global Issues 07/08 [23e] 2008 




ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351606-6/MHID: 0-07-351606-6 Purkitt Annual Editions: World Politics 06/07 [27e] 2007 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310826-1/MHID: 0-07-310826-X Purkitt Annual Editions: World Politics 05/06 [26e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319535-3/MHID: 0-07-319535-9 Edge Global Studies: Africa [11e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284713-0/MHID: 0-07-284713-1 Ramsay Global Studies: Africa [10e] 2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-243371-5/MHID: 0-07-243371-X Ramsay Global Studies: Africa [9e] 2001 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337991-3/MHID: 0-07-337991-3 Ogden Global Studies: China [12e] 2008 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319872-9/MHID: 0-07-319872-2 Ogden Global Studies: China [11e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319874-3/MHID: 0-07-319874-9 Frankland Global Studies: Europe [9e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286259-1/MHID: 0-07-286259-9 Frankland Global Studies: Europe [8e] 2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337971-5/MHID: 0-07-337971-9 Norton Global Studies: India and South Asia [8e] 2008 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319873-6/MHID: 0-07-319873-0 Norton Global Studies: India and South Asia [7e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337990-6/MHID: 0-07-337990-5 Collinwood Global Studies: Japan and the Pacific Rim [9e] 2008 




ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340406-6/MHID: 0-07-340406-3 Goodwin Global Studies: Latin America [12e] 2007 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286382-6/MHID: 0-07-286382-X Goodwin Global Studies: Latin America [11e] 2004 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340405-9/MHID: 0-07-340405-5 Spencer Global Studies: Middle East [11e] 2007 



ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337989-0/MHID: 0-07-337989-1 Goldman Global Studies: Russia, The Eurasian Republics, 2008 

and Central/Eastern Europe [11e] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286381-9/MHID: 0-07-286381-1 Goldman Global Studies: Russia, The Eurasian Republics, 2005 

and Central/Eastern Europe [10e] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340408-0/MHID: 0-07-340408-X Tessema Global Studies: The World at a Glance 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352757-4/MHID: 0-07-352757-2 Allen Student Atlas: World Geography [5e] 2008 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299846-7/MHID: 0-07-299846-6 Allen Student Atlas: World Geography [4e] 2005 

168 

HED 2007 Dushkin Titles.indd 168 

9/29/2006 1:33:25 PM


Geography 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337972-2/MHID: 0-07-337972-7 Allen Student Atlas: World Politics [8e] 2008 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352773-4/MHID: 0-07-352773-4 Allen Student Atlas: World Politics [7e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352746-6/MHID: 0-07-352724-6 Harf Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2007 

Global Issues [4e] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-311163-6/MHID: 0-07-311163-5 Harf Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2005 

Global Issues [3e] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351507-6/MHID: 0-07-351507-8 Moseley Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2007 

African Issues [2e] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284517-4/MHID: 0-07-284517-1 Moseley Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2004 

African Issues 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339720-7/MHID: 0-07-339720-2 Rourke Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2008 

Issues in World Politics [13e] 


Issues in World Politics, Expanded [12e] 





ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351504-5 /MHID: 0-07-351504-3 DeGrave Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2007 

Issues on Latin AMerican Issues 

Geology 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351544-1/MHID: 0-07-351544-2 Allen Annual Editions: Environment 07/08 [26e] 2008 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352831-1/MHID: 0-07-352831-5 Allen Annual Editiosn: Environment 05/06 [24e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303186-6/MHID: 0-07-303186-0 Goldfarb Sources: Notable Selections in Environmental 2000 

Studies [2e] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351442-0/MHID: 0-07-351442-X Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [12e] 2007 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351441-3/MHID: 0-07-351441-1 Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues, Expanded [11e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305140-6/MHID: 0-07-305140-3 Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [11e] 2005 

169 


9/29/2006 1:33:25 PM







ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303186-6/MHID: 0-07-303186-0 Goldfarb Sources: Notable Selections in Environmental 2000 

Studies [2e] 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351442-0/MHID: 0-07-351442-X Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [12e] 2007 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351441-3/MHID: 0-07-351441-1 Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues, Expanded [11e] 2006 

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305140-6/MHID: 0-07-305140-3 Easton Taking Sides: Environmental Issues [11e] 2005 

ISBN013: 978-0-07-252870-1/MHID: 0-07-252870-2 Allen PowerWeb: Environment Science 2003 

Nutrition 


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351545-8/MHID: 0-07-351545-0 Klimis-Zacas Annual Editions: Nutrition 07/08 [19e] 2008 




ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292211-0/MHID: 0-07-292211-7 Nestle-Dixon Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial 2004 

Issues in Food and Nutrition 

170 


9/29/2006 1:33:25 PM

Title Index 

3,000 Solved Problems in Chemistry, Goldberg....................73 

3,000 Solved Problems in Organic Chemistry, Meislich........84 

3,000 Solved Problems in Physics, Halpern........................161 

a 

A&P Animations Collection, McGraw-Hill...........................47 

ACLS Basics and More with Student CD & DVD, 

McKenna..........................................................................53 

AIDS Update 2007, Stine........................................................70 

Aleks Prep for Physics, Aleks Corporation.........................159 

Analysis of Biological Development, 2e, Kalthoff................57 

Anatomy & Physiology, 4e, Saladin.......................................41 

Anatomy & Physiology, 8e, Seeley.........................................41 

Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual, 4e, Wise...........44 

Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Textbook: 

Complete Version, 8e, Benson..........................................45 


Essentials Version, 4e, Gunstream...................................39 


Intermediate Version, CAT, 6e, Benson............................46 


Short Version, 8e, Benson.................................................46 

Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CDS 1-4 Complete 

Series, Medical College of Ohio......................................33 

Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#2-Nervous, 

Medical College of Ohio..................................................33 

Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#3-Cardiovascular, 

Respiratory and Lymphatic Systems, Medical 

College of Ohio................................................................33 

Anatomy & Physiology Revealed CD#4-Digestive, 

Urinary, Reproductive and Endocrine Systems, 

Medical College of Ohio..................................................34 

Anatomy & Physiology Revealed Online, Medical 

College of Ohio................................................................47 

Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated Study Guide, 3e, 

Gunstream........................................................................38 

Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for 

Allied Health, Booth.........................................................21 

Anatomy Revealed: Volume 1, Skeletal and Muscular 

Systems, Medical College of Ohio..................................33 

Animal Behavior, 5e, Drickamer.........................................130 

Animal Diversity, 4e, Hickman............................................141 

Animal Sciences: The Biology, Care and Production of 

Domestic Animals, 4e, Campbell.....................................91 

Astronomy Demystified, Gibilisco.......................................167 

Astronomy for the Utterly Confused, Jones.........................165 

Astronomy: Journey for the Cosmic Frontier, 4e, Fix...........166 

Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 5e, Stone.......................................48 

Atlas to Human Anatomy (An), Strete...................................49 

B 

Basic Concepts in Biochemistry: A Student’s Survival 

Guide, 2e, Gilbert.............................................................82 

Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e, Brophy.........................162 

Basic Histology: Text & Atlas, 11e, Junqueira......................50 

Basic Life Support: Healthcare and Professional 

Rescuers, National Safety Council..................................14 

Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory 

Manual in General Microbiology, Complete Version, 

10e, Brown........................................................................65 

Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory Manual 

in General Microbiology, Short Version, 10e, Brown......66 

Biochemistry: An Introduction, 3e, McKee............................81 

Biocourse.com, Decker.........................................................109 

Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e, Dolphin.............106 

Biology, Brooker..................................................................104 

Biology, 3e, Knox...................................................................99 

Biology, 9e, Mader...............................................................102 

Biology, 8e, Raven................................................................105 

Biology Demystified, Layman...............................................46 

Biology Digitized Video Clips, McGraw-Hill.....................109 

Biology: Dimensions of Life, Presson....................................97 

Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e, Vodopich..........................106 

Biology of Invertebrates, 5e, Pechenik.................................138 

Biology of Viruses, 2e (The), Voyles.......................................57 

Biotechnology Demystified, Walker......................................69 

Biotechnology: DNA to Protein: A Laboratory 

Project in Molecular Biology, Thiel.................................70 

Bringing Fossils to Life: An Introduction to 

Paleobiology, 2e, Prothero.............................................125 

C 

Cardiology Atlas CD-ROM, 2e, Blausen Medical 

Communications..............................................................47 

Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e, Sanderson..............15 


Enforcement Professionals with Student CD, Palin.........51 

Changing Landscapes of Singapore, Teo..............................115 

Chemical Kinetics and Reaction Dynamics, Houston............86 

Chemistry, 9e, Chang..............................................................77 

Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e, Tillery.............................152 

Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e, Tillery.................153 

Chemistry Demystified, Williams...........................................80 

Chemistry: A First Course, 3e, Kroshwitz..............................74 

Chemistry: A World of Choices, 2e, Kelter............................72 

Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to 

Society, 5e, American Chemical Society........................72 

Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and 

Change, 4e, Silberberg.....................................................79 

Chemskill Builder Online, Version 2, 2e, Spain.....................81 

College Physics, 2e, Giambattista.......................................157 

Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrates, 9e, Kent..............140 

Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: Laboratory 

Dissection Guide, 4e, Kardong......................................140 

Computers in the Medical Office with Student Data 

CD-ROM, 5e, Sanderson.................................................15 

Concepts in Biology, 12e, Enger............................................98 

Concepts of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 5e, 

Van De Graaf...................................................................43 

Concepts of Modern Physics, 6e, Beiser...............................163 

Conceptual Introduction Chemistry, Bauer............................73 

Connections in Environmental Science: A Case Study 

Approach, Mayer............................................................137 

Conservation Biology: Foundations, Concepts, 

Applications, Dyke..........................................................132 

Contemporary College Physics: 2001 Update, 3e, Jones.....160 

Contemporary Nutrition, 6e, Wardlaw.................................146 

Contemporary World Regional Geography, 2e, 

Bradshaw........................................................................116 

Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 3e, Cooper...................80 

CPR & AED, 2e, National Safety Council............................16 

171 

Indexes.indd 171 

9/29/2006 1:47:35 PM

Title Index 

D 

Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical 

Sciences, 3e, Bevington..................................................163 

Dictionary of Bioscience, 2e, McGraw-Hill..........................43 

Dictionary of Chemistry, 2e, McGraw-Hill...........................80 

Dictionary of Eath Science, 2e, McGraw-Hill.....................121 

Dictionary of Geology and Mineralogy, 2e, 

McGraw-Hill..................................................................121 

Dictionary of Physics, 3e, McGraw-Hill..............................154 

Digital Zoology Version 2.0 CD-ROM, Houseman.....109, 142 

Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e, Lucas.....................................120 

Discovery Channel Video Series DVD, 

Discovery Channel.........................................................137 

E 

Earth Science: Understanding Environmental 

Systems, Spencer............................................................121 

Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 4e, Molles..................132 

Economic Botany, 3e, Simpson............................................131 

Economics of Resources, Agriculture and Food, 2e, Seitz.....90 

Electricity and Magnetism: Berkeley Physics Course, 

Volume II, 2e, Berkeley Physics....................................162 

Electrocardiography for Health Care Personnel with 

Student CD-ROM, 2e, Booth............................................17 

Emergency Medical Responder: First Responder in 

Action with Student CD-ROM, Student DVD 

and Pocket Guide, Aehlert................................................51 

Environmental Geology, 7e, Montgomery...........................121 

Environmental Science, Kaufmann......................................135 

Environmental Science: A Global Concern, 9e, 

Cunningham..................................................................136 

Environmental Science: A Study of Interrelationships, 

11e, Enger.......................................................................134 

Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 6e, Seeley.................38 

Essentials of Biology, Mader..................................................98 

Essentials of the Living World, 2e, Johnson...........................95 

Evolution of the Earth, 7e, Prothero.....................................123 

Experimental and Applied Physiology Laboratory 

Manual, 8e, Pflanzer.........................................................36 

Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 7e, Shoemaker..............85 

Exploration: An Introduction to Astronomy, 4e, Arny.........166 

Explorations, Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) with 

Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, 4e, Arny............................167 

Explorations: Stars, Galaxies, and Planets, Update, 

Arny................................................................................167 

Exploring the World Ocean, Chamberlin.............................124 

F 

Farm Management, 6e, Kay..............................................89, 90 

Fast & Easy ECGS with DVD, Shade....................................18 

First Aid Taking Action, National Safety Council.................14 

First Aid with Pocket Guide, 2e, National Safety Council....19 

Foodwise 1.2 CD-ROM, 6e, McGraw-Hill..........................147 

Forest Measurements, 5e, Avery.............................................88 

Foundations in Microbiology, 6e, Talaro................................62 

Foundations in Microbiology: Basic Principles, 6e, 

Talaro................................................................................63 

Foundations of General, Organic and Biochemistry, 

Denniston..........................................................................75 

Foundations of Parasitology, 7e, Roberts.............................139 

Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e, Goldberg.............................73 

Fundamentals of Ecology, 2e, Madhab................................133 

Fundamentals of Oceanography, 5e, Sverdrup....................125 

Fundamentals of Optics, 4e, Jenkins....................................165 

Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics, Reif........163 

G 

General Chemistry: The Essential Concepts, 5e, Chang........77 

General Ecology Laboratory Manual, 8e, Cox.....................133 

General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e, Denniston...............75 

General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 14e, Lytle.................143 

General Zoology Laboratory Manual to accompany 

Zoology, 6e, Miller.........................................................143 

Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 2e, Brooker......................60 

Genetics Demystified, Willet..................................................60 

Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e, Hartwell..................58 

GIS Applications in Forestry and Natural Resources, 

Bettinger...........................................................................88 

Good Earth: Introduction to Earth Sciences (The), 

McConnell......................................................................120 

H 

Hands On Chemistry Laboratory Manual, Paradis................81 

Harlow and Harrar’s Textbook of Dendrology, 9e, Hardin....88 

Hole’s Essentials of Human A&P, 9e, Shier...........................39 

Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e, Shier................42 


Response, Campbell...................................................50, 52 

How to Solve Physics Problems and Make the Grade, 

Oman..............................................................................161 

How to Solve Word Problems in Chemistry, Goldberg..........73 

How to Study Science, 4e, Milligan.....................................110 

Human Aging: Biological Perspectives, 2e, Digiovanna........29 

Human Anatomy, McKinley...................................................31 

Human Anatomy, 2e, Saladin.................................................30 

Human Anatomy, 6e, Van De Graaf.......................................31 

Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e, Wise......................32 

Human Anatomy Laboratory Textbook, 7e, Benson...............32 

Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual: 

Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e, Martin.......................................43 

Human Atlas (Formerly Interactive Clinical Resource 

CD-ROM), 2e, Blausen Medical Communications.......47 

Human Biology, 10e, Mader................................................107 

Human Genetics, 7e, Lewis.....................................................57 

Human Geography, 9e, Fellmann.........................................113 

Human Physiology, 10e, Fox..................................................34 

Human Reproductive Biology, 3e, Mader..............................30 

Hyperclinic 2 CD-ROM for Windows, 2e, Tomalty...............65 

I 

Inquiry into Life, 12e, Mader.................................................96 

Insurance Coding and Electronic Claims for the 

Medical Office, Safian......................................................23 

Integrated Principles of Zoology, 13e, Hickman..................142 

Integrated Science, 3e, Tillery..............................................155 

Interactive Laboratory and Biological Simulations, 

Version 2.0, 2e, Raineri..........................101, 104, 107, 109 

Interactive World Issues CD-ROM, Cambridge Studios.....114 

Intravenous Therapy for Health Care Personnel with 

Student CD-ROM, Booth..................................................21 

Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e, Kardong..............137 

172 


9/29/2006 1:47:35 PM

Title Index 

Introduction to Biostatistics, Glover.....................................130 

Introduction to Forest and Renewable Resources, 7e, 

Sharpe...............................................................................88 

Introduction to Genetics, Hyde...............................................59 

Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, 4e 

Chang..............................................................................112 

Introduction to Geography, 12e, Getis..................................114 

Introduction to Hydrogeology, Deming................................123 

Introduction to Limnology, Dodson......................................138 

Introduction to Medical Terminology with Student 

Audio CD-ROM, Besser...................................................28 

Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e, Sverdrup...............124 

Introductory Manual for Applied Botany, Levetin................131 

Introductory Plant Biology, 11e, Stern.................................130 

L 

Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: A Clinical & 

Experimental Approach with PhILS 2.0, 

Lutterschmidt..................................................................36 

Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 9e, Mader...................103 

Lab Manual to accompany Human Anatomy, 6e, 

Van De Graaf...................................................................33 

Lab Manual to accompany Integrated Science, 3e, 

Tillery.............................................................................155 

Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 6e, Jones......128 

Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 7e, Tillery.....153 

Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 5e, Eder...........48 

Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 6e, Harley.................68 

Laboratory Exercises in Organismal and Molecular 

Microbiology, Alexander.................................................68 

Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology: Concepts and 

Clinical Applications, 12e, Fox.........................................35 

Laboratory Manual and Workbook in Microbiology, 

8e, Morello........................................................................68 


General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e, Hendrickson.......76 

Laboratory Manual for Physical Geology, 13e, 

Zumberge.......................................................................128 

Laboratory Manual for Soil Science: Agricultural & 

Environmental Principles, 8e, Thien................................91 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy & 

Physiology, 8e, Wise.........................................................43 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Chemistry in Context: 

Applying Chemistry to Society, 5e, American 

Chemical Society.............................................................72 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts in 

Biology, 12e, Enger........................................................100 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of 

Anatomy and Physiology, 6e, Patton...............................40 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials of 

Biology, Mader...............................................................101 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Essentials of 

Human Anatomy and Physiology, 9e, Martin..................40 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s Human 

Anatomy and Physiology, 11e, Martin............................44 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 

10e, Mader......................................................................108 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Human Biology, 

9e, Mader........................................................................108 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Inquiry Into Life, 

12e, Mader......................................................................100 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory Plant 

Biology, 11e, Stern.........................................................131 

Laboratory Manual to accompany Seeley: Anatomy & 

Physiology, 7e, Wise.........................................................45 

Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e, Hickman.........142 

Laboratory Studies in Earth History, 8e, Brice.....................122 

Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles of 

Zoology, 13e, Hickman..................................................143 

Latin America and the Carribean, 4e, Clawson....................117 

Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 4e, Judson......................24 

Life, 6e, Lewis.......................................................................101 

Living World, 5e (The), Johnson............................................95 

M 

Mader’s Understanding Human Anatomy & 

Physiology, 6e, Longenbaker...........................................37 

Mammalogy: Adaptation, Diversity, and 

Ecology, 2e, Feldhamer.................................................138 

Manual of Mammalogy with Keys to Families 

of the World, 3e, (A), Martin.........................................138 

Map Use and Analysis, 4e, Campbell...................................115 

Marine Biology, 6e, Castro...................................................139 

Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB and 

NCETM with Student CD-ROM, Abbott.........................19 

Mastering ArcGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM, 3e, 

Price................................................................................112 

Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers 

with Student CD-ROM, 2e, Booth....................................20 

McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary, Dumith......26 

McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Astronomy, 2e, 


Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims Process 

Approach Workbook, 3e, Valerius....................................23 

Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008, Newby.....22 

Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for Physician 

Practices 2005 Edition, Newby.........................................23 

Medical Language for Modern Health with Student 

CD-ROM, Allen................................................................25 

Medical Office Procedures with Data Disks and Projects 

CD-ROM, 6e, Becklin......................................................24 

Medical Terminology: A Programmed Approach, 

Bostwick...........................................................................26 

Medical Terminology Essentials with Student & Audio 

CD’s and Flashcards, Thierer...........................................27 

Medical Terminology: Language for Health Care with 

Student and Audio CD’s and Flashcards, 2e, Thierer......28 

Medical Terminology Word Builder and Communications 

Workbook with Flashcards, Thierer.................................27 

Mediaphys Version 3.0: An Introduction to Human 

Physiology, 3e, Stavraky..................................................37 

Meteorology, 2e, Danielson..........................................116, 123 

Microbes in Motion III CD-ROM, 3e, Delisle......................109 

Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e, Nester...................63 

Microbiology: An Organ Systems Approach, Cowan.............64 

Microbiology: Essentials and Applications, 2e, McKane.......65 

Microbiology Experiments: A Health Science Perspective, 

5e, Kleyn...........................................................................67 

Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e, Harley...................................65 

Microscale and Miniscale Organic Chemistry Laboratory 

Experiments, 2e, Schoffstall.............................................84 

Modern Analytical Chemistry, Harvey...................................85 

Molecular Biology, 4e, Weaver..............................................56 

173 


9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM

Title Index 

N 

Natural Disasters, 6e, Abbott................................................122 

New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork 

with Student CD-ROM, Saeger........................................20 

Nutritional Assessment, 4e, Lee............................................149 

Nutrition Almanac, 6e, Dunne..............................................147 

Nutrition Almanac, 5e, Dunne..............................................147 

NutritionCal Plus 2.0 CD-ROM Standalone, 


NutritionCal Plus 2.0 Online Standalone, 6e, 


Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e, Williams..........148 

Nutrition Throughout the Life Cycle, 4e, 

Worthington-Roberts....................................................148 

O 

Organic Chemistry, 7e, Carey.................................................83 

Organic Chemistry, 2e, Smith.................................................84 

Organic Chemistry: A Brief Course, 3e, Atkins.....................82 

Organic Chemistry Demystified, Bloch..................................82 

Orthopedic Atlas CD-ROM, 2e, Blausen Medical 


P 

Paramedic (The), Chapleau....................................................52 

Paramedic Review DVD and CD-ROM, 

Delve Productions, Inc....................................................53 

Paramedic Workbook with Student CD (The), Chapleau......52 

Pathophysiology: Concepts and Applications for 

Health Care Professionals, 3e, Nowak..............................29 

Pathways to Astronomy: Solar System (Volume 1) 

with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM, Schneider.................166 

Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) 

with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM, Schneider.................166 

Pathways to Astronomy: With Starry Nights Pro 

CD-ROM (Version 3.1), Schneider................................165 

Patient Billing with Student CD-ROM and Floppy 

Disk, 5e, Sanderson..........................................................22 

Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, 2e, 

National Safety Council..................................................29 

Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e, Wardlaw................................146 

Perspectives of Modern Physics, Beiser...............................163 

Perthes World Atlas, Klett International ............113, 115, 117 

Petrology: The Study of Igneous, Sedimentary 

and Metamorphic Rocks, 2e, Raymond.........................125 

Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e, Strete..........................110 

Photo Atlas for General Biology, Strete...............................110 

Physical Chemistry, 5e, Levine...............................................85 

Physical Geology, 7e, Carlson..............................................126 

Physical Geology, 11e, Plummer.........................................127 

Physical Science, 7e, Tillery.................................................153 

Physical Universe, 12e (The), Krauskopf............................152 

Physics, Giambattista..........................................................156 

Physics, 7e, Tippens.............................................................164 

Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e, Tillery.......................................154 

Physics Demystified, Gibilisco.............................................160 

Physics for Poets, 5e, March................................................156 

Physics for the Utterly Confused, Oman..............................160 

Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e, Griffith......................156 

Physiology Interactive Laboratory Simulations 2.0, 

2e, Stephens......................................................................37 

Plants and Society, 4e, Levetin.............................................131 

Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide, Shade................18 

Practicing ECGS, Shade.........................................................18 

Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e, Willey..................61 

Principles of Botany, Uno.....................................................131 

Principles of Environmental Science: Inquiry and 

Applications, 4e, Cunningham......................................133 

Principles of General Chemistry, Silberberg..........................78 

Principles of Genetics, 7e, Tamarin.......................................60 

Principles of Physics, 6e, Bueche.........................................161 

Principles of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, Levie..............86 

Process Geomorphology, 4e, Ritter......................................121 

Q 

Quantum Mechanics, 3e, Schiff............................................164 

Quantum Mechanics Demystified, McMahon......................164 

R 

Regional Human Anatomy: A Laboratory Workbook for 

use with Models and Prosections, 3e, Grine....................31 

Relativity Demystified, McMahon.......................................159 

Reproduction Atlas CD-ROM, 2e, Blausen Medical 


S 

Safe Firefighting - First Things First with Student 

DVD, Kidd........................................................................54 

Schaum’s 3000 Solved Problems in Biology, Bernstein......104 

Schaum’s A-Z Biology, Indge...............................................110 

Schaum’s A-Z Chemistry, Hunt..............................................80 

Schaum’s A-Z Physics, Chapple..........................................159 

Schaum’s Easy Outline Beginning Chemistry, Goldberg.......74 

Schaum’s Easy Outline: College Chemistry, Rosenberg........80 

Schaum’s Easy Outline of Biology, Fried............................110 

Schaum’s Easy Outline of College Physics, Bueche............160 

Schaum’s Easy Outline of Human Anatomy and 

Physiology, Van De Graaf................................................49 

Schaum’s Easy Outline: Organic Chemistry, Meislich...........83 

Schaum’s Outline of Analytical Chemistry, Gordus..............86 

Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics, 4e, Beiser.................159 

Schaum’s Outline of Astronomy, Palen................................167 

Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Chemistry, 3e, Goldberg.....72 

Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics II, Halpern............160 

Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics I, Halpern.............161 

Schaum’s Outline of Biochemistry, 2e, Kuchel......................82 

Schaum’s Outline of Biology, 2e, Fried...............................110 

Schaum’s Outline of College Chemistry, 9e, Rosenberg.......78 

Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, 10e, Bueche.............159 

Schaum’s Outline of General, Organic and 

Biological Chemistry, Odian............................................77 

Schaum’s Outline of Genetics, 4e, Elrod................................60 

Schaum’s Outline of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 

2e, Van De Graaf.............................................................49 

Schaum’s Outline of Immunology, Pinchuk...........................57 

Schaum’s Outline of Lagrangian Dynamics, Wells..............154 

Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for Physics 

Students, Steiner.............................................................162 

Schaum’s Outline of Microbiology, Alcamo..........................69 

Schaum’s Outline of Modern Physics, 2e, Gautreau...........163 

Schaum’s Outline of Molecular Biology, Stansfield..............56 

174 


9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM

Title Index 

Schaum’s Outline of Optics, Hecht.......................................165 

Schaum’s Outline of Organic Chemistry, 3e, Hademenos.....83 

Schaum’s Outline of Physical Chemistry, 2e, Metz................85 

Schaum’s Outline of Physical Science, 2e, Beiser................154 

Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Engineering and 

Science, Browne.............................................................162 

Schaum’s Outline of Physics for Pre-Med, Biology 

and Allied Health Students, Hademenos........................163 

Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics, Zaarur..............164 

Silviculture: Concepts and Applications, 2e, Nyland.............88 

Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: 6 Unit Package, 2e, 

Moore..............................................................................162 

Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit C - Conservation 

Laws Constraint Interactions, 2e, Moore........................161 

Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E - Electromagnetic 

Fields, 2e, Moore............................................................161 

Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E - Laws of Physics 

are Universal, 2e, Moore.................................................161 

Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit Q - Matter Behaves 

Like Waves, 2e, Moore...................................................161 

Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit R - Laws of Physics 

are Frame-Independent, 2e, Moore.................................162 

Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit T - Some 

Processes are Irreversible, 2e, Moore.............................162 

Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology Crossword Puzzles 

Specially Prepared for Anatomy & Physiology: 

The Unity of Form and Function, 4e by Ken 

Saladin, Reeder.................................................................48 

Standard First AID, CPR and AED with Pocket 

Guide, 2e, National Safety Council.................................17 

W 

Workbook to accompany Anatomy & Physiology 

Revealed, Broyles.............................................................39 

Z 

Zoology, 7e, Miller...............................................................141 

T 

Taxonomic Wall Chart, 12e, Hickman.................................142 

U 

Understanding Chemistry, Lovett...........................................80 

United States and Canada: The Land and the People, 

2e (The), Getis................................................................117 

V 

Vander’s Human Physiology, 10e, Widmaier.........................35 

Vertebrate Biology, Linzey...................................................140 

Verbebrates: Comparative Anatomy, Function, 

Evolution, 4e, Kardong..................................................140 

Virtual Anatomy Dissection Review CD-ROM Version 

2.0, Waters........................................................................34 

Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology to accompany 

Hole’s Human A&P, 10e (A), McGraw-Hill....................49 

Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology to accompany 

Saladin’s A&P, 3e (A), McGraw-Hill..............................49 

175 


9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM

Author Index 

a 

Abbott: Massage Therapy Review: Passing the NCETMB 

and NCETM with Student CD-ROM................................19 

Abbott: Natural Disasters, 6e...............................................122 

Aehlert: Emergency Medical Responder: First Responder 

in Action with Student CD-ROM, Student DVD 

and Pocket Guide..............................................................51 

Alcamo: Schaum’s Outline of Microbiology..........................69 

Aleks Corporation: Aleks Prep for Physics........................159 

Alexander: Laboratory Exercises in Organismal and 

Molecular Microbiology...................................................68 

Allen: Medical Language for Modern Health with 

Student CD-ROM..............................................................25 

American Chemical Society: Chemistry in Context: 

Applying Chemistry to Society, 5e...................................72 

American Chemical Society: Laboratory Manual to 

accompany Chemistry in Context: Applying 

Chemistry to Society, 5e....................................................72 

Arny: Exploration: An Introduction to Astronomy, 4e.........166 

Arny: Explorations, Stars and Galaxies (Volume 2) 

with Starry Nights 3.1 CD-ROM, 4e...............................167 

Arny: Explorations: Stars, Galaxies, and Planets, 

Update.............................................................................167 

Atkins: Organic Chemistry: A Brief Course, 3e.....................82 

Avery: Forest Measurements, 5e.............................................88 

B 

Bauer: Conceptual Introduction Chemistry............................73 

Becklin: Medical Office Procedures with Data Disks 

and Projects CD-ROM, 6e.................................................24 

Beiser: Concepts of Modern Physics, 6e..............................163 

Beiser: Perspectives of Modern Physics...............................163 

Beiser: Schaum’s Outline of Applied Physics, 4e.................159 

Beiser: Schaum’s Outline of Physical Science, 2e...............154 

Benson: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory 

Textbook: Complete Version, 8e.......................................45 


Textbook: Intermediate Version, CAT, 6e..........................46 


Textbook: Short Version, 8e..............................................46 

Benson: Human Anatomy Laboratory Textbook, 7e..............32 

Berkeley Physics: Electricity and Magnetism: 

Berkeley Physics Course, Volume II, 2e.........................162 

Bernstein: Schaum’s 3000 Solved Problems in Biology......104 

Besser: Introduction to Medical Terminology 

with Student Audio CD-ROM...........................................28 

Bettinger: GIS Applications in Forestry and Natural 

Resources..........................................................................88 

Bevington: Data Reduction and Error Analysis for 

the Physical Sciences, 3e.................................................163 

Blausen Medical Communications: Cardiology 

Atlas CD-ROM, 2e............................................................47 

Blausen Medical Communications: Human Atlas 

(Formerly Interactive Clinical Resource CD-ROM), 2e...47 

Blausen Medical Communications: Orthopedic Atlas 

CD-ROM, 2e.................................................................... 47 

Blausen Medical Communications: Reproduction 

Atlas CD-ROM, 2e............................................................47 

Bloch: Organic Chemistry Demystified..................................82 

Booth: Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology 

for Allied Health................................................................21 

Booth: Electrocardiography for Health Care 

Personnel with Student CD-ROM, 2e...............................17 

Booth: Intravenous Therapy for Health Care 

Personnel with Student CD-ROM.....................................21 

Booth: Math and Dosage Calculations for Medical Careers 

with Student CD-ROM, 2e................................................20 

Bostwick: Medical Terminology: A Programmed 

Approach...........................................................................26 

Bradshaw: Contemporary World Regional Geography, 

2e.....................................................................................116 

Brice: Laboratory Studies in Earth History, 8e.....................122 

Brooker: Biology..................................................................104 

Brooker: Genetics: Analysis and Principles, 2e.....................60 

Brophy: Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e........................162 

Brown: Benson’s Microbiology Applications: 


Complete Version, 10e.......................................................65 

Brown: Benson’s Microbiology Applications: Laboratory 

Manual in General Microbiology, Short Version, 10e.......66 

Browne: Schaum’s Outline of Physics for 

Engineering and Science.................................................162 

Broyles: Workbook to accompany Anatomy & 

Physiology Revealed.........................................................39 

Bueche: Principles of Physics, 6e.........................................161 

Bueche: Schaum’s Easy Outline of College Physics............160 

Bueche: Schaum’s Outline of College Physics, 10e.............159 

C 

Cambridge Studios: Interactive World Issues CD-ROM....114 

Campbell: Animal Sciences: The Biology, Care and 

Production of Domestic Animals, 4e.................................91 

Campbell: Homeland Security and Emergency 

Medical Response.......................................................50, 52 

Campbell: Map Use and Analysis, 4e..................................115 

Carey: Organic Chemistry, 7e................................................83 

Carlson: Physical Geology, 7e.............................................126 

Castro: Marine Biology, 6e..................................................139 

Chamberlin: Exploring the World Ocean............................124 

Chang: Chemistry, 9e.............................................................77 

Chang: General Chemistry: The Essential Concepts, 5e........77 

Chang: Introduction to Geographic Information 

Systems, 4e......................................................................112 

Chapleau: Paramedic (The)....................................................52 

Chapleau: Paramedic Workbook with Student CD (The)......52 

Chapple: Schaum’s A-Z Physics..........................................159 

Clawson: Latin America and the Carribean, 4e....................117 

Cooper: Cooperative Chemistry Lab Manual, 3e...................80 

Cowan: Microbiology: An Organ Systems Approach............64 

Cox: General Ecology Laboratory Manual, 8e.....................133 

Cunningham: Environmental Science: A Global 

Concern, 9e......................................................................136 

Cunningham: Principles of Environmental Science: 

Inquiry and Applications, 4e...........................................133 

D 

Delisle: Microbes in Motion III CD-ROM, 3e......................109 

Delve Productions, Inc: Paramedic Review DVD 

and CD-ROM....................................................................53 

Danielson: Meteorology, 2e..........................................116, 123 

Decker: Biocourse.com........................................................109 

Deming: Introduction to Hydrogeology...............................123 

Denniston: Foundations of General, Organic and 

Biochemistry.....................................................................75 

Denniston: General, Organic and Biochemistry, 5e...............75 

Digiovanna: Human Aging: Biological Perspectives, 2e.......29 

Discovery Channel: Discovery Channel Video 

Series DVD......................................................................137 

Dodson: Introduction to Limnology.....................................138 

176 


9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM

Author Index 

Dolphin: Biological Investigations Lab Manual, 8e.............106 

Drickamer: Animal Behavior, 5e.........................................130 

Dumith: McGraw-Hill Allied Health Medical Dictionary.....26 

Dunne: Nutrition Almanac, 6e..............................................147 

Dunne: Nutrition Almanac, 5e..............................................147 

Dyke: Conservation Biology: Foundations, Concepts, 

Applications....................................................................132 

E 

Eder: Laboratory Atlas of Anatomy & Physiology, 5e...........48 

Elrod: Schaum’s Outline of Genetics, 4e...............................60 

Enger: Concepts in Biology, 12e............................................98 

Enger: Environmental Science: A Study of 

Interrelationships, 11e.....................................................134 

Enger: Laboratory Manual to accompany Concepts 

in Biology, 12e................................................................100 

F 

Feldhamer: Mammalogy: Adaptation, Diversity, 

and Ecology, 2e...............................................................138 

Fellmann: Human Geography, 9e.........................................113 

Fix: Astronomy: Journey for the Cosmic Frontier, 4e..........166 

Fox: Human Physiology, 10e..................................................34 

Fox: Laboratory Guide to Human Physiology: 

Concepts and Clinical Applications, 12e...........................35 

Fried: Schaum’s Easy Outline of Biology............................110 

Fried: Schaum’s Outline of Biology, 2e...............................110 

H 

Hademenos: Schaum’s Outline of Organic Chemistry, 3e.....83 

Hademenos: Schaum’s Outline of Physics for 

Pre-Med, Biology and Allied Health Students................163 

Halpern: 3,000 Solved Problems in Physics........................161 

Halpern: Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics II...........160 

Halpern: Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Physics I...............16 

Hardin: Harlow and Harrar’s Textbook of Dendrology, 9e....88 

Harley: Laboratory Exercises in Microbiology, 6e................68 

Harley: Microbiology Lab Manual, 7e...................................65 

Hartwell: Genetics: From Genes to Genomes, 3e..................58 

Harvey: Modern Analytical Chemistry..................................85 

Hecht: Schaum’s Outline of Optics......................................165 

Hendrickson: Laboratory Manual by Hendrickson to 

accompany General, Organic & Biochemistry, 5e............76 

Hickman: Animal Diversity, 4e............................................141 

Hickman: Integrated Principles of Zoology, 13e.................142 

Hickman: Laboratory Studies in Animal Diversity, 4e........142 

Hickman: Laboratory Studies in Integrated Principles 

of Zoology, 13e...............................................................143 

Hickman: Taxonomic Wall Chart, 12e.................................142 

Houseman: Digital Zoology Version 2.0 CD-ROM.....109, 142 

Houston: Chemical Kinetics and Reaction Dynamics...........86 

Hunt: Schaum’s A-Z Chemistry.............................................80 

Hyde: Introduction to Genetics...............................................59 

I 

Indge: Schaum’s A-Z Biology..............................................110 

G 

Gautreau: Schaum’s Outline of Modern Physics, 2e...........163 

Getis: Introduction to Geography, 12e..................................114 

Getis: United States and Canada: The Land and the 

People, 2e (The)..............................................................117 

Giambattista: College Physics, 2e.......................................157 

Giambattista: Physics..........................................................156 

Gibilisco: Astronomy Demystified.......................................167 

Gibilisco: Physics Demystified.............................................160 

Gilbert: Basic Concepts in Biochemistry: A Student’s 

Survival Guide, 2e.............................................................82 

Glover: Introduction to Biostatistics.....................................130 

Goldberg: 3,000 Solved Problems in Chemistry....................73 

Goldberg: Fundamentals of Chemistry, 5e.............................73 

Goldberg: How to Solve Word Problems in Chemistry.........73 

Goldberg: Schaum’s Easy Outline Beginning Chemistry......74 

Goldberg: Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Chemistry, 3e.....72 

Gordus: Schaum’s Outline of Analytical Chemistry..............86 

Griffith: Physics of Everyday Phenomena, 5e.....................156 

Grine: Regional Human Anatomy: A Laboratory 

Workbook for use with Models and Prosections, 3e.........31 

Gunstream: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory 

Textbook: Essentials Version, 4e.......................................39 

Gunstream: Anatomy & Physiology with Integrated 

Study Guide, 3e.................................................................38 

J 

Jenkins: Fundamentals of Optics, 4e....................................165 

Johnson: Essentials of the Living World, 2e..........................95 

Johnson: Living World, 5e (The)............................................95 

Jones: Astronomy for the Utterly Confused.........................165 

Jones: Contemporary College Physics: 2001 Update, 3e.....160 

Jones: Lab Manual to accompany Physical Geology, 6e......128 

Judson: Law & Ethics for Medical Careers, 4e......................24 

Junqueira: Basic Histology: Text & Atlas, 11e.....................50 

K 

Kalthoff: Analysis of Biological Development, 2e................57 

Kardong: Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy: 

Laboratory Dissection Guide, 4e.....................................140 

Kardong: Introduction to Biological Evolution, 2e.............137 

Kardong: Verbebrates: Comparative Anatomy, 

Function, Evolution, 4e...................................................140 

Kay: Farm Management, 6e..............................................89, 90 

Kaufmann: Environmental Science.....................................135 

Kelter: Chemistry: A World of Choices, 2e............................72 

Kent: Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrates, 9e.............140 

Kidd: Safe Firefighting - First Things First with 

Student DVD.....................................................................54 

Klett International: Perthes World Atlas.............113, 115, 117 

Kleyn: Microbiology Experiments: A Health Science 

Perspective, 5e...................................................................67 

Knox: Biology, 3e...................................................................99 

Krauskopf: Physical Universe, 12e (The)............................152 

Kroshwitz: Chemistry: A First Course, 3e.............................74 

Kuchel: Schaum’s Outline of Biochemistry, 2e......................82 

177 


9/29/2006 1:47:36 PM

Author Index 

L 

Layman: Biology Demystified...............................................46 

Lee: Nutritional Assessment, 4e............................................149 

Levetin: Introductory Manual for Applied Botany...............131 

Levetin: Plants and Society, 4e.............................................131 

Levie: Principles of Quantitative Chemical Analysis.............86 

Levine: Physical Chemistry, 5e...............................................85 

Lewis: Human Genetics, 7e....................................................57 

Lewis: Life, 6e......................................................................101 

Linzey: Vertebrate Biology...................................................140 

Longenbaker: Mader’s Understanding Human 

Anatomy & Physiology, 6e...............................................37 

Lovett: Understanding Chemistry...........................................80 

Lucas: Dinosaurs: The Textbook, 5e....................................120 

Lutterschmidt: Lab Exercises in Human Physiology: 

A Clinical & Experimental Approach with PhILS 2.0......36 

Lytle: General Zoology Laboratory Manual, 14e.................143 

M 

Mader: Biology, 9e...............................................................102 

Mader: Essentials of Biology.................................................98 

Mader: Human Biology, 10e................................................107 

Mader: Human Reproductive Biology, 3e..............................30 

Mader: Inquiry into Life, 12e.................................................96 

Mader: Lab Manual to accompany Biology, 9e...................103 

Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials 

of Biology........................................................................101 

Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Human 

Biology, 10e....................................................................108 

Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Human 

Biology, 9e......................................................................108 

Mader: Laboratory Manual to accompany Inquiry 

Into Life, 12e...................................................................100 

Madhab: Fundamentals of Ecology, 2e................................133 

March: Physics for Poets, 5e................................................156 

Martin: Human Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory 

Manual: Fetal Pig Dissection, 3e.......................................43 

Martin: Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s 

Essentials of Human Anatomy and Physiology, 9e...........40 

Martin: Laboratory Manual to accompany Hole’s 

Human Anatomy and Physiology, 11e..............................44 

Martin: Manual of Mammalogy with Keys to 

Families of the World, 3e, (A).........................................138 

Mayer: Connections in Environmental Science: 

A Case Study Approach..................................................137 

McConnell: Good Earth: Introduction to Earth 

Sciences (The).................................................................120 

McGraw-Hill: A&P Animations Collection..........................47 

McGraw-Hill: Biology Digitized Video Clips.....................109 

McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Bioscience, 2e..........................43 

McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Chemistry, 2e...........................80 

McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Eath Science, 2e.....................121 

McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Geology and 

Mineralogy, 2e.................................................................121 

McGraw-Hill: Dictionary of Physics, 3e.............................154 

McGraw-Hill: Foodwise 1.2 CD-ROM, 6e..........................147 

McGraw-Hill: McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Astronomy, 

2e.....................................................................................167 

McGraw-Hill: NutritionCal Plus 2.0 CD-ROM 

Standalone.......................................................................148 

McGraw-Hill: NutritionCal Plus 2.0 Online 

Standalone, 6e.................................................................148 

McGraw-Hill: Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology 

to accompany Hole’s Human A&P, 10e (A)......................49 

McGraw-Hill: Visual Atlas for Anatomy & Physiology 

to accompany Saladin’s A&P, 3e (A)................................49 

McKane: Microbiology: Essentials and Applications, 2e......65 

McKee: Biochemistry: An Introduction, 3e............................81 

McKenna: ACLS Basics and More with Student 

CD & DVD........................................................................53 

McMahon: Quantum Mechanics Demystified.....................164 

McMahon: Relativity Demystified.......................................159 

Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy & Physiology 

Revealed CDS 1-4 Complete Series..................................33 


Revealed CD#2-Nervous...................................................33 


Revealed CD#3-Cardiovascular, Respiratory 

and Lymphatic Systems.....................................................33 


Revealed CD#4-Digestive, Urinary, Reproductive 

and Endocrine Systems.....................................................34 


Revealed Online................................................................47 

Medical College of Ohio: Anatomy Revealed: 

Volume 1, Skeletal and Muscular Systems.......................33 

Meislich: 3,000 Solved Problems in Organic Chemistry........84 

Meislich: Schaum’s Easy Outline: Organic Chemistry..........83 

Metz: Schaum’s Outline of Physical Chemistry, 2e...............85 

McKinley: Human Anatomy..................................................31 

Miller: General Zoology Laboratory Manual to 

accompany Zoology, 6e...................................................143 

Miller: Zoology, 7e...............................................................141 

Milligan: How to Study Science, 4e.....................................110 

Molles: Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 4e.................132 

Montgomery: Environmental Geology, 7e...........................121 

Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: 6 Unit 

Package, 2e......................................................................162 

Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit C - 

Conservation Laws Constraint Interactions, 2e...............161 

Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E - 

Electromagnetic Fields, 2e..............................................161 

Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit E - 

Laws of Physics are Universal, 2e...................................161 

Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit Q - 

Matter Behaves Like Waves, 2e......................................161 

Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit R - 

Laws of Physics are Frame-Independent, 2e...................162 

Moore: Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Unit T - 

Some Processes are Irreversible, 2e................................162 

Morello: Laboratory Manual and Workbook in 

Microbiology, 8e...............................................................68 

N 

National Safety Council: Basic Life Support: 

Healthcare and Professional Rescuers...............................14 

National Safety Council: CPR & AED, 2e............................16 

National Safety Council: First Aid Taking Action................14 

National Safety Council: First Aid with Pocket 

Guide, 2e...........................................................................19 

National Safety Council: Pediatric First Aid, CPR 

and AED, 2e......................................................................29 

National Safety Council: Standard First AID, 

CPR and AED with Pocket Guide, 2e...............................17 

Nester: Microbiology: A Human Perspective, 5e...................63 

Newby: Medical Insurance Coding Workbook 2007-2008.....22 

Newby: Medical Insurance Coding Workbook for 

Physician Practices 2005 Edition......................................23 

Nowak: Pathophysiology: Concepts and Applications 

for Health Care Professionals, 3e......................................29 

Nyland: Silviculture: Concepts and Applications, 2e.............88 

178 


9/29/2006 1:47:37 PM

Author Index 

O 

Odian: Schaum’s Outline of General, Organic 

and Biological Chemistry..................................................77 

Oman: How to Solve Physics Problems and Make 

the Grade.........................................................................161 

Oman: Physics for the Utterly Confused..............................160 

P 

Palen: Schaum’s Outline of Astronomy................................167 

Palin: Catastrophe Preparation and Prevention for 

Law Enforcement Professionals with Student CD............51 

Paradis: Hands On Chemistry Laboratory Manual................81 

Patton: Laboratory Manual to accompany Essentials 

of Anatomy and Physiology, 6e.........................................40 

Pechenik: Biology of Invertebrates, 5e.................................138 

Pflanzer: Experimental and Applied Physiology 

Laboratory Manual, 8e......................................................36 

Pinchuk: Schaum’s Outline of Immunology..........................57 

Plummer: Physical Geology, 11e.........................................127 

Presson: Biology: Dimensions of Life...................................97 

Price: Mastering ArcGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM, 

3e.....................................................................................112 

Prothero: Bringing Fossils to Life: An Introduction 

to Paleobiology, 2e..........................................................125 

Prothero: Evolution of the Earth, 7e....................................123 

R 

Raineri: Interactive Laboratory and Biological 

Simulations, Version 2.0, 2e....................101, 104, 107, 109 

Raven: Biology, 8e................................................................105 

Raymond: Petrology: The Study of Igneous, 

Sedimentary and Metamorphic Rocks, 2e...................... 125 

Reeder: Solve Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology 

Crossword Puzzles Specially Prepared for Anatomy 

& Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 

4e by Ken Saladin..............................................................48 

Reif: Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics........163 

Ritter: Process Geomorphology, 4e......................................121 

Roberts: Foundations of Parasitology, 7e.............................139 

Rosenberg: Schaum’s Easy Outline: College Chemistry.......80 

Rosenberg: Schaum’s Outline of College Chemistry, 9e.......78 

S 

Saeger: New Foundations in Therapeutic Massage and 

Bodywork with Student CD-ROM....................................20 

Safian: Insurance Coding and Electronic Claims 

for the Medical Office.......................................................23 

Saladin: Anatomy & Physiology, 4e......................................41 

Saladin: Human Anatomy, 2e...................................................3 

Sanderson: Case Studies for the Medical Office, 4e..............15 

Sanderson: Computers in the Medical Office with 

Student Data CD-ROM, 5e...............................................15 

Sanderson: Patient Billing with Student CD-ROM 

and Floppy Disk, 5e..........................................................22 

Schiff: Quantum Mechanics, 3e............................................164 

Schneider: Pathways to Astronomy: Solar System 

(Volume 1) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM.................166 

Schneider: Pathways to Astronomy: Stars and Galaxies 

(Volume 2) with Starry Nights Pro CD-ROM.................166 

Schneider: Pathways to Astronomy: With Starry 

Nights Pro CD-ROM (Version 3.1).................................165 

Schoffstall: Microscale and Miniscale Organic 

Chemistry Laboratory Experiments, 2e............................84 

Seeley: Anatomy & Physiology, 8e.........................................41 

Seeley: Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 6e.................38 

Seitz: Economics of Resources, Agriculture and Food, 

2e.......................................................................................90 

Shade: Fast & Easy ECGS with DVD....................................18 

Shade: Pocket ECGS: A Quick Information Guide................18 

Shade: Practicing ECGS.........................................................18 

Sharpe: Introduction to Forest and Renewable 

Resources, 7e.....................................................................88 

Shier: Hole’s Essentials of Human A&P, 9e...........................39 

Shier: Hole’s Human Anatomy & Physiology, 11e................42 

Shoemaker: Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 7e.............85 

Silberberg: Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of 

Matter and Change, 4e......................................................79 

Silberberg: Principles of General Chemistry.........................78 

Simpson: Economic Botany, 3e............................................131 

Smith: Organic Chemistry, 2e.................................................84 

Spain: Chemskill Builder Online, Version 2, 2e.....................81 

Spencer: Earth Science: Understanding 

Environmental Systems...................................................121 

Stansfield: Schaum’s Outline of Molecular Biology..............56 

Stavraky: Mediaphys Version 3.0: An Introduction 

to Human Physiology, 3e..................................................37 

Steiner: Schaum’s Outline of Mathematics for 

Physics Students..............................................................162 

Stephens: Physiology Interactive Laboratory 

Simulations 2.0, 2e............................................................37 

Stern: Introductory Plant Biology, 11e.................................130 

Stern: Laboratory Manual to accompany Introductory 

Plant Biology, 11e...........................................................131 

Stine: AIDS Update 2007.......................................................70 

Stone: Atlas of Skeletal Muscles, 5e......................................48 

Strete: Atlas to Human Anatomy (An)...................................49 

Strete: Photo Atlas for General Biology, 2e.........................110 

Strete: Photo Atlas for General Biology...............................110 

Sverdrup: Fundamentals of Oceanography, 5e....................125 

Sverdrup: Introduction to the World’s Oceans, 9e...............124 

T 

Talaro: Foundations in Microbiology, 6e...............................62 

Talaro: Foundations in Microbiology: Basic 

Principles, 6e.....................................................................63 

Tamarin: Principles of Genetics, 7e.......................................60 

Teo: Changing Landscapes of Singapore..............................115 

Thiel: Biotechnology: DNA to Protein: A Laboratory 

Project in Molecular Biology............................................70 

Thien: Laboratory Manual for Soil Science: 

Agricultural & Environmental Principles, 8e....................91 

Thierer: Medical Terminology Essentials with 

Student & Audio CD’s and Flashcards..............................27 

Thierer: Medical Terminology: Language for Health 

Care with Student and Audio CD’s and Flashcards, 2e.....28 

Thierer: Medical Terminology Word Builder and 

Communications Workbook with Flashcards....................27 

Tillery: Chemistry (Chapters 1, 8-13), 7e.............................152 

Tillery: Chemistry and Physics Split Prepack, 7e................153 

Tillery: Integrated Science, 3e..............................................155 

Tillery: Lab Manual to accompany Integrated 

Science, 3e.......................................................................155 

Tillery: Lab Manual to accompany Physical Science, 7e.....153 

Tillery: Physical Science, 7e.................................................153 

Tillery: Physics (Chapters 1-7), 7e.......................................154 

Tippens: Physics, 7e.............................................................164 

Tomalty: Hyperclinic 2 CD-ROM for Windows, 2e...............65 

179 


9/29/2006 1:47:37 PM

Author Index 

U 

Uno: Principles of Botany.....................................................131 

V 

Valerius: Medical Insurance: An Integrated Claims 

Process Approach Workbook, 3e.......................................23 

Van De Graaf: Concepts of Human Anatomy and 

Physiology, 5e...................................................................43 

Van De Graaf: Human Anatomy, 6e......................................31 

Van De Graaf: Lab Manual to accompany Human 

Anatomy, 6e......................................................................33 

Van De Graaf: Schaum’s Easy Outline of Human 

Anatomy and Physiology..................................................49 

Van De Graaf: Schaum’s Outline of Human 

Anatomy and Physiology, 2e.............................................49 

Vodopich: Biology Laboratory Manual, 8e..........................106 

Voyles: Biology of Viruses, 2e (The)......................................57 

W 

Walker: Biotechnology Demystified......................................69 

Wardlaw: Contemporary Nutrition, 6e................................146 

Wardlaw: Perspectives in Nutrition, 7e................................146 

Waters: Virtual Anatomy Dissection Review 

CD-ROM Version 2.0........................................................34 

Weaver: Molecular Biology, 4e..............................................56 

Wells: Schaum’s Outline of Lagrangian Dynamics..............154 

Widmaier: Vander’s Human Physiology, 10e........................35 

Willet: Genetics Demystified..................................................60 

Willey: Prescott/Harley/Klein’s Microbiology, 7e..................61 

Williams: Chemistry Demystified..........................................80 

Williams: Nutrition for Health, Fitness and Sport, 8e..........148 

Wise: Anatomy & Physiology Laboratory Manual, 4e...........44 

Wise: Human Anatomy Laboratory Manual, 2e.....................32 

Wise: Laboratory Manual to accompany Anatomy 

& Physiology, 8e...............................................................43 

Wise: Laboratory Manual to accompany Seeley: 

Anatomy & Physiology, 7e...............................................45 

Worthington-Roberts: Nutrition Throughout the 

Life Cycle, 4e..................................................................148 

Z 

Zaarur: Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics.............164 

Zumberge: Laboratory Manual for Physical 

Geology, 13e....................................................................128 

180 


9/29/2006 1:47:37 PM

Applied Biology - McGraw-Hill Books

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?